RTN 980 Hardware Description PDF

OptiX RTN 980 Radio Transmission System V100R003C00
IDU Hardware Description

Issue Date 03 2011-04-10
HUAWEI TECHNOLOGIES CO., LTD.
Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 2011. All rights reserved. No part of this document may be reproduced or transmitted in any form or by any means without prior written consent of Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
Trademarks and Permissions

and other Huawei trademarks are trademarks of Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. All other trademarks and trade names mentioned in this document are the property of their respective holders.
Notice
The purchased products, services and features are stipulated by the contract made between Huawei and the customer. All or part of the products, services and features described in this document may not be within the purchase scope or the usage scope. Unless otherwise specified in the contract, all statements, information, and recommendations in this document are provided "AS IS" without warranties, guarantees or representations of any kind, either express or implied. The information in this document is subject to change without notice. Every effort has been made in the preparation of this document to ensure accuracy of the contents, but all statements, information, and recommendations in this document do not constitute the warranty of any kind, express or implied.
Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

Address: Huawei Industrial Base Bantian, Longgang Shenzhen 518129 People's Republic of China http://www.huawei.com support@huawei.com
Website: Email:
Issue 03 (2011-04-10)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
OptiX RTN 980 Radio Transmission System IDU Hardware Description
About This Document
About This Document

Related Versions
The following table lists the product versions related to this document. Product Name OptiX RTN 980 iManager U2000 Version V100R003C00 V100R003C00
Intended Audience
This document is intended for: l l l l l l Network planning engineer Hardware installation engineer Installation and commissioning engineer Field maintenance engineer Data configuration engineer System maintenance engineer
Before reading this document, you need to be familiar with the following: l l Basics of digital microwave communication Basics of the OptiX RTN 980
Symbol Conventions
The symbols that may be found in this document are defined as follows. Symbol Description Indicates a hazard with a high level of risk, which if not avoided, will result in death or serious injury.
Issue 03 (2011-04-10) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. iii
About This Document
Symbol
Description Indicates a hazard with a medium or low level of risk, which if not avoided, could result in minor or moderate injury. Indicates a potentially hazardous situation, which if not avoided, could result in equipment damage, data loss, performance degradation, or unexpected results. Indicates a tip that may help you solve a problem or save time. Provides additional information to emphasize or supplement important points of the main text.
General Conventions
The general conventions that may be found in this document are defined as follows. Convention Times New Roman Boldface Italic Courier New Description Normal paragraphs are in Times New Roman. Names of files, directories, folders, and users are in boldface. For example, log in as user root. Book titles are in italics. Examples of information displayed on the screen are in Courier New.
Command Conventions
The command conventions that may be found in this document are defined as follows. Convention Boldface Italic [] { x | y | ... } Description The keywords of a command line are in boldface. Command arguments are in italics. Items (keywords or arguments) in brackets [ ] are optional. Optional items are grouped in braces and separated by vertical bars. One item is selected.
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. Issue 03 (2011-04-10)
iv
About This Document
Convention [ x | y | ... ] { x | y | ... }*
Description Optional items are grouped in brackets and separated by vertical bars. One item is selected or no item is selected. Optional items are grouped in braces and separated by vertical bars. A minimum of one item or a maximum of all items can be selected. Optional items are grouped in brackets and separated by vertical bars. Several items or no item can be selected.
[ x | y | ... ]*
GUI Conventions
The GUI conventions that may be found in this document are defined as follows. Convention Boldface > Description Buttons, menus, parameters, tabs, window, and dialog titles are in boldface. For example, click OK. Multi-level menus are in boldface and separated by the ">" signs. For example, choose File > Create > Folder.
Update History
Updates between document issues are cumulative. Thus, the latest document issue contains all updates made in previous issues.
Updates in Issue 03 (2011-04-10) Based on Product Version V100R003C00

This document is the third issue for the V100R003C00 product version. Compared with the second issue, the content updates are as follows. Section Entire document Entire document 3.3.4 Front Panel Description Unified the expression structure of dimensions. Modified the description of the PROG indicator. Corrected the mistake in the front panel diagram.
Issue 03 (2011-04-10)
About This Document

This document is the second issue for the V100R003C00 product version. Compared with the first issue, the content updates are as follows. Section 4.2 PDU D Weight and Power Consumption of Each Board Entire document Entire document Description Added the descriptions of the PDU. Updated power consumption values of specific boards. Optimized the descriptions of working principles for IF boards. Fixed known bugs.

This document is the first issue for the V100R003C00 version.
vi
Issue 03 (2011-04-10)
Contents
Contents
About This Document...................................................................................................................iii 1 Introduction.................................................................................................................................1-1
1.1 Network Application.......................................................................................................................................1-2 1.2 Components.....................................................................................................................................................1-3 1.3 Radio Link Forms............................................................................................................................................1-7
2 Chassis..........................................................................................................................................2-1
2.1 Chassis Structure.............................................................................................................................................2-2 2.2 Installation Mode.............................................................................................................................................2-2 2.3 Air Flow..........................................................................................................................................................2-3 2.4 IDU Labels......................................................................................................................................................2-3
3 Boards...........................................................................................................................................3-1
3.1 Board Appearance...........................................................................................................................................3-3 3.2 Board List........................................................................................................................................................3-4 3.3 CSHN..............................................................................................................................................................3-7 3.3.1 Version Description................................................................................................................................3-8 3.3.2 Functions and Features...........................................................................................................................3-8 3.3.3 Working Principle................................................................................................................................3-14 3.3.4 Front Panel...........................................................................................................................................3-18 3.3.5 DIP Switches and CF Card...................................................................................................................3-27 3.3.6 Valid Slots............................................................................................................................................3-29 3.3.7 Types of SFP Modules.........................................................................................................................3-30 3.3.8 Board Parameter Settings.....................................................................................................................3-31 3.3.9 Technical Specifications......................................................................................................................3-32 3.4 IF1.................................................................................................................................................................3-35 3.4.1 Version Description..............................................................................................................................3-35 3.4.2 Functions and Features.........................................................................................................................3-36 3.4.3 Working Principle and Signal Flow.....................................................................................................3-37 3.4.4 Front Panel...........................................................................................................................................3-42 3.4.5 Valid Slots............................................................................................................................................3-44 3.4.6 Board Parameter Settings.....................................................................................................................3-45 3.4.7 Technical Specifications......................................................................................................................3-46 3.5 IFU2..............................................................................................................................................................3-47 Issue 03 (2011-04-10) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. vii
Contents
OptiX RTN 980 Radio Transmission System IDU Hardware Description 3.5.1 Version Description..............................................................................................................................3-48 3.5.2 Functions and Features.........................................................................................................................3-48 3.5.3 Working Principle and Signal Flow.....................................................................................................3-51 3.5.4 Front Panel...........................................................................................................................................3-54 3.5.5 Valid Slots............................................................................................................................................3-56 3.5.6 Board Parameter Settings.....................................................................................................................3-57 3.5.7 Technical Specifications......................................................................................................................3-58
3.6 IFX2..............................................................................................................................................................3-60 3.6.1 Version Description..............................................................................................................................3-61 3.6.2 Functions and Features.........................................................................................................................3-61 3.6.3 Working Principle and Signal Flow.....................................................................................................3-63 3.6.4 Front Panel...........................................................................................................................................3-67 3.6.5 Valid Slots............................................................................................................................................3-69 3.6.6 Board Parameter Settings.....................................................................................................................3-71 3.6.7 Technical Specifications......................................................................................................................3-72 3.7 ISU2..............................................................................................................................................................3-74 3.7.1 Version Description..............................................................................................................................3-74 3.7.2 Functions and Features.........................................................................................................................3-74 3.7.3 Working Principle and Signal Flow.....................................................................................................3-77 3.7.4 Front Panel...........................................................................................................................................3-81 3.7.5 Valid Slots............................................................................................................................................3-83 3.7.6 Board Parameter Settings.....................................................................................................................3-84 3.7.7 Technical Specifications......................................................................................................................3-85 3.8 ISX2..............................................................................................................................................................3-88 3.8.1 Version Description..............................................................................................................................3-89 3.8.2 Functions and Features.........................................................................................................................3-89 3.8.3 Working Principle and Signal Flow.....................................................................................................3-92 3.8.4 Front Panel...........................................................................................................................................3-96 3.8.5 Valid Slots............................................................................................................................................3-99 3.8.6 Board Parameter Settings...................................................................................................................3-100 3.8.7 Technical Specifications....................................................................................................................3-101 3.9 EM6T/EM6F...............................................................................................................................................3-104 3.9.1 Version Description............................................................................................................................3-105 3.9.2 Functions and Features.......................................................................................................................3-105 3.9.3 Working Principle and Signal Flow...................................................................................................3-108 3.9.4 Front Panel.........................................................................................................................................3-111 3.9.5 Valid Slots..........................................................................................................................................3-115 3.9.6 Board Feature Code............................................................................................................................3-117 3.9.7 Board Parameter Settings...................................................................................................................3-117 3.9.8 Technical Specifications....................................................................................................................3-117 3.10 SL1D.........................................................................................................................................................3-119 3.10.1 Version Description..........................................................................................................................3-120 viii Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. Issue 03 (2011-04-10)
Contents
3.10.2 Functions and Features.....................................................................................................................3-120 3.10.3 Working Principle and Signal Flow.................................................................................................3-121 3.10.4 Front Panel.......................................................................................................................................3-123 3.10.5 Valid Slots........................................................................................................................................3-125 3.10.6 Board Feature Code..........................................................................................................................3-126 3.10.7 Board Parameter Settings.................................................................................................................3-126 3.10.8 Technical Specifications..................................................................................................................3-127 3.11 ML1/MD1.................................................................................................................................................3-128 3.11.1 Version Description..........................................................................................................................3-128 3.11.2 Functions and Features.....................................................................................................................3-129 3.11.3 Working Principle and Signal Flow.................................................................................................3-130 3.11.4 Front Panel.......................................................................................................................................3-133 3.11.5 Valid Slots........................................................................................................................................3-136 3.11.6 Board Feature Code..........................................................................................................................3-138 3.11.7 Board Parameter Settings.................................................................................................................3-138 3.11.8 Technical Specifications..................................................................................................................3-138 3.12 SP3S/SP3D................................................................................................................................................3-139 3.12.1 Version Description..........................................................................................................................3-140 3.12.2 Functions and Features.....................................................................................................................3-140 3.12.3 Working Principle and Signal Flow.................................................................................................3-140 3.12.4 Front Panel.......................................................................................................................................3-143 3.12.5 Valid Slots........................................................................................................................................3-147 3.12.6 Board Feature Code..........................................................................................................................3-148 3.12.7 Board Parameter Settings.................................................................................................................3-148 3.12.8 Technical Specifications..................................................................................................................3-148 3.13 AUX..........................................................................................................................................................3-149 3.13.1 Version Description..........................................................................................................................3-149 3.13.2 Functions and Features.....................................................................................................................3-149 3.13.3 Working Principle............................................................................................................................3-150 3.13.4 Front Panel.......................................................................................................................................3-151 3.13.5 Valid Slots........................................................................................................................................3-154 3.13.6 Technical Specifications..................................................................................................................3-155 3.14 PIU............................................................................................................................................................3-157 3.14.1 Version Description..........................................................................................................................3-157 3.14.2 Functions and Features.....................................................................................................................3-157 3.14.3 Working Principle............................................................................................................................3-158 3.14.4 Front Panel.......................................................................................................................................3-159 3.14.5 Valid Slots........................................................................................................................................3-160 3.14.6 Technical Specifications..................................................................................................................3-161 3.15 FAN...........................................................................................................................................................3-162 3.15.1 Version Description..........................................................................................................................3-162 3.15.2 Functions and Features.....................................................................................................................3-162 Issue 03 (2011-04-10) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. ix
Contents
OptiX RTN 980 Radio Transmission System IDU Hardware Description 3.15.3 Working Principle............................................................................................................................3-163 3.15.4 Front Panel.......................................................................................................................................3-164 3.15.5 Valid Slots........................................................................................................................................3-166 3.15.6 Technical Specifications..................................................................................................................3-167
4 Accessories...................................................................................................................................4-1
4.1 E1 Panel...........................................................................................................................................................4-2 4.2 PDU.................................................................................................................................................................4-4 4.2.1 Appearance.............................................................................................................................................4-4 4.2.2 Front Panel.............................................................................................................................................4-5 4.2.3 Functions and Working Principles.........................................................................................................4-6
5 Cables...........................................................................................................................................5-1
5.1 Power Cable....................................................................................................................................................5-3 5.2 PGND Cable....................................................................................................................................................5-4 5.2.1 IDU PGND Cable...................................................................................................................................5-4 5.2.2 E1 Panel PGND Cable...........................................................................................................................5-5 5.3 IF Jumper.........................................................................................................................................................5-5 5.4 XPIC Cable.....................................................................................................................................................5-6 5.5 Fiber Jumper....................................................................................................................................................5-7 5.6 E1 Cables.........................................................................................................................................................5-9 5.6.1 E1 Cable Connected to the External Equipment..................................................................................5-10 5.6.2 E1 Cable Connected to the E1 Panel....................................................................................................5-13 5.7 Orderwire Cable............................................................................................................................................5-15 5.8 Network Cable...............................................................................................................................................5-16
A Parameters Description...........................................................................................................A-1
A.1 Parameters for Network Management...........................................................................................................A-2 A.1.1 Parameters for NE Management...........................................................................................................A-2 A.1.1.1 Parameter Description: NE Searching...............................................................................................A-2 A.1.1.2 Parameter Description: NE Creation.................................................................................................A-7 A.1.1.3 Parameter Description: Attribute_Changing NE IDs........................................................................A-9 A.1.1.4 Parameter Description: NE Time Synchronization.........................................................................A-10 A.1.1.5 Parameter Description: Localization Management of the NE Time...............................................A-13 A.1.1.6 Parameter Description: Standard NTP Key Management...............................................................A-14 A.1.1.7 Parameter Description: License Management.................................................................................A-15 A.1.1.8 Parameter Description: Automatic Disabling of the Functions of NEs...........................................A-16 A.1.2 Parameters for Communications Management...................................................................................A-17 A.1.2.1 Parameter Description: NE Communication Parameter Setting......................................................A-18 A.1.2.2 Parameter Description: DCC Management_DCC Rate Configuration...........................................A-19 A.1.2.3 Parameter Description: DCC Management_DCC Transparent Transmission Management..........A-20 A.1.2.4 Parameter Description: ECC Management_Ethernet Port Extended ECC.....................................A-22 A.1.2.5 Parameter Description: NE ECC Link Management.......................................................................A-23 A.1.2.6 Parameter Description: IP Protocol Stack Management_IP Route Management...........................A-24 x Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. Issue 03 (2011-04-10)
Contents
A.1.2.7 Parameter Description: IP Protocol Stack Management_IP Route Management Creation.............A-26 A.1.2.8 Parameter Description: IP Protocol Stack Management_OSPF Parameter Settings.......................A-27 A.1.2.9 Parameter Description: IP Protocol Stack_Proxy ARP...................................................................A-31 A.1.2.10 Parameter Description: Port OSPF Setting....................................................................................A-32 A.1.2.11 Parameter Description: OSI Management_Network Layer Parameter.........................................A-32 A.1.2.12 Parameter Description: OSI Management_Routing Table............................................................A-33 A.1.2.13 Parameter Description: OSI Management_OSI Tunnel................................................................A-34 A.1.2.14 Parameter Description: DCN Management_Bandwidth Management.........................................A-38 A.1.2.15 Parameter Description: DCN Management_Port Setting..............................................................A-39 A.1.2.16 Parameter Description: DCN Management_Protocol Setting.......................................................A-40 A.1.2.17 Parameter Description: DCN Management_Access Control........................................................A-40 A.1.2.18 Parameter Description: Access Control.........................................................................................A-41 A.1.3 Parameters for Network Security Management..................................................................................A-42 A.1.3.1 Parameter Description: NE User Management...............................................................................A-42 A.1.3.2 Parameter Description: NE User Management_Creation................................................................A-43 A.1.3.3 Parameter Description: LCT Access Control..................................................................................A-45 A.2 Radio Link Parameters................................................................................................................................A-46 A.2.1 Parameter Description: Link Configuration_XPIC Workgroup_Creation.........................................A-47 A.2.2 Parameter Description: Link Configuration_XPIC............................................................................A-51 A.2.3 Parameter Description: N+1 Protection_Create.................................................................................A-58 A.2.4 Parameter Description: N+1 Protection..............................................................................................A-59 A.2.5 Parameter: IF 1+1 Protection_Create.................................................................................................A-61 A.2.6 Parameter Description: IF 1+1 Protection..........................................................................................A-63 A.2.7 Parameter: Link Configuration_IF/ODU Configuration....................................................................A-66 A.3 Multiplex Section Protection Parameters....................................................................................................A-76 A.3.1 Parameter Description: Linear MSP_Creation...................................................................................A-76 A.3.2 Parameter Description: Linear MSP...................................................................................................A-80 A.3.3 Parameter Description: Ring MSP_Creation......................................................................................A-84 A.3.4 Parameter Description: Ring MSP.....................................................................................................A-86 A.4 SDH/PDH Service Parameters....................................................................................................................A-87 A.4.1 Parameter Description: SDH Service Configuration_Creation..........................................................A-88 A.4.2 Parameter Description: SDH Service Configuration_SNCP Service Creation..................................A-90 A.4.3 Parameter Description: SDH Service Configuration_Converting Normal Services Into SNCP Services ......................................................................................................................................................................A-94 A.4.4 Parameter Description: SDH Service Configuration..........................................................................A-98 A.4.5 Parameter Description: SNCP Service Control................................................................................A-100 A.4.6 Parameter Description: TU_AIS Insertion.......................................................................................A-103 A.5 Parameters for Board Interfaces................................................................................................................A-104 A.5.1 PDH Port Parameters........................................................................................................................A-105 A.5.1.1 Parameter Description: PDH Ports_Basic Attributes....................................................................A-105 A.5.1.2 Parameter Description: PDH Ports_Advanced Attributes.............................................................A-106 A.5.2 Parameters for the Ports on Ethernet Boards....................................................................................A-110 A.5.2.1 Parameter Description: Ethernet Interface_Basic Attributes.........................................................A-110 Issue 03 (2011-04-10) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. xi
Contents
OptiX RTN 980 Radio Transmission System IDU Hardware Description A.5.2.2 Parameter Description: Ethernet Interface_Flow Control.............................................................A-114 A.5.2.3 Parameter Description: Ethernet Interface_Layer 2 Attributes.....................................................A-116 A.5.2.4 Parameter Description: Ethernet Port_Layer 3 Attributes.............................................................A-119 A.5.2.5 Parameter Description: Ethernet Interface_Advanced Attributes.................................................A-120 A.5.3 Serial Port Parameters......................................................................................................................A-122 A.5.3.1 Parameter Description: Serial Port_Basic Attributes....................................................................A-123 A.5.3.2 Parameter Description: Serial Port_Creation of Serial Ports.........................................................A-124 A.5.4 Microwave Interface Parameters......................................................................................................A-125 A.5.4.1 Parameter Description: Microwave Interface_Basic Attributes....................................................A-125 A.5.4.2 Parameter Description: Microwave Interface_Layer 2 Attributes................................................A-126 A.5.4.3 Parameter Description: Microwave Interface_Layer 3 Attributes................................................A-129 A.5.4.4 Parameter Description: Microwave Interface_Advanced Attributes.............................................A-130 A.5.5 IF Board Parameters.........................................................................................................................A-134 A.5.5.1 Parameter Description: IF Interface_IF Attribute.........................................................................A-134 A.5.5.2 Parameter Description: IF Interface_ATPC Attribute...................................................................A-142 A.5.5.3 Parameter Description: Hybrid_AM Configuration_Advanced Attributes...................................A-143 A.5.5.4 Parameter Description: ATPC Adjustment Records.....................................................................A-144 A.5.5.5 Parameter Description: PRBS Test...............................................................................................A-145 A.5.6 ODU Parameters...............................................................................................................................A-146 A.5.6.1 Parameter Description: ODU Interface_Radio Frequency Attribute............................................A-146 A.5.6.2 Parameter Description: ODU Interface_Power Attributes............................................................A-148 A.5.6.3 Parameter Description: ODU Interface_Equipment Information..................................................A-151 A.5.6.4 Parameter Description: ODU Interface_Advanced Attributes......................................................A-152 A.5.7 Parameters for SDH Interface Boards..............................................................................................A-153 A.5.7.1 Parameter Description: SDH Interfaces........................................................................................A-154 A.5.7.2 Parameter Description: Automatic Laser Shutdown.....................................................................A-155 A.5.8 Parameters for PDH Interface Boards..............................................................................................A-156 A.5.8.1 Parameter Description: PDH Interfaces........................................................................................A-156 A.5.8.2 Parameter Description: PRBS Test...............................................................................................A-158 A.5.9 Parameters for Overhead..................................................................................................................A-159 A.5.9.1 Parameter Description: Regenerator Section Overhead................................................................A-160 A.5.9.2 Parameter Description: VC-4 POHs..............................................................................................A-161 A.5.9.3 Parameter Description: VC-12 POHs............................................................................................A-162
A.6 Parameters for Ethernet Services and Ethernet Features on the Packet Plane..........................................A-163 A.6.1 Parameters for Ethernet Services......................................................................................................A-164 A.6.1.1 Parameter Description: E-Line Service_Creation.........................................................................A-164 A.6.1.2 Parameter Description: E-Line Service.........................................................................................A-184 A.6.1.3 Parameter Description: VLAN Forwarding Table Item_Creation................................................A-195 A.6.1.4 Parameter Description: E-LAN Service_Creation........................................................................A-196 A.6.1.5 Parameter Description: E-LAN Service........................................................................................A-202 A.6.1.6 Parameter Description: QinQ Link_Creation................................................................................A-213 A.6.2 Parameters for Ethernet Protocols....................................................................................................A-213 xii Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. Issue 03 (2011-04-10)
Contents
A.6.2.1 Parameter Description: ERPS Management_Creation..................................................................A-214 A.6.2.2 Parameter Description: ERPS Management..................................................................................A-216 A.6.2.3 Parameter Description: MSTP Configuration_Port Group Creation.............................................A-222 A.6.2.4 Parameter Description: MSTP Configuration_Port Group Configuration....................................A-224 A.6.2.5 Parameter Description: MSTP Configuration_ Bridge Parameters...............................................A-224 A.6.2.6 Parameter Description: MSTP Configuration_CIST Parameters..................................................A-230 A.6.2.7 Parameter Description: MSTP Configuration_Running Information About the CIST.................A-232 A.6.2.8 Parameter Description: Ethernet Link Aggregation Management_LAG Creation.......................A-240 A.6.2.9 Parameter Description: Ethernet Link Aggregation_Link Aggregation........................................A-248 A.6.2.10 Parameter Description: LPT Management_Point-to-Point LPT.................................................A-249 A.6.2.11 Parameter Description: LPT Management_Creating Point-to-Point LPT...................................A-251 A.6.2.12 Parameter Description: LPT Management_Point-to-Multipoint LPT.........................................A-251 A.6.2.13 Parameter Description: LPT Management_Creating Point-to-Multipoint LPT..........................A-254 A.6.3 Parameters for the Ethernet OAM....................................................................................................A-258 A.6.3.1 Parameter Description: Ethernet Service OAM Management_Maintenance Domain Creation...A-259 A.6.3.2 Parameter Description: Ethernet Service OAM Management_Maintenance Association Creation ....................................................................................................................................................................A-260 A.6.3.3 Parameter Description: Ethernet Service OAM Management_MEP Creation.............................A-260 A.6.3.4 Parameter Description: Ethernet Service OAM Management_Remote MEP Creation................A-262 A.6.3.5 Parameter Description: Ethernet Service OAM Management_MIP Creation...............................A-263 A.6.3.6 Parameter Description: Ethernet Service OAM Management_LB Enabling................................A-263 A.6.3.7 Parameter Description: Ethernet Service OAM Management_LT Enabling................................A-265 A.6.3.8 Parameter Description: Ethernet Port OAM Management_OAM Parameter...............................A-267 A.6.3.9 Parameter Description: Ethernet Port OAM Management_OAM Error Frame Monitoring.........A-269 A.6.4 QoS Parameters................................................................................................................................A-270 A.6.4.1 Parameter Description: Diffserv Domain Management................................................................A-271 A.6.4.2 Parameter Description: DiffServ Domain Management_Create...................................................A-277 A.6.4.3 Parameter Description: DiffServ Domain Applied Port_Modification.........................................A-284 A.6.4.4 Parameter Description: Policy Management.................................................................................A-286 A.6.4.5 Parameter Description: Port Policy...............................................................................................A-291 A.6.4.6 Parameter Description: Port Policy_Traffic Classification Configuration....................................A-296 A.6.4.7 Parameter Description: Port Shaping Management_Creation.......................................................A-307 A.7 RMON Parameters....................................................................................................................................A-309 A.7.1 Parameter Description: RMON Performance_Statistics Group.......................................................A-309 A.7.2 Parameter Description: RMON Performance_History Group..........................................................A-310 A.7.3 Parameter Description: RMON Performance_History Control Group............................................A-311 A.7.4 Parameter Description: RMON Performance_RMON Setting........................................................A-312 A.8 Parameters for MPLS/PWE3 Services......................................................................................................A-314 A.8.1 MPLS Tunnel Parameters.................................................................................................................A-314 A.8.1.1 Parameter Description: Basic Configurations of MPLS Tunnels..................................................A-315 A.8.1.2 Parameter Description: Unicast Tunnel Management_Static Tunnel...........................................A-316 A.8.1.3 Parameter Description: Unicast Tunnel Management_Creation of Unidirectional Tunnels.........A-321 A.8.1.4 Parameter Description: Unicast Tunnel Management_Creation of Bidirectional Tunnels...........A-326 Issue 03 (2011-04-10) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. xiii
Contents
OptiX RTN 980 Radio Transmission System IDU Hardware Description A.8.1.5 Parameter Description: Unicast Tunnel Management_OAM Parameters.....................................A-331 A.8.1.6 Parameter Description: Unicast Tunnel Management_FDI..........................................................A-336 A.8.1.7 Parameter Description: Unicast Tunnel Management_LSP Ping..................................................A-337 A.8.1.8 Parameter Description: Unicast Tunnel Management_LSP Traceroute........................................A-340 A.8.1.9 Parameter Description: PW Management_PW Management.......................................................A-343 A.8.1.10 Parameter Description: PW Management_MS-PW Creation.....................................................A-348 A.8.1.11 Parameter Description: PW Management_PW OAM.................................................................A-359 A.8.1.12 Parameter Description: PW Management_PW Ping...................................................................A-363 A.8.1.13 Parameter Description: PW Management_PW Traceroute.........................................................A-366 A.8.1.14 Parameter Description: MPLS APS Protection Management.....................................................A-368 A.8.1.15 Parameter Description: Tunnel Protection Group_Creation.......................................................A-371 A.8.1.16 Parameter Description: PW APS Protection Group_Creation....................................................A-376 A.8.1.17 Parameter Description: Slave Protection Pair of a PW APS Protection Group_Creation...........A-387 A.8.2 CES Parameters................................................................................................................................A-393 A.8.2.1 Parameter Description: CES Service Management.......................................................................A-393 A.8.2.2 Parameter Description: CES Service Management_Creation.......................................................A-403 A.8.3 ATM Parameters..............................................................................................................................A-416 A.8.3.1 Parameter Description: ATM IMA Management_IMA Group Management...............................A-417 A.8.3.2 Parameter Description: ATM IMA Management_Bound Path Configuration.............................A-422 A.8.3.3 Parameter Description: ATM IMA Management_IMA Group Status..........................................A-424 A.8.3.4 Parameter Description: ATM IMA Management_IMA Link Status.............................................A-425 A.8.3.5 Parameter Description: ATM IMA Management_ATM Interface Management..........................A-425 A.8.3.6 Parameter Description: Configuration of ATM Service Class Mapping Table............................A-427 A.8.3.7 Parameter Description: Configuration of ATM Service Class Mapping Table_Creation.............A-429 A.8.3.8 Parameter Description: ATM Policy Management.......................................................................A-431 A.8.3.9 Parameter Description: ATM Policy Management_Creation.......................................................A-435 A.8.3.10 Parameter Description: ATM Service Management...................................................................A-440 A.8.3.11 Parameter Description: ATM Service Management_Creation....................................................A-449 A.8.3.12 Parameter Description: ATM OAM Management_Segment and End Attributes.......................A-461 A.8.3.13 Parameter Description: ATM OMA Management_CC Activation Status..................................A-465 A.8.3.14 Parameter Description: ATM OAM Management_Remote End Loopback Status....................A-468 A.8.3.15 Parameter Description: ATM OAM Management_LLID...........................................................A-471
A.9 Clock Parameters.......................................................................................................................................A-472 A.9.1 Physical Clock Parameters...............................................................................................................A-472 A.9.1.1 Parameter Description: Clock Source Priority Table....................................................................A-473 A.9.1.2 Parameter Description: Priority Table for the PLL Clock Source of the External Clock Port......A-475 A.9.1.3 Parameter Description: Clock Subnet Setting_Clock Subnet.......................................................A-477 A.9.1.4 Parameter Description: Clock Subnet Setting_Clock Quality.......................................................A-480 A.9.1.5 Parameter Description: Clock Subset Setting_SSM Output Control............................................A-483 A.9.1.6 Parameter Description: Clock Subset Setting_Clock ID Enabling Status.....................................A-484 A.9.1.7 Parameter Description: Clock Source Switching_Clock Source Restoration Parameters............A-485 A.9.1.8 Parameter Description: Clock Source Switching_Clock Source Switching.................................A-487 xiv Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. Issue 03 (2011-04-10)
Contents
A.9.1.9 Parameter Description: Clock Source Switching_Clock Source Switching Conditions...............A-488 A.9.1.10 Parameter Description: Output Phase-Locked Source of the External Clock Source.................A-489 A.9.1.11 Parameter Description: Clock Synchronization Status................................................................A-492 A.9.2 CES ACR Clock Parameters............................................................................................................A-493 A.9.2.1 Parameter Description: ACR Clock Source..................................................................................A-494 A.9.2.2 Parameter Description: Clock Domain..........................................................................................A-494 A.9.2.3 Parameter Description: Clock Domain_Creation..........................................................................A-495 A.9.3 Parameter Description: Auxiliary Ports............................................................................................A-496 A.10 Parameters for the Orderwire and Auxiliary Interfaces...........................................................................A-496 A.10.1 Parameter Description: Orderwire_General...................................................................................A-497 A.10.2 Parameter Description: Orderwire_Advanced................................................................................A-498 A.10.3 Parameter Description: Orderwire_F1 Data Port...........................................................................A-499 A.10.4 Parameter Description: Orderwire_Broadcast Data Port................................................................A-500 A.10.5 Parameter Description: Environment Monitoring Interface...........................................................A-501
B Board Loopback Types............................................................................................................B-1 C Indicators of Boards.................................................................................................................C-1 D Weight and Power Consumption of Each Board...............................................................D-1 E Glossary.......................................................................................................................................E-1
E.1 0-9...................................................................................................................................................................E-2 E.2 A-E.................................................................................................................................................................E-2 E.3 F-J.................................................................................................................................................................E-11 E.4 K-O...............................................................................................................................................................E-16 E.5 P-T................................................................................................................................................................E-22 E.6 U-Z...............................................................................................................................................................E-31
Issue 03 (2011-04-10)
xv
Figures
Figures
Figure 1-1 Microwave transmission solution provided by the OptiX RTN 980..................................................1-3 Figure 1-2 Appearance of the IDU 980................................................................................................................1-4 Figure 1-3 Direct mounting..................................................................................................................................1-6 Figure 1-4 Separate mounting..............................................................................................................................1-7 Figure 2-1 Chassis structure of the IDU 980........................................................................................................2-2 Figure 2-2 Air flow in an IDU 980 chassis..........................................................................................................2-3 Figure 2-3 Positions of the IDU 980 labels..........................................................................................................2-6 Figure 3-1 Appearance of an ISU2 board.............................................................................................................3-3 Figure 3-2 Bar code..............................................................................................................................................3-3 Figure 3-3 IDU slot layout...................................................................................................................................3-4 Figure 3-4 Functional block diagram of the CSHN...........................................................................................3-15 Figure 3-5 Functional block diagram of the cross-connect unit.........................................................................3-17 Figure 3-6 Front panel of the CSHN..................................................................................................................3-18 Figure 3-7 Front view of the RJ45 connector.....................................................................................................3-21 Figure 3-8 Incorrect connections between the NMS/COM port and the EXT port...........................................3-23 Figure 3-9 Ports of the SFP optical module.......................................................................................................3-26 Figure 3-10 Positions of the DIP switches and CF card.....................................................................................3-28 Figure 3-11 Slots for the CSHN in the IDU chassis...........................................................................................3-30 Figure 3-12 Logical slots for the logical boards of the CSHN...........................................................................3-30 Figure 3-13 Functional block diagram of the IF1..............................................................................................3-38 Figure 3-14 Front panel of the IF1.....................................................................................................................3-42 Figure 3-15 Slots for the IF1 in the IDU chassis................................................................................................3-44 Figure 3-16 Logical slots of the IF1 on the NMS..............................................................................................3-45 Figure 3-17 Functional block diagram of the IFU2...........................................................................................3-51 Figure 3-18 Front panel of the IFU2..................................................................................................................3-54 Figure 3-19 Slots for the IFU2 in the IDU chassis.............................................................................................3-56 Figure 3-20 Logical slots of the IFU2 on the NMS...........................................................................................3-57 Figure 3-21 Functional block diagram of the IFX2...........................................................................................3-64 Figure 3-22 Front panel of the IFX2..................................................................................................................3-67 Figure 3-23 Slots for the IFX2 in the IDU chassis.............................................................................................3-70 Figure 3-24 Logical slots for the logical boards of the IFX2.............................................................................3-71 Figure 3-25 Functional block diagram of the ISU2...........................................................................................3-78 Figure 3-26 Front panel of the ISU2..................................................................................................................3-81 Issue 03 (2011-04-10) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. xvii
Figures
OptiX RTN 980 Radio Transmission System IDU Hardware Description Figure 3-27 Slots for the ISU2 in the IDU chassis.............................................................................................3-83 Figure 3-28 Logical slots of the ISU2 on the NMS...........................................................................................3-84
Figure 3-29 Functional block diagram of the ISX2...........................................................................................3-93 Figure 3-30 Front panel of the ISX2..................................................................................................................3-96 Figure 3-31 Slots for the ISX2 in the IDU chassis.............................................................................................3-99 Figure 3-32 Logical slots of the ISX2 on the NMS.........................................................................................3-100 Figure 3-33 Functional block diagram.............................................................................................................3-109 Figure 3-34 Front panel of the EM6T..............................................................................................................3-111 Figure 3-35 Front panel of the EM6F..............................................................................................................3-111 Figure 3-36 Front view of the RJ45 connector.................................................................................................3-113 Figure 3-37 Ports of the SFP optical module...................................................................................................3-115 Figure 3-38 Slots for the EM6T/EM6F in the IDU chassis.............................................................................3-116 Figure 3-39 Logical slots of the EM6T/EM6F on the NMS............................................................................3-116 Figure 3-40 Functional block diagram of the SL1D........................................................................................3-121 Figure 3-41 Front panel of the SL1D...............................................................................................................3-123 Figure 3-42 Slots for the SL1D in the IDU chassis..........................................................................................3-125 Figure 3-43 Logical slots of the SL1D on the NMS........................................................................................3-126 Figure 3-44 Functional block diagram of the ML1/MD1................................................................................3-131 Figure 3-45 Front panel of the ML1.................................................................................................................3-133 Figure 3-46 Front panel of the MD1................................................................................................................3-133 Figure 3-47 Front view of an Anea 96 connector.............................................................................................3-134 Figure 3-48 Slots for the ML1/MD1 in the IDU chassis..................................................................................3-137 Figure 3-49 Logical slots of the ML1/MD1 on the NMS................................................................................3-137 Figure 3-50 Functional block diagram of the SP3S/SP3D...............................................................................3-141 Figure 3-51 Front panel of the SP3S................................................................................................................3-143 Figure 3-52 Front panel of the SP3D...............................................................................................................3-143 Figure 3-53 Front view of an Anea 96 connector.............................................................................................3-145 Figure 3-54 Slots for the SP3S/SP3D in the IDU chassis................................................................................3-147 Figure 3-55 Logical slots of the SP3S/SP3D on the NMS...............................................................................3-147 Figure 3-56 Functional block diagram of the AUX.........................................................................................3-150 Figure 3-57 Front panel of the AUX................................................................................................................3-151 Figure 3-58 Front view of the RJ45 connector.................................................................................................3-152 Figure 3-59 Slots for the AUX in the IDU chassis...........................................................................................3-154 Figure 3-60 Logical slots of the AUX on the NMS.........................................................................................3-155 Figure 3-61 Functional block diagram of the PIU...........................................................................................3-158 Figure 3-62 Front panel of the PIU..................................................................................................................3-159 Figure 3-63 Slots for the PIU in the IDU chassis.............................................................................................3-161 Figure 3-64 Logical slots of the PIU on the NMS...........................................................................................3-161 Figure 3-65 Functional block diagram of the FAN..........................................................................................3-163 Figure 3-66 Front panel of the FAN.................................................................................................................3-165 Figure 3-67 Slot for the FAN in the IDU chassis.............................................................................................3-166 Figure 3-68 Logical slot of the FAN on the NMS...........................................................................................3-166 xviii Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. Issue 03 (2011-04-10)
Figures
Figure 4-1 Front panel of an E1 panel..................................................................................................................4-2 Figure 4-2 Front view of an E1 port (E1 panel)...................................................................................................4-3 Figure 4-3 Appearance of the C3 PDU................................................................................................................4-4 Figure 4-4 Front panel of the DC PDU................................................................................................................4-5 Figure 4-5 Mapping relationship between power switches and output power terminals.....................................4-6 Figure 4-6 Functional block diagram of the DC PDU.........................................................................................4-7 Figure 5-1 Power cable.........................................................................................................................................5-3 Figure 5-2 IDU PGND cable................................................................................................................................5-4 Figure 5-3 E1 panel PGND cable.........................................................................................................................5-5 Figure 5-4 IF jumper............................................................................................................................................5-6 Figure 5-5 XPIC cable..........................................................................................................................................5-7 Figure 5-6 LC/PC connector................................................................................................................................5-8 Figure 5-7 SC/PC connector.................................................................................................................................5-9 Figure 5-8 FC/PC connector.................................................................................................................................5-9 Figure 5-9 E1 cable connected to the external equipment................................................................................. 5-10 Figure 5-10 E1 cable connected to the E1 panel................................................................................................5-14 Figure 5-11 Orderwire cable.............................................................................................................................. 5-16 Figure 5-12 Network cable.................................................................................................................................5-18
Issue 03 (2011-04-10)
xix
Tables
Tables
Table 1-1 Features of the IDU 980.......................................................................................................................1-4 Table 1-2 RTN 600 ODUs supported by the OptiX RTN 980.............................................................................1-5 Table 1-3 RTN XMC ODUs supported by the OptiX RTN 980..........................................................................1-5 Table 1-4 Radio link forms supported by the OptiX RTN 980............................................................................1-7 Table 2-1 Description of the IDU labels..............................................................................................................2-4 Table 3-1 List of IDU boards...............................................................................................................................3-5 Table 3-2 Functions and features that the CSHN supports..................................................................................3-8 Table 3-3 MPLS/PWE3 functions......................................................................................................................3-10 Table 3-4 QoS functions.....................................................................................................................................3-10 Table 3-5 Ethernet service functions..................................................................................................................3-11 Table 3-6 STM-1/4 service functions.................................................................................................................3-13 Table 3-7 Status explanation for indicators on the CSHN................................................................................. 3-19 Table 3-8 Description of the clock ports, auxiliary ports, and management ports.............................................3-21 Table 3-9 Pin assignments for the NMS/COM port...........................................................................................3-21 Table 3-10 Pin assignments for the EXT port....................................................................................................3-22 Table 3-11 Status explanation for the indicators of the RJ45 connector............................................................3-22 Table 3-12 Pin assignments for the CLK/TOD1 port.........................................................................................3-23 Table 3-13 Pin assignments for the MON/TOD2 port.......................................................................................3-24 Table 3-14 Buttons............................................................................................................................................. 3-25 Table 3-15 Description of the service ports on the CSHN.................................................................................3-26 Table 3-16 Pin assignments for the RJ45 connector in MDI mode....................................................................3-27 Table 3-17 Pin assignments for the RJ45 connector in MDI-X mode............................................................... 3-27 Table 3-18 Setting DIP switches........................................................................................................................3-28 Table 3-19 Slot allocation...................................................................................................................................3-30 Table 3-20 Types of SFP modules that the GE port supports............................................................................3-31 Table 3-21 Types of SFP modules that the STM-1/4 optical port supports.......................................................3-31 Table 3-22 Performance of the GE optical interface .........................................................................................3-32 Table 3-23 GE electric interface performance....................................................................................................3-33 Table 3-24 STM-1 optical interface performance..............................................................................................3-33 Table 3-25 STM-4 optical interface performance..............................................................................................3-34 Table 3-26 Clock timing and synchronization performance.............................................................................. 3-34 Table 3-27 Mechanical behavior........................................................................................................................3-35 Table 3-28 Functions and features that the IF1 supports....................................................................................3-36 Issue 03 (2011-04-10) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. xxi
Tables
OptiX RTN 980 Radio Transmission System IDU Hardware Description Table 3-29 Signal processing in the receive direction of the IF1.......................................................................3-38 Table 3-30 Signal processing in the transmit direction of the IF1.....................................................................3-40 Table 3-31 Status explanation for indicators on the IF1....................................................................................3-42 Table 3-32 Description of the Ports ...................................................................................................................3-43 Table 3-33 Slot allocation ..................................................................................................................................3-45 Table 3-34 SDH/PDH microwave work modes (IF1 board)..............................................................................3-46 Table 3-35 IF performance.................................................................................................................................3-46 Table 3-36 Baseband signal processing performance of the modem.................................................................3-47 Table 3-37 Mechanical behavior........................................................................................................................3-47 Table 3-38 Functions and features that the IFU2 supports.................................................................................3-48 Table 3-39 Ethernet service functions that the IFU2 supports...........................................................................3-50 Table 3-40 Signal processing in the receive direction of the IFU2....................................................................3-51 Table 3-41 Signal processing in the transmit direction of the IFU2..................................................................3-53 Table 3-42 Status explanation for indicators on the IFU2..................................................................................3-54 Table 3-43 Description of the Ports ...................................................................................................................3-55 Table 3-44 Slot allocation ..................................................................................................................................3-57 Table 3-45 Integrated IP microwave work modes (IFU2 board).......................................................................3-58 Table 3-46 IF performance.................................................................................................................................3-59 Table 3-47 Baseband signal processing performance of the modem.................................................................3-60 Table 3-48 Mechanical behavior........................................................................................................................3-60 Table 3-49 Functions and features that the IFX2 supports.................................................................................3-61 Table 3-50 Ethernet service functions that the IFX2 supports...........................................................................3-63 Table 3-51 Signal processing in the receive direction of the IFX2....................................................................3-64 Table 3-52 Signal processing in the transmit direction of the IFX2..................................................................3-66 Table 3-53 Status explanation for indicators on the IFX2..................................................................................3-67 Table 3-54 Description of the ports....................................................................................................................3-69 Table 3-55 Slot allocation ..................................................................................................................................3-71 Table 3-56 Integrated IP microwave work modes (IFX2 board).......................................................................3-72 Table 3-57 IF performance.................................................................................................................................3-73 Table 3-58 Baseband signal processing performance of the modem.................................................................3-73 Table 3-59 Mechanical behavior........................................................................................................................3-74 Table 3-60 Functions and features that the ISU2 supports.................................................................................3-75 Table 3-61 Ethernet service functions that the ISU2 supports...........................................................................3-76 Table 3-62 Signal processing in the receive direction of the ISU2....................................................................3-78 Table 3-63 Signal processing in the transmit direction of the ISU2..................................................................3-80 Table 3-64 Status explanation for indicators on the ISU2..................................................................................3-81 Table 3-65 Description of the Ports ...................................................................................................................3-82 Table 3-66 Slot allocation ..................................................................................................................................3-84 Table 3-67 SDH/PDH microwave work modes (ISU2/ISX2 board).................................................................3-85 Table 3-68 Integrated IP microwave work modes (ISU2/ISX2 board, Native E1 + Ethernet service)..............3-85 Table 3-69 Integrated IP microwave work modes (ISU2 board, Native STM-1 + Ethernet service)................3-87 Table 3-70 IF performance.................................................................................................................................3-87
xxii
Issue 03 (2011-04-10)
Tables
Table 3-71 Baseband signal processing performance of the modem.................................................................3-88 Table 3-72 Mechanical behavior........................................................................................................................3-88 Table 3-73 Functions and features that the ISX2 supports.................................................................................3-89 Table 3-74 Ethernet service functions that the ISX2 supports...........................................................................3-91 Table 3-75 Signal processing in the receive direction of the ISX2....................................................................3-93 Table 3-76 Signal processing in the transmit direction of the ISX2..................................................................3-95 Table 3-77 Status explanation for indicators on the ISX2..................................................................................3-97 Table 3-78 Description of the ports....................................................................................................................3-98 Table 3-79 Slot allocation ................................................................................................................................3-100 Table 3-80 SDH/PDH microwave work modes (ISU2/ISX2 board)...............................................................3-101 Table 3-81 Integrated IP microwave work modes (ISU2/ISX2 board, Native E1 + Ethernet service)............3-101 Table 3-82 Integrated IP microwave work modes (ISX2 board, Native STM-1 + Ethernet service)..............3-103 Table 3-83 IF performance...............................................................................................................................3-103 Table 3-84 Baseband signal processing performance of the modem...............................................................3-104 Table 3-85 Mechanical behavior......................................................................................................................3-104 Table 3-86 Functions and features that the EM6T/EM6F supports.................................................................3-105 Table 3-87 Signal processing in the receive direction......................................................................................3-109 Table 3-88 Signal processing in the transmit direction....................................................................................3-110 Table 3-89 Status explanation for indicators on the EM6T/EM6F..................................................................3-111 Table 3-90 Description of the ports on the EM6T............................................................................................3-113 Table 3-91 Description of the ports on the EM6F............................................................................................3-113 Table 3-92 Pin assignments for the RJ45 connector in MDI mode..................................................................3-114 Table 3-93 Pin assignments for the RJ45 connector in MDI-X mode.............................................................3-114 Table 3-94 Status explanation for the indicators of the RJ45 connector..........................................................3-115 Table 3-95 Slot configuration for the EM6T/EM6F........................................................................................3-116 Table 3-96 Board feature code of the EM6F....................................................................................................3-117 Table 3-97 Performance of the GE optical interface .......................................................................................3-117 Table 3-98 GE electric interface performance..................................................................................................3-118 Table 3-99 FE electric interface performance..................................................................................................3-118 Table 3-100 Mechanical behavior ...................................................................................................................3-119 Table 3-101 Functions and features that the SL1D supports............................................................................3-120 Table 3-102 Signal processing in the receive direction of the SL1D...............................................................3-122 Table 3-103 Signal processing in the transmit direction of the SL1D.............................................................3-123 Table 3-104 Status explanation for indicators on the SL1D............................................................................3-124 Table 3-105 Description of the ports ...............................................................................................................3-124 Table 3-106 Slot allocation...............................................................................................................................3-126 Table 3-107 Board feature code of the SL1D...................................................................................................3-126 Table 3-108 STM-1 optical interface performance..........................................................................................3-127 Table 3-109 Mechanical behavior....................................................................................................................3-128 Table 3-110 Functions and features that the ML1/MD1 supports....................................................................3-129 Table 3-111 Signal processing in the receive direction of the ML1/MD1.......................................................3-131 Table 3-112 Signal processing in the transmit direction of the ML1/MD1.....................................................3-132 Issue 03 (2011-04-10) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. xxiii
Tables
OptiX RTN 980 Radio Transmission System IDU Hardware Description Table 3-113 Status explanation for indicators on the ML1/MD1....................................................................3-133 Table 3-114 Description of the ports on the ML1............................................................................................3-134 Table 3-115 Description of the ports on the MD1............................................................................................3-134 Table 3-116 Pin assignments for the Anea 96 connector.................................................................................3-135 Table 3-117 Slot allocation...............................................................................................................................3-137 Table 3-118 Board feature code of the ML1/MD1...........................................................................................3-138 Table 3-119 E1 interface performance.............................................................................................................3-138 Table 3-120 Mechanical behavior....................................................................................................................3-139 Table 3-121 Functions and features that the SP3S/SP3D supports..................................................................3-140 Table 3-122 Signal processing in the receive direction of the SP3S/SP3D..................................................... 3-141 Table 3-123 Signal processing in the transmit direction of the SP3S/SP3D....................................................3-142 Table 3-124 Status explanation for indicators on the SP3S/SP3D...................................................................3-143 Table 3-125 Description of the ports on the SP3S........................................................................................... 3-144 Table 3-126 Description of the ports on the SP3D...........................................................................................3-144 Table 3-127 Pin assignments for the Anea 96 connector.................................................................................3-145 Table 3-128 Slot allocation...............................................................................................................................3-148 Table 3-129 Board feature code of the SP3S/SP3D.........................................................................................3-148 Table 3-130 E1 interface performance.............................................................................................................3-148 Table 3-131 Mechanical behavior ...................................................................................................................3-149 Table 3-132 Functions and features that the AUX supports............................................................................ 3-150 Table 3-133 Status explanation for indicators on the AUX............................................................................. 3-152 Table 3-134 Description of the auxiliary ports and management ports............................................................3-152 Table 3-135 Pin assignments for the F1/S1 port.............................................................................................. 3-153 Table 3-136 Pin assignments for the ALMI port..............................................................................................3-153 Table 3-137 Pin assignments for the ALMO port............................................................................................3-153 Table 3-138 Slot allocation...............................................................................................................................3-155 Table 3-139 Orderwire interface performance.................................................................................................3-155 Table 3-140 Synchronous data interface performance.....................................................................................3-156 Table 3-141 Asynchronous data interface performance...................................................................................3-156 Table 3-142 Mechanical behavior ...................................................................................................................3-156 Table 3-143 Functions and features that the PIU supports...............................................................................3-157 Table 3-144 Status explanation for indicators on the PIU................................................................................3-159 Table 3-145 Description of the ports on the PIU..............................................................................................3-160 Table 3-146 Technical specifications for the PIU............................................................................................3-161 Table 3-147 Functions and features that the FAN supports.............................................................................3-162 Table 3-148 Adjustment of the fan rotating speed...........................................................................................3-164 Table 3-149 Status explanation for indicators on the FAN..............................................................................3-165 Table 3-150 Technical specifications for the FAN...........................................................................................3-167 Table 4-1 Port description of an E1 panel............................................................................................................4-2 Table 4-2 Pin assignments for an E1 port (E1 panel)...........................................................................................4-3 Table 4-3 Description of ports on the DC PDU...................................................................................................4-5 Table 5-1 Power cable specifications...................................................................................................................5-3
xxiv
Issue 03 (2011-04-10)
Tables
Table 5-2 Types of fiber jumpers.........................................................................................................................5-7 Table 5-3 Pin assignments for a 75-ohm E1 cable.............................................................................................5-11 Table 5-4 Pin assignments for a 120-ohm E1 cable...........................................................................................5-12 Table 5-5 Pin assignments for the E1 cable terminated with an Anea 96 connector and a DB37 connector .............................................................................................................................................................................5-14 Table 5-6 Pin assignments for the orderwire cable............................................................................................5-16 Table 5-7 Pin assignments for MDIs..................................................................................................................5-16 Table 5-8 Pin assignments for MDI-Xs..............................................................................................................5-17 Table 5-9 Pin assignments for the straight-through cable..................................................................................5-18 Table 5-10 Pin assignments for the crossover cable...........................................................................................5-18 Table A-1 Parameters on the main interface...................................................................................................A-104 Table A-2 Methods used by Ethernet interfaces to process data frames.........................................................A-118 Table A-3 Data frame processing....................................................................................................................A-128 Table A-4 Service direction of UNI-UNI........................................................................................................A-164 Table A-5 Service direction of UNI-NNI (carried by PWs)............................................................................A-169 Table A-6 Service direction of UNI-NNI (carried by QinQ links)..................................................................A-172 Table A-7 Service direction of NNI-NNI........................................................................................................A-174 Table A-8 CES services...................................................................................................................................A-344 Table A-9 E-Line services...............................................................................................................................A-345 Table A-10 ATM services...............................................................................................................................A-346 Table A-11 CES services.................................................................................................................................A-346 Table A-12 E-Line services.............................................................................................................................A-347 Table A-13 ATM services...............................................................................................................................A-348 Table A-14 ATM services...............................................................................................................................A-353 Table A-15 CES services.................................................................................................................................A-377 Table A-16 E-Line services.............................................................................................................................A-378 Table A-17 ATM services...............................................................................................................................A-379 Table A-18 CES services.................................................................................................................................A-380 Table A-19 E-Line services.............................................................................................................................A-381 Table A-20 ATM services...............................................................................................................................A-381 Table A-21 CES services.................................................................................................................................A-388 Table A-22 E-Line services.............................................................................................................................A-389 Table A-23 ATM services...............................................................................................................................A-390 Table A-24 CES services.................................................................................................................................A-391 Table A-25 E-Line services.............................................................................................................................A-392 Table A-26 ATM services...............................................................................................................................A-392 Table A-27 Mapping relationship between ATM service types, traffic types, and traffic parameters...........A-434 Table A-28 Mapping relationship between ATM service types, ATM traffic types, and traffic parameters ..........................................................................................................................................................................A-439 Table A-29 ATM services...............................................................................................................................A-454 Table B-1 Loopback types that service interface boards support........................................................................B-1 Table C-1 Status explanation for indicators on the CSHN..................................................................................C-1 Table C-2 Status explanation for indicators on the IF1.......................................................................................C-3 Issue 03 (2011-04-10) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. xxv
Tables
OptiX RTN 980 Radio Transmission System IDU Hardware Description Table C-3 Status explanation for indicators on the IFU2....................................................................................C-4 Table C-4 Status explanation for indicators on the ISU2....................................................................................C-5 Table C-5 Status explanation for indicators on the IFX2....................................................................................C-6 Table C-6 Status explanation for indicators on the ISX2....................................................................................C-8 Table C-7 Status explanation for indicators on the EM6T/EM6F.......................................................................C-9 Table C-8 Status explanation for indicators on the SL1D.................................................................................C-10 Table C-9 Status explanation for indicators on the SP3S/SP3D.......................................................................C-11 Table C-10 Status explanation for indicators on the ML1/MD1.......................................................................C-11 Table C-11 Status explanation for indicators on the AUX................................................................................C-12 Table C-12 Status explanation for indicators on the PIU..................................................................................C-12 Table C-13 Status explanation for indicators on the FAN................................................................................C-13 Table D-1 Weight and power consumption of each board..................................................................................D-1
xxvi
Issue 03 (2011-04-10)
1 Introduction
1
About This Chapter
Introduction
The OptiX RTN 980 is a product in the OptiX RTN 900 radio transmission system series. 1.1 Network Application The OptiX RTN 900 is a new generation TDM/Hybrid/Packet integrate microwave transmission system developed by Huawei. It provides a seamless microwave transmission solution for a mobile communication network or private network. 1.2 Components The OptiX RTN 980 adopts a split structure. The system consists of the IDU 980 and the ODU. Each ODU is connected to the IDU through an IF cable. 1.3 Radio Link Forms The OptiX RTN 980 provides the radio links of different forms in which different IF boards and ODUs are configured for different microwave application scenarios.
Issue 03 (2011-04-10)
1-1
1 Introduction
1.1 Network Application

The OptiX RTN 900 is a new generation TDM/Hybrid/Packet integrate microwave transmission system developed by Huawei. It provides a seamless microwave transmission solution for a mobile communication network or private network.
OptiX RTN 900 Product Family

The OptiX RTN 900 products are available in three types: OptiX RTN 910, OptiX RTN 950, and OptiX RTN 980. Users can choose an appropriate type based on the actual requirements. l l l The IDU of the OptiX RTN 910 is 1U high and supports one or two IF boards. The IDU of the OptiX RTN 950 is 2U high and supports one to six IF boards. The IDU of the OptiX RTN 980 is 5U high and supports one to fourteen IF boards.
NOTE
The OptiX RTN 900 product series uses the same types of IF boards and service interface boards.
The OptiX RTN 900 products provide a variety of service interfaces and can be installed easily and configured flexibly. It provides a solution that is integrated with the TDM microwave, Hybrid microwave, and Packet microwave based on the network requirements. It supports the smooth upgrade from the TDM microwave to the Hybrid microwave, and from the Hybrid microwave to the Packet microwave. The solution is able to adapt to changing service scenarios due to evolutions in radio mobile networks. Therefore, this solution meets the transmission requirements of not only 2G and 3G networks, but also future LTE and 4G networks.
OptiX RTN 980

Figure 1-1 shows the microwave transmission solution provided by the OptiX RTN 980. The OptiX RTN 980 is large-capacity nodal microwave equipment deployed at the convergence layer. It supports the convergence of up to 14 radio links, and supports multiple protection schemes.Figure 1-1 shows the microwave transmission solution provided by the OptiX RTN 980.
1-2
Issue 03 (2011-04-10)
1 Introduction
Figure 1-1 Microwave transmission solution provided by the OptiX RTN 980
Raido trassmission network Regional backhaul network
STM-1/4
TDM Network (SDH)
STM-1/4
STM-1/4 Packet Network (PTN) FE/GE ATM
GE
FE/GE
Ethernet Network
FE/GE
(Metro)
Radio link OptiX RTN 980
Cable/fiber OptiX RTN 910/950 RNC BSC
NOTE
l In the solution, the OptiX RTN 980 is connected to an RNC and BSC directly or through a regional backhaul network. l The OptiX RTN 980 provides a wide range of interfaces and service bearer technologies to adapt to the regional backhaul network. The regional backhaul network can be a time-division multiplexing (TDM) network or packet switching network (PSN). The OptiX RTN 980 supports the pseudo wire emulation edge-to-edge (PWE3) technology, and therefore TDM and ATM services can be backhauled through a PSN.
1.2 Components
The OptiX RTN 980 adopts a split structure. The system consists of the IDU 980 and the ODU. Each ODU is connected to the IDU through an IF cable.
Issue 03 (2011-04-10)
1-3
1 Introduction
IDU 980
The IDU 980 is the indoor unit for an OptiX RTN 980 system. It receives and multiplexes services, performs service processing and IF processing, and provides the system control and communications function. Table 1-1 lists the basic features of the IDU 980. Table 1-1 Features of the IDU 980 Item Chassis height Pluggable Number of microwave directions RF configuration mode Description 5U Supported 1 to 14 1+0 non-protection configuration N+0 non-protection configuration 1+1 protection configuration N+1 protection configuration(N 7) XPIC configuration
Figure 1-2 Appearance of the IDU 980
1-4
Issue 03 (2011-04-10)
1 Introduction
ODU
The ODU is the outdoor unit for the OptiX RTN 900. It converts frequencies and amplifies signals. The OptiX RTN 900 product series can use the RTN 600 ODU and RTN XMC ODU, covering 6 GHz to 38 GHz entire frequency band.
NOTE
Unlike the other frequency bands that use 14 MHz, 28 MHz, or 56 MHz channel spacing, the 18 GHz frequency band uses 13.75 MHz, 27.5 MHz, or 55 MHz channel spacing correspondingly.
Table 1-2 RTN 600 ODUs supported by the OptiX RTN 980 Item Description Standard Power ODU ODU type Frequency band SP, SPA 7/8/11/13/15/18/23/ 26/38 GHz (SP ODU) 6/7/8/11/13/15/18/2 3 GHz (SPA ODU) Microwave modulation mode QPSK/16QAM/ 32QAM/64QAM/ 128QAM/256QAM (SP) QPSK/16QAM/ 32QAM/64QAM/ 128QAM (SPA) Channel spacing 3.5/7/14/28 MHz 7/14/28/40/56 MHz (6/7/8/10/11/13/15/1 8/23/26/28/32/38 GHz) 7/14/28 MHz (10.5 GHz) 3.5/7/14/28 MHz QPSK/16QAM/ 32QAM/64QAM/ 128QAM/256QAM QPSK/16QAM High Power ODU HP 6/7/8/10/10.5/11/13/ 15/18/23/26/28/32/3 8 GHz Low Capacity for PDH ODU LP 7/8/11/13/15/18/23 GHz
Table 1-3 RTN XMC ODUs supported by the OptiX RTN 980 Item Description High Power ODU ODU type Frequency band
Issue 03 (2011-04-10)
Low Capacity for PDH ODU XMC-1 7/8/13/15/18/23 GHz

1-5
XMC-2 7/8/13/15/18/23/26/38 GHz
1 Introduction
Item
Description High Power ODU Low Capacity for PDH ODU QPSK/16QAM 3.5/7/14/28 MHz
Microwave modulation mode Channel spacing
QPSK/16QAM/32QAM/ 64QAM/128QAM/256QAM 7/14/28/40/56 MHz
There are two methods for mounting the ODU and the antenna: direct mounting and separate mounting. l The direct mounting method is usually used when a small-diameter and single-polarized antenna is used. In this situation, if one ODU is configured for one antenna, the ODU is directly mounted at the back of the antenna. If two ODUs are configured for one antenna, an RF signal combiner/splitter (hereinafter referred to as a hybrid coupler) must be mounted to connect the ODUs to the antenna. Figure 1-3 illustrates the direct mounting method. Figure 1-3 Direct mounting
The separate mounting method is used when a double-polarized antenna or big-diameter and single-polarized antenna is used. Figure 1-4 shows the separate method. In this situation, a hybrid coupler can be mounted. That is, two ODUs share one feed boom.
1-6
Issue 03 (2011-04-10)
1 Introduction
Figure 1-4 Separate mounting
NOTE
The OptiX RTN 980 provides an entire frequency band antenna solution, and supports the single-polarized antenna and dual-polarized antenna with a diameter of 0.3 m to 3.7 m and the corresponding feeder system.
1.3 Radio Link Forms

The OptiX RTN 980 provides the radio links of different forms in which different IF boards and ODUs are configured for different microwave application scenarios. Table 1-4 Radio link forms supported by the OptiX RTN 980 Radio Link Form Control, Switching, and Timing Board CSHN CSHN IF Board ODU
Low-capacity PDH microwave SDH/PDH microwave High-capacity SDH microwave High-capacity SDH microwave supporting XPIC Hybrid/Packet microwave
IF1 IF1
Low capacity for PDH ODU Standard power ODU or high power ODU Standard power ODU or high power ODU Standard power ODU or high power ODU Standard power ODU or high power ODU
1-7
CSHN
ISU2
CSHN
ISX2
CSHN
IFU2/ISU2
Issue 03 (2011-04-10)
1 Introduction
Radio Link Form
Control, Switching, and Timing Board CSHN
IF Board
ODU
Hybrid/Packet microwave supporting XPIC
IFX2/ISX2
Standard power ODU or high power ODU
1-8
Issue 03 (2011-04-10)
2 Chassis
2
About This Chapter
Chassis
The IDU of the OptiX RTN 980 is a 5U chassis. It can be deployed in a variety of scenarios and on several different types of racks, cabinets, and surfaces. 2.1 Chassis Structure The dimensions (H x W x D) of the IDU 980 chassis are 225 mm x 442 mm x 220 mm. The IDU 980 chassis has a ten-layered structure that is air cooled. 2.2 Installation Mode The IDU 980 can be deployed in a variety of scenarios and on several different types of racks, cabinets, and surfaces. 2.3 Air Flow An IDU 980 chassis is air-cooled with air in on the left side and air out on the right side. 2.4 IDU Labels Product nameplate labels, qualification card labels, ESD protection labels, grounding labels, laser safety class labels, high temperature warning labels, and operation warning labels, and other types of labels are affixed in their respective positions on the IDU chassis or boards. Adhere to the warnings and instructions on the labels when performing various types of tasks in order to avoid bodily injury or damage to the equipment.
Issue 03 (2011-04-10)
2-1
2 Chassis
2.1 Chassis Structure

The dimensions (H x W x D) of the IDU 980 chassis are 225 mm x 442 mm x 220 mm. The IDU 980 chassis has a ten-layered structure that is air cooled. Figure 2-1 shows the chassis structure of the IDU 980. Figure 2-1 Chassis structure of the IDU 980
2.2 Installation Mode

The IDU 980 can be deployed in a variety of scenarios and on several different types of racks, cabinets, and surfaces. The IDU 980 can be installed: l l l l
2-2
In a 300 mm European Telecommunications Standards Institute (ETSI) cabinet In a 600 mm ETSI cabinet In a 450 mm 19-inch cabinet In a 600 mm 19-inch cabinet
2 Chassis
l l
In a 19-inch open rack In an outdoor cabinet for wireless equipment
2.3 Air Flow

An IDU 980 chassis is air-cooled with air in on the left side and air out on the right side. Figure 2-2 shows the air flow in an IDU 980 chassis. Figure 2-2 Air flow in an IDU 980 chassis
2.4 IDU Labels

Product nameplate labels, qualification card labels, ESD protection labels, grounding labels, laser safety class labels, high temperature warning labels, and operation warning labels, and other types of labels are affixed in their respective positions on the IDU chassis or boards. Adhere to the warnings and instructions on the labels when performing various types of tasks in order to avoid bodily injury or damage to the equipment.
Issue 03 (2011-04-10)
2-3
2 Chassis
Label Description
Table 2-1 provides the description of the labels on the IDU chassis and boards. Actual labels may vary depending on the configurations of the chassis and boards. Table 2-1 Description of the IDU labels Label Label Name ESD protection label Description Indicates that the equipment is sensitive to static electricity. Indicates the grounding position of the IDU chassis. Warns you not to touch fan leaves when the fan is rotating. Indicates that the board surface temperature may exceed 70C when the ambient temperature is higher than 55C. Wear protective gloves to handle the board. Instructs you to read related instructions before performing any power-related tasks. For details, see Labels in 3.14.4 Front Panel.
/QUALIFICATION CARD
Grounding label
Fan warning label
High temperature warning label
Power caution label
Qualification card label
HUAWEI
HUAWEI TECHNOLOGIES CO.,LTD.
MADE IN CHINA
Indicates that the equipment has been quality checked.
2-4
Issue 03 (2011-04-10)
2 Chassis
Label
Label Name RoHS label
Description Indicates that the equipment complies with the related requirements specified in the RoHS directive.
Product nameplate label
Indicates the product name and certification.
Operation guidance label

PULL
Instructs you to slightly pull the switch lever outwards before setting the switch to the "I" or "O" position.
Label Position
Figure 2-3 shows the positions of the labels on the chassis of the IDU 980.
Issue 03 (2011-04-10)
2-5
2 Chassis
Figure 2-3 Positions of the IDU 980 labels
!
/QUALIFICATION CARD
22kg(48.41b)
HUAWEI
HUAW EI TE CHNOLOGIES CO.,LTD.
MADE IN CHINA
CAUTION
Hazardous moving parts,keep fingers and other body parts away.
WARNING -48V OUTPUT TURN OFF POWER BEFORE DISCONNECTING IF CABLE
2-6
Issue 03 (2011-04-10)
3 Boards
3
About This Chapter
Boards
The IDU 980 supports the following types of boards: system control, switching, and timing boards, IF boards, Ethernet boards, SDH boards, PDH boards, power supply boards, and fan boards. 3.1 Board Appearance The dimensions (H x W x D) of the board in the extended slot of the IDU 980 chassis are 19.82 mm x 193.80 mm x 225.80 mm. The dimensions (H x W x D) of the system control, switching, and timing board in the IDU 980 are 23.60 mm x 378.40 mm x 205.70 mm. 3.2 Board List The IDU 980 provides various functions with different boards inserted. 3.3 CSHN The CSHN is the integrated system control, switching, and timing board. 3.4 IF1 The IF1 is a medium-capacity SDH IF board. The IF1 uses the DC-I power distribution mode. 3.5 IFU2 The IFU2 is a universal IF board that supports the Integrated IP radio mode. The IFU2 uses the DC-I power distribution mode. 3.6 IFX2 The IFX2 is a universal IF board that supports the XPIC function in Integrated IP radio mode. The IFX2 uses the DC-I power distribution mode. 3.7 ISU2 The ISU2 is a universal IF board that supports the Integrated IP radio mode and SDH radio mode at the same time. The ISU2 uses the DC-I power distribution mode. 3.8 ISX2 The ISX2 is a universal XPIC IF board and provides the XPIC function for signals transmitted/ received in Integrated IP radio mode and SDH radio mode. The ISX2 uses the DC-I power distribution mode. 3.9 EM6T/EM6F The EM6T/EM6F is an FE/GE interface board, which provides four FE electrical ports and two GE ports. The EM6T has similar functions to the EM6F. The only difference is as follows: The
Issue 03 (2011-04-10) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 3-1
3 Boards
GE ports on the EM6T use fixed electrical ports whereas the GE ports on the EM6F use the SFP modules and therefore can function as two optical or electrical ports. The GE electrical ports on the EM6F and the EM6T are compatible with the FE electrical ports. 3.10 SL1D The SL1D is a 2xSTM-1 optical interface board. 3.11 ML1/MD1 The ML1 is a 16xSmart E1 service processing board. The MD1 is a 32xSmart E1 service processing board. 3.12 SP3S/SP3D The SP3S is a 16xE1 75-ohm/120-ohm tributary board. The SP3D is a 32xE1 75-ohm/120-ohm tributary board. 3.13 AUX The AUX is an auxiliary management interface board of the OptiX RTN 980. One NE can house only one AUX. 3.14 PIU The PIU is the power interface board. The OptiX RTN 980 supports two PIUs, each of which accesses one -48 V/-60 V DC power supply. 3.15 FAN The FAN is a fan board that dissipates heat generated in the chassis through air cooling.
3-2
Issue 03 (2011-04-10)
3 Boards
3.1 Board Appearance

The dimensions (H x W x D) of the board in the extended slot of the IDU 980 chassis are 19.82 mm x 193.80 mm x 225.80 mm. The dimensions (H x W x D) of the system control, switching, and timing board in the IDU 980 are 23.60 mm x 378.40 mm x 205.70 mm.
NOTE
The depth of the board refers to the distance between the front panel and the end of the PCB.
Board Appearance
Figure 3-1 shows the appearance of an ISU2 board in an IDU 980 chassis. Figure 3-1 Appearance of an ISU2 board
Bar Code
The front panel of a board has two ejector levers and two captive screws. The ejector levers help you remove or insert a board. The captive screws fasten a board to the chassis. A board bar code (as shown in Figure 3-2) is attached to one of the ejector levers. Figure 3-2 Bar code
Bar code
0514721055000015-SL91EM6F01
Internal code Board version Board name Board feature code
Issue 03 (2011-04-10)
3-3
3 Boards
NOTE
Only the bar codes of some boards contain board feature codes, which further classify boards. For example, the feature codes of some boards using SFP modules (such as EM6F) indicate the type of SFP module being used, and the feature codes of some other boards providing E1 ports (such as SP3S) indicate the impedance of E1 ports.
3.2 Board List

The IDU 980 provides various functions with different boards inserted. Figure 3-3 IDU slot layout
Slot 26 (PIU) Slot 13 (EXT) Slot 11 (EXT) Slot 9 (EXT) Slot 28 (FAN) Slot 7 (EXT) Slot 15 (CSHN) Slot 5 (EXT) Slot 3 (EXT) Slot 1 (EXT) Slot 6 (EXT) Slot 4 (EXT) Slot 2 (EXT) Slot 20 (CSHN) Slot 8 (EXT) Slot 27 (PIU) Slot 14 (EXT) Slot 12 (EXT) Slot 10 (EXT)
NOTE
EXT represents an extended slot, which can house any type of IF board or interface board.
3-4
Issue 03 (2011-04-10)
3 Boards
Table 3-1 List of IDU boards Board Acronym CSHN Board Name Hybrid control, switching, and timing board Valid Slot Slot 15/20 Description l Supports the TDM cross-connect function, provides 128x128 VC-4 higher order cross-connections and VC-12/VC-3 lower order cross-connections equivalent to 32x32 VC-4s. l Supports the 22 Gbit/s packet switching function. l Performs system communications and control. l Processes clocks and provides one clock input/output interface. l Provides one network management interface, one network management serial port, and one NE cascading interface. l Uses the SFP module to provide two STM-1 or STM-4 optical interfaces. l Provides two GE interfaces (Each GE interface can use an RJ45 electrical interface or an SFP optical interface independently.) ISU2 Universal IF board Slot 1 to slot 14 l Provides one IF interface l Supports integrated IP microwave and SDH microwave. The supported service modes can be Native E1+Ethernet, Native STM-1+Ethernet or SDH (1xSTM-1 or 2xSTM-1). l Supports the AM function. l Supports highly efficient encapsulation technology ISX2 Universal XPIC IF board Slot 1 to slot 14 l Provides one IF interface l Supports integrated IP microwave and SDH microwave. The supported service modes can be Native E1+Ethernet, Native STM-1+Ethernet or SDH (1xSTM-1 or 2xSTM-1). l Supports the XPIC function. l Supports the AM function. l Supports highly efficient encapsulation technology
Issue 03 (2011-04-10)
3-5
3 Boards
Board Acronym IF1
Board Name SDH IF board
Valid Slot Slot 1 to slot 14
Description l Provides one IF interface. l Supports the TU-based PDH microwave solution and the STM-1-based SDH microwave solution. l Provides one IF interface. l Supports the integrated IP microwave. l Supports the AM function.
IFU2
Universal IF board
Slot 1 to slot 14
IFX2
Universal XPIC IF board
Slot 1 to slot 14
l Provides one IF interface. l Supports the integrated IP microwave. l Supports the XPIC function. l Supports the AM function.
SL1D
2xSTM-1 interface board 6 Port RJ45 Ethernet/ Gigabit Ethernet Interface Board 4 Port RJ45 + 2 Port SFP Fast Ethernet/ Gigabit Ethernet Interface Board 16xE1 (smart) tributary board 32xE1 (smart) tributary board 16xE1 tributary board
Slot 1 to slot 14 Slot 1 to slot 14
Uses the SFP module to provide two STM-1 optical interfaces. l Provides four FE electrical interfaces. l Provides two GE electrical interfaces that are compatible with the FE electrical interface.
EM6T
EM6F
Slot 1 to slot 14
l Provides four FE electrical interfaces. l Uses the SFP module to provide two GE optical or electrical interfaces. The GE electrical interfaces are compatible with the FE electrical interfaces.
ML1
Slot 1 to slot 14
l Provides sixteen 75-ohm or 120-ohm smart E1 interfaces. l Supports CES E1, ATM/IMA E1, and fractional E1.
MD1
Slot 1 to slot 14
l Provides thirty-two 75-ohm or 120-ohm smart E1 interfaces. l Supports CES E1, ATM/IMA E1, and fractional E1.
SP3S
Slot 1 to slot 14
Provides sixteen 75-ohm or 120-ohm TDM E1 interfaces.
3-6
Issue 03 (2011-04-10)
3 Boards
Board Acronym SP3D
Board Name 32xE1 tributary board Auxiliary interface board Power board Fan board
Valid Slot Slot 1 to slot 14 Slot 1 to slot 14
Description Provides thirty-two 75-ohm or 120-ohm TDM E1 interfaces. Provides one orderwire interface, one asynchronous data interface, one synchronous data interface, and four-input and two-output external alarm interfaces. Provides one -48 V/-60 V DC power input. Cools and ventilates the IDU.
AUX
PIU FAN
Slot 26 or slot 27 Slot 28
3.3 CSHN
The CSHN is the integrated system control, switching, and timing board. 3.3.1 Version Description The functional version of the CSHN is SLB1. 3.3.2 Functions and Features The CSHN provides 22 Gbit/s packet switching, full time division cross-connection, system control and communication, and clock processing functions. The CSHN provides GE service ports, STM-1/4 service ports, auxiliary ports, and management ports. 3.3.3 Working Principle The CSHN consists of the system control and communication unit, packet switching unit, crossconnect unit, clock unit, service interface unit, and auxiliary interface unit. 3.3.4 Front Panel There are indicators, buttons, service ports, latches, clock ports, auxiliary ports, and management ports on the front panel. 3.3.5 DIP Switches and CF Card This board has a set of DIP switches and a pluggable CF (compact flash) card. 3.3.6 Valid Slots The CSHN can be inserted in slots 15 and 20. For the NMS to manage function units on the CSHN, the function units are mapped into specific logical boards and allocated proper logical slots on the NMS. 3.3.7 Types of SFP Modules The GE port and STM-1/4 optical port on the CSHN board support multiple types of SFP modules. 3.3.8 Board Parameter Settings This section provides hyperlinks of the main parameter settings for the CSHN. 3.3.9 Technical Specifications
Issue 03 (2011-04-10)
3-7
3 Boards
This section describes the board specifications, including the packet switching capacity, crossconnection capability, performance of Ethernet ports, STM-1/4 ports, clocks, and wayside service port, board mechanical behavior, and board power consumption.
3.3.1 Version Description

The functional version of the CSHN is SLB1.
3.3.2 Functions and Features

The CSHN provides 22 Gbit/s packet switching, full time division cross-connection, system control and communication, and clock processing functions. The CSHN provides GE service ports, STM-1/4 service ports, auxiliary ports, and management ports. Table 3-2 lists the functions and features that the CSHN supports. Table 3-2 Functions and features that the CSHN supports Function and Feature Basic functions Switching capability Cross-connect capacity CSHN Supports 22 Gbit/s packet switching function. l Supports higher order cross-connections, which are equivalent to 128x128 VC-4s. l Supports full time division lower order crossconnections (equivalent to 32x32 VC-4s) at the VC-12 or VC-3 level. System control and communication Clock Clock synchronization at the physical layer Manages, monitors, and controls the running status of the IDU, and works as a communication service unit between the NMS and boards to help the NMS to control and manage the NE. Provides the system clock and frame headers for service signals and overhead signals for the other boards when tracing an appropriate clock source. The traced clock source can be any of the following: l External clock l SDH line clock l PDH tributary clock l Clock at the air interface l Synchronous Ethernet clock Clock protection Supports the following clock protection schemes: l Protection based on clock source priorities l Protection by running the SSM protocol l Protection by running the extended SSM protocol l 1+1 backup for the system clock DCN
3-8
Outband DCN
Supports a maximum of 33 DCCs.

Issue 03 (2011-04-10)
3 Boards
Function and Feature Inband DCN Protection 1+1 hot backup
CSHN Supports the inband DCN function. The DCN bandwidth is configurable. Supported Supported See Table 3-3.
MPLS/PWE3 functions
QoS functions
Supported See Table 3-4.
Ethernet service functions
STM-1/4 service functions
Auxiliary ports and management ports
Ethernet NM port NM serial port NE cascading port
1 1 1 Supported Supported Supported
OM
Warm reset and cold reset In-service FPGA loading Board manufacturing information query Board temperature detection Board voltage detection Detection of indicators on the other boards Hot swapping function Pluggable CF card
Supported
Supported Supported
Supported Supported
Issue 03 (2011-04-10)
3-9
3 Boards
The packet switching unit of the CSHN works with its service interface unit or a service board to implement MPLS/PWE3 functions. Table 3-3 provides details about these functions. Table 3-3 MPLS/PWE3 functions Function and Feature MPLS tunnel Setup mode Protection OAM CSHN Static LSPs 1:1 MPLS tunnel APS Supports the following OAM functions: l MPLS OAM that complies with ITU-T Y.1711 l LSP ping and LSP traceroute functions PWE3 Service categories Supports the following service categories: l CES services l ATM PWE3 services l ETH PWE3 services Setup mode Protection OAM Static PWs 1:1 PW APS Supports the following OAM functions: l VCCV l PW OAM that complies with ITU-T Y.1711. l PW ping and PW traceroute functions MS-PW Configurable bandwidth Supported Supported
The packet switching unit of the CSHN works with its service interface unit or a service board to implement QoS functions. Table 3-4 provides details about these functions. Table 3-4 QoS functions Function and Feature DiffServ CSHN Supports simple traffic classification by specifying PHB service classes for service flows based on their QoS information (C-VLAN priorities, S-VLAN priorities, DSCP values, or MPLS EXP values) carried by the packets.
3-10
Issue 03 (2011-04-10)
3 Boards
Function and Feature Ethernet complex traffic classification
CSHN Supports traffic classification based on C-VLAN IDs, S-VLAN IDs, C-VLAN priorities, S-VLAN priorities, C-VLAN IDs + C-VLAN priorities, S-VLAN IDs + S-VLAN priorities, or DSCP values carried by packets. Provides the CAR function for traffic flows at ports. Provides traffic shaping for a specific port, prioritized queue, or traffic flow. Supports the following queue scheduling policies: l SP l WRR l SP+WRR
CAR Shaping Queue scheduling policies
The Ethernet service interface unit of the CSHN works with its packet switching unit to implement Ethernet service functions. Table 3-5 provides details about these functions. Table 3-5 Ethernet service functions Function and Feature Basic functions CSHN Receives/Transmits GE service signals and works with the packet switching unit to process the received GE service signals. GE electrical port (fixed): 10/100/1000BA SE-T(X) GE port: SFP optical module (1000BASE-SX and 1000BASELX) Port attributes Working mode 2
Port specifications
l The GE electrical port supports 10M full-duplex, 100M full-duplex, 1000M full-duplex, and autonegotiation. l The GE optical port supports 1000M full-duplex and auto-negotiation.
TAG attribute
l Sets and queries the TAG attribute of an Ethernet port. l The TAG attribute can be set to tag aware, access, or hybrid.
Issue 03 (2011-04-10)
3-11
3 Boards
Function and Feature Jumbo frame Traffic control function Services E-Line services
CSHN Supports jumbo frames with a maximum frame length of 9600 bytes. Supports the port-based traffic control function that complies with IEEE 802.3x. Supports the following types of E-Line services: l E-Line services based on ports l E-Line services based on port+VLAN l E-Line services carried by QinQ links l E-Line services carried by PWs
E-LAN services
Supports the following types of E-LAN services: l E-LAN services based on IEEE 802.1d bridges l E-LAN services based on IEEE 802.1q bridges l E-LAN services based on IEEE 802.1ad bridges
LAG
Inter-board LAG Intra-board LAG
Supported Supported Supports the ERPS function that complies with ITU-T G.8032/Y.1344. Supports the MSTP protocol that generates only the CIST. The MSTP protocol provides functions equivalent to that of the RSTP protocol. Supported
ERPS Spanning tree protocol
LPT ETH OAM IEEE 802.1ag OAM
Supports the following IEEE 802.1ag OAM functions: l Management of OAM maintenance points l Continuity check test l Loopback test l Link trace test
IEEE 802.3ah OAM
Supports the following IEEE 802.3ah OAM functions: l OAM automatic discovery l Link performance monitoring l Fault detection l Remote loopback test l Loopback detection and blocking of a port being looped back
RMON
Supported
3-12
Issue 03 (2011-04-10)
3 Boards
Function and Feature Clock Clock source Clock protection
CSHN Synchronous Ethernet (not supported by the SFP electrical module) Supports the following clock protection schemes: l Protection based on clock source priorities l Protection by running the SSM protocol l Protection by running the extended SSM protocol
DCN OAM
Inband DCN Loopback
Each GE port provides one inband DCN channel. Supports the following loopback types: l Inloops at the PHY layer of Ethernet ports l Inloops at the MAC layer of Ethernet ports
Warm reset Query of SFP module information
Supported Supported
Table 3-6 provides details about the STM-1/4 service functions that the CSHN supports. Table 3-6 STM-1/4 service functions Function and Feature Basic functions Service categories CSHN Receives and transmits 2xSTM-1/4 signals. l STM-1 l STM-4 Port specifications l STM-1: Ie-1, S-1.1, L-1.1, and L-1.2 l STM-4: S-4.1, L-4.1, and L-4.2 l The performance characteristics of the ports comply with ITU-T G.957 and the jitter performance of the ports complies with ITU-T G.823. DCN Protection Outband DCN Linear multiplex section protection (MSP) Ring MSP SNCP Clock
Issue 03 (2011-04-10)
Supported Supported
Supported Supported Each line port provides one SDH line clock signal.
3-13
Clock source
3 Boards
Function and Feature Clock protection
CSHN Supports the following clock protection schemes: l Protection based on clock source priorities l Protection by running the SSM protocol l Protection by running the extended SSM protocol
OM
Loopback
Supports the following loopback types: l Inloops and outloops on VC-4 paths l Inloops and outloops at STM-1/4 optical ports
Cold reset and warm reset Setting of the on/off state of a laser ALS functiona Query of SFP optical module information
Supported Supported
Supported Supported
NOTE
a: The ALS function is implemented as follows: l When the optical module detects the R_LOS alarm at the receive port and the alarm persists for 500 ms, the laser at the specific transmit port is automatically shut down. l The laser starts to launch laser pulses at a specified interval; that is, the laser emits light for two seconds and stops emission for 60 seconds. l After the R_LOS alarm is cleared, the laser works properly and emits continuous light.
3.3.3 Working Principle

The CSHN consists of the system control and communication unit, packet switching unit, crossconnect unit, clock unit, service interface unit, and auxiliary interface unit.
3-14
Issue 03 (2011-04-10)
3 Boards
Functional Block Diagram

Figure 3-4 Functional block diagram of the CSHN
Backplane GE bus Packet switching unit GE bus Ethernet service board/Packet switching unit of the paired board
GE signal
GE signal access unit
STM-1/4 signal
STM-1/4 signal processing unit
VC-4 signal
Crossconnect unit
VC-4 signal
TDM service unit/Cross-connect unit of the paired board
Control bus Clock signal received from other boards Clock signal provided to other boards System control and communication unit
Ethernet NM port NM serial port NE cascading port
System control and communication unit
Clock unit
FE signal Clock signal received from the service unit on the board Clock/Time port External clock signal 3.3 V power supplied to the other units on the board Power supply unit Clock signal provided to the other units on the board
-48 V 1 -48 V 2
System Control and Communication Unit

The system control and communication unit consists of the CPU unit and logic control unit. The system control and communication unit performs the following functions: l l l l l The CPU unit controls and manages the other units on the board and collects alarms and performance events using the control bus. The CPU unit controls and manages the other boards in the IDU and collects alarms and performance events using the control bus. The CPU unit controls and manages the ODU by transmitting the ODU control signal to the SMODEM unit in the IF board over the control bus in the backplane. The CPU unit enables the packet switching unit using the control bus to groom Ethernet service packets. The CPU unit processes Ethernet protocol packets from the packet switching unit using the control bus.
Issue 03 (2011-04-10)
3-15
3 Boards
l l l l l
The CPU unit processes network management messages in DCCs using the logic control unit. The CPU unit communicates with the NMS by its Ethernet NM port and NE cascading port. The CPU unit implements software loading by reading information from the CF card with the bus. The logic control unit decodes the address read/write signals from the CPU unit and enables FPGA loading. The logic control unit cross-connects the overheads between the auxiliary interface unit, the CPU unit, and other boards. This helps to achieve the following purposes: Adding or dropping DCC information processed by the CPU unit Adding or dropping orderwire and asynchronous data services Exchanging the orderwire bytes, DCC bytes, and K bytes between different lines
The system control and communication unit on a CSHN board communicates with the system control and communication unit on the paired CSHN board by carrying FE signals over the communication bus in the backplane. In this manner, 1+1 hot backup between paired boards is achieved.
Packet Switching Unit

The packet switching unit grooms services and processes protocols for Ethernet services (including Native Ethernet services and MPLS/PWE3 packets carried over Ethernet). l After receiving services from the Ethernet interface unit on the board or a service board, the packet switching unit grooms the services based on the configurations that are delivered by the system control and communication unit. After receiving protocol packets from the Ethernet interface unit on the board or a service board, the packet switching unit transmits the protocol packets to the system control and communication unit for processing. After processing, the system control and communication unit sends the protocol packets back to the packet switching unit. The packet switching unit transmits the protocol packets to the Ethernet interface unit or the service board. The packet switching unit exchanges data service signals with the packet switching unit of the paired board over the GE pass-through bus.
Cross-Connect Unit
The cross-connect unit grooms services over the entire system using the higher order crossconnect module and the lower order cross-connect module. Figure 3-5 shows the functional block diagram of the cross-connect unit.
3-16
Issue 03 (2011-04-10)
3 Boards
Figure 3-5 Functional block diagram of the cross-connect unit

Source TDM service unit SinkTDM service unit
Higher order cross-connect module HOXC
Lower order cross-connect module LOXC
The source TDM service unit transmits VC-4 signals to the higher order cross-connect module over VC-4 buses. If the VC-4 signals carry only VC-4 services, the higher order cross-connect module processes the VC-4 signals and then transmits the signals to the sink TDM service unit. If the VC-4 signals include VC-12 or VC-3 services, the higher order cross-connect module grooms the VC-12 or VC-3 services to the lower order cross-connect module. The lower order cross-connect module processes the VC-12 or VC-3 services and then transmits the services back to the higher order cross-connect module. The higher order cross-connect module processes the services and then transmits the services to the sink TDM service unit. The cross-connect unit exchanges TDM service signals with the cross-connect unit of the paired board over the TDM pass-through bus.
GE Signal Access Unit

The GE signal access unit allows access of two GE optical signals or two GE electrical signals and works with the Layer 2 switching unit to provide Ethernet service processing functions. l In the receive direction: After performing O/E conversion, restructuring, decoding, and serial/parallel conversion for GE optical signals or after performing restructuring, decoding, and serial/parallel conversion for GE electrical signals, the GE signal access unit extracts framed GE signals by delimiting frames and adding preambles. The GE signal access unit also performs CRC checks and Ethernet performance measurement. In the transmit direction: After delimiting frames, adding preambles, calculating CRC codes, and measuring Ethernet performance, the GE signal access unit performs parallel/ serial conversion and encoding and then transmits GE signals to the GE electrical port or the GE optical port after performing E/O conversion.
STM-1/4 Signal Processing Unit

The STM-1/4 signal processing unit transmits/receives and processes two STM-1/4 signals, extracts clock signals, restores data, scrambles/descrambles data, processes overheads, and processes pointers. l In the receive direction, the STM-1/4 signal processing unit performs the following functions:
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 3-17
Issue 03 (2011-04-10)
3 Boards
Regenerates STM-1/4 signals and performs O/E conversion. Restores and descrambles clock data. Extracts and processes overhead bytes, adjusts AU pointer, and sends pointer indication signals and VC-4 signal to the cross-connect unit. l In the transmit direction, the STM-1/4 signal processing unit performs the following functions: Receives VC-4 signals and pointer indication signals from the cross-connect unit and processes clock signals. Sets AU pointers and overhead bytes. Scrambles signals and performs E/O conversion.
Clock Unit
The clock unit selects an appropriate clock source from external clock sources or service clock sources at service ports based on clock priorities. Locking the clock source by means of the phase-locked loop, the clock unit provides the system clock and frame headers for service signals and overhead signals to other units on the system control, switching, and timing board and the other boards.
Power Supply Unit

The power supply unit combines and then converts the -48 V power inputs into the power supply required by the chips of the other units on the local board.
3.3.4 Front Panel

There are indicators, buttons, service ports, latches, clock ports, auxiliary ports, and management ports on the front panel.
Front Panel Diagram

Figure 3-6 Front panel of the CSHN
CSHN
1
STAT PROG SYNC SRV ACT LOS1 LOS2 LINK1 ACT1 LINK2 ACT2 CRIT MAJ MIN
GE1
TX RX 1 CF RCV RST LAMP NMS/COM EXT CLK/TOD1 MON/TOD2 2 1 2 GE GE2
GE
SYS
STM-1/4
1. Indicators 4. STM-1/4 optical ports (using SFP optical modules) 7. Latches
2. Buttons 5. GE optical service ports (using SFP optical modules) -
3. Clock ports, auxiliary ports, and management ports 6. GE electrical service ports (fixed) -
3-18
Issue 03 (2011-04-10)
3 Boards
Indicators
Table 3-7 Status explanation for indicators on the CSHN Indicator STAT State On (green) On (red) Off Meaning The board is working properly. The board hardware is faulty. l The board is not working. l The board is not created. l There is no power supplied to the board. PROG Blinks on (green) and off at 100 ms intervals Blinks on (green) and off at 300 ms intervals On (green) Software is being loaded to the board during the power-on or resetting process of the board. The board software is in BIOS boot state during the power-on or resetting process of the board. l When the board is being powered on or being reset, the upper layer software is being initialized. l When the board is running, the software is running normally. Blinks on (red) and off at 100 ms intervals On (red) The BOOTROM self-check fails during the power-on or resetting process of the board. The memory self-check fails or loading upper layer software fails during the power-on or resetting process of the board. The logic file or upper layer software is lost during the running process of the board. The pluggable storage card is faulty. SYNC On (green) On (red) SRV On (green) On (red) On (yellow) The clock is working properly. The clock source is lost or a clock switchover occurs. The system is working properly. A critical or major alarm occurs in the system. A minor or remote alarm occurs in the system.
Issue 03 (2011-04-10)
3-19
3 Boards
Indicator
State Off
Meaning There is no power supplied to the system. In a 1+1 protected system, the board works as the active one. In an unprotected system, the board has been activated.
ACT
On (green)
Off
In a 1+1 protected system, the board works as the standby one. In an unprotected system, the board is not activated.
LOS1
On (red) Off
The first optical port on the line is reporting the R_LOS alarm. The first optical port on the line is free of R_LOS alarms. The second optical port on the line is reporting the R_LOS alarm. The second optical port on the line is free of R_LOS alarms. The connection at the GE1 port is working properly. The connection at the GE1 port is interrupted. Data is being transmitted or received at the GE1 port. No data is being transmitted or received at the GE1 port. The connection at the GE2 port is working properly. The connection at the GE2 port is interrupted. Data is being transmitted or received at the GE2 port. No data is being transmitted or received at the GE2 port. A critical alarm occurs on the NE. A major alarm occurs on the NE. A minor alarm occurs on the NE.
LOS2
On (red) Off
LINK1
On (green) Off
ACT1
On or blinking (yellow) Off
LINK2
On (green) Off
ACT2
CRIT MAJ MIN
On (red) On (orange) On (yellow)
3-20
Issue 03 (2011-04-10)
3 Boards
Clock Ports, Auxiliary Ports, and Management Ports

Table 3-8 Description of the clock ports, auxiliary ports, and management ports Port NMS/COM EXT CLK/TOD1 MON/TOD2 Description Ethernet NM port/NM serial port NE cascading port External clock port(2048 kbit/s or 2048 kHz), external time port 1 , or wayside E1 port RS485 monitoring port/Time port 2 RJ45 Connector Type
NOTE
l The external clock port and wayside E1 port share one port physically. This port can also transparently transmit DCC bytes, orderwire overhead bytes, and synchronous/asynchronous data overhead bytes. This port, however, can implement only one of the preceding functions at a time. l The RS485 monitoring port and time port 2 share one port physically. l The RS485 monitoring port is reserved and is not used in this product version. l Time ports TOD1 and TOD2 are reserved for running the high-precision time protocol (IEEE 1588 protocol) and are not used in this product version.
Auxiliary ports and management ports use RJ45 connectors. The pin assignments for the ports, however, are different. Figure 3-7 shows the front view of the RJ45 connector. Figure 3-7 Front view of the RJ45 connector
87654321
Table 3-9 Pin assignments for the NMS/COM port Port Pin 1 2 NMS/COM 3 4 5 6
Issue 03 (2011-04-10)
Signal Transmitting data (+) Transmitting data (-) Receiving data (+) Grounding end of the NM serial port Receive end of the NM serial port Receiving data (-)
3-21
3 Boards
Port
Pin 7 8
Signal Not defined Transmit end of the NM serial port
Table 3-10 Pin assignments for the EXT port Port Pin 1 2 EXT 3 6 4, 5, 7, 8 Signal Transmitting data (+) Transmitting data (-) Receiving data (+) Receiving data (-) Not defined
NOTE
The EXT port supports the MDI, MDI-X, and auto-MDI/MDI-X modes; that is, the EXT port can transmit data through pins 3 and 6 and receive data through pins 1 and 2.
The RJ45 connector has two indicators. Table 3-11 provides status explanation for these indicators. Table 3-11 Status explanation for the indicators of the RJ45 connector Indicator LINK (green) State On Off ACT (yellow) On or blinking Off Meaning The link is working properly. The link is interrupted. The port is transmitting or receiving data. The port is not transmitting or receiving data.
NOTE
The NMS/COM port and the EXT port are equivalent to two ports on a hub. This means that no external Ethernet link should be configured between the two ports during the networking process; otherwise, an Ethernet loop will be formed. As a result, a broadcast storm is generated on the network, leading to repeated resetting of NEs.
Figure 3-8 shows the two common incorrect connections.
3-22
Issue 03 (2011-04-10)
3 Boards
Figure 3-8 Incorrect connections between the NMS/COM port and the EXT port
CSHN
1
GE1
GE
SYS
STM-1/4
LAN
CSHN
1
GE1
GE
SYS
STM-1/4
The clock port (CLK) and the high-precision time port (TOD1) use different pins of the same RJ45 connector. Table 3-12 provides details about the pin assignments for the CLK/TOD1 port. The CLK/TOD1 port can work only in one mode at one time and does not support two or more modes at the same time. Table 3-12 Pin assignments for the CLK/TOD1 port Pin Working Mode External Clock External Time Input (1PPS + Time Informati on) 1 2 3 CLK receiving (-) CLK receiving (+) Not defined Not defined Not defined 1PPS signal input (-) (RS-422 level) 4 CLK transmitting (-) CLK transmitting (+) Grounding end Grounding end External Time Output (1PPS + Time Information ) Not defined Not defined 1PPS signal output (-) (RS-422 level) Grounding end Grounding end Not defined Not defined DCLS time signal input (-) (RS-422 level) Grounding end Grounding end External Time Input (DCLS) External Time Output (DCLS)
Not defined Not defined DCLS time signal output (-) (RS-422 level) Grounding end Grounding end
Issue 03 (2011-04-10)
3-23
3 Boards
Pin
Working Mode External Clock External Time Input (1PPS + Time Informati on) External Time Output (1PPS + Time Information ) 1PPS signal output (+) (RS-422 level) Time information output (-) (RS-422 level) Time information output (+) (RS-422 level) Not defined Not defined DCLS time signal input (+) (RS-422 level) Not defined External Time Input (DCLS) External Time Output (DCLS)
Not defined
1PPS signal input (+) (RS-422 level)
DCLS time signal output (+) (RS-422 level) Not defined
Not defined
Time information input (-) (RS-422 level)
Not defined
Time information input (+) (RS-422 level)
The RS485 monitoring port and the external time port share the MON/TOD2 port physically. Table 3-13 provides details about the pin assignments for the MON/TOD2 port. Table 3-13 Pin assignments for the MON/TOD2 port Pin Working Mode External Time Input (1PPS + Time Informati on) 1 2 Not defined Not defined External Time Output (1PPS + Time Information ) Not defined Not defined Not defined Not defined External Time Input (DCLS) External Time Output (DCLS) RS485 Monitoring Port
Not defined Not defined
Not defined Not defined
3-24
Issue 03 (2011-04-10)
3 Boards
Pin
Working Mode External Time Input (1PPS + Time Informati on) External Time Output (1PPS + Time Information ) 1PPS signal output (-) (RS-422 level) Grounding end Grounding end 1PPS signal output (+) (RS-422 level) Time information output (-) (RS-422 level) Time information output (+) (RS-422 level) Not defined Not defined DCLS time signal input (-) (RS-422 level) Grounding end Grounding end DCLS time signal input (+) (RS-422 level) Not defined External Time Input (DCLS) External Time Output (DCLS) RS485 Monitoring Port
1PPS signal input (-) (RS-422 level)
DCLS time signal output (-) (RS-422 level) Grounding end Grounding end DCLS time signal output (+) (RS-422 level) Not defined
RS485 receiving signal (-) (RS-422 level) Grounding end Grounding end RS485 receiving signal (+) (RS-422 level) RS485 transmitting signal (-) (RS-422 level) RS485 transmitting signal (+) (RS-422 level)
4 5 6
Grounding end Grounding end 1PPS signal input (+) (RS-422 level)
Time information input (-) (RS-422 level)
Time information input (+) (RS-422 level)
Buttons
Table 3-14 Buttons Button CF RCV Name CF configuration restoration button Description After this button is pressed and held for 8 seconds, the board automatically restores the NE database from the CF card.
Issue 03 (2011-04-10)
3-25
3 Boards
Button RST LAMP
Name Warm reset button Indicator test button
Description After this button is pressed, a warm reset is performed on the board. After this button is pressed, the indicators on all the boards of the NE become on.
Latches
There is a latch near each ejector lever on the front panel of the board. When removing a board, you can rotate the ejector levers only after pushing the latches to the middle positions. In addition, rotating the ejector levers triggers the tact switch on the board and then triggers working/ protection switching.
Service Ports
Table 3-15 Description of the service ports on the CSHN Port 2xSTM-1 2xGE 2xGE Description STM-1/4 optical port GE optical port GE electrical ports (fixed) Connector Type LC SFP optical module LC SFP optical module RJ45
NOTE
l The four GE ports share two GE channels. That is, the GE1 ports share one GE channel and the GE2 ports share the other GE channel. Only one of the two ports that share one GE channel can transmit/ receive services at one time. l On the NMS, GE1 and GE2 correspond to PORT1 and PORT2 respectively.
SFP optical modules are used to provide GE optical ports and STM-1/4 optical ports; one SFP optical module provides one TX port and one RX port. For details, see Figure 3-9, in which TX represents the transmit port and RX represents the receive port. Figure 3-9 Ports of the SFP optical module
TX
RX
The GE electrical ports support the MDI, MDI-X, and auto-MDI/MDI-X modes. Table 3-16 and Table 3-17 provide the pin assignments for the RJ45 connector in different modes.
3-26
Issue 03 (2011-04-10)
3 Boards
Table 3-16 Pin assignments for the RJ45 connector in MDI mode Pin 1000BASE-T Signal 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 BIDA+ BIDABIDB+ BIDC+ BIDCBIDBBIDD+ BIDDFunction Bidirectional data wire A (+) Bidirectional data wire A (-) Bidirectional data wire B (+) Bidirectional data wire C (+) Bidirectional data wire C (-) Bidirectional data wire B (-) Bidirectional data wire D (+) Bidirectional data wire D (-)
Table 3-17 Pin assignments for the RJ45 connector in MDI-X mode Pin 1000BASE-T Signal 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 BIDB+ BIDBBIDA+ BIDD+ BIDDBIDABIDC+ BIDCFunction Bidirectional data wire B (+) Bidirectional data wire B (-) Bidirectional data wire A (+) Bidirectional data wire D (+) Bidirectional data wire D (-) Bidirectional data wire A (-) Bidirectional data wire C (+) Bidirectional data wire C (-)
The RJ45 connector has two indicators. The status explanation for the two indicators is the same as that for the indicators on the RJ45 connector of the NMS/COM port.
3.3.5 DIP Switches and CF Card

This board has a set of DIP switches and a pluggable CF (compact flash) card. NE databases, system parameters (including NE-IP, NE-ID, and subnet mask), software packages, and NE logs are stored on the CF card. After you press the CRV button on the system control, switching, and timing board and hold it for eight seconds, the data stored on the CF card will be loaded to the board. To synchronize the NE databases, system parameters, and NE logs
3 Boards
on the system control, switching, and timing board to the CF card, enable the regular backup function.
NOTE
The software packages on the CF card are synchronized with those on the system control, switching, and timing board during package diffusion. Therefore, automatic backup mechanisms or manual operations are not needed to synchronize software packages on the system control, switching, and timing board and the CF card. If the system control, switching, and timing board and the CF card have different software packages or data, the SWDL_PKGVER_MM alarm will be reported.
Figure 3-10 Positions of the DIP switches and CF card
1 2 3 4
1. DIP switches
2. CF card
ON DIP
Table 3-18 Setting DIP switches Setting of DIP Switchesa 1 0 0 0 0 0 2 0 0 0 0 1 3 0 0 1 1 0 4 0 1 0 1 0 Indicates that the board works with the watchdog enabled. The value is reserved. Indicates that a memory self-check is running. Indicates that the board is being debugged. Indicates that the board works with the watchdog disabled and a full memory check is running. Indicates the BIOS holdover state.
Issue 03 (2011-04-10)
Meaning
0
3-28
3 Boards
Setting of DIP Switchesa 1 0 0 2 1 1 3 1 1 4 0 1
Meaning
Indicates the BIOS exhibition state. The value is reserved. (By default, this value indicates that the board works with the watchdog enabled.) The value is reserved. (By default, this value indicates that the board works with the watchdog enabled.) Restores the data of the CF card. Erases data in the system parameter area. Erases databases. Erases NE software, including patches. Erases databases and NE software, including patches. Erases all data in the file system. Erases all the data except for the board manufacturing information.
1 1 1 1 1 1 1
0 0 0 1 1 1 1
0 1 1 0 0 1 1
1 0 1 0 1 0 1
NOTE
a: When a DIP switch is set to the side with the numbers "1, 2, 3, 4", it represents binary digit 1. When a DIP switch is set to the side with the letters "ON DIP", it represents binary digit 0.
3.3.6 Valid Slots

The CSHN can be inserted in slots 15 and 20. For the NMS to manage function units on the CSHN, the function units are mapped into specific logical boards and allocated proper logical slots on the NMS.
Issue 03 (2011-04-10)
3-29
3 Boards
Figure 3-11 Slots for the CSHN in the IDU chassis

Slot 26 (PIU) Slot 13 (EXT) Slot 11 (EXT) Slot 9 (EXT) Slot 28 (FAN) Slot 20 (CSHN) Slot 7 (EXT) Slot 15 (CSHN) Slot 5 (EXT) Slot 3 (EXT) Slot 1 (EXT) Slot 6 (EXT) Slot 4 (EXT) Slot 2 (EXT) Slot 8 (EXT) Slot 27 (PIU) Slot 14 (EXT) Slot 12 (EXT) Slot 10 (EXT)
Figure 3-12 Logical slots for the logical boards of the CSHN
Slot 26 (PIU) Slot 13 (EXT) Slot 11 (EXT) Slot 9 (EXT) Slot 28 (FAN) Slot 20 (CSHN) Slot 7 (EXT) Slot 15 (CSHN) Slot 5 (EXT) Slot 3 (EXT) Slot 1 (EXT) Slot 16 (SL4D) Slot 21 (SL4D) Slot 27 (PIU) Slot 14 (EXT) Slot 12 (EXT) Slot 10 (EXT) Slot 22 (EG2D) Slot 8 (EXT) Slot 17 (EG2D) Slot 6 (EXT) Slot 4 (EXT) Slot 2 (EXT)
Table 3-19 Slot allocation Item Slot allocation priority Description Slot 15 > Slot 20
3.3.7 Types of SFP Modules

The GE port and STM-1/4 optical port on the CSHN board support multiple types of SFP modules.
3-30 Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. Issue 03 (2011-04-10)
3 Boards
Table 3-20 Types of SFP modules that the GE port supports Part Number 34060286 34060473 Type 1000BASE-SX 1000BASE-LX
Table 3-21 Types of SFP modules that the STM-1/4 optical port supports Part Number 34060287 34060276 34060281 34060282 34060277 34060280 34060284 Type Ie-1 S-1.1 L-1.1 L-1.2 S-4.1 L-4.1 L-4.2
3.3.8 Board Parameter Settings

This section provides hyperlinks of the main parameter settings for the CSHN.
Related References
A.1.2.1 Parameter Description: NE Communication Parameter Setting A.9.1.1 Parameter Description: Clock Source Priority Table A.9.1.11 Parameter Description: Clock Synchronization Status A.10.1 Parameter Description: Orderwire_General A.10.3 Parameter Description: Orderwire_F1 Data Port A.10.4 Parameter Description: Orderwire_Broadcast Data Port A.10.5 Parameter Description: Environment Monitoring Interface A.5.2.1 Parameter Description: Ethernet Interface_Basic Attributes A.5.2.2 Parameter Description: Ethernet Interface_Flow Control A.5.2.3 Parameter Description: Ethernet Interface_Layer 2 Attributes A.5.2.4 Parameter Description: Ethernet Port_Layer 3 Attributes A.5.2.5 Parameter Description: Ethernet Interface_Advanced Attributes A.5.7.1 Parameter Description: SDH Interfaces A.5.9.1 Parameter Description: Regenerator Section Overhead A.5.9.2 Parameter Description: VC-4 POHs
3 Boards
3.3.9 Technical Specifications

This section describes the board specifications, including the packet switching capacity, crossconnection capability, performance of Ethernet ports, STM-1/4 ports, clocks, and wayside service port, board mechanical behavior, and board power consumption.
Packet Switching Capacity

The CSHN supports a 22 Gbit/s packet switching capacity.
Cross-Connection Capability
l l Supports higher order cross-connections, which are equivalent to 128x128 VC-4s. Supports lower order cross-connections, which are equivalent to 32x32 VC-4s.
Ethernet Port Performance

Ethernet port performance complies with IEEE 802.3. The following tables provide the specifications of GE optical ports, GE electrical ports, and FE electrical ports. Table 3-22 Performance of the GE optical interface Item Nominal bit rate (kbit/s) Classification code Fiber type Transmission distance (km) Operating wavelength (nm) Mean launched power (dBm) Receiver minimum sensitivity (dBm) Minimum overload (dBm) Minimum extinction ratio (dB) Performance 1000 1000BASE-SX Multiple-mode optical fiber 0.5 770 to 860 -9 to -3 -17 0 9.5 1000BASE-LX Single-mode optical fiber 10 1270 to 1355 -9 to -3 -20 -3 9.5
NOTE
The OptiX RTN 980 uses SFP modules to provide GE optical interfaces. Users can use different types of SFP modules to provide GE optical interfaces with different classification codes and transmission distances.
3-32
Issue 03 (2011-04-10)
3 Boards
Table 3-23 GE electric interface performance Item Nominal bit rate (Mbit/s) Performance 10 (10BASE-T) 100 (100BASE-TX) 1000 (1000BASE-T) Code pattern Manchester encoding signal (10BASE-T) MLT-3 encoding signal (100BASE-TX) 4D-PAM5 encoding signal (1000BASE-T) Interface type RJ45
STM-1 Optical Interface Performance

The performance of the STM-1 optical interface is compliant with ITU-T G.957/G.825. The following table provides the typical performance of the interface. Table 3-24 STM-1 optical interface performance Item Nominal bit rate (kbit/s) Classification code Fiber type Transmission distance (km) Operating wavelength (nm) Mean launched power (dBm) Receiver minimum sensitivity (dBm) Minimum overload (dBm) Minimum extinction ratio (dB) Performance 155520 Ie-1 Multi-mode fiber 2 1270 to 1380 -19 to -14 -30 -14 10 S-1.1 Single-mode fiber 15 1261 to 1360 -15 to -8 -28 -8 8.2 L-1.1 Single-mode fiber 40 1263 to 1360 -5 to 0 -34 -10 10 L-1.2 Single-mode fiber 80 1480 to 1580 -5 to 0 -34 -10 10
NOTE
The OptiX RTN 980 uses SFP modules for providing optical interfaces. You can use different types of SFP modules to provide optical interfaces with different classification codes and transmission distances.
Issue 03 (2011-04-10)
3-33
3 Boards

The performance of the STM-4 optical interface is compliant with ITU-T G.957. The following table provides the typical performance of the interface. Table 3-25 STM-4 optical interface performance Item Nominal bit rate (kbit/s) Classification code Fiber type Transmission distance (km) Operating wavelength (nm) Mean launched power (dBm) Minimum receiver sensitivity (dBm) Minimum overload (dBm) Minimum extinction ratio (dB) Performance 622080 S-4.1 Single-mode fiber 15 1274 to 1356 -15 to -8 -28 -8 8.2 L-4.1 Single-mode fiber 40 1280 to 1335 -3 to +2 -28 -8 10 L-4.2 Single-mode fiber 80 1480 to 1580 -3 to +2 -28 -8 10
NOTE
SDH optical interface boards use SFP modules for providing optical interfaces. You can use different types of SFP modules to provide optical interfaces with different classification codes and transmission distances.
Clock Timing and Synchronization Performance

Clock timing and synchronization performance meets related ITU-T Recommendations. Table 3-26 Clock timing and synchronization performance Item External synchronization source Frequency accuracy Pull-in and pull-out ranges Noise generation Noise tolerance Noise transfer Performance 2048 kbit/s (compliant with ITU-T G.703 9), or 2048 kHz (compliant with ITU-T G.703 13) Compliant with ITU-T G.813
3-34
Issue 03 (2011-04-10)
3 Boards
Item Transient response and holdover performance
Performance
Mechanical Behavior
Table 3-27 Mechanical behavior Item Dimensions (H x W x D) Weight Performance 23.60 mm x 378.40 mm x 205.70 mm 1.60 kg
Power Consumption
Power consumption: < 36.6 W
3.4 IF1
The IF1 is a medium-capacity SDH IF board. The IF1 uses the DC-I power distribution mode. 3.4.1 Version Description The functional version of the IF1 is SL91. 3.4.2 Functions and Features The IF1 receives and transmits one IF signal, provides management channels to the ODU, and supplies the required -48 V power to the ODU. 3.4.3 Working Principle and Signal Flow This section describes how to process one IF signal, and it serves as an example to describe the working principle and signal flow of the IF1. 3.4.4 Front Panel There are indicators, an IF port, an ODU power switch, and labels on the front panel. 3.4.5 Valid Slots The IF1 can be inserted in slots 1-14. The logical slots of the IF1 on the NMS are the same as the physical slots. 3.4.6 Board Parameter Settings This section provides hyperlinks of the main parameter settings for the IF1. 3.4.7 Technical Specifications This section describes the board specifications, including radio work modes, IF performance, modem performance, board mechanical behavior, and board power consumption.

The functional version of the IF1 is SL91.
3 Boards

The IF1 receives and transmits one IF signal, provides management channels to the ODU, and supplies the required -48 V power to the ODU. Table 3-28 lists the functions and features that the IF1 supports. Table 3-28 Functions and features that the IF1 supports Function and Feature Basic functions IF1 l Receives and transmits one IF signal. l Provides management channels to the ODU. l Supplies the required -48 V power to the ODU. Radio type Radio work mode Protection 1+1 HSB/FD/ SD protection N+1 protection SNCP License Clock Clock source Clock protection TU/STM-1-based radio See Technical Specifications of the IF1. Supported Supported Supported Supports control on the air interface capacity by using the license file. Clock at the air interface Supports the following clock protection schemes: l Protection based on clock source priorities l Protection by running the SSM protocol (supported only in SDH radio mode) l Protection by running the extended SSM protocol (supported only in SDH radio mode) DCN Inband DCN Outband DCN Not supported l The PDH radio mode supports one DCC that is composed of one DCC byte if the capacity is less than 16xE1. l The PDH radio mode supports one DCC that is composed of three DCC bytes if the capacity is equal to or more than 16xE1. l The SDH radio mode supports one DCC that is composed of three DCC bytes, nine DCC bytes, or twelve DCC bytes.
3-36
Issue 03 (2011-04-10)
3 Boards
Function and Feature OM Loopback
IF1 Supports the following loopback types: l Inloops at IF ports l Outloops at IF ports l Inloops at composite ports l Outloops at composite ports
Warm reset and cold reset In-service FPGA loading Board manufacturing information query Board temperature detection Board power detection
Supported Supported Supported
Supported
Supported
3.4.3 Working Principle and Signal Flow

This section describes how to process one IF signal, and it serves as an example to describe the working principle and signal flow of the IF1.
Issue 03 (2011-04-10)
3-37
3 Boards

Figure 3-13 Functional block diagram of the IF1
Backplane
SMODEM unit ODU control signal
HSM signal bus
Paired board
Logic processing unit
Service bus
MUX/DEMUX unit
IF processing unit
IF
Cross-connect unit System control and communication unit
Signal Processing in the Receive Direction

Table 3-29 Signal processing in the receive direction of the IF1 Step 1 2 Function Unit Combiner interface unit SMODEM unit Processing Flow Divides the received IF signals into ODU control signals and microwave service signals. l Demodulates ODU control signals. l Transmits the ODU control signals to the system control and communication unit. 3 IF processing unit l Controls the level of service signals through the automatic gain control (AGC) circuit. l Filters signals. l Performs A/D conversion.
Combiner Interface unit
Microwave MODEM unit frame signal
Overhead bus
Control bus
System control and communication unit Logic control unit
-48 V power supplied to the ODU +3.3 V power supplied to the other units on the board
Power supply unit
-48 V +3.3 V
Clock signal provided to the other units on the board
Clock unit
System clock signal
3-38
Issue 03 (2011-04-10)
3 Boards
Step 4
Function Unit MODEM unit
Processing Flow l Performs digital demodulation. l Performs time domain adaptive equalization. l Performs FEC decoding and generates specific alarms.
MUX/DEMUX unit (for SDH microwave signal processing)
l Synchronizes frames and detects R_LOS and R_LOF alarms. l Performs descrambling. l Checks B1 and B2 bytes and generates specific alarms and performance events. l Checks link IDs and generates specific alarms. l Checks the M1 byte and bits 6-8 of the K2 byte, and generates specific alarms and performance events. l Detects the changes in the SSM in the S1 byte and reports the SSM status to the system control and communication unit. l Detects changes in ATPC messages and returned microwave messages and reports the changes to the system control and communication unit over the control bus. l Extracts orderwire bytes, auxiliary channel bytes including F1 and SERIAL bytes, DCC bytes, and K bytes, and transmits the overhead signal to the logic processing unit. l Extracts wayside service bytes to form another 2 Mbit/ s overhead signal and transmits the 2 Mbit/s overhead signal to the logic processing unit. l Adjusts AU pointers and generates specific performance events. l Checks higher order path overheads and generates specific alarms and performance events. l Transmits pointer indication signals and VC-4 signals to the logic processing unit.
Issue 03 (2011-04-10)
3-39
3 Boards
Step
Function Unit MUX/DEMUX unit (for PDH microwave signal processing)
Processing Flow l Detects microwave frame headers in PDH radio mode and generates specific alarms and performance events. l Verifies parity bits in microwave frames in PDH radio mode and generates specific alarms and performance events. l Checks link IDs in microwave frames in PDH radio mode and generates specific alarms and performance events. l Detects changes in ATPC messages and returned microwave messages in PDH radio mode and reports the changes to the system control and communication unit over the control bus. l Extracts orderwire bytes, auxiliary channel bytes including F1 and SERIAL bytes, and DCC bytes in microwave frames in PDH radio mode and transmits the overhead signals to the logic processing unit. l Adjusts TU pointers. l Maps TU-12s in microwave frames in PDH radio mode to the specific positions in VC-4s.
l Processes clock signals. l Transmits overhead signals to the system control and communication unit. l Transmits VC-4 signals and pointer indication signals to the cross-connect unit.
NOTE
In 1+1 FD/SD mode, the MUX/DEMUX unit transmits service signals over the HSM bus to the MUX/DEMUX unit of the paired board. The main MUX/DEMUX unit selects the higher quality signals for subsequent processing.
Signal Processing in the Transmit Direction

Table 3-30 Signal processing in the transmit direction of the IF1 Step 1 Function Unit Logic processing unit Processing Flow l Processes clock signals. l Demultiplexes 2 Mbit/s overhead signals from 8 Mbit/ s overhead signals. l Receives VC-4 signals and pointer indication signals from the cross-connect unit.
3-40
Issue 03 (2011-04-10)
3 Boards
Step 2
Function Unit MUX/DEMUX unit (for SDH microwave signal processing)
Processing Flow l Sets higher order path overheads. l Sets AU pointers. l Sets multiplex section overhead bytes. l Sets regenerator section overhead bytes. l Performs scrambling.
MUX/DEMUX unit (for PDH microwave signal processing) 3 MODEM unit
l Demaps TU-12s from the VC-4 signals. l Sets the microwave frame overheads in PDH radio mode. l Performs FEC coding. l Performs digital modulation.
IF processing unit
l Performs D/A conversion. l Performs analog modulation.
5 6
SMODEM unit Combiner interface unit
Modulates the ODU control signals transmitted from the system control and communication unit. Combines the ODU control signals, microwave service signals, and -48 V power supplies and transmits the combined signals to the IF cable.
Control Signal Processing

The board is directly controlled by the CPU unit on the system control and communication unit. The CPU unit issues configuration and query commands to the other units of the board over the control bus. These units then report command responses, alarms, and performance events to the CPU unit over the control bus. The logic control unit decodes the address read/write signals from the CPU unit of the system control and communication unit.
Power Supply Unit

The power supply unit performs the following functions: l Performs soft-start and filtering operations for the -48 V power received from the power supply bus in the backplane and supplies -48 V power to the ODU after performing DCDC conversion. Receives the +3.3 V power from the power supply bus in the backplane and supplies the +3.3 V power to the other units on the board.
Clock Unit
This unit receives the system clock from the control bus in the backplane and provides clock signals to the other units on the board.
3 Boards
3.4.4 Front Panel

There are indicators, an IF port, an ODU power switch, and labels on the front panel.
Front Panel Diagram

Figure 3-14 Front panel of the IF1
ODU-PWR
IF1
-48V OUTPUT TURN OFF POWER BEFORE DISCONNECTING IF CABLE
I
PULL
Indicators
Table 3-31 Status explanation for indicators on the IF1 Indicator STAT State On (green) On (red) Off Meaning The board is working properly. The board hardware is faulty. l The board is not working. l The board is not created. l There is no power supplied to the board. SRV On (green) On (red) On (yellow) LINK On (green) On (red) ODU On (green) On (red) The services are normal. A critical or major alarm occurs in the services. A minor or remote alarm occurs in the services. The radio link is normal. The radio link is faulty. The ODU is working properly. l The ODU is reporting critical or major alarms. l There is no power supplied to the ODU. On (yellow) The ODU is reporting minor alarms.
3-42
Issue 03 (2011-04-10)
STAT SRV LINK ODU RMT ACT
IF
WARNING
IF1
3 Boards
Indicator
State Blinks on (yellow) and off at 300 ms intervals
Meaning The antennas are not aligned. The remote equipment is reporting defects. The remote equipment is free of defects. l In a 1+1 protected system, the board works as the active one. l In an unprotected system, the board has been activated.
RMT
On (yellow) Off
ACT
On (green)
Off
l In a 1+1 protected system, the board works as the standby one. l In an unprotected system, the board is not activated.
Ports
Table 3-32 Description of the Ports Port IF ODU-PWRa Description IF port ODU power switch Connector Type TNC Corresponding Cable IF jumperb -
NOTE
a: The ODU-PWR switch is equipped with a lockup device. To turn on or turn off the switch, you need to first pull the switch lever slightly outwards. When the switch is set to "O", it indicates that the circuit is open. When the switch is set to "I", it indicates that the circuit is closed. b: A 5D IF cable is connected to an IF board; therefore, an IF jumper is not required.
Labels
There is a high temperature warning label, an operation warning label, and an operation guidance label on the front panel. The high temperature warning label indicates that the board surface temperature may exceed 70C when the ambient temperature is higher than 55C. If surface temperature reaches this level, you need to wear protective gloves before handling the board.
3 Boards
The operation warning label indicates that the ODU-PWR switch must be turned off before the IF cable is removed. The operation guidance label indicates that the switch must be pulled slightly outwards before the switch is set to the "I" or "O" position.
3.4.5 Valid Slots

The IF1 can be inserted in slots 1-14. The logical slots of the IF1 on the NMS are the same as the physical slots. Figure 3-15 Slots for the IF1 in the IDU chassis
Slot 26 (PIU) Slot 13 (IF1) Slot 11 (IF1) Slot 9 (IF1) Slot 28 (FAN) Slot 20 Slot 7 (IF1) Slot 15 Slot 5 (IF1) Slot 3 (IF1) Slot 1 (IF1) Slot 6 (IF1) Slot 4 (IF1) Slot 2 (IF1) Slot 8 (IF1) Slot 27 (PIU) Slot 14 (IF1) Slot 12 (IF1) Slot 10 (IF1)
An ODU is not allocated a physical slot but it has a logical slot on the NMS. The logical slot number of the ODU is equal to the logical slot number of the IF board that is connected to the ODU plus 50.
3-44
Issue 03 (2011-04-10)
3 Boards
Figure 3-16 Logical slots of the IF1 on the NMS

Slot 63 (ODU) Slot 61 (ODU) Slot 59 (ODU) Slot 57 (ODU) Slot 55 (ODU) Slot 53 (ODU) Slot 51 (ODU) Slot 64 (ODU) Slot 62 (ODU) Slot 60 (ODU) Slot 58 (ODU) Slot 56 (ODU) Slot 54 (ODU) Slot 52 (ODU)
Slot 26 (PIU) Slot 13 (IF1) Slot 11 (IF1) Slot 9 (IF1) Slot 28 (FAN) Slot 20 Slot 7 (IF1) Slot 15 Slot 5 (IF1) Slot 3 (IF1) Slot 1 (IF1) Slot 16 Slot 21
Slot 27 (PIU) Slot 14 (IF1) Slot 12 (IF1) Slot 10 (IF1) Slot 22 Slot 8 (IF1) Slot 17 Slot 6 (IF1) Slot 4 (IF1) Slot 2 (IF1)
Table 3-33 Slot allocation Item Slot allocation priority Description Slots 3 and 5 > Slots 7 and 9 > Slots 1 and 2 > Slots 8 and 10 > Slots 4 and 6 > Slots 11 and 13 > Slots 12 and 14
NOTE
Use two IF boards in paired slots to configure a 1+1 FD/SD IF protection group. Specifically, slots 1 and 2, slots 3 and 5, slots 4 and 6, slots 7 and 9, slots 8 and 10, slots 11 and 13, and slots 12 and 14 are paired slots respectively.

This section provides hyperlinks of the main parameter settings for the IF1.
Related References
A.5.5.1 Parameter Description: IF Interface_IF Attribute
3 Boards
A.5.5.2 Parameter Description: IF Interface_ATPC Attribute A.5.9.2 Parameter Description: VC-4 POHs

This section describes the board specifications, including radio work modes, IF performance, modem performance, board mechanical behavior, and board power consumption.
Radio Work Modes

Table 3-34 SDH/PDH microwave work modes (IF1 board) Service Capacity 4xE1 4xE1 8xE1 8xE1 16xE1 16xE1 22xE1 26xE1 35xE1 44xE1 53xE1 STM-1 Modulation Mode QPSK 16QAM QPSK 16QAM QPSK 16QAM 32QAM 64QAM 16QAM 32QAM 64QAM 128QAM Channel Spacing (MHz) 7 3.5 14 (13.75) 7 28 (27.5) 14 (13.75) 14 (13.75) 14 (13.75) 28 (27.5) 28 (27.5) 28 (27.5) 28 (27.5)
NOTE
l The channel spacings 13.75 MHz, 27.5 MHz, and 55 MHz are applied to the 18 GHz frequency band. l The channel spacings listed in the table are the minimum channel spacings supported by the product. The channel spacings larger than the values are also supported.
IF Performance
Table 3-35 IF performance Item IF signal Transmit frequency of the IF board (MHz) Performance 350
3-46
Issue 03 (2011-04-10)
3 Boards
Item Receive frequency of the IF board (MHz) ODU O&M signal Modulation mode Transmit frequency of the IF board (MHz) Receive frequency of the IF board (MHz) Interface impedance (ohm)
Performance 140 ASK 5.5
10 50
Baseband Signal Processing Performance of the Modem

Table 3-36 Baseband signal processing performance of the modem Item Encoding mode Performance l Reed-Solomon (RS) encoding for PDH microwave signals l Trellis-coded modulation (TCM) and RS two-level encoding for SDH microwave signals Adaptive timedomain equalizer for baseband signals Supported
Mechanical Behavior
Power Consumption
Power consumption: < 12 W
3.5 IFU2
The IFU2 is a universal IF board that supports the Integrated IP radio mode. The IFU2 uses the DC-I power distribution mode.
3 Boards
3.5.1 Version Description The functional version of the IFU2 is SL91. 3.5.2 Functions and Features The IFU2 receives and transmits one IF signal, provides management channels to the ODU, and supplies the required -48 V power to the ODU. 3.5.3 Working Principle and Signal Flow This section describes how to process one IF signal in Integrated IP radio mode, and it serves as an example to describe the working principle and signal flow of the IFU2. 3.5.4 Front Panel There are indicators, an IF port, an ODU power switch, and labels on the front panel. 3.5.5 Valid Slots The IFU2 can be inserted in slots 1-14. The logical slots of the IFU2 on the NMS are the same as the physical slots. 3.5.6 Board Parameter Settings This section provides hyperlinks of the main parameter settings for the IFU2. 3.5.7 Technical Specifications This section describes the board specifications, including radio work modes, IF performance, modem performance, board mechanical behavior, and board power consumption.

The functional version of the IFU2 is SL91.

The IFU2 receives and transmits one IF signal, provides management channels to the ODU, and supplies the required -48 V power to the ODU. Table 3-38 lists the functions and features that the IFU2 supports. The IFU2 needs to work with the packet switching unit to implement Ethernet service functions. Table 3-38 Functions and features that the IFU2 supports Function and Feature Basic functions IFU2 l Receives and transmits one IF signal. l Provides management channels to the ODU. l Supplies the required -48 V power to the ODU. Radio type Integrated IP radio
NOTE The Integrated IP radio is compatible with the Hybrid radio and the Packet radio.
Service categories
Native E1 + Ethernet
NOTE Ethernet services can be native Ethernet services or packet services that are encapsulated into PWE3 packets.
3-48
Issue 03 (2011-04-10)
3 Boards
Function and Feature AM E1 priority Radio work mode Protection 1+1 HSB/FD/ SD protection N+1 protection SNCP for TDM services License Air interface capacity license AM license Clock at the physical layer Clock source Clock protection Supported
IFU2
Supported only in Integrated IP radio mode with native TDM services being E1 services See Technical Specifications of the IFU2. Supported Supported Supported Supported Supported Clock at the air interface Supports the following clock protection schemes: l Protection based on clock source priorities l Protection by running the SSM protocol l Protection by running the extended SSM protocol
DCN
Inband DCN
Supported. The DCN bandwidth is configurable.
Outband DCN Ethernet service functions MPLS functions PWE3 functions OM Loopback
Supports one DCC that is composed of three DCC bytes. See Table 3-39. See the description of MPLS/PWE3 functions provided in the section for the system control, switching, and timing board. Supports the following loopback types: l Inloops and outloops at IF ports l Inloops and outloops at composite ports l Inloops at the MAC layer of IF_ETH ports
NOTE An IF_ETH port is an internal Ethernet port on the IF board operating in Integrated IP radio mode and is used to receive or transmit Ethernet services transmitted in Integrated IP radio mode.
Cold reset and warm reset
Supported
Issue 03 (2011-04-10)
3-49
3 Boards
Function and Feature In-service FPGA loading PRBS BER test at IF ports Board manufacturing information query Board temperature detection Board power detection Supported Supported Supported
IFU2
Supported
Supported
Table 3-39 Ethernet service functions that the IFU2 supports Function and Feature Ethernet services E-Line services IFU2 Supports the following types of E-Line services: l E-Line services based on ports l E-Line services based on port+VLAN l E-Line services carried by QinQ links l E-Line services carried by PWs E-LAN services Supports the following types of E-LAN services: l E-LAN services based on IEEE 802.1d bridges l E-LAN services based on IEEE 802.1q bridges l E-LAN services based on IEEE 802.1ad bridges ERPS OAM LAG Spanning tree protocol Supports the ERPS function that complies with ITU-T G.8032/Y.1344. Supports the IEEE 802.1ag OAM and IEEE 802.3ah OAM. Supported Supports the MSTP protocol that generates only the CIST. The MSTP protocol provides functions equivalent to that of the RSTP protocol. See the description of QoS functions provided in the section for the system control, switching, and timing board. Supported
QoS
RMON
3-50
Issue 03 (2011-04-10)
3 Boards

This section describes how to process one IF signal in Integrated IP radio mode, and it serves as an example to describe the working principle and signal flow of the IFU2.

Figure 3-17 Functional block diagram of the IFU2
Backplane SMODEM unit ODU control signal HSM signal bus Paired board Service bus
Overhead bus
MUX/DEMUX unit
IF processing unit
Combiner interface unit
IF
Microwave frame signal
MODEM unit
Ethernet processing unit
GE bus Packet switching unit
Control bus
-48 V power supplied to the ODU +3.3 V power supplied to the other units on the board +3.3 V power supplied to the monitoring circuit Clock signal provided to the other units on the board
Power supply unit
-48 V1 -48 V2 +3.3 V
Clock unit
System clock signal

Table 3-40 Signal processing in the receive direction of the IFU2 Step 1 2 Function Unit Combiner interface unit SMODEM unit Processing Flow Divides the received IF signals into ODU control signals and microwave service signals. l Demodulates ODU control signals. l Transmits the ODU control signals to the system control and communication unit.
Issue 03 (2011-04-10)
3-51
3 Boards
Step 3
Function Unit IF processing unit
Processing Flow l Filters signals. l Performs A/D conversion.
MODEM unit
l Performs digital demodulation. l Performs time domain adaptive equalization. l Performs FEC decoding and generates specific alarms.
MUX/DEMUX unit
l Detects microwave frame headers in Integrated IP radio mode and generates specific alarms and performance events. l Verifies parity bits in microwave frames in Integrated IP radio mode and generates specific alarms and performance events. l Checks link IDs in microwave frames in Integrated IP radio mode and generates specific alarms and performance events. l Detects changes in ATPC messages and returned microwave messages in Integrated IP radio mode and reports the changes to the system control and communication unit over the control bus. l Extracts auxiliary channel bytes including orderwire bytes, F1 and SERIAL bytes, SSM bytes, and DCC bytes in microwave frames and transmits the overhead signals to the logic processing unit. l Maps E1 service signals in Integrated IP radio mode to the specific positions in VC-4s and then transmits the VC-4s to the logic processing unit. l Extracts the Ethernet service signals from microwave frams and transmits to the Ethernet processing unit.
l Processes the GE signals received from the MUX/ DEMUX unit. l Sends the processed signals to the main and standby packet switching units.
l Processes clock signals. l Transmits the overhead signals to the system control and communication unit. l Transmits VC-4 signals and pointer indication signals to the main and standby cross-connect units.
NOTE
3-52
Issue 03 (2011-04-10)
3 Boards

Table 3-41 Signal processing in the transmit direction of the IFU2 Step 1 Function Unit Logic processing unit Processing Flow l Processes clock signals. l Processes overhead signals. l Receives VC-4 signals and pointer indication signals from the cross-connect unit. 2 Ethernet processing unit MUX/DEMUX unit l Receives GE signal from the packet switching unit. l Processes GE signals. l Demaps E1 signals from the VC-4 signals. l Sets the microwave frame overheads in Integrated IP radio mode. l Combines the E1 signals, Ethernet signals, and microwave frame overheads to form microwave frames. 5 MODEM unit l Performs FEC coding. l Performs digital modulation. 6 IF processing unit l Performs D/A conversion. l Performs analog modulation. l Filters signals. l Amplifies signals. 7 8 SMODEM unit Combiner interface unit Modulates the ODU control signals transmitted from the system control and communication unit. Combines the ODU control signals, microwave service signals, and -48 V power supplies and transmits the combined signals to the IF cable.

Power Supply Unit

The power supply unit performs the following functions:
3 Boards
Performs soft-start and filtering operations for the -48 V power received from the power supply bus in the backplane and supplies -48 V power to the ODU after performing DCDC conversion. Performs soft-start and filtering operations for the -48 V power received from the power supply bus in the backplane and supplies +3.3 V power to the other units on the IFU2 after performing DC-DC conversion.
Clock Unit
3.5.4 Front Panel

Front Panel Diagram

Figure 3-18 Front panel of the IFU2
IFU2
I
PULL
Indicators
Table 3-42 Status explanation for indicators on the IFU2 Indicator STAT State On (green) On (red) Off Meaning The board is working properly. The board hardware is faulty. l The board is not working. l The board is not created. l There is no power supplied to the board. SRV On (green) On (red) On (yellow) LINK On (green) On (red) ODU
3-54
The services are normal. A critical or major alarm occurs in the services. A minor or remote alarm occurs in the services. The radio link is normal. The radio link is faulty. The ODU is working properly.
Issue 03 (2011-04-10)
On (green)
IF
WARNING
IFU2
ODU-PWR
3 Boards
Indicator
State On (red)
Meaning l The ODU is reporting critical or major alarms. l There is no power supplied to the ODU.
On (yellow) Blinks on (yellow) and off at 300 ms intervals RMT On (yellow) Off ACT On (green)
The ODU is reporting minor alarms. The antennas are not aligned.
The remote equipment is reporting defects. The remote equipment is free of defects. l In a 1+1 protected system, the board works as the active one. l In an unprotected system, the board has been activated.
Off
Ports
NOTE
Labels
There is a high temperature warning label, an operation warning label, and an operation guidance label on the front panel.
Issue 03 (2011-04-10)
3-55
3 Boards
The high temperature warning label indicates that the board surface temperature may exceed 70C when the ambient temperature is higher than 55C. If surface temperature reaches this level, you need to wear protective gloves before handling the board. The operation warning label indicates that the ODU-PWR switch must be turned off before the IF cable is removed. The operation guidance label indicates that the switch must be pulled slightly outwards before the switch is set to the "I" or "O" position.
3.5.5 Valid Slots

The IFU2 can be inserted in slots 1-14. The logical slots of the IFU2 on the NMS are the same as the physical slots. Figure 3-19 Slots for the IFU2 in the IDU chassis
Slot 26 (PIU) Slot 13 (IFU2) Slot 11 (IFU2) Slot 9 (IFU2) Slot 28 (FAN) Slot 20 Slot 7 (IFU2) Slot 15 Slot 5 (IFU2) Slot 3 (IFU2) Slot 1 (IFU2) Slot 6 (IFU2) Slot 4 (IFU2) Slot 2 (IFU2) Slot 8 (IFU2) Slot 27 (PIU) Slot 14 (IFU2) Slot 12 (IFU2) Slot 10 (IFU2)
3-56
Issue 03 (2011-04-10)
3 Boards
Figure 3-20 Logical slots of the IFU2 on the NMS

Slot 26 (PIU) Slot 13 (IFU2) Slot 11 (IFU2) Slot 9 (IFU2) Slot 28 (FAN) Slot 20 Slot 7 (IFU2) Slot 15 Slot 5 (IFU2) Slot 3 (IFU2) Slot 1 (IFU2) Slot 16 Slot 21
Slot 27 (PIU) Slot 14 (IFU2) Slot 12 (IFU2) Slot 10 (IFU2) Slot 22 Slot 8 (IFU2) Slot 17 Slot 6 (IFU2) Slot 4 (IFU2) Slot 2 (IFU2)
NOTE

This section provides hyperlinks of the main parameter settings for the IFU2.
Issue 03 (2011-04-10)
3-57
3 Boards
Related References
A.5.5.1 Parameter Description: IF Interface_IF Attribute A.5.5.2 Parameter Description: IF Interface_ATPC Attribute A.5.5.3 Parameter Description: Hybrid_AM Configuration_Advanced Attributes A.5.9.3 Parameter Description: VC-12 POHs A.5.4.1 Parameter Description: Microwave Interface_Basic Attributes A.5.4.2 Parameter Description: Microwave Interface_Layer 2 Attributes A.5.4.3 Parameter Description: Microwave Interface_Layer 3 Attributes A.5.4.4 Parameter Description: Microwave Interface_Advanced Attributes

Radio Work Modes

Table 3-45 Integrated IP microwave work modes (IFU2 board) Maximum Number of E1s in Hybrid Microwave 5 10 12 15 18 21 10 20 24 31 37 43 20 40 52 Native Ethernet Throughput (Mbit/s) 9 to 12 20 to 24 24 to 29 31 to 37 37 to 44 43 to 51 20 to 23 41 to 48 50 to 59 65 to 76 77 to 90 90 to 104 41 to 48 82 to 97 108 to 125
Channel Spacing (MHz) 7 7 7 7 7 7 14 (13.75) 14 (13.75) 14 (13.75) 14 (13.75) 14 (13.75) 14 (13.75) 28 (27.5) 28 (27.5) 28 (27.5)
Modulation Mode QPSK 16QAM 32QAM 64QAM 128QAM 256QAM QPSK 16QAM 32QAM 64QAM 128QAM 256QAM QPSK 16QAM 32QAM
3-58
Issue 03 (2011-04-10)
3 Boards
Channel Spacing (MHz) 28 (27.5) 28 (27.5) 28 (27.5) 56 (55) 56 (55) 56 (55) 56 (55) 56 (55) 56 (55)
Modulation Mode 64QAM 128QAM 256QAM QPSK 16QAM 32QAM 64QAM 128QAM 256QAM
Maximum Number of E1s in Hybrid Microwave 64 75 75 40 75 75 75 75 75
Native Ethernet Throughput (Mbit/s) 130 to 150 160 to 180 180 to 210 82 to 97 165 to 190 208 to 240 260 to 310 310 to 360 360 to 420
NOTE
l The channel spacings 13.75 MHz, 27.5 MHz, and 55 MHz are applied to the 18 GHz frequency band. l The channel spacings listed in the table are the minimum channel spacings supported by the product. The channel spacings larger than the values are also supported. l The throughput specifications in these tables are values for untagged Ethernet frames. l E1 services need to occupy the corresponding bandwidth of the air interface capacity. The bandwidth remaining after the E1 service capacity is subtracted from the air interface capacity can be provided for Ethernet services.
IF Performance
Table 3-46 IF performance Item IF signal Transmit frequency of the IF board (MHz) Receive frequency of the IF board (MHz) ODU O&M signal Modulation mode Transmit frequency of the IF board (MHz) Receive frequency of the IF board (MHz)
Issue 03 (2011-04-10)
Performance 350
140 ASK 5.5
10
3-59
3 Boards
Item Interface impedance (ohm)
Performance 50

Table 3-47 Baseband signal processing performance of the modem Item Encoding mode Adaptive timedomain equalizer for baseband signals Performance LDPC encoding Supported
Mechanical Behavior
Power Consumption
3.6 IFX2
The IFX2 is a universal IF board that supports the XPIC function in Integrated IP radio mode. The IFX2 uses the DC-I power distribution mode. 3.6.1 Version Description The functional version of the IFX2 is SL91. 3.6.2 Functions and Features The IFX2 receives and transmits one IF signal, provides management channels to the ODU, and supplies the required -48 V power to the ODU. The IFX2 supports cross-polarization interference cancellation (XPIC) processing for IF signals. 3.6.3 Working Principle and Signal Flow This section describes how to process one IF signal in Integrated IP radio mode, and it serves as an example to describe the working principle and signal flow of the IFX2.
3 Boards
3.6.4 Front Panel There are indicators, an IF port, XPIC signal ports, an ODU power switch, and labels on the front panel. 3.6.5 Valid Slots The IFX2 can be inserted in slot 1-14. The logical slots of the IFX2 on the NMS are the same as the physical slots. 3.6.6 Board Parameter Settings This section provides hyperlinks of the main parameter settings for the IFX2. 3.6.7 Technical Specifications This section describes the board specifications, including radio work modes, IF performance, modem performance, board mechanical behavior, and board power consumption.

The functional version of the IFX2 is SL91.

The IFX2 receives and transmits one IF signal, provides management channels to the ODU, and supplies the required -48 V power to the ODU. The IFX2 supports cross-polarization interference cancellation (XPIC) processing for IF signals. Table 3-49 lists the functions and features that the IFX2 supports. Table 3-49 Functions and features that the IFX2 supports Function and Feature Basic functions IFX2 l Receives and transmits one IF signal. l Provides management channels to the ODU. l Supplies the required -48 V power to the ODU. Radio type Integrated IP radio
NOTE Integrated IP radio is compatible with Hybrid radio and Packet radio.
Service categories
Native E1 + Ethernet
NOTE Ethernet services can be Native Ethernet services or packet services that are encapsulated into PWE3 packets.
AM E1 priority XPIC Radio work mode
Supported Supported only in Integrated IP radio mode, in which native TDM services are E1 services Supported See Technical Specifications of the IFX2.
Issue 03 (2011-04-10)
3-61
3 Boards
Function and Feature Protection 1+1 HSB/FD/ SD protection N+1 protection SNCP for TDM services License Air interface capacity license AM license Clock at the physical layer Clock source Clock protection
IFX2 Supported Supported Supported Supported Supported Clock at an air interface Supports the following clock protection schemes: l Protection based on clock source priorities l Protection by running the SSM protocol l Protection by running the extended SSM protocol
DCN
Inband DCN
Supported. The DCN bandwidth is configurable.
Outband DCN Ethernet service features MPLS functions PWE3 functions OM Loopback
Supports one DCC that is composed of three DCC bytes. See Table 3-50. See the description of the MPLS/PWE3 functions that the system control, switching, and timing board supports. Supports the following loopback types: l Inloops and outloops at IF ports l Inloops and outloops at multiplexing ports l Inloops at the MAC layer of IF_ETH ports
NOTE An IF_ETH port is an internal Ethernet port on the IF board operating in Integrated IP radio mode and is used to receive or transmit Ethernet services transmitted in Integrated IP radio mode.
Cold reset and warm reset In-service FPGA loading PRBS BER test at IF ports
Supported Supported Supported
3-62
Issue 03 (2011-04-10)
3 Boards
Function and Feature Board manufacturing information query Board temperature detection Board voltage detection
IFX2 Supported
Supported
Supported
Table 3-50 Ethernet service functions that the IFX2 supports Function and Feature Ethernet services E-Line services IFX2 Supports the following types of E-Line services: l E-Line services based on ports l E-Line services based on port+VLAN l E-Line services carried by QinQ links l E-Line services carried by PWs E-LAN services Supports the following types of E-LAN services: l E-LAN services based on IEEE 802.1d bridges l E-LAN services based on IEEE 802.1q bridges l E-LAN services based on IEEE 802.1ad bridges ERPS ETH-OAM LAG Spanning tree protocol Supports the ERPS function that complies with ITU-T G.8032/Y.1344. Supports IEEE 802.1ag OAM and IEEE 802.3ah OAM. Supported Supports the MSTP protocol that generates only the CIST. The MSTP protocol provides functions equivalent to that of the RSTP protocol. See the description of the QoS functions that the system control, switching, and timing board supports. Supported
QoS RMON

This section describes how to process one IF signal in Integrated IP radio mode, and it serves as an example to describe the working principle and signal flow of the IFX2.
3 Boards

Figure 3-21 Functional block diagram of the IFX2
Backplane SMODEM unit ODU control signal
HSM signal bus Paired board Service bus
MUX/DEMUX unit
IF processing unit
IF
Overhead bus
GE bus
Packet switching unit
Paired XPIC board
XPIC signal Control bus System control and communication unit Logic control unit
Power supply unit
-48 V1 -48 V2 +3.3 V
Clock unit
System clock signal

Table 3-51 Signal processing in the receive direction of the IFX2 Step 1 2 Function Unit Combiner interface unit SMODEM unit Processing Flow Divides the received IF signals into ODU control signals and microwave service signals. l Demodulates ODU control signals. l Transmits the ODU control signals to the system control and communication unit.
3-64
Issue 03 (2011-04-10)
3 Boards
Step 3
Processing Flow l Filters the received signals and splits the signals to two channels of signals. Performs A/D conversion for one channel of filtered signals and transmits the converted signals to the MODEM unit. Outputs the other channel of filtered signals as the XPIC signals. l Performs A/D conversion for XPIC signals transmitted from the paired IFX2 and transmits the converted signals to the MODEM unit.
MODEM unit
l Performs digital demodulation by using XPIC IF signals transmitted from the paired IFX2 as reference signals. l Performs XPIC operations for IF signals. l Performs time domain adaptive equalization. l Performs FEC decoding and generates specific alarms.
MUX/DEMUX unit
l Detects microwave frame headers in Integrated IP radio mode and generates specific alarms and performance events. l Verifies parity bits in microwave frames in Integrated IP radio mode and generates specific alarms and performance events. l Checks link IDs in microwave frames in Integrated IP radio mode and generates specific alarms. l Detects changes in ATPC messages and returned microwave messages in Integrated IP radio mode and reports the changes to the system control and communication unit over the control bus. l Extracts orderwire bytes, auxiliary channel bytes including F1 and SERIAL bytes, DCC bytes, and SSM bytes in microwave frames in Integrated IP radio mode and transmits the overhead signal to the logic processing unit. l Maps E1 service signals in Integrated IP radio mode to the specific positions in VC-4s and then transmits the VC-4s to the logic processing unit. l Extracts the Ethernet service signals from microwave frames in Integrated IP radio mode and transmits to the Ethernet processing unit.
Issue 03 (2011-04-10)
3-65
3 Boards
Step 7
Function Unit Logic processing unit
Processing Flow l Processes clock signals. l Transmits the overhead signals to the system control and communication unit. l Transmits VC-4 signals and pointer indication signals to the main and standby cross-connect units.
NOTE

Table 3-52 Signal processing in the transmit direction of the IFX2 Step 1 Function Unit Logic processing unit Processing Flow l Processes clock signals. l Processes overhead signals. l Receives VC-4 signals and pointer indication signals from the cross-connect unit. 2 Ethernet processing unit MUX/DEMUX unit l Receives GE signals from the packet switching unit. l Processes GE signals. l Demaps E1 signals from the VC-4 signals. l Sets the microwave frame overheads in Integrated IP radio mode. l Combines the E1 signals, Ethernet signals and microwave frame overheads to form microwave frames. 5 MODEM unit l Performs FEC coding. l Performs digital modulation. 6 IF processing unit l Performs D/A conversion. l Performs analog modulation. l Filters signals. l Amplifies signals. 7 8 SMODEM unit Combiner interface unit Modulates the ODU control signals transmitted from the system control and communication unit. Combines the ODU control signals, microwave service signals, and -48 V power supplies and transmits the combined signals to the IF cable.
3-66
Issue 03 (2011-04-10)
3 Boards

Power Supply Unit

The power supply unit performs the following functions: l Performs soft-start and filtering operations for the -48 V power received from the power supply bus in the backplane and supplies -48 V power to the ODU after performing DCDC conversion. Performs soft-start and filtering operations for the -48 V power received from the power supply bus in the backplane and supplies +3.3 V power to the other units on the IFX2 after performing DC-DC conversion.
Clock Unit
3.6.4 Front Panel

There are indicators, an IF port, XPIC signal ports, an ODU power switch, and labels on the front panel.
Front Panel Diagram

Figure 3-22 Front panel of the IFX2
IFX2
PULL
I
X-IN X-OUT
Indicators
Table 3-53 Status explanation for indicators on the IFX2 Indicator XPIC State On (green) On (red)
Issue 03 (2011-04-10) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
Meaning The XPIC input signal is normal. The XPIC input signal is lost.
3-67
XPIC STAT SRV LINK ODU RMT ACT
IF
WARNING
IFX2
ODU-PWR
3 Boards
Indicator
State Off
Meaning The XPIC function is disabled. The board is working properly. The board hardware is faulty. l The board is not working. l The board is not created. l There is no power supplied to the board.
STAT
On (green) On (red) Off
SRV
On (green) On (red) On (yellow)
The services are normal. A critical or major alarm occurs in the services. A minor or remote alarm occurs in the services. The radio link is normal. The radio link is faulty. The ODU is working properly. l The ODU is reporting critical or major alarms. l There is no power supplied to the ODU.
LINK
On (green) On (red)
ODU
On (green) On (red)
The ODU is reporting minor alarms. The antennas are not aligned. The remote equipment is reporting defects. The remote equipment is free of defects. l In a 1+1 protected system, the board works as the active one. l In an unprotected system, the board has been activated.
3-68
Issue 03 (2011-04-10)
3 Boards
Indicator
State Off
Meaning l In a 1+1 protected system, the board works as the standby one. l In an unprotected system, the board is not activated.
Ports
Table 3-54 Description of the ports Port IF ODU-PWRa X-IN X-OUT Description IF port ODU power switch XPIC signal input port XPIC signal output port Connector Type TNC SMA SMA Corresponding Cable IF jumperb XPIC cable
NOTE
Labels
There is a high temperature warning label, an operation warning label, and an operation guidance label on the front panel. The high temperature warning label indicates that the board surface temperature may exceed 70C when the ambient temperature is higher than 55C. If surface temperature reaches this level, you need to wear protective gloves before handling the board. The operation warning label indicates that the ODU-PWR switch must be turned off before the IF cable is removed. The operation guidance label indicates that the switch must be pulled slightly outwards before the switch is set to the "I" or "O" position.
3.6.5 Valid Slots

The IFX2 can be inserted in slot 1-14. The logical slots of the IFX2 on the NMS are the same as the physical slots.
3 Boards
Figure 3-23 Slots for the IFX2 in the IDU chassis

Slot 26 (PIU) Slot 13 (IFX2) Slot 11 (IFX2) Slot 9 (IFX2) Slot 28 (FAN) Slot 20 Slot 7 (IFX2) Slot 15 Slot 5 (IFX2) Slot 3 (IFX2) Slot 1 (IFX2) Slot 6 (IFX2) Slot 4 (IFX2) Slot 2 (IFX2) Slot 8 (IFX2) Slot 27 (PIU) Slot 14 (IFX2) Slot 12 (IFX2) Slot 10 (IFX2)
3-70
Issue 03 (2011-04-10)
3 Boards
Figure 3-24 Logical slots for the logical boards of the IFX2
Slot 26 (PIU) Slot 13 (IFX2) Slot 11 (IFX2) Slot 9 (IFX2) Slot 28 (FAN) Slot 20 Slot 7 (IFX2) Slot 15 Slot 5 (IFX2) Slot 3 (IFX2) Slot 1 (IFX2) Slot 16 Slot 21
Slot 27 (PIU) Slot 14 (IFX2) Slot 12 (IFX2) Slot 10 (IFX2) Slot 22 Slot 8 (IFX2) Slot 17 Slot 6 (IFX2) Slot 4 (IFX2) Slot 2 (IFX2)
NOTE
NOTE
One IFX2 pair must be installed on the same row or adjacently in the same column.

This section provides hyperlinks of the main parameter settings for the IFX2.
Issue 03 (2011-04-10)
3-71
3 Boards
Related References
A.5.5.1 Parameter Description: IF Interface_IF Attribute A.5.5.2 Parameter Description: IF Interface_ATPC Attribute A.5.5.3 Parameter Description: Hybrid_AM Configuration_Advanced Attributes A.5.9.3 Parameter Description: VC-12 POHs A.5.4.1 Parameter Description: Microwave Interface_Basic Attributes A.5.4.2 Parameter Description: Microwave Interface_Layer 2 Attributes A.5.4.3 Parameter Description: Microwave Interface_Layer 3 Attributes A.5.4.4 Parameter Description: Microwave Interface_Advanced Attributes

Radio Work Modes

Table 3-56 Integrated IP microwave work modes (IFX2 board) Maximum Number of E1s in Hybrid Microwave 19 40 49 63 75 75 39 75 75 75 75 75 Native Ethernet Throughput (Mbit/s) 41 to 48 84 to 97 103 to 120 130 to 150 160 to 180 180 to 210 83 to 97 165 to 190 210 to 245 260 to 305 310 to 360 360 to 410
Channel Spacing (MHz) 28 (27.5) 28 (27.5) 28 (27.5) 28 (27.5) 28 (27.5) 28 (27.5) 56 (55) 56 (55) 56 (55) 56 (55) 56 (55) 56 (55)
Modulation Mode QPSK 16QAM 32QAM 64QAM 128QAM 256QAM QPSK 16QAM 32QAM 64QAM 128QAM 256QAM
3-72
Issue 03 (2011-04-10)

NOTE
3 Boards
IF Performance
Table 3-57 IF performance Item IF signal Transmit frequency of the IF board (MHz) Receive frequency of the IF board (MHz) ODU O&M signal Modulation mode Transmit frequency of the IF board (MHz) Receive frequency of the IF board (MHz) Interface impedance (ohm) Performance 350
140 ASK 5.5
10 50

Issue 03 (2011-04-10)
3-73
3 Boards
Mechanical Behavior
Power Consumption
3.7 ISU2
The ISU2 is a universal IF board that supports the Integrated IP radio mode and SDH radio mode at the same time. The ISU2 uses the DC-I power distribution mode. 3.7.1 Version Description The functional version of the ISU2 is SL91. 3.7.2 Functions and Features The ISU2 receives and transmits one IF signal, provides management channels to the ODU, and supplies the required -48 V power to the ODU. 3.7.3 Working Principle and Signal Flow This section describes how to process one IF signal in Integrated IP radio mode, and it serves as an example to describe the working principle and signal flow of the ISU2. 3.7.4 Front Panel There are indicators, an IF port, an ODU power switch, and labels on the front panel. 3.7.5 Valid Slots The ISU2 can be inserted in slots 1-14. The logical slots of the ISU2 on the NMS are the same as the physical slots. 3.7.6 Board Parameter Settings This section provides hyperlinks of the main parameter settings for the ISU2. 3.7.7 Technical Specifications This section describes the board specifications, including radio work modes, IF performance, modem performance, board mechanical behavior, and board power consumption.

The functional version of the ISU2 is SL91.

The ISU2 receives and transmits one IF signal, provides management channels to the ODU, and supplies the required -48 V power to the ODU.
3 Boards
Table 3-60 lists the functions and features that the ISU2 supports. The ISU2 needs to work with the packet switching unit to implement Ethernet service functions. Table 3-60 Functions and features that the ISU2 supports Function and Feature Basic functions ISU2 l Receives and transmits one IF signal. l Provides management channels to the ODU. l Supplies the required -48 V power to the ODU. Radio type l Integrated IP radio l SDH radio
NOTE The Integrated IP radio is compatible with the Hybrid radio and the Packet radio.
Service categories in Integrated IP radio mode
l Native E1 + Ethernet l Native STM-1 + Ethernet

Service categories in SDH radio mode AM High-efficiency encapsulation E1 priority Radio work mode Link-level protection 1+1 HSB/FD/ SD protection N+1 protection LAG protection at air interfaces Service protection Ethernet service functions MPLS functions PWE3 functions License Air interface capacity license AM license
Issue 03 (2011-04-10)
l STM-1 l 2xSTM-1 Supported only in Integrated IP radio mode Supports high-efficiency encapsulation for L2 Ethernet packets and L3 IP packets. Supported only in Integrated IP radio mode with native TDM services being E1 services See Technical Specifications of the ISU2. Supported Supported Supported SNCP See Table 3-61. See the description of MPLS/PWE3 functions provided in the section for the system control, switching, and timing board. Supported Supported
3-75
3 Boards
Function and Feature Clock at the physical layer Clock source Clock protection
ISU2 Clock at the air interface Supports the following clock protection schemes: l Protection based on clock source priorities l Protection by running the SSM protocol l Protection by running the extended SSM protocol
DCN
Inband DCN Outband DCN
Supported l Supports one DCC that is composed of three DCC bytes for each channel in Integrated IP radio mode. l Supports one DCC that is composed of D1-D3 bytes, D4-D12 bytes, or D1-D12 bytes, for each channel in SDH radio mode.
OM
Loopback
Supports the following loopback types: l Inloops and outloops at IF ports l Inloops and outloops at composite ports
Cold reset and warm reset In-service FPGA loading PRBS BER test at IF ports Board manufacturing information query Board temperature detection Board power detection
Supported Supported Supported Supported
Supported
Supported
Table 3-61 Ethernet service functions that the ISU2 supports Function and Feature Ethernet services E-Line services ISU2 Supports the following types of E-Line services: l E-Line services based on ports l E-Line services based on port+VLAN l E-Line services carried by QinQ links l E-Line services carried by PWs
3 Boards
Function and Feature E-LAN services
ISU2 Supports the following types of E-LAN services: l E-LAN services based on IEEE 802.1d bridges l E-LAN services based on IEEE 802.1q bridges l E-LAN services based on IEEE 802.1ad bridges
ERPS OAM LAG Spanning tree protocol
Supports the ERPS function that complies with ITU-T G.8032/Y.1344. Supports the IEEE 802.1ag OAM and IEEE 802.3ah OAM. Supported Supports the MSTP protocol that generates only the CIST. The MSTP protocol provides functions equivalent to that of the RSTP protocol. See the description of QoS functions provided in the section for the system control, switching, and timing board. Supported
QoS
RMON

This section describes how to process one IF signal in Integrated IP radio mode, and it serves as an example to describe the working principle and signal flow of the ISU2.
NOTE
The ISU2 adopts the same principle to process signals transmitted/received in Integrated IP radio mode and signals transmitted/received in SDH radio mode. The difference is with regard to the microwave frame structure and processed service categories.
Issue 03 (2011-04-10)
3-77
3 Boards

Figure 3-25 Functional block diagram of the ISU2
Backplane SMODEM unit ODU control signal HSM signal bus Paired board
Service bus
MUX/DEMUX unit
Overhead bus
MODEM unit
IF processing unit
IF
Microwave frame signal
GE bus
Control bus
Power supply unit
-48 V1 -48 V2 +3.3 V
Clock unit
System clock signal

Table 3-62 Signal processing in the receive direction of the ISU2 Step 1 2 Function Unit Combiner interface unit SMODEM unit Processing Flow Divides the received IF signals into ODU control signals and microwave service signals. l Demodulates ODU control signals. l Transmits the ODU control signals to the system control and communication unit. 3 IF processing unit l Filters signals. l Performs A/D conversion. 4 MODEM unit l Performs digital demodulation. l Performs time domain adaptive equalization. l Performs FEC decoding and generates specific alarms.
3 Boards
Step 5
Function Unit MUX/DEMUX unit
Processing Flow l Detects microwave frame headers and generates specific alarms and performance events. l Verifies parity bits in microwave frames and generates specific alarms and performance events. l Checks link IDs in microwave frames and generates specific alarms and performance events. l Detects changes in ATPC messages and returned microwave messages and reports the changes to the system control and communication unit over the control bus. l Extracts orderwire bytes, auxiliary channel bytes including F1 and SERIAL bytes, and DCC bytes in microwave frames and transmits to the logic processing unit. l Maps E1 service signals to the specific positions in VC-4s and then transmits the VC-4s to the logic processing unit, if native TDM services in Integrated IP radio mode are E1 services. l Demaps VC-4s from STM-1 service signals and then transmits the VC-4s to the logic processing unit, if native TDM services in Integrated IP radio mode are STM-1 services. l Extracts the Ethernet service signals from microwave frams and transmits to the Ethernet processing unit.
NOTE
Issue 03 (2011-04-10)
3-79
3 Boards

Table 3-63 Signal processing in the transmit direction of the ISU2 Step 1 Function Unit Logic processing unit Processing Flow l Processes clock signals. l Processes overhead signals. l Receives VC-4 signals and pointer indication signals from the cross-connect unit. 2 Ethernet processing unit MUX/DEMUX unit l Receives GE signals from the packet switching unit. l Processes GE signals. l Demaps E1 signals from the VC-4 signals that are from the logic processing unit, if native TDM services in Integrated IP radio mode are E1 services. l Adds overheads to the VC-4 signals that are from the logic processing unit to form STM-1 signals, if native TDM services in Integrated IP radio mode are STM-1 services. l Sets microwave frame overheads. l Combines the E1/STM-1 signals, Ethernet signals, and microwave frame overheads to form microwave frames. 4 MODEM unit l Performs FEC coding. l Performs digital modulation. 6 IF processing unit l Performs D/A conversion. l Performs analog modulation. l Filters signals. l Amplifies signals. 7 8 SMODEM unit Combiner interface unit Modulates the ODU control signals transmitted from the system control and communication unit. Combines the ODU control signals, microwave service signals, and -48 V power supplies and transmits the combined signals to the IF cable.

3 Boards
Power Supply Unit

The power supply unit performs the following functions: l Performs soft-start and filtering operations for the -48 V power received from the power supply bus in the backplane and supplies -48 V power to the ODU after performing DCDC conversion. Performs soft-start and filtering operations for the -48 V power received from the power supply bus in the backplane and supplies +3.3 V power to the other units on the ISU2 after performing DC-DC conversion.
Clock Unit
3.7.4 Front Panel

Front Panel Diagram

Figure 3-26 Front panel of the ISU2
ISU2
PULL
Indicators
Table 3-64 Status explanation for indicators on the ISU2 Indicator STAT State On (green) On (red) Off Meaning The board is working properly. The board hardware is faulty. l The board is not working. l The board is not created. l There is no power supplied to the board. SRV On (green) On (red) The services are normal. A critical or major alarm occurs in the services.
3-81
Issue 03 (2011-04-10)
IF
WARNING
ISU2
ODU-PWR
3 Boards
Indicator
State On (yellow)
Meaning A minor or remote alarm occurs in the services. The radio link is normal. The radio link is faulty. The ODU is working properly. l The ODU is reporting critical or major alarms. l There is no power supplied to the ODU.
LINK
On (green) On (red)
ODU
On (green) On (red)
Off
Ports
3-82
Issue 03 (2011-04-10)

NOTE
3 Boards
Labels
There is a high temperature warning label, an operation warning label, and an operation guidance label on the front panel. The high temperature warning label indicates that the board surface temperature may exceed 70C when the ambient temperature is higher than 55C. If surface temperature reaches this level, you need to wear protective gloves before handling the board. The operation warning label indicates that the ODU-PWR switch must be turned off before the IF cable is removed. The operation guidance label indicates that the switch must be pulled slightly outwards before the switch is set to the "I" or "O" position.
3.7.5 Valid Slots

The ISU2 can be inserted in slots 1-14. The logical slots of the ISU2 on the NMS are the same as the physical slots. Figure 3-27 Slots for the ISU2 in the IDU chassis
Slot 26 (PIU) Slot 13 (ISU2) Slot 11 (ISU2) Slot 9 (ISU2) Slot 28 (FAN) Slot 20 Slot 7 (ISU2) Slot 15 Slot 5 (ISU2) Slot 3 (ISU2) Slot 1 (ISU2) Slot 6 (ISU2) Slot 4 (ISU2) Slot 2 (ISU2) Slot 8 (ISU2) Slot 27 (PIU) Slot 14 (ISU2) Slot 12 (ISU2) Slot 10 (ISU2)
Issue 03 (2011-04-10)
3-83
3 Boards
Figure 3-28 Logical slots of the ISU2 on the NMS

Slot 26 (PIU) Slot 13 (ISU2) Slot 11 (ISU2) Slot 9 (ISU2) Slot 28 (FAN) Slot 20 Slot 7 (ISU2) Slot 15 Slot 5 (ISU2) Slot 3 (ISU2) Slot 1 (ISU2) Slot 16 Slot 21
Slot 27 (PIU) Slot 14 (ISU2) Slot 12 (ISU2) Slot 10 (ISU2) Slot 22 Slot 8 (ISU2) Slot 17 Slot 6 (ISU2) Slot 4 (ISU2) Slot 2 (ISU2)
NOTE

This section provides hyperlinks of the main parameter settings for the ISU2.
3-84
Issue 03 (2011-04-10)
3 Boards
Related References
A.5.5.1 Parameter Description: IF Interface_IF Attribute A.5.5.2 Parameter Description: IF Interface_ATPC Attribute A.5.5.3 Parameter Description: Hybrid_AM Configuration_Advanced Attributes A.5.9.2 Parameter Description: VC-4 POHs A.5.9.3 Parameter Description: VC-12 POHs A.5.4.1 Parameter Description: Microwave Interface_Basic Attributes A.5.4.2 Parameter Description: Microwave Interface_Layer 2 Attributes A.5.4.3 Parameter Description: Microwave Interface_Layer 3 Attributes A.5.4.4 Parameter Description: Microwave Interface_Advanced Attributes

Radio Work Modes

Table 3-67 SDH/PDH microwave work modes (ISU2/ISX2 board) Service Capacity STM-1 2xSTM-1 Modulation Mode 128QAM 128QAM Channel Spacing (MHz) 28 (27.5) 56 (55)
Table 3-68 Integrated IP microwave work modes (ISU2/ISX2 board, Native E1 + Ethernet service) Maximum Number of E1s in Hybrid Microwave 5 10 12 15 18 20 10 20 Native Ethernet Throughput (Mbit/s) Not Accelerated 10 to 13 20 to 26 25 to 32 31 to 40 37 to 47 41 to 53 20 to 26 41 to 52 With L2 Bandwidth Accelerated 10 to 15 20 to 30 25 to 36 31 to 47 37 to 56 41 to 62 20 to 31 41 to 61 With L2+L3 Bandwidth Accelerated (IPv4) 10 to 22 20 to 44 25 to 54 31 to 67 37 to 80 41 to 90 20 to 44 41 to 89
3-85
Channel Spacing (MHz)
Modulation Mode
7 7 7 7 7 7 14 (13.75) 14 (13.75)
QPSK 16QAM 32QAM 64QAM 128QAM 256QAM QPSK 16QAM
Issue 03 (2011-04-10)
3 Boards
Modulation Mode
Maximum Number of E1s in Hybrid Microwave 24 31 37 42 20 40 52 64 75 75 27 55 71 75 75 75 40 75 75 75 75 75
Native Ethernet Throughput (Mbit/s) Not Accelerated 51 to 65 65 to 83 76 to 97 87 to 111 41 to 52 82 to 105 107 to 136 131 to 168 155 to 198 181 to 230 56 to 72 114 to 145 147 to 187 181 to 230 215 to 272 249 to 318 82 to 105 166 to 212 206 to 262 262 to 333 309 to 396 360 to 456 With L2 Bandwidth Accelerated 51 to 77 65 to 96 76 to 113 87 to 131 41 to 62 82 to 124 107 to 161 131 to 198 155 to 233 181 to 272 56 to 84 114 to 172 147 to 221 181 to 272 215 to 323 249 to 375 82 to 124 166 to 250 206 to 308 262 to 388 309 to 466 360 to 538 With L2+L3 Bandwidth Accelerated (IPv4) 51 to 110 65 to 140 76 to 165 87 to 189 41 to 89 82 to 178 107 to 230 131 to 283 155 to 333 181 to 388 56 to 122 114 to 247 147 to 318 181 to 388 215 to 456 249 to 538 82 to 178 165 to 356 206 to 437 262 to 567 309 to 656 360 to 777
14 (13.75) 14 (13.75) 14 (13.75) 14 (13.75) 28 (27.5) 28 (27.5) 28 (27.5) 28 (27.5) 28 (27.5) 28 (27.5) 40 40 40 40 40 40 56 (55) 56 (55) 56 (55) 56 (55) 56 (55) 56 (55)
32QAM 64QAM 128QAM 256QAM QPSK 16QAM 32QAM 64QAM 128QAM 256QAM QPSK 16QAM 32QAM 64QAM 128QAM 256QAM QPSK 16QAM 32QAM 64QAM 128QAM 256QAM
NOTE
The ISX2 board supports channel spacings of 7 Mbit/s and 14 Mbit/s only when the non-XPIC mode is adopted.
3-86
Issue 03 (2011-04-10)
3 Boards
Table 3-69 Integrated IP microwave work modes (ISU2 board, Native STM-1 + Ethernet service) Channel Spacing (MHz) Number of STM-1 Services in Hybrid Microwave 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 Native Ethernet Throughput (Mbit/s) Not Accelerated 155 to 198 181 to 230 181 to 230 215 to 272 249 to 318 166 to 212 206 to 262 262 to 333 309 to 396 360 to 456 With L2 Bandwidth Accelerated 155 to 233 181 to 272 181 to 272 215 to 323 249 to 375 166 to 250 206 to 308 262 to 388 309 to 466 360 to 538 With L2+L3 Bandwidth Accelerated (IPv4) 155 to 333 181 to 388 181 to 388 215 to 456 249 to 538 165 to 356 206 to 437 262 to 567 309 to 656 360 to 777
Modulation Mode
28 (27.5) 28 (27.5) 40 40 40 56 (55) 56 (55) 56 (55) 56 (55) 56 (55)
128QAM 256QAM 64QAM 128QAM 256QAM 16QAM 32QAM 64QAM 128QAM 256QAM
NOTE
IF Performance
Table 3-70 IF performance Item IF signal Transmit frequency of the IF board (MHz) Receive frequency of the IF board (MHz) ODU O&M signal Modulation mode Performance 350
140 ASK
Issue 03 (2011-04-10)
3-87
3 Boards
Item Transmit frequency of the IF board (MHz) Receive frequency of the IF board (MHz) Interface impedance (ohm)
Performance 5.5
10 50

Mechanical Behavior
Power Consumption
3.8 ISX2
The ISX2 is a universal XPIC IF board and provides the XPIC function for signals transmitted/ received in Integrated IP radio mode and SDH radio mode. The ISX2 uses the DC-I power distribution mode. 3.8.1 Version Description The functional version of the ISX2 is SL91. 3.8.2 Functions and Features
3 Boards
The ISX2 receives and transmits one IF signal, provides management channels to the ODU, and supplies the required -48 V power to the ODU. In addition, the ISX2 provides the crosspolarization interference cancellation (XPIC) function for IF signals by transmitting/receiving XPIC reference signals. 3.8.3 Working Principle and Signal Flow This section describes how to process one IF signal in Integrated IP radio mode, and it serves as an example to describe the working principle and signal flow of the ISX2. 3.8.4 Front Panel There are indicators, an IF port, XPIC signal ports, an ODU power switch, and labels on the front panel. 3.8.5 Valid Slots The ISX2 can be inserted in slots 1-14. The logical slots of the ISX2 on the NMS are the same as the physical slots. 3.8.6 Board Parameter Settings This section provides hyperlinks of the main parameter settings for the ISX2. 3.8.7 Technical Specifications This section describes the board specifications, including radio work modes, IF performance, modem performance, board mechanical behavior, and board power consumption.

The functional version of the ISX2 is SL91.

The ISX2 receives and transmits one IF signal, provides management channels to the ODU, and supplies the required -48 V power to the ODU. In addition, the ISX2 provides the crosspolarization interference cancellation (XPIC) function for IF signals by transmitting/receiving XPIC reference signals. Table 3-73 lists the functions and features that the ISX2 supports. The ISX2 needs to work with the packet switching unit to implement Ethernet service functions and packet service functions. Table 3-73 Functions and features that the ISX2 supports Function and Feature Basic functions ISX2 l Receives and transmits one IF signal. l Provides management channels to the ODU. l Supplies the required -48 V power to the ODU. Radio type l Integrated IP radio l SDH radio
NOTE The integrated IP radio is compatible with the Hybrid radio and the Packet radio.
Issue 03 (2011-04-10)
3-89
3 Boards
Function and Feature Service categories in Integrated IP radio mode
ISX2 l Native E1 + Ethernet l Native STM-1 + Ethernet

Service categories in SDH radio mode AM High-efficiency encapsulation E1 priority XPIC Radio work mode Link-level protection 1+1 HSB/FD/ SD protection N+1 protection LAG protection at air interfaces Native TDM services Service categories Service protection Ethernet service functions MPLS functions PWE3 functions License Air interface capacity license AM license Clock at the physical layer Clock source Clock protection
l STM-1 l 2xSTM-1 Supported only in integrated IP radio mode Supports high-efficiency encapsulation for L2 Ethernet packets and L3 IP packets. Supported only in integrated IP radio mode with native TDM services being E1 services Supported See Technical Specifications of the ISX2. Supported Supported Supported E1 services and STM-1 services SNCP See Table 3-74. See the description of MPLS/PWE3 functions provided in the section for the system control, switching, and timing board. Supported Supported Clock at the air interface Supports the following clock protection schemes: l Protection based on clock source priorities l Protection by running the SSM protocol l Protection by running the extended SSM protocol
DCN
Inband DCN
Supported
3-90
Issue 03 (2011-04-10)
3 Boards
Function and Feature Outband DCN
ISX2 l Supports one DCC that is composed of three DCC bytes for each channel in Integrated IP radio mode. l Supports one DCC that is composed of D1-D3 bytes, D4-D12 bytes, or D1-D12 bytes, for each channel in SDH radio mode.
OM
Loopback
Supports the following loopback types: l Inloops and outloops at IF ports l Inloops and outloops at composite ports
Cold reset and warm reset In-service FPGA loading PRBS BER test at IF ports Board manufacturing information query Board temperature detection Board power detection
Supported Supported Supported Supported
Supported
Supported
Table 3-74 Ethernet service functions that the ISX2 supports Function and Feature Ethernet services E-Line services ISX2 Supports the following types of E-Line services: l E-Line services based on ports l E-Line services based on port+VLAN l E-Line services carried by QinQ links l E-Line services carried by PWs E-LAN services Supports the following types of E-LAN services: l E-LAN services based on IEEE 802.1d bridges l E-LAN services based on IEEE 802.1q bridges l E-LAN services based on IEEE 802.1ad bridges ERPS Supports the ERPS function that complies with ITU-T G.8032/Y.1344.
Issue 03 (2011-04-10)
3-91
3 Boards
Function and Feature OAM LAG Spanning tree protocol
ISX2 Supports the IEEE 802.1ag OAM and IEEE 802.3ah OAM. Supported Supports the MSTP protocol that generates only the CIST. The MSTP protocol provides functions equivalent to that of the RSTP protocol. See the description of QoS functions provided in the section for the system control, switching, and timing board. Supported
QoS
RMON

This section describes how to process one IF signal in Integrated IP radio mode, and it serves as an example to describe the working principle and signal flow of the ISX2.
NOTE
The ISX2 adopts the same principle to process signals transmitted/received in Integrated IP radio mode and signals transmitted/received in SDH radio mode. The difference is with regard to the microwave frame structure and processed service types.
3-92
Issue 03 (2011-04-10)
3 Boards

Figure 3-29 Functional block diagram of the ISX2
Backplane SMODEM unit ODU control signal
HSM signal bus Paired board Service bus
MUX/DEMUX unit
IF processing unit
IF
Overhead bus
GE bus
Paired XPIC board
XPIC signal Control bus System control and communication unit Logic control unit
Power supply unit
-48 V1 -48 V2 +3.3 V
Clock unit
System clock signal

Table 3-75 Signal processing in the receive direction of the ISX2 Step 1 2 Function Unit Combiner interface unit SMODEM unit Processing Flow Divides the received IF signals into ODU control signals and microwave service signals. l Demodulates ODU control signals. l Transmits the ODU control signals to the system control and communication unit.
Issue 03 (2011-04-10)
3-93
3 Boards
Step 3
Processing Flow l Filters the received signals and splits the signals to two channels of signals. Performs A/D conversion for one channel of filtered signals and transmits the converted signals to the MODEM unit. Outputs the other channel of filtered signals as the XPIC signals. l Performs A/D conversion for XPIC signals transmitted from the paired ISX2 and transmits the converted signals to the MODEM unit.
MODEM unit
l Performs digital demodulation by using XPIC IF signals transmitted from the paired ISX2 as reference signals. l Performs XPIC operations for IF signals. l Performs time domain adaptive equalization. l Performs FEC decoding and generates specific alarms.
MUX/DEMUX unit
l Detects microwave frame headers and generates specific alarms and performance events. l Verifies parity bits in microwave frames and generates specific alarms and performance events. l Checks link IDs in microwave frames and generates specific alarms and performance events. l Detects changes in ATPC messages and returned microwave messages and reports the changes to the system control and communication unit over the control bus. l Extracts auxiliary channel bytes including orderwire bytes, F1 and SERIAL bytes, and DCC bytes in microwave frames and transmits to the logic processing unit. l Maps E1 service signals to the specific positions in VC-4s and then transmits the VC-4s to the logic processing unit, if native TDM services in Integrated IP radio mode are E1 services. l Demaps VC-4s from STM-1 service signals and then transmits the VC-4s to the logic processing unit, if native TDM services in Integrated IP radio mode are STM-1 services. l Extracts the Ethernet service signals from microwave frams and transmits to the Ethernet processing unit.
3-94
Issue 03 (2011-04-10)
3 Boards
Step 6
Function Unit Ethernet processing unit
Processing Flow l Processes the GE signals received from the MUX/ DEMUX unit. l Sends the processed signals to the main and standby packet switching units.
NOTE

Table 3-76 Signal processing in the transmit direction of the ISX2 Step 1 Function Unit Logic processing unit Processing Flow l Processes clock signals. l Processes overhead signals. l Receives VC-4 signals and pointer indication signals from the cross-connect unit. 2 Ethernet processing unit MUX/DEMUX unit l Receives GE signals from the packet switching unit. l Processes GE signals. l Demaps E1 signals from the VC-4 signals that are from the logic processing unit, if native TDM services in Integrated IP radio mode are E1 services. l Adds overheads to the VC-4 signals that are from the logic processing unit to form STM-1 signals, if native TDM services in Integrated IP radio mode are STM-1 services. l Sets microwave frame overheads. l Combines the E1/STM-1 signals, Ethernet signals, and microwave frame overheads to form microwave frames. 4 MODEM unit l Performs FEC coding. l Performs digital modulation.
Issue 03 (2011-04-10)
3-95
3 Boards
Step 6
Processing Flow l Performs D/A conversion. l Performs analog modulation. l Filters signals. l Amplifies signals.
7 8
SMODEM unit Combiner interface unit
Modulates the ODU control signals transmitted from the system control and communication unit. Combines the ODU control signals, microwave service signals, and -48 V power supplies and transmits the combined signals to the IF cable.

Power Supply Unit

The power supply unit performs the following functions: l Performs soft-start and filtering operations for the -48 V power received from the power supply bus in the backplane and supplies -48 V power to the ODU after performing DCDC conversion. Performs soft-start and filtering operations for the -48 V power received from the power supply bus in the backplane and supplies +3.3 V power to the other units on the ISU2 after performing DC-DC conversion.
Clock Unit
3.8.4 Front Panel

There are indicators, an IF port, XPIC signal ports, an ODU power switch, and labels on the front panel.
Front Panel Diagram

Figure 3-30 Front panel of the ISX2
ISX2
PULL
I
X-IN X-OUT
3-96
XPIC STAT SRV LINK ODU RMT ACT
IF
WARNING
Issue 03 (2011-04-10)
ISX2
ODU-PWR
3 Boards
Indicators
Table 3-77 Status explanation for indicators on the ISX2 Indicator XPIC State On (green) On (red) Off STAT On (green) On (red) Off Meaning The XPIC input signal is normal. The XPIC input signal is lost. The XPIC function is disabled. The board is working properly. The board hardware is faulty. l The board is not working. l The board is not created. l There is no power supplied to the board. SRV On (green) On (red) On (yellow) LINK On (green) On (red) ODU On (green) On (red) The services are normal. A critical or major alarm occurs in the services. A minor or remote alarm occurs in the services. The radio link is normal. The radio link is faulty. The ODU is working properly. l The ODU is reporting critical or major alarms. l There is no power supplied to the ODU. On (yellow) Blinks on (yellow) and off at 300 ms intervals RMT On (yellow) The ODU is reporting minor alarms. The antennas are not aligned. The remote equipment is reporting defects.
Issue 03 (2011-04-10)
3-97
3 Boards
Indicator
State Off
Meaning The remote equipment is free of defects. l In a 1+1 protected system, the board works as the active one. l In an unprotected system, the board has been activated.
ACT
On (green)
Off
Ports
Table 3-78 Description of the ports Port IF ODU-PWRa X-IN X-OUT Description IF port ODU power switch XPIC signal input port XPIC signal output port Connector Type TNC SMA SMA Corresponding Cable IF jumperb XPIC cable
NOTE
Labels
There is a high temperature warning label, an operation warning label, and an operation guidance label on the front panel. The high temperature warning label indicates that the board surface temperature may exceed 70C when the ambient temperature is higher than 55C. If surface temperature reaches this level, you need to wear protective gloves before handling the board.
3 Boards
The operation warning label indicates that the ODU-PWR switch must be turned off before the IF cable is removed. The operation guidance label indicates that the switch must be pulled slightly outwards before the switch is set to the "I" or "O" position.
3.8.5 Valid Slots

The ISX2 can be inserted in slots 1-14. The logical slots of the ISX2 on the NMS are the same as the physical slots. Figure 3-31 Slots for the ISX2 in the IDU chassis
Slot 26 (PIU) Slot 13 (ISX2) Slot 11 (ISX2) Slot 9 (ISX2) Slot 28 (FAN) Slot 20 Slot 7 (ISX2) Slot 15 Slot 5 (ISX2) Slot 3 (ISX2) Slot 1 (ISX2) Slot 6 (ISX2) Slot 4 (ISX2) Slot 2 (ISX2) Slot 8 (ISX2) Slot 27 (PIU) Slot 14 (ISX2) Slot 12 (ISX2) Slot 10 (ISX2)
Issue 03 (2011-04-10)
3-99
3 Boards
Figure 3-32 Logical slots of the ISX2 on the NMS

Slot 26 (PIU) Slot 13 (ISX2) Slot 11 (ISX2) Slot 9 (ISX2) Slot 28 (FAN) Slot 20 Slot 7 (ISX2) Slot 15 Slot 5 (ISX2) Slot 3 (ISX2) Slot 1 (ISX2) Slot 16 Slot 21
Slot 27 (PIU) Slot 14 (ISX2) Slot 12 (ISX2) Slot 10 (ISX2) Slot 22 Slot 8 (ISX2) Slot 17 Slot 6 (ISX2) Slot 4 (ISX2) Slot 2 (ISX2)
NOTE
NOTE
One ISX2 pair for implementing the XPIC function must be installed on the same row or adjacently in the same column.

This section provides hyperlinks of the main parameter settings for the ISX2.
3 Boards
Related References
A.5.5.1 Parameter Description: IF Interface_IF Attribute A.5.5.2 Parameter Description: IF Interface_ATPC Attribute A.5.5.3 Parameter Description: Hybrid_AM Configuration_Advanced Attributes A.5.9.2 Parameter Description: VC-4 POHs A.5.9.3 Parameter Description: VC-12 POHs A.5.4.1 Parameter Description: Microwave Interface_Basic Attributes A.5.4.2 Parameter Description: Microwave Interface_Layer 2 Attributes A.5.4.3 Parameter Description: Microwave Interface_Layer 3 Attributes A.5.4.4 Parameter Description: Microwave Interface_Advanced Attributes

Radio Work Modes

Table 3-80 SDH/PDH microwave work modes (ISU2/ISX2 board) Service Capacity STM-1 2xSTM-1 Modulation Mode 128QAM 128QAM Channel Spacing (MHz) 28 (27.5) 56 (55)
Table 3-81 Integrated IP microwave work modes (ISU2/ISX2 board, Native E1 + Ethernet service) Maximum Number of E1s in Hybrid Microwave 5 10 12 15 18 20 10 Native Ethernet Throughput (Mbit/s) Not Accelerated 10 to 13 20 to 26 25 to 32 31 to 40 37 to 47 41 to 53 20 to 26 With L2 Bandwidth Accelerated 10 to 15 20 to 30 25 to 36 31 to 47 37 to 56 41 to 62 20 to 31 With L2+L3 Bandwidth Accelerated (IPv4) 10 to 22 20 to 44 25 to 54 31 to 67 37 to 80 41 to 90 20 to 44
3-101
Modulation Mode
7 7 7 7 7 7 14 (13.75)
QPSK 16QAM 32QAM 64QAM 128QAM 256QAM QPSK
Issue 03 (2011-04-10)
3 Boards
Modulation Mode
Maximum Number of E1s in Hybrid Microwave 20 24 31 37 42 20 40 52 64 75 75 27 55 71 75 75 75 40 75 75 75 75 75
Native Ethernet Throughput (Mbit/s) Not Accelerated 41 to 52 51 to 65 65 to 83 76 to 97 87 to 111 41 to 52 82 to 105 107 to 136 131 to 168 155 to 198 181 to 230 56 to 72 114 to 145 147 to 187 181 to 230 215 to 272 249 to 318 82 to 105 166 to 212 206 to 262 262 to 333 309 to 396 360 to 456 With L2 Bandwidth Accelerated 41 to 61 51 to 77 65 to 96 76 to 113 87 to 131 41 to 62 82 to 124 107 to 161 131 to 198 155 to 233 181 to 272 56 to 84 114 to 172 147 to 221 181 to 272 215 to 323 249 to 375 82 to 124 166 to 250 206 to 308 262 to 388 309 to 466 360 to 538 With L2+L3 Bandwidth Accelerated (IPv4) 41 to 89 51 to 110 65 to 140 76 to 165 87 to 189 41 to 89 82 to 178 107 to 230 131 to 283 155 to 333 181 to 388 56 to 122 114 to 247 147 to 318 181 to 388 215 to 456 249 to 538 82 to 178 165 to 356 206 to 437 262 to 567 309 to 656 360 to 777
14 (13.75) 14 (13.75) 14 (13.75) 14 (13.75) 14 (13.75) 28 (27.5) 28 (27.5) 28 (27.5) 28 (27.5) 28 (27.5) 28 (27.5) 40 40 40 40 40 40 56 (55) 56 (55) 56 (55) 56 (55) 56 (55) 56 (55)
16QAM 32QAM 64QAM 128QAM 256QAM QPSK 16QAM 32QAM 64QAM 128QAM 256QAM QPSK 16QAM 32QAM 64QAM 128QAM 256QAM QPSK 16QAM 32QAM 64QAM 128QAM 256QAM
NOTE
The ISX2 board supports channel spacings of 7 Mbit/s and 14 Mbit/s only when the non-XPIC mode is adopted.
3-102
Issue 03 (2011-04-10)
3 Boards
Table 3-82 Integrated IP microwave work modes (ISX2 board, Native STM-1 + Ethernet service) Channel Spacing (MHz) Number of STM-1 Services in Hybrid Microwave 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 Native Ethernet Throughput (Mbit/s) Not Accelerated 155 to 198 181 to 230 181 to 230 215 to 272 249 to 318 166 to 212 206 to 262 262 to 333 309 to 396 360 to 456 With L2 Bandwidth Accelerated 155 to 233 181 to 272 181 to 272 215 to 323 249 to 375 166 to 250 206 to 308 262 to 388 309 to 466 360 to 538 With L2+L3 Bandwidth Accelerated (IPv4) 155 to 333 181 to 388 181 to 388 215 to 456 249 to 538 165 to 356 206 to 437 262 to 567 309 to 656 360 to 777
Modulation Mode
28 (27.5) 28 (27.5) 40 40 40 56 (55) 56 (55) 56 (55) 56 (55) 56 (55)
128QAM 256QAM 64QAM 128QAM 256QAM 16QAM 32QAM 64QAM 128QAM 256QAM
NOTE
IF Performance
Table 3-83 IF performance Item IF signal Transmit frequency of the IF board (MHz) Receive frequency of the IF board (MHz) ODU O&M signal Modulation mode Performance 350
140 ASK
Issue 03 (2011-04-10)
3-103
3 Boards
Item Transmit frequency of the IF board (MHz) Receive frequency of the IF board (MHz) Interface impedance (ohm)
Performance 5.5
10 50

Mechanical Behavior
Power Consumption
3.9 EM6T/EM6F
The EM6T/EM6F is an FE/GE interface board, which provides four FE electrical ports and two GE ports. The EM6T has similar functions to the EM6F. The only difference is as follows: The GE ports on the EM6T use fixed electrical ports whereas the GE ports on the EM6F use the SFP modules and therefore can function as two optical or electrical ports. The GE electrical ports on the EM6F and the EM6T are compatible with the FE electrical ports. 3.9.1 Version Description
3 Boards
The functional version of the EM6T/EM6F is SL91. 3.9.2 Functions and Features The EM6T/EM6F receives/transmits, processes, and converges four FE signals and two GE signals. 3.9.3 Working Principle and Signal Flow This section describes how to process one GE signal on the EM6T, and it serves as an example to describe the working principle and signal flow of the EM6T/EM6F. 3.9.4 Front Panel There are indicators, FE service ports, and GE service ports on the front panel. 3.9.5 Valid Slots The EM6T/EM6F can be inserted in slots 1-14. The logical slots of the EM6T/EM6F on the NMS are the same as the physical slots. 3.9.6 Board Feature Code The board feature code of the EM6F indicates the type of SFP module. The board feature code refers to the number next to the board name in the bar code. The EM6T does not have a feature code. 3.9.7 Board Parameter Settings This section provides hyperlinks of the main parameter settings for the EM6T/EM6F. 3.9.8 Technical Specifications This section describes the board specifications, including the GE port performance, FE port performance, board mechanical behavior, and board power consumption.

The functional version of the EM6T/EM6F is SL91.

The EM6T/EM6F receives/transmits, processes, and converges four FE signals and two GE signals. Table 3-86 lists the functions and features that the EM6T/EM6F supports. The EM6T/EM6F needs to work with the packet switching unit of the system control, switching, and timing board to implement Ethernet service functions. Table 3-86 Functions and features that the EM6T/EM6F supports Function and Feature Board EM6T Basic functions EM6F
Receives/transmits FE/GE service signals and works with the packet switching unit to process the received FE/GE service signals. FE electrical port Provides four 10/100BASE-T(X) ports. Provides four 10/100BASE-T(X) ports.
Port specifications
Issue 03 (2011-04-10)
3-105
3 Boards
Function and Feature
Board EM6T EM6F Provides two GE ports by using SFP modules of any of the following types: l 1000BASE-SX l 1000BASE-LX l 10/100/1000BASE-T (X)
GE port
Provides two 10/100/1000BASE-T(X) ports (fixed).
Backplane bus bandwidth Port attributes Working mode
1 Gbit/s
1 Gbit/s
l The FE port supports 10M full-duplex, 10M halfduplex, 100M full-duplex, 100M half-duplex, and auto-negotiation. l The GE electrical port supports 10M full-duplex, 10M half-duplex, 100M full-duplex, 100M halfduplex, 1000M full-duplex, and auto-negotiation. l The GE optical port supports 1000M full-duplex and auto-negotiation.
TAG attributes
l The TAG attribute can be set to tag aware, access, or hybrid. l Sets and queries the TAG attribute of an Ethernet port.
Jumbo frame Traffic control function Services E-Line services
Supports jumbo frames with a maximum frame length of 9600 bytes. Supports the port-based traffic control function that complies with IEEE 802.3x. Supports the following types of E-Line services: l E-Line services based on ports l E-Line services based on port+VLAN l E-Line services based on port+QinQ
E-LAN services
Supports the following types of E-LAN services: l E-LAN services based on IEEE 802.1d bridges l E-LAN services based on IEEE 802.1q bridges l E-LAN services based on IEEE 802.1ad bridges
LAG
Inter-board LAG Intra-board LAG
Supported Supported
Supported Supported
ERPS
Supports the ERPS function that complies with ITU-T G.8032/Y.1344.
3-106
Issue 03 (2011-04-10)
3 Boards
Board EM6T EM6F
Spanning tree protocol
Supports the MSTP protocol that generates only the CIST. The MSTP protocol provides functions equivalent to that of the RSTP protocol. Supported Supported
LPT QoS DiffServ
Supports simple traffic classification by specifying PHB service classes for service flows based on their QoS information (C-VLAN priorities, S-VLAN priorities, DSCP values, and MPLS EXP values) carried by the packets. Supports traffic classification at Ethernet ports based on C-VLAN IDs, S-VLAN IDs, C-VLAN priorities, SVLAN priorities, C-VLAN IDs + C-VLAN priorities, S-VLAN IDs + S-VLAN priorities, or DSCP values carried by packets. Provides the CAR function for traffic flows at ports. Supports traffic shaping for a specific port, prioritized queue, or traffic flow. Supports the following queue scheduling policies: l SP l WRR l SP+WRR
Complex traffic classification
CAR Shaping Queue scheduling policies
ETH OAM
IEEE 802.1ag OAM
Supports the following IEEE 802.1ag OAM functions: l Management of OAM maintenance points l Continuity check test l Loopback test l Link trace test
IEEE 802.3ah OAM
Supports the following IEEE 802.3ah OAM functions: l OAM automatic discovery l Link performance monitoring l Fault detection l Remote loopback test l Loopback detection and blocking of a port being looped back
RMON Clock Clock source
Supported Synchronous Ethernet
Supported Synchronous Ethernet (not supported by the SFP electrical module)
Issue 03 (2011-04-10)
3-107
3 Boards
Board EM6T EM6F
Clock protection
Supports the following clock protection schemes: l Protection based on clock source priorities l Protection by running the SSM protocol l Protection by running the extended SSM protocol
DCN OAM
Inband DCN Loopback
Each FE/GE port provides one inband DCN channel. Supports the following loopback types: l Inloops at the PHY layer of Ethernet ports l Inloops at the MAC layer of Ethernet ports
Warm reset and cold reset Board manufacturing information query Board voltage detection Board temperature detection Query of SFP module information
Supported Supported
Supported Supported
Supported Supported
Supported Supported
Not supported
Supported

This section describes how to process one GE signal on the EM6T, and it serves as an example to describe the working principle and signal flow of the EM6T/EM6F.
3-108
Issue 03 (2011-04-10)
3 Boards

Figure 3-33 Functional block diagram
Backplane GE signal GE signal access unit Control signal Ethernet processing unit FE signal access unit Control signal FE signal Control bus of the board Ethernet signal Ethernet signal Packet switching unit
Logic control unit
Control bus
+3.3 V power supplied to the board +3.3 V backup power supplied to the board Clock signal provided to the other units on the board
Power supply unit
-48 V1 -48 V2 +3.3 V
Clock unit
System clock signal

Table 3-87 Signal processing in the receive direction Step 1 Function Unit GE signal access unit/FE signal access unit Processing Flow l Receives/Transmits GE/FE signals. l Performs restructuring, decoding, and serial/parallel conversion for GE/FE signals. l Performs frame delimitation, preamble stripping, CRC checks, and Ethernet performance measurement for frame signals. 2 Ethernet processing unit l Adds tags identifying ingress ports to Ethernet data frames. l Processes VLAN tags in Ethernet data frames. l Processes labels in MPLS/PWE3 packets. l Performs QoS processing such as traffic classification and CAR traffic monitoring for Ethernet data frames. l Forwards Ethernet data frames to the logic processing unit.
3 Boards
Step 3
Processing Flow Transmits Ethernet data frames to the main and standby packet switching units.

Table 3-88 Signal processing in the transmit direction Step 1 Function Unit Logic processing unit Processing Flow l Selects Ethernet data frames from the packet switching unit. l Transmits Ethernet data frames to the Ethernet processing unit. 2 Ethernet processing unit l Processes labels in MPLS/PWE3 packets. l Processes VLAN tags in Ethernet data frames. l Performs QoS processing such as traffic shaping and queue scheduling for Ethernet data frames. l Forwards Ethernet data frames to proper egress ports based on egress tags contained in the Ethernet data frames. 3 GE signal access unit/FE signal access unit l Performs frame delimitation, preamble addition, CRC code computing, and Ethernet performance measurement. l Performs parallel/serial conversion and coding for Ethernet data frames, and sends out the generated GE/ FE signals through Ethernet ports.

The Ethernet processing unit controls the FE/GE signal access unit by using management control signals. The logic control unit controls the Ethernet processing unit and logic processing unit over the control bus on the board. The logic control unit communicates with the main and standby system control and communication units over the system control bus. The configuration data and query commands from the system control and communication unit are issued to the various units of the board through the logic control unit. The command response reported by each unit on the board, and the alarms and performance events are reported to the system control and communication unit also through the logic control unit.
Power Supply Unit

The power supply unit performs the following functions:
3 Boards
l l
Receives two -48 V power supplies from the backplane, converts the -48 V power supplies into +3.3 V power, and then supplies the +3.3 V power to the other units on the board. Receives one +3.3 V power supply from the backplane, which functions as a +3.3 V power backup for the other units on the board.
Clock Unit
3.9.4 Front Panel

There are indicators, FE service ports, and GE service ports on the front panel.
Front Panel Diagram

Figure 3-34 Front panel of the EM6T
EM6T
STAT PROG SRV
GE1
GE2
FE1
FE2
FE3
FE4
Figure 3-35 Front panel of the EM6F

EM6F
STAT PROG SRV LINK1 LINK2
CLASS1 LASER PRODUCT
GE1
GE2
FE1
FE2
FE3
FE4
Indicators
Table 3-89 Status explanation for indicators on the EM6T/EM6F Indicator STAT State On (green) On (red) Off Meaning The board is working properly. The board hardware is faulty. l The board is not working. l The board is not created. l There is no power supplied to the board. SRV On (green) On (red) The system is working properly. A critical or major alarm occurs in the system.
3-111
Issue 03 (2011-04-10)
EM6F
EM6T
3 Boards
Indicator
State On (yellow) Off
Meaning A minor alarm occurs in the system. There is no power supplied to the system. Software is being loaded to the board during the power-on or resetting process of the board. The board software is in BIOS boot state during the power-on or resetting process of the board. l When the board is being powered on or being reset, the upper layer software is being initialized. l When the board is running, the software is running normally.
PROG
Blinks on (green) and off at 100 ms intervals Blinks on (green) and off at 300 ms intervals On (green)
Blinks on (red) and off at 100 ms intervals On (red)
The BOOTROM self-check fails during the power-on or resetting process of the board. The memory self-check fails or loading upper layer software fails during the poweron or resetting process of the board. The logic file or upper layer software is lost during the running process of the board. The pluggable storage card is faulty.
LINK1a
On (green) Blinking (yellow) Off
The GE1 port is connected correctly and is not receiving or transmitting data. The GE1 port is receiving or transmitting data. The GE1 port is not connected or is connected incorrectly. The GE2 port is connected correctly and is not receiving or transmitting data. The GE2 port is receiving or transmitting data. The GE2 port is not connected or is connected incorrectly.
LINK2a
NOTE
a: The LINK1 and LINK2 indicators are available only on the EM6F and indicate the states of the corresponding GE ports.
3-112
Issue 03 (2011-04-10)
3 Boards
Ports
Table 3-90 Description of the ports on the EM6T Port FE1 FE2 FE3 FE4 GE1 GE2 GE service port (fixed electrical port) RJ45 Network cable Description FE service port Connector Type Corresponding Cable
Table 3-91 Description of the ports on the EM6F Port FE1 FE2 FE3 FE4 GE1 GE2 GE service port (using SFP modules) RJ45 SFP electrical module or LC SFP optical module 5.5 Fiber Jumper/5.8 Network Cable Description FE service port RJ45 5.8 Network Cable Connector Type Corresponding Cable
NOTE
On the NMS, GE1 and GE2 correspond to PORT1 and PORT2 respectively; FE1 to FE4 correspond to PORT3 to PORT6 respectively.
The performance of the FE service ports on the EM6T/EM6F complies with the 10/100BASET(X) standard; the performance of the GE service ports on the EM6T complies with the 10/100/1000BASE-T(X) standard; the performance of the GE service ports on the EM6F complies with the 10/100/1000BASE-T(X) standard if SFP electrical modules are used. All service ports support the MDI, MDI-X, and auto-MDI/MDI-X modes. For the pin assignments for the ports, see Table 3-92 and Table 3-93. For the front view of an RJ45 connector, see Figure 3-36. Figure 3-36 Front view of the RJ45 connector
87654321
Issue 03 (2011-04-10)
3-113
3 Boards
Table 3-92 Pin assignments for the RJ45 connector in MDI mode Pin 10/100BASE-T(X) Signal 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 TX+ TXRX+ Reserved Reserved RXReserved Reserved Function Transmitting data (+) Transmitting data (-) Receiving data (+) Receiving data (-) 1000BASE-T Signal BIDA+ BIDABIDB+ BIDC+ BIDCBIDBBIDD+ BIDDFunction Bidirectional data wire A (+) Bidirectional data wire A (-) Bidirectional data wire B (+) Bidirectional data wire C (+) Bidirectional data wire C (-) Bidirectional data wire B (-) Bidirectional data wire D (+) Bidirectional data wire D (-)
Table 3-93 Pin assignments for the RJ45 connector in MDI-X mode Pin 10/100BASE-T(X) Signal 1 2 3 4 5 6 RX+ RXTX+ Reserved Reserved TXFunction Receiving data (+) Receiving data (-) Transmitting data (+) Transmitting data (-) 1000BASE-T Signal BIDB+ BIDBBIDA+ BIDD+ BIDDBIDAFunction Bidirectional data wire B (+) Bidirectional data wire B (-) Bidirectional data wire A (+) Bidirectional data wire D (+) Bidirectional data wire D (-) Bidirectional data wire A (-)
3-114
Issue 03 (2011-04-10)
3 Boards
Pin
10/100BASE-T(X) Signal Function -
1000BASE-T Signal BIDC+ BIDCFunction Bidirectional data wire C (+) Bidirectional data wire C (-)
7 8
Reserved Reserved
The RJ45 connector has two indicators. For status explanation for these indicators, see Table 3-94. Table 3-94 Status explanation for the indicators of the RJ45 connector Indicator LINK (green) State On Off ACT (yellow) On or blinking Off Meaning The link is working properly. The link is interrupted. The port is transmitting or receiving data. The port is not transmitting or receiving data.
SFP optical modules are used to provide GE service ports on the EM6F; one SFP optical module provides one TX port and one RX port. For details, see Figure 3-37, in which TX represents the transmit port and RX represents the receive port. Figure 3-37 Ports of the SFP optical module
TX
Labels
RX
There is a laser safety class label on the front panel of the EM6F. The laser safety class label indicates that the laser safety class of the optical port is CLASS 1. That is, the maximum launched optical power of the optical port is lower than 10 dBm (10 mW).
3.9.5 Valid Slots

The EM6T/EM6F can be inserted in slots 1-14. The logical slots of the EM6T/EM6F on the NMS are the same as the physical slots.
Issue 03 (2011-04-10)
3-115
3 Boards
Figure 3-38 Slots for the EM6T/EM6F in the IDU chassis

Slot 26 (PIU) Slot 13 (EM6T/EM6F) Slot 11 (EM6T/EM6F) Slot 9 (EM6T/EM6F) Slot 28 (FAN) Slot 20 Slot 7 (EM6T/EM6F) Slot 15 Slot 5 (EM6T/EM6F) Slot 3 (EM6T/EM6F) Slot 1 (EM6T/EM6F) Slot 6 (EM6T/EM6F) Slot 4 (EM6T/EM6F) Slot 2 (EM6T/EM6F) Slot 8 (EM6T/EM6F) Slot 27 (PIU) Slot 14 (EM6T/EM6F) Slot 12 (EM6T/EM6F) Slot 10 (EM6T/EM6F)
Figure 3-39 Logical slots of the EM6T/EM6F on the NMS
Slot 26 (PIU) Slot 13 (EM6T/EM6F) Slot 11 (EM6T/EM6F) Slot 9 (EM6T/EM6F) Slot 28 (FAN) Slot 20 Slot 7 (EM6T/EM6F) Slot 15 Slot 5 (EM6T/EM6F) Slot 3 (EM6T/EM6F) Slot 1 (EM6T/EM6F) Slot 16 Slot 21
Slot 27 (PIU) Slot 14 (EM6T/EM6F) Slot 12 (EM6T/EM6F) Slot 10 (EM6T/EM6F) Slot 22 Slot 8 (EM6T/EM6F) Slot 17 Slot 6 (EM6T/EM6F) Slot 4 (EM6T/EM6F) Slot 2 (EM6T/EM6F)
Table 3-95 Slot configuration for the EM6T/EM6F Item Slot allocation priority Description Slots 4 and 6 > Slots 8 and 10 > Slots 1 and 2 > Slots 7 and 9 > Slots 3 and 5 > Slots 12 and 14 > Slots 11 and 13
3-116
Issue 03 (2011-04-10)
3 Boards
3.9.6 Board Feature Code

The board feature code of the EM6F indicates the type of SFP module. The board feature code refers to the number next to the board name in the bar code. The EM6T does not have a feature code. Table 3-96 Board feature code of the EM6F Board Feature Code 01 02 03 Module Type 1000BASE-SX 1000BASE-LX 10/100/1000BASE-T(X) Part Number of the Module 34060286 34060473 34100052

This section provides hyperlinks of the main parameter settings for the EM6T/EM6F.
Related References
A.5.2.1 Parameter Description: Ethernet Interface_Basic Attributes A.5.2.2 Parameter Description: Ethernet Interface_Flow Control A.5.2.3 Parameter Description: Ethernet Interface_Layer 2 Attributes A.5.2.4 Parameter Description: Ethernet Port_Layer 3 Attributes A.5.2.5 Parameter Description: Ethernet Interface_Advanced Attributes

This section describes the board specifications, including the GE port performance, FE port performance, board mechanical behavior, and board power consumption.
Performance of GE Optical Ports

The GE optical ports on the EM6T/EM6F comply with IEEE 802.3. The following table lists the main specifications for the GE optical ports. Table 3-97 Performance of the GE optical interface Item Nominal bit rate (kbit/s) Classification code Fiber type Transmission distance (km)
Issue 03 (2011-04-10)
Performance 1000 1000BASE-SX Multiple-mode optical fiber 0.5 1000BASE-LX Single-mode optical fiber 10
3-117
3 Boards
Item Operating wavelength (nm) Mean launched power (dBm) Receiver minimum sensitivity (dBm) Minimum overload (dBm) Minimum extinction ratio (dB)
Performance 770 to 860 -9 to -3 -17 0 9.5 1270 to 1355 -9 to -3 -20 -3 9.5
NOTE
The OptiX RTN 980 uses SFP modules to provide GE optical interfaces. Users can use different types of SFP modules to provide GE optical interfaces with different classification codes and transmission distances.
Performance of GE Electrical Ports

The GE electrical ports on the EM6T/EM6F comply with IEEE 802.3. The following table lists the main specifications for the GE electrical ports. Table 3-98 GE electric interface performance Item Nominal bit rate (Mbit/s) Performance 10 (10BASE-T) 100 (100BASE-TX) 1000 (1000BASE-T) Code pattern Manchester encoding signal (10BASE-T) MLT-3 encoding signal (100BASE-TX) 4D-PAM5 encoding signal (1000BASE-T) Interface type RJ45
Performance of FE Electrical Ports

The FE electrical ports on the EM6T/EM6F comply with IEEE 802.3. The following table lists the main specifications for the FE electrical ports. Table 3-99 FE electric interface performance Item Nominal bit rate (Mbit/s) Performance 10 (10BASE-T) 100 (100BASE-TX) Code pattern Manchester encoding signal (10BASE-T) MLT-3 encoding signal (100BASE-TX)
3 Boards
Item Interface type
Performance RJ45
Mechanical Behavior
Table 3-100 Mechanical behavior Item Performance EM6T Dimensions (H x W x D) Weight EM6F
19.82 mm x 193.80 mm x 225.80 mm 0.37 kg 0.40 kg
Power Consumption
Power consumption of the EM6T: < 10.4 W Power consumption of the EM6F: < 11.3 W
3.10 SL1D
The SL1D is a 2xSTM-1 optical interface board. 3.10.1 Version Description The functional version of the SL1D is SL91. 3.10.2 Functions and Features The SL1D receives and transmits 2xSTM-1 optical signals. 3.10.3 Working Principle and Signal Flow This section describes how to process one STM-1 signal, and it serves as an example to describe the working principle and signal flow of the SL1D. 3.10.4 Front Panel There are indicators, STM-1 optical ports, and a label on the front panel. 3.10.5 Valid Slots The SL1D can be inserted in slots 1-14. The logical slots of the SL1D on the NMS are the same as the physical slots. 3.10.6 Board Feature Code The board feature code of the SL1D indicates the type of SFP optical module. The board feature code refers to the number next to the board name in the bar code. 3.10.7 Board Parameter Settings This section provides hyperlinks of the main parameter settings for the SL1D. 3.10.8 Technical Specifications
3 Boards
This section describes the board specifications, including the STM-1 optical port performance, board mechanical behavior, and board power consumption.

The functional version of the SL1D is SL91.

The SL1D receives and transmits 2xSTM-1 optical signals. Table 3-101 lists the functions and features that the SL1D supports. Table 3-101 Functions and features that the SL1D supports Function and Feature Basic functions Optical port specifications SL1D Receives and transmits 2xSTM-1 optical signals. l Adopts the SFP optical module and supports the optical ports of Ie-1, S-1.1, L-1.1, and L-1.2 types. l The characteristics of all the optical ports comply with ITU-T G.957. Protection Linear MSP SNCP Clock Clock source Clock protection Supported Supported Each line port provides one SDH line clock signal. Supports the following clock protection schemes: l Protection based on clock source priorities l Protection by running the SSM protocol l Protection by running the extended SSM protocol DCN OM Outband DCN Loopback Supported Supports the following loopback types: l Outloops at optical ports l Inloops at optical ports l Outloops on VC-4 paths l Inloops on VC-4 paths Warm reset and cold reset Setting of the on/off state of a laser ALS functiona Supported Supported
Supported
3-120
Issue 03 (2011-04-10)
3 Boards
Function and Feature In-service FPGA loading Board manufacturing information query Detection and query of SFP optical module information
SL1D Supported Supported
Supported
NOTE
a: The ALS function is implemented as follows: l When the optical module detects the R_LOS alarm at the receive port and the alarm persists for 500 ms, the laser at the specific transmit port is automatically shut down. l The laser starts to launch laser pulses at a specified interval; that is, the laser emits light for two seconds and stops emission for 60 seconds. l After the R_LOS alarm is cleared, the laser works properly and emits continuous light.

This section describes how to process one STM-1 signal, and it serves as an example to describe the working principle and signal flow of the SL1D.

Figure 3-40 Functional block diagram of the SL1D
Backplane
STM-1 STM-1
Service bus
Crossconnect unit System control and communication unit
Power supplied to the other units on the board Clock signal provided to the other units on the board Clock unit
O/E conversion unit

Control bus
Logic control unit +3.3 V System clock signal
Overhead processing unit
Overhead bus
Issue 03 (2011-04-10)
3-121
3 Boards

Table 3-102 Signal processing in the receive direction of the SL1D Step 1 Function Unit O/E conversion unit Processing Flow l Regenerates STM-1 optical signals. l Detects R_LOS alarms. l Converts STM-1 optical signals into electrical signals. 2 Overhead processing unit l Restores clock signals. l Aligns frames and detects R_LOS and R_LOF alarms. l Performs descrambling. l Checks B1 and B2 bytes and generates specific alarms and performance events. l Checks the M1 byte and bits 6-8 of the K2 byte, and generates specific alarms and performance events. l Detects the changes in the SSM in the S1 byte and reports the SSM status to the system control and communication unit. l Extracts orderwire bytes, auxiliary channel bytes including F1 and SERIAL bytes, DCC bytes, and K bytes and transmits the overhead signal to the logic processing unit. l Adjusts AU pointers and generates specific performance events. l Checks higher order path overheads and generates specific alarms and performance events. l Transmits VC-4 signals and pointer indication signals to the logic processing unit. 3 Logic processing unit l Processes clock signals. l Ttransmits the overhead signals to the system control and communication unit. l Transmits VC-4 signals and pointer indication signals to the cross-connect unit.
3-122
Issue 03 (2011-04-10)
3 Boards

Table 3-103 Signal processing in the transmit direction of the SL1D Step 1 Function Unit Logic processing unit Processing Flow l Processes clock signals. l Processes overhead signals. l Receives VC-4 signals and pointer indication signals from the cross-connect unit. 2 Overhead processing unit l Sets higher order path overheads. l Sets AU pointers. l Sets multiplex section overhead bytes. l Sets regenerator section overhead bytes. l Performs scrambling. 3 O/E conversion unit Converts electrical signals into optical signals.

The board is directly controlled by the CPU unit on the system control and communication unit. The CPU unit issues configuration and query commands to the other units of the board over the control bus. These units then report command responses, alarms, and performance events to the CPU unit over the control bus. The logic control unit decodes the address read/write signals from the CPU unit of the system control and communication unit and enables FPGA loading.
Clock Unit
3.10.4 Front Panel

There are indicators, STM-1 optical ports, and a label on the front panel.
Front Panel Diagram

Figure 3-41 Front panel of the SL1D
SL1D
STAT SRV LOS1 LOS2
CLASS1 LASER PRODUCT
TX1/RX1
TX2/RX2
Issue 03 (2011-04-10)
SL1D
3-123
3 Boards
Indicators
Table 3-104 Status explanation for indicators on the SL1D Indicator STAT State On (green) On (red) Off Meaning The board is working properly. The board hardware is faulty. l The board is not working. l The board is not created. l There is no power supplied to the board. SRV On (green) On (red) On (yellow) Off LOS1 On (red) The services are normal. A critical or major alarm occurs in the services. A minor or remote alarm occurs in the services. The services are not configured. The first optical port of the SL1D is reporting the R_LOS alarm. The first optical port of the SL1D is free of R_LOS alarms. The second optical port of the SL1D is reporting the R_LOS alarm. The second optical port of the SL1D is free of R_LOS alarms.
Off
LOS2
On (red)
Off
Ports
Table 3-105 Description of the ports Port TX1 Description Transmit port of the first STM-1 optical port Connector Type LC (SFP) Corresponding Cable Fiber jumper
3-124
Issue 03 (2011-04-10)
3 Boards
Port RX1
Description Receive port of the first STM-1 optical port Transmit port of the second STM-1 optical port Receive port of the second STM-1 optical port
Connector Type
Corresponding Cable
TX2
LC (SFP)
RX2
Labels
There is a laser safety class label on the front panel. The laser safety class label indicates that the laser safety class of the optical port is CLASS 1. That is, the maximum launched optical power of the optical port is lower than 10 dBm (10 mW).
3.10.5 Valid Slots

The SL1D can be inserted in slots 1-14. The logical slots of the SL1D on the NMS are the same as the physical slots. Figure 3-42 Slots for the SL1D in the IDU chassis
Slot 26 (PIU) Slot 13 (SL1D) Slot 11 (SL1D) Slot 9 (SL1D) Slot 28 (FAN) Slot 20 Slot 7 (SL1D) Slot 15 Slot 5 (SL1D) Slot 3 (SL1D) Slot 1 (SL1D) Slot 6 (SL1D) Slot 4 (SL1D) Slot 2 (SL1D) Slot 8 (SL1D) Slot 27 (PIU) Slot 14 (SL1D) Slot 12 (SL1D) Slot 10 (SL1D)
Issue 03 (2011-04-10)
3-125
3 Boards
Figure 3-43 Logical slots of the SL1D on the NMS

Slot 26 (PIU) Slot 13 (SL1D) Slot 11 (SL1D) Slot 9 (SL1D) Slot 28 (FAN) Slot 20 Slot 7 (SL1D) Slot 15 Slot 5 (SL1D) Slot 3 (SL1D) Slot 1 (SL1D) Slot 16 Slot 21 Slot 27 (PIU) Slot 14 (SL1D) Slot 12 (SL1D) Slot 10 (SL1D) Slot 22 Slot 8 (SL1D) Slot 17 Slot 6 (SL1D) Slot 4 (SL1D) Slot 2 (SL1D)

The board feature code of the SL1D indicates the type of SFP optical module. The board feature code refers to the number next to the board name in the bar code. Table 3-107 Board feature code of the SL1D Feature Code 01 02 03 04 Type of Optical Module Ie-1 S-1.1 L-1.1 L-1.2 Part Number of the Optical Module 34060287 34060276 34060281 34060282

This section provides hyperlinks of the main parameter settings for the SL1D.
3-126
Issue 03 (2011-04-10)
3 Boards
Related References
A.5.7.1 Parameter Description: SDH Interfaces A.5.9.1 Parameter Description: Regenerator Section Overhead A.5.9.2 Parameter Description: VC-4 POHs

This section describes the board specifications, including the STM-1 optical port performance, board mechanical behavior, and board power consumption.

The performance of the STM-1 optical interface is compliant with ITU-T G.957/G.825. The following table provides the typical performance of the interface. Table 3-108 STM-1 optical interface performance Item Nominal bit rate (kbit/s) Classification code Fiber type Transmission distance (km) Operating wavelength (nm) Mean launched power (dBm) Receiver minimum sensitivity (dBm) Minimum overload (dBm) Minimum extinction ratio (dB) Performance 155520 Ie-1 Multi-mode fiber 2 1270 to 1380 -19 to -14 -30 -14 10 S-1.1 Single-mode fiber 15 1261 to 1360 -15 to -8 -28 -8 8.2 L-1.1 Single-mode fiber 40 1263 to 1360 -5 to 0 -34 -10 10 L-1.2 Single-mode fiber 80 1480 to 1580 -5 to 0 -34 -10 10
NOTE
The OptiX RTN 980 uses SFP modules for providing optical interfaces. You can use different types of SFP modules to provide optical interfaces with different classification codes and transmission distances.
Issue 03 (2011-04-10)
3-127
3 Boards
Mechanical Behavior
Power Consumption
3.11 ML1/MD1
The ML1 is a 16xSmart E1 service processing board. The MD1 is a 32xSmart E1 service processing board. 3.11.1 Version Description The functional version of the ML1 is SL92. The functional version of the MD1 is SL91. 3.11.2 Functions and Features The ML1 receives and transmits 16xE1 signals. The MD1 receives and transmits 32xE1 signals. 3.11.3 Working Principle and Signal Flow This section describes how to process one E1 signal, and it serves as an example to describe the working principle and signal flow of the ML1/MD1. 3.11.4 Front Panel There are indicators and E1 ports on the front panel. 3.11.5 Valid Slots The ML1/MD1 can be inserted in slots 1-14. The logical slots of the ML1/MD1 on the NMS are the same as the physical slots. 3.11.6 Board Feature Code The board feature code of the ML1/MD1 indicates the port impedance. The board feature code refers to the number next to the board name in the bar code. 3.11.7 Board Parameter Settings This section provides hyperlinks of the main parameter settings for the ML1/MD1. 3.11.8 Technical Specifications This section describes the board specifications, including the E1 port performance, board mechanical behavior, and board power consumption.

The functional version of the ML1 is SL92. The functional version of the MD1 is SL91.
3-128
Issue 03 (2011-04-10)
3 Boards

The ML1 receives and transmits 16xE1 signals. The MD1 receives and transmits 32xE1 signals. Table 3-110 lists the functions and features that the ML1/MD1 supports. Table 3-110 Functions and features that the ML1/MD1 supports Function and Feature Board ML1 Basic functions E1 service categories MD1
Receives and transmits E1 signals, and supports flexible configuration of E1 service categories. Supports the following E1 service categories: l CES E1 l ATM/IMA E1
Port specifications Fractional E1 ATM/IMA
75-ohm/120ohm E1 port
16
32
Supports transparent service transmission at the 64 kbit/s level. Maximum number of ATM services Maximum number of ATM connections ATM traffic management ATM encapsulation mode 64
256
Supported Supports the following ATM encapsulation modes: l N-to-one VPC l N-to-one VCC l One-to-one VPC l One-to-one VCC
Maximum number of concatenated ATM cells ATM OAM Maximum number of IMA groups
31
F4 (VP level) and F5 (VC level) 16 32
Issue 03 (2011-04-10)
3-129
3 Boards
Board ML1 MD1
Maximum number of members in an IMA group CES Maximum number of services Encapsulation mode
16
16
32
Supports the following encapsulation modes: l CESoPSN l SAToP
Service category Compression of idle slots Jitter buffering time (us) Packet loading time (us) CES ACR Retiming Clock protection OM Loopback Cold reset and warm reset PRBS tests at E1 ports Board manufacturing information query
Point-to-point services Supported (applicable to CESoPSN only) 375-16000 125-5000 Supported Supported Supports clock protection based on clock source priorities. Supports inloops and outloops at E1 tributary ports. Supported Supported Supported

This section describes how to process one E1 signal, and it serves as an example to describe the working principle and signal flow of the ML1/MD1.
3-130
Issue 03 (2011-04-10)
3 Boards

Figure 3-44 Functional block diagram of the ML1/MD1
Backplane
Signal interface unit
Service processing unit
E1
Service bus
GE bus
E1
Control bus
Logic control unit +3.3 V power supplied to the board +3.3 V backup power supplied to the board Clock signal provided to the other units of the board Power supply unit -48 V1 -48 V2 +3.3 V Clock unit System clock signal

Table 3-111 Signal processing in the receive direction of the ML1/MD1 Step 1 Function Unit Signal interface unit Processing Flow l Receives external E1 signals. l Matches the resistance. l Equalizes signals. l Converts the level. l Recovers clock signals. l Buffers the received data. l Performs HDB3/B8ZS/AMI decoding. 2 Service processing unit l Frames E1 signals. l Performs CES emulation or processes ATM/IMA services. l Encapsulates PWE3 services and converts the PWE3 services into Ethernet services.
Issue 03 (2011-04-10)
3-131
3 Boards
Step 4
Processing Flow l Implements the conversion from the internal service bus into the GE bus in the backplane. l Sends service signals to the packet switching unit.

Table 3-112 Signal processing in the transmit direction of the ML1/MD1 Step 1 Function Unit Logic processing unit Processing Flow l Receives service signals from the packet switching unit. l Implements the conversion from the GE bus in the backplane into the internal service bus. 2 Service processing unit l Decapsulates service signals. l Re-forms CES packets or processes ATM/IMA services. l Converts signals into E1 signals and sends the E1 signals to the signal interface unit. 3 Signal interface unit l Performs HDB3/B8ZS/AMI coding. l Performs clock re-timing. l Performs pulse shaping. l Drives the line. l Sends E1 signals to a port.

Power Supply Unit

The power supply unit performs the following functions: l l Receives two -48 V power supplies from the backplane, converts the -48 V power supplies into +3.3 V power, and then supplies the +3.3 V power to the other units on the board. Receives one +3.3 V power supply from the backplane, which functions as a +3.3 V power backup for the other units on the board.
3-132
3 Boards
Clock Unit
3.11.4 Front Panel

There are indicators and E1 ports on the front panel.
Front Panel Diagram

Figure 3-45 Front panel of the ML1
ML1
STAT SRV
16 E1 1
Figure 3-46 Front panel of the MD1

MD1
STAT SRV
16 1 17
32
Indicators
Table 3-113 Status explanation for indicators on the ML1/MD1 Indicator STAT State On (green) On (red) Off Meaning The board is working properly. The board hardware is faulty. l The board is not working. l The board is not created. l There is no power supplied to the board. SRV On (green) On (red) On (yellow) The services are normal. A critical or major alarm occurs in the services. A minor or remote alarm occurs in the services.
3-133
Issue 03 (2011-04-10)
3 Boards
Indicator
State Off
Meaning The services are not configured.
Ports
Table 3-114 Description of the ports on the ML1 Port 1 to 16 Description The first to sixteenth E1 ports Connector Type Anea 96 Corresponding Cable 5.6.1 E1 Cable Connected to the External Equipment or 5.6.2 E1 Cable Connected to the E1 Panel
Table 3-115 Description of the ports on the MD1 Port 1 to 16 Description The first to sixteenth E1 ports Connector Type Anea 96 Corresponding Cable 5.6.1 E1 Cable Connected to the External Equipment or 5.6.2 E1 Cable Connected to the E1 Panel 5.6.1 E1 Cable Connected to the External Equipment or 5.6.2 E1 Cable Connected to the E1 Panel
17 to 32
The seventeenth to thirty-second E1 ports
Anea 96
The ports on the ML1/MD1 use the Anea 96 connector. Figure 3-47 shows the front view of an Anea 96 connector and Table 3-116 provides the pin assignments for the Anea 96 connector. Figure 3-47 Front view of an Anea 96 connector
POS.1
POS.96
3-134
Issue 03 (2011-04-10)
3 Boards
Table 3-116 Pin assignments for the Anea 96 connector Pin 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 Signal The first received E1 differential signal (+) The first received E1 differential signal (-) The second received E1 differential signal (+) The second received E1 differential signal (-) The third received E1 differential signal (+) The third received E1 differential signal (-) The fourth received E1 differential signal (+) The fourth received E1 differential signal (-) The fifth received E1 differential signal (+) The fifth received E1 differential signal (-) The sixth received E1 differential signal (+) The sixth received E1 differential signal (-) The seventh received E1 differential signal (+) The seventh received E1 differential signal (-) The eighth received E1 differential signal (+) The eighth received E1 differential signal (-) The ninth received E1 differential signal (+) The ninth received E1 differential signal (-) Pin 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 36 37 38 39 40 41 42 Signal The first transmitted E1 differential signal (+) The first transmitted E1 differential signal (-) The second transmitted E1 differential signal (+) The second transmitted E1 differential signal (-) The third transmitted E1 differential signal (+) The third transmitted E1 differential signal (-) The fourth transmitted E1 differential signal (+) The fourth transmitted E1 differential signal (-) The fifth transmitted E1 differential signal (+) The fifth transmitted E1 differential signal (-) The sixth transmitted E1 differential signal (+) The sixth transmitted E1 differential signal (-) The seventh transmitted E1 differential signal (+) The seventh transmitted E1 differential signal (-) The eighth transmitted E1 differential signal (+) The eighth transmitted E1 differential signal (-) The ninth transmitted E1 differential signal (+) The ninth transmitted E1 differential signal (-)
Issue 03 (2011-04-10)
3-135
3 Boards
Pin 19 20 21 22 23 24 49 50 51 52 53 54 55 56
Signal The tenth received E1 differential signal (+) The tenth received E1 differential signal (-) The eleventh received E1 differential signal (+) The eleventh received E1 differential signal (-) The twelfth received E1 differential signal (+) The twelfth received E1 differential signal (-) The thirteenth received E1 differential signal (+) The thirteenth received E1 differential signal (-) The fourteenth received E1 differential signal (+) The fourteenth received E1 differential signal (-) The fifteenth received E1 differential signal (+) The fifteenth received E1 differential signal (-) The sixteenth received E1 differential signal (+) The sixteenth received E1 differential signal (-)
Pin 43 44 45 46 47 48 73 74 75 76 77 78 79 80
Signal The tenth transmitted E1 differential signal (+) The tenth transmitted E1 differential signal (-) The eleventh transmitted E1 differential signal (+) The eleventh transmitted E1 differential signal (-) The twelfth transmitted E1 differential signal (+) The twelfth transmitted E1 differential signal (-) The thirteenth transmitted E1 differential signal (+) The thirteenth transmitted E1 differential signal (-) The fourteenth transmitted E1 differential signal (+) The fourteenth transmitted E1 differential signal (-) The fifteenth transmitted E1 differential signal (+) The fifteenth transmitted E1 differential signal (-) The sixteenth transmitted E1 differential signal (+) The sixteenth transmitted E1 differential signal (-)
3.11.5 Valid Slots

The ML1/MD1 can be inserted in slots 1-14. The logical slots of the ML1/MD1 on the NMS are the same as the physical slots.
3-136
Issue 03 (2011-04-10)
3 Boards
Figure 3-48 Slots for the ML1/MD1 in the IDU chassis

Slot 26 (PIU) Slot 13 (ML1/MD1) Slot 11 (ML1/MD1) Slot 9 (ML1/MD1) Slot 28 (FAN) Slot 20 Slot 7 (ML1/MD1) Slot 15 Slot 5 (ML1/MD1) Slot 3 (ML1/MD1) Slot 1 (ML1/MD1) Slot 6 (ML1/MD1) Slot 4 (ML1/MD1) Slot 2 (ML1/MD1) Slot 8 (ML1/MD1) Slot 27 (PIU) Slot 14 (ML1/MD1) Slot 12 (ML1/MD1) Slot 10 (ML1/MD1)
Figure 3-49 Logical slots of the ML1/MD1 on the NMS

Slot 26 (PIU) Slot 13 (ML1/MD1) Slot 11 (ML1/MD1) Slot 9 (ML1/MD1) Slot 28 (FAN) Slot 20 Slot 7 (ML1/MD1) Slot 15 Slot 5 (ML1/MD1) Slot 3 (ML1/MD1) Slot 1 (ML1/MD1) Slot 16 Slot 21 Slot 27 (PIU) Slot 14 (ML1/MD1) Slot 12 (ML1/MD1) Slot 10 (ML1/MD1) Slot 22 Slot 8 (ML1/MD1) Slot 17 Slot 6 (ML1/MD1) Slot 4 (ML1/MD1) Slot 2 (ML1/MD1)
Issue 03 (2011-04-10)
3-137
3 Boards

The board feature code of the ML1/MD1 indicates the port impedance. The board feature code refers to the number next to the board name in the bar code. Table 3-118 Board feature code of the ML1/MD1 Board Feature Code A B Port Impedance (Ohm) 75 120

This section provides hyperlinks of the main parameter settings for the ML1/MD1.
Related References
A.5.1.1 Parameter Description: PDH Ports_Basic Attributes A.5.1.2 Parameter Description: PDH Ports_Advanced Attributes

This section describes the board specifications, including the E1 port performance, board mechanical behavior, and board power consumption.
E1 Interface Performance
Table 3-119 E1 interface performance Item Nominal bit rate (kbit/s) Code pattern Impedance (ohm) Wire pair in each transmission direction Performance 2048 HDB3 75 One coaxial wire pair 120 One symmetrical wire pair
3-138
Issue 03 (2011-04-10)
3 Boards
Mechanical Behavior
Table 3-120 Mechanical behavior Item Performance ML1 Dimensions (H x W x D) Weight MD1
19.82 mm x 193.80 mm x 225.80 mm 0.45 kg 0.50 kg
Power Consumption
Power consumption of the ML1: < 7.0 W Power consumption of the MD1: < 12.2 W
3.12 SP3S/SP3D
The SP3S is a 16xE1 75-ohm/120-ohm tributary board. The SP3D is a 32xE1 75-ohm/120-ohm tributary board. 3.12.1 Version Description The functional version of the SP3S is SL91. The functional version of the SP3D is TNH1. 3.12.2 Functions and Features The SP3S receives and transmits 16xE1 signals. The SP3D receives and transmits 32xE1 signals. 3.12.3 Working Principle and Signal Flow This section describes how to process one E1 signal, and it serves as an example to describe the working principle and signal flow of the SP3S/SP3D. 3.12.4 Front Panel There are indicators and E1 ports on the front panel. 3.12.5 Valid Slots The SP3S/SP3D can be inserted in slots 1-14. The logical slots of the SP3S/SP3D on the NMS are the same as the physical slots. 3.12.6 Board Feature Code The board feature code of the SP3S/SP3D indicates the E1 port impedance. The board feature code refers to the number next to the board name in the bar code. 3.12.7 Board Parameter Settings This section provides hyperlinks of the main parameter settings for the SP3S/SP3D. 3.12.8 Technical Specifications This section describes the board specifications, including the E1 port performance, board mechanical behavior, and board power consumption.
Issue 03 (2011-04-10)
3-139
3 Boards

The functional version of the SP3S is SL91. The functional version of the SP3D is TNH1.

The SP3S receives and transmits 16xE1 signals. The SP3D receives and transmits 32xE1 signals. Table 3-121 lists the functions and features that the SP3S/SP3D supports. Table 3-121 Functions and features that the SP3S/SP3D supports Function and Feature Board SP3S Basic functions Port specifications Clock 75-ohm/120ohm E1 port Clock source Clock protection E1 retiming function OM Loopback Cold reset and warm reset PRBS tests at E1 ports Board manufacturing information query SP3D
Receives and transmits E1 signals. 16 32
Supports a tributary clock source extracted from the first or fifth E1 signal. Supports clock protection based on clock source priorities. Supported Supports inloops and outloops at E1 tributary ports. Supported Supported Supported

This section describes how to process one E1 signal, and it serves as an example to describe the working principle and signal flow of the SP3S/SP3D.
3-140
Issue 03 (2011-04-10)
3 Boards

Figure 3-50 Functional block diagram of the SP3S/SP3D
Backplane
Mapping/Demapping unit
E1
E1 signal
Service bus
Interface unit
Codec unit
Cross-connect unit
E1
Control bus
Logic control unit +3.3 V power supplied to the board +3.3 V backup power supplied to the board Clock signal provided to the other units on the board Clock unit Power supply unit -48 V1 -48 V2 +3.3 V System clock signal

Table 3-122 Signal processing in the receive direction of the SP3S/SP3D Step 1 2 Function Unit Interface unit Codec unit Processing Flow External E1 signals are coupled by the transformer and then transmitted to the board. l Equalizes the received signals. l Recovers clock signals. l Detects T_ALOS alarms. l Performs HDB3 decoding.
Issue 03 (2011-04-10)
3-141
3 Boards
Step 3
Function Unit Mapping/ Demapping unit
Processing Flow l Asynchronously maps signals into C-12s. l Adds path overhead bytes to C-12s to form VC-12s. l Processes pointers to form TU-12s. l Performs byte interleaving for three TU-12s to form one TUG-2. l Performs byte interleaving for seven TUG-2s to form one TUG-3. l Performs byte interleaving for three TUG-3s to form one C-4. l Adds higher order path overhead bytes to one C-4 to form one VC-4.
l Processes clock signals. l Transmits VC-4 signals and pointer indication signals to the main and standby cross-connect units.

Table 3-123 Signal processing in the transmit direction of the SP3S/SP3D Step 1 Function Unit Logic processing unit Processing Flow l Processes clock signals. l Receives VC-4 signals and pointer indication signals from the cross-connect unit. l Demultiplexes three TUG-3s from one VC-4. l Demultiplexes seven TUG-2s from one TUG-3. l Demultiplexes three VC-12s from one TUG-2. l Processes path overheads and pointers and detects specific alarms and performance events. l Extracts E1 signals. 3 4 Codec unit Interface unit Performs HDB3 coding. E1 signals are coupled by the transformer and then transmitted to an external cable.
Mapping/ Demapping unit

The board is directly controlled by the CPU unit on the system control and communication unit. The CPU unit issues configuration and query commands to the other units of the board over the control bus. These units then report command responses, alarms, and performance events to the CPU unit over the control bus.
3 Boards
The logic control unit decodes the address read/write signals from the CPU unit of the system control and communication unit.
Power Supply Unit

The power supply unit performs the following functions: l l Receives two -48 V power supplies from the backplane, converts the -48 V power supplies into +3.3 V power, and then supplies the +3.3 V power to the other units on the board. Receives one +3.3 V power supply from the backplane, which functions as a +3.3 V power backup for the other units on the board.
Clock Unit
3.12.4 Front Panel

There are indicators and E1 ports on the front panel.
Front Panel Diagram

Figure 3-51 Front panel of the SP3S
SP3S
STAT SRV
E1 1-16
Figure 3-52 Front panel of the SP3D

SP3D
STAT SRV
21 1 22
42
Indicators
Table 3-124 Status explanation for indicators on the SP3S/SP3D Indicator STAT State On (green) On (red)
Issue 03 (2011-04-10) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
Meaning The board is working properly. The board hardware is faulty.

3-143
SP3D
SP3S
3 Boards
Indicator
State Off
Meaning l The board is not working. l The board is not created. l There is no power supplied to the board.
SRV
On (green) On (red) On (yellow) Off
The services are normal. A critical or major alarm occurs in the services. A minor or remote alarm occurs in the services. The services are not configured.
Ports
Table 3-125 Description of the ports on the SP3S Port 1-16 Description The first to sixteenth E1 ports Connector Type Anea 96 Corresponding Cable 5.6.1 E1 Cable Connected to the External Equipment or 5.6.2 E1 Cable Connected to the E1 Panel
Table 3-126 Description of the ports on the SP3D Port 1-21 Description The first to sixteenth E1 ports Connector Type Anea 96 Corresponding Cable 5.6.1 E1 Cable Connected to the External Equipment or 5.6.2 E1 Cable Connected to the E1 Panel 5.6.1 E1 Cable Connected to the External Equipment or 5.6.2 E1 Cable Connected to the E1 Panel
22-42
The seventeenth to thirty-second E1 ports
Anea 96
NOTE
On the OptiX RTN 980, only ports 1-16 and 22-37 of the SP3D are used. Ports 1-16 correspond to E1 signals 1-16 and ports 22-37 correspond to E1 signals 17-32.
3-144
Issue 03 (2011-04-10)
3 Boards
The ports on the SP3S/SP3D use Anea 96 connectors. Figure 3-53 shows the front view of an Anea 96 connector and Table 3-127 provides the pin assignments for the Anea 96 connector. Figure 3-53 Front view of an Anea 96 connector
POS.1
POS.96
Table 3-127 Pin assignments for the Anea 96 connector Pin 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 Signal The first received E1 differential signal (+) The first received E1 differential signal (-) The second received E1 differential signal (+) The second received E1 differential signal (-) The third received E1 differential signal (+) The third received E1 differential signal (-) The fourth received E1 differential signal (+) The fourth received E1 differential signal (-) The fifth received E1 differential signal (+) The fifth received E1 differential signal (-) The sixth received E1 differential signal (+) The sixth received E1 differential signal (-) Pin 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 36 Signal The first transmitted E1 differential signal (+) The first transmitted E1 differential signal (-) The second transmitted E1 differential signal (+) The second transmitted E1 differential signal (-) The third transmitted E1 differential signal (+) The third transmitted E1 differential signal (-) The fourth transmitted E1 differential signal (+) The fourth transmitted E1 differential signal (-) The fifth transmitted E1 differential signal (+) The fifth transmitted E1 differential signal (-) The sixth transmitted E1 differential signal (+) The sixth transmitted E1 differential signal (-)
3-145
Issue 03 (2011-04-10)
3 Boards
Pin 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 49 50 51 52 53 54 55
Signal The seventh received E1 differential signal (+) The seventh received E1 differential signal (-) The eighth received E1 differential signal (+) The eighth received E1 differential signal (-) The ninth received E1 differential signal (+) The ninth received E1 differential signal (-) The tenth received E1 differential signal (+) The tenth received E1 differential signal (-) The eleventh received E1 differential signal (+) The eleventh received E1 differential signal (-) The twelfth received E1 differential signal (+) The twelfth received E1 differential signal (-) The thirteenth received E1 differential signal (+) The thirteenth received E1 differential signal (-) The fourteenth received E1 differential signal (+) The fourteenth received E1 differential signal (-) The fifteenth received E1 differential signal (+) The fifteenth received E1 differential signal (-) The sixteenth received E1 differential signal (+)
Pin 37 38 39 40 41 42 43 44 45 46 47 48 73 74 75 76 77 78 79
Signal The seventh transmitted E1 differential signal (+) The seventh transmitted E1 differential signal (-) The eighth transmitted E1 differential signal (+) The eighth transmitted E1 differential signal (-) The ninth transmitted E1 differential signal (+) The ninth transmitted E1 differential signal (-) The tenth transmitted E1 differential signal (+) The tenth transmitted E1 differential signal (-) The eleventh transmitted E1 differential signal (+) The eleventh transmitted E1 differential signal (-) The twelfth transmitted E1 differential signal (+) The twelfth transmitted E1 differential signal (-) The thirteenth transmitted E1 differential signal (+) The thirteenth transmitted E1 differential signal (-) The fourteenth transmitted E1 differential signal (+) The fourteenth transmitted E1 differential signal (-) The fifteenth transmitted E1 differential signal (+) The fifteenth transmitted E1 differential signal (-) The sixteenth transmitted E1 differential signal (+)
3-146
Issue 03 (2011-04-10)
3 Boards
Pin 56
Signal The sixteenth received E1 differential signal (-)
Pin 80
Signal The sixteenth transmitted E1 differential signal (-)
3.12.5 Valid Slots

The SP3S/SP3D can be inserted in slots 1-14. The logical slots of the SP3S/SP3D on the NMS are the same as the physical slots. Figure 3-54 Slots for the SP3S/SP3D in the IDU chassis
Slot 26 (PIU) Slot 13 (SP3S/SP3D) Slot 11 (SP3S/SP3D) Slot 9 (SP3S/SP3D) Slot 28 (FAN) Slot 20 Slot 7 (SP3S/SP3D) Slot 15 Slot 5 (SP3S/SP3D) Slot 3 (SP3S/SP3D) Slot 1 (SP3S/SP3D) Slot 6 (SP3S/SP3D) Slot 4 (SP3S/SP3D) Slot 2 (SP3S/SP3D) Slot 8 (SP3S/SP3D) Slot 27 (PIU) Slot 14 (SP3S/SP3D) Slot 12 (SP3S/SP3D) Slot 10 (SP3S/SP3D)
Figure 3-55 Logical slots of the SP3S/SP3D on the NMS
Slot 26 (PIU) Slot 13 (SP3S/SP3D) Slot 11 (SP3S/SP3D) Slot 9 (SP3S/SP3D) Slot 28 (FAN) Slot 20 Slot 7 (SP3S/SP3D) Slot 15 Slot 5 (SP3S/SP3D) Slot 3 (SP3S/SP3D) Slot 1 (SP3S/SP3D) Slot 16 Slot 21
Slot 27 (PIU) Slot 14 (SP3S/SP3D) Slot 12 (SP3S/SP3D) Slot 10 (SP3S/SP3D) Slot 22 Slot 8 (SP3S/SP3D) Slot 17 Slot 6 (SP3S/SP3D) Slot 4 (SP3S/SP3D) Slot 2 (SP3S/SP3D)
Issue 03 (2011-04-10)
3-147
3 Boards

The board feature code of the SP3S/SP3D indicates the E1 port impedance. The board feature code refers to the number next to the board name in the bar code. Table 3-129 Board feature code of the SP3S/SP3D Board Feature Code A B Port Impedance (Ohm) 120 75

This section provides hyperlinks of the main parameter settings for the SP3S/SP3D.
Related References
A.5.8.1 Parameter Description: PDH Interfaces A.5.9.3 Parameter Description: VC-12 POHs

This section describes the board specifications, including the E1 port performance, board mechanical behavior, and board power consumption.
E1 Interface Performance
Table 3-130 E1 interface performance Item Nominal bit rate (kbit/s) Code pattern Impedance (ohm) Wire pair in each transmission direction Performance 2048 HDB3 75 One coaxial wire pair 120 One symmetrical wire pair
3-148
Issue 03 (2011-04-10)
3 Boards
Mechanical Behavior
Table 3-131 Mechanical behavior Item Performance SP3S Dimensions (H x W x D) Weight SP3D
19.82 mm x 193.80 mm x 225.80 mm 0.50 kg 0.64 kg
Power Consumption
Power consumption of the SP3S: < 5.7 W Power consumption of the SP3D: < 9.6 W
3.13 AUX
The AUX is an auxiliary management interface board of the OptiX RTN 980. One NE can house only one AUX. 3.13.1 Version Description The functional version of the AUX is SL91. 3.13.2 Functions and Features The AUX provides the system with one orderwire phone port, one synchronous data port, one asynchronous data port, and one four-input/two-output external alarm port. 3.13.3 Working Principle The AUX consists of the orderwire unit, logic control unit, and clock unit. 3.13.4 Front Panel There are indicators, management ports, and auxiliary ports on the front panel. 3.13.5 Valid Slots The AUX can be inserted in slots 1-14. The logical slots of the AUX on the NMS are the same as the physical slots. 3.13.6 Technical Specifications This section describes the board specifications, including auxiliary port performance, board mechanical behavior, and board power consumption.

The functional version of the AUX is SL91.

The AUX provides the system with one orderwire phone port, one synchronous data port, one asynchronous data port, and one four-input/two-output external alarm port.
3 Boards
Table 3-132 lists the functions and features that the AUX supports. Table 3-132 Functions and features that the AUX supports Function and Feature Orderwire phone port Synchronous data port 1 1 The transmission rate of the port is 64 kbit/s and its specifications comply with ITU-T G.703. Asynchronous data port 1 The transmission rate of the port is equal to or less than 19.2 kbit/s and the interfacing level complies with RS-232. External alarm port Hot swapping function Power detection Four inputs and two outputs Supported Supported AUX

The AUX consists of the orderwire unit, logic control unit, and clock unit.

Figure 3-56 Functional block diagram of the AUX
Backplane Power supply unit 4-input/2-output alarm port One orderwire phone port 64 kbit/s synchronous data port 19.2 kbit/s asynchronous data port Orderwire unit
+3.3 V Power dip detection signal
Logic control unit
System bus
Clock unit
Clock signal
Board status detection unit
Power Supply Unit

l l Receives the +3.3 V power supply from the backplane and supplies it to the other units on the AUX. Receives and shuts down control signals.
3-150
Issue 03 (2011-04-10)
3 Boards
Orderwire Unit
l l l l l Supports the input of four channels of alarms. Supports the output of two channels of alarms. Provides one orderwire port. Provides one 64 kbit/s synchronous transparent data port. Provides one 19.2 kbit/s asynchronous transparent data port.
NOTE
The 64 kbit/s synchronous data port can transparently transmit orderwire byte. One port, however, can implement only one of the two functions: 64 kbit/s synchronous data port and transparent transmission of orderwire byte.
Logic Control Unit

l l l l l l l l Provides an interface with the CPU unit and works with the CPU unit to implement the board control function. Processes orderwire bytes and overhead bytes. Processes clock signals. Provides board status information. Checks the status of the main and standby system control, switching, and timing boards. Checks the status of the main and standby clocks. Supports the switching of system clock reference sources automatically and by running specific commands. Supports the detection and reporting of the key clock status of each board in the system.
Board Status Detection Unit

l l Detects board performance data such as board voltage. Stores board manufacturing information.
Clock Unit
Provides clock signals to the logic control unit.
3.13.4 Front Panel

There are indicators, management ports, and auxiliary ports on the front panel.
Front Panel Diagram

Figure 3-57 shows the appearance of the front panel of the AUX. Figure 3-57 Front panel of the AUX
AUX
STAT SRV
F1/S1
PHONE
ALMO
ALMI
Issue 03 (2011-04-10)
3-151
3 Boards
Indicators
Table 3-133 Status explanation for indicators on the AUX Indicator STAT State On (green) On (red) Off Meaning The board is working properly. The board hardware is faulty. l The board is not working. l The board is not created. l There is no power supplied to the board. SRV On (green) On (red) On (yellow) Off The system is working properly. A critical or major alarm occurs in the system. A minor or remote alarm occurs in the system. There is no power supplied to the system.
Auxiliary Ports and Management Ports

Table 3-134 Description of the auxiliary ports and management ports Port F1/S1 ALMI ALMO PHONE Description Synchronous/Asynchronous data port Alarm input port Alarm output port Orderwire phone port Connector Type RJ45
The auxiliary ports and management ports use RJ45 connectors. The pin assignments for the ports, however, are different. Figure 3-58 shows the front view of the RJ45 connector. Figure 3-58 Front view of the RJ45 connector
87654321
3-152
Issue 03 (2011-04-10)
3 Boards
Table 3-135 provides the pin assignments for the F1/S1 port. Table 3-135 Pin assignments for the F1/S1 port Port F1/S1 Pin 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 Signal Transmitting asynchronous data signals Grounding end Receiving asynchronous data signals Transmitting synchronous data signals (TIP) Transmitting synchronous data signals (RING) Grounding end Receiving synchronous data signals (TIP) Receiving synchronous data signals (RING)
For the pin assignments for the ALMI and ALMO ports, see Table 3-136 and see Table 3-137. Table 3-136 Pin assignments for the ALMI port Port ALMI Pin 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 Signal The first external alarm input signal Grounding end for the first external alarm input signal The second external alarm input signal The third external alarm input signal Grounding end for the third external alarm input signal Grounding end for the second external alarm input signal The forth external alarm input signal Grounding end for the forth external alarm input signal
Table 3-137 Pin assignments for the ALMO port Port ALMO Pin 1 Signal The first external alarm output signal (+)
Issue 03 (2011-04-10)
3-153
3 Boards
Port
Pin 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
Signal The first external alarm output signal (-) The second external alarm output signal (+) The first external alarm output signal (+) The first external alarm output signal (-) The second external alarm output signal (-) The second external alarm output signal (+) The second external alarm output signal (-)
3.13.5 Valid Slots

The AUX can be inserted in slots 1-14. The logical slots of the AUX on the NMS are the same as the physical slots. Figure 3-59 Slots for the AUX in the IDU chassis
Slot 26 (PIU) Slot 13 (AUX) Slot 11 (AUX) Slot 9 (AUX) Slot 28 (FAN) Slot 20 Slot 7 (AUX) Slot 15 Slot 5 (AUX) Slot 3 (AUX) Slot 1 (AUX) Slot 6 (AUX) Slot 4 (AUX) Slot 2 (AUX) Slot 8 (AUX) Slot 27 (PIU) Slot 14 (AUX) Slot 12 (AUX) Slot 10 (AUX)
3-154
Issue 03 (2011-04-10)
3 Boards
Figure 3-60 Logical slots of the AUX on the NMS

Slot 26 (PIU) Slot 13 (AUX) Slot 11 (AUX) Slot 9 (AUX) Slot 28 (FAN) Slot 20 Slot 7 (AUX) Slot 15 Slot 5 (AUX) Slot 3 (AUX) Slot 1 (AUX) Slot 16 Slot 21 Slot 27 (PIU) Slot 14 (AUX) Slot 12 (AUX) Slot 10 (AUX) Slot 22 Slot 8 (AUX) Slot 17 Slot 6 (AUX) Slot 4 (AUX) Slot 2 (AUX)

This section describes the board specifications, including auxiliary port performance, board mechanical behavior, and board power consumption.
Orderwire Interface Performance

Table 3-139 Orderwire interface performance Item Transmission path Orderwire type Wire pair in each transmission direction Impedance (ohm) Performance Uses the E1 and E2 bytes in the SDH overhead or the Huaweidefined byte in the overhead of the microwave frame. Addressing call One symmetrical wire pair 600
Issue 03 (2011-04-10)
3-155
3 Boards
NOTE
The OptiX RTN equipment also supports the orderwire group call function. For example, when OptiX RTN equipment calls 888, the orderwire group call number, all the OptiX RTN equipment orderwire phones in the orderwire subnet ring until a phone is answered. Then, a point-to-point orderwire phone call is established.
Synchronous Data Interface Performance

Table 3-140 Synchronous data interface performance Item Transmission path Nominal bit rate (kbit/s) Interface type Interface characteristics Performance Uses the F1 byte in the SDH overhead or the Huawei-defined byte in the overhead of the microwave frame. 64 Codirectional Meets the ITU-T G.703 standard.
Asynchronous Data Interface

Table 3-141 Asynchronous data interface performance Item Transmission path Nominal bit rate (kbit/s) Interface characteristics Performance Uses the user-defined byte of the SDH overhead or the Huawei-defined byte in the overhead of the microwave frame. 19.2 Meets the RS-232 standard.
Mechanical Behavior
Table 3-142 Mechanical behavior Item Dimensions (H x W x D) Weight Performance 19.82 mm x 193.80 mm x 225.80 mm 0.27 kg0.594 lbs (0.27 kg)
Power Consumption
3-156
Issue 03 (2011-04-10)
3 Boards
3.14 PIU
The PIU is the power interface board. The OptiX RTN 980 supports two PIUs, each of which accesses one -48 V/-60 V DC power supply. 3.14.1 Version Description The functional version of the PIU is SLB1. 3.14.2 Functions and Features The PIU supports power access, power protection, surge protection status monitoring, power detection, filtering, and information reporting. 3.14.3 Working Principle The PIU consists of the protection and detection unit, power detection unit, DC/DC unit, EMI filtering unit, and communication control unit. 3.14.4 Front Panel There are indicators, power access ports, and a label on the front panel. 3.14.5 Valid Slots The PIU can be inserted in slots 26 and 27. 3.14.6 Technical Specifications This section describes the board specifications, including input voltage, board mechanical behavior, and board power consumption.

The functional version of the PIU is SLB1.

The PIU supports power access, power protection, surge protection status monitoring, power detection, filtering, and information reporting. Table 3-143 lists the functions and features that the PIU supports. Table 3-143 Functions and features that the PIU supports Function and Feature Basic functions Power access Power output Protection Protection Power protection PIU Two PIUs are provided and each accesses one -48 V DC or -60 V DC power input. The PIU provides other boards with +3.3 V power or -48 V power. Supports 1+1 HSB protection. l Protection against overcurrent l Protection against short circuits
Issue 03 (2011-04-10)
3-157
3 Boards
Function and Feature Surge protection Power detection Surge protection status monitoring EMI filtering
PIU Supported Supported Supported Supported

The PIU consists of the protection and detection unit, power detection unit, DC/DC unit, EMI filtering unit, and communication control unit.

Figure 3-61 shows the functional block diagram of the PIU. Figure 3-61 Functional block diagram of the PIU
Backplane Board operating in distributed power supply mode Fan
-48 V/-60 V
Protection and detection unit
Power detection unit +5.0 V +3.3 V Communication control unit
EMI filtering unit
-48 V -48 V
Detection signal
DC/DC unit
+3.3 V
Other boards
Detection signal
Detection signal
Protection and Detection Unit

The protection and detection unit primarily protects and detects the PIU. It performs the following functions: l l l l l Provides protection against lightning strike and surge. Detects whether the surge-protection circuit fails and reports a surge-protection failure alarm. Monitors PIU temperature in real time and reports it to the system control and communication unit through the communication control unit. Detects whether -48 V power is available. Performs soft-start and mis-connection prevention functions.
Power Detection Unit

The power detection unit detects the voltage, current, and power consumption, and reports the information to the system control unit through the communication control unit.
3 Boards
EMI Filtering Unit

The EMI filtering unit performs electro-magnetic interference (EMI) filtering and low-frequency interference filtering.
DC/DC Unit
The DC/DC unit converts the input -48 V power into the voltages that each part of the system requires. The DC/DC unit performs the following functions: l l l Converts -48 V power into +3.3 V power and supplies +3.3 V power to the communication control unit of the PIU. Converts -48 V power into +3.3 V power and supplies +3.3 V power to other boards. Converts -48 V power into +5.0 V power and supplies +5.0 V power to the power detection unit of the PIU.
Communication Control Unit

The communication control unit achieves communication between the system control and communication unit and the PIU and reports the following information to the system control and communication unit: l l l l l PIU manufacturing information PCB version information Power detection information Surge-protection failure information PIU temperature
3.14.4 Front Panel

There are indicators, power access ports, and a label on the front panel.
Front Panel Diagram

Figure 3-62 shows the appearance of the front panel of the PIU. Figure 3-62 Front panel of the PIU
NEG(-) RTN(+)
PIU
Indicators
Table 3-144 Status explanation for indicators on the PIU Indicator PWR
Issue 03 (2011-04-10)
PWR ALM
-48V/-60V
Status On (green)
Description The power supply is normal.

3-159
3 Boards
Indicator
Status Off
Description There is no power supply. The board is in the initialization state. An alarm is reported on the PIU. No alarm occurs.
ALM
On (orange) On (red) Off
Ports
The PIU accesses one power supply. Table 3-145 lists the types of the ports on the PIU and their respective usage. Table 3-145 Description of the ports on the PIU Port NEG (-) RTN (+) Port Description -48 V power input port BGND power input port Connector Type M6 screws, which can be installed with OT terminals Corresponding Cable 5.1 Power Cable
Labels
Caution label for power operations: prompting you to read the operation guide before any power operations.
CAUTION
Do not remove or install a PIU while the equipment is powered on. That is, turn off all the power supplies of the PIU before removing or installing it.
3.14.5 Valid Slots

The PIU can be inserted in slots 26 and 27.
3-160
Issue 03 (2011-04-10)
3 Boards
Figure 3-63 Slots for the PIU in the IDU chassis

Slot 26 (PIU) Slot 13 (EXT) Slot 11 (EXT) Slot 9 (EXT) Slot 28 (FAN) Slot 7 (EXT) Slot 15 (CSHN) Slot 5 (EXT) Slot 3 (EXT) Slot 1 (EXT) Slot 6 (EXT) Slot 4 (EXT) Slot 2 (EXT) Slot 20 (CSHN) Slot 8 (EXT) Slot 27 (PIU) Slot 14 (EXT) Slot 12 (EXT) Slot 10 (EXT)
Figure 3-64 Logical slots of the PIU on the NMS

Slot 26 (PIU) Slot 13 Slot 11 Slot 9 Slot 28 (FAN) Slot 20 Slot 7 Slot 15 Slot 5 Slot 3 Slot 1 Slot 16 Slot 6 Slot 4 Slot 2 Slot 21 Slot 8 Slot 17 Slot 27 (PIU) Slot 14 Slot 12 Slot 10 Slot 22

This section describes the board specifications, including input voltage, board mechanical behavior, and board power consumption. Table 3-146 lists the technical specifications for the PIU. Table 3-146 Technical specifications for the PIU Item Dimensions
Issue 03 (2011-04-10)
Performance 27.2 mm x 193.4 mm x 196.5 mm

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 3-161
3 Boards
Item Weight Power consumption Input voltage
Performance 1.00 kg < 25.0 W -38.4 V to -72.0 V
3.15 FAN
The FAN is a fan board that dissipates heat generated in the chassis through air cooling. 3.15.1 Version Description The functional version of the FAN is SLBE1. 3.15.2 Functions and Features The FAN adjusts the fan rotating speed, and detects and reports the fan status. 3.15.3 Working Principle The FAN consists of the fan unit, power unit, and communication monitoring unit. 3.15.4 Front Panel There are indicators, an ESD wrist strap jack, and labels on the front panel. 3.15.5 Valid Slots The FAN can be inserted in slot 28 in the IDU chassis. The logical slot of the FAN on the NMS is the same as the physical slot. 3.15.6 Technical Specifications This section describes the board specifications, including board mechanical behavior and board power consumption.

The functional version of the FAN is SLBE1.

The FAN adjusts the fan rotating speed, and detects and reports the fan status. Table 3-147 lists the functions and features that the FAN supports. Table 3-147 Functions and features that the FAN supports Function and Feature Power input FAN Accesses the -48 V power from the PIU through the power bus in the backplane. 9
Number of fans
3-162
Issue 03 (2011-04-10)
3 Boards
Function and Feature Intelligent fan speed adjustment Protection
FAN Supported Provides soft-start for the power supply of the fans, protects fans against overcurrent, and filters out high-frequency signals. l Reports the information about the fan rotating speed, alarms, version number, and board in-position status. l Provides alarm indicators.
OM

The FAN consists of the fan unit, power unit, and communication monitoring unit. Figure 3-65 shows the functional block diagram of the FAN. Figure 3-65 Functional block diagram of the FAN
Backplane
Fan unit
-48 V
-48 V Power unit -48 V
Communication detection signal Communication detection signal
Communication monitoring unit
Power Unit
l l Receives -48 V power from the backplane. Provides the fan power with the following functions: soft-start, filtering, supply combining, and overcurrent protection.
Fan Unit
Nine air-cooling fans dissipate the heat generated by the system. When one fan fails, the fan unit ensures that the system can operate in a short term under an environmental temperature of 40C.
3 Boards
Communication Monitoring Unit

l Detects the manufacturing information, PCB version information, and environmental temperature of the FAN, and reports the information to the system control and communication unit. Detects the fan rotating speed and adjusts the speed according to the pulse-width modulation signal from the system control and communication unit. The system adjusts the fan rotating speed based on the working temperature, as listed in Table 3-148. Table 3-148 Adjustment of the fan rotating speed Working Temperature 25C 25C to 60C 60C Rotating Speed 3600 rounds/minute Linear increase in accordance with the temperature 12000 rounds/minute
3.15.4 Front Panel

There are indicators, an ESD wrist strap jack, and labels on the front panel.
Front Panel Diagram

Figure 3-66 shows the appearance of the front panel of the FAN.
3-164
Issue 03 (2011-04-10)
3 Boards
Figure 3-66 Front panel of the FAN
28
26 13 11 9 F 20 A 7 N 15 5 3 1
OptiX RTN 980 PIU 27 PIU EXT 14 EXT 12 EXT EXT EXT 10 EXT NCS 8 EXT EXT NCS 6 EXT EXT 4 EXT EXT 2 EXT EXT
FAN
CAUTION
Hazardous moving parts,keep fingers and other body parts away.
Indicators
Table 3-149 Status explanation for indicators on the FAN Indicator FAN State On (green) On (red) Off Meaning The fan is working properly. The fan is faulty. The fan is not powered on or is not installed.
Issue 03 (2011-04-10)
3-165
3 Boards
ESD Wrist Strap Jack

An ESD wrist strap needs to be connected to the ESD wrist strap jack to achieve the proper grounding of the human body.
Labels
The front panel of the FAN has the following labels: l l ESD protection label: indicates that the equipment is static-sensitive. Fan warning label: warns you not to touch fan leaves when a fan is rotating.
3.15.5 Valid Slots

The FAN can be inserted in slot 28 in the IDU chassis. The logical slot of the FAN on the NMS is the same as the physical slot. Figure 3-67 Slot for the FAN in the IDU chassis
Slot 26 (PIU) Slot 13 Slot 11 Slot 9 Slot 28 (FAN) Slot 20 Slot 7 Slot 15 Slot 5 Slot 3 Slot 1 Slot 6 Slot 4 Slot 2 Slot 8 Slot 27 (PIU) Slot 14 Slot 12 Slot 10
Figure 3-68 Logical slot of the FAN on the NMS

Slot 26 (PIU) Slot 13 Slot 11 Slot 9 Slot 28 (FAN) Slot 20 Slot 7 Slot 15 Slot 5 Slot 3 Slot 1 Slot 16 Slot 6 Slot 4 Slot 2 Slot 21 Slot 8 Slot 17 Slot 27 (PIU) Slot 14 Slot 12 Slot 10 Slot 22
3-166
Issue 03 (2011-04-10)
3 Boards

This section describes the board specifications, including board mechanical behavior and board power consumption. Table 3-150 lists the technical specifications for the FAN. Table 3-150 Technical specifications for the FAN Item Dimensions (H x W x D) Weight Power consumption Performance 218.0 mm x 50.5 mm x 217.0 mm 1.66 kg < 15.9 W (room temperature) < 103.5 W (high temperature)
Issue 03 (2011-04-10)
3-167
4 Accessories
4
About This Chapter
Accessories
The accessories of the OptiX RTN 980 include the E1 panel and the power distribution unit (PDU). Select appropriate accessories based on the requirements. 4.1 E1 Panel When an IDU is installed in a 19-inch cabinet, install an E1 panel in the cabinet and this E1 panel functions as a DDF for the IDU. 4.2 PDU The Power Distribution Unit (PDU) is installed on the top of a 19-inch cabinet or an ETSI cabinet. The PDU is used to distribute the input power to the equipment in the cabinet. The OptiX RTN 980 equipment uses the C3 DC PDU.
Issue 03 (2011-04-10)
4-1
4 Accessories
4.1 E1 Panel
When an IDU is installed in a 19-inch cabinet, install an E1 panel in the cabinet and this E1 panel functions as a DDF for the IDU. The dimensions (H x W x D) of the E1 panel are 42 mm x 483 mm x 33 mm. An E1 panel provides cable distribution for 16 E1s.
Front Panel Diagram

Figure 4-1 Front panel of an E1 panel
R1 R2 R3 R4 R5 R6 R7 R8 R9 R10 R11 R12 R13 R14 R15 R16 1-8 T1 T2 T3 T4 T5 T6 T7 T8 T9 T10 T11 T12 T13 T14 T15 T16 9-16
Ports
Table 4-1 Port description of an E1 panel Port T1-T16 Description Transmit ports for the first to sixteenth E1 ports (connected to external equipment) Receive ports for the first to sixteenth E1 ports (connected to external equipment) The first to eighth E1 ports (connected to an IDU) The ninth to sixteenth E1 ports (connected to an IDU) Connecting a PGND cable DB37 Connector Type BNC
R1-R16
1-8 9-16 Grounding bolt
NOTE
The port impedance of each E1 port on an E1 panel is 75 ohms.
Figure 4-2 shows the front view of an E1 port that is connected to an IDU. Table 4-2 provides the pin assignments for the E1 port.
4-2
Issue 03 (2011-04-10)
4 Accessories
Figure 4-2 Front view of an E1 port (E1 panel)
Pos. 1
Pos. 37
Table 4-2 Pin assignments for an E1 port (E1 panel) Pin 20 2 22 4 24 6 26 8 36 17 34 15 32 13 Signal The first E1 received differential signal (+) The first E1 received differential signal (-) The second E1 received differential signal (+) The second E1 received differential signal (-) The third E1 received differential signal (+) The third E1 received differential signal (-) The fourth E1 received differential signal (+) The fourth E1 received differential signal (-) The fifth E1 received differential signal (+) The fifth E1 received differential signal (-) The sixth E1 received differential signal (+) The sixth E1 received differential signal (-) The seventh E1 received differential signal (+) The seventh E1 received differential signal (-) Pin 21 3 23 5 25 7 27 9 35 16 33 14 31 12 Signal The first E1 transmitted differential signal (+) The first E1 transmitted differential signal (-) The second E1 transmitted differential signal (+) The second E1 transmitted differential signal (-) The third E1 transmitted differential signal (+) The third E1 transmitted differential signal (-) The fourth E1 transmitted differential signal (+) The fourth E1 transmitted differential signal (-) The fifth E1 transmitted differential signal (+) The fifth E1 transmitted differential signal (-) The sixth E1 transmitted differential signal (+) The sixth E1 transmitted differential signal (-) The seventh E1 transmitted differential signal (+) The seventh E1 transmitted differential signal (-)
4-3
Issue 03 (2011-04-10)
4 Accessories
Pin 30 11 Others
Signal The eighth E1 received differential signal (+) The eighth E1 received differential signal (-) Reserved
Pin 29 10 -
Signal The eighth E1 transmitted differential signal (+) The eighth E1 transmitted differential signal (-) -
4.2 PDU
The Power Distribution Unit (PDU) is installed on the top of a 19-inch cabinet or an ETSI cabinet. The PDU is used to distribute the input power to the equipment in the cabinet. The OptiX RTN 980 equipment uses the C3 DC PDU.
NOTE
Because OptiX RTN 980 is nodal microwave equipment that consumes high power, it is recommended that the power distribution cabinet directly supply power to the equipment. If the power distribution cabinet fails to supply 40 A power distribution terminals, the C3 DC PDU is also applicable.
4.2.1 Appearance The C3 PDU is a simple-designed PDU. 4.2.2 Front Panel There are input power terminals, PGND terminals, output power terminals, and power switches on the front panel of the C3 PDU. 4.2.3 Functions and Working Principles The C3 PDU realizes the simple power distribution function and distributes the input power to the equipment in a cabinet.
4.2.1 Appearance
The C3 PDU is a simple-designed PDU. Figure 4-3 shows the C3 PDU. Figure 4-3 Appearance of the C3 PDU
4-4
Issue 03 (2011-04-10)
4 Accessories
NOTE
Normally, there is a cover in the input power terminal area.
4.2.2 Front Panel

There are input power terminals, PGND terminals, output power terminals, and power switches on the front panel of the C3 PDU.
Front panel diagram

Figure 4-4 Front panel of the DC PDU
1 2 3
RTN1(+)
NEG1(-)
SW1
SW2
SW3
SW4 PGND RTN2(+) NEG2(-)
1. Output power terminal area 3. Input power terminal area
2. Power switch area -
Port
Table 4-3 Description of ports on the DC PDU Positio n Output power termina l area Input power termina l area Port Identifi er -48 V GND Port Description Port Specifications
Output power supply -48 V Output power supply GND terminals The first input power (+) The second input power (+) The first input power (-) The second input power (-) PGND terminals
Four output power supplies (when used with the OptiX RTN 980), Cord end terminal (12-10AWG), maximum cable diameter 6 mm2 M8 OT terminal, maximum cable diameter 16 mm2.
RTN1 (+) RTN2 (+) NEG1 (-) NEG2 (-) PGND
Issue 03 (2011-04-10)
4-5
4 Accessories
Positio n Power switch
Port Identifi er SW1 SW2 SW3 SW4
Port Description
Port Specifications
Output power switch 1 controls the first output power. Output power switch 2 controls the second output power. Output power switch 3 controls the third output power. Output power switch 4 controls the fourth output power.
The fuse capacity is 40 A.
When the C3 PDU is used together with the OptiX RTN 980, each output power occupies four output terminals, each power switch controls one output power, and each output power can only provide one input power to the OptiX RTN 980. The mapping relationship between power switches on the front panel and output power terminals that the switches control is showed in Figure 4-5. Figure 4-5 Mapping relationship between power switches and output power terminals
- G 48 48 N V V D SW1 G - G N 48 48 N D V V D SW2 G - G N 48 48 N D V V D SW3 G - G N 48 48 N D V V D SW4 G N D S S S S W W W W 1 2 3 4
Power switch area
4.2.3 Functions and Working Principles

The C3 PDU realizes the simple power distribution function and distributes the input power to the equipment in a cabinet.
Functions
l l l l l l l
4-6
The PDU supports two inputs of -48 V/-60 V DC power. Each input power supply supports two outputs. The fuse capacity of the switch of each output power is 40 A. Each power switch controls one output power (when the PDU is used with OptiX RTN 980). The PDU is protected against short circuit and overload. The PDU can be installed in a 19-inch cabinet or in an ETSI cabinet. The PDU supports the DC-I power distribution mode.
4 Accessories
Working principles
The PDU mainly consists of input terminals, output terminals, and air circuit breakers. The PDU supports the simple power distribution function for the input power. Figure 4-6 Functional block diagram of the DC PDU
OUTPUT INPUT
SW1 -48V -48V
NEG1(-)
SW2 SW3
BGND BGND
-48V -48V
NEG2(-) RTN1(+)
SW4
BGND BGND BGND

-48V -48V
RTN2(+)
BGND BGND
-48V -48V
PGND
BGND BGND BGND
Issue 03 (2011-04-10)
4-7
5 Cables
5
About This Chapter
Cables
This chapter describes the purpose, appearance, and pin assignments of various cables used on the IDU 980. 5.1 Power Cable A power cable connects the PIU board in the IDU to a power supply device (for example, a PDU on top of the cabinet) for access of the -48 V power to the IDU. 5.2 PGND Cable PGND cables are available in two categories: IDU PGND cables and E1 panel PGND cables. 5.3 IF Jumper An IF jumper connects the IDU to an IF cable. The IF jumper works with the IF cable to transmit IF signals and O&M signals in addition to supplying -48 V power between the ODU and the IDU. 5.4 XPIC Cable An XPIC cable transmits reference IF signals between the two XPIC boards in an XPIC workgroup to implement the XPIC function. 5.5 Fiber Jumper A fiber jumper transmits optical signals. One end of the fiber jumper has an LC/PC connector that is connected to an SDH optical port or GE optical port on the OptiX RTN 980. The connector at the other end of the fiber jumper depends on the type of the optical port on the equipment to be connected. 5.6 E1 Cables E1 cables are available in two categories: E1 cable (Anea 96) connected to the external equipment and E1 cable connected to the E1 panel. 5.7 Orderwire Cable An orderwire cable connects an orderwire phone to the equipment. Both ends of the orderwire cable are terminated with an RJ11 connector. One end of the orderwire cable is connected to the PHONE port on the AUX. The other end of the orderwire cable is connected to the port of the orderwire phone. 5.8 Network Cable
5 Cables
A network cable connects two pieces of Ethernet equipment. Both ends of the network cable are terminated with an RJ45 connector.
5-2
Issue 03 (2011-04-10)
5 Cables
5.1 Power Cable

A power cable connects the PIU board in the IDU to a power supply device (for example, a PDU on top of the cabinet) for access of the -48 V power to the IDU.
Cable Diagram
Figure 5-1 Power cable
Table 5-1 Power cable specifications Model 6 mm2 power cable and terminal Cable Power cable, 450 V/750 V, H07Z-K UL3386, 6 mm2, blue/black, low smoke zero Halogen cable Power cable, 450 V/750 V, H07Z-K UL3386, 10 mm2, blue/black, low smoke zero Halogen cable Terminal Naked crimping terminal, OT, 6 mm2, M6, tin plating, 12-10 AWG, yellow
10 mm2 power cable and terminal
Naked crimping terminal, OT, 10 mm2, M6, tin plating, naked ring terminal
NOTE
For the OptiX RTN 980, power cables with a 6 mm2 cross-sectional area can extend for a maximum distance of 10 m, and power cables with a 10 mm2 cross-sectional area can extend for a maximum distance of 15 m.
Issue 03 (2011-04-10)
5-3
5 Cables
5.2 PGND Cable

PGND cables are available in two categories: IDU PGND cables and E1 panel PGND cables. 5.2.1 IDU PGND Cable An IDU PGND cable connects the left ground point of the IDU to the ground point of external equipment (for example, the ground support of a cabinet) so that the IDU and external equipment share the same ground. 5.2.2 E1 Panel PGND Cable An E1 panel PGND cable connects the right ground nut of the E1 panel to the ground point of external equipment (for example, the ground support of a cabinet) so that the E1 panel and external equipment share the same ground.
5.2.1 IDU PGND Cable

An IDU PGND cable connects the left ground point of the IDU to the ground point of external equipment (for example, the ground support of a cabinet) so that the IDU and external equipment share the same ground.
Cable Diagram
Figure 5-2 IDU PGND cable
Main label 1 Cable tie H.S.tube
L
1. Bare crimping terminal, OT 2. Bare crimping terminal, OT
Pin Assignments
None.
5-4
Issue 03 (2011-04-10)
5 Cables
5.2.2 E1 Panel PGND Cable

An E1 panel PGND cable connects the right ground nut of the E1 panel to the ground point of external equipment (for example, the ground support of a cabinet) so that the E1 panel and external equipment share the same ground.
Cable Diagram
Figure 5-3 E1 panel PGND cable
Main label 1
L Bare crimping terminal, OT
Pin Assignments
None.
5.3 IF Jumper
An IF jumper connects the IDU to an IF cable. The IF jumper works with the IF cable to transmit IF signals and O&M signals in addition to supplying -48 V power between the ODU and the IDU. An IF jumper is a 2 m RG-223 cable. One end of the IF jumper has a type-N connector that is connected to the IF cable. The other end of the IF jumper has a TNC connector that is connected to the IF board.
NOTE
l A 5D IF cable is directly connected to the IF board; therefore, an IF jumper is not required. l If an RG-8U or 1/2-inch IF cable is used, an IF jumper is required to connect the RG-8U or 1/2-inch IF cable to the IF board.
Issue 03 (2011-04-10)
5-5
5 Cables
Cable Diagram
Figure 5-4 IF jumper
1 H.S.tube 2 PCS L = 3 cm 2
2000 mm 1. RF coaxial cable connector, TNC, male 2. RF coaxial cable connector, type-N, female
Pin Assignments
None.
5.4 XPIC Cable

An XPIC cable transmits reference IF signals between the two XPIC boards in an XPIC workgroup to implement the XPIC function. An XPIC cable is an RG316 cable that has SMA connectors at both ends. One end of the XPIC cable is connected to the X-IN port of one XPIC board in an XPIC workgroup, and the other end of the XPIC cable is connected to the X-OUT port of the other XPIC board in the same XPIC work group. XPIC cables are available in the following types: l l XPIC cables with angle connectors: These XPIC cables are long and used to connect two XPIC boards in the horizontal direction, for example, XPIC boards in slots 3 and 4. XPIC cables with straight connectors: These XPIC cables are short and used to connect two XPIC boards in the vertical direction, for example, IFX2 boards in slots 3 and 5. These XPIC cables are also used to connect the X-IN port to the X-OUT port on the same XPIC board to loop back signals.
5-6
Issue 03 (2011-04-10)
5 Cables
Cable Diagram
Figure 5-5 XPIC cable
1 1
L1 2 2
L2
1. Coaxial cable connector, SMA, angle, male
2. Coaxial cable connector, SMA, straight, male
Pin Assignments
None.
5.5 Fiber Jumper

A fiber jumper transmits optical signals. One end of the fiber jumper has an LC/PC connector that is connected to an SDH optical port or GE optical port on the OptiX RTN 980. The connector at the other end of the fiber jumper depends on the type of the optical port on the equipment to be connected.
Types of Fiber Jumpers

Table 5-2 Types of fiber jumpers Connector 1 LC/PC Connector 2 FC/PC Cable 2 mm single-mode fiber 2 mm multi-mode fiber LC/PC
Issue 03 (2011-04-10)
SC/PC
2 mm single-mode fiber
5-7
5 Cables
Connector 1
Connector 2
Cable 2 mm multi-mode fiber
LC/PC
LC/PC
2 mm single-mode fiber 2 mm multi-mode fiber
NOTE
For the OptiX RTN 980, multi-mode fibers are required to connect to 1000BASE-SX GE optical ports.
Fiber Connectors
The following figures show three common types of fiber connectors, namely, LC/PC connector, SC/PC connector, and FC/PC connector. Figure 5-6 LC/PC connector
5-8
Issue 03 (2011-04-10)
5 Cables
Figure 5-7 SC/PC connector
Figure 5-8 FC/PC connector
5.6 E1 Cables
E1 cables are available in two categories: E1 cable (Anea 96) connected to the external equipment and E1 cable connected to the E1 panel. 5.6.1 E1 Cable Connected to the External Equipment An E1 cable that is connected to the external equipment is used when the IDU needs to directly receive E1 signals from or transmits E1 signals to external equipment. 5.6.2 E1 Cable Connected to the E1 Panel
5 Cables
An E1 cable that is connected to the E1 panel is used when the E1 panel functions as a DDF. One end of the E1 cable has an Anea 96 connector that is connected to an E1 port on the IDU. The other end of the E1 cable has a DB37 connector that is connected to the E1 panel.
5.6.1 E1 Cable Connected to the External Equipment

An E1 cable that is connected to the external equipment is used when the IDU needs to directly receive E1 signals from or transmits E1 signals to external equipment. Each E1 cable that is connected to the external equipment can transmit a maximum of 16 E1 signals. There are two types of E1 cables that are connected to the external equipment: 75-ohm coaxial cables and 120-ohm twisted pair cables.
Cable Diagram
Figure 5-9 E1 cable connected to the external equipment
Main label 1 W
X1
A ViewA Pos.96 Cable connector, Anea, 96-pin,female
Pos.1
1. Cable connector, Anea 96, female

NOTE
l A 120-ohm E1 cable and a 75-ohm E1 cable have the same appearance. l The core diameter of a 75-ohm E1 cable is 1.6 mm. Therefore, use a crimping tool with an opening of 2.5 mm (0.098-inch) to attach the end of the 75-ohm E1 cable on the DDF frame with a 75-1-1 coaxial connector.
5-10
Issue 03 (2011-04-10)
5 Cables
Pin Assignments
Table 5-3 Pin assignments for a 75-ohm E1 cable Pin W Core 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 18 17 20 19 22 21 24 23 50 49 Tip Ring Tip Ring Tip Ring Tip Ring Tip Ring Tip Ring Tip Ring Tip Ring Ring Tip Ring Tip Ring Tip Ring Tip Ring Tip 25 R12 23 R11 21 R10 19 R9 17 R8 15 R7 13 R6 11 R5 9 R4 7 R3 5 R2 3 R1 Serial No. 1 Remark s Pin W Core 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 36 37 38 39 40 42 41 44 43 46 45 48 47 74 73 Tip Ring Tip Ring Tip Ring Tip Ring Tip Ring Tip Ring Tip Ring Tip Ring Ring Tip Ring Tip Ring Tip Ring Tip Ring Tip 26 T12 24 T11 22 T10 20 T9 18 T8 16 T7 14 T6 12 T5 10 T4 8 T3 6 T2 4 T1 Serial No. 2 Remark s
R0
T0
Issue 03 (2011-04-10)
5-11
5 Cables
Pin
W Core Serial No. 27
Remark s
Pin
W Core Serial No. 28
Remark s
52 51 54 53 56 55 Shell
Ring Tip Ring Tip Ring Tip Braid
R13
76 75
Ring Tip Ring Tip Ring Tip Braid
T13
29
R14
78 75
30
T14
31
R15
80 79 Shell
32
T15
Table 5-4 Pin assignments for a 120-ohm E1 cable Pin W Color of the Core 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 White Blue White Green White Grey Red Orang e Red Brown Black Blue Black Green Relati onshi p Twiste d pair Rema rks Tape Color Pin W Color of the Core 25 26 R1 27 28 R2 29 30 R3 31 32 R4 33 34 R5 35 36 R6 37 38 White Orang e White Brown Red Blue Red Green Red Grey Black Orang e Black Brown Relati onshi p Twiste d pair Rema rks Tape Color
R0
Blue
T0
Blue
Twiste d pair Twiste d pair Twiste d pair
T1
T2
T3
Twiste d pair Twiste d pair
T4
T5
Twiste d pair
Twiste d pair
T6
5-12
Issue 03 (2011-04-10)
5 Cables
Pin
W Color of the Core Relati onshi p Twiste d pair
Rema rks
Tape Color
Pin
W Color of the Core Relati onshi p Twiste d pair
Rema rks
Tape Color
15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 49 50 51 52 53 54 55 56 Shell
Black Grey White Blue White Green White Grey Red Orang e Red Brown Black Blue Black Green Black Grey Braid
R7
39 40
Yello w Blue White Orang e White Brown Red Blue Red Green Red Grey Black Orang e Black Brown Yello w Blue Braid
T7
Twiste d pair
R8
Orang e
41 42 43 44
Twiste d pair
T8
Orang e
R9
T9
R10
45 46
T10
R11
47 48
T11
R12
73 74
T12
R13
75 76
T13
R14
77 78
T14
R15
79 80 Shell
T15
5.6.2 E1 Cable Connected to the E1 Panel

An E1 cable that is connected to the E1 panel is used when the E1 panel functions as a DDF. One end of the E1 cable has an Anea 96 connector that is connected to an E1 port on the IDU. The other end of the E1 cable has a DB37 connector that is connected to the E1 panel. Each E1 cable can transmit 16 E1 signals. The port impedance of the E1 cable is 75 ohms.
Issue 03 (2011-04-10)
5-13
5 Cables
Cable Diagram
Figure 5-10 E1 cable connected to the E1 panel
X1: Cable connector, Anea 96, female Label 1: "CHAN 0-7"
X2/X3: Cable connector, type D, 37 male Label 2: "CHAN 8-15"
Pin Assignments
Table 5-5 Pin assignments for the E1 cable terminated with an Anea 96 connector and a DB37 connector Wire W1 Connecto r X1 X1.2 X1.1 X1.26 X1.25 X1.4 X1.3 X1.28 X1.27 X1.6
5-14
Connecto r X2/X3 X2.20 X2.2 X2.21 X2.3 X2.22 X2.4 X2.23 X2.5 X2.24
Remarks R0
Connecto r X1 X1.10 X1.9
Connecto r X2/X3 X2.36 X2.17 X2.35 X2.16 X2.34 X2.15 X2.33 X2.14 X2.32
Remarks R4
T0
X1.34 X1.33
T4
R1
X1.12 X1.11
R5
T1
X1.36 X1.35
T5
R2
X1.14
R6
Issue 03 (2011-04-10)
5 Cables
Wire
Connecto r X1 X1.5 X1.30 X1.29 X1.8 X1.7 X1.32 X1.31
Connecto r X2/X3 X2.6 X2.25 X2.7 X2.26 X2.8 X2.27 X2.9 X3.20 X3.2 X3.21 X3.3 X3.22 X3.4 X3.23 X3.5 X3.24 X3.6 X3.25 X3.7 X3.26 X3.8 X3.27 X3.9 Braid
Remarks
Connecto r X1 X1.13
Connecto r X2/X3 X2.13 X2.31 X2.12 X2.30 X2.11 X2.29 X2.10 X3.36 X3.17 X3.35 X3.16 X3.34 X3.15 X3.33 X3.14 X3.32 X3.13 X3.31 X3.12 X3.30 X3.11 X3.29 X3.10 Braid
Remarks
T2
X1.38 X1.37
T6
R3
X1.16 X1.15
R7
T3
X1.40 X1.39
T7
W2
X1.18 X1.17 X1.42 X1.41 X1.20 X1.19 X1.44 X1.43 X1.22 X1.21 X1.46 X1.45 X1.24 X1.23 X1.48 X1.47 Shell
R8
X1.50 X1.49
R12
T8
X1.74 X1.73
T12
R9
X1.52 X1.51
R13
T9
X1.76 X1.75
T13
R10
X1.54 X1.53
R14
T10
X1.78 X1.77
T14
R11
X1.56 X1.55
R15
T11
X1.80 X1.79 Shell
T15
5.7 Orderwire Cable

An orderwire cable connects an orderwire phone to the equipment. Both ends of the orderwire cable are terminated with an RJ11 connector. One end of the orderwire cable is connected to the PHONE port on the AUX. The other end of the orderwire cable is connected to the port of the orderwire phone.
Issue 03 (2011-04-10)
5-15
5 Cables
Cable Diagram
Figure 5-11 Orderwire cable
1
6
Main label
6
X1
X2
1. Orderwire port, RJ11 connector
Pin Assignments
Table 5-6 Pin assignments for the orderwire cable Connector X1 X1.3 X1.4 Connector X2 X2.3 X2.4 Function Tip Ring
5.8 Network Cable

A network cable connects two pieces of Ethernet equipment. Both ends of the network cable are terminated with an RJ45 connector. Two types of interfaces use RJ45 connectors, which are medium dependent interfaces (MDIs) and MDI-Xs. MDIs are used by terminal equipment, for example, network card. The pin assignments for MDIs are provided in Table 5-7. MDI-Xs are used by network equipment. The pin assignments for MDI-Xs are provided in Table 5-8. Table 5-7 Pin assignments for MDIs Pin 10/100BASE-T(X) Signal 1 2 3 TX+ TXRX+ Function Transmitting data (+) Transmitting data (-) Receiving data (+) 1000BASE-T Signal BIDA+ BIDABIDB+ Function Bidirectional data wire A (+) Bidirectional data wire A (-) Bidirectional data wire B (+)
Issue 03 (2011-04-10)
5-16
5 Cables
Pin
10/100BASE-T(X) Signal Function Receiving data (-) -
1000BASE-T Signal BIDC+ BIDCBIDBBIDD+ BIDDFunction Bidirectional data wire C (+) Bidirectional data wire C (-) Bidirectional data wire B (-) Bidirectional data wire D (+) Bidirectional data wire D (-)
4 5 6 7 8
Reserved Reserved RXReserved Reserved
Table 5-8 Pin assignments for MDI-Xs Pin 10/100BASE-T(X) Signal 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 RX+ RXTX+ Reserved Reserved TXReserved Reserved Function Receiving data (+) Receiving data (-) Transmitting data (+) Transmitting data (-) 1000BASE-T Signal BIDB+ BIDBBIDA+ BIDD+ BIDDBIDABIDC+ BIDCFunction Bidirectional data wire B (+) Bidirectional data wire B (-) Bidirectional data wire A (+) Bidirectional data wire D (+) Bidirectional data wire D (-) Bidirectional data wire A (-) Bidirectional data wire C (+) Bidirectional data wire C (-)
Straight-through cables are used between MDIs and MDI-Xs, and crossover cables are used between MDIs or between MDI-Xs. The only difference between straight-through cables and crossover cables is with regard to the pin assignment. The NMS/COM port, NE cascading port, and Ethernet electrical service ports of the OptiX RTN 980 support the MDI, MDI-X, and auto-MDI/MDI-X modes. Straight-through cables and
5 Cables
crossover cables can be used to connect the NMS/COM port, EXT port, and Ethernet electrical service ports to MDIs or MDI-Xs.
Cable Diagram
Figure 5-12 Network cable
1 Label 1 Main label Label 2 8 1
8 1
1. Network port connector, RJ45
Pin Assignments
Table 5-9 Pin assignments for the straight-through cable Connector X1 X1.1 X1.2 X1.3 X1.6 X1.4 X1.5 X1.7 X1.8 Connector X2 X2.1 X2.2 X2.3 X2.6 X2.4 X2.5 X2.7 X2.8 Color White/Orange Orange White/Green Green Blue White/Blue White/Brown Brown Twisted pair Twisted pair Twisted pair Relation Twisted pair
Table 5-10 Pin assignments for the crossover cable Connector X1 X1.6 X1.3 X1.1 X1.2 X1.4
5-18
Connector X2 X2.2 X2.1 X2.3 X2.6 X2.4
Color Orange White/Orange White/Green Green Blue
Relation Twisted pair
Twisted pair
Twisted pair
Issue 03 (2011-04-10)
5 Cables
Connector X1 X1.5 X1.7 X1.8
Connector X2 X2.5 X2.7 X2.8
Color White/Blue White/Brown Brown
Relation
Twisted pair
Issue 03 (2011-04-10)
5-19
A Parameters Description
Parameters Description
This chapter describes the parameters used in this document. A.1 Parameters for Network Management This topic describes the parameters that are related to network management. A.2 Radio Link Parameters This topic describes the parameters that are related to radio links. A.3 Multiplex Section Protection Parameters This topic describes the parameters that are related to multiplex section protection (MSP). A.4 SDH/PDH Service Parameters This topic describes the parameters that are related to SDH/PDH services. A.5 Parameters for Board Interfaces This topic describes the parameters that are related to board interfaces. A.6 Parameters for Ethernet Services and Ethernet Features on the Packet Plane This section describes the parameters for the Ethernet services and Ethernet features on the packet plane, including service parameters, protocol parameters, OAM parameters, Ethernet port parameters, and QoS parameters. A.7 RMON Parameters This topic describes the parameters that are related to RMON performances. A.8 Parameters for MPLS/PWE3 Services This topic describes parameters that are related to MPLS/PWE3 services. A.9 Clock Parameters This topic describes the parameters that are related to clocks. A.10 Parameters for the Orderwire and Auxiliary Interfaces This topic describes the parameters that are related to the orderwire and auxiliary interfaces.
Issue 03 (2011-04-10)
A-1
A.1 Parameters for Network Management

This topic describes the parameters that are related to network management. A.1.1 Parameters for NE Management This topic describes the parameters that are used for managing network elements (NEs). A.1.2 Parameters for Communications Management This topic describes the parameters that are used for communications management. A.1.3 Parameters for Network Security Management This topic describes the parameters that are related to network security management.
A.1.1 Parameters for NE Management

This topic describes the parameters that are used for managing network elements (NEs). A.1.1.1 Parameter Description: NE Searching This topic describes the parameters that are used for searching for NEs. A.1.1.2 Parameter Description: NE Creation This topic describes the parameters that are related to NE creation. A.1.1.3 Parameter Description: Attribute_Changing NE IDs This topic describes the parameters that are used for changing NE IDs. A.1.1.4 Parameter Description: NE Time Synchronization This topic describes the parameters that are used for synchronizing the time of NEs. A.1.1.5 Parameter Description: Localization Management of the NE Time This parameter describes the parameters that are used for localization management of the NE time. A.1.1.6 Parameter Description: Standard NTP Key Management This topic describes the parameters that are used for managing the standard NTP key. A.1.1.7 Parameter Description: License Management This topic describes the parameters that are used for managing the license. A.1.1.8 Parameter Description: Automatic Disabling of the Functions of NEs This parameter describes the parameters that are used for automatically disabling the functions of an NE.
A.1.1.1 Parameter Description: NE Searching

This topic describes the parameters that are used for searching for NEs.
Navigation Path
Choose File > Discovery > NE from the Main Menu.
A-2
Issue 03 (2011-04-10)
Parameters for the Search Field

Parameter Address Type Value Range IP Address of GNE NSAP Address IP Address Range of GNE Default Value IP Address Range of GNE Description l If the OSI protocol is used on the DCN, you can search for an NE based on NSAP Address only. l If the IP protocol is used on the DCN, you can search for an NE based on IP Address of GNE or IP Address Range of GNE. l To search for all the NEs that communicate with the gateway NE, select IP Address Range of GNE. l To select the gateway NE only, select IP Address of GNE.
NOTE If Address Type is set to IP Address of GNE or IP Address Range of GNE, and if the U2000 (server) and the gateway NE are located in different network segments, ensure that the U2000 and relevant routers are configured with the IP routes for the network segment in which the U2000 and gateway NE are located. If Address Type is set to NSAP Address, ensure that the OSI protocol stack is installed.
Issue 03 (2011-04-10)
A-3
Parameter Search Address
Value Range -
Default Value -
Description l If Address Type is set to IP Address of GNE, enter the IP address of the gateway NE, such as 129.9.x.x. l If Address Type is set to IP Address Range of GNE, enter the number of the IP network segment in which the gateway NE is located, such as 129.9.255.255. l If Address Type is set to NSAP Address, enter the NSAP address of the gateway NE.
User Name
This parameter specifies the user name of the gateway NE. This parameter specifies the password of the gateway NE.
Password
A-4
Issue 03 (2011-04-10)
Parameter for Searching for NEs

Parameter Create NE after search Value Range Selected Deselected Default Value Deselected Description l To create NEs in batches, it is recommended that you select Create NE after search. The NEs are automatically created after they are found. l After Create NE after search is selected, enter NE User and Password that are used for creating an NE.
NOTE If only Create NE after search is selected, Search for NE is selected automatically.
NE User
l This parameter specifies the user name to be entered when an NE is created. l This parameter is valid only when Create NE after search is selected.
Password
l This parameter specifies the password to be entered when an NE is created. l This parameter is valid only when Create NE after search is selected.
Issue 03 (2011-04-10)
A-5
Parameter Upload after create
Value Range Selected Deselected
Default Value Deselected
Description l This parameter specifies whether to automatically upload the NE data after the NE is found and created. l If only Upload after create is selected, Search for NE and Create NE after search are selected automatically.
Parameter for the Found NEs

Parameter NE ID Value Range Default Value Description This parameter indicates the ID of the found NE, which consists of extended ID and NE ID. For example, in the case of NE9-25, the value 9 indicates the extended ID, and the value 25 indicates the NE ID. This parameter indicates the address of the gateway NE that is connected to the found NE. This parameter indicates the ID of the gateway NE that is connected to the found NE. l This parameter specifies the password to be entered when an NE is created. l This parameter is valid only when Create NE after search is selected.
GNE Address
GNE ID
Created As GNE
Yes No
Yes
A-6
Issue 03 (2011-04-10)
Parameter Connection Mode
Value Range Common Security SSL
Default Value Common
Description The communication between the client and the server is encrypted if this parameter is set to Security SSL. This parameter specifies the communication port. This parameter indicates whether the found NE is created.
Port NE Status
Created Uncreated
1400 -
A.1.1.2 Parameter Description: NE Creation

This topic describes the parameters that are related to NE creation.
Navigation Path
1. 2. In the Physical ViewPhysical Root, right-click New > NE. Choose RTN Series > OptiX RTN 980 from the Object Tree.
Parameters on the Main Interface

Parameter Type Value Range Default Value Description This parameter indicates the type of the NE to be created. l The ID refers to the basic ID. If the extended ID is not used, the basic ID of an NE must be unique on the networks that are managed by the same NMS. l This parameter is set according to the planning information. l The NE ID consisting of the basic ID and extended ID identifies an NE on the NMS.
ID
1 to 49135
Issue 03 (2011-04-10)
A-7
Parameter Extended ID
Value Range 1 to 254
Default Value 9
Description If the number of existing NEs does not exceed the range represented by the basic ID, do not change Extended ID. l This parameter specifies the name of the NE. l After you have specified the name of the NE, the name is displayed under the icon of the NE.
Name
Remarks Gateway Type
Non-Gateway Gateway
Non-Gateway
This parameter specifies the remarks of the NE. l This parameter is set to Gateway if the new NE is a gateway NE. l This parameter is set to Non-Gateway if the new NE is a nongateway NE. l This parameter is set according to the DCN planning if the new NE can function as a gateway NE or a nongateway NE.
Affiliated Gateway
This parameter indicates the gateway NE of the new NE when Gateway Type is set to Non-Gateway. l This parameter needs to be set when Gateway Type is set to Gateway. l When the OSI over DCC solution is used, this parameter is set to OSI. l In other cases, this parameter is set to IP.
Affiliated Gateway Protocol
IP OSI
IP
A-8
Issue 03 (2011-04-10)
Parameter IP Address
Value Range -
Default Value -
Description This parameter indicates the IP address of the new NE. This parameter needs to be set when Affiliated Gateway Protocol is set to IP. The communication between the client and the server is encrypted if this parameter is set to Security SSL. This parameter specifies the communication port. This parameter specifies the user name to be entered when an NE is created. This parameter specifies the password to be entered when an NE is created. This parameter indicates the NSAP address of the new NE. This parameter needs to be set when Affiliated Gateway Protocol is set to OSI. You need to set the area ID only, and the other parts are automatically generated by the NE.
Connection Mode
Common Security SSL
Common
Port NE User
1400 -
Password
NSAP Address
A.1.1.3 Parameter Description: Attribute_Changing NE IDs

This topic describes the parameters that are used for changing NE IDs.
Navigation Path
1. 2. 3. In the Main Topology, right-click the NE whose ID needs to be modified. Choose Object Attributes. Click Modify NE ID.
Issue 03 (2011-04-10)
A-9
Parameters for Changing NE IDs

Parameter New ID Value Range Default Value Description l The new ID refers to the basic ID. If the extended ID is not used, the basic ID of an NE must be unique on the networks that are managed by the same NMS. l This parameter is set according to the planning information.
NOTE The NE ID consisting of the basic ID and extended ID identifies an NE on the NMS.
New Extended ID
1 to 254
If the number of existing NEs does not exceed the range represented by the basic ID, do not change the extended ID.
A.1.1.4 Parameter Description: NE Time Synchronization

This topic describes the parameters that are used for synchronizing the time of NEs.
Navigation Path
1. 2. Choose Configuration > NE Batch Configuration > NE Time Synchronization from the Main Menu. Click the NE Time Synchronization tab.
Parameters for NE Time Synchronization

Parameter NE Name NE ID Value Range Default Value Description This parameter indicates the name of the NE. This parameter indicates the ID of the NE.
A-10
Issue 03 (2011-04-10)
Parameter Synchronous Mode
Value Range Standard NTP NM Null
Default Value Null
Description l If this parameter is set to NM, the NE synchronizes the time of the NMS server. l If this parameter is set to Standard NTP, the NE synchronizes the Network Time Protocol (NTP) server through the standard NTP.
Standard NTP Authentication
Enabled Disabled
Disabled
This parameter is valid only when Synchronous Mode is set to Standard NTP.
Parameters for the Standard NTP Server

Parameter Standard NTP Server Identifier Value Range NE ID IP Default Value NE ID Description l If the NE functions as the gateway NE, this parameter is set to IP. l If the NE functions as a non-gateway NE and communicates with the gateway NE through the HWECC protocol, this parameter is set to NE ID. l If the NE functions as a non-gateway NE and communicates with the gateway NE through the IP protocol, this parameter is set to IP.
Issue 03 (2011-04-10)
A-11
Parameter Standard NTP Server
Value Range -
Default Value -
Description l If the NE functions as the gateway NE, this parameter is set to the IP address of the external NTP server. l If the NE functions as a non-gateway NE, this parameter is set to the ID or IP address of the gateway NE.
Standard NTP Server Key
0 to 1024
l If the NTP server does not need to authenticated, this parameter is set to the value "0". l If the NTP server needs to be authenticated, the authentication is performed according to the allocated key of the NTP server. In this case, the NE authenticates the NTP server based on the key and the corresponding password (specified in the management of the standard NTP key).
Parameters for Setting Automatic Synchronization

Parameter Synchronization Starting Time Value Range Default Value Description l This parameter specifies the start time of the synchronization period. After this parameter is specified, the NMS and the NE synchronize the time once at the intervals of Synchronization Period(days). l It is recommended that you use the default value.
A-12
Issue 03 (2011-04-10)
Parameter DST
Value Range Selected Deselected
Default Value Deselected
Description l This parameter indicates whether Synchronization Starting Time is the daylight saving time. l This parameter is set according to the actual situation.
Synchronization Period (days)
1 to 300
l This parameter indicates the period of synchronizing the time of the NE with the time of the NMS. l It is recommended that you use the default value.
A.1.1.5 Parameter Description: Localization Management of the NE Time

This parameter describes the parameters that are used for localization management of the NE time.
Navigation Path
1. 2. Choose Configuration > NE Batch Configuration > NE Time Localization Management from the Main Menu. Select the NE for time localization management from the Object Tree, and then click .
Parameters for Localization Management of the NE Time

Parameter NE TimeZone DST Value Range Default Value Description This parameter indicates the name of the NE. This parameter indicates the time zone. This parameter indicates whether DST is enabled.
Issue 03 (2011-04-10)
A-13
Parameters for Time Zone

Parameter Time Zone Value Range Default Value Description l After the time zone is changed, the current time of the NE is changed accordingly. l This parameter is set according to the place where the NE is located. DST Selected Deselected Deselected l The parameters related to daylight saving time can be valid only when this parameter is selected. l This parameter is set according to the situation whether daylight saving time is used in the place where the NE is located. Offset 1 to 120 Unit: minute(s) Start Rule WEEK DATE Start Time End Rule WEEK DATE End Time WEEK WEEK This parameter specifies the offset value of the daylight saving time. This parameter specifies the method of adjusting the daylight saving time. This parameter specifies the start daylight saving time. This parameter specifies the method of adjusting the daylight saving time. This parameter specifies the end daylight saving time.
A.1.1.6 Parameter Description: Standard NTP Key Management

This topic describes the parameters that are used for managing the standard NTP key.
Navigation Path
1. 2. Choose Configuration > NE Batch Configuration > NE Time Synchronization from the Main Menu. Click the Standard NTP Key Management tab.
A-14
Issue 03 (2011-04-10)

Parameter Key Value Range 1 to 1024 Default Value Description l This parameter indicates the key for NTP authentication. l This parameter is set according to the requirements of the external NTP server. Password l This parameter indicates the password that corresponds to Key. l This parameter is set according to the requirements of the external NTP server. Trusted Yes No Yes l When this parameter is set to No, the key verification is not trusted. After receiving the key, the NE rejects the clock synchronization service. l When this parameter is set to Yes, the key verification is trusted. After receiving the key, the NE provides the clock synchronization service. l After receiving an unknown or incorrect key, the NE rejects the clock synchronization service. Hence, it is recommended that you set a trusted key only.
A.1.1.7 Parameter Description: License Management

This topic describes the parameters that are used for managing the license.
Issue 03 (2011-04-10)
A-15
Navigation Path
1. 2. In the NE Explorer, select the NE and then choose Configuration > License Management from the Function Tree. Click the License Management tab.
Parameters for Managing Licenses

Parameter Board File Type Capacity Load Value Range Default Value Description This parameter displays the boards that need to be supported by licenses. This parameter displays the license type corresponding to each board. This parameter displays the capacity of each board. This parameter displays whether the corresponding license file is loaded to each board.
A.1.1.8 Parameter Description: Automatic Disabling of the Functions of NEs

This parameter describes the parameters that are used for automatically disabling the functions of an NE.
Navigation Path
1. 2. On the Main Topology, choose Configuration > NE Batch Configuration > Automatic Disabling of NE Function. Select the NE whose functions need to be automatically disabled from the Object Tree, and then click .
Parameters for Automatically Disabling the Functions of NEs

Parameter NE Name NE Type Operation Type Value Range OptiX RTN 980 Default Value Description This parameter indicates the name of the NE. This parameter indicates the type of the NE. This parameter indicates the type of the operation, such as loopback, and shutdown of the laser. This parameter specifies whether to automatically disable the operations such as loopback, and shutdown of the laser.
Issue 03 (2011-04-10)
Auto Disabling
Disabled Enabled
Enabled
A-16
Parameter Auto Disabling Time(min)
Default Value 5
Description This parameter specifies the time of automatically disabling the operations such as loopback, and shutdown of the laser.
A.1.2 Parameters for Communications Management

This topic describes the parameters that are used for communications management. A.1.2.1 Parameter Description: NE Communication Parameter Setting This topic describes the parameters that are used for NE communication setting. A.1.2.2 Parameter Description: DCC Management_DCC Rate Configuration This topic describes the parameters that are used for configuring the DCC rate. A.1.2.3 Parameter Description: DCC Management_DCC Transparent Transmission Management This topic describes the parameters that are used for DCC transparent transmission management. A.1.2.4 Parameter Description: ECC Management_Ethernet Port Extended ECC This topic describes the parameters that are related to the extended ECCs of Ethernet ports. A.1.2.5 Parameter Description: NE ECC Link Management This topic describes the parameters that are used for NE ECC link management. A.1.2.6 Parameter Description: IP Protocol Stack Management_IP Route Management This topic describes the parameters that are used for IP route management. A.1.2.7 Parameter Description: IP Protocol Stack Management_IP Route Management Creation This topic describes the parameters that are used for new static IP routes. A.1.2.8 Parameter Description: IP Protocol Stack Management_OSPF Parameter Settings This topic describes the parameters that are used for OSPF settings. A.1.2.9 Parameter Description: IP Protocol Stack_Proxy ARP This topic describes the parameters that are used for configuring the proxy ARP. A.1.2.10 Parameter Description: Port OSPF Setting This section describes the parameters that are used for setting port OSPF parameters. A.1.2.11 Parameter Description: OSI Management_Network Layer Parameter This topic describes the parameters that are related to the network layer of the OSI protocol model. A.1.2.12 Parameter Description: OSI Management_Routing Table This topic describes the parameters that are related to OSI routing tables. A.1.2.13 Parameter Description: OSI Management_OSI Tunnel This topic describes the parameters that are related to the OSI tunnels. A.1.2.14 Parameter Description: DCN Management_Bandwidth Management This topic describes the parameters that are used for bandwidth management of the inband DCN. A.1.2.15 Parameter Description: DCN Management_Port Setting This topic describes the parameters that are used for setting ports of the inband DCN.
Issue 03 (2011-04-10) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. A-17
A.1.2.16 Parameter Description: DCN Management_Protocol Setting This topic describes the parameters that are used for setting a protocol of the inband DCN. A.1.2.17 Parameter Description: DCN Management_Access Control This section describes the parameters for configuring access control. A.1.2.18 Parameter Description: Access Control This topic describes the parameters that are used for access control of the NMS.
A.1.2.1 Parameter Description: NE Communication Parameter Setting

This topic describes the parameters that are used for NE communication setting.
Navigation Path
Select the NE from the Object Tree in the NE Explorer. Choose Communication > Communication Parameters from the Function Tree.
Parameters for NE Communication Setting

Parameter IP Address Value Range Default Value Before delivery, the IP address of the NE is set to 129.9.0.x. The letter x indicates the basic ID. 0.0.0.0 255.255.0.0 Description In the HWECC solution, an IP address is set according to the following rules: l The IP address, subnet mask, and default gateway of the gateway NE should meet the planning requirements of the external DCN. l If an NE uses the extended ECC, the IP address must be in the same network segment. l The IP address of other NEs should be set according to the NE ID. In this case, the IP address of an NE should be set in the format of 0x81000000+ID. That is, if the ID is 0x090001, the IP address should be set to 129.9.0.1. l Do not change the extended ID when the number of actual NEs does not exceed the range permitted by the basic NE ID. l It is recommended that this parameter takes the default value. NSAP Address This parameter is valid only when the OSI over DCC solution is applied. This parameter is used to set only the area ID of an NSAP address. The other parts of the NSAP address are automatically generated by the NE.
Gateway IP Address Subnet Mask
Extended ID
1 to 254
A-18
Issue 03 (2011-04-10)
Parameter Connection Mode
Value Range Common + Security SSL Common Security SSL
Default Value Common + Security SSL
Description l Specifies the connection mode that the gateway NE allows the NMS to use for connecting to the gateway NE. l If the gateway NE has no special security requirement for connection to the NMS, Connection Mode can be set to Common. l If the gateway NE requests secure connection to the NMS for preventing information interception and cracking, Connection Mode needs to be set to Security SSL. l If NE communication security level needs to be the same as NMS communication security level, Connection Mode needs to be set to Common + Security SSL. l The default parameter value is recommended unless the gateway NE requires that the NMS use the SSL connection mode. l The parameter value takes effect only when it is set for a gateway NE and the gateway NE is connected to the NMS by means of the IP protocol.
A.1.2.2 Parameter Description: DCC Management_DCC Rate Configuration

This topic describes the parameters that are used for configuring the DCC rate.
Navigation Path
1. 2. Select the NE from the Object Tree in the NE Explorer. Choose Communication > DCC Management from the Function Tree. Click the DCC Rate Configuration tab.
Parameters for DCC Rate Configuration

Parameter Port Value Range Default Value Description This parameter indicates the port that is connected to the DCC channel.
Issue 03 (2011-04-10)
A-19
Parameter Enabled/Disabled
Value Range Enabled Disabled
Default Value Enabled
Description It is recommended that you use the default value, except for the following cases: l If the port is connected to the other ECC subnet, Enabled/Disabled is set to Disabled. l If the port is connected to a third-party network and does not exchange the network management information with other ports, Enabled/Disabled is set to Disabled.
Channel
D1-D3 D4-D12 D1-D12 D1-D1
D1-D1 (for the PDH radio whose transmission capacity is less than 16xE1) D1-D3 (for other cases)
It is recommended that you use the default value, except for the following cases: l If the IP over DCC or OSI over DCC solution is adopted, Channel for the SDH line ports is set to a value that is the same as the value for third-party network. l If the DCC transparent transmission solution is adopted, the value of Channel for the SDH line ports should not conflict with the value that is set for the third-party network.
DCC Resources Communication Status Protocol Type
HWECC TCP/IP OSI
HWECC
This parameter indicates the DCC resources. This parameter indicates the communication status. It is recommended that you use the default value, except for the following cases: l If the IP over DCC solution is adopted, Protocol Type is set to TCP/IP. l If the OSI over DCC solution is adopted, Protocol Type is set to OSI.
LAPD Role
User Network
User
l This parameter is valid only when Protocol Type is set to OSI. l In the case of a DCC channel, LAPD Role must be set to User for one end and must be set to Network for the other end.
LAPD MTU
Displays the maximum LAPD packet size.
A.1.2.3 Parameter Description: DCC Management_DCC Transparent Transmission Management

This topic describes the parameters that are used for DCC transparent transmission management.
A-20 Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. Issue 03 (2011-04-10)
Navigation Path
1. 2. 3. Select the NE from the Object Tree in the NE Explorer. Choose Communication > DCC Management from the Function Tree. Click the DCC Transparent Transmission Management tab. Click Create.
Parameters for DCC Transparent Transmission Management

Parameter Source Timeslot/ Porta Transparent Transmission of Overhead Bytes at Source Port Value Range D1 D2 D3 D4 D5 D6 D7 D8 D9 D10 D11 D12 E1 E2 F1 K1 K2 X1 X2 X3 X4 Sink Timeslot/ Porta This parameter specifies the sink timeslot or port. Default Value Description This parameter specifies the source timeslot or port. l Only one overhead byte can be selected each time. l X1, X2, X3, and X4 indicate the customized overhead bytes that are used for transmitting asynchronous data services. l An overhead byte cannot be a byte that is used. For example, an overhead byte cannot be a byte in the used DCC channel.
Issue 03 (2011-04-10)
A-21
Parameter Transparent Transmission of Overhead Bytes at Sink Port
Value Range D1 D2 D3 D4 D5 D6 D7 D8 D9 D10 D11 D12 E1 E2 F1 K1 K2 X1 X2 X3 X4
Default Value -
Description l Only one overhead byte can be selected each time. l An overhead byte cannot be a byte that is used. For example, an overhead byte cannot be a byte in the used DCC channel. l Generally, Transparent Transmission of Overhead Bytes at Sink Port can be set to a value that is the same as or different from the value in the case of Transparent Transmission of Overhead Bytes at Source Port.
NOTE
a. A bidirectional cross-connection is set up between the source port and the sink port. Hence, a port functions the same regardless of the source port or sink port.
A.1.2.4 Parameter Description: ECC Management_Ethernet Port Extended ECC

This topic describes the parameters that are related to the extended ECCs of Ethernet ports.
Navigation Path
Click an NE in the NE Explorer. Choose Communication > ECC Management from the Function Tree.
Parameters for the ECC Extended Mode

Parameter ECC Extended Mode Value Range Auto mode Specified mode Default Value Auto mode Description It is recommended that you use the default value.
A-22
Issue 03 (2011-04-10)
Parameters for Setting the Server

Parameter IP Port Value Range 1601 to 1699 Default Value 0 Description This parameter indicates the IP address of the server. l This parameter is valid only when ECC Extended Mode is set to Specified mode. l This parameter can be set only when the NE functions as the server of the extended ECC. In normal cases, the NE that is close to the NMS functions as the server. l This parameter can be set to any value from 1601 to 1699.
Parameters for Setting the Client

Parameter Opposite IP Port Value Range 1601 to 1699 Default Value 0.0.0.0 0 Description l This parameter is valid only when ECC Extended Mode is set to Specified mode. l This parameter can be set only when the NE functions as the client of the extended ECC. Except for the NE that functions as the server, all other NEs that use the extended ECC can function as the client. l Opposite IP and Port are respectively set to the IP address of the server NE and the specified port number.
A.1.2.5 Parameter Description: NE ECC Link Management

This topic describes the parameters that are used for NE ECC link management.
Navigation Path
Select the NE from the Object Tree in the NE Explorer. Choose Communication > NE ECC Link Management from the Function Tree.
Issue 03 (2011-04-10)
A-23
Parameter for NE ECC Link Management

Parameter Destination NE Transfer NE Distance Value Range Default Value Description This parameter specifies the sink NE of the ECC connection. This parameter specifies the next transfer NE and the direction of the ECC route. l This parameter specifies the number of NEs (excluding the source NE and sink NE) through which the ECC route passes, namely, the number of ECC packet forwarding attempts. The value can be set to a value that is greater than the number of actual ECC packet forwarding attempts. If the value is set to a value that is less than the number of actual ECC packet forwarding attempts, however, the destination NE fails to be accessed. l If the value is set to 0, it indicates that the source NE is adjacent to the destination NE. Level l This parameter indicates that multiple ECC routes from the source NE to the destination NE may be available. An ECC route of a higher priority is selected to transmit the packets to the destination NE. l If the ECC route is generated automatically, the priority is 4. l If the ECC route is added manually, the priority is 5. Mode SCC No. This parameter indicates the ECC routing mode. This parameter specifies the physical port through which the ECC route passes. The value of this parameter is automatically assigned the NE.
A.1.2.6 Parameter Description: IP Protocol Stack Management_IP Route Management

This topic describes the parameters that are used for IP route management.
A-24
Issue 03 (2011-04-10)
Navigation Path
1. 2. Select the NE from the Object Tree in the NE Explorer. Choose Communication > IP Protocol Stack Management from the Function Tree. Click the IP Route Management tab.
Parameters for IP Route Management

Parameter Destination Address Value Range Default Value Description This parameter indicates the destination address of the packets. This parameter can be set to a valid IP address of class A, B, or C only, but cannot be set to the IP address of the local host or the loopback address with the 127 field. This parameter indicates the subnet mask of the destination address of the packets. This parameter indicates the IP address of the gateway on the subnetwork where the NE is located, namely, the IP address of the next hop of the packets. l DIRECT: indicates the route between the local NE and an adjacent NE. l STATIC: indicates the route that is created manually. l OSPF: indicates the route between the local NE and a non-adjacent NE. l RIP: indicates the route that is discovered by the routing information protocol. l OSPF_ASE: indicates the route whose Destination Address is beyond the OSPF domain. l OSPF_NSSA: indicates the route whose Destination Address is in a not so stubby area (NSSA). l A route can be deleted in the case of STATIC only, but cannot be edited in the other cases. l Compared with a dynamic route, a static route has a higher priority. If any conflict occurs, the static route is preferred.
Subnet Mask Gateway
Protocol
Issue 03 (2011-04-10)
A-25
Parameter Interface
Value Range -
Default Value -
Description This parameter indicates the interface that is used on the route. Interface is a concept specified in the TCP/IP protocol stack. In the TCP/IP protocol stack, you can create multiple types of interface, such as a loopback interface (namely, the interface whose IP address is 127.0.0.1), an Ethernet interface, and PPP interface. Each interface must have a unique interface name. This parameter indicates the maximum number of routers through which the packets are transmitted. Metric is used to indicate the overhead bytes that are transmitted to the destination address. The smaller the value, the less the overhead bytes. If multiple routes can reach the same destination address, a route whose overhead is less is preferred to transmit the packets.
Metric
A.1.2.7 Parameter Description: IP Protocol Stack Management_IP Route Management Creation

This topic describes the parameters that are used for new static IP routes.
Navigation Path
1. 2. 3. Select the NE from the Object Tree in the NE Explorer. Choose Communication > IP Protocol Stack Management from the Function Tree. Click the IP Route Management tab. Click New.
Parameters for Creating IP Routes

Parameter Destination Address Value Range Default Value Description This parameter specifies the destination address of the packets. This parameter can be set to a valid IP address of class A, B, or C only, but cannot be set to the IP address of the local host or the loopback address with the 127 field. This parameter indicates the subnet mask of the destination address of the packets.
Subnet Mask
A-26
Issue 03 (2011-04-10)
Parameter Gateway
Value Range -
Default Value -
Description This parameter specifies the IP address of the gateway on the subnetwork where the NE is located, namely, the IP address of the next hop of the packets.
A.1.2.8 Parameter Description: IP Protocol Stack Management_OSPF Parameter Settings

This topic describes the parameters that are used for OSPF settings.
Navigation Path
1. 2. Select the NE from the Object Tree in the NE Explorer. Choose Communication > IP Protocol Stack Management from the Function Tree. Click the OSPF Parameter Settings tab.
OSPF Parameters
Parameter Area Value Range Default Value 0.0.0.0 Description l The OSPF protocol supports the division of NEs into multiple areas. Only the NEs in the same area can transmit the OSPF packets to each other to generate the route. l When setting the area for the NEs, you need to set the NEs that run the OSPF protocol to the same area. DCC Hello Timer (s) 1 to 255 10 l DCC Hello Timer(s) specifies the Hello packet timer at the DCC interface. l The Hello packets are used for detecting the neighbor router on the network that is connected to the router. By periodically transmitting the hello packets, you can determine whether the interface on the neighbor router is still in the active status. l DCC Hello Timer(s) determines the interval for the hello packet timer to transmit the hello packets. l In the case of two interconnected NEs, DCC Hello Timer(s) must be set to the same value.
Issue 03 (2011-04-10)
A-27
Parameter DCC Neighbor Dead Time(s)
Default Value 40
Description l DCC Neighbor Dead Time(s) specifies the dead time of a neighbor router at the DCC interface. l If the local router fails to receive the hello packets from the connected neighbor router within the time specified in DCC Neighbor Dead Time(s), it considers that the neighbor router is unavailable. l DCC Neighbor Dead Time(s) should be set to a value that is a minimum of twice the value of DCC Hello Timer (s). l In the case of adjacent NEs, DCC Neighbor Dead Time(s) must be set to the same value. Otherwise, the OSPF protocol fails to operate normally.
DCC Retransmission Timer(s) DCC Delay(s)
1 to 65535
DCC Retransmission Timer(s) specifies the interval for transmitting a request through the DCC interface to retransmit the link state advertisement (LSA) packets. l DCC Delay(s) specifies the delay time to transmit the LSA packets through the DCC interface. l The LSA packets in the LSA database of the local router are aged as the time elapses, but are not aged when they are being transmitted on the network. Hence, before the LSA packets are transmitted, you need to increase the age of the LSA packets based on the value of DCC Delay(s).
1 to 3600
A-28
Issue 03 (2011-04-10)
Parameter LAN Hello Timer (s)
Default Value 10
Description l DCC Hello Timer(s) specifies the hello packet timer at the LAN interfaces. l The hello packets are used for detecting the neighbor router on the network that is connected to the router. By periodically transmitting the hello packets, you can determine whether the interface on the neighbor router is still in the active status. l LAN Hello Timer(s) determines the interval for the hello packet timer of the NE to transmit the hello packets. l In the case of two interconnected NEs, LAN Hello Timer(s) must be set to the same value.
LAN Neighbor Dead Time(s)
1 to 65535
40
l LAN Neighbor Dead Time(s) specifies the dead time of a neighbor router at the LAN interface. l If the local router fails to receive the hello packets from the connected neighbor router within the time specified in LAN Neighbor Dead Time(s), it considers that the neighbor router is unavailable. l LAN Neighbor Dead Time(s) should be set to a value that is a minimum of two times the value of LAN Neighbor Dead Time(s). l In the case of adjacent NEs, DCC Neighbor Dead Time(s) must be set to the same value. Otherwise, the OSPF protocol fails to operate normally.
LAN Retransmission Timer(s)
1 to 65535
LAN Retransmission Timer(s) specifies the time for transmitting a request for retransmission of the LSA packets through the LAN interface.
Issue 03 (2011-04-10)
A-29
Parameter LAN Delay(s)
Default Value 1
Description l LAN Delay(s) specifies the delay time to transmit the LSA packets through the LAN interface. l The LSA packets in the LSA database of the local router are aged as the time elapses, but are not aged when they are being transmitted on the network. Hence, before the LSA packets are transmitted, you need to increase the age of the LSA packets based on the value of LAN Delay(s).
OSPF Status
Enabled Disabled
Enabled
Specifies whether to enable the OSPF.
STUB Area
Enabled Disabled
Disabled
l Specifies whether to enable the STUB Area. l Set this parameter as required.
NSSA Area
Enabled Disabled
Disabled
l Specifies whether to enable the NSSA Area. l Set this parameter as required.
Direct route
Enabled Disabled
Disabled
l Specifies whether to enable the Direct route. l Direct route: the route detected by the link layer protocol. l Set this parameter as required.
Static route
Enabled Disabled
Disabled
l Specifies whether to enable the Static route. l Static route: the route manually configured by the network administrator. l Set this parameter as required.
RIP route
Enabled Disabled
Disabled
l Specifies whether to enable the RIP route. l RIP route: the route detected by the routing protocol. l Set this parameter as required.
Opaque LSA of External Network Port
Enabled Disabled
Disabled
l Specifies whether to enable the Opaque LSA of External Network Port. l If this parameter is set to Enabled, it indicates that the Ethernet NM interface is used to transmit NM message. l Set this parameter as required.
A-30
Issue 03 (2011-04-10)
Parameter LAN Interface
Default Value Disabled
Description l Specifies whether to enable the OSPF at the Ethernet NM interface. l If this parameter is set to Enabled, it indicates that the Ethernet NM interface achieves OSPF communication with other equipment.
A.1.2.9 Parameter Description: IP Protocol Stack_Proxy ARP

This topic describes the parameters that are used for configuring the proxy ARP.
Navigation Path
1. 2. Select the NE from the Object Tree in the NE Explorer. Choose Communication > IP Protocol Stack Management from the Function Tree. Click the Proxy ARP tab.
Parameters for configuring the proxy ARP

Parameter Proxy ARP Value Range Disabled Enabled Default Value Disabled Description l The proxy ARP enables the NEs in the same network segment but different domains to communicate with each other. l To realize communication between such NEs, the source NE sends the ARP broadcast packet to address the route to the destination NE. The NE with the proxy ARP function enabled checks the routing table after sensing the ARP broadcast packet. If the routing table contains the destination address that the ARP broadcast packet looks for, the NE returns an ARP spoofing packet, which enables the NE that sends the ARP broadcast packet to consider that the MAC address of the NE that returns the ARP spoofing packet is the MAC address of the destination NE. In this manner, the packet that is to be sent to the destination NE is first sent to the NE with the proxy ARP function enabled and then forwarded to the destination NE.
Issue 03 (2011-04-10)
A-31
A.1.2.10 Parameter Description: Port OSPF Setting

This section describes the parameters that are used for setting port OSPF parameters.
Navigation Path
1. 2. In the NE Explorer, select the required NE and choose Communication > IP Protocol Stack Management from the Function Tree. Click the Port OSPF Parameter Settings tab.
Port OSPF Parameters

Parameter Port Path Type OSPF Status Value Range Enabled Disabled Opaque LSA of External Network Port Enabled Disabled Enabled Default Value Enabled Description Displays the ports that allow OSPF parameters to be set. Displays the current DCC channel type. l Specifies whether to enable the OSPF. l Set this parameter as required. l Specifies whether DCC channels support Opaque LSAs. l Set this parameter as required.
A.1.2.11 Parameter Description: OSI Management_Network Layer Parameter

This topic describes the parameters that are related to the network layer of the OSI protocol model.
Navigation Path
1. 2. Select the NE from the Object Tree in the NE Explorer. Choose Communication > OSI Management from the Function Tree. Click the Network Layer Parameters tab.
Network Layer Parameters

Parameter NE Value Range Default Value Description This parameter indicates the name of the NE.
A-32
Issue 03 (2011-04-10)
Parameter Configuration Role
Value Range ES L1 L2
Default Value L1
Description l An NE whose Configuration Role is set to L1 cannot function as a neighbor of an NE in the other area. It uses a route in the local area only and accesses the other area by distributing the default route of the nearest L2 NE. l An NE whose Configuration Role is set to L2 can function as a neighbor of an NE in the other area and can use a route in the backbone area. The backbone area is a collection that is formed by consecutive L2 NEs. That is, the L2 NE of all the roles must be consecutive (connected to each other).
NOTE Configuration Role cannot be set to ES.
Current Role
This parameter indicates the current role.
A.1.2.12 Parameter Description: OSI Management_Routing Table

This topic describes the parameters that are related to OSI routing tables.
Navigation Path
1. 2. Select the NE from the Object Tree in the NE Explorer. Choose Communication > OSI Management from the Function Tree. Click the Routing Table tab.
Parameters for Link Adjacency Table

Parameter Port Data Link Layer Adjacency No. Value Range Default Value Description This parameter indicates the port used for OSI communication. This parameter indicates the protocol that is used at the data link layer. l This parameter specifies the identifier of the adjacency that is set up by two NEs through the OSI protocol. One adjacency number corresponds to an OSI adjacency. l The value is dynamically allocated by the NE. Adjacency Type This parameter indicates the type of the adjacency.
A-33
Issue 03 (2011-04-10)
Parameter Adjacency State Peer End Area ID
Value Range -
Default Value -
Description This parameter indicates the state of the adjacency. This parameter indicates the area ID that is contained in the NSAP address of the opposite NE. This parameter indicates the system ID of the opposite NE. Generally, the system ID is the MAC address.
Peer End System ID
Parameters for L1 and L2 Routing Tables

Parameter Destination Area ID Destination SYSID Value Range Default Value Description This parameter indicates the area ID of the destination NE. This parameter indicates the system ID of the destination NE. Generally, the system ID is the MAC address. This parameter indicates the number of hops that reach the destination NE or destination area. This parameter indicates the number of the adjacent link that is connected to the destination NE. This parameter indicates the number of the adjacent link that is connected to the destination NE.
Metric
Adjacency No.1
Adjacency No.2
A.1.2.13 Parameter Description: OSI Management_OSI Tunnel

This topic describes the parameters that are related to the OSI tunnels.
Navigation Path
1. 2. Select the NE from the Object Tree in the NE Explorer. Choose Communication > OSI Management from the Function Tree. Click the OSI Tunnel tab.
A-34
Issue 03 (2011-04-10)
Parameters for OSI Tunnel Attributes

Parameter Remote IP Address LAPD Actor Value Range User Network Default Value User Description This parameter indicates the IP address of the opposite end of the OSI tunnel. l This parameter specifies the LAPD actor. l If the adjacent NEs run the OSI protocol, they can perform the LAPD negotiation only when the LAPD actor is set to User at one end and is set to Network at the other end. Efficient LAPD Enable Configurable LAPD Enable Enabled Disabled Enabled This parameter indicates whether the current LAPD is enabled. This parameter specifies whether the LAPD is enabled.
LAPD Parameters
Parameter Remote IP Address L2 Wait Time to Retry(s) Value Range 1 to 20 Default Value 1 Description This parameter indicates the IP address of the opposite end of the OSI tunnel. l This parameter specifies L2 Wait Time to Retry(s). l L2 Wait Time to Retry(s) indicates the interval for retransmitting packets at the LAPD link layer. l L2 Wait Time to Retry(s) needs to be set according to the network situation. If the network is in good situation, L2 Wait Time to Retry(s) can be set to a smaller value. Otherwise, it is recommended that you set L2 Wait Time to Retry(s) to a greater value. l This parameter needs to be set according to the planning information. In normal cases, it is recommended that you use the default value.
Issue 03 (2011-04-10)
A-35
Parameter L2 Retry Times
Value Range 2 to 6
Default Value 3
Description l This parameter specifies L2 Retry Times. l L2 Retry Times indicates the maximum number of packet retransmission attempts at the LAPD link layer. l L2 Retry Times needs to be set according to the network situation. If the network is in good situation, L2 Retry Times can be set to a smaller value. Otherwise, it is recommended that you set L2 Retry Times to a greater value. l This parameter needs to be set according to the planning information. In normal cases, it is recommended that you use the default value.
L3 Hello Timer(s)
1 to 100
l This parameter specifies L3 Hello Timer(s). l L3 Hello Timer(s) indicates the Hello packet timer at the LAPD link network layer. It is used for periodical transmission of the Hello packets. l The Hello timer determines the interval for transmitting the Hello packets once. L3 Hello Timer(s) needs to be set according to the network situation. If the network is in good situation, L3 Hello Timer(s) can be set to a greater value. Otherwise, it is recommended that you set L3 Hello Timer(s) to a smaller value. l This parameter needs to be set according to the planning information. In normal cases, it is recommended that you use the default value.
A-36
Issue 03 (2011-04-10)
Parameter L3 ES Timer(s)
Default Value 50
Description l This parameter specifies L3 ES Timer (s). l L3 ES Timer(s) indicates the ES configuration timer at the LAPD link network layer. It is used for setting the time to transmit the configuration information on the ES route. l L3 ES Timer(s) needs to be set according to the network situation. If the network is in good situation, L3 ES Timer(s) can be set to a greater value. Otherwise, it is recommended that you set L3 Hello Timer(s) to a smaller value. l This parameter needs to be set according to the planning information. In normal cases, it is recommended that you use the default value.
L3 IS Timer(s)
1 to 200
10
l This parameter specifies L3 IS Timer (s). l L3 IS Timer(s) indicates the IS configuration timer at the LAPD link network layer. It is used for setting the time to transmit the configuration information through the L1/L2 router. l L3 IS Timer(s) needs to be set according to the network situation. If the network is in good situation, L3 IS Timer(s) can be set to a greater value. Otherwise, it is recommended that you set L3 IS Timer (s) to a smaller value. l This parameter needs to be set according to the planning information. In normal cases, it is recommended that you use the default value.
Issue 03 (2011-04-10)
A-37
Parameter L3 Hold Timer(s)
Value Range 2 to 63
Default Value 5
Description l This parameter specifies L3 Hold Timer (s). l L3 Hold Timer(s) indicates the hold timer at the LAPD link network layer. l L3 Hold Timer(s) needs to be set according to the network situation. If the network is in good situation, L3 Hold Timer(s) can be set to a smaller value. Otherwise, it is recommended that you set L3 IS Timer(s) to a greater value. l This parameter needs to be set according to the planning information. In normal cases, it is recommended that you use the default value.
COST
1 to 63
20
l This parameter specifies COST. l COST indicates the overhead value of the virtual LAPD that corresponds to the OSI tunnel. l The overhead value determines whether this link is perverted. If the overhead value is smaller, this link has a higher priority to be selected. l This parameter needs to set according to the planning information.
A.1.2.14 Parameter Description: DCN Management_Bandwidth Management

This topic describes the parameters that are used for bandwidth management of the inband DCN.
Navigation Path
1. 2. Select the NE from the Object Tree in the NE Explorer. Choose Communication > DCN Management from the Function Tree. Click the Bandwidth Management tab.
A-38
Issue 03 (2011-04-10)
Parameters for Bandwidth Management

Parameter Ethernet Board VLAN ID Value Range 2 to 4094 Default Value 4094 Description l The equipment on the traditional DCN can be connected to the NMS through the SCC board, but the OptiX RTN 980 can also be connected to the NMS through an Ethernet interface. If an Ethernet port is used to carry the network management information, the NE differentiates the network management information and Ethernet service information according to the VLAN ID. l If the default VLAN ID of the inband DCN conflicts with the VLAN ID in the service, the Ethernet Board VLAN ID of the inband DCN can be changed manually. The same VLAN ID must be, however, is used on the network-wide inband DCN. Bandwidth(Kbit/s) 64 to 1000 512 Bandwidth(Kbit/s) specifies the bandwidth for inband DCN messaging on the Ethernet link. The OptiX RTN 980 does not support this parameter. The OptiX RTN 980 does not support this parameter. IF Port Bandwidth(Kbit/s) specifies the bandwidth for inband DCN messaging on the radio link.
E1 Port Bandwidth(Kbit/s) Tunnel Bandwidth (Kbit/s) IF Port Bandwidth (Kbit/s)
64 to 1000
512
A.1.2.15 Parameter Description: DCN Management_Port Setting

This topic describes the parameters that are used for setting ports of the inband DCN.
Navigation Path
1. 2. Select the NE from the Object Tree in the NE Explorer. Choose Communication > DCN Management from the Function Tree. Click the Port Settings tab.
Parameters for Setting Ports

Parameter Port Name
Issue 03 (2011-04-10)
Value Range -
Default Value -
Description This parameter indicates the port name.

A-39
Parameter Enabled Status
Description l Enabled Status specifies the enabling status of the port. l The network management information can be transmitted over the inband DCN when the DCN function is enabled for the ports at both ends of a link.
A.1.2.16 Parameter Description: DCN Management_Protocol Setting

This topic describes the parameters that are used for setting a protocol of the inband DCN.
Navigation Path
1. 2. In the NE Explorer, select the required NE from the Object Tree, and then choose Communication > DCN Management from the Function Tree. Click the Protocol Settings tab.
Parameters for Setting a Protocol

Parameter Port Name Protocol Type Value Range IP HWECC Default Value IP Description Displays the port name. l If the values of Protocol Type are different from each other, the equipment at both ends cannot be interconnected with each other. Therefore, Protocol Type must be set to the same value for the equipment at both ends of a link. l Set Protocol Type according to the network planning information. Generally, it is recommended that you set this parameter to IP.
A.1.2.17 Parameter Description: DCN Management_Access Control

This section describes the parameters for configuring access control.
Navigation Path
l l In the NE Explorer, select the NE from the Object Tree and then choose Communication > DCN Management from the Function Tree. Click the Access Control tab.
A-40
Issue 03 (2011-04-10)
Parameters
Parameter Port Name Enabled Status Value Range Disabled Enabled Default Value Disabled Description Displays the Ethernet ports that support this function. l Specifies the enabling status of the port. l If the Enabled Status is set to Enabled, this port can be used to support access of the management information from the NMS. l If the Enabled Status is set to Disabled, this port cannot be used to support access of the management information from the NMS. IP Address Subnet Mask 0.0.0.0 0.0.0.0 Specifies the IP address of the port. Specifies the submask of the port.
A.1.2.18 Parameter Description: Access Control

This topic describes the parameters that are used for access control of the NMS.
Navigation Path
Select the NE from the Object Tree in the NE Explorer. Choose Communication > Access Control from the Function Tree.
Parameters for Ethernet Access Control

Parameter The First Network Port PORT Value Range Enabled Disabled Default Value Enabled Description After The First Network Port is set to Enabled for Ethernet access, the NE can access the NMS through the Ethernet port. This parameter displays the NMS port and the NE cascading port on the system control, switching, and timing board. This parameter specifies the working modes of the NMS port and the NE cascading port on the system control, switching, and timing board.
Work Mode
adapt 10M Half_Duplex 10M Full_Duplex 100M Half_Duplex 100M Full_Duplex
Issue 03 (2011-04-10)
A-41
Parameter Actual Work Mode
Value Range -
Default Value -
Description This parameter displays the working modes of the NMS port and the NE cascading port on the system control, switching, and timing board.
Parameters for Access Control over Serial Ports

Parameter Enable Serial Port Access Access Command Line Access NM Value Range Selected Deselected Selected Deselected Selected Deselected Baud Rate 1200 2400 4800 9600 19200 38400 57600 115200 9600 Selected Deselected Default Value Selected Description After Enable Serial Port Access is selected, the NE can access the NMS or command lines through the serial port. If Access Command Line is selected, the serial interface can be used to access the command line terminal. If Access NM is selected, the serial interface can be used to access the NMS. l This parameter specifies the data transmission rate in the communications through serial ports. l This parameter is set according to the rate of the serial port at the opposite end, and the rates at both ends must be the same.
A.1.3 Parameters for Network Security Management

This topic describes the parameters that are related to network security management. A.1.3.1 Parameter Description: NE User Management This topic describes the parameters that are related to NE user management. A.1.3.2 Parameter Description: NE User Management_Creation This topic describes the parameters that are used for creating an NE user. A.1.3.3 Parameter Description: LCT Access Control This topic describes the parameters that are used for LCT access control.
A.1.3.1 Parameter Description: NE User Management

This topic describes the parameters that are related to NE user management.
Navigation Path
1. Select the required NE from the Object Tree in the NE Explorer. Choose Security > NE User Management from the Function Tree. A dialog box is displayed, indicating that the operation is successful. 2. Close the dialog box.
Parameters for NE user management

Parameter NE NE User User Level NE User Flag Value Range Default Value Description Displays the current NE name. Displays the registered NE user name. Displays the registered NE user level. Displays whether a registered NE user is logged in.
A.1.3.2 Parameter Description: NE User Management_Creation

This topic describes the parameters that are used for creating an NE user.
Navigation Path
1. Select the required NE from the Object Tree in the NE Explorer. Choose Security > NE User Management from the Function Tree.A dialog box is displayed, indicating that the operation is successful. Close the dialog box. Click Add.
2. 3.

Parameter NE User Value Range Default Value Description Specifies the name of a registered NE user.
NOTE The name of an NE cannot contain any space or Chinese characters.
Issue 03 (2011-04-10)
A-43
Parameter User Level
Value Range Monitor Level Operation Level Maintenance Level System Level Debug Level
Default Value Monitor Level
Description l A Debug Level NE user has all security and configuration authorities, and has the right to run debugging commands. l A System Level NE user has all security and configuration authorities. l A Maintenance Level NE user has some security authorities, some configuration authorities, the communication setting authority, and the log management authority. l An Operation Level NE user has all fault performance authorities, some security authorities, and some configuration authorities. l A Monitor Level NE user has the right to use all query commands, to log in, to log out, and to change its own password.
A-44
Issue 03 (2011-04-10)
Parameter NE User Flag
Value Range LCT NE User EMS NE User CMD NE User General NE User
Default Value LCT NE User
Description l Specifies the NE user flag. l LCT NE User indicates NE users for NE management on the U2000 Local Craft Terminal (U2000 LCT). l EMS NE User indicates NE users for NE management on the U2000. l CMD NE User indicates NE users for NE management on the CMD. l General NE User indicates NE users for all NMS types.
Detailed Description New Password Confirm Password Whether the password is allowed to be modified immediately
Yes No
Yes
Describes a configured NE user. l Specifies the password for a new NE user. Enter the same value as New Password. Specifies whether the password of a registered NE user can be changed.
A.1.3.3 Parameter Description: LCT Access Control

This topic describes the parameters that are used for LCT access control.
Navigation Path
Select the NE from the Object Tree in the NE Explorer. Choose Security > LCT Access Control from the Function Tree.
Parameters for LCT Access Control

Parameter NE Value Range Default Value Description This parameter indicates the name of the NE.
A-45
Issue 03 (2011-04-10)
Parameter LCT Access Control Switch
Value Range Access Allowed Disable Access
Default Value Access Allowed
Description l No NMS user logs in to the NE. In this case, when the LCT requests an LCT user to log in to the NE, the NE does not check the status of LCT Access Control Switch, and directly allows the LCT user to log in to the NE. l An NMS user first logs in to the NE. In this case, when the LCT requests an LCT user to log in to the NE, the NE determines whether to allow the LCT user to log in to the NE through the LCT according to the status of LCT Access Control Switch. l An LCT user first logs in to the NE. In this case, when the NMS requests an NMS user to log in to the NE, the NMS user can directly log in to the NE. After the NMS user successfully logs in to the NE, the online LCT user is not affected. l When both the LCT user and NMS user log in to the NE, the online LCT user is not affected after LCT Access Control Switch is set to Disable Access.
A.2 Radio Link Parameters

This topic describes the parameters that are related to radio links. A.2.1 Parameter Description: Link Configuration_XPIC Workgroup_Creation This topic describes the parameters that are related to the XPIC function. A.2.2 Parameter Description: Link Configuration_XPIC This topic describes the parameters that are related to the XPIC function. A.2.3 Parameter Description: N+1 Protection_Create This topic describes the parameters that are used for creating an IF N+1 protection group. A.2.4 Parameter Description: N+1 Protection This topic describes the parameters that are related to IF N+1 protection. A.2.5 Parameter: IF 1+1 Protection_Create This topic describes the parameters that are used for creating an IF 1+1 protection group. A.2.6 Parameter Description: IF 1+1 Protection This topic describes the parameters that are related to IF 1+1 protection. A.2.7 Parameter: Link Configuration_IF/ODU Configuration This topic describes the parameters that are used for configuring the IF/ODU.
A-46
Issue 03 (2011-04-10)
A.2.1 Parameter Description: Link Configuration_XPIC Workgroup_Creation

This topic describes the parameters that are related to the XPIC function.
Navigation Path
1. 2. 3. Select the NE from the Object Tree in the NE Explorer. Choose Configuration > Link Configuration from the Function Tree. Click the XPIC tab. Click New.
Parameters
Parameter IF Channel Bandwidth Value Range 28M 40M 56M Default Value Description l This parameter specifies the channel spacing when the XPIC function is enabled. l When this parameter is set to 56M or 40M, the high-power ODU must be used.
NOTE The IFX2 board does not support the value 40M.
Polarization Direction-V Polarization Direction-H
l This parameter indicates the polarization direction of a radio link. l It is recommended that you set the IF port on the XPIC IF board that has a smaller slot number to Link ID-V and the IF port on the other XPIC IF board to Link IDH. l Set Link ID-V and Link ID-H. l A link ID is an identifier of a radio link and is used to prevent the radio links between sites from being wrongly connected. l When the link ID received by an NE is different from the link ID set for the NE, the NE reports an MW_LIM alarm and inserts the AIS. l These two parameters are set according to the planning information. These two parameters must be set to different values, but Link ID-V must be set to the same value at both ends of a link and Link ID-H must also be set to the same value at both ends of a link.
Link ID-V Link ID-H
1 to 4094
1 2
Issue 03 (2011-04-10)
A-47
Parameter Transmit Power (dBm)
Value Range -
Default Value -
Description l This parameter specifies the transmit power of an ODU. The value of this parameter must not exceed the rated power range supported by the ODU. l It is recommended that you set the transmit power of the ODU to the same value at both ends of a radio link. l Consider the receive power of the ODU at the opposite end when you set this parameter. Ensure that the receive power of the ODU at the opposite end can ensure stable radio services. l This parameter is set according to the planning information.
Maximum Transmit Power (dBm)
l This parameter specifies the maximum transmit power of the ODU. This parameter cannot be set to a value that exceeds the nominal power rang of the ODU in the guaranteed capacity modulation module. l This parameter is set to limit the maximum transmit power of the ODU within this preset range. l The maximum transmit power adjusted by using the ATPC function should not exceed this value. l This parameter is set according to the planning information.
Transmission Frequency(MHz)
l This parameter indicates the channel central frequency. l The value of this parameter must not be less than the sum of the lower transmit frequency limit supported by the ODU and a half of the channel spacing, and must not be more than the difference between the upper transmit frequency limit supported by the ODU and a half of the channel spacing. l This parameter is set according to the planning information.
A-48
Issue 03 (2011-04-10)
Parameter T/R Spacing(MHz)
Value Range -
Default Value -
Description l This parameter specifies the spacing between the transmit frequency and the receive frequency of an ODU to prevent mutual interference between the transmitter and the receiver. l If Station Type of the ODU is TX high, the transmit frequency is one T/R spacing higher than the receive frequency. If Station Type of the ODU is TX low, the transmit frequency is one T/R spacing lower than the receive frequency. l If the ODU supports only one T/R spacing, set this parameter to 0, indicating that the T/R spacing supported by the ODU is used. l A valid T/R spacing value is determined by the ODU itself, and the T/R spacing should be set according to the technical specifications of the ODU. l The T/R spacing of the ODU should be set to the same value at both the ends of a radio link.
Transmission Status
unmute mute
unmute
l When this parameter is set to mute, the ODU does not transmit microwave signals but can normally receive microwave signals. l When this parameter is set to unmute, the ODU normally transmits and receives microwave signals. l In normal cases, Transmission Status is set to unmute.
Issue 03 (2011-04-10)
A-49
Parameter ATPC Enabled
Value Range Disabled Enabled
Description l This parameter specifies whether the ATPC function is enabled. l When this parameter is set to Enabled and if the RSL at the receive end is 2 dB higher or lower than the central value between the ATPC upper threshold and the ATPC lower threshold at the receive end, the receiver notifies the transmitter to decrease or increase the transmit power until the RSL is within the range that is 2 dB higher or lower than the central value between the ATPC upper threshold and the ATPC lower threshold. l The settings of the ATPC attributes must be consistent at both ends of a radio link. l In the case of areas where fast fading severely affects the radio transmission, it is recommended that you set this parameter to Disabled. l During the commissioning process, set this parameter to Disabled to ensure that the transmit power is not changed. After the commissioning, re-set the ATPC attributes.
ATPC Upper Threshold(dBm) ATPC Lower Threshold(dBm)
-45.0 -70.0
l The central value between the ATPC upper threshold and the ATPC lower threshold is set as the expected receive power. l It is recommended that you set ATPC Upper Threshold(dBm) to the sum of the planned central value between the ATPC upper threshold and the ATPC lower threshold and 10 dB, and ATPC Lower Threshold(dBm) to the difference between the planned central value between the ATPC upper threshold and the ATPC lower threshold and 10 dB. l You can set the ATPC upper threshold only when ATPC Automatic Threshold Enable Status is set to Disabled.
A-50
Issue 03 (2011-04-10)
Parameter ATPC Automatic Threshold Enable Status
Description l This parameter specifies whether the automatic threshold function is enabled. l If this parameter is set to Enabled, the equipment automatically uses the preset ATPC upper and lower thresholds according to the work mode of the radio link.
A.2.2 Parameter Description: Link Configuration_XPIC

This topic describes the parameters that are related to the XPIC function.
Navigation Path
1. 2. Select the NE from the Object Tree in the NE Explorer. Choose Configuration > Link Configuration from the Function Tree. Click the XPIC tab.

Parameter Group ID Polarization Direction-V Link ID-V Value Range Default Value Description This parameter indicates the ID of the work group. This parameter indicates the IF port to which the polarization direction V corresponds. This parameter indicates the link ID to which the polarization direction V corresponds. This parameter indicates the IF port to which the polarization direction H corresponds. This parameter indicates the link ID to which the polarization direction H corresponds.
Polarization Direction-H Link ID-H
Issue 03 (2011-04-10)
A-51
Parameter IF Channel Bandwidth
Value Range 28M 40M 56M
Default Value -
Description l IF Channel Bandwidth refers to the channel spacing of the corresponding radio links. l When this parameter is set to 56M or 40M, the high-power ODU must be used. l This parameter is set according to the planning information.
NOTE The IFX2 board does not support the value 40M.
Power to Be Received -V(dBm)
-90.0 to -20.0
-10.0
l This parameter is used to set the expected receive power of the ODU and is mainly used in the antenna alignment stage. After this parameter is set, the NE automatically enables the antenna misalignment indicating function. l When the antenna misalignment indicating function is enabled, if the actual receive power of the ODU is 3 dB lower than the power expected to be received, the ODU indicator on the IF board connected to the ODU blinks yellow (300 ms on, 300 ms off), indicating that the antenna is not aligned. l After the antenna alignment, after the state that the antenna is aligned lasts for 30 minutes, the NE automatically disables the antenna misalignment indicating function. l When this parameter takes the default value, the antenna misalignment indicating function is disabled. l This parameter is set according to the planning information.
A-52
Issue 03 (2011-04-10)
Parameter Power to Be Received -H(dBm)
Value Range -90.0 to -20.0
Default Value -10.0
Description l This parameter is used to set the expected receive power of the ODU and is mainly used in the antenna alignment stage. After this parameter is set, the NE automatically enables the antenna misalignment indicating function. l When the antenna misalignment indicating function is enabled, if the actual receive power of the ODU is 3 dB lower than the power expected to be received, the ODU indicator on the IF board connected to the ODU blinks yellow (300 ms on, 300 ms off), indicating that the antenna is not aligned. l After the antenna alignment, after the state that the antenna is aligned lasts for 30 minutes, the NE automatically disables the antenna misalignment indicating function. l When this parameter takes the default value, the antenna misalignment indicating function is disabled. l This parameter is set according to the planning information.
Maximum Transmit Power (dBm)
l This parameter specifies the maximum transmit power of the ODU. This parameter cannot be set to a value that exceeds the nominal power rang of the ODU in the guaranteed capacity modulation module. l This parameter is set to limit the maximum transmit power of the ODU within this preset range. l The maximum transmit power adjusted by using the ATPC function should not exceed this value. l This parameter is set according to the planning information.
Issue 03 (2011-04-10)
A-53
Value Range -
Default Value -
Description l This parameter indicates or specifies the transmit power of the ODU. This parameter cannot be set to a value that exceeds the nominal power range of the ODU. l It is recommended that you set the transmit power of the ODU to the same value at both ends of a radio link. l Consider the receive power of the ODU at the opposite end when you set this parameter. Ensure that the receive power of the ODU at the opposite end can ensure stable radio services. l This parameter is set according to the planning information.
Transmission Frequency(MHz)
l This parameter indicates or specifies the transmit frequency of the ODU, namely, the channel central frequency. l The value of this parameter must not be less than the sum of the lower TX frequency limit supported by the ODU and a half of the channel spacing, and must not be more than the difference between the upper TX frequency limit supported by the ODU and a half of the channel spacing. l The difference between the transmit frequencies of both the ends of a radio link should be one T/R spacing. l This parameter needs to be set according to the planning information.
A-54
Issue 03 (2011-04-10)
Parameter T/R Spacing(MHz)
Value Range -
Default Value -
Description l This parameter indicates or specifies the spacing between the transmit frequency and receive frequency of the ODU to prevent mutual interference between the transmitter and receiver. l If the ODU is a Tx high station, the transmit frequency is one T/R spacing higher than the receive frequency. If the ODU is a Tx low station, the transmit frequency is one T/R spacing lower than the receive frequency. l If the ODU supports only one T/R spacing, this parameter is set to 0, indicating that the T/R spacing supported by the ODU is used. l A valid T/R spacing value is determined by the ODU itself, and the T/R spacing should be set according to the technical specifications of the ODU. l The T/R spacing of the ODU should be set to the same value at both ends of a radio link.
Transmission Status
unmute mute
unmute
l This parameter indicates or specifies the transmit status of the ODU. l If this parameter is set to mute, the transmitter of the ODU does not work but can normally receive microwave signals. l If this parameter is set to unmute, the ODU can normally transmit and receive microwave signals. l In normal cases, this parameter is set to unmute.
Parameters for Hybrid/AM Configuration

Parameter Group ID Polarization direction Value Range Default Value Description This parameter indicates the ID of the work group. This parameter indicates the IF port to which the polarization direction H or the polarization direction V corresponds.
Issue 03 (2011-04-10)
A-55
Parameter AM Enable Status
Description l When AM Enable Status is set to Disabled, the radio link uses only the specified modulation scheme. In this case, you need to select Manually Specified Modulation Mode. l When AM Enable Status is set to Enabled, the radio link uses the corresponding modulation scheme according to the channel conditions. Hence, the Hybrid radio can ensure the reliable transmission of the E1 services and provide bandwidth adaptively for the Ethernet services when the AM function is enabled.
Modulation Mode of the Guarantee AM Capacity
QPSK 16QAM 32QAM 64QAM 128QAM 256QAM
This parameter specifies the highest-gain modulation scheme that the AM function supports. This parameter is set according to the planning information. Generally, the value of this parameter is determined by the bandwidth of the services that need to be transmitted over the Hybrid radio and the availability of the radio link that corresponds to this modulation scheme.
NOTE Modulation Mode of the Full AM Capacity must be higher than Modulation Mode of the Guarantee AM Capacity.
This parameter is valid only when AM Enable Status is set to Enabled. Modulation Mode of the Full AM Capacity QPSK 16QAM 32QAM 64QAM 128QAM 256QAM This parameter specifies the highest-gain modulation scheme that the AM function supports. This parameter is set according to the planning information. Generally, the value of this parameter is determined by the bandwidth of the services that need to be transmitted over the Hybrid radio and the availability of the radio link that corresponds to this modulation scheme.
This parameter is valid only when AM Enable Status is set to Enabled.
A-56
Issue 03 (2011-04-10)
Parameter Manually Specified Modulation Mode
Value Range QPSK 16QAM 32QAM 64QAM 128QAM 256QAM
Default Value QPSK
Description This parameter specifies the modulation scheme that the radio link uses for signal transmission. This parameter is valid only when AM Enable Status is set to Disabled.
Transmit-End Modulation Mode Receive-End Modulation Mode
Displays the modulation mode at the transmit end. Displays the modulation mode at the receive end.
Parameters for ATPC Management

Parameter Group ID ATPC Enable Status Value Range Disabled Enabled Default Value Description This parameter indicates the object to be set. l This parameter specifies whether the ATPC function is enabled. l If this parameter is set to Enabled and if the RSL at the receive end is 2 dB higher or lower than the central value between the ATPC upper threshold and the ATPC lower threshold at the receive end, the receiver notifies the transmitter to decrease or increase the transmit power until the RSL is within the range that is 2 dB higher or lower than the central value between the ATPC upper threshold and the ATPC lower threshold. l The settings of the ATPC attributes must be consistent at both ends of a radio link. l In the case of areas where fast fading severely affects the radio transmission, it is recommended that you set this parameter to Disabled. l During the commissioning process, set this parameter to Disabled to ensure that the transmit power is not changed. After the commissioning, re-set the ATPC attributes. ATPC Upper Threshold(dBm) l Set the central value between the ATPC upper threshold and the ATPC lower
Issue 03 (2011-04-10)
A-57
Parameter ATPC Lower Threshold(dBm)
Value Range -
Default Value -
Description threshold to a value for the expected receive power. l It is recommended that you set ATPC Upper Threshold(dBm) to the sum of the planned central value between the ATPC upper threshold and the ATPC lower threshold and 10 dB, and ATPC Lower Threshold(dBm) o the difference between the planned central value between the ATPC upper threshold and the ATPC lower threshold and 10 dB. l You can set this parameter only when ATPC Automatic Threshold Enable Status is set to Disabled. l This parameter specifies whether the ATPC automatic threshold function is enabled. l If this parameter is set to Enabled, the equipment automatically uses the preset ATPC upper and lower thresholds according to the work mode of the radio link. l If this parameter is set to Disabled, you need to manually set ATPC Upper Threshold(dBm) and ATPC Lower Threshold(dBm).
ATPC Automatic Threshold Enable Status
Disabled Enabled
A.2.3 Parameter Description: N+1 Protection_Create

This topic describes the parameters that are used for creating an IF N+1 protection group.
Navigation Path
1. 2. Select the NE from the Object Tree in the NE Explorer. Choose Configuration > N+1 Protection from the Function Tree. Click Create.
A-58
Issue 03 (2011-04-10)

Parameter WTR time(s) Value Range 300 to 720 Default Value 600 Description l This parameter specifies the wait-torestore (WTR) time. l When the time after the former working channel is restored to normal reaches the set WTR time, a revertive switching occurs. l It is recommended that you use the default value. Enabled Enabled Disabled Enabled l This parameter specifies whether the signal degradation switching function of N+1 protection is enabled. l When this parameter is set to Enabled, the signal degradation condition is considered as a trigger condition of protection switching. l It is recommended that you set this parameter to Enabled.
Slot Mapping Relation Parameters

Parameter Select Mapping Direction Value Range Work Unit Protection Unit Default Value Work Unit Description l This parameter specifies the mapping direction of N+1 protection. l This parameter is set according to the planning information. Select Mapping Way l In the case of N+1 protection, map N IF ports as Work Unit and map the remaining IF port as Protection Unit. l This parameter is set according to the planning information. Mapped Board This parameter indicates the working unit and protection unit that have been set.
A.2.4 Parameter Description: N+1 Protection

This topic describes the parameters that are related to IF N+1 protection.
Issue 03 (2011-04-10)
A-59
Navigation Path
1. Select the NE from the Object Tree in the NE Explorer. Choose Configuration > N+1 Protection from the Function Tree.
Protection Group Parameters

Parameter Protection Group ID WTR Time(s) Value Range 300 to 720 Default Value Description This parameter indicates the ID of the protection group. l This parameter indicates or specifies the WTR time. l When the time after the former working channel is restored to normal reaches the set WTR time, a revertive switching occurs. l It is recommended that you use the default value. SD Enable Enabled Disabled l This parameter indicates or specifies whether the SD switching function of N +1 protection is enabled. l When this parameter is set to Enabled, the SD condition is considered as a trigger condition of protection switching. l It is recommended that you set this parameter to Enabled. Protocol Status This parameter indicates the status of the switching control protocol.
Protection Unit Parameters

Parameter Protection Unit Line Value Range Default Value Description This parameter indicates the protection unit. This parameter indicates the information about the working board or protection board. This parameter indicates the switching state. This parameter indicates the protected unit. This parameter indicates the local end or remote end.
Switching Status Protected Unit Remote/Local End Indication
A-60
Issue 03 (2011-04-10)
A.2.5 Parameter: IF 1+1 Protection_Create

This topic describes the parameters that are used for creating an IF 1+1 protection group.
Navigation Path
1. 2. Select the NE from the Object Tree in the NE Explorer. Choose Configuration > IF 1+1 Protection from the Function Tree. Click Create.
Parameters
Parameter Working Mode Value Range HSB FD SD Default Value HSB Description l This parameter specifies the working mode of the IF 1+1 protection. l When Working Mode is set to HSB, the equipment provides a 1+1 hot standby configuration for the IF board and ODU at both ends of each hop of a radio link to realize the protection. l When Working Mode is set to FD, the system uses two channels that have a frequency spacing between them, to transmit and receive the same signal. The remote end selects signals from the two received signals. With FD protection, the impact of the fading on signal transmission is reduced. l When Working Mode is set to SD, the system uses two antennas that have a space distance between them, to receive the same signal. The equipment selects signals from the two received signals. With SD protection, the impact of the fading on signal transmission is reduced. l The FD mode and SD mode are compatible with the HSB switching function. l This parameter is set according to the planning information.
Issue 03 (2011-04-10)
A-61
Parameter Revertive Mode
Value Range Revertive Mode Non-Revertive
Default Value Revertive Mode
Description l This parameter specifies the revertive mode of the IF 1+1 protection. l When Revertive Mode is set to Revertive Mode, the NE that is in the switching state releases the switching and enables the former working channel to return to the normal state some time after the former working channel is restored to normal. It is recommended that you set this parameter to Revertive Mode. l When Revertive Mode is set to NonRevertive, the NE that is in the switching state keeps the current state unchanged unless another switching occurs even though the former working channel is restored to normal.
WTR Time(s)
300 to 720
600
l This parameter specifies the wait-torestore (WTR) time. l When the time after the former working channel is restored to normal reaches the set WTR Time(s), a revertive switching occurs. l You can set WTR Time(s) only when Revertive Mode is set to Revertive Mode. It is recommended that you use the default value.
A-62
Issue 03 (2011-04-10)
Parameter Enable Reverse Switching
Description l This parameter indicates whether the reverse switching function is enabled. l When both the main IF board and the standby IF board at the sink end report service alarms, they send the alarms to the source end by using the MWRDI overhead in the microwave frame. When Enable Reverse Switching at the source end is set to Enabled and the reverse switching conditions are met, the IF 1+1 protection switching occurs at the source end. l Enable Reverse Switching is valid only when Working Mode is set to HSB or SD. l Generally, if Working Mode is set to HSB, it is recommended that you set Enable Reverse Switching to Disabled; if Working Mode is set to SD, it is recommended that you set Enable Reverse Switching to Enabled.
Working Board Protection Board
This parameter specifies the working board of the protection group. This parameter specifies the protection board of the protection group.
NOTE
Each of the parameters Working Mode, Revertive Mode, WTR Time(s), and Enable Reverse Switching must be set to the same value at both ends of a radio hop.
A.2.6 Parameter Description: IF 1+1 Protection

This topic describes the parameters that are related to IF 1+1 protection.
Navigation Path
1. Select the NE from the Object Tree in the NE Explorer. Choose Configuration > IF 1+1 Protection from the Function Tree.

Parameter Protection Group ID
Issue 03 (2011-04-10)
Value Range -
Default Value -
Description This parameter indicates the ID of the protection group.

A-63
Parameter Working Mode
Value Range HSB FD SD
Default Value -
Description l This parameter indicates the working mode of the created IF 1+1 protection group. l In HSB mode, the equipment provides a 1+1 hot standby configuration for the IF board and ODU at both ends of each hop of a radio link to realize the protection. l In FD mode, the system uses two channels that have a frequency spacing between them, to transmit and receive the same signal. The remote end selects signals from the two received signals. With FD protection, the impact of the fading on signal transmission is reduced. l In SD mode, the system uses two antennas that have a space distance between them, to receive the same signal. The equipment selects signals from the two received signals. With SD protection, the impact of the fading on signal transmission is reduced. l The FD mode and SD mode are compatible with the HSB switching function. l This parameter is set according to the planning information.
Revertive Mode
Revertive Mode Non-Revertive Mode
l This parameter indicates or specifies the revertive mode of the protection group. l When this parameter is set to Revertive Mode, the NE that is in the switching state releases the switching and enables the former working channel to return to the normal state some time after the former working channel is restored to normal. l When this parameter is set to NonRevertive Mode, the NE that is in the switching state keeps the current state unchanged unless another switching occurs even though the former working channel is restored to normal. l It is recommended that you set this parameter to Revertive Mode.
A-64
Issue 03 (2011-04-10)
Parameter WTR Time(s)
Default Value -
Description l This parameter indicates or specifies the WTR time. l When the time after the former working channel is restored to normal reaches the set WTR time, a revertive switching occurs. l You can set WTR Time(s) only when Revertive Mode is set to Revertive Mode. l It is recommended that you use the default value.
Enable Reverse Switching
Enabled Disabled
l This parameter indicates or specifies whether the reverse switching function is enabled. l When both the main IF board and the standby IF board at the sink end report service alarms, they send the alarms to the source end by using the MWRDI overhead in the microwave frame. When this parameter at the source end is set to Enabled and the reverse switching conditions are met, the IF 1+1 protection switching occurs at the source end. l This parameter is valid only when Working Mode is set to HSB or SD.
Switching Status of Device
l This parameter indicates the switching state on the equipment side. l Unknown is displayed when the switching state on the channel side is not queried or not obtained after a query.
Switching Status of Channel
l This parameter indicates the switching state on the channel side. l Unknown is displayed when the switching state on the channel side is not queried or not obtained after a query.
Active Board of Device Active Board of Channel
This parameter indicates the current working board on the equipment side. This parameter indicates the current working board on the channel side.
NOTE
Each of the parameters Working Mode, Revertive Mode, and WTR Time(s) must be set to the same value at both ends of a radio hop.
Issue 03 (2011-04-10)
A-65

Parameter Unit Slot Mapping Relation Working Status of Device Signal Status of Channel Value Range Default Value Description This parameter indicates the working board and protection board. This parameter indicates the names and ports of the working board and protection board. This parameter indicates the working state on the equipment side. This parameter indicates the status of the link signal.
A.2.7 Parameter: Link Configuration_IF/ODU Configuration

This topic describes the parameters that are used for configuring the IF/ODU.
Navigation Path
1. 2. In the NE Explorer, select the NE and then choose Configuration > Link Configuration from the Function Tree. Click the IF/ODU Configuration tab.
A-66
Issue 03 (2011-04-10)
Parameters for Configuring the IF

Parameter Work Mode Value Range 1,4E1,7MHz,QPSK 2,4E1,3.5MHz, 16QAM 3,8E1,14MHz,QPS K 4,8E1,7MHz, 16QAM 5,16E1,28MHz,QP SK 6,16E1,14MHz, 16QAM 7,STM-1,28MHz, 128QAM 8,E3,28MHz,QPSK 9,E3,14MHz, 16QAM 10,22E1,14MHz, 32QAM 11,26E1,14MHz, 64QAM 12,32E1,14MHz, 128QAM 13,35E1,28MHz, 16QAM 14,44E1,28MHz, 32QAM 15,53E1,28MHz, 64QAM Default Value Description l This parameter indicates or specifies the work mode of the radio link in "work mode number, service capacity, channel spacing, modulation mode" format. l This parameter is set according to the planning information. The work modes of the IF boards at the two ends of a radio link must be the same.
NOTE The IF1 board supports this parameter.
Issue 03 (2011-04-10)
A-67
Parameter Link ID
Default Value 1
Description l Link ID indicates or specifies the ID of a radio link. As the identifier of a radio link, this parameter is used to prevent incorrect connections of radio links between sites. l If the value of Received Radio Link ID does not match the preset value of Link ID at the local end, the local end inserts the AIS signal to the downstream direction of the service. At the same time, the local end reports MW_LIM alarm to the NMS, indicating that the link IDs do not match. l Link ID is set according to the planning information. Each radio link of an NE should have a unique link ID, and the link IDs at both ends of a radio link should be the same.
Received Link ID
l This parameter indicates the received ID of the radio link. l If the value of Received Radio Link ID does not match the preset value of Radio Link ID at the local end, the local end inserts the AIS signal to the downstream direction of the service. At the same time, the local end reports an alarm to the NMS, indicating that the link IDs do not match. l When the radio link becomes faulty, this parameter is displayed as an invalid value.
IF Service Type
Hybrid(Native E1 +ETH) Hybrid(Native STM-1+ETH) SDH
Hybrid(Native E1 +ETH)
l Displays or specifies the type of services carried by the IF board. l If the Integrated IP radio transmits Native E1 services, set this parameter to Hybrid(Native E1+ETH). l If the Integrated IP radio transmits Native STM-1 services, set this parameter to Hybrid(Native STM-1 +ETH). l If the SDH radio transmits SDH services, set this parameter to SDH.
NOTE The ISU2 and ISX2 boards support this parameter.
A-68
Issue 03 (2011-04-10)
Parameter IF Channel Bandwidth
Value Range 7M 14M 28M 40M 56M
Default Value -
Description IF Channel Bandwidth indicates the channel spacing of the corresponding radio link. This parameter is set according to the planning information.
NOTE l This parameter is not applicable to the IF1 board. l The IFU2 board does not support the value 40M. l The IFX2 board does not support the values 7M, 14M, and 40M. l The ISX2 board supports the channel spacings of 7M and 14M only when the XPIC function is disabled.
AM Mode AM Enable Status
Disabled Enabled
Disabled
This parameter is not applicable to the OptiX RTN 980. l When AM Enable Status is set to Disabled, the radio link uses only the specified modulation scheme. In this case, you need to select Manually Specified Modulation Mode. l When AM Enable Status is set to Enabled, the radio link uses the corresponding modulation scheme according to the channel conditions. l Hence, the Integrated IP radio can ensure the reliable transmission of the E1 services and provide bandwidth adaptively for the Ethernet services when the AM function is enabled. l The ISX2/ISU2 does not support the AM function when IF Service Type is SDH.
NOTE This parameter is not applicable to the IF1 board.
Manually Specified Modulation Mode
QPSK
l This parameter specifies the modulation scheme that the radio link uses for signal transmission. l This parameter is valid only when AM Enable Status is set to Disabled.
Issue 03 (2011-04-10)
A-69
Parameter Modulation Mode of the Guarantee AM Capacity
Default Value QPSK
Description l This parameter is valid only when AM Enable Status is set to Enabled. l Modulation Mode of the Guarantee AM Capacity specifies the lowest-gain modulation scheme that the AM function supports. This parameter is set according to the planning information. Generally, the value of this parameter is determined by the service transmission bandwidth that the Hybrid radio must ensure and the availability of the radio link that corresponds to this modulation scheme.
Modulation Mode of the Full AM Capacity
QPSK
l This parameter is valid only when AM Enable Status is set to Enabled. l Modulation Mode of the Full AM Capacity specifies the highest-gain modulation scheme that the AM function supports. This parameter is set according to the planning information. Generally, the value of this parameter is determined by the bandwidth of the services that need to be transmitted over the Hybrid radio and the availability of the radio link that corresponds to this modulation scheme.
NOTE Modulation Mode of the Full AM Capacity must be higher than Modulation Mode of the Guarantee AM Capacity. NOTE This parameter is not applicable to the IF1 board.
STM-1 Capacity
l Specifies the STM-1 capacity of the IF board. l This parameter is available only when IF Service Type is set to Hybrid(Native STM-1+ETH) and SDH. l If IF Service Type is Hybrid(Native STM-1+ETH), this parameter can be set to 0 or 1. l If IF Service Type is SDH, this parameter can be set to 1 or 2.
NOTE The IF1, IFU2, and IFX2 boards do not support this parameter.
A-70
Issue 03 (2011-04-10)
Parameter Guarantee E1 Capacity
Value Range -
Default Value -
Description l If AM Enable Status is set to Enabled, this parameter needs to be set according to IF Channel Bandwidth, Modulation Mode of the Guarantee AM Capacity, and the actually transmitted services. l If AM Enable Status is set to Disabled, this parameter needs to be set according to IF Channel Bandwidth, Manually Specified Modulation Mode, and the actually transmitted services. l For the ISU2 and ISX2 boards, this parameter is available when IF Service Type is Hybrid(Native E1+ETH).
Guarantee E1 Capacity Range Data Service Bandwidth(Mbit/ s) Enable E1 Priority
Displays the E1 capacity range of the IF board in guarantee capacity modulation mode. Displays the data service bandwidth of the IF board. l This parameter specifies whether to enable the E1 priority function. l This parameter is valid only when AM Enable Status is set to Enabled. l For the ISU2 and ISX2 boards, this parameter is available when IF Service Type is Hybrid(Native E1+ETH).
Disabled Enabled
Disabled
Issue 03 (2011-04-10)
A-71
Parameter Full E1 Capacity
Value Range -
Default Value -
Description l This parameter specifies the number of transmitted E1 services in Modulation Mode of the Full AM Capacity. l This parameter is valid if Enable E1 Priority is set to Enabled. l E1 service bandwidth in full capacity mode Service bandwidth in full capacity mode - Service bandwidth in guarantee capacity mode + E1 service bandwidth in guarantee capacity mode. In addition, the number of E1 services in full capacity modulation mode should be smaller than or equal to the maximum number of E1 services in full capacity modulation mode. l The Full E1 Capacity must be set to the same value at both ends of a radio link. l For the ISU2 and ISX2 boards, this parameter is available when IF Service Type is Hybrid(Native E1+ETH).
Full E1 Capacity Range
Displays the E1 capacity range of the IF board in full capacity modulation mode.
Parameters for Configuring the RF

Parameter TX Frequency (MHz) Value Range Default Value Description l This parameter indicates or specifies the transmit frequency of the ODU, namely, the channel central frequency. l The value of this parameter must not be less than the sum of the lower TX frequency limit supported by the ODU and a half of the channel spacing, and must not be more than the difference between the upper TX frequency limit supported by the ODU and a half of the channel spacing. l The difference between the transmit frequencies of both the ends of a radio link should be one T/R spacing. l This parameter needs to be set according to the planning information.
A-72
Issue 03 (2011-04-10)
Parameter Range of TX Frequency(MHz)
Value Range -
Default Value -
Description l This parameter indicates the range of the transmit frequency of the ODU. l The Range of Frequency(MHz) depends on the specifications of the ODU.
Actual TX Frequency(MHz) Actual RX Frequency(MHz) T/R Spacing(MHz)
This parameter indicates the actual transmit frequency of the ODU. This parameter indicates the actual receive frequency of the ODU. l This parameter specifies the spacing between the transmit frequency and the receive frequency of an ODU to prevent interference between them. l If Station Type of the ODU is TX high, the TX frequency is one T/R spacing higher than the receive frequency. If Station Type of the ODU is TX low, the TX frequency is one T/R spacing lower than the receive frequency. l If the ODU supports only one T/R spacing, set this parameter to 0, indicating that the T/R spacing supported by the ODU is used. l A valid T/R spacing value is determined by the ODU itself, and the T/R spacing should be set according to the technical specifications of the ODU. l The T/R spacing of the ODU should be set to the same value at both the ends of a radio link.
Actual T/R Spacing(MHz)
This parameter indicates the actual T/R spacing of the ODU.
Issue 03 (2011-04-10)
A-73
Parameters for Configuring the Power

Parameter TX Power(dBm) Value Range Default Value Description l This parameter indicates or specifies the transmit power of the ODU. This parameter cannot be set to a value that exceeds the nominal power range of the ODU. l This parameter cannot take a value greater than the preset value of Maximum Transmit Power(dBm). l It is recommended that you set the transmit power of the ODU to the same value at both ends of a radio link. l Consider the receive power of the ODU at the opposite end when you set this parameter. Ensure that the receive power of the ODU at the opposite end can ensure stable radio services. l This parameter needs to be set according to the planning information. Range of TX Power(dBm) Actual TX Power (dBm) This parameter indicates the range of the transmit power of the ODU. l This parameter indicates the actual transmit power of the ODU. l If the ATPC function is enabled, the queried actual transmit power may be different from the preset value.
A-74
Issue 03 (2011-04-10)
Parameter Power to Be Received(dBm)
Value Range -90.0 to -20.0
Default Value -10.0
Description l Power to Be Received(dBm) is used to set the expected receive power of the ODU and is mainly used in the antenna alignment stage. After this parameter is set, the NE automatically enables the antenna misalignment indicating function. l When the antenna misalignment indicating function is enabled, When the antenna non-alignment indication function is enabled, if the actual receive power of the ODU is 3 dB lower than the power expected to be received, the ODU indicator on the IF board connected to the ODU blinks yellow (300 ms on, 300 ms off), indicating that the antenna is not aligned. l After the antenna alignment, after the state that the antenna is aligned lasts for 30 minutes, the NE automatically disables the antenna misalignment indicating function. l When Power to Be Received(dBm) takes the default value, the antenna misalignment indicating function is disabled. l This parameter is set according to the planning information.
Actual RX Power (dBm) TX Status
Unmute Mute
Unmute
This parameter indicates the actual receive power of the ODU. l This parameter indicates or specifies the transmit status of the ODU. l When this parameter is set to Mute, the transmitter of the ODU does not work but can normally receive microwave signals. l When this parameter is set to Unmute, the ODU can normally transmit and receive microwave signals. l In normal cases, it is recommended that you set TX Status to unmute.
Actual TX Status
This parameter indicates the actual transmit status of the ODU.
Issue 03 (2011-04-10)
A-75
Equipment Information
Parameter Frequency(GHz) Equip Type Value Range Default Value Description This parameter indicates the frequency band where the ODU operates. l This parameter indicates the equipment type of the ODU. l PDH and SDH indicate the transmission capacity only and are irrelevant to the type of transmitted service. Station Type l This parameter indicates whether the ODU is a Tx high station or a Tx low station. l The transmit frequency of a Tx high station is one T/R spacing higher than the transmit frequency of a Tx low station. Produce SN This parameter indicates the manufacturing serial number and the manufacturer code of the ODU. This parameter indicates the level of the output power of the ODU.
Transmission Power Type
A.3 Multiplex Section Protection Parameters

This topic describes the parameters that are related to multiplex section protection (MSP). A.3.1 Parameter Description: Linear MSP_Creation This topic describes the parameters that are used for creating linear MSP groups. A.3.2 Parameter Description: Linear MSP This topic describes the parameters that are related to linear MSP groups. A.3.3 Parameter Description: Ring MSP_Creation This topic describes the parameters that are used for creating ring MSP groups. A.3.4 Parameter Description: Ring MSP This topic describes the parameters that are related to ring MSP.
A.3.1 Parameter Description: Linear MSP_Creation

This topic describes the parameters that are used for creating linear MSP groups.
Navigation Path
1. 2.
A-76
Select the NE from the Object Tree in the NE Explorer. Choose Configuration > Linear MS from the Function Tree. Click Create.

Parameter Protection Type Value Range 1+1 Protection 1:N Protection Default Value 1+1 Protection Description l This parameter specifies the protection type of the linear MSP group. l In the case of 1+1 linear MSP, one working channel and one protection channel are required. When the working channel fails, the service is switched from the working channel to the protection channel. l In the case of 1:N linear MSP, N working channels and one protection channel are required. Normal services are transmitted on the working channels and extra services are transmitted on the protection channel. When one working channel fails, the services are switched from this working channel to the protection channel, and the extra services are interrupted. l If extra services need to be transmitted or several working channels are required, select 1:N Protection. l This parameter is set according to the planning information.
Issue 03 (2011-04-10)
A-77
Parameter Switching Mode
Value Range Single-Ended Switching Dual-Ended Switching
Default Value Single-Ended Switching (1 +1 Protection) Dual-Ended Switching (1:N Protection)
Description l This parameter specifies the switching mode of the linear MSP. l In single-ended mode, the switching occurs only at one end and the state of the other end remains unchanged. l In dual-ended mode, the switching occurs at both ends at the same time. l If the linear MSP type is set to 1:N Protection, Switching Mode can be set to DualEnded Switching only.
Revertive Mode
Non-Revertive Revertive
Non-Revertive (1+1 Protection) Revertive (1:N Protection)
l This parameter specifies the revertive mode of the linear MSP. l When this parameter is set to Revertive, the NE that is in the switching state releases the switching and enables the former working channel to return to the normal state some time after the former working channel is restored to normal. l When this parameter is set to Non-Revertive, the NE that is in the switching state keeps the current state unchanged unless another switching occurs even though the former working channel is restored to normal. l It is recommended that you set this parameter to Revertive. l If the linear MSP type is set to 1:N Protection, Revertive Mode can be set to Revertive only.
A-78
Issue 03 (2011-04-10)
Default Value 600
Description l This parameter specifies the WTR time. l When the time after the former working channel is restored to normal reaches the preset WTR time, a revertive switching occurs. l You can set WTR Time(s) only when Revertive Mode is set to Revertive. l It is recommended that you use the default value.
SD Enable
Enabled Disabled
Enabled
l This parameter indicates or specifies whether the switching at the SD alarm of the linear MSP is enabled. l When this parameter is set to Enabled, the B2_SD alarm is considered as a switching condition. l It is recommended that you set this parameter to Enabled.
Protocol Type
New Protocol Restructure Protocol
New Protocol
l The new protocol is supported at the early stage, and the mainstream protocol version is used currently. l The restructure protocol optimizes the new protocol and provides better measures to protect the new protocol, thus ensuring that the new protocol runs in a better manner. l The new protocol is more mature, and the restructure protocol complies with the standard. It is recommended that you use the new protocol. l You must ensure that the interconnected NEs run the protocols of the same type.
Issue 03 (2011-04-10)
A-79

Parameter Select Mapping Direction Value Range West Working Unit West Protection Unit Default Value West Working Unit Description This parameter specifies the mapping direction of the linear MSP.
Select Mapping Mode
l This parameter specifies the mapping board and port in the mapping direction. l If the protection type is set to 1+1 Protection, only one line port can be mapped as West Working Unit. l Only one line port can be mapped as West Protection Unit. l The line port mapped as West Protection Unit and the line port mapped as West Working Unit should be configured for different boards if possible.
Mapped Board
This parameter indicates the preset slot mapping relations, including the mapping direction and the corresponding mapping mode.
A.3.2 Parameter Description: Linear MSP

This topic describes the parameters that are related to linear MSP groups.
Navigation Path
Select the NE from the Object Tree in the NE Explorer. Choose Configuration > Linear MS from the Function Tree.

Parameter Protection Group ID Value Range Default Value Description This parameter indicates the ID of the protection group.
A-80
Issue 03 (2011-04-10)
Parameter Protection Type
Value Range -
Default Value -
Description l This parameter indicates the protection type of the linear MSP group. l In the case of 1+1 linear MSP, one working channel and one protection channel are required. When the working channel fails, the service is switched from the working channel to the protection channel. l In the case of 1:N linear MSP, N working channels and one protection channel are required. Normal services are transmitted on the working channels and extra services are transmitted on the protection channel. When one working channel fails, the services are switched from this working channel to the protection channel, and the extra services are interrupted. l If extra services need to be transmitted or several working channels are required, select 1:N Protection.
Switching Mode
Single-Ended Switching Dual-Ended Switching
l This parameter indicates or specifies the switching mode of the linear MSP. l In single-ended mode, the switching occurs only at one end and the state of the other end remains unchanged. l In dual-ended mode, the switching occurs at both ends at the same time. l If the linear MSP type is set to 1:N Protection, Switching Mode can be set to Dual-Ended Switching only.
Issue 03 (2011-04-10)
A-81
Value Range Non-Revertive Revertive
Default Value -
Description l This parameter indicates or specifies the revertive mode of the linear MSP. l When this parameter is set to Revertive, the NE that is in the switching state releases the switching and enables the former working channel to return to the normal state some time after the former working channel is restored to normal. l When this parameter is set to NonRevertive, the NE that is in the switching state keeps the current state unchanged unless another switching occurs even though the former working channel is restored to normal. l It is recommended that you set this parameter to Revertive. l If the linear MSP type is set to 1:N Protection, Revertive Mode can be set to Revertive only.
WTR Time(s)
300 to 720
l This parameter indicates or specifies the WTR time. l When the time after the former working channel is restored to normal reaches the preset WTR time, a revertive switching occurs. l You can set WTR Time(s) only when Revertive Mode is set to Revertive. l It is recommended that you use the default value.
SD Enable
Enabled Disabled
l This parameter indicates or specifies whether the reverse switching function is enabled. l When this parameter is set to Enabled, the B2_SD alarm is considered as a switching condition. l It is recommended that you set this parameter to Enabled.
A-82
Issue 03 (2011-04-10)
Parameter Protocol Type
Value Range New Protocol Restructure Protocol
Default Value -
Description l The new protocol is supported at the early stage, and the mainstream protocol version is used currently. l The restructure protocol optimizes the new protocol and provides better measures to protect the new protocol, thus ensuring that the new protocol runs in a better manner. l You must ensure that the interconnected NEs run the protocols of the same type. l The new protocol is more mature, and the restructure protocol complies with the standard. It is recommended that you use the new protocol.
Protocol Status Protection Subnet
This parameter indicates the protocol status of the linear MSP. This parameter displays the protection subnet where the MS protection is configured.

Parameter Protection Unit Value Range Default Value Description This parameter indicates that which of the units, namely, the west protection unit or the west working unit, is currently in the protection status. This parameter indicates the west protection unit and the west working unit of the linear MSP. This parameter indicates the switching status of the line. This parameter indicates the working channel protected by the current protection channel. When Switching Mode is set to DualEnded Switching, the central office end that issues the switching command is displayed.
West Line
West Switching Status Protected Unit
Remote/Local End Indication
Issue 03 (2011-04-10)
A-83
A.3.3 Parameter Description: Ring MSP_Creation

This topic describes the parameters that are used for creating ring MSP groups.
Navigation Path
1. 2. 3. In the NE Explorer, select the required NE from the Object Tree and choose Configuration > Ring MS from the Function Tree. Click Create. A dialog box is displayed, prompting for confirmation. Click OK.

Parameter Level Value Range STM-4 Default Value STM-4 Description Specifies the transmission level of ring MSP services. The parameter value is always STM-4. Specifies the ring MSP protection type. The parameter value is always 2-fiber Bidirectional Multiplex Section. Specifies the node ID that the local NE uses on the MSP ring. Node IDs of NEs on the ring must be different from each other. Specifies the node ID of the NE that is connected to the west line board on the local NE. The parameter value must be different from Local Node. Specifies the node ID of the NE that is connected to the east line board on the local NE. The parameter value must be different from Local Node. l Specifies the WTR time for the local NE. After the working channel recovers, services are switched back from the protection channel to the working channel when the WTR time expires. l Prevents frequent service switches. The default value is recommended.
Protection Type
2-fiber Bidirectional Multiplex Section 0-15
2-fiber Bidirectional Multiplex Section 0
Local Node
West Node
0-15
East Node
0-15
WTR Time(s)
300-720
600
A-84
Issue 03 (2011-04-10)
Parameter SD Enable
Description l Specifies whether the B2_SD alarm on the local NE functions as a switching trigger condition. When the parameter value is Enabled, the B2_SD alarm on the local NE functions as a switching trigger condition. l It is recommended that you set this parameter to Enabled.
Protocol Type
New Protocol Restructure Protocol
New Protocol
l The new MSP protocol is supported from an early stage, and is still widely used. l Compared with the new MSP protocol, the restructure MSP protocol is optimized and more stable, incorporating better protection measures. l The new MSP protocol has higher technology maturity than the restructure MSP protocol, and therefore is generally recommended. The restructure MSP protocol, however, features higher standard compliance than the new MSP protocol. Therefore, the restructure MSP protocol is used when the new MSP protocol fails to support interconnection between Huawei RTN equipment and third-party equipment. l Two interconnected NEs must use the same MSP protocol type.
Parameters for Slot Mapping Relationships

Parameter Select Mapping Direction Select Mapping Mode Value Range West Line 1 East Line 1 Default Value West Line 1 Description Specifies the mapping direction of a member in a ring MSP protection group. l Specifies the mapped board and port in the mapping direction. l It is recommended that you map the SL4D-1 port to West Line 1 and map the SL4D-2 port to East Line 1. Mapped Board Displays the configured slot mapping relationship, including the mapping direction and the mapping mode.
Issue 03 (2011-04-10)
A-85
A.3.4 Parameter Description: Ring MSP

This topic describes the parameters that are related to ring MSP.
Navigation Path
In the NE Explorer, select the required NE from the Object Tree and choose Configuration > Ring MS from the Function Tree.

Parameter Protection Group ID Level Value Range Default Value Description Displays the ID of a ring MSP protection group. Displays the transmission level of ring MSP services. The parameter value is always STM-4. Displays the ring MSP protection type. The parameter value is always 2-fiber Bidirectional Multiplex Section. Displays the node ID that the local NE uses on the MSP ring. Displays the node ID of the NE that is connected to the west line board on the local NE. Displays the node ID of the NE that is connected to the east line board on the local NE. Displays the wait-to-restore (WTR) time of the local NE. After the working channel is restored, revertive switching occurs when the WTR time expires. Displays whether SD Enable is Enabled for the local NE. If SD Enable is Enabled, the B2_SD alarm is regarded as a switching trigger condition.
Protection Type
Local Node West Node
East Node
WTR Time(s)
SD Enable
A-86
Issue 03 (2011-04-10)
Parameter Protocol Type
Value Range -
Default Value -
Description l Displays the protocol type used by the local NE. l The new MSP protocol is supported from an early stage, and is still widely used. l Compared with the new MSP protocol, the restructure MSP protocol is optimized and more stable, incorporating better protection measures.
Protocol Status Protection Subnet
Displays the current protocol status of the local NE. Displays the current protection subnet.
Parameters for Slot Mapping Relationships

Parameter Mapping Direction Slot Mapping Switching Status Value Range Default Value Description Displays the direction of an MSP ring. Displays the slot mapping relationship in a ring MSP protection group. Displays the current switching status of the local NE.
A.4 SDH/PDH Service Parameters

This topic describes the parameters that are related to SDH/PDH services. A.4.1 Parameter Description: SDH Service Configuration_Creation This parameter describes the parameters that are used for creating point-to-point crossconnections. A.4.2 Parameter Description: SDH Service Configuration_SNCP Service Creation This topic describes the parameters that are used for creating SNCP services. A.4.3 Parameter Description: SDH Service Configuration_Converting Normal Services Into SNCP Services This topic describes the parameters that are used for converting normal services into SNCP services. A.4.4 Parameter Description: SDH Service Configuration This topic describes the parameters that are used for configuring SDH services (namely, configuring cross-connections). A.4.5 Parameter Description: SNCP Service Control This topic describes the parameters that are used for controlling SNCP services.
A.4.6 Parameter Description: TU_AIS Insertion This section describes the parameters for TU_AIS insertion.
A.4.1 Parameter Description: SDH Service Configuration_Creation

This parameter describes the parameters that are used for creating point-to-point crossconnections.
Navigation Path
1. 2. 3. Select the NE from the Object Tree in the NE Explorer. Choose Configuration > SDH Service Configuration from the Function Tree. Click Options to change the VC-12 timeslot numbering policy used by the crossconnection. Click Create.
Parameters
Parameter Level Value Range VC12 VC3 VC4 Default Value VC12 Description l This parameter specifies the level of the service to be created. l If the service is an E1 service or a data service that is bound with VC-12 channels, set this parameter to VC12. l If the service is a data service that is bound with VC-3 channels, set this parameter to VC3. l If all the services on a VC-4 channel pass through the NE, set this parameter to VC4. Direction Bidirectional Unidirectional Bidirectional l When this parameter is set to Unidirectional, create only the crossconnections from the service source to the service sink. l When this parameter is set to Bidirectional, create the crossconnections from the service source to the service sink and the crossconnections from the service sink to the service source. l In normal cases, it is recommended that you set this parameter to Bidirectional. Source Slot This parameter specifies the slot of the service source.
A-88
Issue 03 (2011-04-10)
Parameter Source VC4
Value Range -
Default Value -
Description l This parameter specifies the number of the VC-4 channel where the service source is located. l This parameter cannot be set when Source Slot is set to the slot of the tributary board.
Source Timeslot Range(e.g.1,3-6)
l This parameter indicates the timeslot range of the service source. l This parameter can be set to a number or several numbers. When setting this parameter to several numbers, use the comma (,) to separate the discrete numbers, or use the endash (-) to represent a consecutive number. For example, the numbers 1, and 3-6 indicate 1, 3, 4, 5, and 6. l This parameter is set according to the planning information.
Sink Slot Sink VC4
This parameter specifies the slot of the service sink. l This parameter specifies the number of the VC-4 channel where the service sink is located. l This parameter cannot be set when Sink Slot is set to the slot of the tributary board.
Sink Timeslot Range(e.g.1,3-6)
l This parameter specifies the timeslot range of the service sink. l This parameter can be set to a number or several numbers. When setting this parameter to several numbers, use the comma (,) to separate the discrete numbers, or use the endash (-) to represent a consecutive number. For example, the numbers 1, and 3-6 indicate 1, 3, 4, 5, and 6. l This parameter is set according to the planning information.
Issue 03 (2011-04-10)
A-89
Parameter E1 Priority
Value Range High Low None
Default Value -
Description l This parameter specifies the priority of an E1 service. This parameter is available only if the E1 priority function is enabled for the ports configured in the cross-connections. l If E1 Priority is set to High, transmission of the E1 service is ensured in any modulation scheme. l If E1 Priority is set to Low, transmission of the E1 service is ensured only in fullcapacity modulation scheme l If the service priority is not specified during service creation, E1 Priority is None. In this case, the E1 priority of a service needs to be changed after the service is created.
Activate Immediately
Yes No
Yes
l This parameter specifies whether to immediately activate the configured service. l To immediately deliver the configured SDH service to the NE, set this parameter to Yes.
A.4.2 Parameter Description: SDH Service Configuration_SNCP Service Creation

This topic describes the parameters that are used for creating SNCP services.
Navigation Path
1. 2. 3. Select the NE from the Object Tree in the NE Explorer. Choose Configuration > SDH Service Configuration from the Function Tree. Click Options to change the VC-12 timeslot numbering policy used by the crossconnection. Click Create SNCP Service.

Parameter Service Type Value Range SNCP Default Value SNCP Description This parameter indicates that the type of the service to be created is SNCP.
A-90
Issue 03 (2011-04-10)
Parameter Direction
Value Range Bidirectional Unidirectional
Default Value Bidirectional
Description l When this parameter is set to Unidirectional, create only the crossconnections from the SNCP service source to the SNCP service sink. l When this parameter is set to Bidirectional, create the crossconnections from the SNCP service source to the service sink and the crossconnections from the SNCP service sink to the service source. l In normal cases, it is recommended that you set this parameter to Bidirectional.
Level
VC12 VC3 VC4
VC12
l This parameter specifies the level of the SCNP service to be created. l If the service is an E1 service or a data service that is bound with VC-12 channels, set this parameter to VC12. l If the service is a data service that is bound with VC-3 channels, set this parameter to VC3. l If all the services on a VC-4 channel pass through the NE, set this parameter to VC4.
Issue 03 (2011-04-10)
A-91
Parameter Hold-off Time (100ms)
Default Value 0
Description l This parameter specifies the duration of the hold-off time. l When a line is faulty, SNCP switching can be performed on the NE after a delay of time to prevent the situation where the NE performs SNCP switching and other protection switching at the same time. l Hold-off Time(100ms) is generally set to prevent SNCP protection switching, when SNCP works with N+1 protection. Hold-off Time(100ms) must be longer than the switching time of any protection mode that works with SNCP. Generally, Hold-off Time(100ms) is set to 200 ms. l When SNCP works with 1+1 FD/SD, trigger conditions for HSM switching or SNCP switching trigger HSM switching but do not trigger SNCP switching. Therefore, Hold-off Time(100ms) does not need to be set in this case. l The switching time of 1+1 HSB/FD/SD protection is much longer than that of SNCP. Therefore, to shorten service interruptions, it is recommended that you do not set Hold-off Time(100ms) when SNCP works with 1+1 HSB/FD/SD protection. l If only the SNCP scheme is available, it is recommended that you set the hold-off time to 0.
Revertive Mode
Non-Revertive
l This parameter specifies whether to switch the service to the original working channel after the fault is rectified. l If this parameter is set to Revertive, the service is switched from the protection channel to the original working channel. If this parameter is set to NonRevertive, the service is not switched from the protection channel to the original working channel. l It is recommended that you set this parameter to Revertive.
A-92
Issue 03 (2011-04-10)
Default Value 600
Source Slot Source VC4
This parameter specifies the slot of the service source. l This parameter specifies the number of the VC-4 channel where the service source is located. l This parameter cannot be set when Source Slot is set to the slot of the tributary board.
Sink Slot Sink VC4
Issue 03 (2011-04-10)
A-93
Parameter Sink Timeslot Range(e.g.1,3-6)
Value Range -
Default Value -
Description l This parameter specifies the timeslot range of the service sink. l This parameter can be set to a number or several numbers. When setting this parameter to several numbers, use the comma (,) to separate the discrete numbers, or use the endash (-) to represent a consecutive number. For example, the numbers 1, and 3-6 indicate 1, 3, 4, 5, and 6. l This parameter is set according to the planning information.
Configure SNCP Tangent Ring
Selected Deselected
Deselected
l After the Configure SNCP Tangent Ring checkbox is selected, you can quickly configure the SNCP service for the SNCP ring tangent point. l In normal cases, it is recommended that you do not select this checkbox.
Selected Deselected
Selected
l This parameter specifies whether to immediately activate the configured SNCP service. l After the Activate Immediately checkbox is selected, you can immediately activate the created SNCP service.
A.4.3 Parameter Description: SDH Service Configuration_Converting Normal Services Into SNCP Services
This topic describes the parameters that are used for converting normal services into SNCP services.
Navigation Path
1. 2. 3. Select the NE from the Object Tree in the NE Explorer. Choose Configuration > SDH Service Configuration from the Function Tree. If a bidirectional SDH service is created, select this service in Cross-Connection. Rightclick the selected service and choose Expand to Unidirectional from the shortcut menu. Select the unidirectional service. Right-click the selected service and choose Convert to SNCP Service from the shortcut menu.
A-94
Issue 03 (2011-04-10)

Parameter Service Type Direction Level Value Range SNCP Unidirectional Default Value SNCP Description This parameter indicates that the type of the service to be created is SNCP. This parameter indicates the direction of the SNCP service. l This parameter indicates the level of the SNCP service. l If the service is an E1 service or a data service that is bound with VC-12 channels, the parameter value is VC12. l If the service is a data service that is bound with VC-3 channels, the parameter value is VC3. l If all the services on a VC-4 channel pass through the NE, the parameter value is VC4.
Issue 03 (2011-04-10)
A-95
Parameter Hold-off Time (100ms)
Default Value 0
Description l This parameter specifies the duration of the hold-off time. l When a line is faulty, SNCP switching can be performed on the NE after a delay of time to prevent the situation where the NE performs SNCP switching and other protection switching at the same time. l Hold-off Time(100ms) is generally set to prevent SNCP protection switching, when SNCP works with N+1 protection. Hold-off Time(100ms) must be longer than the switching time of any protection mode that works with SNCP. Generally, Hold-off Time(100ms) is set to 200 ms. l When SNCP works with 1+1 FD/SD, trigger conditions for HSM switching or SNCP switching trigger HSM switching but do not trigger SNCP switching. Therefore, Hold-off Time(100ms) does not need to be set in this case. l The switching time of 1+1 HSB/FD/SD protection is much longer than that of SNCP. Therefore, to shorten service interruptions, it is recommended that you do not set Hold-off Time(100ms) when SNCP works with 1+1 HSB/FD/SD protection. l If only the SNCP scheme is available, it is recommended that you set the hold-off time to 0.
Revertive Mode
Non-Revertive
l This parameter specifies whether to switch the service to the original working channel after the fault is rectified. If this parameter is set to "Revertive", the service is switched from the protection channel to the original working channel. l If this parameter is set to Revertive, the service is switched from the protection channel to the original working channel. If this parameter is set to NonRevertive, the service is not switched from the protection channel to the original working channel. l It is recommended that you set this parameter to Revertive.
A-96
Issue 03 (2011-04-10)
Default Value 600
Source Slot Source VC4
This parameter specifies the slot of the service source. l This parameter specifies the number of the VC-4 channel where the service source is located. l This parameter cannot be set when Source Slot is set to the slot of the tributary board.
Sink Slot Sink VC4
Issue 03 (2011-04-10)
A-97
Parameter Sink Timeslot Range(e.g.1,3-6)
Value Range -
Default Value -
Description l This parameter specifies the timeslot range of the service sink. l This parameter can be set to a number or several numbers. When setting this parameter to several numbers, use the comma (,) to separate the discrete numbers, or use the endash (-) to represent a consecutive number. For example, the numbers 1, and 3-6 indicate 1, 3, 4, 5, and 6. l This parameter is set according to the planning information.
Configure SNCP Tangent Ring
After the Configure SNCP Tangent Ring checkbox is selected, you can quickly configure the SNCP service for the SNCP ring tangent point. l This parameter indicates whether to immediately activate the configured SNCP service. l After the Activate Immediately checkbox is selected, you can immediately activate the created SNCP service.
A.4.4 Parameter Description: SDH Service Configuration

This topic describes the parameters that are used for configuring SDH services (namely, configuring cross-connections).
Navigation Path
Select the NE from the Object Tree in the NE Explorer. Choose Configuration > SDH Service Configuration from the Function Tree.
A-98
Issue 03 (2011-04-10)
Cross-Connection Parameters
Parameter Level Value Range VC12 VC3 VC4 Default Value Description l This parameter indicates the level of the service. l If the service is an E1 service or a data service that is bound with VC-12 channels, VC12 is displayed. l If the service is a data service that is bound with VC-3 channels, VC3 is displayed. l If all the services on a VC-4 channel pass through the NE, VC4 is displayed. Source Slot Source Timeslot/ Path Sink Slot Sink Timeslot/ Path E1 Priority High Low None This parameter indicates the slot of the service source. This parameter indicates the timeslot or timeslot range of the service source. This parameter indicates the slot of the source sink. This parameter indicates the timeslot or timeslot range of the service sink. l This parameter specifies the priority of an E1 service. This parameter is available only if the E1 priority function is enabled for the ports configured in the cross-connections. l If E1 Priority is set to High, transmission of the E1 service is ensured in any modulation scheme. l If E1 Priority is set to Low, transmission of the E1 service is ensured only in fullcapacity modulation scheme l If the service priority is not specified during service creation, E1 Priority is None. In this case, the E1 priority of a service needs to be changed after the service is created. Activation Status Yes No Bound Group Number Lockout Status This parameter indicates whether to activate the service. The OptiX RTN 980 does not support this parameter. The OptiX RTN 980 does not support this parameter.
Issue 03 (2011-04-10)
A-99
Parameter Trail Name Schedule No.
Value Range -
Default Value -
Description The OptiX RTN 980 does not support this parameter. The OptiX RTN 980 does not support this parameter.
Parameters for Automatically Created Cross-Connections

Parameter Level Value Range VC12 VC3 VC4 Default Value Description l This parameter indicates the level of the service. l If the service is an E1 service or a data service that is bound with VC-12 channels, VC12 is displayed. l If the service is a data service that is bound with VC-3 channels, VC3 is displayed. l If all the services on a VC-4 channel pass through the NE, VC4 is displayed. Source Slot Source Timeslot/ Path Sink Slot Sink Timeslot/ Path Lockout Status Trail Name Schedule No. This parameter indicates the slot of the service source. This parameter indicates the timeslot or timeslot range of the service source. This parameter indicates the slot of the source sink. This parameter indicates the timeslot or timeslot range of the service sink. The OptiX RTN 980 does not support this parameter. The OptiX RTN 980 does not support this parameter. The OptiX RTN 980 does not support this parameter.
A.4.5 Parameter Description: SNCP Service Control

This topic describes the parameters that are used for controlling SNCP services.
A-100
Issue 03 (2011-04-10)
Navigation Path
Select the NE from the Object Tree in the NE Explorer. Choose Configuration > SNCP Service Control from the Function Tree.

Parameter Service Type Source Value Range Default Value Description This parameter indicates the service protection type of the protection group. This parameter indicates the timeslots where the working service source and protection service source of the protection group are located. This parameter indicates the timeslots where the working service sink and protection service sink of the protection group are located. l This parameter indicates the level of the service. l If the service is an E1 service or a data service that is bound with VC-12 channels, VC12 is displayed. l If the service is a data service that is bound with VC-3 channels, VC3 is displayed. l If all the services on a VC-4 channel pass through the NE, VC4 is displayed. Current Status This parameter indicates the current switching mode and switching status of the services of the protection group. l This parameter indicates or specifies the revertive mode of the service. l This parameter determines whether to switch the service from the protection channel to the original working channel after the fault is rectified. l If this parameter is set to Revertive, the service is switched from the protection channel to the original working channel. If this parameter is set to NonRevertive, the service is not switched from the protection channel to the original working channel. l It is recommended that you set this parameter to Revertive.
Sink
Level
VC12 VC3 VC4
Revertive Mode
Revertive Non-Revertive
Issue 03 (2011-04-10)
A-101
Default Value -
Description l This parameter indicates or specifies the WTR time. l When the time after the former working channel is restored to normal reaches the preset WTR time, a revertive switching occurs. l You can set WTR Time(s) only when Revertive Mode is set to Revertive. l It is recommended that you use the default value.
Hold-off Time (100ms)
0 to 100
l This parameter specifies the duration of the hold-off time. l When a line is faulty, SNCP switching can be performed on the NE after a delay of time to prevent the situation where the NE performs SNCP switching and other protection switching at the same time. l Hold-off Time(100ms) is generally set to prevent SNCP protection switching, when SNCP works with N+1 protection. Hold-off Time(100ms) must be longer than the switching time of any protection mode that works with SNCP. Generally, Hold-off Time(100ms) is set to 200 ms. l When SNCP works with 1+1 FD/SD, trigger conditions for HSM switching or SNCP switching trigger HSM switching but do not trigger SNCP switching. Therefore, Hold-off Time(100ms) does not need to be set in this case. l The switching time of 1+1 HSB/FD/SD protection is much longer than that of SNCP. Therefore, to shorten service interruptions, it is recommended that you do not set Hold-off Time(100ms) when SNCP works with 1+1 HSB/FD/SD protection. l If only the SNCP scheme is available, it is recommended that you set the hold-off time to 0.
A-102
Issue 03 (2011-04-10)
Parameter SD Initiation Condition
Value Range -
Default Value Null
Description l This parameter indicates or specifies the conditions that trigger the protection switching of the service. l After being selected as SD Initiation Condition, an alarm becomes a condition for triggering switching of an SNCP service. l It is recommended that you set SD Initiation Condition to the same condition for Working Service and Protection Service. l The protection switching conditions in SD Initiation Condition are optional values not included in the default values, and they are set according to the planning information.
Trail Status
This parameter indicates the status of the working service and protection service of the protection group. The OptiX RTN 980 does not support this parameter. The OptiX RTN 980 does not support this parameter. This parameter indicates whether the working service or protection service is currently received by the protection group. Displays the trail name.
Service Grouping Group Type Active Channel
Trail Name
A.4.6 Parameter Description: TU_AIS Insertion

This section describes the parameters for TU_AIS insertion.
Navigation Path
In the NE Explorer, select the IF board from the Object Tree and choose Alarm > Triggered Alarm Insertion from the Function Tree.
Issue 03 (2011-04-10)
A-103

Table A-1 Parameters on the main interface Parameter Port High Channel Low Channel Insert E1_AIS to TU_AIS Value Range Enable Disable Default Value Disable Description Displays the slot ID of the IF board and the ID of the IF port. Displays the higher order path number of the IF board. Displays the lower order path number of the IF board. If this parameter is set to Enable for an E1 path and the E1 path detects the E1_AIS alarm, the TU_AIS alarm is inserted into this path.
A.5 Parameters for Board Interfaces

This topic describes the parameters that are related to board interfaces. A.5.1 PDH Port Parameters This topic describes the parameters that are related to PDH ports supported by Smart E1 interface boards. A.5.2 Parameters for the Ports on Ethernet Boards This section describes the parameters for the Ethernet ports on the packet plane. A.5.3 Serial Port Parameters This topic describes the parameters that are related to serial ports. A.5.4 Microwave Interface Parameters This topic describes the parameters that are related to IF_ETH interfaces. A.5.5 IF Board Parameters This topic describes parameters that are related to IF boards. A.5.6 ODU Parameters This topic describes parameters that are related to ODUs. A.5.7 Parameters for SDH Interface Boards This topic describes parameters that are related to SDH interface boards. A.5.8 Parameters for PDH Interface Boards This topic describes parameters that are related to PDH interface boards. A.5.9 Parameters for Overhead This topic describes the parameters that are related to overhead.
A-104
Issue 03 (2011-04-10)
A.5.1 PDH Port Parameters

This topic describes the parameters that are related to PDH ports supported by Smart E1 interface boards. A.5.1.1 Parameter Description: PDH Ports_Basic Attributes This topic describes the parameters that are related to the basic attributes of PDH ports. A.5.1.2 Parameter Description: PDH Ports_Advanced Attributes This topic describes the parameters that are related to the advanced attributes of PDH ports.
A.5.1.1 Parameter Description: PDH Ports_Basic Attributes

This topic describes the parameters that are related to the basic attributes of PDH ports.
Navigation Path
1. 2. In the NE Explorer, select the NE from the Object Tree and choose Configuration > Interface Management > PDH Interface from the Function Tree. Click the General Attributes tab.

Parameter Port Name Port Mode Value Range Layer 1 Layer 2 Default Value Layer 2 Description Displays the ID of a service port. Specifies or displays the customized port name. l Specifies the working mode of a PDH port. l When this parameter is set to Layer 1, the port can transmit TDM signals. A port can transmit CES and serial services only if this parameter is set to Layer 1. l When this parameter is set to Layer 2, the port can transmit ATM signals.
Issue 03 (2011-04-10)
A-105
Parameter Encapsulation Type
Value Range -
Default Value -
Description l Displays Encapsulation Type of a PDH port. l When Port Mode is Layer 1, Encapsulation Type takes its default value Null. l When Port Mode is Layer 2, Encapsulation Type takes its default value ATM.
A.5.1.2 Parameter Description: PDH Ports_Advanced Attributes

This topic describes the parameters that are related to the advanced attributes of PDH ports.
Navigation Path
1. 2. In the NE Explorer, select the NE from the Object Tree and choose Configuration > Interface Management > PDH Interface from the Function Tree. Click the Advanced Attributes tab.

Parameter Port Value Range Default Value Description Displays the name of a service port.
A-106
Issue 03 (2011-04-10)
Parameter Frame Format
Value Range Unframe Double Frame CRC-4 Multiframe
Default Value CRC-4 Multiframe
Description l Specifies the frame format. l If a CES service uses the emulation mode of CESoPSN, this parameter can assume the value CRC-4 Multiframe or Double Frame. The value CRC-4 Multiframe is recommended. l If a CES service uses the emulation mode of SAToP, this parameter needs to assume the value Unframe. l The value of Frame Format must be the same at the local and opposite ends.
Line Encoding Format
Displays the line encoding format. The parameter value is always HDB3.
Issue 03 (2011-04-10)
A-107
Parameter Loopback Mode
Value Range Non-Loopback Inloop Outloop
Default Value Non-Loopback
Description l Specifies the loopback status for a port. l Non-Loopback indicates that loopbacks are cancelled or not performed. l Inloop indicates that the signals that need to be transmitted to the opposite end are looped back. l Outloop indicates that the received signals are looped back. l This function is used for fault locating for the PDH ports. This function affects services over related ports. Therefore, exercise precaution before starting this function. l Generally, this parameter is set to Non-Loopback.
Impedance
Displays the port impedance.
A-108
Issue 03 (2011-04-10)
Parameter Frame Mode
Value Range 30(ATM) 31(ATM,CES)
Default Value -
Description l 30 timeslots: In an E1 frame format, timeslots 1 to 15 and 17 to 31 are used to transmit service data, and timeslot 16 is used to transmit signaling. l 31 timeslots: In an E1 frame format, timeslots 1 to 31 are used to transmit service data. l This parameter is unavailable if Frame Format is Unframe. l The port frame modes need to be the same at the local and opposite ends.
Clock Mode
Master Mode Slave Mode System Clock Mode
Master Mode
l Master Mode: The system clock is used as the output clock of services. l Slave Mode: The CES ACR clock is used as the output clock of services. The port inputting E1 clocks on Slave is set to Slave Mode. l System Clock Mode: The upstream E1 line clock of the opposite equipment is used as the output clock of services. The port inputting E1 clocks on Master is set to System Clock Mode
Composite Port Loopback Service Load Indication
For the OptiX RTN 980, this parameter cannot be configured. For the OptiX RTN 980, this parameter cannot be configured.
Issue 03 (2011-04-10)
A-109
Parameter Equalize Input Signal
Value Range -
Default Value -
Description For the OptiX RTN 980, this parameter cannot be configured. For the OptiX RTN 980, this parameter cannot be configured.
Equalize Outpput Signal
A.5.2 Parameters for the Ports on Ethernet Boards

This section describes the parameters for the Ethernet ports on the packet plane. A.5.2.1 Parameter Description: Ethernet Interface_Basic Attributes This topic describes the parameters that are related to the basic attributes of an Ethernet interface. A.5.2.2 Parameter Description: Ethernet Interface_Flow Control This topic describes the parameters that are related to flow control. A.5.2.3 Parameter Description: Ethernet Interface_Layer 2 Attributes This topic describes the parameters that are related to the Layer 2 attributes. A.5.2.4 Parameter Description: Ethernet Port_Layer 3 Attributes This topic describes the parameters that are related to the Layer 3 attributes of Ethernet ports. A.5.2.5 Parameter Description: Ethernet Interface_Advanced Attributes This topic describes the parameters that are used for configuring the advanced attributes.
A.5.2.1 Parameter Description: Ethernet Interface_Basic Attributes

This topic describes the parameters that are related to the basic attributes of an Ethernet interface.
Navigation Path
1. 2. Select the NE from the Object Tree in the NE Explorer. Choose Configuration > Interface Management > Ethernet Interface from the Function Tree. Click the General Attributes tab.

Parameter Port Name Value Range Default Value Description Displays the port name. Specifies the port name.
A-110
Issue 03 (2011-04-10)
Parameter Enable Port
Description l Specifies whether an Ethernet port is enabled. An Ethernet port can receive, process, and forward Ethernet services only if this parameter is set to Enabled. l Set this parameter according to the planning information.
Port Mode
Layer 2 Layer 3
Layer 2
l Port Mode specifies the mode of the Ethernet port. l If Port Mode is Layer 2, Encapsulation Type can be set to Null, 802.1Q, or QinQ. l If Port Mode is Layer 3, Encapsulation Type can be set to 802.1Q only and the port can carry MPLS tunnels.
Issue 03 (2011-04-10)
A-111
Value Range Null 802.1Q QinQ
Default Value -
Description l Encapsulation Type specifies the method of the port to process the received packets. l If you set Encapsulation Type to Null, the port transparently transmits the received packets. l If you set Encapsulation Type to 802.1Q, the port identifies the packets that comply with the IEEE 802.1q standard. l If you set Encapsulation Type to QinQ, the port identifies the packets that comply with the IEEE 802.1ad QinQ standard.
A-112
Issue 03 (2011-04-10)
Parameter Working Mode
Value Range Auto-Negotiation 10M Half-Duplex 10M Full-Duplex 100M Half-Duplex 100M Full-Duplex 1000M Full-Duplex
Default Value Auto-Negotiation
Description l The Ethernet ports of different types support different Working Mode. l When the equipment on the opposite side works in autonegotiation mode, set the Working Mode of the equipment on the local side to AutoNegotiation. l When the equipment on the opposite side works in full-duplex mode, set the Working Mode of the equipment on the local side to 10M FullDuplex, 100M FullDuplex, or 1000M Full-Duplex depending on the port rate of the equipment on the opposite side. l When the equipment on the opposite side works in half-duplex mode, set the Working Mode of the equipment on the local side to 10M HalfDuplex, 100M HalfDuplex, or AutoNegotiation depending on the port rate of the equipment on the opposite side. l GE electrical ports support 10M fullduplex, 10M halfduplex, 100M fullduplex, 100M halfduplex, 1000M fullduplex, and autonegotiation. l GE optical ports support 1000M full-
Issue 03 (2011-04-10)
A-113
Parameter
Value Range
Default Value
Description duplex and autonegotiation.

NOTE The logical EG2D board does not support halfduplex.
Max Frame Length (byte)
1518 to 9600
1522
The value of Max Frame Length(byte) should be greater than the length of any frame to be transported. l Auto-Negotiation Ability specifies the auto-negotiation capability of the Ethernet port. l For GE optical ports, Auto-Negotiation Ability can be set to 1000M Full-Duplex only. l Auto-Negotiation Ability is valid only when Working Mode is set to AutoNegotiation.
Auto-Negotiation Ability
Auto-Negotiation 10M Half-Duplex 10M Full-Duplex 100M Half-Duplex 100M Full-Duplex 1000M Full-Duplex
FE: 100M Full-Duplex GE: 1000M Full-Duplex
Logical Port Attribute
Optical Port Electrical Port
l This parameter specifies the attribute of the logical port. l The SFP on the EM6F, CSHN board supports the optical port and electrical port.
Physical Port Attribute
This parameter indicates the attribute of the physical port.
A.5.2.2 Parameter Description: Ethernet Interface_Flow Control

This topic describes the parameters that are related to flow control.
A-114
Issue 03 (2011-04-10)
Navigation Path
1. 2. Select the NE from the Object Tree in the NE Explorer. Choose Configuration > Interface Management > Ethernet Interface from the Function Tree. Click the Flow Control tab.

Parameter Port Non-Autonegotiation Flow Control Mode Value Range Disabled Enable Symmetric Flow Control Default Value Disabled Description This parameter indicates the port name. l Non-Autonegotiation Flow Control Mode is valid only when Working Mode is not set to AutoNegotiation. l Non-Autonegotiation Flow Control Mode of the equipment on the local side must be consistent with the non-autonegotiation flow control mode of the equipment on the opposite side l The OptiX RTN 980 supports only two nonauto-negotiation flow control modes, namely, Disabled mode and Enable Symmetric Flow Control mode.
Issue 03 (2011-04-10)
A-115
Parameter Auto-Negotiation Flow Control Mode
Value Range Disabled Enable Symmetric Flow Control
Description l Auto-Negotiation Flow Control Mode is valid only when Working Mode is set to Auto-Negotiation. l Auto-Negotiation Flow Control Mode of the equipment on the local side must be consistent with the auto-negotiation flow control mode of the equipment on the opposite side l The OptiX RTN 980 supports only two auto-negotiation flow control modes, namely, Disabled mode and Enable Symmetric Flow Control mode.
A.5.2.3 Parameter Description: Ethernet Interface_Layer 2 Attributes

This topic describes the parameters that are related to the Layer 2 attributes.
Navigation Path
1. 2. Select the NE from the Object Tree in the NE Explorer. Choose Configuration > Interface Management > Ethernet Interface from the Function Tree. Click the Layer 2 Attributes tab.

NOTE
The parameter Layer 2 Attributes is meaningful only when Port Mode is set to Layer 2.
Parameter Port
Value Range -
Default Value -
Description This parameter indicates the port name.
A-116
Issue 03 (2011-04-10)
Parameter QinQ Type Domain
Value Range -
Default Value -
Description l When Encapsulation Type in the General Attributes tab page is set to QinQ, you need to set QinQ Type Domain. The default value is 88A8. l When Encapsulation Type in the General Attributes tab page is set to Null or 802.1Q, you cannot set QinQ Type Domain. In this case, QinQ Type Domain is displayed as FFFF and cannot be changed. l QinQ Type Domain should be set to the same value for all the ports on the EM6T/ EM6F board or the EG2D logical board.
TAG
Tag Aware Access Hybrid
Tag Aware
l If all the accessed services are frames with the VLAN tag (tagged frames), set TAG to Tag Aware. l If all the accessed services are frames without the VLAN tag (untagged frames), set TAG to Access. l If the accessed services contain tagged frames and untagged frames, set TAG to Hybrid.
NOTE TAG specifies the TAG flag of a port. For details about the TAG flags and associated frameprocessing methods, see Table A-2.
Issue 03 (2011-04-10)
A-117
Parameter Default VLAN ID
Default Value 1
Description l Default VLAN ID is valid only when TAG is set to Access or Hybrid. l Default VLAN ID is set according to the actual situations.
NOTE For details about the functions of Default VLAN ID, see Table A-2.
VLAN Priority
0 to 7
l VLAN Priority is valid only when TAG is set to Access or Hybrid. l When the VLAN priority is required to divide streams or to be used for other purposes, VLAN Priority is set according to the planning information. In normal cases, it is recommended that you use the default value.
NOTE For details about the functions of VLAN Priority, see Table A-2.
Table A-2 Methods used by Ethernet interfaces to process data frames Port Type of Data Frame Tagged frame Untagged frame Processing Method Tag Aware The port receives the frame. The port discards the frame. Access The port discards the frame. The ports add the VLAN tag, to which Default VLAN ID and VLAN Priority correspond, to the frame and receive the frame. Hybrid The port receives the frame. The ports add the VLAN tag, to which Default VLAN ID and VLAN Priority correspond, to the frame and receive the frame.
Ingress UNI
A-118
Issue 03 (2011-04-10)
Port
Type of Data Frame Tagged frame
Processing Method Tag Aware The port transmits the frame. Access The port strips the VLAN tag from the frame and then transmits the frame. Hybrid l If the VLAN ID in the frame is Default VLAN ID, the port strips the VLAN tag from the frame and then transmits the frame. l If the VLAN ID in the frame is not Default VLAN ID, the port directly transmits the frame.
Egress UNI
A.5.2.4 Parameter Description: Ethernet Port_Layer 3 Attributes

This topic describes the parameters that are related to the Layer 3 attributes of Ethernet ports.
Navigation Path
1. 2. In the NE Explorer, select the NE from the Object Tree and choose Configuration > Interface Management > Ethernet Interface from the Function Tree. Click the Layer 3 Attributes tab.

NOTE
Layer 3 Attributes is valid only if Port Mode is set to Layer 3.
Parameter Port Enable Tunnel
Description Displays the port name. l If Enable Tunnel is set Enabled, a port identifies and processes MPLS labels. l Enable Tunnel is available if you set Port Mode to Layer 3 in the General Attributes tab.
Issue 03 (2011-04-10)
A-119
Parameter Specify IP Address
Value Range Manually Unspecified
Default Value Unspecified
Description l Specifies the method of setting the IP address of a port. l The value Unspecified indicates that the IP addresses do not need to be configured. l The value Manually indicates that the IP address of the port can be manually configured.
IP Address
0.0.0.0
l Specifies the IP address of a port. l This parameter is available when Specify IP Address is Manually. l The IP addresses of different ports on the NE cannot be in the same network segment, but the IP addresses of the ports at both ends of the MPLS tunnel must be in the same network segment.
IP Mask
255.255.255.252
l Specifies the subnet mask of a port. l This parameter is available when Specify IP Address is Manually.
A.5.2.5 Parameter Description: Ethernet Interface_Advanced Attributes

This topic describes the parameters that are used for configuring the advanced attributes.
Navigation Path
1. 2.
A-120
Select the NE from the Object Tree in the NE Explorer. Choose Configuration > Interface Management > Ethernet Interface from the Function Tree. Click the Advanced Attributes tab.

Parameter Port Port Physical Parameters MAC Loopback Value Range Default Value Description This parameter indicates the port name. This parameter indicates the physical parameters of the port. l This parameter specifies the loopback state at the MAC layer. When this parameter is set to Inloop, the Ethernet signals transmitted to the opposite end are looped back. l In normal cases, it is recommended that you use the default value. PHY Loopback Non-Loopback Inloop Non-Loopback l This parameter specifies the loopback state at the PHY layer. When this parameter is set to Inloop, the Ethernet physical signals transmitted to the opposite end are looped back. l In normal cases, it is recommended that you use the default value. MAC Address This parameter indicates the MAC address of the port. This parameter indicates the rate at which the data packets are transmitted. This parameter indicates the rate at which the data packets are received. This parameter specifies whether to enable loop detection, which is used to check whether a loop exists on the port.
Non-Loopback Inloop
Non-Loopback
Transmitting Rate(kbit/ s) Receiving Rate(kbit/s)
Loopback Check
Enabled Disabled
Disabled
Issue 03 (2011-04-10)
A-121
Parameter Loopback Port Shutdown Egress PIR Bandwidth (Kbit/s) Enabling Broadcast Packet Suppression
Value Range Enabled Disabled Disabled Enabled
Description This parameter indicates whether to enable the loop port shutdown function. This parameter indicates the egress PIR bandwidth. l This parameter specifies whether to limit the traffic rate of the broadcast packets according to the proportion of the broadcast packets in the total packets. When the equipment at the opposite end may encounter a broadcast storm, this parameter is set to Enabled. l If Ethernet services are E-LAN services, the recommended value is Enabled. l This parameter takes effect only for E-LAN services in the ingress direction.
Disabled
Broadcast Packet Suppression Threshold
0 to 100
30
When the proportion of the broadcast packets in the total packets exceeds the value of this parameter, the received broadcast packets are discarded. The value of this parameter should be more than the proportion of the broadcast packets in the total packets before the broadcast storm occurs. In normal cases, this parameter is set to default value.
A.5.3 Serial Port Parameters

This topic describes the parameters that are related to serial ports.
A-122
Issue 03 (2011-04-10)
A.5.3.1 Parameter Description: Serial Port_Basic Attributes This topic describes the parameters that are related to the basic attributes of series ports. A.5.3.2 Parameter Description: Serial Port_Creation of Serial Ports This topic describes parameters that are used for creating serial ports.
A.5.3.1 Parameter Description: Serial Port_Basic Attributes

This topic describes the parameters that are related to the basic attributes of series ports.
Navigation Path
1. 2. In the NE Explorer, select the required NE from the Object Tree and choose Configuration > Interface Management > Serial Port from the Function Tree. Click the General Attributes tab.

Parameter Port Value Range Default Value Description Displays the name of the port where a serial service is configured. Specifies or displays the customized port name. l Specifies or displays the serial port level. l 64K Timeslot: 64 kbit/ s timeslots of E1 signals can be bound.
NOTE The OptiX RTN 980 supports 64K Timeslot only.
Name Level
Used Port
Displays the physical port that carries a serial service. Displays the timeslots that a serial service occupies. The timeslots can be consecutive or not.
64K Timeslot
Issue 03 (2011-04-10)
A-123
Parameter Port Mode
Value Range Layer 2 Layer 3
Default Value Layer 3
Description l Displays or specifies the port mode. l A port supports ATM encapsulation if its Port Mode is Layer 2. A port does not support encapsulation if its Port Mode is Layer 3.
Encapsulation Type
l Displays and specifies the encapsulation type of a PW. l When Port Mode is Layer 2, this parameter displays ATM; when Port Mode is Layer 3, this parameter displays Null.
A.5.3.2 Parameter Description: Serial Port_Creation of Serial Ports

This topic describes parameters that are used for creating serial ports.
Navigation Path
1. 2. In the NE Explorer, select the required NE from the Object Tree and choose Configuration > Interface Management > Microwave Interface from the Function Tree. Click the New tab.

Parameter Port Number(e.g:1,3-6) Value Range Default Value Description Specifies the port where the serial service is configured. Specifies the customized port name.
Name
A-124
Issue 03 (2011-04-10)
Parameter Level
Value Range 64K Timeslot
Default Value 64K Timeslot
Description l Specifies the serial port level. l When this parameter is set to 64K Timeslot , E1 timeslots can be bound.
NOTE The OptiX RTN 980 supports only the parameter value 64K Timeslot .
Used Board Used Port High Channel Low Channel(e.g:1,3-6) 64K Timeslot(e.g:1,3-6)
Specifies the board where a serial port is located. Displays the board where a serial port is located. The OptiX RTN 980 does not support this parameter. The OptiX RTN 980 does not support this parameter. Specifies the 64 kbit/s timeslots to be bound with the serial port. The timeslots can be consecutive or not.
A.5.4 Microwave Interface Parameters

This topic describes the parameters that are related to IF_ETH interfaces. A.5.4.1 Parameter Description: Microwave Interface_Basic Attributes This topic describes the parameters that are related to the basic attributes of microwave interfaces. A.5.4.2 Parameter Description: Microwave Interface_Layer 2 Attributes This topic describes the parameters that are related to the Layer 2 attributes of microwave interfaces. A.5.4.3 Parameter Description: Microwave Interface_Layer 3 Attributes This topic describes the parameters that are related to the Layer 3 attributes of an IF_ETH port. A.5.4.4 Parameter Description: Microwave Interface_Advanced Attributes This topic describes the parameters that are related to the advanced attributes of microwave interfaces.
A.5.4.1 Parameter Description: Microwave Interface_Basic Attributes

This topic describes the parameters that are related to the basic attributes of microwave interfaces.
Navigation Path
1. 2. Select the NE from the Object Tree in the NE Explorer. Choose Configuration > Interface Management > Microwave Interface from the Function Tree. Click the General Attributes tab.
Parameters
Parameter Port Name Port Mode Value Range Layer 2 Layer 3 Default Value Layer 2 Description This parameter indicates the corresponding IF port. This parameter indicates or specifies the customized port name. l If Port Mode is Layer 2, Encapsulation Type can be set to Null, 802.1Q, or QinQ. l If Port Mode is Layer 3, Encapsulation Type can be set to 802.1Q only and the port can carry tunnels. Encapsulation Type Null 802.1Q QinQ 802.1Q l Encapsulation Type specifies the method of the port to process the received packets. l If Encapsulation Type is set to Null, the port transparently transmits the received packets. l If Encapsulation Type is set to 802.1Q, the port identifies the packets that comply with the IEEE 802.1Q standard. l If Encapsulation Type is set to QinQ, the port identifies the packets that comply with the IEEE 802.1ad QinQ standard.
A.5.4.2 Parameter Description: Microwave Interface_Layer 2 Attributes

This topic describes the parameters that are related to the Layer 2 attributes of microwave interfaces.
Navigation Path
1. 2. Select the NE from the Object Tree in the NE Explorer. Choose Configuration > Interface Management > Microwave Interface from the Function Tree. Click the Layer 2 Attributes tab.
A-126
Issue 03 (2011-04-10)
Parameters for Layer 2 Attributes

NOTE
The parameter Layer 2 Attributes is meaningful only when Port Mode is set to Layer 2.
Parameter Port QinQ Type Domain
Value Range -
Default Value -
Description This parameter indicates the corresponding IF port. l When Encapsulation Type in the General Attributes tab page is set to QinQ, you need to set QinQ Type Domain. The default value is 88A8. l When Encapsulation Type in the General Attributes tab page is set to Null or 802.1Q, you cannot set QinQ Type Domain. In this case, QinQ Type Domain is displayed as FFFF and cannot be changed.
Tag
Tag Aware
l If all the accessed services are frames that contain the VLAN tag (tagged frames), set Tag to "Tag Aware". l If all the accessed services are frames that do not contain the VLAN tag (untagged frames), set Tag to "Access". l If the accessed services contain tagged frames and untagged frames, set Tag to "Hybrid".
NOTE Tag specifies the TAG flag of a port. For details about the TAG flags and associated frameprocessing methods, see Table A-3.
Default VLAN ID
1 to 4094
l Default VLAN ID is valid only when TAG is set to Access or Hybrid. l Default VLAN ID needs to be set according to the actual situations.
NOTE For details about the functions of Default VLAN ID, see Table A-3.
Issue 03 (2011-04-10)
A-127
Parameter VLAN Priority
Value Range 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7
Default Value 0
Description l VLAN Priority is valid only when TAG is set to Access or Hybrid. l When the VLAN priority is required to divide streams or to be used for other purposes, VLAN Priority needs to be set according to the planning information. In normal cases, it is recommended that you use the default value.
NOTE For details about the functions of VLAN Priority, see Table A-3.
Table A-3 Data frame processing Status Type of Data Frame Tagged frame Untagged frame Processing Method Tag Aware The port receives the frame. The port discards the frame. Access The port discards the frame. The port receives the frame after the VLAN tag that corresponds to "Default VLAN ID" and "VLAN Priority" is added to the frame. The port strips the VLAN tag from the frame and then transmits the frame. Hybrid The port receives the frame. The port receives the frame after the VLAN tag that corresponds to "Default VLAN ID" and "VLAN Priority" is added to the frame. l If the VLAN ID in the frame is "Default VLAN ID", the port strips the VLAN tag from the frame and then transmits the frame. l If the VLAN ID in the frame is not "Default VLAN ID", the port directly transmits the frame.
Ingress Port
Egress Port
Tagged frame
The port transmits the frame.
A-128
Issue 03 (2011-04-10)
A.5.4.3 Parameter Description: Microwave Interface_Layer 3 Attributes

This topic describes the parameters that are related to the Layer 3 attributes of an IF_ETH port.
Navigation Path
1. 2. In the NE Explorer, select the required NE from the Object Tree and choose Configuration > Interface Management > Microwave Interface from the Function Tree. Click the Layer 3 Attributes tab.

Parameter Port Enable Tunnel Value Range Disabled Enabled Default Value Disabled Description Displays the corresponding IF port. l A port identifies and processes MPLS labels, if its Enable Tunnel is set Enabled. l Enable Tunnel is available if you set Port Mode to Layer 3 in the General Attributes tab. Specify IP Address Manually Unspecified Unspecified l Specifies the method of setting the IP address of a port. l The value Unspecified indicates that the IP addresses do not need to be configured for a port. l The value Manually indicates that the IP address of a port can be manually configured.
Issue 03 (2011-04-10)
A-129
Parameter IP Address
Value Range -
Default Value 0.0.0.0
Description l Specifies the IP address for a port. l This parameter is available when Specify IP Address is Manually. l The IP addresses of different ports on the NE cannot be in the same network segment, but the IP addresses of the ports at both ends of the MPLS tunnel must be in the same network segment.
IP Mask
255.255.255.252
l Specifies the subnet mask of a port. l This parameter is available when Specify IP Address is Manually.
A.5.4.4 Parameter Description: Microwave Interface_Advanced Attributes

This topic describes the parameters that are related to the advanced attributes of microwave interfaces.
Navigation Path
1. 2. Select the NE from the Object Tree in the NE Explorer. Choose Configuration > Interface Management > Microwave Interface from the Function Tree. Click the Advanced Attributes tab.
Parameters for Advanced Attributes

Parameter Port Value Range Default Value Description This parameter indicates the corresponding IF port.
A-130
Issue 03 (2011-04-10)
Parameter Radio Link ID
Default Value 1
Description l This parameter specifies the ID of the radio link. As the identifier of a radio link, this parameter is used to prevent incorrect connections of radio links between sites. l The ID of each radio link of an NE must be unique, and the link IDs at both ends of a radio link must be the same.
Received Radio Link ID
l This parameter indicates the received ID of the radio link. l If the value of Received Radio Link ID does not match with the preset value of Radio Link ID at the local end, the local end inserts the AIS signal to the downstream direction of the service. At the same time, the local end reports an alarm to the NMS, indicating that the link IDs do not match.
IF Port Loopback
l This parameter indicates the loopback status of the IF interface. l Non-Loopback indicates that the loopback is cancelled or not performed. l Inloop indicates that the IF signals transmitted to the opposite end are looped back. l Outloop indicates that the received IF signals are looped back. l Generally, this parameter is used to locate the faults that occur at each IF interface. The IF loopback is used for diagnosis. If this function is enabled, the services at the related ports are affected. In normal cases, this parameter is set to Non-Loopback.
Composite Port Loopback
l This parameter indicates the loopback status on the composite interface. l Non-Loopback indicates that the loopback is cancelled or not performed. l Inloop indicates that the composite signals transmitted to the opposite end are looped back. l Outloop indicates that the received composite signals are looped back. l In normal cases, this parameter is set to Non-Loopback.
Issue 03 (2011-04-10)
A-131
Parameter Error Frame Discard Enabled
Description l This parameter indicates or specifies whether to discard the Ethernet frame when a CRC error occurs in an Ethernet frame. l If the Ethernet service transmitted on the IF_ETH port is a voice service or a video service, you can set this parameter to Disabled.
MAC Address Transmitting Rate (Kbit/s) Receiving Rate (Kbit/s) MAC Loopback
Non-Loopback Inloop
Non-Loopback
This parameter indicates the MAC address of the port. This parameter indicates the transmit rate of the local port. This parameter indicates the receive rate of the local port. l This parameter specifies the loopback state at the MAC layer. When this parameter is set to Inloop, the Ethernet signals transmitted to the opposite end are looped back. l In normal cases, it is recommended that you use the default value.
NOTE The ISU2 and ISX2 boards can not be set to Inloop.
Speed Transmission at L2
Disabled Enabled
Disabled
l If Speed Transmission at L2 is set to Enabled, the Layer-2 Ethernet packets transmitted at microwave ports will be compressed to improve transmission efficiency. l If the Layer 2 header compression function can be enabled for the ISU2 or ISX2 board, it is recommended that you set Speed Transmission at L2 to Enabled. l The settings of Speed Transmission at L2 must be the same at both ends of a radio link.
A-132
Issue 03 (2011-04-10)
Parameter Speed Transmission at L3
Description l If Speed Transmission at L3 is set to Enabled, the IP packets transmitted at microwave ports will be compressed to improve transmission efficiency. l If the Layer 3 header compression function can be enabled for the ISU2 or ISX2 board, it is recommended that you set Speed Transmission at L3 to Enabled. l The settings of Speed Transmission at L3 must be the same at both ends of a radio link.
NOTE l The ISU2 and ISX2 boards support this parameter. l When Speed Transmission at L3 is set to Enabled, Encapsulation Type of the ISU2 and ISX2 boards cannot be set to Null.
Loopback Check
Disabled Enabled
Disabled
This parameter specifies whether to enable loop detection, which is used to check whether a loop exists on the port. This parameter indicates whether to enable the automatic shut-down of looped ports. l This parameter specifies whether to limit the traffic rate of the broadcast packets according to the proportion of the broadcast packets in the total packets. When the equipment at the opposite end may encounter a broadcast storm, this parameter is set to Enabled. l If Ethernet services are E-LAN services, the recommended value is Enabled. l This parameter takes effect only for ELAN services in the ingress direction.
Loopback Port Shutdown Enabling Broadcast Packet Suppression
Disabled Enabled Disabled Enabled
Disabled
Disabled
Enabling Broadcast Packet Suppression Threshold
0 to 100
30
When the proportion of the broadcast packets in the total packets exceeds the value of this parameter, the received broadcast packets are discarded. The value of this parameter should be more than the proportion of the broadcast packets in the total packets before the broadcast storm occurs. In normal cases, this parameter is set to default value.
Issue 03 (2011-04-10)
A-133
A.5.5 IF Board Parameters

This topic describes parameters that are related to IF boards. A.5.5.1 Parameter Description: IF Interface_IF Attribute This topic describes the parameters that are related to IF attributes. A.5.5.2 Parameter Description: IF Interface_ATPC Attribute This topic describes the parameters that are related to the ATPC attributes. A.5.5.3 Parameter Description: Hybrid_AM Configuration_Advanced Attributes This section describes the parameters that are used for configuring the advanced attributes. A.5.5.4 Parameter Description: ATPC Adjustment Records This topic describes the parameters that are related to ATPC adjustment records. A.5.5.5 Parameter Description: PRBS Test This topic describes the parameters that are related to the pseudorandom binary sequence (PRBS) test.
A.5.5.1 Parameter Description: IF Interface_IF Attribute

This topic describes the parameters that are related to IF attributes.
Navigation Path
l l Select the corresponding board from the Object Tree in the NE Explorer. Choose Configuration > IF Interface from the Function Tree. Click the IF Attributes tab.
Parameters
Parameter Port Value Range Default Value Description This parameter indicates the corresponding IF interface.
A-134
Issue 03 (2011-04-10)
Value Range 1,4E1,7MHz,QPSK 2,4E1,3.5MHz, 16QAM 3,8E1,14MHz,QPS K 4,8E1,7MHz, 16QAM 5,16E1,28MHz,QP SK 6,16E1,14MHz, 16QAM 7,STM-1,28MHz, 128QAM 8,E3,28MHz,QPSK 9,E3,14MHz, 16QAM 10,22E1,14MHz, 32QAM 11,26E1,14MHz, 64QAM 12,32E1,14MHz, 128QAM 13,35E1,28MHz, 16QAM 14,44E1,28MHz, 32QAM 15,53E1,28MHz, 64QAM
Default Value -
Description l This parameter indicates or specifies the work mode of the radio link in "work mode number, service capacity, channel spacing, modulation mode" format. l This parameter is set according to the planning information. The work modes of the IF boards at the two ends of a radio link must be the same.
NOTE The IF1 board supports this parameter.
IF Service Type
Hybrid(Native E1 +ETH) Hybrid(Native STM-1+ETH) SDH
Hybrid(Native E1 +ETH)
l Displays or specifies the type of services carried by the IF board. l If the Integrated IP radio transmits Native E1 services, set this parameter to Hybrid(Native E1+ETH). l If the Integrated IP radio transmits Native STM-1 services, set this parameter to Hybrid(Native STM-1 +ETH). l If the SDH radio transmits SDH services, set this parameter to SDH.
Issue 03 (2011-04-10)
A-135
Default Value 1
Description l Link ID indicates or specifies the ID of a radio link. As the identifier of a radio link, this parameter is used to prevent incorrect connections of radio links between sites. l If the value of Received Radio Link ID does not match the preset value of Link ID at the local end, the local end inserts the AIS signal to the downstream direction of the service. At the same time, the local end reports MW_LIM alarm to the NMS, indicating that the link IDs do not match. l Link ID is set according to the planning information. Each radio link of an NE should have a unique link ID, and the link IDs at both ends of a radio link should be the same.
Received Radio Link ID
l This parameter indicates the received ID of the radio link. l If the value of Received Radio Link ID does not match the preset value of Radio Link ID at the local end, the local end inserts the AIS signal to the downstream direction of the service. At the same time, the local end reports an alarm to the NMS, indicating that the link IDs do not match. l When the radio link becomes faulty, this parameter is displayed as an invalid value.
A-136
Issue 03 (2011-04-10)
Parameter IF Port Loopback
Description l This parameter indicates or specifies the loopback status of the IF interface. l Non-Loopback indicates that the loopback is cancelled or not performed. l Inloop indicates that the IF signals transmitted to the opposite end are looped back. l Outloop indicates that the received IF signals are looped back. l Generally, IF Port Loopback is used to locate the faults that occur at each IF interface. The IF loopback is used for diagnosis. If this function is enabled, the services at the related ports are affected. In normal cases, this parameter is set to Non-Loopback.
2M Wayside Enable Statusa
Disabled Enabled
Disabled
l This parameter indicates or specifies whether the radio link transmits the wayside E1 service. l The wayside E1 service can be supported by the IF1 board in the 7,STM-1,28MHz,128QAM, 8,E3,28MHz,QPSK, or 9,E3,14MHz, 16QAM mode.
2M Wayside Input Boarda
l This parameter indicates or specifies the slot in which the 2M wayside service is accessed. l This parameter can be set only when 2M Wayside Enable Status is set to Enabled. l The wayside E1 service can be supported by the IF1 board in the 7,STM-1,28MHz,128QAM, 8,E3,28MHz,QPSK, or 9,E3,14MHz, 16QAM mode.
350 MHz Consecutive Wave Status
Stop Start
Stop
l This parameter indicates or specifies the status of transmitting the 350 MHz carrier signals at the IF interface. l 350 MHz Consecutive Wave Status can be set to Start in the commissioning process only. In normal cases, this parameter is set to Stop. Otherwise, the services are interrupted.
Issue 03 (2011-04-10)
A-137
Parameter XPIC Enabledb
Description l This parameter indicates or specifies whether the XPIC function of the XPIC IF board is enabled. l If the XPIC IF board does not perform the XPIC function, XPIC Enabled should be set to Disabled.
Enable IEEE-1588 Timeslotc
Enabled Disabled
Disabled
Enable IEEE-1588 Timeslot needs to be set consistently between two ends of a radio link.
NOTE
l a. The IFU2 and IFX2 boards do not support way-side services. l b. The IFU2, ISU2, and IF1 boards do not support the XPIC function. l c. The IF1 board does not support the IEEE-1588 timeslot function.
Parameters for Hybrid/AM Configuration

NOTE
The IF1 board does not support Hybrid/AM configuration.
Parameter Port IF Channel Bandwidth
Value Range 7M 14M 28M 40M 56M
Default Value -
Description This parameter indicates the corresponding IF port. IF Channel Bandwidth indicates the channel spacing of the corresponding radio link. This parameter is set according to the planning information.
NOTE l This parameter is not applicable to the IF1 board. l The IFU2 board does not support the value 40M. l The IFX2 board does not support the values 7M, 14M, and 40M. l The ISX2 board supports the channel spacings of 7M and 14M only when the XPIC function is disabled.
A-138
Issue 03 (2011-04-10)
Parameter AM Enable Status
Description l When AM Enable Status is set to Disabled, the radio link uses only the specified modulation scheme. In this case, you need to select Manually Specified Modulation Mode. l When AM Enable Status is set to Enabled, the radio link uses the corresponding modulation scheme according to the channel conditions. l Hence, the Integrated IP radio can ensure the reliable transmission of the E1 services and provide bandwidth adaptively for the Ethernet services when the AM function is enabled. l The ISX2/ISU2 does not support the AM function when IF Service Type is SDH.
Modulation Mode of the Guarantee AM Capacity
QPSK
l This parameter is valid only when AM Enable Status is set to Enabled. l Modulation Mode of the Guarantee AM Capacity specifies the lowest-gain modulation scheme that the AM function supports. This parameter is set according to the planning information. Generally, the value of this parameter is determined by the service transmission bandwidth that the Hybrid radio must ensure and the availability of the radio link that corresponds to this modulation scheme.
Modulation Mode of the Full AM Capacity
QPSK
l This parameter is valid only when AM Enable Status is set to Enabled. l Modulation Mode of the Full AM Capacity specifies the highest-gain modulation scheme that the AM function supports. This parameter is set according to the planning information. Generally, the value of this parameter is determined by the bandwidth of the services that need to be transmitted over the Hybrid radio and the availability of the radio link that corresponds to this modulation scheme.
Issue 03 (2011-04-10)
A-139
Parameter Manually Specified Modulation Mode
Default Value QPSK
Description l This parameter specifies the modulation scheme that the radio link uses for signal transmission. l This parameter is valid only when AM Enable Status is set to Disabled.
STM-1 Capacity
l Specifies the STM-1 capacity of the IF board. l This parameter is available only when IF Service Type is set to Hybrid(Native STM-1+ETH) and SDH. l If IF Service Type is Hybrid(Native STM-1+ETH), this parameter can be set to 0 or 1. l If IF Service Type is SDH, this parameter can be set to 1 or 2.
NOTE The IFU2 and IFX2 boards do not support this parameter.
Enable E1 Priority
Disabled Enabled
Disabled
l This parameter specifies whether to enable the E1 priority function. l This parameter is valid only when AM Enable Status is set to Enabled. l For the ISU2 and ISX2 boards, this parameter is available when IF Service Type is Hybrid(Native E1+ETH).
Guarantee E1 Capacity
l If AM Enable Status is set to Enabled, this parameter needs to be set according to IF Channel Bandwidth, Modulation Mode of the Guarantee AM Capacity, and the actually transmitted services. l If AM Enable Status is set to Disabled, this parameter needs to be set according to IF Channel Bandwidth, Manually Specified Modulation Mode, and the actually transmitted services. l For the ISU2 and ISX2 boards, this parameter is available when IF Service Type is Hybrid(Native E1+ETH).
Guarantee E1 Capacity Range
Displays the E1 capacity range of the IF board in guarantee capacity modulation mode.
A-140
Issue 03 (2011-04-10)
Parameter Data Service Bandwidth(Mbit/ s) Full E1 Capacity
Value Range -
Default Value -
Description Displays the data service bandwidth of the IF board. l This parameter specifies the number of transmitted E1 services in Modulation Mode of the Full AM Capacity. l This parameter is valid if Enable E1 Priority is set to Enabled. l E1 service bandwidth in full capacity mode Service bandwidth in full capacity mode - Service bandwidth in guarantee capacity mode + E1 service bandwidth in guarantee capacity mode. In addition, the number of E1 services in full capacity modulation mode should be smaller than or equal to the maximum number of E1 services in full capacity modulation mode. l The Full E1 Capacity must be set to the same value at both ends of a radio link. l For the ISU2 and ISX2 boards, this parameter is available when IF Service Type is Hybrid(Native E1+ETH).
Full E1 Capacity Transmit-End Modulation Mode Receive-End Modulation Mode Guarantee AM Service Capacity (Mbit/s) Full AM Service Capacity(Mbit/s) Transmitted AM Service Capacity (Mbit/s) Received AM Service Capacity (Mbit/s) E1 Capacity For High Priority
Displays the E1 capacity range of the IF board in full capacity modulation mode. Displays the modulation mode at the transmit mode. Displays the modulation mode at the receive mode. Displays the guarantee AM service capacity.
Displays the full AM service capacity. Displays the transmitted AM service capacity. Displays the received AM service capacity.
Displays the number of configured highpriority E1s.
Issue 03 (2011-04-10)
A-141
A.5.5.2 Parameter Description: IF Interface_ATPC Attribute

This topic describes the parameters that are related to the ATPC attributes.
Navigation Path
l l Select the corresponding board from the Object Tree in the NE Explorer. Choose Configuration > IF Interface from the Function Tree. Click the ATPC Attributes tab.
Parameters
Parameter Port ATPC Enable Status Value Range Disabled Enabled Default Value Disabled Description This parameter indicates the corresponding IF interface. l This parameter specifies whether the ATPC function is enabled. l When this parameter is set to Enabled and if the RSL at the receive end is 2 dB higher or lower than the central value between the ATPC upper threshold and the ATPC lower threshold at the receive end, the receiver notifies the transmitter to decrease or increase the transmit power until the RSL is within the range that is 2 dB higher or lower than the central value between the ATPC upper threshold and the ATPC lower threshold. l The settings of the ATPC attributes must be consistent at both ends of a radio link. l In the case of areas where fast fading severely affects the radio transmission, it is recommended that you set ATPC Enable Status to Disabled. l During the commissioning process, set this parameter to Disabled to ensure that the transmit power is not changed. After the commissioning, re-set the ATPC attributes. ATPC Upper Threshold(dBm) -45.0 l Set the central value between the ATPC upper threshold and the ATPC lower threshold to a value for the expected receive power. l It is recommended that you set ATPC Upper Threshold(dBm) to the sum of the planned central value between the ATPC upper threshold and the ATPC lower threshold and 10 dB, and ATPC
A-142
Issue 03 (2011-04-10)
Parameter ATPC Lower Threshold(dBm)
Value Range -
Default Value -70.0
Description Lower Threshold(dBm) to the difference between the planned central value between the ATPC upper threshold and the ATPC lower threshold and 10 dB. l You can set the ATPC upper threshold only when ATPC Automatic Threshold(dBm) is set to Disabled.
ATPC Automatic Threshold Enable Status
Enabled Disabled
Disabled
l This parameter specifies whether the ATPC automatic threshold function is enabled. l If ATPC Automatic Threshold Enable Status is set to Enabled, the equipment automatically uses the preset ATPC upper and lower thresholds according to the work mode of the radio link. l If ATPC Automatic Threshold Enable Status is set to Disabled, you need to manually set ATPC Upper Automatic Threshold(dBm) and ATPC Lower Automatic Threshold(dBm).
ATPC Upper Automatic Threshold(dBm) ATPC Lower Automatic Threshold(dBm)
l This parameter indicates that the equipment automatically uses the preset ATPC upper and lower thresholds. l This parameter is valid only when ATPC Automatic Threshold Enable Status is set to Enabled.
A.5.5.3 Parameter Description: Hybrid_AM Configuration_Advanced Attributes

This section describes the parameters that are used for configuring the advanced attributes.
Navigation Path
l l In the NE Explorer, select the IF board, and then choose Configuration > IF Interface from the Function Tree. Click the AM Advanced Attributes tab.
Issue 03 (2011-04-10)
A-143
Parameters
Parameter Port Modulation Mode E1 Capacity Value Range Default Value Description This parameter indicates the corresponding IF interface. Displays the modulation schemes. l You can specify the number of E1s that can be transmitted in intermediate modulation scheme, by setting the advanced attributes correspondingly. l Generally, it is recommended that this parameter takes the default value. To ensure that a specific number of E1s can be transmitted in intermediate modulation scheme, adjust the E1 capacity in each modulation scheme according to the network planning information. l If the E1 priority function is enabled, the maximum number of allowed E1 services in the current mode = Min {[Bandwidth of the air interface in the current mode - (Bandwidth for the assured capacity - Assured E1 number x 2Mbps)]/2Mbps, E1 number in the highest-gain modulation mode}. Data Service Bandwidth(Mbit/ s) Displays the data service bandwidth.
A.5.5.4 Parameter Description: ATPC Adjustment Records

This topic describes the parameters that are related to ATPC adjustment records.
Navigation Path
Select the corresponding board from the Object Tree in the NE Explorer. Choose Configuration > ATPC Adjustment Records from the Function Tree.
Parameters
Parameter Port Value Range Default Value Description This parameter indicates the port for the ATPC adjustment.
A-144
Issue 03 (2011-04-10)
Parameter Event NO. Adjustment Time Adjustment Direction Switchover Transmitted Power(dBm) Received Power (dBm)
Value Range -
Default Value -
Description This parameter indicates the number of the ATPC adjustment event. This parameter indicates the time of the ATPC adjustment. This parameter indicates the direction of the adjustment at the port. This parameter indicates the switching operation at the port. This parameter indicates the transmitted power of the port to be switched. This parameter indicates the received power of the port to be switched.
A.5.5.5 Parameter Description: PRBS Test

This topic describes the parameters that are related to the pseudorandom binary sequence (PRBS) test.
Navigation Path
Select the corresponding board from the Object Tree in the NE Explorer. Choose Configuration > PRBS Test from the Function Tree.
Parameters
Parameter Port Direction Value Range Cross Tributary Default Value Cross Description This parameter indicates the port for the PRBS test. l This parameter indicates or specifies the direction of the PRBS test. l In the tributary direction, the PRBS test is performed to check the connectivity of the cable from the tributary board to the DDF. l In the cross-connect direction, the PRBS test is performed to check the processing of the service from the tributary board to the NE at the remote end. Duration 1 to 255 1 This parameter indicates or specifies the duration of the PRBS test.
Issue 03 (2011-04-10)
A-145
Parameter Measured Time
Value Range s 10min h
Default Value s
Description This parameter indicates or specifies the time unit used for the PRBS test.
Start Time Progress Total PRBS Accumulating Mode
Selected Deselected
Deselected
This parameter indicates the start time of the PRBS test. This parameter indicates the progress percentage of the PRBS test. This parameter indicates the number of bit errors that occur in the PRBS test. This parameter specifies whether to display the values in accumulative mode. If Accumulating Mode is selected, it indicates that the values are displayed in accumulative mode.
A.5.6 ODU Parameters

This topic describes parameters that are related to ODUs. A.5.6.1 Parameter Description: ODU Interface_Radio Frequency Attribute This topic describes the parameters that are related to radio frequency attributes of an ODU. A.5.6.2 Parameter Description: ODU Interface_Power Attributes This topic describes the parameters that are used for configuring the power attributes of the ODU. A.5.6.3 Parameter Description: ODU Interface_Equipment Information This topic describes the parameters that are used for configuring the equipment information of the ODU. A.5.6.4 Parameter Description: ODU Interface_Advanced Attributes This topic describes the parameters that are used for configuring the advanced attributes of the ODU.
A.5.6.1 Parameter Description: ODU Interface_Radio Frequency Attribute

This topic describes the parameters that are related to radio frequency attributes of an ODU.
Navigation Path
l l Select the ODU from the Object Tree in the NE Explorer. Choose Configuration > ODU Interface from the Function Tree. Click the Radio Frequency Attributes tab.
A-146
Issue 03 (2011-04-10)
Parameters
Parameter Board Transmit Frequency(MHz) Value Range Default Value Description This parameter indicates the corresponding ODU. l This parameter indicates or specifies the transmit frequency of the ODU, namely, the central frequency of the channel. l The value of Transmit Frequency (MHz) must not be less than the sum of the minimum transmit frequency supported by the ODU and a half of the channel spacing, and must not be more than the difference between the maximum transmit frequency supported by the ODU and a half of the channel spacing. l The difference between the transmit frequencies at both ends of a radio link should be one T/R spacing. l This parameter is set according to the planning information. T/R Spacing(MHz) l This parameter indicates or specifies the spacing between the transmit frequency and receive frequency of the ODU to prevent mutual interference of the transmitter and receiver. l If the ODU is a Tx high station, the transmit frequency is one T/R spacing higher than the receive frequency. If the ODU is a Tx low station, the transmit frequency is one T/R spacing lower than the receive frequency. l If the ODU supports only one T/R spacing, T/R Spacing(MHz) is set to 0, indicating that the T/R spacing supported by the ODU is used. l A valid T/R spacing value is determined by the ODU itself, and T/R Spacing (MHz) should be set according to the technical specifications of the ODU. l The T/R spacing of the ODU should be set to the same value at both ends of a radio link. Actual Transmit Frequency(MHz) This parameter indicates the actual transmit frequency of the ODU.
Issue 03 (2011-04-10)
A-147
Parameter Actual Receive Frequency(MHz) Actual T/R Spacing(MHz) The range of frequency point (MHz)
Value Range -
Default Value -
Description This parameter indicates the actual receive frequency of the ODU. This parameter indicates the actual T/R spacing of the ODU. This parameter indicates the working range of the frequency of the ODU.
A.5.6.2 Parameter Description: ODU Interface_Power Attributes

This topic describes the parameters that are used for configuring the power attributes of the ODU.
Navigation Path
l l Select the ODU from the Object Tree in the NE Explorer. Choose Configuration > ODU Interface from the Function Tree. Click the Power Attributes tab.
Parameters
Parameter Board Maximum Transmit Power (dBm) Value Range Default Value Description This parameter indicates the corresponding ODU. l Maximum Transmit Power(dBm) is set according to the planning information. This parameter specifies the maximum transmit power of the ODU. This parameter cannot be set to a value that exceeds the nominal power rang of the ODU in the guaranteed capacity modulation module. l This parameter is set to limit the maximum transmit power of the ODU within this preset range. l The maximum transmit power adjusted by using the ATPC function should not exceed Maximum Transmit Power (dBm).
A-148
Issue 03 (2011-04-10)
Value Range -
Default Value -
Description l Transmit Power(dBm) is set according to the planning information. This parameter specifies the transmit power of the ODU. This parameter cannot be set to a value that exceeds the nominal power rang of the ODU or a value that exceeds Maximum Transmit Power (dBm). l It is recommended that you set the transmit power of the ODU to the same value at both ends of a radio link. l Consider the receive power of the ODU at the opposite end when you set this parameter. Ensure that the receive power of the ODU at the opposite end can ensure stable radio services.
Power to Be Received(dBm)
-90.0 to -20.0
-10.0
l Power to Be Received(dBm) is used to set the expected receive power of the ODU and is mainly used in the antenna alignment stage. After this parameter is set, the NE automatically enables the antenna misalignment indicating function. l When the antenna misalignment indicating function is enabled, if the actual receive power of the ODU is 3 dB lower than the power expected to be received, the ODU indicator on the IF board connected to the ODU blinks yellow (300 ms on, 300 ms off), indicating that the antenna is not aligned. l After the antenna alignment, after the state that the antenna is aligned lasts for 30 minutes, the NE automatically disables the antenna misalignment indicating function. l Power to Be Received(dBm) is set according to the planning information. When this parameter takes the default value, the antenna misalignment indicating function is disabled.
TX High Threshold(dBm)
l If the value of the actual transmit power of the ODU is greater than the preset value of TX High Threshold(dBm), the system separately records the duration when the value of the actual transmit power of the ODU is greater than the
Issue 03 (2011-04-10)
A-149
Parameter TX Low Threshold (dBm)
Value Range -
Default Value -
Description preset value of TX High Threshold (dBm) and the duration when the value of the actual transmit power of the ODU is greater than the preset value of TX Low Threshold(dBm) in the performance events. l If the value of the actual transmit power of the ODU is greater than the preset value of TX Low Threshold(dBm) and is lower than the preset value of TX High Threshold(dBm), the system records the duration when the value of the actual transmit power of the ODU is greater than the preset value of TX Low Threshold(dBm) in the performance events. l If the value of the actual transmit power of the ODU is lower than the preset value of TX Low Threshold(dBm), the system does not record it. l TX High Threshold(dBm) and TX Low Threshold(dBm) are valid only when the ATPC function is enabled.
RX High Threshold(dBm)
l If the value of the actual receive power of the ODU is lower than the preset value of RX Low Threshold(dBm), the system records the duration when the value of the actual receive power of the ODU is lower than the preset value of RX Low Threshold(dBm) and duration when the value of the actual transmit power of the ODU is lower than the preset value of RX High Threshold (dBm)in the performance events. l If the value of the actual receive power of the ODU is greater than the preset value of RX Low Threshold(dBm) and is lower than the preset value of RX High Threshold(dBm), the system records the duration when the value of the actual receive power of the ODU is Lower than the preset value of RX High Threshold (dBm) in the performance events. l If the value of the actual receive power of the ODU is greater than the preset
A-150
Issue 03 (2011-04-10)
Parameter RX Low Threshold (dBm)
Value Range -
Default Value -
Description value of RX High Threshold(dBm), the system does not record it.
Actual Transmit Power(dBm)
l This parameter indicates the actual transmit power of the ODU. l If the ATPC function is enabled, the queried actual transmit power may be different from the preset value.
Actual Receive Power(dBm) Actual range of Power(dBm) Transmission Power Type
This parameter indicates the actual receive power of the ODU. This parameter indicates the range of the actual transmit power of the ODU. This parameter indicates the level of the output power of the ODU.
A.5.6.3 Parameter Description: ODU Interface_Equipment Information

This topic describes the parameters that are used for configuring the equipment information of the ODU.
Navigation Path
l l Select the corresponding board from the Object Tree in the NE Explorer. Choose Configuration > ODU Interface from the Function Tree. Click the Equipment Information tab.
Issue 03 (2011-04-10)
A-151
Parameters
Parameter Board Frequency(GHz) Equipment Type Value Range Default Value Description This parameter indicates the corresponding ODU. This parameter indicates the frequency band where the ODU operates. l This parameter indicates the equipment type of the ODU. l PDH and SDH indicate the transmission capacity only and are irrelevant to the type of transmitted service. T/R Spacing(MHz) Intermediate Frequency Bandwidth (MHz) IF Bandwidth Type Station Type This parameter indicates the T/R spacing of the ODU. This parameter indicates the IF frequency bandwidth of the ODU. Displays the IF bandwidth type. l This parameter indicates whether the ODU is a Tx high station or a Tx low station. l The transmit frequency of a Tx high station is one T/R spacing higher than the transmit frequency of a Tx low station. Transmission Power Type Produce Time Produce SN This parameter indicates the level of the output power of the ODU. This parameter indicates the manufacturing time of the ODU. This parameter indicates the manufacturing serial number and the manufacturer code of the ODU.
A.5.6.4 Parameter Description: ODU Interface_Advanced Attributes

This topic describes the parameters that are used for configuring the advanced attributes of the ODU.
Navigation Path
l l
A-152
Select the ODU from the Object Tree in the NE Explorer. Choose Configuration > ODU Interface from the Function Tree. Click the Advanced Attributes tab.
Parameters
Parameter Board RF Loopback Value Range Non-Loopback Inloop Default Value Non-Loopback Description This parameter indicates the corresponding ODU. l This parameter indicates or specifies the loopback status of the RF interface of the ODU. l Non-Loopback indicates that the loopback is canceled or not performed. l Inloop indicates that the RF signals transmitted to the opposite end are looped back. l RF Loopback function is used for fault locating for the RF interfaces. The RF Loopback function is used for diagnosis and may affect the services that are transmitted over the interfaces. Hence, exercise precaution before starting this function. l In normal cases, RF Loopback is set to Non-Loopback. Configure Transmission Status unmute mute unmute l This parameter indicates or specifies the transmit status of the ODU. l If Configure Transmission Status is set to mute, the transmitter of the ODU does not work but can normally receive microwave signals. l If Configure Transmission Status is set to unmute, the ODU can normally transmit and receive microwave signals. l In normal cases, Configure Transmission Status is set to unmute. Actual Transmission Status Factory Information Remarks Displays the ODU manufacturer information. This parameter indicates the manufacturer information about the ODU. Specifies the remarks of the ODU.
A.5.7 Parameters for SDH Interface Boards

This topic describes parameters that are related to SDH interface boards. A.5.7.1 Parameter Description: SDH Interfaces
This topic describes the parameters that are related to the SDH interfaces. A.5.7.2 Parameter Description: Automatic Laser Shutdown This topic describes the parameters that are related to the automatic laser shutdown (ALS) function.
A.5.7.1 Parameter Description: SDH Interfaces

This topic describes the parameters that are related to the SDH interfaces.
Navigation Path
1. 2. Select the corresponding board from the Object Tree in the NE Explorer. Choose Configuration > SDH Interface from the Function Tree. Select By Board/Port(Channel), and select Port or VC4 Channel from the list box.
Parameters
Parameter Port Optical Interface Namea Laser Switcha Value Range On Off Default Value On Description This parameter indicates the corresponding SDH interface. This parameter indicates or specifies the name of the optical interface. l This parameter indicates or specifies the on/off state of the laser. l This parameter is set for SDH optical interfaces only. l In normal cases, this parameter is set to On. Optical(Electrical) Interface Loopbacka Non-Loopback Inloop Outloop Non-Loopback l This parameter indicates or specifies the loopback status on the SDH interface. l Non-Loopback indicates that the loopback is canceled or not performed. l Inloop indicates that the SDH signals transmitted to the opposite end are looped back. l Outloop indicates that the received SDH signals are looped back. l This function is used for fault locating for the SDH interfaces. The Optical (Electrical) Interface Loopback function is used for diagnosis and may affect the services that are transmitted over the interfaces. Hence, exercise precaution before starting this function. l In normal cases, this parameter is set to Non-Loopback.
Parameter VC4 Loopbackb
Description l This parameter indicates or specifies the loopback status in the VC-4 path. l Non-Loopback indicates that the loopback is canceled or not performed. l Inloop indicates that the VC-4 signals transmitted to the opposite end are looped back. l Outloop indicates that the received VC-4 signals are looped back. l This function is used for fault locating for the VC-4 paths. The VC4 Loopback function is used for diagnosis and may affect the services that are transmitted over the interfaces. Hence, exercise precaution before starting this function. l In normal cases, this parameter is set to Non-Loopback.
NOTE
l a: Indicates the parameters that are supported when Port is selected from the list box. l b: Indicates the parameters that are supported when VC4 Channel is selected from the list box.
A.5.7.2 Parameter Description: Automatic Laser Shutdown

This topic describes the parameters that are related to the automatic laser shutdown (ALS) function.
Navigation Path
Select the corresponding board from the Object Tree in the NE Explorer. Choose Configuration > Automatic Laser Shutdown from the Function Tree.
Parameters
Parameter Optical Interface Value Range Default Value Description This parameter indicates the corresponding optical interface.
Issue 03 (2011-04-10)
A-155
Parameter Auto Shutdown
Description l This parameter indicates or specifies whether the Auto Laser Shutdown function is enabled or disabled for the laser. l The ALS function allows the laser to shut down automatically when an optical port does not carry services, an optical fiber is broken, or no optical signal is received. l You can set On Period(ms), Off Period (ms), and Continuously On-test Period (ms) only when this parameter is set to Enabled.
On Period(ms)
1000 to 3000
2000
This parameter indicates or specifies the period when a shutdown laser automatically starts up and tests whether the optical fiber is normal. This parameter indicates or specifies the period when the laser does not work (with the ALS function being enabled). This parameter indicates or specifies the period when a shutdown laser is manually started up and tests whether the optical fiber is normal.
Off Period(ms)
2000 to 300000
60000
Continuously Ontest Period(ms)
2000 to 300000
90000
A.5.8 Parameters for PDH Interface Boards

This topic describes parameters that are related to PDH interface boards. A.5.8.1 Parameter Description: PDH Interfaces This topic describes the parameters that are related to the PDH interfaces. A.5.8.2 Parameter Description: PRBS Test This topic describes the parameters that are related to the pseudorandom binary sequence (PRBS) test.
A.5.8.1 Parameter Description: PDH Interfaces

This topic describes the parameters that are related to the PDH interfaces.
Navigation Path
1. 2. 3.
A-156
Select the corresponding board from the Object Tree in the NE Explorer. Choose Configuration > PDH Interface from the Function Tree. Select By Board/Port(Channel). Select Port from the list box.
Parameters
Parameter Port Port Name Tributary Loopback Value Range Non-Loopback Inloop Outloop Default Value Non-Loopback Description This parameter indicates the corresponding port. This parameter indicates or specifies the name of the port. l This parameter indicates or specifies the loopback status in the associated path of the tributary unit. l Non-Loopback indicates that the loopback is canceled or not performed. l Inloop indicates that the PDH signals transmitted to the opposite end are looped back. l Outloop indicates that the received PDH signals are looped back. l This function is used for fault locating for the paths of the tributary unit. The Tributary Loopback function is used for diagnosis and may affect the services that are transmitted over the interfaces. Hence, exercise precaution before starting this function. l In normal cases, this parameter is set to Non-Loopback. Port Impedance Service Load Indication Load Non-Loaded Load This parameter indicates the impedance of a path, which depends on the tributary unit. l This parameter indicates or specifies the service loading status in a specific path. l When this parameter is set to Load, the board detects whether alarms exist in the path. l When this parameter is set to NonLoaded, the board does not detect whether there are alarms in the path. l If a path does not carry any services, you can set this parameter to Non-Loaded for the path to mask all the alarms. If a path carries services, you need to set this parameter to Load for the path.
Issue 03 (2011-04-10)
A-157
Parameter Retiming Mode
Value Range Normal Retiming Mode of Tributary Clock Retiming Mode of Cross-Connect Clock
Default Value Normal
Description l This parameter indicates or specifies the retiming mode of a specific path. l By using the retiming function, the retiming reference signal from the SDH network and the service data signal are combined and then sent to the client equipment, thus decreasing the output jitter in the signal. In this way, the retiming function ensures that the service code flow can normally transfer the retiming reference signal. l When this parameter is set to Normal, the retiming function is not used. l When this parameter is set to Retiming Mode of Tributary Clock, the retiming function is used with the clock of the upstream tributary unit traced. l When this parameter is set to Retiming Mode of Cross-Connect Clock, the retiming function is used with the clock of the cross-connect unit traced. l It is recommended that the external clock, instead of the retiming function, should be used to provide reference clock signals for the equipment. l If the retiming function is required, it is recommended that you set this parameter to Retiming Mode of Cross-connect Clock.
Port Service Type
This parameter indicates the type of services that are processed in a path. It depends on the services that are transmitted in a path. l This parameter indicates whether the input signals are equalized. l It is recommended that you set this parameter to default value.
Input Signal Equalization
Unequalized Equalized
Unequalized
Output Signal Equalization
Unequalized Equalized
Unequalized
l This parameter indicates whether the output signals are equalized. l It is recommended that you use the default value.
A.5.8.2 Parameter Description: PRBS Test

This topic describes the parameters that are related to the pseudorandom binary sequence (PRBS) test.
Navigation Path
Select the corresponding board from the Object Tree in the NE Explorer. Choose Configuration > PRBS Test from the Function Tree.
Parameters
Parameter Port Direction Value Range Cross Tributary Default Value Cross Description This parameter indicates the port for the PRBS test. l This parameter indicates or specifies the direction of the PRBS test. l In the tributary direction, the PRBS test is performed to check the connectivity of the cable from the tributary board to the DDF. l In the cross-connect direction, the PRBS test is performed to check the processing of the service from the tributary board to the NE at the remote end. Duration Measured Time 1 to 255 s 10min h Start Time Progress Total PRBS Accumulating Mode Selected Deselected Deselected This parameter indicates the start time of the PRBS test. This parameter indicates the progress percentage of the PRBS test. This parameter indicates the number of bit errors that occur in the PRBS test. This parameter specifies whether to display the values in accumulative mode. If Accumulating Mode is selected, it indicates that the values are displayed in accumulative mode. 1 s This parameter indicates or specifies the duration of the PRBS test. This parameter indicates or specifies the time unit used for the PRBS test.
A.5.9 Parameters for Overhead

This topic describes the parameters that are related to overhead. A.5.9.1 Parameter Description: Regenerator Section Overhead This topic describes the parameters that are related to the regenerator section overheads (RSOHs).
A.5.9.2 Parameter Description: VC-4 POHs This topic describes the parameters that are related to the VC-4 path overheads (POHs). A.5.9.3 Parameter Description: VC-12 POHs This topic describes the parameters that are related to the VC-12 path overheads (POHs).
A.5.9.1 Parameter Description: Regenerator Section Overhead

This topic describes the parameters that are related to the regenerator section overheads (RSOHs).
Navigation Path
1. 2. Select an SDH interface board in the NE Explorer Choose Configuration > Overhead Management > Regenerator Section Overhead from the Function Tree. Choose Display in Text Format or Display in Hexadecimal.
Parameters for Setting the Display Format

Parameter Display in Text Format Display in Hexadecimal Value Range Selected Deselected Selected Deselected Deselected Default Value Selected Description This parameter specifies the display in the text format. This parameter specifies the display in the hexadecimal format.

Parameter Object J0 to be Sent ([Mode]Content) Value Range Default Value [16 Bytes]HuaWei SBS Description This parameter indicates the object to be set. If the NE at the opposite end reports the J0_MM alarm, this parameter is set according to the J0 byte to be received at the opposite end. l This parameter specifies the J0 byte to be received. l If this parameter is set to [Disabled], the board does not monitor the received J0 byte. l It is recommended that you use the default value. J0 Received ([Mode]Content) This parameter indicates the J0 byte that is actually received.
J0 to be Received ([Mode]Content)
[Disabled]
A-160
Issue 03 (2011-04-10)
A.5.9.2 Parameter Description: VC-4 POHs

This topic describes the parameters that are related to the VC-4 path overheads (POHs).
Navigation Path
1. 2. Select SDH interface board from the Object Tree in the NE Explorer. Choose Configuration > Overhead Management > VC4 Path Overhead from the Function Tree. Choose Display in Text Format or Display in Hexadecimal.

Parameters for the Trace Byte J1

Parameter Object J1 to be Sent ([Mode]Content) Value Range Default Value [16 Bytes]HuaWei SBS Description This parameter indicates the object to be set. If the NE at the opposite end reports the HP_TIM or LP_TIM alarm, this parameter is set according to the J1 byte to be received at the opposite end. l If this parameter is set to [Disabled], the board does not monitor the received J1 byte. l It is recommended that you use the default value. J1 Received ([Mode]Content) This parameter displays the J1 byte that is actually received.
J1 to be Received ([Mode]Content)
[Disabled]
Parameters for the Signal Flag C2

Parameter Object Value Range Default Value Description This parameter indicates the object to be set.
Issue 03 (2011-04-10)
A-161
Parameter C2 to be Sent
Value Range -
Default Value -
Description If the NE at the opposite end reports the HP_SLM alarm, this parameter is set according to the C2 byte to be received at the opposite end. If the NE at the local end reports the HP_SLM alarm, this parameter is set according to the C2 byte to be sent at the opposite end. This parameter displays the C2 byte that is actually received.
C2 to be Received
C2 Received
Parameters for Overhead Termination

Parameter Object VC4 Overhead Termination Value Range Termination Pass-Through Auto Default Value Auto Description This parameter indicates the object to be set. l If this parameter is set to PassThrough, the NE forwards the original overhead after monitoring the VC-4 path overhead regardless of the C2 byte. l If this parameter is set to Termination, the NE generates the new VC-4 path overhead according to the board setting after monitoring the VC-4 path overhead regardless of the C2 byte. l If this parameter is set to Auto, the VC-4 path overhead in the VC-4 pass-through service is passed through, and the VC-4 path overhead in the VC-12 service is terminated. l It is recommended that you use the default value.
A.5.9.3 Parameter Description: VC-12 POHs

This topic describes the parameters that are related to the VC-12 path overheads (POHs).
Navigation Path
1. Select the corresponding board from the Object Tree in the NE Explorer. Choose Configuration > Overhead Management > VC12 Path Overhead from the Function Tree. Choose Display in Text Format or Display in Hexadecimal.
2.
A-162

Parameters for the Trace Byte

Parameter Object J2 to be Sent Value Range Default Value [16 Bytes]HuaWei SBS Description This parameter indicates the object to be set. If the NE at the opposite end reports the LP_TIM or LP_TIM_VC12 alarm, this parameter is set according to the J2 byte to be received by the NE at the opposite end. l If this parameter is set to [Disabled], the board does not monitor the received J2 byte. l It is recommended that you use the default value.
NOTE IF boards do not support this parameter.
J2 to be Received
[Disabled]
J2 Received
This parameter displays the J2 byte that is actually received.
A.6 Parameters for Ethernet Services and Ethernet Features on the Packet Plane
This section describes the parameters for the Ethernet services and Ethernet features on the packet plane, including service parameters, protocol parameters, OAM parameters, Ethernet port parameters, and QoS parameters. A.6.1 Parameters for Ethernet Services This topic describes the parameters that are related to Ethernet services. A.6.2 Parameters for Ethernet Protocols This topic describes the parameters that are related to the Ethernet protocol. A.6.3 Parameters for the Ethernet OAM This topic describes the parameters that are related to the Ethernet operation, administration and maintenance (OAM). A.6.4 QoS Parameters
This topic describes the parameters that are related to QoS.
A.6.1 Parameters for Ethernet Services

This topic describes the parameters that are related to Ethernet services. A.6.1.1 Parameter Description: E-Line Service_Creation This topic describes the interface parameters that are used for creating an Ethernet line (E-Line) service. A.6.1.2 Parameter Description: E-Line Service This topic describes the parameters that are related to E-Line services. A.6.1.3 Parameter Description: VLAN Forwarding Table Item_Creation This topic describes the parameters that are used for creating VLAN forwarding table items. A.6.1.4 Parameter Description: E-LAN Service_Creation This topic describes the parameters that are used for creating an Ethernet local area network (ELAN) service. A.6.1.5 Parameter Description: E-LAN Service This topic describes the parameters that are related to E-LAN services. A.6.1.6 Parameter Description: QinQ Link_Creation This topic describes the parameters that are used for creating a QinQ link.
A.6.1.1 Parameter Description: E-Line Service_Creation

This topic describes the interface parameters that are used for creating an Ethernet line (E-Line) service.
Navigation Path
1. 2. Select the NE from the Object Tree in the NE Explorer. Choose Configuration > Ethernet Service Management > E-Line Service from the Function Tree. Click Create.

Table A-4 Service direction of UNI-UNI Parameter Service ID Value Range 1 to 4294967294 Default Value Description This parameter specifies the ID of the E-Line service. This parameter specifies the name of the E-Line service.
Service Name
A-164
Issue 03 (2011-04-10)
Parameter Direction
Value Range UNI-UNI UNI-NNI NNI-NNI
Default Value UNI-UNI
Description l This parameter specifies the direction of the E-Line service. l Set this parameter to UNI-UNI.
BPDU
Not Transparently Transmitted Transparently Transmitted
Not Transparently Transmitted
l This parameter specifies the transparent transmission ID of the bridge protocol data unit (BPDU) packets. It is used to indicate whether the E-Line service transparently transmits the BPDU packets. l If the BPDU packets are used as the service packets and transparently transmitted to the opposite end, set this parameter to Transparently Transmitted. That is, the parameter value Transparently Transmitted takes effect only if Encapsulation Type of the source and sink ports of the E-Line service are Null. l In other cases, set this parameter to Not Transparently Transmitted. l This parameter is set according to the planning information.
MTU(bytes) Service Tag Role
This parameter cannot be set here. The OptiX RTN 980 does not support this parameter.
Issue 03 (2011-04-10)
A-165
Parameter Source Port
Value Range -
Default Value -
Description l Before setting this parameter, check and ensure that the attributes in Ethernet Interface of the port are set correctly and are the same as the planning information. l The value of this parameter cannot be the same as the value of sink port. l The value of this parameter cannot be used for the E-LAN port. l This parameter is set according to the planning information.
A-166
Issue 03 (2011-04-10)
Parameter Source VLANs
Default Value -
Description l This parameter can be set to null, a number, or several numbers. When setting this parameter to several numbers, use the comma (,) to separate the discrete numbers, or use the endash (-) to represent a consecutive number. For example, the numbers 1, and 3-6 indicate 1, 3, 4, 5, and 6. l The number and value of VLANs must be the same value of Sink VLANs. l If this parameter is set to null, all the services at the source port are used as the service source. l If this parameter is not set to null, only the service that contains the VLAN ID at the source port can be used as the service source.
Issue 03 (2011-04-10)
A-167
Parameter Sink Port
Value Range -
Default Value -
Description l Before setting this parameter, check and ensure that the attributes in Ethernet Interface of the port are set correctly and are the same as the planning information. l The value of this parameter cannot be the same as the value of Source Port. l The value of this parameter cannot be used for the E-LAN port. l This parameter is set according to the planning information.
A-168
Issue 03 (2011-04-10)
Parameter Sink VLANs
Default Value -
Description l This parameter can be set to null, a number, or several numbers. When setting this parameter to several numbers, use the comma (,) to separate the discrete numbers, or use the endash (-) to represent a consecutive number. For example, the numbers 1, and 3-6 indicate 1, 3, 4, 5, and 6. l The number and value of VLANs must be the same value of Source VLANs. l If this parameter is set to null, all the services at the sink port are used as the service sink. l If this parameter is not set to null, only the service that contains the VLAN ID at the sink port can be used as the service sink.
Table A-5 Service direction of UNI-NNI (carried by PWs) Parameter Service ID Value Range 1 to 4294967294 Default Value Description This parameter specifies the ID of the E-Line service. This parameter specifies the name of the E-Line service. l This parameter specifies the direction of the E-Line service. l Set this parameter to UNI-NNI.
Service Name
Direction
UNI-UNI UNI-NNI NNI-NNI
UNI-UNI
Issue 03 (2011-04-10)
A-169
Parameter BPDU
Value Range Not Transparently Transmitted Transparently Transmitted
Default Value Not Transparently Transmitted
Description For UNI-NNI ETH PWE3 services, the parameter value is always Not Transparently Transmitted. This parameter cannot be set here. The OptiX RTN 980 does not support this parameter. l Before setting this parameter, check and ensure that the attributes in Ethernet Interface of the port are set correctly and are the same as the planning information. l The value of this parameter cannot be the same as the value of sink port. l The value of this parameter cannot be used for the E-LAN port. l This parameter is set according to the planning information.
Source Port
A-170
Issue 03 (2011-04-10)
Parameter Source VLANs
Default Value -
Description l This parameter can be set to null, a number, or several numbers. When setting this parameter to several numbers, use the comma (,) to separate the discrete numbers, or use the endash (-) to represent a consecutive number. For example, the numbers 1, and 3-6 indicate 1, 3, 4, 5, and 6. l If this parameter is set to null, all the services at the source port are used as the service source. l If this parameter is not set to null, only the service that contains the VLAN ID at the source port can be used as the service source.
PRI
The OptiX RTN 980 does not support this parameter. For UNI-NNI ETH PWE3 services, the parameter value is always PW.
Bearer Type
QinQ Link PW
PW
Issue 03 (2011-04-10)
A-171
Value Range No Protection PW APS Slave Protection Pair
Default Value No Protection
Description l If this parameter is set to PW APS, working and protection PWs need to be configured. l If this parameter is set to Slave Protection Pair, you need to bind the slave PW APS protection group with the master PW APS protection group. The switching of the master PW APS protection group triggers the switching of the slave PW APS protection group simultaneously.
Table A-6 Service direction of UNI-NNI (carried by QinQ links) Parameter Service ID Value Range 1 to 4294967294 Default Value Description This parameter specifies the ID of the E-Line service. This parameter specifies the name of the E-Line service. l This parameter specifies the direction of the E-Line service. l Set this parameter to UNI-NNI. Not Transparently Transmitted For UNI-NNI QinQ services, the parameter value is always Not Transparently Transmitted. This parameter cannot be set here. The OptiX RTN 980 does not support this parameter.
Service Name
Direction
UNI-UNI
BPDU
A-172
Issue 03 (2011-04-10)
Parameter Source Port
Value Range -
Default Value -
Description l Before setting this parameter, check and ensure that the attributes in Ethernet Interface of the port are set correctly and are the same as the planning information. l The value of this parameter cannot be the same as the value of sink port. l The value of this parameter cannot be used for the E-LAN port. l This parameter is set according to the planning information.
Source VLANs
1 to 4094
l This parameter can be set to null, a number, or several numbers. When setting this parameter to several numbers, use the comma (,) to separate the discrete numbers, or use the endash (-) to represent a consecutive number. For example, the numbers 1, and 3-6 indicate 1, 3, 4, 5, and 6. l If this parameter is set to null, all the services at the source port are used as the service source. l If this parameter is not set to null, only the service that contains the VLAN ID at the source port can be used as the service source.
Issue 03 (2011-04-10)
A-173
Parameter PRI
Value Range -
Default Value -
Description The OptiX RTN 980 does not support this parameter. For NNI-NNI QinQ services, the parameter value is always QinQ Link. Selects or specifies the ID of a QinQ link. You can create a QinQ link or select an existing QinQ link.
Bearer Type
QinQ Link PW
PW
QinQ Link ID
Table A-7 Service direction of NNI-NNI Parameter Service ID Value Range 1 to 4294967294 Default Value Description This parameter specifies the ID of the E-Line service. This parameter specifies the name of the E-Line service. l This parameter specifies the direction of the E-Line service. l Set this parameter to NNI-NNI. Not Transparently Transmitted For NNI-NNI QinQ services, the parameter value is always Not Transparently Transmitted . This parameter cannot be set here. The OptiX RTN 980 does not support this parameter. The OptiX RTN 980 does not support this parameter.
Service Name
Direction
UNI-UNI
BPDU
PRI
A-174
Issue 03 (2011-04-10)
Parameter Bearer Type 1 QinQ Link ID 1
Value Range QinQ Link -
Default Value QinQ Link -
Description Uses the QinQ link to carry the E-Line service. l Selects the QinQ link ID of the first QinQ link. l The QinQ link ID is preset in QinQ Link.
Bearer Type 2 QinQ Link ID 2
QinQ Link -
QinQ Link -
Uses the QinQ link to carry the E-Line service. l Selects the QinQ link ID of the second QinQ link. l The QinQ link ID is preset in QinQ Link.
QinQ Link ID
Selects or specifies the ID of a QinQ link. You can create a QinQ link or select an existing QinQ link.
Parameters of PWs
NOTE
l Parameters of PWs need to be configured only when Direction is UNI-NNI and Bearer Type is PW. l If the parameter Protection Type of PWs is set to PW APS or Slave Protection Pair, all the parameters of working and protection PWs need to be configured. This section considers the parameters of the working PW as an example.
Parameter PW ID PW Signaling Type
Value Range Static
Default Value Static
Description Specifies the ID of the PW that carries services. Labels for static PWs need to be manually assigned.
Issue 03 (2011-04-10)
A-175
Parameter PW Type
Value Range Ethernet Ethernet Tagged Mode
Default Value Ethernet
Description l Specifies the type of the PW. l PW Type indicates whether P-TAG is added to Ethernet frames that are encapsulated for transmission on PWs. If it is not required to add VLAN IDs, set this parameter to Ethernet. If it is required to add VLAN IDs, set this parameter to Ethernet Tagged Mode and then set Request VLAN in the Advanced Attributes tab.
PW Direction PW Encapsulation Type
Bidirectional MPLS
Bidirectional MPLS
Displays the direction of the PW. Displays the encapsulation type of the packets on the PW. Specifies the PW Ingress label. Specifies the PW Egress label. Displays the method to select tunnels. Displays the type of the tunnel that carries the PW. A tunnel needs to be selected. If no tunnel is available, creation of a PW will fail. For a bidirectional tunnel, the system will configure the egress tunnel automatically.
PW Ingress Label/ Source Port PW Egress Label/Sink Port Tunnel selection mode Tunnel Type Tunnel
16 to 1048575 16 to 1048575 MPLS -
MPLS -
Egress Tunnel
A-176
Issue 03 (2011-04-10)
Parameter Peer LSR ID
Value Range -
Default Value -
Description Specifies the LSR ID of the PW at the remote end. If an existing tunnel is selected, the LSR ID will be automatically assigned.
QoS Parameters (PW)

NOTE
QoS parameters need to be configured only when Direction is UNI-NNI and Bearer Type is PW.
Parameter Bandwidth Limit
Value Range -
Default Value -
Description Specifies whether the bandwidth limit function is enabled. l This function limits the bandwidth of one or more PWs in an MPLS tunnel. l An ETH PWE3 service corresponds to a PW. Therefore, this function can also limit the bandwidth of ETH PWE3 services in an MPLS tunnel.
Policy CIR(Kbit/s)
The OptiX RTN 980 does not support this parameter. Specifies the committed information rate (CIR) of a PW. It is recommended that you set this parameter to the same value as PIR.
CBS(byte) PIR(Kbit/s)
Specifies the committed burst size (CBS) of a PW. Specifies the peak information rate (PIR) of a PW. It is recommended that you set this parameter to the same value as CIR.
Issue 03 (2011-04-10)
A-177
Parameter PBS(byte) EXP LSP Mode
Value Range Pipe
Default Value Pipe
Description Specifies the peak burst size (PBS) of a PW. The OptiX RTN 980 does not support this parameter. Pipe: When stripping MPLS tunnel labels from packets, an egress node does not update the scheduling priority for the packets.
Parameters of Advanced Attributes (PW)

Parameter Control Word Value Range No Use Default Value No Use Description For ETH PWE3 services, the parameter value is always No Use. l Specifies the mode of PW connectivity check. l None indicates that VCCV is not used. l Alert Label indicates VCCV packets in Alert Label encapsulation mode. VCCV Verification Mode Ping None Ping l Specifies the VCCV verification mode. The VCCV verification is used for PW connectivity check. l If the VCCV-Ping test is required, do not set this parameter to None.
Control Channel Type
None Alert Label
Alert Label
A-178
Issue 03 (2011-04-10)
Parameter Request VLAN
Value Range -
Default Value -
Description l Set this parameter when PW Type is Ethernet Tagged Mode. l If the received packets do not carry any VLAN IDs, the PW will add VLAN IDs to the packets as required by the setting of this parameter.
TPID
The OptiX RTN 980 does not support request VLAN TPID of the PW level.
Protection Group Parameters (PW APS)

NOTE
The parameters of the PW APS protection group need to be configured if the Protection Type of PWs is set to PW APS.
Parameter Protection Type Protection Group ID Enabling Status
Description Specifies the protection type. Specifies the protection group ID. l Specifies the enabling status of the PW protection group. l During the creation of a protection group, set Enabling Status to Disabled. After the APS protection group is configured at both ends, set Enabling Status to Enabled.
Protection Mode
Displays the protection mode.

NOTE The OptiX RTN 980 supports 1:1 protection mode.
Issue 03 (2011-04-10)
A-179
Parameter Working PW ID Protection PW ID Switching Mode
Value Range -
Default Value -
Description Displays the ID of the working PW. Displays the ID of the protection PW. Displays the switching mode to be used when a PW fails.
NOTE The OptiX RTN 980 supports dual-ended switching.
Revertive Mode
Non-revertive Revertive
Revertive
l This parameter specifies whether to switch services back to the original working PW after it recovers. l The value Revertive indicates that services are switched to the original working PW and the value Nonrevertive indicates that services are not switched to the original working PW. l The value Revertive is recommended.
Switchover Restoration Time(min)
1 to 12
l Specifies the WTR time of the protection group. l When the preset WTR time expires after the original working PW recovers, services are switched to the original working PW. l This parameter is available only when Restoration Mode is Revertive. l The default value is recommended.
A-180
Issue 03 (2011-04-10)
Parameter Switchover Delay Time (100ms)
Default Value 0
Description l Specifies the hold-off time of the protection group. l If this parameter is set to a value other than 0, the protection group does not trigger switching once it detects faults, but waits until the hold-off time expires, and then detects whether any faults persist. If any faults persist, the switching is triggered; otherwise, no switching is triggered. l The default value is recommended.
Detection mode
Displays the detection mode of the PW APS protection group.
OAM Parameters
NOTE
l The OAM parameters of the PW APS protection group need to be configured if the Protection Type of PWs is set to PW APS. l To configure PW OAM parameters, choose Configuration > MPLS Management > PW Management > PW OAM Parameter from the Function Tree.
Parameter OAM Status
Value Range -
Default Value -
Description Displays the enabling status of PW OAM.
Issue 03 (2011-04-10)
A-181
Parameter Detection Mode
Value Range Auto-Sensing Manual
Default Value Auto-Sensing
Description l Specifies the detection mode of OAM packets. l Manual: The connectivity check (CC) packets are sent at the interval specified by the user. l Auto-Sensing: The connectivity check (CC) packets are sent at the interval of receiving PW OAM packets. l If Detection Mode is set to Manual, you need to set the PW OAM detection packets to be received and transmitted. l The value AutoSensing is recommended.
A-182
Issue 03 (2011-04-10)
Parameter Detection Packet Type
Value Range CV FFD
Default Value CV
Description l CV: The detection packets are sent at a fixed interval. l FFD: The detection packets are sent at the interval specified by the user. l If Detection Mode is set to Auto-Sensing, this parameter specifies the PW OAM detection packets to be transmitted. l If Detection Mode is set to Manual, this parameter specifies the PW OAM detection packets to be received and transmitted. l The value FFD is assumed for PW APS and the value CV is assumed for continuous connectivity check on PWs.
Detection Packet Period (ms)
3.3 10 20 50 100 200 500
50
l Specifies the period of detection packets. l This parameter is configurable when Detection Packet Type is FFD and assumes the fixed value of 1000 when Detection Packet Type is CV. l Set this parameter to 3.3 for PW APS.
LSR ID to be Received PW ID to be Received
Specifies the LSR ID to be received. Specifies the PW ID to be received.
Issue 03 (2011-04-10)
A-183
Protection Group Parameters (Slave Protection Pair)

NOTE
The parameters of the PW APS protection group need to be configured if the Protection Type of PWs is set to Slave Protection Pair.
Parameter Protection Mode Protection Group ID
Value Range -
Default Value -
Description Displays the protection mode. Specifies the ID of the slave protection pair. The switching of the master PW APS protection group triggers the switching of the slave PW APS protection group simultaneously. Displays the ID of the working PW in the slave protection pair. Displays the ID of the protection PW in the slave protection pair.
Working PW ID
Protection PW ID
A.6.1.2 Parameter Description: E-Line Service

This topic describes the parameters that are related to E-Line services.
Navigation Path
Select the NE from the Object Tree in the NE Explorer. Choose Configuration > Ethernet Service Management > E-Line Service from the Function Tree.

Parameter Service ID Value Range 1 to 4294967294 Default Value Description This parameter indicates the ID of the E-Line service. This parameter indicates or specifies the name of the E-Line service. This parameter indicates the source node.
Service Name
Source Node
A-184
Issue 03 (2011-04-10)
Parameter Sink Node Service Tag Role
Value Range -
Default Value -
Description This parameter indicates the sink node. The OptiX RTN 980 does not support this parameter. This parameter cannot be queried here. This parameter indicates the transparent transmission tag of the bridge protocol data unit (BPDU) packets. This parameter is used to indicate whether the Ethernet line transparently transmits the BPDU packets. This parameter indicates whether E-Line service is deployed.
MTU(byte) BPDU
Deployment Status
Parameters Associated with UNI Ports

Parameter Port Value Range Default Value Description This parameter indicates the UNI port.
Issue 03 (2011-04-10)
A-185
Parameter VLANs
Default Value -
Description This parameter indicates or specifies the VLAN ID of the UNI port. l This parameter can be set to null, a number, or several numbers. When setting this parameter to several numbers, use the comma (,) to separate the discrete numbers, or use the endash (-) to represent a consecutive number. For example, the numbers 1, and 3-6 indicate 1, 3, 4, 5, and 6. l This parameter is valid only when Direction is set to UNI-UNI or UNI-NNI in the process of creating an E-Line service. l If this parameter is set to null, all the services of the UNI work as the service source or service sink. l If this parameter is not set to null, only the services of the UNI port whose VLAN IDs are included in the set value of this parameter work as the service source or service sink.
NNI Parameters (PW)

Parameter PW ID Working Status Value Range Default Value Description This parameter displays the PW ID. This parameter displays the working status of a PW.
Issue 03 (2011-04-10)
A-186
Parameter Enable Status PW Signaling Type
Value Range -
Default Value -
Description This parameter displays whether a PW is enabled. This parameter displays the PW signaling type.
NOTE The OptiX RTN 980 uses static PWs only.
PW Type PW Direction PW Encapsulation Type
This parameter displays the configured PW type. This parameter displays the direction of the PW. This parameter displays the PW encapsulation type.
NOTE The OptiX RTN 980 uses MPLS only.
PW Ingress Label/ Source Port PW Egress Label/Sink Port Tunnel Type
This parameter displays the configured PW ingress label. This parameter displays the configured PW egress label. This parameter displays the type of the tunnel that carries a PW. This parameter displays the opposite LSR ID. This parameter displays the tunnel. For ETH PWE3 services, the parameter value is always No Use. This parameter displays the control channel type. This parameter displays the VCCV mode. Displays the working status of the PW at the local end.
MPLS
MPLS
Peer LSR ID Tunnel Control Word
Control Channel Type VCCV Verification Mode Local Working Status
Issue 03 (2011-04-10)
A-187
Parameter Remote Working Status
Value Range -
Default Value -
Description This parameter displays the working status of the PW at the remote end. This parameter displays the comprehensive working status of the PW. This parameter displays the request VLAN. This parameter displays the deployment status. This parameter displays the automatic tunnel selection policy. The OptiX RTN 980 does not support request VLAN TPID of the PW level.
Compositive Working Status Request VLAN Deployment Status Tunnel Automatic Selection Policy TPID
Parameters Associated with NNI Ports

Parameter QinQ Link ID Value Range 1 to 4294967295 Default Value Description l This parameter indicates the QinQ link ID of the QinQ link connected to the NNI port. l This parameter is valid only when Direction is set to UNI-UNI or UNI-NNI in the process of creating an E-Line service. Port l This parameter indicates the NNI port. l This parameter is valid only when Direction is set to UNI-UNI or UNI-NNI in the process of creating an E-Line service.
A-188
Issue 03 (2011-04-10)
Parameter S-VLAN ID
Value Range -
Default Value -
Description l This parameter indicates or specifies the VLAN ID of the NNI port. l This parameter is valid only when Direction is set to UNI-NNI or NNI-NNI in the process of creating an E-Line service. l This parameter is preset in QinQ Link.
QoS Parameters
Parameter PW ID Direction Value Range Default Value Description This parameter displays the PW ID. l This parameter displays the direction of the PW. l Egress indicates the egress direction of the PW. l Ingress indicates the ingress direction of the PW.
Issue 03 (2011-04-10)
A-189
Parameter Bandwidth Limit
Value Range -
Default Value -
Description This parameter displays or specifies whether the bandwidth limit function is enabled for a PW to prevent network congestion. l Regarding transmission channels, this function can be used to limit the bandwidth of one or more PWs in an MPLS tunnel. l An ETH PWE3 service corresponds to a PW. Therefore, this function can also limit the bandwidth of ETH PWE3 services in an MPLS tunnel.
Policy
The OptiX RTN 980 does not support this parameter. This parameter displays or specifies the committed information rate (CIR) of a PW. It is recommended that you set this parameter to the same value as PIR.
CIR (Kbit/s)
CBS (kbyte)
This parameter displays or specifies the committed burst size (CBS) of a PW. This parameter displays or specifies the peak information rate (PIR) of a PW. It is recommended that you set this parameter to the same value as CIR.
PIR (kbit/s)
PBS (kbyte)
This parameter displays or specifies the peak burst size (PBS) of a PW.
A-190
Issue 03 (2011-04-10)
Parameter EXP
Value Range -
Default Value -
Description The OptiX RTN 980 does not support this parameter. Pipe: When stripping MPLS tunnel labels from packets, an egress node does not update the scheduling priority for the packets.
LSP Mode
Pipe
Pipe
Parameters for the Port Attributes

Parameter Port Enable Port Value Range Default Value Description Displays the port information. l This parameter indicates whether to enable the port. l This parameter is preset in General Attributes of Ethernet Interface.
Issue 03 (2011-04-10)
A-191
Value Range Null 802.1Q QinQ
Default Value -
Description l This parameter indicates the encapsulation type of the port. l This parameter is valid only when Direction is set to UNI-UNI or UNI-NNI in the process of creating an E-Line service. l If this parameter is set to Null, the port transparently transmits the received packets. l If this parameter is set to 802.1Q, the port identifies the packets that comply with the IEEE 802.1Q standard. l If this parameter is set to QinQ, the port identifies the packets that comply with the IEEE 802.1 QinQ standard. l This parameter is preset in General Attributes of Ethernet Interface.
TAG
l This parameter displays the tag of the port. l This parameter is preset in Layer 2 Attributes of Ethernet Interface .

NOTE
The following parameters are available only after the PW APS protection group is configured.
A-192
Issue 03 (2011-04-10)
Value Range -
Default Value -
Description Displays the ID of the protection group to be created. Displays the ID of the working PW. Displays the ID of the protection PW. Displays the protection mode. l Displays or specifies the enabling status of the PW protection group. l During the creation of a protection group, set Enabling Status to Disabled. After the APS protection group is configured at both ends, set Enabling Status to Enabled.
Working PW ID Protection PW ID Protection Mode Enabling Status
Enabled Disabled
Switchover Mode
Displays the switching mode to be used when a PW fails.

NOTE The OptiX RTN 980 supporting dual-ended switching.
Restoration Mode
l Specifies whether to switch services to the original working PW after the fault is rectified. l The value Revertive indicates that services are switched to the original working PW and the value Nonrevertive indicates that services are not switched to the original working PW. l The value Revertive is recommended.
Issue 03 (2011-04-10)
A-193
Parameter Switchover Restoration Time(min)
Value Range 1 to 12
Default Value -
Description l Displays or specifies the WTR time of the protection group. l When the preset WTR time expires after the original working PW recovers, services are switched to the original working PW. l This parameter is available only when Restoration Mode is Revertive.
Switchover Delay Time (100ms)
0 to 100
l Displays or specifies the hold-off time of the protection group. l If this parameter is set to a value other than 0, the protection group does not trigger switching once it detects faults, but waits until the hold-off time expires, and then detects whether any faults persist. If any faults persist, the switching is triggered; otherwise, no switching is triggered.
Deployment Status
Display the deployment status of the protection group. Displays the switchover status of the protection group. Displays the enabling status of the protocol. Displays the status of the current working path. Display the status of the current protection path.
Switchover Status
Protocol Status Working Path Status Protection Path Status
A-194
Issue 03 (2011-04-10)

NOTE
The following parameters are available only after the slave protection pair is configured.
Value Range -
Default Value -
Description Specifies the ID of the slave protection pair. The switching of the master PW APS protection group triggers the switching of the slave PW APS protection group simultaneously. Displays the ID of the working PW in the slave protection pair. Displays the ID of the protection PW in the slave protection pair. Displays the DNI PW ID. Displays the PW type. Displays the deployment status of the slave protection pair.
Working PW ID
Protection PW ID
DNI PW ID PW Type Deployment Status
A.6.1.3 Parameter Description: VLAN Forwarding Table Item_Creation

This topic describes the parameters that are used for creating VLAN forwarding table items.
Navigation Path
1. 2. 3. Select the NE from the Object Tree in the NE Explorer. Choose Configuration > Ethernet Service Management > E-Line Service from the Function Tree. Click the VLAN Forwarding Table Item tab. Click New.
Parameters for VLAN Forwarding Table Item

Parameter Source Interface Type Value Range V-UNI Default Value V-UNI Description This parameter specifies the network attribute of the source interface. This parameter specifies the source interface.
A-195
Source Interface
Issue 03 (2011-04-10)
Parameter Source VLAN ID
Default Value -
Description This parameter specifies the VLAN ID of the source service. This parameter specifies the network attribute of the sink interface. This parameter specifies the sink interface. This parameter specifies the VLAN ID of the sink service.
Sink Interface Type
V-UNI
V-UNI
Sink Interface Sink VLAN ID
1 to 4094
NOTE
l The VLAN ID of the UNI-UNI E-Line service can be converted after a VLAN forwarding table item is created. In this case, a service from Source Interface to Sink Interface carries the VLAN ID specified in Sink VLAN ID when the service is transmitted from Sink Interface. l The VLAN ID in a VLAN forwarding table item is converted unidirectionally and can be converted from Source VLAN ID to Sink VLAN ID only. The VLAN ID can be converted bidirectionally only when the other VLAN forwarding table item is configured reversely. l In normal cases, Ethernet services are bidirectional. Hence, you need to set bidirectional conversion of VLAN IDs.
A.6.1.4 Parameter Description: E-LAN Service_Creation

This topic describes the parameters that are used for creating an Ethernet local area network (ELAN) service.
Navigation Path
1. 2. Select the NE from the Object Tree in the NE Explorer. Choose Configuration > Ethernet Service Management > E-LAN Service from the Function Tree. Click New.

Parameter Service ID Value Range 1 to 4294967294 Default Value Description l This parameter specifies the ID of the E-LAN service. l The OptiX RTN 980 supports simultaneous creation of an E-LAN service only.
A-196
Issue 03 (2011-04-10)
Parameter Service Name
Value Range -
Default Value -
Description This parameter specifies the name of the E-LAN service. l This parameter indicates the transparent transmission tag of the BPDU packets. l In the case of an ELAN service, this parameter supports only Not Transparently Transmitted and cannot be set manually. l Not Transparently Transmitted indicates that the BPDU packets are used as the protocol packets to compute the spanning tree topology of the network.
BPDU
Issue 03 (2011-04-10)
A-197
Parameter Tag Type
Value Range C-Awared S-Awared Tag-Transparent
Default Value C-Awared
Description l C-Awared indicates that the packets are learnt according to CTag (the VLAN tag on the client-side). To create the 802.1q bridge, set this parameter to CAwared. l S-Awared indicates that the packets are learnt according to STag (the VLAN tag at the carrier service layer). To create the 802.1ad bridge, set this parameter to SAwared. l Tag-Transparent indicates that the packets are transparently transmitted. To create the 802.1d bridge, set this parameter to TagTransparent. l This parameter is set according to the planning information.
A-198
Issue 03 (2011-04-10)
Parameter Self-Learning MAC Address
Description l This parameter specifies whether to enable the MAC address self-learning function. l If the MAC selflearning function of an Ethernet LAN is enabled, the Ethernet LAN learns an MAC address according to the original MAC address in the packet and automatically refreshes the MAC address forwarding table. l If the MAC selflearning function of an Ethernet LAN is disabled, a static MAC address forwarding table is recommended to be configured.
MAC Address Learning Mode
IVL SVL
l This parameter indicates the mode used to learn an MAC address. l When the bridge uses the SVL mode, all the VLANs share one MAC address table. If the bridge uses the IVL mode, each VLAN has an MAC address table.
Deployment Status
This parameter indicates whether E-LAN service is deployed. This parameter cannot be set here. The OptiX RTN 980 does not support this parameter.
MTU(byte) Service Tag Role
Issue 03 (2011-04-10)
A-199
Parameters for UNIs

Parameter Port SVLAN Value Range 1 to 4094 Default Value Description This parameter indicates the UNI port. l This parameter specifies the S-VLAN ID of the UNI port. l This parameter is valid only when Tag Type is set to S-Awared. l This parameter is set according to the planning information. VLANs/CVLAN 1 to 4094 l This parameter specifies the VLAN ID of the UNI port. l This parameter can be set to null, a number, or several numbers. When setting this parameter to several numbers, use the comma (,) to separate the discrete numbers, or use the endash (-) to represent a consecutive number. For example, the numbers 1, and 3-6 indicate 1, 3, 4, 5, and 6. l If this parameter is set to null, all the services of the UNI work as the service source or service sink. l If this parameter is not set to null, only the services of the UNI port whose VLAN IDs are included in the set value of this parameter work as the service source or service sink.
A-200
Issue 03 (2011-04-10)
Parameters of NNIs
Parameter Port Value Range Default Value Description l This parameter indicates the NNI port. l This parameter is valid only when Tag Type is set to S-Awared. SVLANs l This parameter specifies the S-VLAN ID of the NNI port. l This parameter is valid only when Tag Type is set to S-Awared.
Parameters for the Split Horizon Group

Parameter Split Horizon Group ID Value Range Default Value 1 Description l This parameter indicates the ID of the split horizon group. l The default split horizon group ID is 1 and cannot be set manually.
Issue 03 (2011-04-10)
A-201
Parameter Split Horizon Group Member
Value Range -
Default Value -
Description l A split horizon group member indicates the logical port member in the split horizon group. l The port members that are added to the same split horizon group cannot communicate with each other. l The OptiX RTN 980 supports only the division of the split horizon group members according to the Ethernet physical port. l If a UNI or NNI logical port of the 802.1ad bridge is added to a split horizon group member, the physical port that is mounted with the logical port is automatically added to the split horizon group member.
A.6.1.5 Parameter Description: E-LAN Service

This topic describes the parameters that are related to E-LAN services.
Navigation Path
Select the NE from the Object Tree in the NE Explorer. Choose Configuration > Ethernet Service Management > E-LAN Service from the Function Tree.
A-202
Issue 03 (2011-04-10)

Parameter Service ID Value Range 1 to 4294967294 Default Value Description l This parameter indicates the ID of the E-LAN service. l The supports simultaneous creation of an E-LAN service only. Service Name This parameter specifies the name of the E-LAN service. l This parameter indicates the transparent transmission tag of the BPDU packets. l In the case of an ELAN service, this parameter supports only Not Transparently Transmitted and cannot be set manually. l Not Transparently Transmitted indicates that the BPDU packets are used as the protocol packets to compute the spanning tree topology of the network.
BPDU
Issue 03 (2011-04-10)
A-203
Parameter Tag Type
Value Range C-Awared S-Awared Tag-Transparent
Default Value C-Awared
Description l C-Awared indicates that the packets are learnt according to CTag (the VLAN tag on the client-side). To create the 802.1q bridge, set this parameter to CAwared. l S-Awared indicates that the packets are learnt according to STag (the VLAN tag at the carrier service layer). To create the 802.1ad bridge, set this parameter to SAwared. l Tag-Transparent indicates that the packets are transparently transmitted. To create the 802.1d bridge, set this parameter to TagTransparent.
A-204
Issue 03 (2011-04-10)
Parameter Self-Learning MAC Address
Value Range Enabled
Description l This parameter indicates whether to enable the MAC address self-learning function. l If the MAC selflearning function of an Ethernet LAN is enabled, the Ethernet LAN learns an MAC address according to the original MAC address in the packet and automatically refreshes the MAC address forwarding table. l If the MAC selflearning function of an Ethernet LAN is disabled, a static MAC address forwarding table is recommended to be configured.
MAC Address Learning Mode
l This parameter indicates the mode used to learn an MAC address. l When the bridge uses the SVL mode, all the VLANs share one MAC address table. If the bridge uses the IVL mode, each VLAN has an MAC address table.
MTU(byte) Service Tag Role
This parameter cannot be queried here. The OptiX RTN 980 does not support this parameter. This parameter indicates whether E-LAN service is deployed.
Deployment Status
Issue 03 (2011-04-10)
A-205
Parameters for UNIs

Parameter Port SVLAN Value Range 1 to 4094 Default Value Description This parameter indicates the UNI port. l This parameter specifies the S-VLAN ID of the UNI port. l This parameter is valid only when Tag Type is set to S-Awared. l This parameter is set according to the planning information. VLANs/CVLAN 1 to 4094 l This parameter specifies the VLAN ID of the UNI port. l This parameter can be set to null, a number, or several numbers. When setting this parameter to several numbers, use the comma (,) to separate the discrete numbers, or use the endash (-) to represent a consecutive number. For example, the numbers 1, and 3-6 indicate 1, 3, 4, 5, and 6. l If this parameter is set to null, the E-LAN service exclusively uses the corresponding UNI physical port. That is, the entire port is mounted to the bridge. l If this parameter is set to a non-null value, only the corresponding UNI port whose service packets contain this VLAN ID works as the logical port and is mounted to the bridge.
A-206
Issue 03 (2011-04-10)
Parameters for NNIs

Parameter Port Value Range Default Value Description l This parameter indicates the NNI port. l This parameter is valid only when Tag Type is set to S-Awared. SVLANs l This parameter specifies the S-VLAN ID of the UNI port. l This parameter is valid only when Tag Type is set to S-Awared. l This parameter can be set to null, a number, or several numbers. When setting this parameter to several numbers, use the comma (,) to separate the discrete numbers, or use the endash (-) to represent a consecutive number. For example, the numbers 1, and 3-6 indicate 1, 3, 4, 5, and 6.
Issue 03 (2011-04-10)
A-207
Parameters for Static MAC Addresses

Parameter VLAN ID Value Range Default Value Description l This parameter is invalid if MAC Address Learning Mode is SVL. That is, the preset static MAC address entries are valid for all VLANs. l If MAC Address Learning Mode is set to IVL, the preset static MAC address entries are valid for only the VLANs whose VLAN ID is equal to the preset VLAN ID. l This parameter is set according to the planning information. MAC Address l This parameter indicates or specifies the static MAC address. l A static MAC address is an address that is set manually. It is not aged automatically and needs to be deleted manually. l Generally, a static MAC address is used for the port that receives but does not forward Ethernet service packets or the port whose MAC address need not be aged automatically. Egress Interface l This parameter specifies the Ethernet port that corresponds to the MAC address. l This parameter is set according to the planning information.
A-208
Issue 03 (2011-04-10)
Parameters for Self-Learning MAC Address

Parameter VLAN ID Value Range Default Value Description l This parameter is invalid if MAC Address Learning Mode is SVL. That is, the preset self-learning MAC address entries are valid for all VLANs. l If MAC Address Learning Mode is set to IVL, the preset selflearning MAC address entries are valid for only the VLANs whose VLAN ID is equal to the preset VLAN ID. l This parameter is set according to the planning information. MAC Address l This parameter indicates or specifies the self-learning MAC address. A selflearning MAC address is also called a dynamic MAC address. l A self-learning MAC address is an entry obtained by a bridge in SVL or IVL learning mode. A self-learning MAC address can be aged. Egress Interface l This parameter specifies the Ethernet port that corresponds to the MAC address. l This parameter is set according to the planning information.
Issue 03 (2011-04-10)
A-209
Parameters Associated with MAC Address Learning

Parameter Aging Ability Value Range Enabled Disabled Aging Time(min) 1 to 65535 5 Default Value Enabled Description The OptiX RTN 980 supports enabling/ disabling of the aging function and aging time for the MAC address table. If one routing entry is not updated in a certain period, that is, if no new packet from this MAC address is received to enable the re-learning of this MAC address, this routing entry is automatically deleted. This mechanism is called aging, and this period is called aging time. The aging time of a MAC address table is 5 minutes by default.
Parameters for Disabled MAC Addresses

Parameter VLAN ID Value Range Default Value Description This parameter indicates or specifies the VLAN ID of the service. A disabled MAC address is valid for the VLAN whose VLAN ID is equal to the preset VLAN ID.
A-210
Issue 03 (2011-04-10)
Parameter MAC Address
Value Range -
Default Value -
Description l This parameter specifies or indicates the disabled MAC address. A disabled MAC address is also called a blacklisted MAC address. l This parameter is used for discarding an entry, also called a black hole entry, whose data frame that contains a specific destination MAC address. A disabled MAC address needs to be set manually and cannot be aged.
Parameters for the Split Horizon Group

Parameter Split Horizon Group ID Value Range Default Value 1 Description l This parameter indicates the ID of the split horizon group. l The default split horizon group ID is 1 and cannot be set manually.
Issue 03 (2011-04-10)
A-211
Parameter Split Horizon Group Member
Value Range -
Default Value -
Description l A split horizon group member indicates the logical port member in the split horizon group. l The port members that are added to different split horizon groups cannot communicate with each other. l The supports only the division of the split horizon group members according to the Ethernet physical port. l If a UNI or NNI logical port of the 802.1ad bridge is added to a split horizon group member, the physical port that is mounted with the logical port is automatically added to the split horizon group member.
Parameters for Unknown Frame Processing

Parameter Frame Type Value Range Unicast Multicast Handing Mode Discard Broadcast Broadcast Default Value Description This parameter indicates the type of the received unknown frame. Selects the method of processing the unknown frame. If this parameter is set to Discard, the unknown frame is directly discarded. If this parameter is set to Broadcast, the unknown frame is broadcast at the forwarding port.
A-212
Issue 03 (2011-04-10)
A.6.1.6 Parameter Description: QinQ Link_Creation

This topic describes the parameters that are used for creating a QinQ link.
Navigation Path
1. 2. Select the NE from the Object Tree in the NE Explorer. Choose Configuration > Ethernet Service Management > QinQ Link from the Function Tree. Click New.
Parameters for the General Attributes

Parameter QinQ Link ID Value Range 1 to 4294967295 Default Value Description This parameter specifies the ID of the QinQ link.
NOTE The OptiX RTN 980 supports 1024 QinQ links, whose IDs must be different from each other.
Board
This parameter specifies the board where the QinQ link is located. This parameter specifies the port where the QinQ link is located. l This parameter specifies the VLAN ID (at the network operator side) for the QinQ link. l This parameter is set according to the planning information.
Port
S-Vlan ID
1 to 4094
A.6.2 Parameters for Ethernet Protocols

This topic describes the parameters that are related to the Ethernet protocol. A.6.2.1 Parameter Description: ERPS Management_Creation This topic describes the parameters that are used for creating ERPS management tasks. A.6.2.2 Parameter Description: ERPS Management This topic describes the parameters that are used for Ethernet ring protection switching (ERPS) management. A.6.2.3 Parameter Description: MSTP Configuration_Port Group Creation This topic describes the parameters that are used for creating MSTP port groups.
A.6.2.4 Parameter Description: MSTP Configuration_Port Group Configuration This topic describes the parameters that are used for creating MSTP port groups. A.6.2.5 Parameter Description: MSTP Configuration_ Bridge Parameters This topic describes the parameters that are related to MSTP bridges. A.6.2.6 Parameter Description: MSTP Configuration_CIST Parameters This topic describes the parameters that are related to the MSTP CIST. A.6.2.7 Parameter Description: MSTP Configuration_Running Information About the CIST This topic describes the parameters that are related to the running information about the MSTP CIST. A.6.2.8 Parameter Description: Ethernet Link Aggregation Management_LAG Creation This topic describes the parameters that are used for creating a link aggregation group (LAG). A.6.2.9 Parameter Description: Ethernet Link Aggregation_Link Aggregation This section describes the parameters for port priorities and system priorities. A.6.2.10 Parameter Description: LPT Management_Point-to-Point LPT This topic describes the parameters that are related to point-to-point LPT. A.6.2.11 Parameter Description: LPT Management_Creating Point-to-Point LPT This topic describes the parameters that are related to creating point-to-point LPT. A.6.2.12 Parameter Description: LPT Management_Point-to-Multipoint LPT This topic describes the parameters that are related to point-to-multipoint LPT. A.6.2.13 Parameter Description: LPT Management_Creating Point-to-Multipoint LPT This topic describes the parameters that are related to creating point-to-multipoint LPT.
A.6.2.1 Parameter Description: ERPS Management_Creation

This topic describes the parameters that are used for creating ERPS management tasks.
Navigation Path
1. 2. Select the NE from the Object Tree in the NE Explorer. Choose Configuration > Ethernet Protection > ERPS Management. Click New.
Parameters
Parameter ERPS ID Value Range 1 to 8 Default Value Description l This parameter specifies the ID of the Ethernet ring protection switching (ERPS) instance. l The IDs of ERPS instances on an NE must be different from each other.
A-214
Issue 03 (2011-04-10)
Parameter East Port
Value Range -
Default Value -
Description This parameter specifies the east port of the ERPS instance. This parameter specifies the west port of the ERPS instance. l This parameter specifies whether the node on the ring is the ring protection link (RPL) owner. l Only one node on the ring can be set as the RPL owner for each Ethernet ring.
West Port
RPL Owner Ring Node Flag
Yes No
No
RPL Port
l This parameter specifies the RPL port. l There is only one RPL port and this RPL port must be the east or west port on the RPL owner node.
Issue 03 (2011-04-10)
A-215
Parameter Control VLAN
Default Value -
Description l This parameter specifies the VLAN ID of Control VLAN. l Each node on the Ethernet ring transmits the R-APS packets on the dedicated ring APS (R-APS) channel to ensure consistency between the nodes when the ERPS switching is performed. Control VLAN is used for isolating the dedicated R-APS channel. Therefore, the VLAN ID in Control VLAN cannot be duplicate with the VLAN IDs that are contained in the service packets. l The Control VLAN must be set to the same value for all the NEs on an ERPS ring.
Destination Node
01-19-A7-00-00-01
01-19-A7-00-00-01
This parameter indicates the MAC address of the destination node. The default destination MAC address in the R-APS packets is always 01-19A7-00-00-01.
A.6.2.2 Parameter Description: ERPS Management

This topic describes the parameters that are used for Ethernet ring protection switching (ERPS) management.
Navigation Path
Select the NE from the Object Tree in the NE Explorer. Choose Configuration > Ethernet Protection > ERPS Management from the Function Tree.
A-216
Issue 03 (2011-04-10)
Parameters
Parameter ERPS ID Value Range 1 to 8 Default Value Description This parameter indicates the ID of the ERPS instance. This parameter indicates the east port of the ERPS instance. This parameter indicates the west port of the ERPS instance. This parameter indicates whether a node on the ring is the ring protection link (RPL) owner. This parameter indicates the RPL port. l This parameter indicates or specifies the VLAN ID of Control VLAN. l Each node on the Ethernet ring transmits the R-APS packets on the dedicated ring APS (R-APS) channel to ensure consistency between the nodes when the ERPS switching is performed. Control VLAN is used for isolating the dedicated R-APS channel. Therefore, the VLAN ID in Control VLAN cannot be duplicate with the VLAN IDs that are contained in the service packets or inband DCN packets. l The Control VLAN must be set to the same value for all the NEs on an ERPS ring.
East Port
West Port
RPL Owner Ring Node Flag
Yes No
RPL Port Control VLAN
1 to 4094
Issue 03 (2011-04-10)
A-217
Parameter Destination Node
Value Range 01-19-A7-00-00-01
Default Value -
Description This parameter indicates the MAC address of the destination node. The default destination MAC address in the R-APS packets is always 01-19A7-00-00-01. l This parameter indicates or specifies the hold-off time of the ERPS hold-off timer. l The hold-off timer is used for negotiating the protection switching sequence when the ERPS coexists with other protection schemes so that the fault can be rectified in the case of other protection switching (such as LAG protection) before the ERPS occurs. When a node on the ring detects one or more new faults, it starts up the hold-off timer if the preset hold-off time is set to a value that is not 0. During the hold-off time, the fault is not reported to trigger an ERPS. When the holdoff timer times out, the node checks the link status regardless whether the fault that triggers the startup of the timer exists. If the fault exists, the node reports it to trigger an ERPS. This fault can be the same as or different from the fault that triggers the initial startup of the hold-off timer.
Hold-Off Time(ms)
0 to 10000, in step of 100
A-218
Issue 03 (2011-04-10)
Parameter Guard Time(ms)
Value Range 10 to 2000, in step of 10
Default Value 500
Description l This parameter indicates or specifies the guard time of the ERPS guard timer. l The nodes on the ring continuously forward the R-APS packets to the Ethernet ring. As a result, the outdated RAPS packets may exist on the ring network. After a node on the ring receives the outdated R-APS packets, an incorrect ERPS may occur. The ERPS guard timer is an R-APS timer used for preventing a node on the ring from receiving outdated R-APS packets. When a faulty node on the ring detects that the switching condition is cleared, the node starts up the guard timer and starts to forward the RAPS (NR) packets. During this period, the R-APS packets received by the node are discarded. The received R-APS packets are forwarded only after the time of the guard timer expires.
Issue 03 (2011-04-10)
A-219
Parameter WTR Time(mm:ss)
Default Value 5
Description l This parameter indicates or specifies the WTR time of the WRT timer in the case of ERPS protection. l The WTR time refers to the duration from the time when the working channel is restored to the time when the switching is released. When the working channel is restored, the WTR timer of the RPL owner starts up. In addition, a signal that indicates the operation of the WTR timer is continuously output in the timing process. When the WTR timer times out and no switching request of a higher priority is received, the signal indicating the operation of the WTR timer is not transmitted. In addition, the WTR release signal is continuously output. l The WTR timer is used to prevent frequent switching caused by the unstable working channel.
Packet Transmit Interval(s)
1 to 10
This parameter displays or specifies the interval for sending R-APS packets periodically. This parameter indicates or specifies the level of the maintenance entity. This parameter indicates the last switching request.
Entity Level
0 to 7
Last Switching Request
A-220
Issue 03 (2011-04-10)
Parameter RB Status
Value Range -
Default Value -
Description This parameter indicates the RB (RPL Blocked) status of the packets received by the working node. l noRB: The RPL is not blocked. l RB: The RPL is blocked.
DNF Status
This parameter indicates the DNF status of the packets received by the working node. l noDNF: The R-APS packets do not contain the DNF flag. In this case, the packets are forwarded by the node that detects the fault on a non-RPL link, and the node that receives the packets is requested to clear the forwarding address table. l DNF: The R-APS packets contain the DNF flags. In this case, the packets are forwarded by the node that detects the fault on an RPL link, and the node that receives the packets is informed not to clear the forwarding address table.
Issue 03 (2011-04-10)
A-221
Parameter State Machine Status
Value Range -
Default Value -
Description This parameter indicates the status of the state machine at the working node. l Idle: The Ethernet ring is in normal state. For example, no node on the Ethernet ring detects any faults or receives the R_APS (NR, RB) packets. l Protection: The Ethernet ring is in protected state. For example, a fault on the node triggers the ERPS, or a node on the ring is in the WTR period after the fault is rectified.
Node Carried with Current Packet
This parameter indicates the MAC address carried in the R-APS packets received by the current node. The MAC address refers to the MAC address of the source node that initiates the switching request. Displays the status of the east port. Displays the status of the west port.
East Port Status West Port Status
A.6.2.3 Parameter Description: MSTP Configuration_Port Group Creation

This topic describes the parameters that are used for creating MSTP port groups.
Navigation Path
1. 2. 3. Select the NE from the Object Tree in the NE Explorer. Choose Configuration > Ethernet Protocol Configuration > MSTP Configuration from the Function Tree. Click the Port Group Parameters tab. Click Create.
A-222
Issue 03 (2011-04-10)

Parameter Protocol Type Value Range MSTP STP Default Value MSTP Description This parameter specifies the protocol type. l MSTP: stands for Multiple Spanning Tree Protocol. The OptiX RTN 980 supports the CIST MSTP only. l STP: stands for Spanning Tree Protocol. Enable Protocol Enabled Disabled Disabled l This parameter specifies whether to enable the protocol of the port group or a member port in the port group. l If the STP or MSTP is enabled, the spanning tree topology is automatically reconfigured. As a result, the services are interrupted.
Parameters for Application Ports

Parameter Board Value Range Default Value Description This parameter specifies the board where the member of port group is located. This parameter indicates the available port list in which a port can be added to the port group. This parameter indicates the selected ports that can be added to the port group.
Available Port List
Selected Port List
Issue 03 (2011-04-10)
A-223
A.6.2.4 Parameter Description: MSTP Configuration_Port Group Configuration

This topic describes the parameters that are used for creating MSTP port groups.
Navigation Path
1. 2. 3. 4. Select the NE from the Object Tree in the NE Explorer. Choose Configuration > Ethernet Protocol Configuration > MSTP Configuration from the Function Tree. Click the Port Group Parameters tab. On the main interface, select the port group to be configured. Click Config. The Config Port Group dialog box is displayed.
Parameters for the Added Port

Parameter Board Value Range Default Value Description This parameter specifies the board where the member of port group is located. This parameter indicates the available port list in which a port needs to be added to the port group. This parameter indicates the selected ports that need to be added to the port group.
Available Port List
Selected Port List
A.6.2.5 Parameter Description: MSTP Configuration_ Bridge Parameters

This topic describes the parameters that are related to MSTP bridges.
Navigation Path
1. 2. Select the NE from the Object Tree in the NE Explorer. Choose Configuration > Ethernet Protocol Configuration > MSTP Configuration from the Function Tree. Click the Bridge Parameters tab.
A-224
Issue 03 (2011-04-10)

Parameter Port Group ID Value Range Default Value Description l This parameter indicates the ID of the port group. l This parameter can be set to only the port group ID that is automatically allocated. MST Domain Name The OptiX RTN 980 does not support this parameter. The OptiX RTN 980 does not support this parameter. The OptiX RTN 980 does not support this parameter.
Redaction Level
Mapping List
Bridge Parameters
Parameter Port Group ID Value Range Default Value Description l This parameter indicates the ID of the port group. l This parameter can be set to only the port Group ID that is automatically allocated. MST Domain Max Hop Count 20 Specifies the maximum hop count of the MSTP.
Issue 03 (2011-04-10)
A-225
Parameter Network Diameter
Value Range 2 to 7
Default Value 7
Description l This parameter specifies the MSTP network diameter. l Network Diameter is related to the link whose number of switches is the most and is indicated by the number of switches that are connected to the link. When you set Network Diameter for the switches, the MSTP automatically sets Max Age(s), Hello Time(s), and Forward Delay(s) to the more appropriate values for the switches. l If the value of Network Diameter is greater, the network is in a larger scale.
Hello Time(s)
1 to 10
l This parameter specifies the interval for transmitting the CBPDU packets through the bridge. l The greater the value of this parameter, the less the network resources that are occupied by the spanning tree. The topology stability, however, decreases.
A-226
Issue 03 (2011-04-10)
Parameter Max Age(s)
Value Range 6 to 40
Default Value 20
Description l This parameter specifies the maximum age of the CBPDU packet that is recorded by the port. l The greater the value, the longer the transmission distance of the CBPDU, which indicates that the network diameter is greater. When the value of this parameter is greater, it is less possible that the bridge detects the link fault in a timely manner and thus the network adaptation ability is reduced.
Forward Delay(s)
4 to 30
15
l This parameter specifies the holdoff time of a port in the listening state and in the learning state. l The greater the value, the longer the delay of the network state change. Hence, the topology changes are slower and the recovery in the case of faults is slower.
Port Parameters
Parameter Port Value Range Default Value Description This parameter indicates the port in the port group.
Issue 03 (2011-04-10)
A-227
Parameter Enable Edge Attribute
Description l This parameter specifies the management edge attributes of the port. l This parameter specifies whether to set the port as an edge port. The edge port refers to the bridge port that is connected to the LAN. In normal cases, this port does not receive or transmit BPDU messages. l This parameter can be set to Enabled only when the port is directly connected to the data communications terminal equipment, such as a computer. In other cases, it is recommended that you use the default value.
Actual Edge Attribute
This parameter indicates the actual management edge attributes of the port.
A-228
Issue 03 (2011-04-10)
Parameter Point-to-Point Attribute
Value Range false true auto
Default Value auto
Description l This parameter specifies the point-topoint attribute of the port. l false: forced nonpoint-to-point link attribute l true: forced point-topoint link attribute l auto: automatically detected point-topoint link attribute l If this parameter is set to auto, the bridge determines Actual Point-to-Point Attribute of the port according to the actual working mode. If the actual working mode is full-duplex, the actual point-to-point attribute is true. If the actual working mode is half-duplex, Actual Point-to-Point Attribute is false. l Only the designated port whose Actual Point-to-Point Attribute is "True" can transmit the rapid state migration request and response. l It is recommended that you use the default value.
Actual Point-to-Point Attribute
This parameter indicates the actual point-to-point attribute of the port.
Issue 03 (2011-04-10)
A-229
Parameter Max Transmit Packet Count
Default Value 3
Description l This parameter specifies the maximum number of packets to be transmitted. l The maximum number of packets to be transmitted by the port refers to the maximum number of MSTP packets that the port can transmit within 1s. l This parameter needs to be set according to the planning information.
A.6.2.6 Parameter Description: MSTP Configuration_CIST Parameters

This topic describes the parameters that are related to the MSTP CIST.
Navigation Path
1. 2. Select the NE from the Object Tree in the NE Explorer. Choose Configuration > Ethernet Protocol Configuration > MSTP Configuration from the Function Tree. Click the CIST&MSTI Parameters tab.

Parameter Port Group MSTI ID Value Range 0 Default Value 0 Description This parameter specifies the port group. This parameter indicates the MSTI ID. The value 0 indicates common and internal spanning tree (CIST). The OptiX RTN 980 supports only the MSTP that uses CIST.
A-230
Issue 03 (2011-04-10)
Parameter Bridge Priority
Default Value 32768
Description l The most significant 16 bits of the bridge ID indicate the priority of the bridge. l When the value is smaller, the priority is higher. As a result, the bridge is more possible to be selected as the root bridge. l If the priorities of all the bridges in the STP/ MSTP network use the same value, the bridge whose MAC address is the smallest is selected as the root bridge.
Port Parameters
Parameter Port Priority Value Range 0 to 240, in step of 16 Default Value 128 Description This parameter indicates the port in the port group. l The most significant eight bits of the port ID indicate the port priority. l When the value is smaller, the priority is higher. Path Cost 1 to 200000000 200000 l This parameter indicates the status of the network that the port is connected to. l In the case of the bridges on both ends of the path, set this parameter to the same value.
Issue 03 (2011-04-10)
A-231
A.6.2.7 Parameter Description: MSTP Configuration_Running Information About the CIST

This topic describes the parameters that are related to the running information about the MSTP CIST.
Navigation Path
1. 2. Select the NE from the Object Tree in the NE Explorer. Choose Configuration > Ethernet Protocol Configuration > MSTP Configuration from the Function Tree. Click the CIST Running Information tab.

Parameter Port Group ID Protocol Running Mode Value Range MSTP STP Default Value Description This parameter indicates the ID of the port group. l This parameter indicates the running mode of the protocol. l MSTP: stands for Multiple Spanning Tree Protocol. The OptiX RTN 980 supports only the CIST-based MSTP. l STP: stands for Spanning Tree Protocol.
A-232
Issue 03 (2011-04-10)
Parameter Bridge Priority
Default Value 32768
Description l This parameter indicates the priority of the bridge. l The most significant 16 bits of the bridge ID indicate the priority of the bridge. l When the value is smaller, the priority is higher. As a result, the bridge is more possible to be selected as the root bridge. l If the priorities of all the bridges in the STP network use the same value, the bridge whose MAC address is the smallest is selected as the root bridge.
Bridge MAC Address
This parameter indicates the MAC address of the bridge. This parameter indicates the priority of the root bridge. This parameter indicates the MAC address of the root bridge. The OptiX RTN 980 does not support this parameter. The OptiX RTN 980 does not support this parameter. The OptiX RTN 980 does not support this parameter. The OptiX RTN 980 does not support this parameter.
Root Bridge Priority
0 to 61440, in step of 4096
32768
Root Bridge MAC Address External Path Cost ERPC Domain Root Bridge Priority Domain Root Bridge MAC Address Internal Path Cost IRPC
Issue 03 (2011-04-10)
A-233
Parameter Root Port Priority
Default Value 128
Description l This parameter indicates the priority of the root port. l The most significant eight bits of the ID of the root port indicate the priority of the root port. l When the value is smaller, the priority is higher.
Root Port Hello Time(s)
This parameter indicates the root port. l This parameter indicates the interval for transmitting CBPDU packets through the bridge. l The greater the value of this parameter, the less the network resources that are occupied by the spanning tree. The topology stability, however, decreases.
Max Age(s)
6 to 40
20
l This parameter specifies the maximum age of the CBPDU packet that is recorded by the port. l The greater the value, the longer the transmission distance of the CBPDU, which indicates that the network diameter is greater. When the value of this parameter is greater, it is less possible that the bridge detects the link fault in a timely manner and thus the network adaptation ability is reduced.
A-234
Issue 03 (2011-04-10)
Parameter Forward Delay(s)
Value Range 4 to 30
Default Value 15
Description l This parameter specifies the holdoff time of a port in the listening state and in the learning state. l The greater the value, the longer the delay of the network state change. Hence, the topology changes are slower and the recovery in the case of faults is slower.
MST Domain Max Hop Count Topology Change Count
The OptiX RTN 980 does not support this parameter. This parameter indicates the identifier of the topology change. This parameter indicates the duration of the last topology change. This parameter indicates the count of the topology changes.
Last Topology Change Time(s) Topology Change Count
Port Parameters
Parameter Port Enable Protocol Value Range Enabled Disabled Default Value Disabled Description This parameter indicates the port in the port group. This parameter indicates whether the protocol of the port group or a member of the port group is enabled. This parameter indicates the role of a port.
Port Role
Disabled
Issue 03 (2011-04-10)
A-235
Parameter Port Status
Value Range Discarding Learning Forwarding
Default Value Discarding
Description This parameter indicates the state of a port. l Discarding: receives only BPDU packets l Learning: only receives or transmits BPDU packets l Forwarding: forwards user traffic, and transmits/receives BPDU packets
Priority
0 to 240, in step of 16
128
l The most significant eight bits of the port ID indicate the port priority. l When the value is smaller, the priority is higher.
Path Cost
1 to 200000000
200000
l This parameter indicates the status of the network that the port is connected to. l In the case of the bridges on both ends of the path, set this parameter to the same value.
Bridge Priority
0 to 61440, in step of 4096
32768
l The most significant 16 bits of the bridge ID indicate the priority of the bridge. l When the value is smaller, the priority is higher. As a result, the bridge is more possible to be selected as the root bridge. l If the priorities of all the bridges in the STP network use the same value, the bridge whose MAC address is the smallest is selected as the root bridge.
A-236
Issue 03 (2011-04-10)
Parameter Bridge MAC Address
Value Range -
Default Value -
Description This parameter indicates the MAC address of the bridge. l The most significant eight bits of the port ID indicate the port priority. l When the value is smaller, the priority is higher.
Designated Port Priority
Design Port Edge Port Attribute
Disabled Enabled
0 Disabled
This parameter indicates the designated port. l This parameter specifies the management edge attributes of the port. l This parameter specifies whether to set the port as an edge port. The edge port refers to the bridge port that is connected to the LAN. In normal cases, this port does not receive or transmit BPDU messages. l This parameter can be set to Enabled only when the port is directly connected to the data communications terminal equipment, such as a computer. In other cases, it is recommended that you use the default value.
Actual Edge Port Attribute
Disabled
This parameter indicates the actual management edge attributes of the port.
Issue 03 (2011-04-10)
A-237
Parameter Point to Point
Value Range false true auto
Default Value auto
Description l This parameter specifies the point-topoint attribute of the port. l false: forced nonpoint-to-point link attribute l true: forced point-topoint link attribute l auto: automatically detected point-topoint link attribute l If this parameter is set to auto, the bridge determines Actual Point to Point Attribute of the port according to the actual working mode. If the actual working mode is full-duplex, the actual point-to-point attribute is true. If the actual working mode is half-duplex, Actual Point to Point Attribute is false. l Only the designated port whose Actual Point-to-Point Attribute is "True" can transmit the rapid state migration request and response. l It is recommended that you use the default value.
Actual Point to Point
This parameter indicates the actual point-to-point attribute of the port.
A-238
Issue 03 (2011-04-10)
Parameter Max Count of Transmitting Message
Default Value 3
Description l This parameter indicates the maximum number of packets to be transmitted. l The maximum number of packets to be transmitted by the port refers to the maximum number of MSTP packets that the port can transmit within 1s.
Protocol Running Mode
STP MSTP
l This parameter indicates the running mode of the protocol. l MSTP: stands for Multiple Spanning Tree Protocol. The OptiX RTN 980 supports only the CIST-based MSTP. l STP: stands for Spanning Tree Protocol.
Hello Time(s)
1 to 10
l This parameter indicates the interval for transmitting the CBPDU packets through the bridge. l The greater the value of this parameter, the less the network resources that are occupied by the spanning tree. The topology stability, however, decreases.
Issue 03 (2011-04-10)
A-239
Parameter Max Age(s)
Value Range 6 to 40
Default Value 20
Description l This parameter specifies the maximum age of the CBPDU packet that is recorded by the port. l The greater the value, the longer the transmission distance of the CBPDU, which indicates that the network diameter is greater. When the value of this parameter is greater, it is less possible that the bridge detects the link fault in a timely manner and thus the network adaptation ability is reduced.
Forward Delay(s)
4 to 30
15
l This parameter specifies the holding time of a port in the listening state and in the learning state. l The greater the value, the longer the delay of the network state change. Hence, the topology changes are slower and the recovery in the case of faults is slower.
Remain Hop
The OptiX RTN 980 does not support this parameter.
A.6.2.8 Parameter Description: Ethernet Link Aggregation Management_LAG Creation

This topic describes the parameters that are used for creating a link aggregation group (LAG).
Navigation Path
1. Select the NE from the Object Tree in the NE Explorer. Choose Configuration > Interface Management > Link Aggregation Group Management from the Function Tree.
A-240
2. 3.
Click the Link Aggregation Group Management tab. Click New.

Parameter LAG No. Value Range Default Value 1 Description l This parameter specifies the LAG number to be set manually. l This parameter is valid only when Automatically Assign is not selected. Automatically Assign Selected Deselected Selected l This parameter indicates whether LAG No. is allocated automatically. l When Automatically Assign is selected, LAG No. cannot be set. LAG Name This parameter specifies the LAG name.
Issue 03 (2011-04-10)
A-241
Parameter LAG Type
Value Range Static Manual
Description l Static: You can create a LAG. When you add or delete a member port to or from the LAG, the Link Aggregation Control Protocol (LACP) protocol is required. In a LAG, a port can be in selected, standby, or unselected state. The aggregation information is exchanged among different equipment through the LACP protocol to ensure that the aggregation information is the same among all the nodes. l Manual: You can create a LAG. When you add or delete a member port, the LACP protocol is not required. The port can be in the up or down state. The system determines whether to aggregate a port according to its physical state (UP or DOWN), working mode, and rate.
Switch Protocol
The OptiX RTN 980 does not support this parameter. The OptiX RTN 980 does not support this parameter. The OptiX RTN 980 does not support this parameter.
Switch Mode
Link Trace Protocol
A-242
Issue 03 (2011-04-10)
Value Range Revertive Mode Non-Revertive Mode
Default Value Non-Revertive Mode
Description l Revertive Mode can be set only when Load Sharing is set to NonSharing. l When Revertive Mode is set to Revertive Mode, the services are switched back to the former working channel after this channel is restored to normal. l When Revertive Mode is set to NonRevertive Mode, the status of the LAG does not change after the former working channel is restored to normal. That is, the services are still transmitted on the protection channel.
Issue 03 (2011-04-10)
A-243
Parameter Load Sharing
Value Range Sharing Non-Sharing
Default Value Non-Sharing
Description l Set Load Sharing to the same value as the peer equipment. It is recommended that you set Load Sharing to Non-Sharing at both ends if the LAGs are used for protection and set Load Sharing to Sharing at both ends if the LAGs are used for increasing bandwidths. l Sharing: Each member link of a LAG processes traffic at the same time and shares the traffic load. The sharing mode can increase a bandwidth utilization for the link. When the LAG members change, or certain links fail, the system automatically re-allocates the traffic. l Non-Sharing: Only one member link of a LAG carries traffic, and the other link is in the standby state. In this case, a hot backup mechanism is provided. When the active link of a LAG is faulty, the system activates the standby link, thus preventing link failure.
A-244
Issue 03 (2011-04-10)
Parameter Load Sharing Hash Algorithm
Value Range Source MAC Destination MAC Source and Destination MAC Source IP Destination IP Source and Destination IP MPLS Label
Default Value Source MAC
Description l This parameter is valid only when Load Sharing of a LAG is set to Sharing. l The load sharing computation methods include computation based on MAC addresses (based on the source MAC address, based on the destination MAC address, and based on the source MAC address + sink MAC address), computation based on IP addresses (based on the source IP address, based on the destination IP address, and based on the source IP address and sink IP address), and computation based on MPLS labels. l After the configuration data is deployed, Load Sharing Hash Algorithm takes effect for the entire NE. l For PW-carried UNINNI E-Line services, Load Sharing Hash Algorithm cannot be set to MPLS Label.
Issue 03 (2011-04-10)
A-245
Parameter System Priority
Default Value 32768
Description l System Priority indicates the priority of a LAG. The smaller the value of System Priority, the higher the priority. l When a local LAG negotiates with an opposite LAG through LACP packets, both LAGs can obtain the system priorities of each other. Then, the LAG of the higher system priority is considered as the comparison result of both LAGs so that the aggregation information is consistent at both LAGs. If the priorities of both LAGs are the same, the system MAC addresses are compared. Then, the comparison result based on the LAG with smaller system MAC address is considered as the result of both LAGs and is used to ensure that the aggregation information is consistent at both LAGs.
WTR Time(min)
1 to 30
10
l Specifies the WTR time for the LAG. l WTR Time(min) takes effect only when Revertive Mode is Revertive Mode.
A-246
Issue 03 (2011-04-10)
Parameter Switch LAG upon Air Interface SD
Description l This parameter specifies whether to enable the switching triggered by bit errors. l If Switch LAG upon Air Interface SD is set to Enabled, the MW_BER_SD alarm will trigger the LAG switching at the air interface.
Port Settings Parameters

Parameter Main Board Value Range Default Value Description l This parameter specifies the main board in a LAG. l This parameter is set according to the planning information. Main Port l This parameter specifies the main port in a LAG. l After a LAG is created, you can add Ethernet services to the main port only. Services cannot be added to a slave port. When Load Sharing is set to NonSharing, the link connected to the main port is used to transmit the services, and the link connected to the slave port is used for protection. Board (Available Slave Ports) l This parameter specifies the slave board in a LAG. l This parameter is set according to the planning information.
Issue 03 (2011-04-10)
A-247
Parameter Port (Available Slave Ports)
Value Range -
Default Value -
Description l This parameter specifies the salve port in a LAG. l The slave ports in a LAG are fixed. Unless they are manually modified, the system does not automatically add them to or delete them from the LAG.
Selected Standby Ports
This parameter indicates the selected slave ports.
A.6.2.9 Parameter Description: Ethernet Link Aggregation_Link Aggregation

This section describes the parameters for port priorities and system priorities.
Navigation Path
1. 2. Select the NE from the Object Tree in the NE Explorer. Choose Configuration > Interface Management > Link Aggregation Group Management from the Function Tree. Click the Port Priority tab.

Parameter Port Value Range Default Value Description This parameter indicates the port whose priority can be set. l This parameter indicates the priorities of the ports in a LAG as defined in the LACP protocol. The smaller the value, the higher the priority. l When ports are added into a LAG, the port of the highest priority is preferred for service transmission.
Port Priority
0 to 65535
32768
A-248
Issue 03 (2011-04-10)
A.6.2.10 Parameter Description: LPT Management_Point-to-Point LPT

This topic describes the parameters that are related to point-to-point LPT.
Navigation Path
1. 2. Select the NE from the Object Tree in the NE Explorer. Choose Configuration > LPT Management > LPT from the Function Tree. Click the Point-to-Point LPT tab.
Parameters on the main interface

Parameter Binding Status Value Range Default Value Description This parameter displays the binding status of pointto-point services. This parameter displays the port where the primary point of point-to-point LPT resides. This parameter displays the type of secondary point for point-to-point LPT. This parameter displays the port where the secondary point of pointto-point LPT resides. This parameter displays the status of point-to-point LPT. This parameter displays or specifies the enabling status of point-to-point LPT. The LPT function can take effect only when LPT Enabled is set to Enabled. Recovery Times(s) 1-600 1 This parameter displays or specifies the recovery time of point-to-point LPT. This parameter displays or specifies the hold-off time of point-to-point LPT.
Primary Function Point
Secondary Function Point Type
Secondary Function Point
LPT Instance Status
LPT Enabled
Enabled Disabled
Disabled
Hold-Off Times(ms)
0-10000
1000
Issue 03 (2011-04-10)
A-249
Value Range -
Default Value -
Description This parameter displays the switching mode of point-to-point LPT. Pointto-point LPT is available only in strict mode. This parameter displays the fault detection mode of point-to-multipoint LPT. l LPT-enabled NEs periodically transmit LPT OAM packets in specific formats to check the status of an L2 service network or QinQ service network. If the LPT OAM packets are absent for 3.5 fault detection periods or the number and contents of received LPT OAM packets are incorrect, the NEs consider that a network-side fault occurred and the LPT switching is triggered. l To detect a networkside fault on a PSN, LPT OAM or PW OAM packets can be used. Note that the PW OAM function must be enabled on NEs before usage of PW OAM packets.
Fault Detection Mode
PW OAM LPT OAM
LPT OAM
Fault Detection Period (100ms)
3-100
10
This parameter displays or specifies the fault detection period of pointto-point LPT. This parameter displays the status of a user-side port. This parameter displays the NET IDs of LPT packet out ports at both ends.
User-Side Port Status
L2 net ID-L2 Peer net ID
A-250
Issue 03 (2011-04-10)
A.6.2.11 Parameter Description: LPT Management_Creating Point-to-Point LPT

This topic describes the parameters that are related to creating point-to-point LPT.
Navigation Path
1. 2. 3. 4. Select the NE from the Object Tree in the NE Explorer. Choose Configuration > LPT Management > LPT from the Function Tree. Click the Point-to-Point LPT tab. Click Bind in the lower right corner of the pane based on the type of service network. Choose PW+QinQ or L2 net from the shortcut menu based on the type of service network.

Parameter L2 net ID Value Range 1-4294967295 Default Value Description This parameter specifies the NET ID of LPT packet out port at the local end. This parameter specifies the NET ID of LPT packet out port at the opposite end. This parameter specifies the port where the primary point of point-to-point LPT resides. This parameter specifies the VLAN ID that is carried by a point-to-point LPT packet to traverse an L2 network. This parameter specifies the out port of a point-topoint LPT packet.
L2 Peer net ID
1-4294967295
VLAN ID
1-4094
LPT package out port
A.6.2.12 Parameter Description: LPT Management_Point-to-Multipoint LPT

This topic describes the parameters that are related to point-to-multipoint LPT.
Navigation Path
1. 2. Select the NE from the Object Tree in the NE Explorer. Choose Configuration > LPT Management > LPT from the Function Tree. Click the Point-to-Multipoint LPT tab.
Issue 03 (2011-04-10)
A-251
Parameters of Primary Point

Parameter Primary Function Point Type Value Range Default Value Description This parameter displays the type of primary point for point-to-multipoint LPT. This parameter displays the port where the primary point of point-tomultipoint LPT resides. This parameter displays the status of point-tomultipoint LPT. This parameter displays the enabling status of point-to-multipoint LPT. This parameter displays or specifies the recovery time of point-to-multipoint LPT. This parameter displays or specifies the hold-off time of point-to-multipoint LPT. This parameter displays the switching mode of point-to-multipoint LPT. Point-to-point LPT is available only in strict mode. l Strict mode A primary point triggers LPT switching when all its secondary points detect faults. l Non-strict mode A primary point triggers LPT switching when anyone of its secondary points detects a fault.
LPT Instance Status
LPT Enabled
Enabled Disabled
Disabled
Recovery Times(s)
1-600
Hold-Off Times(ms)
0-10000
1000
Switching Mode
Strict mode Non-strict mode
Strict mode
A-252
Issue 03 (2011-04-10)
Parameter Fault Detection Mode
Value Range PW OAM LPT OAM
Default Value LPT OAM
Description This parameter displays the fault detection mode of point-to-multipoint LPT. l LPT-enabled NEs periodically transmit LPT OAM packets in specific formats to check the status of an L2 service network or QinQ service network. If the LPT OAM packets are absent for 3.5 fault detection periods or the number and contents of received LPT OAM packets are incorrect, the NEs consider that a network-side fault occurred and the LPT switching is triggered. l To detect a networkside fault on a PSN, LPT OAM or PW OAM packets can be used. Note that the PW OAM function must be enabled on NEs before usage of PW OAM packets.
Fault Detection Period (100ms)
3-100
10
This parameter displays or specifies the fault detection period of pointto-multipoint LPT. This parameter displays the status of a user-side port. This parameter displays the NET IDs of LPT packet out ports at both ends, when the service network is an L2 network.
Issue 03 (2011-04-10)
A-253
Parameters of Secondary Point

Parameter Access Point Type Value Range Default Value Description This parameter displays the type of second point for point-to-multipoint LPT. This parameter displays the port or PW ID for the secondary point of pointto-multipoint LPT. This parameter displays the status of a user-side port. This parameter displays the NET IDs of LPT packet out ports at both ends, when the service network is an L2 network.
Access Point
A.6.2.13 Parameter Description: LPT Management_Creating Point-to-Multipoint LPT

This topic describes the parameters that are related to creating point-to-multipoint LPT.
Navigation Path
1. 2. 3. 4. Select the NE from the Object Tree in the NE Explorer. Choose Configuration > LPT Management > LPT from the Function Tree. Click the Point-to-Multipoint LPT tab. Click New in the lower right corner of the pane based on the type of service network. Choose PW, QinQ, or L2 net from the shortcut menu based on the type of service network.
A-254
Issue 03 (2011-04-10)
Parameters of primary point

Parameter Point Type Value Range UNI PW QinQ L2 net Default Value Description This parameter specifies the type of primary point for point-to-multipoint LPT. The value range of this parameter pertains to the type of service network. If the primary point is on the access side, select UNI; if the primary point is on the network side, set the parameter as follows. l If the service network is a PSN, select PW. l If the service network is a QinQ network, select QinQ. l If the service network is an L2 network, select L2 net. Board This parameter specifies the board where the primary point of point-tomultipoint LPT resides. This parameter is valid only when Point Type is set to UNI. Port This parameter specifies the port where the primary point of point-tomultipoint LPT resides. This parameter is valid only when Point Type is set to UNI. Point ID This parameter specifies the service ID for the primary point of point-tomultipoint LPT. This parameter is valid only when Point Type is set to PW or QinQ.
Issue 03 (2011-04-10)
A-255
Parameter L2 net ID
Value Range 1-4294967295
Default Value -
Description This parameter specifies the NET ID of a local NE. This parameter is valid only when Point Type of the primary point is set to UNI, and when Point Type of the secondary point is set to L2 net.
L2 Peer net ID
1-4294967295
This parameter specifies the NET ID of an opposite NE. This parameter is valid only when Point Type is set to L2 net.
VLAN ID
1-4094
This parameter specifies the VLAN ID that is carried by an LPT packet to traverse an L2 network. This parameter is valid only when Point Type is set to L2 net.
LPT package out port
This parameter specifies the out port of an LPT packet. This parameter is valid only when Point Type is set to L2 net.
Parameters of secondary point

Parameter Point Type Value Range UNI PW QinQ L2 net Default Value Description This parameter displays or specifies the type of secondary point for pointto-multipoint LPT.
A-256
Issue 03 (2011-04-10)
Parameter Board
Value Range -
Default Value -
Description This parameter specifies the board where the secondary point of pointto-multipoint LPT resides. This parameter is valid only when Point Type is set to PW, QinQ, or L2 net.
Available Points
This parameter displays the available ports where the secondary point of point-to-multipoint LPT can reside. This parameter is valid only when Point Type is set to PW, QinQ, or L2 net.
Selected Points
This parameter displays the selected port where the secondary point of pointto-multipoint LPT resides. This parameter is valid only when Point Type is set to PW, QinQ, or L2 net.
L2 net ID
1-4294967295
This parameter specifies the NET ID of a local NE. This parameter is valid only when Point Type is set to UNI.
L2 Peer net ID
1-4294967295
This parameter specifies the NET ID of an opposite NE. This parameter is valid only when Point Type of the primary point is set to UNI, and when Point Type of the secondary point is set to L2 net.
Issue 03 (2011-04-10)
A-257
Parameter VLAN ID
Value Range 1-4094
Default Value -
Description This parameter specifies the VLAN ID that is carried by an LPT packet to traverse an L2 network. This parameter is valid only when Point Type of the primary point is set to UNI, and when Point Type of the secondary point is set to L2 net.
LPT Package out port
This parameter specifies the out port of an LPT packet. This parameter is valid only when Point Type of the primary point is set to UNI, and when Point Type of the secondary point is set to L2 net.
A.6.3 Parameters for the Ethernet OAM

This topic describes the parameters that are related to the Ethernet operation, administration and maintenance (OAM). A.6.3.1 Parameter Description: Ethernet Service OAM Management_Maintenance Domain Creation This topic describes the parameters that are used for creating maintenance domains. A.6.3.2 Parameter Description: Ethernet Service OAM Management_Maintenance Association Creation This topic describes the parameters that are used for creating maintenance associations. A.6.3.3 Parameter Description: Ethernet Service OAM Management_MEP Creation This topic describes the parameters that are used for creating a maintenance association end point (MEP). A.6.3.4 Parameter Description: Ethernet Service OAM Management_Remote MEP Creation This topic describes the parameters that are used for creating a remote MEP. A.6.3.5 Parameter Description: Ethernet Service OAM Management_MIP Creation This topic describes the parameters that are used for creating a maintenance association intermediate point (MIP). A.6.3.6 Parameter Description: Ethernet Service OAM Management_LB Enabling This topic describes the parameters that are used for enabling the LB. A.6.3.7 Parameter Description: Ethernet Service OAM Management_LT Enabling This topic describes the parameters that are used for enabling the LT.
A.6.3.8 Parameter Description: Ethernet Port OAM Management_OAM Parameter This topic describes the OAM parameters that are related to Ethernet ports. A.6.3.9 Parameter Description: Ethernet Port OAM Management_OAM Error Frame Monitoring This topic describes the parameters that are used for monitoring the OAM error frames at the Ethernet port.
A.6.3.1 Parameter Description: Ethernet Service OAM Management_Maintenance Domain Creation

This topic describes the parameters that are used for creating maintenance domains.
Navigation Path
1. 2. 3. Select the NE from the Object Tree in the NE Explorer. Choose Configuration > Ethernet OAM Management > Ethernet Service OAM Management from the Function Tree. Click the Maintenance Association tab. Choose New > New Maintenance Domain.

Parameter Maintenance Domain Name Value Range Default Value default Description l This parameter specifies the name of the maintenance domain. l The maintenance domain refers to the network for the Ethernet OAM. l This parameter can contain a maximum of eight bytes. Maintenance Domain Level 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 4 l Maintenance Domain Level specifies the level of the maintenance domain. l The values 0-2 indicate the carrier level, the values 3-4 indicate the supplier level, and the values 5-7 indicate the user level. l When the value is set to 0, the maintenance domain is at the lowest level. The values 0-7 indicate that the level increases in a sequential order. l The OAM packets whose level is higher than the preset value are transparently transmitted by the MEPs. The OAM packets whose level is lower than the preset value are directly discarded by the MEPs. The OAM packets whose level is the same as the preset value are responded to or terminated by the MEPs according to the message type.
Issue 03 (2011-04-10)
A-259
A.6.3.2 Parameter Description: Ethernet Service OAM Management_Maintenance Association Creation

This topic describes the parameters that are used for creating maintenance associations.
Navigation Path
1. 2. 3. Select the NE from the Object Tree in the NE Explorer. Choose Configuration > Ethernet OAM Management > Ethernet Service OAM Management from the Function Tree. Click the Maintenance Association tab. Select the maintenance domain in which a maintenance association needs to be created. Choose New > New Maintenance Association.

Parameter Maintenance Domain Name Maintenance Association Name Value Range Default Value Description This parameter indicates the maintenance domain of the created maintenance association. l This parameter specifies the name of the maintenance association, which is a domain related to a service. Through maintenance association division, the connectivity check (CC) can be performed on the network that transmits a service instance. l This parameter can contain a maximum of eight bytes. Relevant Service This parameter specifies the service instance that is related to the maintenance association. l This parameter specifies the interval for transmitting packets in the CC. l The CC is performed to check the availability of the service.
CC Test Transmit Period
1s 10s 1m 10m
1s
A.6.3.3 Parameter Description: Ethernet Service OAM Management_MEP Creation

This topic describes the parameters that are used for creating a maintenance association end point (MEP).
Navigation Path
1. 2.
A-260
Select the NE from the Object Tree in the NE Explorer. Choose Configuration > Ethernet OAM Management > Ethernet Service OAM Management from the Function Tree. Click the Maintenance Association tab.
3.
Select the maintenance association in which an MEP needs to be created. Choose New > New MEP Point.

Parameter Maintenance Domain Name Maintenance Association Name Board Port VLAN MP ID Value Range 1 to 2048 Default Value 1 Description This parameter indicates the maintenance domain of the created MEP. This parameter indicates the maintenance association of the created MEP. This parameter specifies the board where the MEP is located. This parameter specifies the port where the MEP is located. This parameter indicates the VLAN ID of the current service. l This parameter specifies the MEP ID. l Each MEP needs to be configured with an MP ID, which is unique in the maintenance association. The MP ID is required in the OAM operation. Direction Ingress Egress Ingress l Direction specifies the direction of the MEP. l Ingress indicates the direction in which the packets are transmitted to the port, and Egress indicates the direction in which the packets are transmitted from the port. CC Status Active Inactive Active l This parameter specifies whether to enable the CC function of the MEP. l In the case of the tests based on the MP IDs, CC Status must be set to Active.
Issue 03 (2011-04-10)
A-261
Parameter AIS Active Status
Value Range Active Inactive
Default Value Active
Description l This parameter specifies the AIS active status. l If several MDs exist on a link, to locate a fault accurately, set AIS Active Status to Active and Client Layer Level that functions to suppress the AIS information. l After a fault is detected by an MP, if this MP activates the AIS, it sends the AIS packet to a higher level MP, informing the higher level MP of the fault information; if this MP does not activate the AIS, it does not report the fault.
Client Layer Level
1 to 7
l Normally, if an MP is set to level n, Client Layer Level that functions to suppress the AIS information should be set to n+1. l Client Layer Level is valid only if AIS Active Status is Active.
A.6.3.4 Parameter Description: Ethernet Service OAM Management_Remote MEP Creation

This topic describes the parameters that are used for creating a remote MEP.
Navigation Path
1. 2. 3. 4. Select the NE from the Object Tree in the NE Explorer. Choose Configuration > Ethernet OAM Management > Ethernet Service OAM Management from the Function Tree. Click the Maintenance Association tab. Choose OAM > Manage Remote MEP Point. Then, the Manage Remote MEP Point dialog box is displayed. Click New.

Parameter Maintenance Domain Name Maintenance Association Name Value Range Default Value Description This parameter indicates the maintenance domain of the MEP. This parameter indicates the maintenance association of the created MEP.
A-262
Issue 03 (2011-04-10)
Parameter Remote Maintenance Point ID(e.g:1,3-6)
Default Value -
Description l This parameter specifies the ID of the remote MEP. l If other MEPs may initiate OAM operations to an MEP in the same MA, set the other MEPs to be the remote MEPs.
A.6.3.5 Parameter Description: Ethernet Service OAM Management_MIP Creation

This topic describes the parameters that are used for creating a maintenance association intermediate point (MIP).
Navigation Path
1. 2. 3. Select the NE from the Object Tree in the NE Explorer. Choose Configuration > Ethernet OAM Management > Ethernet Service OAM Management from the Function Tree. Click the MIP Point tab. Select the maintenance domain in which an MIP needs to be created, and then click New.

Parameter Maintenance Domain Name Board Port MP ID Value Range 1 to 2048 Default Value 1 Description This parameter indicates the maintenance domain of the MIP. This parameter specifies the board where the MIP is located. This parameter specifies the port where the MIP is located. l This parameter specifies the MIP ID. l Each MIP needs to be configured with an MP ID, which is unique in the maintenance domain. The MP ID is required in the OAM operation.
NOTE To create MEPs and MIPs in a service at a port, ensure that only one MIP can be created and the level of the MIP must be higher than the level of the MEP.
A.6.3.6 Parameter Description: Ethernet Service OAM Management_LB Enabling

This topic describes the parameters that are used for enabling the LB.
Navigation Path
1. 2. 3. 4. Select the NE from the Object Tree in the NE Explorer. Choose Configuration > Ethernet OAM Management > Ethernet Service OAM Management from the Function Tree. Click the Maintenance Association tab. Select the maintenance domain and maintenance association for the LB test. Choose OAM > Start LB.

Parameter Destination Maintenance Point ID Destination Maintenance Point MAC Address Maintenance Domain Name Maintenance Association Name Source Maintenance Point ID Value Range Selected Deselected Selected Deselected Selected Default Value Deselected Description This parameter needs to be selected if the LB test is performed on the basis of Destination Maintenance Point IDs. This parameter needs to be selected if the LB test is performed on the basis of MAC addresses. This parameter indicates the name of the maintenance domain for the LB test. This parameter indicates the name of the maintenance association for the LB test. l This parameter specifies the source maintenance point in the LB test. l Only the MEP can be set to the source maintenance point. l This parameter specifies the destination maintenance point in the LB test. l Only the MEP ID can be set to the Destination Maintenance Point ID. l Destination Maintenance Point ID can be set only when MP ID is selected. Destination Maintenance Point MAC Address 00-00-00-00-00-00 l This parameter specifies the MAC address of the port where the destination maintenance point is located in the LB test. l Only the MAC address of the MEP can be set to the MAC address of the Destination Maintenance Point MAC Address. l Destination Maintenance Point MAC Address can be set only when Sink Maintenance Point MAC Address.
Destination Maintenance Point ID
A-264
Issue 03 (2011-04-10)
Parameter Transmitted Packet Count
Default Value 3
Description l This parameter specifies the number of packets transmitted each time in the LB test. l When the value is greater, the required duration is longer.
Transmitted Packet Length
64 to 1400
64
l This parameter specifies the length of a transmitted LBM packet. l If the packet length is different, the test result may be different. In normal cases, it is recommended that you use the default value.
Transmitted Packet Priority
0 to 7
l This parameter specifies the priority of transmitting packets. l 0 indicates the lowest priority, and 7 indicates the highest priority. In normal cases, this parameter is set to the highest priority.
Detection Result
This parameter indicates the relevant information and result of the LB test.
A.6.3.7 Parameter Description: Ethernet Service OAM Management_LT Enabling

This topic describes the parameters that are used for enabling the LT.
Navigation Path
1. 2. 3. 4. Select the NE from the Object Tree in the NE Explorer. Choose Configuration > Ethernet OAM Management > Ethernet Service OAM Management from the Function Tree. Click the Maintenance Association tab. Select the maintenance domain and maintenance association for the LT test. Choose OAM > Start LT.
Test Node Parameters

Parameter Destination Maintenance Point ID Destination Maintenance Point MAC Address Value Range Selected Deselected Selected Deselected Selected Default Value Deselected Description This parameter needs to be selected if the LT test is performed on the basis of MP IDs. This parameter needs to be selected if the LT test is performed on the basis of MAC addresses.
Issue 03 (2011-04-10)
A-265
Parameter Maintenance Domain Name Maintenance Association Name Source Maintenance Point ID
Value Range -
Default Value -
Description This parameter indicates the name of the maintenance domain for the LT test. This parameter indicates the name of the maintenance association for the LT test. l This parameter specifies the source maintenance point in the LT test. l Only the MEP can be set to the source maintenance point.
Destination Maintenance Point ID
l This parameter specifies the destination maintenance point in the LT test. l Only the MEP ID can be set to the Destination Maintenance Point ID. l Destination Maintenance Point ID can be set only when MP ID is selected.
Destination Maintenance Point MAC Address
00-00-00-00-00-00
l This parameter specifies the MAC address of the port where the destination maintenance point is located in the LT test. l Only the MAC address of the MEP can be set to the MAC address of the Destination Maintenance Point MAC Address. l Destination Maintenance Point MAC Address can be set only when Sink Maintenance Point MAC Address.
Parameters for the Detection Result

Parameter Source Maintenance Point ID Destination Maintenance Point ID/MAC Response Maintenance Point ID/MAC Value Range Default Value Description This parameter indicates the source maintenance point in the LT test. This parameter indicates the MAC address of the port where the destination maintenance point is located in the LT test. This parameter indicates the MAC address of the port where the responding maintenance point is located in the LT test.
A-266
Issue 03 (2011-04-10)
Parameter Hop Count
Value Range 1 to 64
Default Value -
Description l This parameter indicates the number of hops from the source maintenance point to the responding maintenance point or to the destination maintenance point in the LT test. l The number of hops indicates the adjacent relation between the responding maintenance point to the source maintenance point. The number of hops increases by one when a responding point occurs on the link from the source maintenance point to the destination maintenance point.
Test Result
This parameter indicates the result of the LT test.
A.6.3.8 Parameter Description: Ethernet Port OAM Management_OAM Parameter

This topic describes the OAM parameters that are related to Ethernet ports.
Navigation Path
1. 2. Select the NE from the Object Tree in the NE Explorer. Choose Configuration > Ethernet OAM Management > Ethernet Port OAM Management from the Function Tree. Click the OAM Parameter tab.

Parameter Port Enable OAM Protocol Value Range Enabled Disabled Default Value Disabled Description This parameter indicates the corresponding port. l This parameter indicates or specifies whether to enable the OAM protocol. l After the OAM protocol is enabled, the current Ethernet port starts to use the preset mode to create the OAM connection with the opposite end.
Issue 03 (2011-04-10)
A-267
Parameter OAM Working Mode
Value Range Active Passive
Default Value Active
Description l This parameter indicates or specifies the working mode of the OAM. l The port whose OAM working mode is set to Active can initiate the OAM connection. l The port whose OAM working mode is set to Passive can only wait for the opposite end to send the OAM connection request. l The OAM working mode of the equipment at only one end can be Passive.
Link Event Notification
Enabled Disabled
Enabled
l This parameter indicates or specifies whether the local link events can be notified to the opposite end. l If the alarms caused by link events can be reported, that is, if the number of performance events (for example, error frame period, error frame, error frame second, and error frame signal cycle) at the local end exceeds the preset threshold, these performance events are notified to the port at the opposite end through the link event notification function. l This parameter is set according to the planning information.
Remote Side Loopback Response
Disabled Enabled
Disabled
l This parameter indicates or specifies whether the port responds to the remote loopback. l Remote loopback indicates that the local OAM entity transmits packets to the remote OAM entity for loopback. The local OAM entity can locate the fault and test the link performance through loopback data analysis. l If a port does not support remote loopback response, this port does not respond to the loopback request from the remote port regardless of the OAM port status.
A-268
Issue 03 (2011-04-10)
Parameter Loopback Status
Value Range Non-Loopback Initiate Loopback at Local Respond Loopback of Remote
Default Value -
Description This parameter indicates the loopback status at the local end.
NOTE Loopback Status is valid only after you choose OAM > Enable Remote Loopback.
OAM Discovery Status Port Transmit Status Port Receive Status
This parameter indicates the OAM discovery status at the local end. This parameter indicates the status of transmitting packets at the local end. This parameter indicates the status of receiving packets at the local end.
A.6.3.9 Parameter Description: Ethernet Port OAM Management_OAM Error Frame Monitoring
This topic describes the parameters that are used for monitoring the OAM error frames at the Ethernet port.
Navigation Path
1. 2. Select the NE from the Object Tree in the NE Explorer. Choose Configuration > Ethernet OAM Management > Ethernet Port OAM Management from the Function Tree. Click the OAM Error Frame Monitor tab.

Parameter Port Error Frame Monitor Window (ms) Error Frame Monitor Threshold (frames) Value Range 1000 to 60000, in step of 100 1 to 4294967295, in step of 1 Default Value 1000 Description This parameter indicates the corresponding port. This parameter specifies the duration of monitoring error frames. l This parameter specifies the threshold of monitoring error frames. l Within the specified value of Error Frame Monitor Window(ms), if the number of error frames on the link exceeds the preset value of Error Frame Monitor Threshold(frame), an alarm is reported.
Issue 03 (2011-04-10)
A-269
Parameter Error Frame Period Window (frame) Error Frame Period Threshold (frames)
Value Range 1488 to 892800000, in step of 1 1 to 892800000, in step of 1
Default Value 892800000
Description This parameter specifies the window of monitoring the error frame period. l This parameter specifies the threshold of monitoring the error frame period. l Within the specified value of Error Frame Period Window(frame), if the number of error frames on the link exceeds the preset value of Error Frame Period Threshold(frame), an alarm is reported.
Error Frame Second Window(s) Error Frame Second Threshold (s)
10 to 900, in step of 1 10 to 900, in step of 1
60 1
This parameter specifies the time window of monitoring the error frame second. l This parameter specifies the threshold of monitoring error frame seconds. l If any error frame occurs in one second, this second is called an errored frame second. Within the specified value of Error Frame Second Window(s), if the number of error frames on the link exceeds the preset value of Error Frame Second Threshold(s), an alarm is reported.
Error Frame Signal Periodic Monitor Window (Entries) Error Frame Signal Periodic Monitor Threshold (Entries)
This parameter specifies the window of monitoring the error frame signal period.
1 to 7500000000, in step of 1
l This parameter specifies the threshold of monitoring the error frame signal period. l Within the specified value of Error Frame Signal Periodic Monitor Window(Entries), if the number of error signals exceeds the preset value of Error Frame Signal Periodic Monitor Threshold(Entries), an alarm is reported.
A.6.4 QoS Parameters

This topic describes the parameters that are related to QoS. A.6.4.1 Parameter Description: Diffserv Domain Management This topic describes the parameters that are used for managing DiffServ domains. A.6.4.2 Parameter Description: DiffServ Domain Management_Create
This parameter describes the parameters that are used for creating DiffServ (DS) domains. A.6.4.3 Parameter Description: DiffServ Domain Applied Port_Modification This topic describes the parameters that are used for changing DiffServ (DS) domain applied ports. A.6.4.4 Parameter Description: Policy Management This topic describes the parameters that are related to port policies. A.6.4.5 Parameter Description: Port Policy This topic describes the parameters that are used for creating port policies. A.6.4.6 Parameter Description: Port Policy_Traffic Classification Configuration This parameter describes the parameters that are used for creating traffic classification. A.6.4.7 Parameter Description: Port Shaping Management_Creation This topic describes the parameters that are used for creating port shaping management tasks.
A.6.4.1 Parameter Description: Diffserv Domain Management

This topic describes the parameters that are used for managing DiffServ domains.
Navigation Path
Select the NE from the Object Tree in the NE Explorer. Choose Configuration > QoS Management > Diffserv Domain Management > Diffserv Domain Management from the Function Tree.

Parameter Mapping Relation ID Value Range 1 to 8 Default Value 1 Description This parameter indicates the ID of the mapping relation between DiffServ domains. This parameter indicates the name of the mapping relation between DiffServ domains.
Mapping Relation Name
Default Map
NOTE
If one default DiffServ domain exists on the OptiX RTN 980 equipment, Mapping Relation ID is set to 1, and Mapping Relation Name is set to Default Map. If these parameters are not set, all the ports belong to this domain.
Issue 03 (2011-04-10)
A-271
Parameters for Ingress Mapping Relation

Parameter CVLAN Value Range 0 to 7 Default Value Description l This parameter indicates the priority of the C-VLAN of the ingress packets. l C-VLAN indicates the client-side VLAN, and the value 7 indicates the highest priority. SVLAN 0 to 7 l This parameter indicates the priority of the S-VLAN of the ingress packets. l S-VLAN indicates the server-side VLAN, and the value 7 indicates the highest priority. IP DSCP 0 to 63 l This parameter indicates the DSCP priority of the IP addresses of the ingress packets. l The differentiated services code point (DSCP) refers to bits 0-5 of the differentiated services (DS) field in the packet and indicates the service class and discarding priority of the packet.
A-272
Issue 03 (2011-04-10)
Parameter MPLS EXP
Value Range 0 to 7
Default Value -
Description l Displays the MPLS EXP value of ingress packets. l When a packet in an egress queue leaves an NNI port, the NNI port obtains the packet priority value according to the mappings between PHB service classes of egress queues and egress packet priorities (MPLS EXP values), and writes the obtained priority value into the EXP field of the egress MPLS packet.
NOTE The MPLS EXP value can be modified in the default Diffserv domain (Default Map) only.
Issue 03 (2011-04-10)
A-273
Parameter PHB
Value Range BE AF1 AF2 AF3 AF4 EF CS6 CS7
Default Value -
Description l This parameter indicates the per-hop behavior (PHB) service class of the DiffServ domain. l The PHB service class refers to the forwarding behavior of the DiffServ node on the behavior aggregate (BA) operation. The forwarding behavior can meet the specific requirements. l The PHB service classes are BE, AF1, AF2, AF3, AF4, EF, CS6, and CS7. The priorities (C_VLAN priority, S_VLAN priority, DSCP value, and MPLS EXP value) contained in the packets of the DiffServ domain and the eight PHB service classes meet the requirements of the specified or default mapping relation.
NOTE The AF1 is classified into three sub service classes, namely, AF11, AF12, and AF13, only one of which is valid. It is the same case with the AF2, AF3, and AF4.
A-274
Issue 03 (2011-04-10)
Parameters for Egress Mapping Relation

Parameter PHB Value Range BE AF1 AF2 AF3 AF4 EF CS6 CS7 Default Value Description l This parameter indicates the PHB service class of the DiffServ domain. l The PHB service class refers to the forwarding behavior of the DiffServ node on the behavior aggregate (BA) operation. The forwarding behavior can meet the specific requirements. l The PHB service classes are BE, AF1, AF2, AF3, AF4, EF, CS6, and CS7. The priorities (C_VLAN priority, S_VLAN priority, DSCP value and MPLS value) contained in the packets of the DiffServ domain and the eight PHB service classes meet the requirements of the specified or default mapping relation.
CVLAN
0 to 7
l This parameter indicates the priority of the C-VLAN of the egress packets. l C-VLAN indicates the client-side VLAN, and the value 7 indicates the highest priority.
Issue 03 (2011-04-10)
A-275
Parameter SVLAN
Value Range 0 to 7
Default Value -
Description l This parameter indicates the priority of the S-VLAN of the egress packets. l S-VLAN indicates the server-side VLAN, and the value 7 indicates the highest priority.
IP DSCP
0 to 63
l This parameter indicates the DSCP priority of the IP addresses of the ingress packets. l The DSCP refers to bits 0-5 of the DS field in the packet and indicates the service class and discarding priority of the packet.
MPLS EXP
0 to 7
l Displays the MPLS EXP value of egress packets. l When a packet arrives at an NNI port, the NNI port obtains the packet priority value depending on its trusted priority type (MPLS EXP value) and specifies the PHB service class of the packet according to the mappings between packet priorities and PHB service classes.
A-276
Issue 03 (2011-04-10)

Parameter Port Value Range Default Value Description This parameter indicates the port that uses the DiffServ domain. The packets trusted by the OptiX RTN 980 are the C_VLAN, S_VLAN and IP DSCP packets that contain the C_VLAN priority, S_VLAN priority, DSCP value or MPLS value. By default, the untrusted packets are mapped to the BE service class for best-effort forwarding.
NOTE l The trusted packet priorities of a UNI port include DSCP value, CVLAN priority, and SVLAN priority. For the E-Line services that are transparently transmitted end to end (UNI-UNI), a UNI port only trusts DSCP value. l An NNI port carrying MPLS/PWE3 services trusts only packets with MPLS EXP values. l The trusted packet priorities of a QinQ link NNI port are configured according to the planning information.
Packet Type
CVLAN SVLAN IP-DSCP MPLS-EXP
CVLAN
A.6.4.2 Parameter Description: DiffServ Domain Management_Create

This parameter describes the parameters that are used for creating DiffServ (DS) domains.
Navigation Path
1. Select the NE from the Object Tree in the NE Explorer. Choose Configuration > QoS Management > Diffserv Domain Management > Diffserv Domain Management from the Function Tree. Click New.
2.
Issue 03 (2011-04-10)
A-277

Parameter Mapping Relation ID Value Range 2 to 8 Default Value Description This parameter specifies the ID of the mapping relation of a DS domain. This parameter specifies the name of the mapping relation of a DS domain.
Mapping Relation Name
Parameters for Ingress Mapping Relation

Parameter CVLAN Value Range 0 to 7 Default Value Description l This parameter specifies the C-VLAN priority of the ingress packets. l C-VLAN indicates the client-side VLAN, and the value 7 indicates the highest priority. SVLAN 0 to 7 l This parameter specifies the S-VLAN priority of the ingress packets. l S-VLAN indicates the server-side VLAN, and the value 7 indicates the highest priority. IP DSCP 0 to 63 l This parameter specifies the DSCP priority of the IP addresses of the ingress packets. l The differentiated services code point (DSCP) refers to bits 0-5 of the differentiated services (DS) field in the packet and indicates the service class and discarding priority of the packet.
A-278
Issue 03 (2011-04-10)
Parameter MPLS EXP
Value Range -
Default Value -
Description l Displays the MPLS EXP value of ingress packets. l When a packet in an egress queue leaves an NNI port, the NNI port obtains the packet priority value according to the mappings between PHB service classes of egress queues and egress packet priorities (MPLS EXP values), and writes the obtained priority value into the EXP field of the egress MPLS packet.
Issue 03 (2011-04-10)
A-279
Parameter PHB
Value Range BE AF1 AF2 AF3 AF4 EF CS6 CS7
Default Value -
Description l This parameter indicates the PHB service class of the DS domain. l The PHB service class refers to the forwarding behavior of the DS node on the behavior aggregate (BA) operation. The forwarding behavior can meet the specific requirements. l The PHB service classes are BE, AF1, AF2, AF3, AF4, EF, CS6, and CS7. The priorities (C_VLAN priority, S_VLAN priority, DSCP value and MPLS EXP value) contained in the packets of the DS domain and the eight PHB service classes meet the requirements of the specified or default mapping relation.
A-280
Issue 03 (2011-04-10)
Parameters for Egress Mapping Relation

Parameter PHB Value Range BE AF1 AF2 AF3 AF4 EF CS6 CS7 Default Value Description l This parameter indicates the PHB service class of the DS domain. l The PHB service class refers to the forwarding behavior of the DS node on the behavior aggregate (BA) operation. The forwarding behavior can meet the specific requirements. l The PHB service classes are BE, AF1, AF2, AF3, AF4, EF, CS6, and CS7. The priorities (C_VLAN priority, S_VLAN priority, DSCP value and MPLS EXP value) contained in the packets of the DS domain and the eight PHB service classes meet the requirements of the specified or default mapping relation.
CVLAN
0 to 7
l This parameter specifies the C-VLAN priority of the egress packets. l C-VLAN indicates the client-side VLAN priority, and the value 7 indicates the highest priority.
Issue 03 (2011-04-10)
A-281
Parameter SVLAN
Value Range 0 to 7
Default Value -
Description l This parameter specifies the S-VLAN priority of the egress packets. l S-VLAN indicates the server-side VLAN priority, and the value 7 indicates the highest priority.
IP DSCP
0 to 63
l This parameter specifies the DSCP priority of the IP addresses of the egress packets. l The differentiated services code point (DSCP) refers to bits 0-5 of the differentiated services (DS) field in the packet and indicates the service class and discarding priority of the packet.
MPLS EXP
l Displays the MPLS EXP value of egress packets. l When a packet in an egress queue leaves an NNI port, the NNI port obtains the packet priority value according to the mappings between PHB service classes of egress queues and egress packet priorities (MPLS EXP values), and writes the obtained priority value into the EXP field of the egress MPLS packet.
A-282
Issue 03 (2011-04-10)

Parameter Board Value Range Default Value Description This parameter specifies the board that uses the mapping relations between DS domains. This parameter displays the available port list from which you can select the port that uses the mapping relations between DS domains. This parameter displays the selected port list. The ports in the list use the mapping relations between DS domains.
Available Port
Port
Issue 03 (2011-04-10)
A-283
Parameter Packet Type
Value Range cvlan svlan ip-dscp mpls-exp
Default Value cvlan
Description l This parameter specifies the type of the packet. l The packets trusted by the OptiX RTN 980 are the C_VLAN, S_VLAN, IP DSCP and MPLS packets that contain the C_VLAN priority, S_VLAN priority, DSCP value or MPLS EXP value. By default, the untrusted packets are mapped to the BE service class for besteffort forwarding.
A.6.4.3 Parameter Description: DiffServ Domain Applied Port_Modification

This topic describes the parameters that are used for changing DiffServ (DS) domain applied ports.
Navigation Path
1. Select the NE from the Object Tree in the NE Explorer. Choose Configuration > QoS Management > Diffserv Domain Management > Diffserv Domain Management from the Function Tree. Select the DS domain to be changed in the main interface.
2.
A-284
3. 4.
Click the Apply Port tab. Click Modify.
Parameters for Configuring the Applied Ports

Parameter Mapping Relation Name Value Range Default Value Description This parameter indicates the name of the mapping relation of a DS domain. The packets trusted by the OptiX RTN 980 are the CVLAN, S-VLAN, IP DSCP packets, and MPLS packets that respectively contain the C-VLAN priority, S-VLAN priority, IP DSCP value and MPLS EXP value. By default, the untrusted packets are mapped to the BE service class for besteffort forwarding.
Packet Type
CVLAN SVLAN IP-DSCP MPLS-EXP
CVLAN
Board
This parameter specifies the board where the port is located. This parameter indicates the available port.
Available Port
Issue 03 (2011-04-10)
A-285
Parameter Selected Port
Value Range -
Default Value -
Description This parameter indicates the selected port. The selected port is applied to the DS domain.
NOTE
If one default DS domain exists on the OptiX RTN 980, Mapping Relation ID is set to 1, and Mapping Relation Name is set to Default Map. If these parameters are not set, all the ports belong to this domain.
A.6.4.4 Parameter Description: Policy Management

This topic describes the parameters that are related to port policies.
Navigation Path
1. 2. Select the NE from the Object Tree in the NE Explorer. Choose Configuration > QoS Management > Policy Management > Port Policy from the Function Tree. Click the CoS Configuration tab.
Parameters
Parameter Policy ID Policy Name Value Range Default Value Description This parameter indicates the policy ID of the port. This parameter indicates or specifies the policy name of the port.
A-286
Issue 03 (2011-04-10)
Parameter CoS
Value Range CS7 CS6 EF AF4 AF3 AF2 AF1 BE
Default Value -
Description l The BE, AF1, AF2, AF3, AF4, EF, CS6, and CS7 service classes respectively map eight queuing entities. The OptiX RTN 980 provides different QoS policies for the queues at different service classes. l CS6-CS7: indicates the highest service grade, which is mainly involved in signaling transmission. l EF: indicates fast forwarding. This service class is applicable to the traffic whose delay is small and packet loss ratio is low, for example, voice and video services. l AF1-AF4: indicates assured forwarding. This service class is applicable to the traffic that requires rate guarantee but does not require delay or jitter limit. l BE: indicates that the traffic is forwarded in best-effort manner without special processing.
Issue 03 (2011-04-10)
A-287
Parameter Grooming Police After Reloading
Value Range SP WRR
Default Value CS7, CS6, EF, BE: SP AF4, AF3, AF2, AF1: WRR
Description l The strict priority (SP) scheduling algorithm is designed for the key services. One important characteristic of the key services is that higher priorities are required to minimize the response delay in the case of congestion events. l The weighted round robin (WRR) scheduling algorithm divides each port into multiple output subqueues. The polling scheduling is performed among the output sub-queues to ensure that each subqueue has a certain period of service time. l The OptiX RTN 980 supports the setting of the SP+WRR scheduling algorithm of the CoS queue according to the requirement, and provides one or more queues that comply with the SP algorithm. Except for the default value, however, the value of the WRR scheduling algorithm and the value of the SP scheduling algorithm cannot be interleaved. That is, except for the default value, Grooming Police After Reloading can be changed from SP to WRR according to the queue priorities in a descending order (CS7-BE).
A-288
Issue 03 (2011-04-10)
Parameter
Value Range
Default Value
Description l This parameter is set according to the planning information.
Policy Weight(%)
1 to 100
25
l This parameter specifies the weight of the policy in the WRR queue. The weight indicates the percentage of the bandwidth resources obtained by the WRR queue. l This parameter can be set only when Grooming Police After Reloading is set to WRR. l This parameter is set according to the planning information.
Bandwidth Limit
Disabled Enabled
Disabled
l This parameter indicates or specifies whether traffic shaping is enabled for an egress queue corresponding to a PHB service class. l CIR (kbit/s), PIR (kbit/s), CBS (byte), and PBS (byte) can be set only when Bandwidth Limit is set to Enabled. l This parameter is set according to the planning information.
CIR(kbit/s)
Traffic shaping for an egress queue uses the single token bucket two color marker algorithm. The value of the CIR must be equal to the value of the PIR. In actual traffic shaping processing, only the PIR is valid.
Issue 03 (2011-04-10)
A-289
Parameter PIR(kbit/s)
Value Range -
Default Value -
Description l When the buffer queue is empty, the packets are processed as follows: If the rate of a packet is equal to or lower than the PIR, it is directly forwarded; if the rate of a packet is higher than the PIR, it enters the buffer queue and then is forwarded at a rate equal to the PIR. l When the buffer queue is not empty, the packets whose rate passes the restriction of the PIR directly enter the buffer queue and then are forwarded at a rate equal to the PIR. l This parameter is set according to the planning information.
CBS(byte)
l It is recommended that you set the value of the CBS equal to the value of the PIR. In actual traffic shaping processing, only the PBS is valid. l This parameter is set according to the planning information.
A-290
Issue 03 (2011-04-10)
Parameter PBS(byte)
Value Range -
Default Value -
Description l When the buffer queue is empty, certain burst packets can be forwarded if the rate of the packets is equal to or lower than the PIR in a certain period. The maximum traffic of the burst packets is determined by the PBS. l This parameter is set according to the planning information.
A.6.4.5 Parameter Description: Port Policy

This topic describes the parameters that are used for creating port policies.
Navigation Path
1. 2. 3. Select the NE from the Object Tree in the NE Explorer. Choose Configuration > QoS Management > Policy Management > Port Policy from the Function Tree. Click the CoS Configuration tab. Click New. The Create Port Policy dialog box is displayed.
Parameters
Parameter Policy ID Automatically Assign Value Range Selected Deselected Default Value Deselected Description This parameter specifies the policy ID of the port. This parameter specifies whether to automatically allocate the policy ID of the port policy. After this parameter is selected, the system automatically allocates the policy ID, and then the policy ID cannot be set manually. This parameter specifies the policy name of the port.
Policy Name
Issue 03 (2011-04-10)
A-291
Parameter CoS
Default Value -
Description l The BE, AF1, AF2, AF3, AF4, EF, CS6, and CS7 service classes respectively map eight queuing entities. The OptiX RTN 980 provides different QoS policies for the queues at different service class. l CS6-CS7: indicates the highest service grade, which is mainly involved in signaling transmission. l EF: indicates fast forwarding. This service class is applicable to the traffic whose delay is small and packet loss ratio is low, for example, voice and video services. l AF1-AF4: indicates assured forwarding. This service class is applicable to the traffic that requires rate guarantee but does not require delay or jitter limit. l BE: indicates that the traffic is forwarded in best-effort manner without special processing.
A-292
Issue 03 (2011-04-10)
Parameter Grooming Police After Reloading
Value Range SP WRR
Default Value CS7, CS6, EF, BE: SP AF4, AF3, AF2, AF1: WRR
Description l The strict priority (SP) scheduling algorithm is designed for the key services. One important characteristic of the key services is that higher priorities are required to minimize the response delay in the case of congestion events. l The weighted round robin (WRR) scheduling algorithm divides each port into multiple output subqueues. The polling scheduling is performed among the output sub-queues to ensure that each subqueue has a certain period of service time. l The OptiX RTN 980 supports the setting of the SP+WRR scheduling algorithm of the CoS queue according to the requirement, and provides one or more queues that comply with the SP algorithm. Except for the default value, however, the value of the WRR scheduling algorithm and the value of the SP scheduling algorithm cannot be interleaved. That is, except for the default value, Grooming Police After Reloading can be changed from SP to WRR according to the queue priorities in a descending order (CS7-BE).
Issue 03 (2011-04-10)
A-293
Parameter
Value Range
Default Value
Description l This parameter is set according to the planning information.
Policy Weight(%)
1 to 100
25
l Policy Weight(%) specifies the weight of the policy in the WRR queue. The weight indicates the percentage of the bandwidth resources obtained by the WRR queue. l This parameter can be set only when Grooming Police After Reloading is set to WRR. l This parameter is set according to the planning information.
Bandwidth Limit
Disabled Enabled
Disabled
l Bandwidth Limit indicates or specifies whether traffic shaping is enabled for an egress queue corresponding to a PHB service class. l CIR (kbit/s), PIR (kbit/s), CBS (byte), and PBS (byte) can be set only when Bandwidth Limit is set to Enabled. l This parameter is set according to the planning information.
CIR(kbit/s)
Traffic shaping for an egress queue uses the single token bucket two color marker algorithm. The value of the CIR must be equal to the value of the PIR. In actual traffic shaping processing, only the PIR is valid.
A-294
Issue 03 (2011-04-10)
Value Range -
Default Value -
Description l When the buffer queue is empty, the packets are processed as follows: If the rate of a packet is equal to or lower than the PIR, it is directly forwarded; if the rate of a packet is higher than the PIR, it enters the buffer queue and then is forwarded at a rate equal to the PIR. l When the buffer queue is not empty, the packets whose rate passes the restriction of the PIR directly enter the buffer queue and then are forwarded at a rate equal to the PIR. l This parameter is set according to the planning information.
CBS(byte)
l It is recommended that you set the value of the CBS equal to the value of the PIR. In actual traffic shaping processing, only the PBS is valid. l This parameter is set according to the planning information.
Issue 03 (2011-04-10)
A-295
Parameter PBS(byte)
Value Range -
Default Value -
Description l When the buffer queue is empty, certain burst packets can be forwarded if the rate of the packets is equal to or lower than the PIR in a certain period. The maximum traffic of the burst packets is determined by the PBS. l This parameter is set according to the planning information.
A.6.4.6 Parameter Description: Port Policy_Traffic Classification Configuration

This parameter describes the parameters that are used for creating traffic classification.
Navigation Path
1. 2. 3. Select the NE from the Object Tree in the NE Explorer. Choose Configuration > QoS Management > Policy Management > Port Policy from the Function Tree. Click the Traffic Classification Configuration tab. Click New.

Parameter Traffic Classification ID Value Range 1 to 1024 Default Value Description This parameter specifies the ID of the traffic classification.
A-296
Issue 03 (2011-04-10)
Parameter ACL Action
Value Range Permit Deny
Default Value Permit
Description l The access control list (ACL) determines whether to forward or discard the packets that enter the port according to the specified matching rules. l When ACL Action is set to Permit, the ingress port accepts and then performs QoS processing for only the packets that meet the specified mapping rules. l When ACL Action is set to Deny, the ingress port discards the packets that meet the specified mapping rules.
Ingress Parameters
Parameter Logical Relation Between Matched Rules Value Range And Default Value And Description l This parameter specifies the logical relationship between the traffic classification matching rules. l The OptiX RTN 980 supports the setting of the logical AND between multiple matching rules.
Issue 03 (2011-04-10)
A-297
Parameter Match Type
Value Range DSCP Value CVlan ID CVlan priority SVlan ID SVlan priority
Default Value -
Description l After you click Add or Delete, complex traffic classification can be performed on the traffic that enters the ingress port according to the preset matching rules. l In the case a specific service, complex traffic classification can be divided into basic traffic types according to the DSCP value, C-VLAN ID, CVLAN priority, SVLAN ID, or SVLAN priority. Traffic type is based on the associated Ethernet packets. Therefore, this parameter is set according to the packet type and the planning information.
Match Value
DSCP Value: 0 to 63 CVlan ID: 1 to 4094 CVlan priority: 0 to 7 SVlan ID: 1 to 4094 SVlan priority: 0 to 7
l If the matching value of the packets is the same as the preset Match Value, the packets match the rules of complex traffic classification. l This parameter is set according to the planning information.
Wildcard
This parameter has a fixed value of 0.
A-298
Issue 03 (2011-04-10)
Parameter CoS
Default Value -
Description l This parameter specifies the PHB service class queue mapped by the traffic classification packets. l If this parameter is set to empty (-), the traffic classification packets map the PHB service class queue according the mapping relation specified in the topic about Diffserv domain management. l This parameter is set according to the planning information.
Bandwidth Limit
Disabled Enabled
Enabled
l This parameter indicates or specifies whether the CAR operation is performed for the flow in the ingress direction. l CIR (kbit/s), PIR (kbit/s), CBS (byte), and PBS (byte) can be set only when Bandwidth Limit is set to Enabled. l This parameter is set according to the planning information.
Issue 03 (2011-04-10)
A-299
Parameter CIR(kbit/s)
Value Range -
Default Value -
Description l When the rate of the packets is not more than the CIR, the packets are marked blue and pass the CAR policing. These packets are first forwarded in the case of network congestion. l When the rate of the packets is more than the CIR but not more than the PIR, the packets whose rate is more than the CIR can pass the restriction of the CAR and are marked yellow. The processing method of the packets marked yellow can be set to "Pass" or "Remark". "Remark" indicates that the packets are mapped into another specified queue of a higher priority (this is equal to changing the priority of the packets) and then forwarded to the next port. If a network congestion event occurs again, the packets marked yellow can be processed according to the new priority. l This parameter is set according to the planning information.
A-300
Issue 03 (2011-04-10)
Value Range -
Default Value -
Description l When the rate of the packets is more than the PIR, the packets that exceed the rate restriction are marked red and directly discarded. l When the rate of the packets is more than the CIR but not more than the PIR, the packets whose rate is more than the CIR can pass the restriction of the CAR and are marked yellow. The processing method of the packets marked yellow can be set to "Pass" or "Remark". "Remark" indicates that the packets are mapped into another specified queue of a higher priority (this is equal to changing the priority of the packets) and then forwarded to the next port. If a network congestion event occurs again, the packets marked yellow can be processed according to the new priority. l This parameter is set according to the planning information.
Issue 03 (2011-04-10)
A-301
Parameter CBS(byte)
Value Range -
Default Value -
Description l During a certain period, if the rate of the packets whose processing method is marked "Pass" is not more than the CIR, certain burst packets are allowed and can be first forwarded in the case of network congestion. The maximum traffic of the burst packets is determined by the CBS. l This parameter is set according to the planning information.
PBS(byte)
l During a certain period, if the rate of the packets whose processing method is marked "Pass" is more than the CIR but not more than the PIR, certain burst packets are allowed and marked yellow. The maximum traffic of the burst packets is determined by the PBS. l This parameter is set according to the planning information.
A-302
Issue 03 (2011-04-10)
Parameter Coloration Mode
Value Range Color Blindness
Default Value Color Blindness
Description l This parameter specifies the CAR operation performed by the equipment on the packets. The packets are dyed according to the result of the CAR operation. The dying rule is determined by the comparison between the rate of the packets and the preset CAR value. l The OptiX RTN 980 supports Color Blindness only.
Packet Color
Red Yellow Green
Packets can be dyed in three colors: red, yellow, and green. The packets in red are first discarded. l This parameter specifies the method of handling the packets. l Discard: The packets are discarded. l Pass: The packets are forwarded. l Remark: The packets are remarked. "Remark" indicates that the packets are mapped into another specified queue of a higher priority (this is equal to changing the priority of the packets) and then forwarded to the next port.
Handling Mode
Discard Pass Remark
Issue 03 (2011-04-10)
A-303
Parameter Relabeled CoS
Default Value -
Description If the handling method is set to "Remark", you can reset the CoS of the packets.
Egress Parameters
Parameter Bandwidth Limit Value Range Disabled Enable Default Value Enable Description l This parameter indicates or specifies whether the traffic shaping is performed in the egress function. l CIR (kbit/s), PIR (kbit/s), CBS (byte), and PBS (byte) can be set only when Bandwidth Limit is set to Enabled. l This parameter is set according to the planning information.
A-304
Issue 03 (2011-04-10)
Value Range -
Default Value -
Description l In the case that no packets exist in the egress queue: When the rate of the packets is not more than the CIR, these packets directly enter the egress queue. l In the case that certain packets exist in the egress queue: The packets whose rate passes the restriction of the PIR directly enter the egress queue, which forwards the packets to the next port at the CIR. l This parameter is set according to the planning information.
Issue 03 (2011-04-10)
A-305
Value Range -
Default Value -
Description l In the case that no packets exist in the egress queue: If the rate of the packets is more than the CIR but is not more than the PIR, the packets whose rate is more than the CIR enter the egress queue, which forwards the packets to the next port at the CIR. If the rate of the packets is more than the PIR, the packets are directly discarded. l In the case that certain packets exist in the egress queue: The packets whose rate passes the restriction of the PIR directly enter the egress queue, which forwards the packets to the next port at the CIR. l This parameter is set according to the planning information.
CBS(byte)
l If the rate of the packets is not more than the CIR during a certain period, the burst packets are directly transmitted. The maximum traffic of the burst packets is determined by the CBS. l This parameter is set according to the planning information.
A-306
Issue 03 (2011-04-10)
Parameter PBS(byte)
Value Range -
Default Value -
Description l If the rate of the packets is more than the CIR but is not more than the PIR during a certain period, the burst packets enter the egress queue. The maximum traffic of the burst packets is determined by the PBS. l This parameter is set according to the planning information.
A.6.4.7 Parameter Description: Port Shaping Management_Creation

This topic describes the parameters that are used for creating port shaping management tasks.
Navigation Path
1. 2. Select the NE from the Object Tree in the NE Explorer. Choose Configuration > QoS Management > Port Shaping Management from the Function Tree. Click New.
Parameters for Port Shaping Management

Parameter Slot No. Port CIR (kbit/s) CBS (byte) PIR (kbit/s) Value Range Default Value Description This parameter specifies the slot ID. This parameter specifies the port. Traffic shaping for an egress queue uses the single token bucket two color marker algorithm. The value of the CIR must be equal to the value of the PIR. In actual traffic shaping processing, only the PIR is valid. If the traffic shaping function is enabled, OptiX RTN 980 processes the packets in the buffer
A-307
Issue 03 (2011-04-10)
Parameter PBS (byte)
Value Range -
Default Value -
Description queue through the following methods when no packets are available in the queue. l When the buffer queue is empty, the packets are processed as follows: If the rate of a packet is equal to or lower than the PIR, it is directly forwarded; if the rate of a packet is higher than the PIR, it enters the buffer queue and then is forwarded at a rate equal to the PIR. l When the buffer queue is empty, certain burst packets can be forwarded if the rate of the packets is equal to or lower than the PIR in a certain period. The maximum traffic of the burst packets is determined by the PBS. l When the buffer queue is not empty, the packets whose rate passes the restriction of the PIR directly enter the buffer queue and then are forwarded at a rate equal to the PIR.
A-308
Issue 03 (2011-04-10)
A.7 RMON Parameters

This topic describes the parameters that are related to RMON performances. A.7.1 Parameter Description: RMON Performance_Statistics Group This topic describes the parameters that are related to RMON statistics groups. A.7.2 Parameter Description: RMON Performance_History Group This topic describes the parameters that are related to RMON history groups. A.7.3 Parameter Description: RMON Performance_History Control Group This topic describes the parameters that are related to RMON history control groups. A.7.4 Parameter Description: RMON Performance_RMON Setting This topic describes the parameters that are related to RMON setting.
A.7.1 Parameter Description: RMON Performance_Statistics Group

This topic describes the parameters that are related to RMON statistics groups.
Navigation Path
1. 2. Select the corresponding board from the Object Tree in the NE Explorer. Choose Performance > RMON Performance from the Function Tree. Click the Statistics Group tab.
Parameters
Parameter Object Sampling Period Display Accumulated Value Value Range 5 to 150 Selected Deselected Default Value 5 Deselected Description This parameter specifies the object to be monitored. This parameter specifies the duration of the monitoring period. l This parameter specifies the method of displaying the performance events. l If this parameter is not selected, the displayed value is an increment compared to the value that is collected in last sampling period and stored in the register. l If this parameter is selected, the displayed value is an absolute value that is currently stored in the register.
Issue 03 (2011-04-10)
A-309
Parameter Display Mode
Value Range Graphics List
Default Value List
Description l This parameter specifies the method of displaying the performance events. l If this parameter is set to Graphics, the number of performance events to be monitored at each time cannot be more than 10, and the unit should be the same.
Legend
Color Description
l This parameter indicates the description of different colors. l This parameter is valid only when Display Mode is set to Graphics.
Event
l This parameter indicates the queried performance events. l This parameter is valid only when Display Mode is set to List.
A.7.2 Parameter Description: RMON Performance_History Group

This topic describes the parameters that are related to RMON history groups.
Navigation Path
1. 2. Select the corresponding board from the Object Tree in the NE Explorer. Choose Performance > RMON Performance from the Function Tree. Click the History Group tab.
Parameters
Parameter Object Ended from/to History Table Type Value Range 30-Second 30-Minute Custom Period 1 Custom Period 2 Default Value 30-Second Description The parameter indicates the object to be monitored. This parameter specifies the start time and end time of the monitoring period. This parameter specifies the monitoring period.
A-310
Issue 03 (2011-04-10)
Parameter Display Mode
Value Range Graphics List
Default Value List
Description l This parameter specifies the method of displaying the performance events. l If this parameter is set to Graphics, the number of performance events to be monitored at each time cannot be more than 10, and the unit should be the same.
Legend
Color Description
l This parameter indicates the description of different colors. l This parameter is valid only when Display Mode is set to Graphics.
Event
l This parameter indicates the queried performance events. l This parameter is valid only when Display Mode is set to List.
Statistical Item Statistical Value Time Flag
This parameter indicates the performance items to be monitored. This parameter indicates the statistical value of the monitored performance items. This parameter indicates the time point of each performance event.
A.7.3 Parameter Description: RMON Performance_History Control Group

This topic describes the parameters that are related to RMON history control groups.
Navigation Path
Select the NE from the Object Tree in the NE Explorer. Choose Performance > RMON History Control Group.
Parameters
Parameter 30-Second Value Range Enabled Disabled 30-Minute Enabled Disabled Enabled Default Value Disabled Description This parameter indicates or specifies whether to enable the 30-Second monitoring function. This parameter indicates or specifies whether to enable the 30-Minute monitoring function.
Issue 03 (2011-04-10)
A-311
Parameter Custom Period 1
Description This parameter indicates or specifies whether to enable Custom Period 1. This parameter indicates or specifies whether to enable Custom Period 2. l This parameter indicates or specifies the monitoring period in Custom Period 1 and Custom Period 2. l The value must be an integer multiple of 30. This parameter indicates or specifies the quantity of the history registers. This parameter specifies the RMON start time.
Custom Period 2
Enabled Disabled
Disabled
Period Length(s)
300 to 43200 (Custom Period 1) 300 to 86400 (Custom Period 2)
900(Custom Period 1) 86400(Custom Period 2) 16 6(Custom Period 2)
History Register Count RMON Monitor Start Time
1 to 50
A.7.4 Parameter Description: RMON Performance_RMON Setting

This topic describes the parameters that are related to RMON setting.
Navigation Path
l l Select the corresponding board from the Object Tree in the NE Explorer. Choose Performance > RMON Performance from the Function Tree. Click the RMON Setting tab.
Object Parameters
Parameter Object 30-Second Value Range Enabled Disabled Default Value Description This parameter indicates the object to be collected. This parameter indicates or specifies whether to enable the 30-Second monitoring function.
NOTE In the case of Object, 30-Second cannot be set.
30-Minute
Enabled Disabled
Disabled
l This parameter indicates or specifies whether to enable the 30-Minute monitoring function. l In RMON History Control Group of the NE, if 30-Minute is set to Disabled, Not Supported is displayed for this parameter.
A-312
Issue 03 (2011-04-10)
Parameter Custom Period 1
Default Value -
Description l This parameter indicates or specifies whether to enable the monitoring function based on Custom Period 1. l In RMON History Control Group of the NE, if Custom Period 1 is set to Disabled, Not Supported is displayed for this parameter.
Custom Period 2
Enabled Disabled
l This parameter indicates or specifies whether to enable the monitoring function based on Custom Period 2. l In RMON History Control Group of the NE, if Custom Period 2 is set to Disabled, Not Supported is displayed for this parameter.
Event Parameters
Parameter Event 30-Second Value Range Enabled Disabled 30-Minute Enabled Disabled Custom Period 1 Enabled Disabled Disabled Default Value Disabled Description This parameter indicates the performance event to be monitored. This parameter indicates or specifies whether to enable the monitoring function based on 30-Second. This parameter indicates or specifies whether to enable the 30-Minute monitoring function. This parameter indicates or specifies whether to enable the monitoring function based on Custom Period 1Custom Period 1 Monitor. This parameter indicates or specifies whether to enable the monitoring function based on Custom Period 2Custom Period 2 Monitor. l This parameter indicates or specifies the threshold detection method. l If the number of detected events reaches the preset threshold, the events are reported to the NMS. Otherwise, the events are not reported to the NMS. l If an event does not support this parameter, Not Supported is displayed.
Custom Period 2
Enabled Disabled
Disabled
Threshold Detect
Report All Do Not Detect Report Only the Upper Threshold Report Only the Lower Threshold
Report All
Issue 03 (2011-04-10)
A-313
Parameter Upper Threshold
Value Range -
Default Value -
Description This parameter indicates or specifies the upper threshold. If the number of performance events exceeds the preset upper threshold, the corresponding performance events are reported. This parameter indicates or specifies the lower threshold. If the number of performance events is less than the preset lower threshold, the corresponding performance events are reported. This parameter indicates the unit of each threshold of the performance events.
Lower Threshold
Threshold Unit
A.8 Parameters for MPLS/PWE3 Services

This topic describes parameters that are related to MPLS/PWE3 services.
NOTE
For parameters for PW-carried E-Line services, see A.6 Parameters for Ethernet Services and Ethernet Features on the Packet Plane.
A.8.1 MPLS Tunnel Parameters This topic describes parameters that are related to MPLS tunnels. A.8.2 CES Parameters This topic describes parameters that are related to CES services. A.8.3 ATM Parameters This topic describes the parameters that are related to ATM services.
A.8.1 MPLS Tunnel Parameters

This topic describes parameters that are related to MPLS tunnels. A.8.1.1 Parameter Description: Basic Configurations of MPLS Tunnels This topic describes parameters that are related to the basic configurations of MPLS tunnels. A.8.1.2 Parameter Description: Unicast Tunnel Management_Static Tunnel This topic describes parameters that are related to static tunnels. A.8.1.3 Parameter Description: Unicast Tunnel Management_Creation of Unidirectional Tunnels This topic describes parameters that are used for creating unidirectional tunnels. A.8.1.4 Parameter Description: Unicast Tunnel Management_Creation of Bidirectional Tunnels This topic describes the parameters that are related to creating bidirectional tunnels. A.8.1.5 Parameter Description: Unicast Tunnel Management_OAM Parameters This topic describes parameters that are related to MPLS OAM. A.8.1.6 Parameter Description: Unicast Tunnel Management_FDI
This topic describes FDI parameters. A.8.1.7 Parameter Description: Unicast Tunnel Management_LSP Ping This topic describes the parameters that are related to the LSP Ping test. A.8.1.8 Parameter Description: Unicast Tunnel Management_LSP Traceroute This topic describes the parameters that are related to the LSP Traceroute test. A.8.1.9 Parameter Description: PW Management_PW Management This topic describes parameters that are related to PW management. A.8.1.10 Parameter Description: PW Management_MS-PW Creation This topic describes the parameters that are related to MS-PW creation. A.8.1.11 Parameter Description: PW Management_PW OAM This topic describes parameters that are related to PW OAM. A.8.1.12 Parameter Description: PW Management_PW Ping This topic describes the parameters that are related to the PW Ping test. A.8.1.13 Parameter Description: PW Management_PW Traceroute This topic describes the parameters that are related to the PW Traceroute test. A.8.1.14 Parameter Description: MPLS APS Protection Management This topic describes parameters that are related to MPLS APS protection management. A.8.1.15 Parameter Description: Tunnel Protection Group_Creation This topic describes the parameters that are related to creating a tunnel protection group. A.8.1.16 Parameter Description: PW APS Protection Group_Creation This topic describes the parameters that are used for creating a PW APS protection group. A.8.1.17 Parameter Description: Slave Protection Pair of a PW APS Protection Group_Creation This topic describes the parameters that are used for creating a slave protection pair of a PW APS protection group.
A.8.1.1 Parameter Description: Basic Configurations of MPLS Tunnels

This topic describes parameters that are related to the basic configurations of MPLS tunnels.
Navigation Path
In the NE Explorer, select the required NE from the Object Tree and choose Configuration > MPLS Management > Basic Configuration from the Function Tree.
Issue 03 (2011-04-10)
A-315

Parameter LSR ID Value Range Default Value 0.0.0.0 Description l Specifies or displays the LSR ID of an NE. On a PSN, each NE is assigned a unique LSR ID. l This parameter must be set in IPv4 address format. Start of Global Label Space 0-1015808 0 l Specifies the start value of a global label space. The OptiX RTN 980 supports a step of 2048. l The start value of a global label space is the smallest unicast tunnel label. When Start of Global Label Space is 0, the smallest unicast tunnel label is 16, with values 0 to 15 reserved. l On an MPLS-enabled network, global label spaces of NEs are recommended to overlap each other if possible. Global Label Space Size Start of Multicast Label Space Displays the size of a global label space. The OptiX RTN 980 does not support this parameter.
A.8.1.2 Parameter Description: Unicast Tunnel Management_Static Tunnel

This topic describes parameters that are related to static tunnels.
Navigation Path
1. In the NE Explorer, select the required NE from the Object Tree and choose Configuration > MPLS Management > Unicast Tunnel Management from the Function Tree. Click the Static Tunnel tab.
2.
A-316
3.
Click Query.

Parameter ID Name Enable State Value Range Enabled Disabled Default Value Enabled Description Displays the tunnel ID. Specifies or displays the customized tunnel name. l Specifies or displays whether a tunnel is enabled.
NOTE The OptiX RTN 980 supports only the value Enabled.
Node Type
l Displays the node type. l For bidirectional tunnels, this parameter displays the node types of forward tunnels.
Direction CIR(kbit/s)
No Limit 1024-1024000
Displays the direction of a tunnel. l Specifies or displays the committed information rate (CIR) of a tunnel. l Generally, it is recommended that you set this parameter to No Limit. If you need to enable the CES CAC function or limit the PW bandwidth, set this parameter to be the same as the planned tunnel bandwidth.
PIR(kbit/s) CBS(byte) PBS(byte) Bandwidth Remaining (kbit/s)
The OptiX RTN 980 does not support this parameter. The OptiX RTN 980 does not support this parameter. The OptiX RTN 980 does not support this parameter. The OptiX RTN 980 does not support this parameter.
Issue 03 (2011-04-10)
A-317
Parameter In Port
Value Range -
Default Value -
Description Displays the ingress port of a forward tunnel, which is also the egress port of the mapping reverse tunnel. Displays the MPLS label that a forward tunnel carries when entering a node. Specifies the MPLS label that a reverse tunnel carries when entering a tunnel. Displays the egress port of a forward tunnel, which is also the ingress port of the mapping reverse tunnel. Displays the MPLS label that a forward tunnel carries when leaving a node. Displays the MPLS label that a reverse tunnel carries when leaving a node. Displays the IP address of the next-hop port of a forward tunnel. Displays the IP address of the next-hop port of a reverse tunnel. Displays the LSR ID of the ingress node. Displays the LSR ID of the egress node. Displays the tunnel type.
Forward In Label
Reverse Out Label
Out Port
Forward Out Label
Reverse In Label
Forward Next Hop Address Reverse Next Hop Address Source Node Sink Node Tunnel Type
A-318
Issue 03 (2011-04-10)
Parameter EXP
Value Range 0-7 None
Default Value -
Description l Specifies or displays the value of the EXP field in the packets transmitted through MPLS tunnels. l For unidirectional tunnels, this parameter is available only if Node Type is Ingress. l For bidirectional tunnels, this parameter cannot be set if Node Type is Transit. l If this parameter is set to a value from 0 to 7, the EXP field takes its fixed value. l If this parameter takes its default value None, the EXP field varies based on the DiffServ mappings.
LSP Mode
Pipe
l Displays or specifies the LSP mode. l Pipe: When stripping MPLS tunnel labels from packets, an egress node does not update the scheduling priority for the packets. l For bidirectional tunnels, this parameter is available only if Node Type is Egress. l For bidirectional tunnels, this parameter cannot be set if Node Type is Transit.
NOTE On the OptiX RTN 980, this parameter can be set to Pipe only.
MTU(byte)
Issue 03 (2011-04-10)
A-319
Parameter Protection Group
Value Range -
Default Value -
Description Displays the MPLS APS protection group to which a tunnel belongs. l Specifies or displays the VLAN ID that Ethernet packets carry when transmitted over MPLS tunnels. l If packets need to traverse a Layer 2 network, set the VLAN ID for the tunnel carried by the NNI port according to the VLAN planning requirements on the Layer 2 network. l Set this parameter to the same value for both ends of a tunnel.
VLAN ID
A-320
Issue 03 (2011-04-10)
Parameter CoS
Default Value -
Description l This parameter specifies the PHB service class of an LLSP, if the type of an MPLS tunnel is L-LSP. l CS6-CS7: indicates the highest service grade, which is mainly involved in signaling transmission. l EF: indicates fast forwarding. This service class is applicable to the traffic whose delay is small and packet loss ratio is low, for example, voice and video services. l AF1-AF4: indicates assured forwarding. This service class is applicable to the traffic that requires rate guarantee but does not require delay or jitter limit. l BE: indicates that the traffic is forwarded in best-effort manner without special processing.
Deployment
Displays the deployment status of the tunnel.
A.8.1.3 Parameter Description: Unicast Tunnel Management_Creation of Unidirectional Tunnels

This topic describes parameters that are used for creating unidirectional tunnels.
Navigation Path
1. In the NE Explorer, select the required NE from the Object Tree and choose Configuration > MPLS Management > Unicast Tunnel Management from the Function Tree. Click the Static Tunnel tab.
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. A-321
2.
Issue 03 (2011-04-10)
3. 4.
Click New and choose Unidirectional Tunnel from the drop-down list. The New Unicast Unidirectional Tunnel dialog box is displayed. Select New Reverse Tunnel.

Parameter Tunnel ID Value Range 1-65535 Default Value Description l Specifies the tunnel ID. l The total number of tunnels and PWs must be equal to or less than 1024. The number of tunnels that carry PWs are not included in the total. Tunnel Name Node Type Ingress Egress Transit Direction CIR(kbit/s) No Limit 1024-1024000 No Limit Indicates the direction of a tunnel. l Specifies the committed information rate (CIR) of a tunnel. l Generally, it is recommended that you set this parameter to No Limit. If you need to enable the CES CAC function or limit the PW bandwidth, set this parameter to be the same as the planned tunnel bandwidth. CBS(kbit/s) PIR(Byte) PBS(Byte) In Board/Logic Interface Type The OptiX RTN 980 does not support this parameter. The OptiX RTN 980 does not support this parameter. The OptiX RTN 980 does not support this parameter. Specifies the board where the ingress port of a forward tunnel is located. Ingress Specifies the tunnel name. Specifies the node type of a forward tunnel.
A-322
Issue 03 (2011-04-10)
Parameter In Port
Value Range -
Default Value -
Description Specifies the ingress port of a forward tunnel, which is also the egress port of the mapping reverse tunnel. l Specifies the MPLS label that a tunnel carries when entering a node. l This parameter can be set for only egress and transit nodes.
In Labela
16-1048575
Out Board/Logic Interface Type Out Port
Specifies the board where the egress port of a forward tunnel is located. Specifies the egress port of a forward tunnel, which is also the ingress port of the mapping reverse tunnel. l Specifies the MPLS label that a tunnel carries when leaving a node. l This parameter can be set for only ingress and transit nodes.
Out Labela
16-1048575
Next Hop Address
l Specifies the port IP address of the next-hop node for a tunnel. l This parameter can be set for only ingress and transit nodes.
Source Node
l Specifies the LSR ID of the ingress node. l This parameter can be set for only egress nodes and transit nodes.
Sink Node
l Specifies the LSR ID of the egress node. l This parameter can be set for only ingress and transit nodes.
Issue 03 (2011-04-10)
A-323
Parameter Tunnel Type
Value Range E-LSP L-LSP
Default Value E-LSP
Description l Specifies the tunnel type. l The value E-LSP indicates that the EXP field is used to identify packet scheduling priorities of PWs. An E-LSP tunnel can contain PWs of eight packet scheduling priorities. l The value L-LSP indicates that the MPLS label value is used to identify packet scheduling priorities of PWs. An L-LSP tunnel can contain PWs of the same packet scheduling priority.
EXP
0-7 None
None
l Specifies the value of the EXP field in the packets transmitted through MPLS tunnels. l This parameter is available only if Node Type is Ingress. l If this parameter is set to a value from 0 to 7, the EXP field takes its fixed value. l If this parameter takes its default value None, the EXP field varies based on the DiffServ mappings.
A-324
Issue 03 (2011-04-10)
Parameter LSP Mode
Value Range Pipe
Default Value Pipe
Description l Pipe: When stripping MPLS tunnel labels from packets, an egress node does not update the scheduling priority for the packets. l This parameter is available only if Node Type is Egress.
NOTE The OptiX RTN 980 supports only the value Pipe.
MTU CoS
CS7 CS6 EF AF4 AF3 AF2 AF1 BE
BE
The OptiX RTN 980 does not support this parameter. l This parameter specifies the PHB service class of an LLSP, if the type of an MPLS tunnel is L-LSP. l CS6-CS7: indicates the highest service grade, which is mainly involved in signaling transmission. l EF: indicates fast forwarding. This service class is applicable to the traffic whose delay is small and packet loss ratio is low, for example, voice and video services. l AF1-AF4: indicates assured forwarding. This service class is applicable to the traffic that requires rate guarantee but does not require delay or jitter limit. l BE: indicates that the traffic is forwarded in best-effort manner without special processing.
Issue 03 (2011-04-10)
A-325
NOTE
At an MPLS node, in labels must be different from each other, out labels must also be different from each other, but out labels can be the same as in labels.
A.8.1.4 Parameter Description: Unicast Tunnel Management_Creation of Bidirectional Tunnels

This topic describes the parameters that are related to creating bidirectional tunnels.
Navigation Path
1. In the NE Explorer, select the required NE from the Object Tree and choose Configuration > MPLS Management > Unicast Tunnel Management from the Function Tree. Click the Static Tunnel tab. Click New and choose Bidirectional Tunnel from the drop-down list.
2. 3.

Parameter Tunnel ID Value Range 1 to 65535 Default Value Description l Specifies the tunnel ID. l The total number of tunnels and PWs must be equal to or less than 1024. The number of tunnels that carry PWs is not included in the total. Tunnel Name Node Type Ingress Egress Transit Direction Indicates the direction of a tunnel. Ingress Specifies the tunnel name. Specifies the node type of a forward tunnel.
A-326
Issue 03 (2011-04-10)
Value Range No Limit 1024-1024000
Default Value No Limit
Description l Specifies the committed information rate (CIR) of a tunnel. l Generally, it is recommended that you set this parameter to No Limit. If you need to enable the CES CAC function or limit the PW bandwidth, set this parameter to be the same as the planned tunnel bandwidth.
CBS(kbit/s) PIR(Byte) PBS(Byte) In Board/Logic Interface Type In Port
The OptiX RTN 980 does not support this parameter. The OptiX RTN 980 does not support this parameter. The OptiX RTN 980 does not support this parameter. Specifies the board where the ingress port of a forward tunnel is located. Specifies the ingress port of a forward tunnel, which is also the egress port of the mapping reverse tunnel. l Specifies the MPLS label that data carries when entering a forward tunnel. l This parameter can be set for only egress and transit nodes.
Forward In Labela
16 to 1048575
Reverse Out Labela
16 to 1048575
l Specifies the MPLS label that data carries when leaving a reverse tunnel. l This parameter can be set for only ingress and transit nodes.
Out Board/Logic Interface Type
Specifies the board where the egress port of a forward tunnel is located.
Issue 03 (2011-04-10)
A-327
Parameter Out Port
Value Range -
Default Value -
Description Specifies the egress port of a forward tunnel, which is also the ingress port of the mapping reverse tunnel. l Specifies the MPLS label that data carries when leaving a forward tunnel. l This parameter can be set for only ingress and transit nodes.
Forward Out Labela
16 to 1048575
Reverse In Labela
16 to 1048575
l Specifies the MPLS label that data carries when entering a reverse tunnel. l This parameter can be set for only egress and transit nodes.
Forward Next Hop Address
l Indicates or specifies the IP address of the next hop in a forward tunnel. l This parameter can be set for only ingress and transit nodes.
Reverse Next Hop Address
l Indicates or specifies the IP address of the next hop in a reverse tunnel. l This parameter can be set for only egress and transit nodes.
Source Node
l Specifies the LSR ID of the ingress node. l This parameter can be set for only egress nodes and transit nodes.
Sink Node
l Specifies the LSR ID of the egress node. l This parameter can be set for only ingress and transmit nodes.
A-328
Issue 03 (2011-04-10)
Parameter Tunnel Type
Value Range E-LSP L-LSP
Default Value E-LSP
Description l Specifies the tunnel type. l The value E-LSP indicates that the EXP field is used to identify packet scheduling priorities of PWs. An E-LSP tunnel can contain PWs of eight packet scheduling priorities. l The value L-LSP indicates that the MPLS label value is used to identify packet scheduling priorities of PWs. An L-LSP tunnel can contain PWs of the same packet scheduling priority.
EXP
0 to 7 None
None
l Specifies the value of the EXP field in the packets transmitted through MPLS tunnels. l This parameter cannot be set if Node Type is Transit. l If this parameter is set to a value from 0 to 7, the EXP field assumes the fixed value. l If this parameter takes the default value None, the EXP field is set based on the DiffServ mappings.
Issue 03 (2011-04-10)
A-329
Parameter LSP Mode
Value Range Pipe
Default Value Pipe
Description l Pipe: When stripping MPLS tunnel labels from packets, an egress node does not update the scheduling priority for the packets. l This parameter cannot be set if Node Type is Transit.
NOTE The OptiX RTN 980 supports only the value Pipe.
MTU CoS
CS7 CS6 EF AF4 AF3 AF2 AF1 BE
BE
The OptiX RTN 980 does not support this parameter. l This parameter specifies the PHB service class of an LLSP, if the type of an MPLS tunnel is L-LSP. l CS6-CS7: indicates the highest service grade, which is mainly involved in signaling transmission. l EF: indicates fast forwarding. This service class is applicable to the traffic whose delay is small and packet loss ratio is low, for example, voice and video services. l AF1-AF4: indicates assured forwarding. This service class is applicable to the traffic that requires rate guarantee but does not require delay or jitter limit. l BE: indicates that the traffic is forwarded in best-effort manner without special processing.
A-330
Issue 03 (2011-04-10)
NOTE
At an MPLS node, in labels must be different from each other, out labels must also be different from each other, but out labels can be the same as in labels.
A.8.1.5 Parameter Description: Unicast Tunnel Management_OAM Parameters

This topic describes parameters that are related to MPLS OAM.
Navigation Path
1. In the NE Explorer, select the required NE from the Object Tree and choose Configuration > MPLS Management > Unicast Tunnel Management from the Function Tree. Click the OAM Parameter tab.
2.

Parameter Tunnel ID Tunnel Name Node Type Value Range Default Value Description Displays the tunnel ID. Displays the tunnel name. l Displays the node type. l For bidirectional tunnels, this parameter displays the node types of forward tunnels. Tunnel Direction Displays the direction of a tunnel.
Issue 03 (2011-04-10)
A-331
Description l Specifies or displays whether the local node can perform and respond to OAM operations. l If OAM Status is Enabled, the local NE can perform and respond to OAM operations. l If OAM Status is Disabled, the local NE cannot perform and respond to OAM operations. l If MPLS APS protection needs to be configured or a CC test needs to be performed for the tunnel, OAM Status needs to be set to Enabled.
A-332
Issue 03 (2011-04-10)
Description l Specifies or displays the MPLS OAM detection mode. l Manual: During a CC test, MPLS OAM packets are sent at the interval specified by the user. l Auto-Sensing: During a CC test, MPLS OAM packets are sent at the interval for receiving MPLS OAM packets. l For a unidirectional tunnel, this parameter can be set for its egress node only. l For a bidirectional tunnel, if Detection Mode is set to Manual, you need to set the MPLS OAM detection packets to be received and transmitted. l Generally, the value Auto-Sensing is recommended.
Issue 03 (2011-04-10)
A-333
Value Range CV FFD
Default Value CV
Description l CV: The detection packets are sent at a fixed interval. l FFD: The detection packets are sent at the interval specified by the user. l For the egress node of a unidirectional tunnel, if Detection Mode is set to Manual, this parameter specifies the type of MPLS OAM detection packets to be received. l For a bidirectional tunnel, if Detection Mode is set to AutoSensing, this parameter specifies the type of MPLS OAM detection packets to be transmitted. l For a bidirectional tunnel, if Detection Mode is set to Manual, this parameter specifies the types of MPLS OAM detection packets to be received and transmitted. l The value FFD is assumed for MPLS APS and the value CV is assumed for continuous connectivity check on MPLS tunnels.
A-334
Issue 03 (2011-04-10)
Parameter Detection Packet Period (ms)
Value Range 3.3 10 20 50 100 200 500
Default Value 50
Description l Displays or specifies the OAM detection period. l This parameter is available only when Detection Packet Type is FFD. It takes its fixed value of 1000 ms when Detection Packet Type is CV. l Set this parameter to 3.3 for MPLS APS usually. If the packet transmission delay time of an MPLS tunnel exceeds 3.3 ms, the transmission interval of FFD packets needs to be a value greater than the delay time.
Reverse Tunnel
l Specifies the mapping reverse tunnel of a forward tunnel. l For a bidirectional tunnel, this parameter cannot be set.
CV/FFD Status LSP Status LSP Defect Type Disable LSP Duration (ms) LSP Defect Location
Displays whether CV/ FFD is enabled. Displays whether an LSP is available. Displays the LSP defect type. Displays the duration when an LSP is unavailable. Displays the LSR ID of a node where LSP defects are detected.
Issue 03 (2011-04-10)
A-335
Parameter SD Threshold
Value Range 0-100
Default Value 0
Description l Specifies or displays the SD threshold. When the OAM packet loss ratio is higher than the parameter value, the corresponding alarm is reported. l For a unidirectional tunnel, this parameter can be set for its egress node only. l When this parameter is set to 0, SD threshold detection is not supported.
SF Threshold
0-100
l Specifies or displays the SF threshold. When the OAM packet loss ratio is higher than the parameter value, the corresponding alarm is reported. l For a unidirectional tunnel, this parameter can be set for its egress node only. l When this parameter is set to 0, SF threshold detection is not supported. l The SD threshold is not higher than the SF threshold.
Source Node Sink Node
Displays the source node of a tunnel. Displays the sink node of a tunnel.
A.8.1.6 Parameter Description: Unicast Tunnel Management_FDI

This topic describes FDI parameters.
A-336
Issue 03 (2011-04-10)
Navigation Path
1. In the NE Explorer, select the required NE from the Object Tree and choose Configuration > MPLS Management > Unicast Tunnel Management from the Function Tree. Click the FDI tab.
2.

Parameter Enable FDI Value Range Selected Not selected Default Value Selected Description l Specifies or displays whether Enable FDI is selected. l If the FDI function is enabled for a transit node, the transit node inserts an FDI packet to all LSPs that travel through the transit node when a fault occurs on the link between the ingress and transit nodes. On reception of the FDI packet, the egress node reports an alarm. In this case, if MPLS APS is configured correctly, protection switching is triggered before the egress node detects an LSP defect within a detection period. l Generally, the default parameter value is recommended.
A.8.1.7 Parameter Description: Unicast Tunnel Management_LSP Ping

This topic describes the parameters that are related to the LSP Ping test.
Navigation Path
1. In the NE Explorer, select the required NE from the Object Tree and choose Configuration > MPLS Management > Unicast Tunnel Management from the Function Tree. Click the OAM Parameters tab.
2.
Issue 03 (2011-04-10)
3.
Select the required tunnel, click OAM Operation in the lower right corner, and choose Ping Test from the drop-down list.

Parameter Packet Count EXP Value Value Range 1 to 4294967295 0 to 7 Default Value 3 7 Description Specifies the number of test request packets. l Specifies the EXP value of the MPLS label in test request packets. The value 7 indicates the highest priority. l The default value is recommended. TTL 1 to 255 255 l Specifies the time-tolive (TTL) value of the MPLS label in test request packets. l The default value is recommended. Transmit Interval (10ms) 1 to 1000 100 l Specifies the interval for transmitting test request packets. l The default value is recommended. Packet Length 64 to 1400 64 l Specifies the length of test request packets. l The default value is recommended. Wait-to-Response Timeout Time(10ms) 1 to 6000 300 l Specifies the wait-toresponse timeout value. l The default value is recommended.
A-338
Issue 03 (2011-04-10)
Parameter Response Mode
Value Range IPv4 UDP Response No Response Application Control Channel
Default Value IPv4 UDP Response
Description l Specifies the response mode of test request packets. l The value No Response indicates that the test performance event is reported without sending response packets. l The value Application Control Channel indicates that response is performed through the reverse channel. l The value IPv4 UDP Response indicates that the IPv4 UDP packets encapsulating MPLS echo reply messages are sent as response packets. l The value IPv4 UDP Response is reserved for scenarios where all nodes on an LSP communicate with each other over a DCN running IP protocols. l Set this parameter based on the situation of the egress node. If the egress node supports reverse channel response, set this parameter to Application Control Channel. If the egress node does not support reverse channel response but supports DCN channel response by means of IP protocols, set this parameter to IPv4 UDP Response.
Issue 03 (2011-04-10)
A-339
Parameter
Value Range
Default Value
Description
NOTE For a unidirectional tunnel, Response Mode cannot be set to Application Control Channel.
A.8.1.8 Parameter Description: Unicast Tunnel Management_LSP Traceroute

This topic describes the parameters that are related to the LSP Traceroute test.
Navigation Path
1. In the NE Explorer, select the required NE from the Object Tree and choose Configuration > MPLS Management > Unicast Tunnel Management from the Function Tree. Click the OAM Parameters tab. Select the required tunnel, click OAM Operation in the lower right corner, and choose Traceroute Test from the drop-down list.
2. 3.

Parameter EXP Value Value Range 0 to 7 Default Value 7 Description l Specifies the EXP value of the MPLS label in test request packets. The value 7 indicates the highest priority. l The default value is recommended. TTL 1 to 255 255 l Specifies the time-tolive (TTL) value of the MPLS label in test request packets. l The default value is recommended. Packet Length 84 to 1400 84 l Specifies the length of test request packets. l The default value is recommended.
A-340
Issue 03 (2011-04-10)
Parameter Wait-to-Response Timeout Time(10ms)
Default Value 300
Description l Specifies the wait-toresponse timeout value. l The default value is recommended.
Issue 03 (2011-04-10)
A-341
Value Range IPv4 UDP Response No Response Application Control Channel
Description l Specifies the response mode of test request packets. l The value No Response indicates that the test performance event is reported without sending response packets. l The value Application Control Channel indicates that response is performed through the reverse channel. l The value IPv4 UDP Response indicates that the IPv4 UDP packets encapsulating MPLS echo reply messages are sent as response packets. l The value IPv4 UDP Response is reserved for scenarios where all nodes on an LSP communicate with each other over a DCN running IP protocols. l Set this parameter based on the situation of the egress node. If the egress node supports reverse channel response, set this parameter to Application Control Channel. If the egress node does not support reverse channel response but supports DCN channel response by means of IP protocols, set this parameter to IPv4 UDP Response.
A-342
Issue 03 (2011-04-10)
Parameter
Value Range
Default Value
Description
NOTE For a unidirectional tunnel, Response Mode cannot be set to Application Control Channel.
A.8.1.9 Parameter Description: PW Management_PW Management

This topic describes parameters that are related to PW management.
Navigation Path
1. 2. In the NE Explorer, select the required NE from the Object Tree and choose Configuration > MPLS Management > PW Management from the Function Tree. Click the PW Management tab.

Parameter PW ID Enable State PW Signaling Type PW Type Value Range Default Value Description Displays the ID of the PW that carries a service. Displays whether a PW is enabled. Displays the PW signaling type.
NOTE The OptiX RTN 980 uses only static PWs.
l Displays the PW type. Different PW types perform different service processing modes. l When a PW transmits E-Line services, set PW Type to Ethernet or Ethernet Tagged Mode. l If a PW transmits CES services, set PW Type to CESoPSN or SATop. l If a PW transmits ATM services, set PW Type to ATM n-to-one VCC Cell transport, ATM one-to-one VCC Cell Mode, ATM n-to-one VPC Cell transport, or ATM one-to-one VPC Cell Mode.
Direction PW Ingress Label/Source Port
Displays the direction of a PW. Displays the ingress label at the source port of a PW.
Issue 03 (2011-04-10)
A-343
Parameter PW Encapsulation Type
Value Range -
Default Value -
Description Displays the encapsulation type of the packets on a PW.

NOTE The OptiX RTN 980 supports only MPLS encapsulation.
PW Egress Label/Sink Port Opposite LSR ID Local Working Status Remote Working Status Compositive Working Status Tunnel Type
Displays the egress label at the sink port of a PW. Displays the LSR ID of the node at the other end of a PW. Displays the working status of the PW at the local end. Displays the working status of the PW at the remote end. Displays the working status of the entire PW.
Displays the type of the tunnel that carries a PW.

NOTE The OptiX RTN 980 supports only MPLS tunnels.
Tunnel Deployment Status Tunnel Automatic Selection Policy
Displays the ID of the tunnel that carries a PW. Displays the deployment status of a PW. The OptiX RTN 980 does not support this parameter.
QoS Parameters
Table A-8 CES services Parameter PW ID Value Range Default Value Description Displays the ID of the PW that carries the service.
A-344
Issue 03 (2011-04-10)
Parameter Direction
Value Range -
Default Value -
Description Displays the direction of the PW that carries the service. The OptiX RTN 980 does not support this parameter. The OptiX RTN 980 does not support this parameter.
CIR(kbit/s) EXP
Table A-9 E-Line services Parameter PW ID Direction Value Range Default Value Description Displays the ID of the PW that carries the service. Displays the direction of the PW that carries the service. Displays whether the bandwidth is limited. Displays the committed information rate (CIR) of a PW. Displays the committed burst size (CBS) of a PW. Displays the peak information rate (PIR) of a PW Displays the peak burst size (PBS) of a PW. The OptiX RTN 980 does not support this parameter. Displays the LSP mode.
NOTE The OptiX RTN 980 supports only Pipe.
Bandwidth Limit CIR(kbit/s)
CBS(byte) PIR(kbit/s)
PBS(byte) EXP LSP Mode
Policy
Issue 03 (2011-04-10)
A-345
Table A-10 ATM services Parameter PW ID Direction Value Range Default Value Description Displays the ID of the PW that carries the service. Displays the direction of the PW that carries the service. Displays whether the bandwidth is limited. Displays the committed information rate (CIR) of a PW. Displays the committed burst size (CBS) of a PW. Displays the peak information rate (PIR) of a PW Displays the peak burst size (PBS) of a PW. The OptiX RTN 980 does not support this parameter. The OptiX RTN 980 does not support this parameter.
Bandwidth Limit CIR(kbit/s)
CBS(byte) PIR(kbit/s)
PBS(byte) EXP Policy

Table A-11 CES services Parameter PW ID RTP Head Value Range Default Value Description Displays the PW ID. Displays whether the CES service packets carry an RTP header. Displays the packet loading time. Displays the jitter buffer time for the received CES packets. The OptiX RTN 980 does not support this parameter.
Issue 03 (2011-04-10)
Packet Loading Time (us) Jitter Compensation Buffering Time(us) Ingress Clock Mode
A-346
Parameter Egress Clock Mode Control Channel Type VCCV Verification Mode Enable CES Service Alarm Transparent Transmission Threshold of Entering R bit Inserting Status
Value Range -
Default Value -
Description The OptiX RTN 980 does not support this parameter. Displays the control channel type. Displays the VCCV mode. Displays whether CES service alarms are transparently transmitted. Displays the threshold of the packet loss ratio of CES services. The corresponding alarm will be reported if the actual packet loss ratio crosses this threshold. Displays the threshold of received CES service packets. The corresponding alarm will be cleared after the actual number of received CES service packets crosses this threshold. Displays the sequence number mode.
Threshold of Exiting R bit Inserting Status
Sequence Number Mode
Table A-12 E-Line services Parameter PW ID Control Word Value Range Default Value Description Displays the PW ID. Displays whether the control word is used to transfer packet information. For ETH PWE3 services, this parameter is always not used. Displays the control channel type. Displays the VCCV mode.
Control Channel Type VCCV Verification Mode

Issue 03 (2011-04-10)
A-347
Parameter Request VLAN
Value Range -
Default Value -
Description When PW Type is Ethernet Tag, this parameter displays the VLAN ID to be added to packets that are sent from the opposite end and do not carry any VLAN IDs. When PW Type is Ethernet Tag, this parameter displays the TPID.
TPID
Table A-13 ATM services Parameter PW ID Control Word Value Range Default Value Description Displays the PW ID. Displays whether the control word is used to transfer packet information. Displays the control channel type. Displays the VCCV mode. Displays the maximum number of concatenated cells. Displays the packet loading time.
Control Channel Type VCCV Verification Mode Max Concatenated Cell Count Packet Loading Time (us)
A.8.1.10 Parameter Description: PW Management_MS-PW Creation

This topic describes the parameters that are related to MS-PW creation.
Navigation Path
1. 2. 3. In the NE Explorer, select the required NE from the Object Tree and choose Configuration > MPLS Management > PW Management from the Function Tree. Click the MS PW tab. Click New.
A-348
Issue 03 (2011-04-10)

Parameter ID Name MTU(bytes) Service Type Value Range Ethernet Service CES Service ATM Service Connection Type Port Transparent PVP PVC Port Transparent Default Value Ethernet Service Description Specifies the ID of MS-PW. Specifies the name of MS-PW. The OptiX RTN 980 does not support this parameter. l Specifies the type of services carried by the MS-PW. l Set this parameter according to the planning information. l This parameter is available only when Service Type is ATM Service. l PVP: Only the VPIs of the source and sink are exchanged. l PVP: The VPIs and VCIs of the source and sink are exchanged. l Port Transparent: ATM transparent transmission refers to the transparent transmission of ATM cells that are encapsulated into PWs as payloads.
Parameters for the Basic Attributes of PWs

Parameter PW ID PW Signaling Type Value Range Static Default Value Static Description Specifies the ID of the PW that carries services. Specifies the signaling type of the PW. Labels for static PWs need to be manually assigned.
Issue 03 (2011-04-10)
A-349
Parameter PW Type
Value Range -
Default Value -
Description l Specifies the type of the PW. l Set this parameter to Ethernet if Service Type is ETH Service and no VLAN IDs need to be added. If it is required to add VLAN IDs, set this parameter to Ethernet Tag Mode and then set Request VLAN in the Advanced Attribute tab. l If Service Type is CES Service, the value CESoPSN indicates structureaware emulation, which allows timeslot compression; the value SAToP indicates structure-agnostic emulation, which does not allow timeslot compression. l If Service Type is ATM Service, set this parameter according to the value of Connection Type.
Displays the direction of the PW. Displays the encapsulation type of the PW. Specifies the PW Ingress label. Specifies the PW Egress label. Specifies the method to select tunnels.
NOTE The OptiX RTN 980 supports only the value Manually.
PW Ingress Label/ Source Port PW Egress Label/Sink Port Tunnel Selection Mode
16 to 1048575 16 to 1048575 Manually
Manually
A-350
Issue 03 (2011-04-10)
Parameter Tunnel Type Tunnel
Value Range MPLS -
Default Value MPLS -
Description Specifies the type of the tunnel that carries the PW. A created tunnel needs to be selected. If no tunnel is available, no PW can be created. Specifies the LSR ID of the PW at the remote end. If an existing tunnel is selected, the LSR ID will be automatically assigned. For a bidirectional tunnel, the system will configure the reverse tunnel automatically.
Peer LSR ID
Egress Tunnel
QoS Parameters CES Services

Parameter EXP Value Range Default Value Description The OptiX RTN 980 does not support this parameter.
Ethernet services
Parameter Bandwidth Limit Value Range Default Value Description Specifies whether the bandwidth limit function is enabled. l This function limits the bandwidth of one or more PWs in an MPLS tunnel. l An ETH PWE3 service corresponds to a PW. Therefore, this function can also limit the bandwidth of ETH PWE3 services in an MPLS tunnel.
Issue 03 (2011-04-10)
A-351
Parameter Policy CIR(Kbit/s)
Value Range -
Default Value -
Description The OptiX RTN 980 does not support this parameter. Specifies the committed information rate (CIR) of a PW. It is recommended that you set this parameter to the same value as PIR.
CBS(byte) PIR(Kbit/s)
Specifies the committed burst size (CBS) of a PW. Specifies the peak information rate (PIR) of a PW. It is recommended that you set this parameter to the same value as CIR.
PBS(byte) EXP LSP Mode
Pipe
Pipe
Specifies the peak burst size (PBS) of a PW. The OptiX RTN 980 does not support this parameter. Pipe: When stripping MPLS tunnel labels from packets, an egress node does not update the scheduling priority for the packets.
A-352
Issue 03 (2011-04-10)
ATM services
Table A-14 ATM services Parameter Bandwidth Limit Value Range Default Value Description Specifies whether the bandwidth limit is enabled. l This function can be used to limit the bandwidth of one or more PWs, or the bandwidth of one or more ATM PWE3 services, in an MPLS tunnel. (One ATM PWE3 service corresponds to one PW.) l An ATM PWE3 service corresponds to a PW. Therefore, this function can also limit the bandwidth of ATM PWE3 services in an MPLS tunnel. Policy CIR (Kbit/s) The OptiX RTN 980 does not support this parameter. Specifies the committed information rate (CIR) of the PW. It is recommended that you set this parameter to the same value as PIR. CBS (kbyte) PIR (kbit/s) Specifies the excess burst size of the PW. Specifies the peak information rate (PIR) of the PW. It is recommended that you set this parameter to the same value as CIR. PBS (kbyte) Specifies the maximum excess burst size of the PW.
Issue 03 (2011-04-10)
A-353
Parameter EXP
Value Range -
Default Value -
Description The OptiX RTN 980 does not support this parameter.
Parameters for the Advanced Attributes of PWs CES Services

Parameter RTP Header Value Range Disable Enable Default Value Disable Description l Specifies the RTP header. l The RTP header carries time stamps. l The default value is recommended. Jitter Compensation Buffering Time(us) 375 to 16000 8000 l Specifies the jitter buffer time for the received CES packets. l A greater value of this parameter means fewer impacts of transmission jitters on CES services, greater delays of CES services, and more resources occupied by CES services. l The default value is recommended.
NOTE Set Jitter Compensation Buffering Time(us) to a value greater than the value of Packet Loading Time (us) at the opposite end and the local end.
A-354
Issue 03 (2011-04-10)
Parameter Packet Loading Time (us)
Default Value 1000
Description l Specifies the length of fragments in the TDM data stream. Each fragment is encapsulated into one PW packet. l A greater value of this parameter means higher encapsulation efficiency but greater delays of CES services. l The default value is recommended.
Ingress Clock mode Egress Clock mode Control Channel Type
None CW Alert Label
CW
The OptiX RTN 980 does not support this parameter. The OptiX RTN 980 does not support this parameter. l Specifies the mode of PW connectivity check. l The value None indicates that the control word is not supported. That is, the PW connectivity check is not supported. l Alert Label indicates VCCV packets in Alert Label encapsulation mode. l The value CW indicates that the control word is supported.
VCCV Verification Mode
None Ping
Ping
l Specifies the VCCV verification mode. The VCCV verification is used for PW connectivity check. l If the VCCV-Ping test is required, do not set this parameter to None.
Issue 03 (2011-04-10)
A-355
Parameter 64K Timeslot Number
Value Range 1 to 31
Default Value 1
Description l Specifies the number of 64 kbit/s timeslots that transmit service traffic. If Frame Mode of the opposite end is 30, the source 64 kbit/s timeslots at the local end must include the 16th timeslot. l On the two ends of a radio link, the timeslot lists can be different but the numbers of timeslots must be the same. l This parameter is unavailable if PW Type is SAToP.
Huawei Mode Standard Mode
Huawei Mode
Specifies the sequence number mode.
Ethernet services
Parameter Control Word Value Range No Use Default Value No Use Description For ETH PWE3 services, the parameter value is always No Use. l Specifies the mode of PW connectivity check. l None indicates that VCCV is not used. l Alert Label indicates VCCV packets in Alert Label encapsulation mode.
Control Channel Type
None Alert Label
Alert Label
A-356
Issue 03 (2011-04-10)
Parameter VCCV Verification Mode
Value Range Ping None
Default Value Ping
Description l Specifies the VCCV verification mode. The VCCV verification is used for PW connectivity check. l If the VCCV-Ping test is required, do not set this parameter to None.
Request VLAN
l Set this parameter when PW Type is Ethernet Tagged Mode. l If the received packets do not carry any VLAN IDs, the PW will add VLAN IDs to the packets as required by the setting of this parameter.
TPID
The OptiX RTN 980 does not support request VLAN TPID of the PW level.
ATM services
Parameter Control Word Value Range Must Use No Use Default Value Must Use Description l Specifies whether to use the control word. In the MPLS packet switching network, the control word is used to transmit packet information. l Set Control Word to Must Use if PW Type is ATM 1:1.
Issue 03 (2011-04-10)
A-357
Parameter Control Channel Type
Value Range CW None Alert Label
Default Value CW
Description l Specifies the mode of PW connectivity check. l The value None indicates that the control word is not supported. That is, the PW connectivity check is not supported. l The value CW indicates that the control word is supported. l The value Alert Label indicates VCCV packets in Alert Label encapsulation mode.
Ping None
Ping
Max. Concatenated Cell Count
1 to 31
10
l Specifies the maximum number of concatenated cells. l If the value 1 is assumed, only one ATM cell is encapsulated in one packet. If the value from 2 to 31 is assumed, a maximum of 2 to 31 ATM cells are encapsulated into one packet.
A-358
Issue 03 (2011-04-10)
Parameter Packet Loading Time (us)
Default Value 1000
Description l Specifies the packet loading time. Once the packet loading time expires, the packet is sent out even if the concatenated cells are less than the maximum. l If Max. Concatenated Cell Count assumes the value 1, this parameter is ineffective. That is, the packet will be sent out once the cell is loaded.
A.8.1.11 Parameter Description: PW Management_PW OAM

This topic describes parameters that are related to PW OAM.
Navigation Path
1. 2. In the NE Explorer, select the required NE from the Object Tree and choose Configuration > MPLS Management > PW Management from the Function Tree. Click the PW OAM Parameter tab.

Parameter PW ID PW Type Value Range Default Value Description Displays the ID of the PW that carries the service. Displays the type of the PW that carries the service.
Issue 03 (2011-04-10)
A-359
Description l Specifies or displays whether the local node can perform and respond to OAM operations. l If OAM Status is Enabled, the local NE can perform and respond to OAM operations. l If OAM Status is Disabled, the local NE cannot perform and respond to OAM operations. l If PW APS protection needs to be configured or a CC test needs to be performed for the tunnel, OAM Status needs to be set to Enabled.
Associate AC State Detection Mode
Auto-Sensing Manual
Auto-Sensing
The OptiX RTN 980 does not support this parameter. l Specifies or displays the detection mode for PW OAM packets. l Manual: During a CC test, PW OAM packets are sent at the interval specified by the user. l Auto-Sensing: During a CC test, PW OAM packets are sent at the interval for receiving PW OAM packets. l If Detection Mode is set to Manual, you need to set the type of PW OAM detection packets to be received and transmitted. l The value AutoSensing is recommended.
A-360
Issue 03 (2011-04-10)
Value Range CV FFD
Default Value CV
Description l CV: The detection packets are sent at a fixed interval. l FFD: The detection packets are sent at the interval specified by the user. l If Detection Mode is set to Auto-Sensing, this parameter specifies the type of PW OAM detection packets to be transmitted. l If Detection Mode is set to Manual, this parameter specifies the type of PW OAM detection packets to be received and transmitted. l The value FFD is assumed for PW APS and the value CV is assumed for continuous connectivity check on PWs.
3.3 10 20 50 100 200 500
50
l Displays or specifies the OAM detection period. l If Detection Packet Type is FFD, this parameter can be set; if Detection Packet Type is CV, the value is always 1000. l Set this parameter to 3.3 for PW APS usually. If the packet transmission delay time of a PW exceeds 3.3 ms, the transmission interval of FFD packets needs to be a value greater than the delay time.
Issue 03 (2011-04-10)
A-361
Parameter SD Threshold (%)
Value Range 0-100
Default Value 0
Description l Specifies or displays the SD threshold. When the OAM packet loss ratio is higher than the parameter value, the corresponding alarm is reported. l When this parameter is set to 0, SD threshold detection is not supported.
SF Threshold (%)
0-100
l Specifies or displays the SF threshold. When the OAM packet loss ratio is higher than the parameter value, the corresponding alarm is reported. l When this parameter is set to 0, SF threshold detection is not supported. l The SD threshold is not higher than the SF threshold.
LSR ID to Be Received
l Specifies or displays the LSR ID to be received. l This parameter is available only if OAM Status is Disabled.
PW ID to be Received
l Specifies or displays the PW ID to be received. l This parameter is available only if OAM Status is Disabled.
Local Working Status Local PW Defect Type Local Disable PW Duration(ms)
Displays whether PWs at the local end are available. Displays the local PW defect type. Displays the duration when the local PW is unavailable.
A-362
Issue 03 (2011-04-10)
Parameter Local PW Defect Location Remote Working Status
Value Range -
Default Value -
Description Displays the local PW defect location. Displays whether PWs at the remote end are available. Displays the remote PW defect type. Displays the duration when the remote PW is unavailable. Displays the remote PW defect location.
Remote PW Defect Type Remote Disable PW Duration(ms) Remote PW Defect Location
A.8.1.12 Parameter Description: PW Management_PW Ping

This topic describes the parameters that are related to the PW Ping test.
Navigation Path
1. 2. 3. In the NE Explorer, select the required NE from the Object Tree and choose Configuration > MPLS Management > PW Management from the Function Tree. Click the PW OAM Parameter tab. Select the required PW and click OAM Operation > Ping Test.

Parameter Packet Count EXP Value Value Range 1 to 4294967295 0 to 7 Default Value 3 7 Description Specifies the number of test request packets. l Specifies the EXP value of the PW label in test request packets. The value 7 indicates the highest priority. l The default value is recommended. TTL 1 to 255 255 l Specifies the time-tolive (TTL) value of the PW label in test request packets. l The default value is recommended.
Parameter Transmit Interval (10ms)
Default Value 100
Description l Specifies the interval for transmitting test request packets. l The default value is recommended.
Packet Length
64 to 1400
64
l Specifies the length of test request packets. l The default value is recommended.
Wait-to-Response Timeout Time(10ms)
1 to 6000
300
l Specifies the wait-toresponse timeout value. l The default value is recommended.
A-364
Issue 03 (2011-04-10)
Value Range IPv4 UDP Response No Response Application Control Channel Response
Description l Specifies the response mode of test request packets. l The value No Response indicates that the test performance event is reported without sending response packets. l The value Application Control Channel Response indicates that response is performed through the reverse channel. l The value IPv4 UDP indicates that the IPv4 UDP packets encapsulating MPLS echo reply messages are sent as response packets. l The value IPv4 UDP is reserved for scenarios where all nodes on an LSP communicate with each other over a DCN running IP protocols. l Set this parameter based on the situation of the remote PE. If the remote PE supports reverse channel response, set this parameter to Application Control Channel Response. If the remote PE does not support reverse channel response but supports DCN channel response by means of IP protocols, set this parameter to IPv4 UDP Response.
Issue 03 (2011-04-10)
A-365
Parameter Peer PW ID Peer IP
Value Range -
Default Value -
Description Specifies the PW ID of the peer end. Specifies the IP address of the peer port.
A.8.1.13 Parameter Description: PW Management_PW Traceroute

This topic describes the parameters that are related to the PW Traceroute test.
Navigation Path
1. 2. 3. In the NE Explorer, select the required NE from the Object Tree and choose Configuration > MPLS Management > PW Management from the Function Tree. Click the PW OAM Parameter tab. Select the required PW, click OAM Operation in the lower right corner, and choose Traceroute Test from the drop-down list.

Parameter EXP Value Value Range 0 to 7 Default Value 7 Description l Specifies the EXP value of the PW label in test request packets. The value 7 indicates the highest priority. l The default value is recommended. TTL 1 to 255 255 l Specifies the time-tolive (TTL) value of the PW label in test request packets. l The default value is recommended. Packet Length 84 to 1400 84 l Specifies the length of test request packets. l The default value is recommended. Wait-to-Response Timeout Time(10ms) 1 to 6000 300 l Specifies the wait-toresponse timeout value. l The default value is recommended.
A-366
Issue 03 (2011-04-10)
Value Range IPv4 UDP Response No Response Application Control Channel Response
Description l Specifies the response mode of test request packets. l The value No Response indicates that the test performance event is reported without sending response packets. l The value Application Control Channel Response indicates that response is performed through the reverse channel. l The value IPv4 UDP indicates that the IPv4 UDP packets encapsulating MPLS echo reply messages are sent as response packets. l The value IPv4 UDP is reserved for scenarios where all nodes on an LSP communicate with each other over a DCN running IP protocols. l Set this parameter based on the situation of the remote PE. If the remote PE supports reverse channel response, set this parameter to Application Control Channel Response. If the remote PE does not support reverse channel response but supports DCN channel response by means of IP protocols, set this parameter to IPv4 UDP Response.
Issue 03 (2011-04-10)
A-367
A.8.1.14 Parameter Description: MPLS APS Protection Management

This topic describes parameters that are related to MPLS APS protection management.
Navigation Path
1. 2. In the NE Explorer, select the required NE from the Object Tree and choose Configuration > APS Protection Management from the Function Tree. Click the Tunnel APS Management tab.

Parameter Protection Group ID Value Range Default Value Description l Displays the protection group ID. l The system automatically assigns IDs to the protection groups according to their creation sequence. Protection Type Switching Mode Dual-Ended Single-Ended Displays the protection group type. l Displays or specifies the switching mode of a protection group. l The value SingleEnded indicates that services are switched only in the direction where faults occur. l The value DualEnded indicates that services in both positive and reverse directions are switched to their protection channels when faults occur. l It is recommended that you set this parameter to Dual-Ended.
A-368
Issue 03 (2011-04-10)
Parameter BDI Status
Default Value -
Description l Specifies or displays whether the protection switching is triggered upon receiving BDI packets. l This parameter is available only when Switching Mode is set to Single-Ended. l If BDI Status is set to Enabled, the egress node notifies the ingress node of any detected faults by sending BDI packets; upon receiving BDI packets, the ingress node triggers protection switching.
Transmit and receive Status of Protocol Packet Revertive Mode
Displays the protocol packet status. l Specifies or displays whether to switch services to the original working tunnel after the fault is rectified. l The value Revertive indicates to perform the switching; the value Non-Revertive indicates not to perform the switching. l It is recommended that you set this parameter to Revertive.
Issue 03 (2011-04-10)
A-369
Parameter WTR Time(min)
Value Range 1-12
Default Value -
Description l Specifies and displays the WTR time of the protection group. l When the preset WTR time expires after the original working tunnel recovers, services are switched to the original working tunnel. l This parameter is available only when Revertive Mode is Revertive. l It is recommended that you set this parameter to 5.
Hold-Time(100ms)
0-100
l Specifies the hold-off time of the protection group. l If this parameter is set to a value other than 0, the protection group does not trigger switching once it detects faults, but wait until the hold-off time expires, and then detect whether any faults persist. If any faults persist, the switching is triggered; otherwise, no switching is triggered. l It is recommended that you set this parameter to 0.
Protocol Status Switching Status
Displays the protocol status. Displays the switching status of the protection group. Displays the deployment status of the protection group.
Deployment Status
A-370
Issue 03 (2011-04-10)
Parameter Unit
Value Range -
Default Value -
Description Displays whether a tunnel is a working or protection tunnel. Displays the currently used tunnel. Displays the tunnel status. Displays the tunnel type. Displays the direction of a tunnel. Displays the ingress tunnel. Displays the egress tunnel.
Active Tunnel Tunnel Status Tunnel Type Tunnel Direction Ingress Tunnel Egress Tunnel
A.8.1.15 Parameter Description: Tunnel Protection Group_Creation

This topic describes the parameters that are related to creating a tunnel protection group.
Navigation Path
1. 2. 3. In the NE Explorer, select the NE from the Object Tree and choose Configuration > APS Protection Management from the Function Tree. Click the Tunnel APS Management tab. Click New.

Parameter Protection Type Value Range 1:1 Default Value 1:1 Description Specifies the protection type of the tunnel protection group.
NOTE The OptiX RTN 980 supports only the value 1:1.
Issue 03 (2011-04-10)
A-371
Value Range Single-Ended Dual-Ended
Default Value Dual-Ended
Description l Specifies the switching mode to be adopted when a tunnel fails. l The value SingleEnded indicates that services are switched only in the direction where faults occur. l The value DualEnded indicates that services are switched to the protection channel in both directions when faults occur. l The value DualEnded is recommended.
BDI Status
Enabled Disabled
Disabled
l Specifies whether the protection switching is triggered upon receiving BDI packets. l This parameter is available only when Switching Mode is set to Single-Ended. l If BDI Status is set to Enabled, the egress node notifies the ingress node of any detected faults by sending BDI packets; upon receiving BDI packets, the ingress node triggers the protection switching.
Working Tunnel Type
MPLS Tunnel
MPLS Tunnel
Specifies the type of the working tunnel.

NOTE The OptiX RTN 980 supports only the value MPLS Tunnel.
A-372
Issue 03 (2011-04-10)
Parameter Working Ingress Tunnel ID
Value Range -
Default Value -
Description l Specifies the working tunnel of the protection group in the ingress direction. l If this parameter is set for a bidirectional tunnel, a value is automatically assigned to the parameter Working Egress Tunnel ID.
Working Ingress Tunnel Name Working Egress Tunnel ID
Displays the name of the working tunnel in the ingress direction. l Specifies the working tunnel of the protection group in the egress direction. l For a bidirectional tunnel, if the parameter Working Ingress Tunnel ID is set, a value is automatically assigned to the parameter Working Egress Tunnel ID.
Working Egress Tunnel Name Protection Tunnel Type
Displays the name of the working tunnel in the egress direction. Displays the type of protection tunnel, which is the same as the type of working tunnel. l Specifies the working tunnel of the protection group in the ingress direction. l If this parameter is set for a bidirectional tunnel, a value is automatically assigned to the parameter Protection Egress Tunnel ID.
Protection Ingress Tunnel ID
Issue 03 (2011-04-10)
A-373
Parameter Protection Ingress Tunnel Name Protection Egress Tunnel ID
Value Range -
Default Value -
Description Displays the name of the protection tunnel in the ingress direction. l Specifies the protection tunnel of the protection group in the egress direction. l For a bidirectional tunnel, if the parameter Protection Ingress Tunnel ID is set, a value is automatically assigned to the parameter Protection Egress Tunnel ID.
Protection Egress Tunnel Name Revertive Mode
Displays the name of the protection tunnel in the egress direction. l This parameter specifies whether to switch services back to the original working tunnel after it recovers. l The value Revertive indicates to switch services back to the original working tunnel after it recovers; the value NonRevertive indicates not to switch services back to the original working tunnel after it recovers. l The value Revertive is recommended.
Non-Revertive
A-374
Issue 03 (2011-04-10)
Parameter WTR Time(min)
Value Range 1 to 12
Default Value 5
Description l Specifies the WTR time of the protection group. l When the preset WTR time expires after the original working tunnel recovers, services are switched to the original working tunnel. l This parameter is available only when Revertive Mode is Revertive. l The default value is recommended.
Hold-Time(100ms)
0 to 100
l Specifies the hold-off time of the protection group. l If this parameter is set to a value other than 0, the protection group does not trigger switching once it detects faults, but waits until the hold-off time expires, and then detects whether any faults persist. If any faults persist, the switching is triggered; otherwise, no switching is triggered. l The default value is recommended.
Protocol Status
Disabled Enabled
Disabled
l Specifies the protocol status. l During the creation of a protection group, set Protocol Status to Disabled. After the APS protection group is configured at both ends, set Protocol Status to Enabled.
Issue 03 (2011-04-10)
A-375
A.8.1.16 Parameter Description: PW APS Protection Group_Creation

This topic describes the parameters that are used for creating a PW APS protection group.
Navigation Path
The navigation path for CES services is as follows: 1. 2. 3. 4. In the NE Explorer, select the NE from the Object Tree and choose Configuration > CES Service Management from the Function Tree. Click the Protection Group tab. Click the PW APS tab. Click New.
The navigation path for E-Line services is as follows: 1. 2. 3. 4. Select the NE from the Object Tree in the NE Explorer. Choose Configuration > Ethernet Service Management > E-Line Service from the Function Tree. Click the Protection Group tab. Click the PW APS tab. Click New.
The navigation path for ATM services is as follows: 1. 2. 3. 4. In the NE Explorer, select the NE from the Object Tree and choose Configuration > ATM Service Management from the Function Tree. Click the Protection Group tab. Click the PW APS tab. Click New.

Parameter PW ID PW Signaling Type Value Range Static Default Value Static Description Specifies the ID of the PW that carries services. Specifies the signaling type of the PW. Labels for static PWs need to be manually assigned. Displays the PW type. Displays the direction of the PW. Displays the encapsulation type of the PW. Specifies the PW Ingress label.
Issue 03 (2011-04-10)
PW Ingress Label/ Source Port

A-376
16 to 1048575
Parameter PW Egress Label/Sink Port Tunnel selection mode Tunnel Type Tunnel
Value Range 16 to 1048575 MPLS -
Description Specifies the PW Egress label. Displays the method to select tunnels. Displays the type of the tunnel that carries the PW. A tunnel needs to be selected. If no tunnel is available, creation of a PW will fail. Specifies the LSR ID of the PW at the remote end. If an existing tunnel is selected, the LSR ID will be automatically assigned. For a bidirectional tunnel, the system will configure the reverse tunnel automatically.
Peer LSR ID
Egress Tunnel
QoS Parameters
Table A-15 CES services Parameter EXP Value Range Default Value Description The OptiX RTN 980 does not support this parameter.
Issue 03 (2011-04-10)
A-377
Table A-16 E-Line services Parameter Bandwidth Limit Value Range Disabled Enabled Default Value Description Specifies whether the bandwidth limit function is enabled. l This function limits the bandwidth of one or more PWs in an MPLS tunnel. l An ETH PWE3 service corresponds to a PW. Therefore, this function can also limit the bandwidth of ETH PWE3 services in an MPLS tunnel. Policy CIR(kbit/s) The OptiX RTN 980 does not support this parameter. Specifies the committed information rate (CIR) of a PW. It is recommended that you set this parameter to the same value as PIR. CBS(byte) PIR(kbit/s) Specifies the committed burst size (CBS) of a PW. Specifies the peak information rate (PIR) of a PW. It is recommended that you set this parameter to the same value as CIR. PBS(byte) EXP LSP Mode Specifies the peak burst size (PBS) of a PW. The OptiX RTN 980 does not support this parameter. Displays the LSP mode.
A-378
Issue 03 (2011-04-10)
Table A-17 ATM services Parameter Bandwidth Limit Value Range Disabled Enabled Default Value Description Specifies whether the bandwidth limit function is enabled. l This function limits the bandwidth of one or more PWs in an MPLS tunnel. l An ATM PWE3 service corresponds to a PW. Therefore, this function can also limit the bandwidth of ATM PWE3 services in an MPLS tunnel. CIR(kbit/s) Specifies the committed information rate (CIR) of a PW. It is recommended that you set this parameter to the same value as PIR. CBS(byte) PIR(kbit/s) Specifies the committed burst size (CBS) of a PW. Specifies the peak information rate (PIR) of a PW. It is recommended that you set this parameter to the same value as CIR. PBS(byte) EXP Policy Specifies the peak burst size (PBS) of a PW. The OptiX RTN 980 does not support this parameter. The OptiX RTN 980 does not support this parameter.
Issue 03 (2011-04-10)
A-379

Table A-18 CES services Parameter RTP Head Value Range Default Value Description Displays whether the CES service packets carry an RTP header. Displays the packet loading time. Displays the jitter buffer time for the received CES packets. The OptiX RTN 980 does not support this parameter. The OptiX RTN 980 does not support this parameter. Displays the mode of PW connectivity check. Displays the VCCV verification mode. The VCCV verification is used for PW connectivity check. Displays whether CES service alarms are transparently transmitted. Displays the threshold of the packet loss ratio of CES services. The corresponding alarm will be reported if the actual packet loss ratio crosses this threshold. Displays the threshold of received CES service packets. The corresponding alarm will be cleared after the actual number of received CES service packets crosses this threshold. Displays the sequence number mode.
Packet Loading Time (us) Jitter Compensation Buffering Time(us) Ingress Clock Mode Egress Clock Mode Control Channel Type VCCV Verification Mode
Enable CES Service Alarm Transparent Transmission Threshold of Entering R bit Inserting Status
A-380
Issue 03 (2011-04-10)
Table A-19 E-Line services Parameter Control Word Value Range Default Value Description Displays whether the control word is used to transfer packet information. For ETH PWE3 services, this parameter is always not used. Displays the control channel type. Displays the VCCV mode. When PW Type is Ethernet Tag, this parameter displays the VLAN ID to be added to packets that are sent from the opposite end and do not carry any VLAN IDs. The OptiX RTN 980 does not support VLAN TPID of the PW level.
Control Channel Type VCCV Verification Mode Request VLAN
TPID
Table A-20 ATM services Parameter Control Word Value Range Default Value Description Displays whether the control word is used to transfer packet information. Displays the control channel type. Displays the VCCV mode. Displays the maximum number of concatenated cells. Displays the packet loading time.
Issue 03 (2011-04-10)
A-381

Parameter Protection Type Protection Group ID Enabling Status Value Range Disabled Enabled Default Value Disabled Description Specifies the protection type. Specifies the protection group ID. l Specifies the enabling status of the PW protection group. l During the creation of a protection group, set Enabling Status to Disabled. After the APS protection group is configured at both ends, set Enabling Status to Enabled. Protection Mode Displays the protection mode.
Working PW ID Protection PW ID Switching Mode
Displays the ID of the working PW. Displays the ID of the protection PW. Displays the switching mode to be used when a PW fails.
A-382
Issue 03 (2011-04-10)
Value Range Non-revertive Revertive
Default Value Revertive
Description l This parameter specifies whether to switch services back to the original working PW after it recovers. l The value Revertive indicates that services are switched to the original working PW and the value Nonrevertive indicates that services are not switched to the original working PW. l The value Revertive is recommended.
1 to 12
l Specifies the WTR time of the protection group. l When the preset WTR time expires after the original working PW recovers, services are switched to the original working PW. l This parameter is available only when Restoration Mode is Revertive. l The default value is recommended.
Issue 03 (2011-04-10)
A-383
Parameter Switchover Delay Time (100ms)
Default Value 0
Description l Specifies the hold-off time of the protection group. l If this parameter is set to a value other than 0, the protection group does not trigger switching once it detects faults, but waits until the hold-off time expires, and then detects whether any faults persist. If any faults persist, the switching is triggered; otherwise, no switching is triggered. l The default value is recommended.
Detection mode
OAM Parameters
Parameter OAM Status Value Range Default Value Description Displays the enabling status of PW OAM.
A-384
Issue 03 (2011-04-10)
Description l Specifies the detection mode of OAM packets. l Manual: The connectivity check (CC) packets are sent at the interval specified by the user. l Auto-Sensing: The connectivity check (CC) packets are sent at the interval of receiving PW OAM packets. l If Detection Mode is set to Manual, you need to set the PW OAM detection packets to be received and transmitted. l The value AutoSensing is recommended.
Issue 03 (2011-04-10)
A-385
Value Range CV FFD
Default Value CV
3.3 10 20 50 100 200 500
50
A-386
Issue 03 (2011-04-10)
A.8.1.17 Parameter Description: Slave Protection Pair of a PW APS Protection Group_Creation

This topic describes the parameters that are used for creating a slave protection pair of a PW APS protection group.
Navigation Path
The navigation path for CES services is as follows: 1. 2. 3. 4. In the NE Explorer, select the NE from the Object Tree and choose Configuration > CES Service Management from the Function Tree. Click the Protection Group tab. Click the Slave Protection Pair tab. Click New.
The navigation path for E-Line services is as follows: 1. 2. 3. 4. Select the NE from the Object Tree in the NE Explorer. Choose Configuration > Ethernet Service Management > E-Line Service from the Function Tree. Click the Protection Group tab. Click the Slave Protection Pair tab. Click New.
The navigation path for ATM services is as follows: 1. 2. 3. 4. In the NE Explorer, select the NE from the Object Tree and choose Configuration > ATM Service Management from the Function Tree. Click the Protection Group tab. Click the Slave Protection Pair tab. Click New.

Parameter PW ID PW Signaling Type Value Range Static Default Value Static Description Specifies the ID of the PW that carries services. Specifies the signaling type of the PW. Labels for static PWs need to be manually assigned. Displays the PW type. Displays the direction of the PW. Displays the encapsulation type of the PW.
A-387
Issue 03 (2011-04-10)
Parameter PW Ingress Label/ Source Port PW Egress Label/Sink Port Tunnel selection mode Tunnel Type Tunnel
Value Range 16 to 1048575 16 to 1048575 MPLS -
Description Specifies the PW Ingress label. Specifies the PW Egress label. Displays the method to select tunnels. Displays the type of the tunnel that carries the PW. A tunnel needs to be selected. If no tunnel is available, creation of a PW will fail. Specifies the LSR ID of the PW at the remote end. If an existing tunnel is selected, the LSR ID will be automatically assigned. For a bidirectional tunnel, the system will configure the reverse tunnel automatically.
Peer LSR ID
Egress Tunnel
QoS Parameters
Table A-21 CES services Parameter EXP Value Range Default Value Description The OptiX RTN 980 does not support this parameter.
A-388
Issue 03 (2011-04-10)
Table A-22 E-Line services Parameter Bandwidth Limit Value Range Disabled Enabled Default Value Description Specifies whether the bandwidth limit function is enabled. l This function limits the bandwidth of one or more PWs in an MPLS tunnel. l An ETH PWE3 service corresponds to a PW. Therefore, this function can also limit the bandwidth of ETH PWE3 services in an MPLS tunnel. Policy CIR(kbit/s) The OptiX RTN 980 does not support this parameter. Specifies the committed information rate (CIR) of a PW. It is recommended that you set this parameter to the same value as PIR. CBS(byte) PIR(kbit/s) Specifies the committed burst size (CBS) of a PW. Specifies the peak information rate (PIR) of a PW. It is recommended that you set this parameter to the same value as CIR. PBS(byte) EXP LSP Mode Specifies the peak burst size (PBS) of a PW. The OptiX RTN 980 does not support this parameter. Displays the LSP mode.
Issue 03 (2011-04-10)
A-389
Table A-23 ATM services Parameter Bandwidth Limit Value Range Disabled Enabled Default Value Description Specifies whether the bandwidth limit function is enabled. l This function limits the bandwidth of one or more PWs in an MPLS tunnel. l An ATM PWE3 service corresponds to a PW. Therefore, this function can also limit the bandwidth of ATM PWE3 services in an MPLS tunnel. CIR(kbit/s) Specifies the committed information rate (CIR) of a PW. It is recommended that you set this parameter to the same value as PIR. CBS(byte) PIR(kbit/s) Specifies the committed burst size (CBS) of a PW. Specifies the peak information rate (PIR) of a PW. It is recommended that you set this parameter to the same value as CIR. PBS(byte) EXP Policy Specifies the peak burst size (PBS) of a PW. The OptiX RTN 980 does not support this parameter. The OptiX RTN 980 does not support this parameter.
A-390
Issue 03 (2011-04-10)

Table A-24 CES services Parameter RTP Head Value Range Default Value Description Displays whether the CES service packets carry an RTP header. Displays the packet loading time. Displays the jitter buffer time for the received CES packets. The OptiX RTN 980 does not support this parameter. The OptiX RTN 980 does not support this parameter. Displays the mode of PW connectivity check. Displays the VCCV verification mode. The VCCV verification is used for PW connectivity check. Displays whether CES service alarms are transparently transmitted. Displays the threshold of the packet loss ratio of CES services. The corresponding alarm will be reported if the actual packet loss ratio crosses this threshold. Displays the threshold of received CES service packets. The corresponding alarm will be cleared after the actual number of received CES service packets crosses this threshold. Displays the sequence number mode.
Packet Loading Time (us) Jitter Compensation Buffering Time(us) Ingress Clock Mode Egress Clock Mode Control Channel Type VCCV Verification Mode
Enable CES Service Alarm Transparent Transmission Threshold of Entering R bit Inserting Status
Issue 03 (2011-04-10)
A-391
Table A-25 E-Line services Parameter Control Word Value Range Default Value Description Displays whether the control word is used to transfer packet information. For ETH PWE3 services, this parameter is always not used. Displays the control channel type. Displays the VCCV mode. When PW Type is Ethernet Tag, this parameter displays the VLAN ID to be added to packets that are sent from the opposite end and do not carry any VLAN IDs. The OptiX RTN 980 does not support VLAN TPID of the PW level.
Control Channel Type VCCV Verification Mode Request VLAN
TPID
Table A-26 ATM services Parameter Control Word Value Range Default Value Description Displays whether the control word is used to transfer packet information. Displays the control channel type. Displays the VCCV mode. Displays the maximum number of concatenated cells. Displays the packet loading time.
A-392
Issue 03 (2011-04-10)

Parameter Protection Mode Protection Group ID Value Range Default Value Description Displays the protection mode. Specifies the ID of the slave protection pair. The switching of the master PW APS protection group triggers the switching of the slave PW APS protection group simultaneously. Displays the ID of the working PW in the slave protection pair. Displays the ID of the protection PW in the slave protection pair.
Working PW ID
Protection PW ID
A.8.2 CES Parameters

This topic describes parameters that are related to CES services. A.8.2.1 Parameter Description: CES Service Management This topic describes the parameters that are related to CES service management. A.8.2.2 Parameter Description: CES Service Management_Creation This topic describes the parameters that are related to creating CES services.
A.8.2.1 Parameter Description: CES Service Management

This topic describes the parameters that are related to CES service management.
Navigation Path
In the NE Explorer, select the NE from the Object Tree and choose Configuration > CES Service Management from the Function Tree.

Parameter Service ID Service name Value Range Default Value Description Displays the ID of the CES service to be created. Displays or specifies the service name.
A-393
Issue 03 (2011-04-10)
Parameter Level Source Board Source High Channel
Value Range -
Default Value -
Description Displays the level of the received TDM frames. Displays the source board of the CES service. For the OptiX RTN 980, this parameter cannot be configured. Displays the source lower order path. Displays the source 64 kbit/s timeslot.
Source Low Channel Source 64K Timeslot
A-394
Issue 03 (2011-04-10)
Parameter Priority List
Default Value -
Description l Specifies the priority of a CES service. This parameter is available only when Mode is set to UNI-NNI. l This parameter needs to be configured if QoS processing needs to be performed for different CES services. l CS6-CS7: indicate the highest service classes, which are mainly involved in signaling transmission. l EF: indicates the expedited forwarding of service, which is applicable to services of low transmission delay and low packet loss rate, for example, voice and video services. l AF1-AF4: indicate the assured forwarding classes of service, which are applicable to services that require an assured rate but no delay or jitter limit. l BE: is applicable to services that need not be processed in a special manner. l The default value is recommended.
PW ID
Displays the ID of the PW that carries the CES service. This parameter is meaningful when the CES service type is UNI-NNI.
Issue 03 (2011-04-10)
A-395
Parameter Tunnel
Value Range -
Default Value -
Description Displays the tunnel that carries the PW. The tunnel must have been configured in advance. This parameter is meaningful when the CES service type is UNI-NNI. Displays the sink board of the CES service. This parameter is meaningful when the CES service type is UNI-UNI. For the OptiX RTN 980, this parameter cannot be configured. Displays the sink lower order path. This parameter is meaningful when the CES service type is UNIUNI. Displays the sink 64 kbit/s timeslot. This parameter is meaningful when the CES service type is UNI-UNI. Displays the deployment status of the CES service.
Sink Board
Sink High Channel
Sink Low Channel
Sink 64K Timeslot
Deployment Status

Parameter PW ID Value Range Default Value Description Displays the ID of the PW that carries the CES service. Displays working status of the PW. Displays the enabling status of the PW. Displays the PW signaling type.
NOTE The OptiX RTN 980 supports static PWs only.
Working Status PW Status PW Signaling Type
A-396
Issue 03 (2011-04-10)
Parameter PW Type
Value Range -
Default Value -
Description Displays the PW type for CES service encapsulation. CESoPSN: Indicates structure-aware TDM circuit emulation service over packet switched network. Timeslot compression can be set. SAToP: Indicates structure-agnostic TDM over packet. Timeslot compression cannot be set. Displays the tunnel type for PW encapsulation.
NOTE The OptiX RTN 980 supports MPLS only.
PW Encapsulation Type
PW Ingress Label/ Source Port PW Egress Label/Sink Port Peer LSR ID Local Working Status
Displays the Ingress label of the PW that carries the CES service. Displays the Egress label of the PW that carries the CES service. Displays the LSR ID of the PW at the remote end. Displays the working status of the PW at the local end. Displays the working status of the PW at the remote end. Displays the compositive working status of the PW. The compositive working status is up when both ends are up, and is down when one end is down. Displays the type of the tunnel that carries the PW.
NOTE The OptiX RTN 980 supports MPLS tunnels only.
Remote Working Status
Compositive Working Status
Tunnel type
Issue 03 (2011-04-10)
A-397
Parameter Tunnel
Value Range -
Default Value -
Description Displays the ID of the tunnel that carries the CES service. Displays the deployment status of the tunnel. The OptiX RTN 980 does not support this parameter.
Deployment Status Tunnel Automatic Selection Policy
QoS Parameters
Parameter PW ID Direction CIR(kbit/s) EXP Value Range Default Value Description Displays the PW ID. Displays the direction of the PW. The OptiX RTN 980 does not support this parameter. The OptiX RTN 980 does not support this parameter.
Parameters of Advanced Attributes

Parameter PW ID RTP Header Value Range Default Value Description Displays the PW ID. Displays the RTP header. The RTP header carries time stamps. l Displays or specifies the jitter buffer time. l The jitter buffer time guarantees the realtime performance of the CES service.
Jitter Compensation Buffering Time(us)
375 to 16000
A-398
Issue 03 (2011-04-10)
Parameter Packet Loading Time (us) Ingress Clock Mode Egress Clock Mode Control Channel Type VCCV Verification Mode
Value Range -
Default Value -
Description Displays the packet loading time. The OptiX RTN 980 does not support this parameter. The OptiX RTN 980 does not support this parameter. Displays the mode of PW connectivity check. Displays the VCCV verification mode. The VCCV verification is used for PW connectivity check. Displays or specifies the enabling status of the transparent transmission of CES service alarms. If this function is enabled, the fault on the AC side of the CES service is notified to the remote end. Upon receiving the fault notification from the network side or the remote end, the local NE inserts the corresponding alarm to the AC side. Displays or specifies the threshold of packet loss ratio of CES services. The corresponding alarm will be reported once the actual packet loss ratio crosses this threshold. This parameter is available only when the transparent transmission of CES service alarms is enabled.
Enable CES Service Alarm Transparent Transmission
Enabled Disabled
Threshold of Entering R Bit Inserting Status
1-65535
Issue 03 (2011-04-10)
A-399
Parameter Threshold of Exiting R Bit Inserting Status
Value Range 1-65535
Default Value -
Description Displays or specifies the threshold of received CES service packets. The corresponding alarm will be cleared after the actual number of received CES service packets crosses this threshold. This parameter is available only when the transparent transmission of CES service alarms is enabled. Specifies the sequence number mode. The Sequence Number Mode must be set to the same value at both ends of a radio link.

NOTE
Value Range -
Default Value -
Description Displays the ID of the protection group to be created. Displays the ID of the working PW. Displays the ID of the protection PW. Displays the protection mode.
Working PW ID Protection PW ID Protection Mode
A-400
Issue 03 (2011-04-10)
Parameter Enabling Status
Default Value -
Description l Displays or specifies the enabling status of the PW protection group. l During the creation of a protection group, set Enabling Status to Disabled. After the APS protection group is configured at both ends, set Enabling Status to Enabled.
Switchover Mode

Restoration Mode
l Specifies whether to switch services to the original working PW after the fault is rectified. l The value Revertive indicates that services are switched to the original working PW and the value Nonrevertive indicates that services are not switched to the original working PW. l The value Revertive is recommended.
Issue 03 (2011-04-10)
A-401
Value Range 1 to 12
Default Value -
Description l Displays or specifies the WTR time of the protection group. l When the preset WTR time expires after the original working PW recovers, services are switched to the original working PW. l This parameter is available only when Restoration Mode is Revertive.
0 to 100
Deployment Status
Display the deployment status of the protection group. Displays the switchover status of the protection group. Displays the enabling status of the protocol. Displays the status of the current working path. Display the status of the current protection path.
Switchover Status
A-402
Issue 03 (2011-04-10)

NOTE
The following parameters are available only after the slave protection pair is configured.
Value Range -
Default Value -
Description Specifies the ID of the slave protection pair. The switching of the master PW APS protection group triggers the switching of the slave PW APS protection group simultaneously. Displays the ID of the working PW in the slave protection pair. Displays the ID of the protection PW in the slave protection pair. Displays the DNI PW ID. Displays the PW type. Displays the deployment status of the slave protection pair.
Working PW ID
Protection PW ID
DNI PW ID PW Type Deployment Status
A.8.2.2 Parameter Description: CES Service Management_Creation

This topic describes the parameters that are related to creating CES services.
Navigation Path
1. 2. In the NE Explorer, select the NE from the Object Tree and choose Configuration > CES Service Management from the Function Tree. Click New.

Parameter Service ID(e.g.1,3-6) Service name Value Range 1 to 4294967295 Default Value Description Specifies the service ID. Specifies the service name.
Issue 03 (2011-04-10)
A-403
Parameter Level
Value Range E1
Default Value E1
Description The value E1 indicates that the CES service is used to transmit the TDM services from E1 ports. l Specifies the mode of CES service. l The value UNI-NNI indicates that the CES service is carried by a PW. Therefore, the information about the PW needs to be configured.
Mode
UNI-NNI UNI-UNI
UNI-NNI
Source Board
Specifies the board where the source (UNI) of the CES service is located. The OptiX RTN 980 does not support this parameter. If Level is set to E1, this parameter indicates the E1 port where the service source is located. If Mode is set to UNI-NNI, this parameter can assume only one value. l Specifies the 64 kbit/s timeslot that transmits data. This parameter can assume multiple values. If Frame Mode of the opposite end is 30, the source 64 kbit/s timeslots at the local end must include the 16th timeslot. l On the two ends of a radio link, the timeslot lists can be different but the numbers of timeslots must the same. l This parameter does not need to be set if Mode is UNI-NNI and PW Type is SAToP.
Source High Channel Source Low Channel (e.g.1,3-6)
Source 64K Timeslot (e.g.1,3-6)
1-31
1-31
A-404
Issue 03 (2011-04-10)
Parameter Priority List
Default Value EF
Description l Specifies the priority of a CES service. This parameter is available only when Mode is set to UNI-NNI. l This parameter needs to be configured if QoS processing needs to be performed for different CES services. l CS6-CS7: indicate the highest service classes, which are mainly involved in signaling transmission. l EF: indicates the expedited forwarding of service, which is applicable to services of low transmission delay and low packet loss rate, for example, voice and video services. l AF1-AF4: indicate the assured forwarding classes of service, which are applicable to services that require an assured rate but no delay or jitter limit. l BE: is applicable to services that need not be processed in a special manner. l The default value is recommended.
Issue 03 (2011-04-10)
A-405
Parameter PW Type
Value Range CESoPSN SAToP
Default Value CESoPSN
Description l Specifies the type of the PW. This parameter is available only when Mode is UNI-NNI. l CESoPSN: Indicates structure-aware TDM circuit emulation service over packet switched network. Timeslot compression can be set. SAToP: Indicates structureagnostic TDM over packet. Timeslot compression cannot be set.
Protection Type
No Protection PW APS Slave Protection Pair
No Protection
l Specifies the protection mode of the PW. This parameter is available only when Mode is UNI-NNI. l If this parameter is set to PW APS, working and protection PWs need to be configured. l When this parameter is set to Slave Protection Pair , you need to bind the slave PW APS protection group with the master PW APS protection group. The switching of the master PW APS protection group triggers the switching of the slave PW APS protection group simultaneously.
Sink Board
l Specifies the board where the sink of the CES service is located. l This parameter is available only when Mode is set to UNIUNI.
A-406
Issue 03 (2011-04-10)
Parameter Sink High Channel Sink Low Channel(e.g. 1,3-6)
Value Range -
Default Value -
Description The OptiX RTN 980 does not support this parameter. l If Level is set to E1, this parameter indicates the E1 port where the service sink is located. l This parameter is available only when Mode is set to UNIUNI.
Sink 64K Timeslot(e.g. 1,3-6)
1-31
1-31
l Specifies the 64 kbit/s timeslot that the service sink occupies. On the two ends of a radio link, the timeslot lists can be different but the numbers of timeslots must the same. l This parameter is available only when Mode is set to UNIUNI.

NOTE
If the parameter Protection Type of PWs is set to PW APS or Slave Protection Pair, all the parameters of working and protection PWs need to be configured. This section considers the parameters of the working PW as an example.
Parameter PW ID PW Signaling Type
Value Range Static
Description Specifies the ID of the PW that carries services. Specifies the signaling type of the PW. Labels for static PWs need to be manually assigned. Displays the PW type. Displays the direction of the PW.
PW Type PW Direction
Issue 03 (2011-04-10)
A-407
Parameter PW Encapsulation Type
Value Range -
Default Value -
Description Displays the encapsulation type of the PW. Specifies the PW Ingress label. Specifies the PW Egress label. Displays the method to select tunnels. Displays the type of the tunnel that carries the PW. A tunnel needs to be selected. If no tunnel is available, creation of a PW will fail. Specifies the LSR ID of the PW at the remote end. If an existing tunnel is selected, the LSR ID will be automatically assigned. For a bidirectional tunnel, the system will configure the reverse tunnel automatically.
PW Ingress Label/ Source Port PW Egress Label/Sink Port Tunnel selection mode Tunnel Type Tunnel
16 to 1048575 16 to 1048575 MPLS -
MPLS -
Peer LSR ID
Egress Tunnel
QoS Parameters
Parameter EXP Value Range Default Value Description The OptiX RTN 980 does not support this parameter.
A-408
Issue 03 (2011-04-10)
Parameters for the Advanced Attributes of PWs

Parameter RTP Header Value Range Disable Enable Huawei RTP Default Value Disable Description l Specifies the RTP header. l The RTP header carries time stamps. l The default value is recommended. Jitter Compensation Buffering Time (us) 375 to 16000 8000 l Specifies the jitter buffer time for the received CES packets. The step is 125. l A greater value of this parameter means fewer impacts of transmission jitters on CES services, greater delays of CES services, and more resources occupied by CES services. l The default value is recommended.
Packet Loading Time (us)
125 to 5000
1000
l Specifies the length of fragments in the TDM data stream. The step is 125. l A greater value of this parameter means higher encapsulation efficiency but greater delays of CES services. l The default value is recommended.
Ingress Clock Mode
Null Adaptive Clock Mode
Null
The OptiX RTN 980 does not support this parameter. The OptiX RTN 980 does not support this parameter.
Egress Clock Mode
Issue 03 (2011-04-10)
A-409
Value Range None CW Alert Label
Default Value CW
Description l Specifies the mode of PW connectivity check. l The value None indicates that the control word is not supported. That is, the PW connectivity check is not supported. l Alert Label indicates VCCV packets in Alert Label encapsulation mode. l The value CW indicates that the control word is supported.
None Ping
Ping
Enable CES Service Alarm Transparent Transmission
Disabled Enabled
Disabled
If this function is enabled, the fault on the AC side of the CES service is notified to the remote end. On receiving the fault notification from the network side or the remote end, the local NE inserts the corresponding alarm to the AC side.
A-410
Issue 03 (2011-04-10)
Parameter Threshold of Entering R Bit Inserting Status
Value Range 1-65535
Default Value 100
Description l The corresponding alarm will be reported if the number of consecutive lost packets crosses the threshold specified by this parameter. l This function is available only when the transparent transmission of CES service alarms is enabled.
Threshold of Exiting R Bit Inserting Status
1-65535
l The corresponding alarm will be cleared if the number of consecutive received packets crosses the threshold specified by this parameter. l This function is available only when the transparent transmission of CES service alarms is enabled.
Standard Mode
Specifies the sequence number mode. The Sequence Number Mode must be set to the same value at both ends of a radio link.

NOTE
Parameter Protection Type Protection Group ID
Value Range -
Default Value -
Description Specifies the protection type. Specifies the protection group ID.
Issue 03 (2011-04-10)
A-411
Description l Specifies the enabling status of the PW protection group. l During the creation of a protection group, set Enabling Status to Disabled. After the APS protection group is configured at both ends, set Enabling Status to Enabled.
Protection Mode

Revertive Mode
Revertive
A-412
Issue 03 (2011-04-10)
Value Range 1 to 12
Default Value 1
Description l Specifies the WTR time of the protection group. l When the preset WTR time expires after the original working PW recovers, services are switched to the original working PW. l This parameter is available only when Restoration Mode is Revertive. l The default value is recommended.
0 to 100
Detection mode
OAM Parameters
NOTE
Issue 03 (2011-04-10)
A-413
Parameter OAM Status Detection Mode
Description Displays the enabling status of PW OAM. l Specifies the detection mode of OAM packets. l Manual: The connectivity check (CC) packets are sent at the interval specified by the user. l Auto-Sensing: The connectivity check (CC) packets are sent at the interval of receiving PW OAM packets. l If Detection Mode is set to Manual, you need to set the PW OAM detection packets to be received and transmitted. l The value AutoSensing is recommended.
A-414
Issue 03 (2011-04-10)
Value Range CV FFD
Default Value CV
3.3 10 20 50 100 200 500
50
Issue 03 (2011-04-10)
A-415

NOTE
Value Range -
Default Value -
Working PW ID
Protection PW ID
A.8.3 ATM Parameters

This topic describes the parameters that are related to ATM services. A.8.3.1 Parameter Description: ATM IMA Management_IMA Group Management This topic describes the parameters that are related to IMA group management. A.8.3.2 Parameter Description: ATM IMA Management_Bound Path Configuration This topic describes the parameters that are related to the bound paths in the ATM TRUNK. A.8.3.3 Parameter Description: ATM IMA Management_IMA Group Status This topic describes the parameters that are related to IMA group status. A.8.3.4 Parameter Description: ATM IMA Management_IMA Link Status This topic describes the parameters that are related to IMA link status. A.8.3.5 Parameter Description: ATM IMA Management_ATM Interface Management This topic describes the parameters that are related to ATM interface management. A.8.3.6 Parameter Description: Configuration of ATM Service Class Mapping Table This topic describes the parameters that are related to configuration of the ATM service class mapping table. A.8.3.7 Parameter Description: Configuration of ATM Service Class Mapping Table_Creation This topic describes the parameters that are related to creation of the ATM service class mapping table.
A.8.3.8 Parameter Description: ATM Policy Management This topic describes the parameters that are related to ATM policy management. A.8.3.9 Parameter Description: ATM Policy Management_Creation This topic describes the parameters that are related to creation of ATM policies. A.8.3.10 Parameter Description: ATM Service Management This topic describes the parameters that are related to ATM service management. A.8.3.11 Parameter Description: ATM Service Management_Creation This topic describes the parameters that are related to creation of ATM services. A.8.3.12 Parameter Description: ATM OAM Management_Segment and End Attributes This topic describes the parameters that are related to segment end attributes of ATM OAM. A.8.3.13 Parameter Description: ATM OMA Management_CC Activation Status This topic describes the parameters that are related to the CC activation status of ATM OAM. A.8.3.14 Parameter Description: ATM OAM Management_Remote End Loopback Status This topic describes the parameters that are related to the remote end loopback status of ATM OAM. A.8.3.15 Parameter Description: ATM OAM Management_LLID This topic describes the parameters that are related to LLID configuration.
A.8.3.1 Parameter Description: ATM IMA Management_IMA Group Management

This topic describes the parameters that are related to IMA group management.
Navigation Path
1. 2. In the NE Explorer, select the NE from the Object Tree and choose Configuration > Interface Management > ATM IMA Management from the Function Tree. Click the IMA Group Management tab.

Parameter VCTRUNK Value Range Default Value Description Displays the ATM TRUNK.
Issue 03 (2011-04-10)
A-417
Parameter IMA Protocol Enable Status
Description l Specifies the IMA protocol enable status. l Set IMA Protocol Enable Status to Enabled if the links bound in the ATM TRUNK require the IMA protocol; otherwise, set this parameter to Disabled. l After IMA Protocol Enable Status is set to Enabled, the E1 links or Fractional E1 timeslots bound in the ATM TRUNK start running the IMA protocol.
Minimum Number of Active Transmitting Links
1 to 16
l The links of the IMA group can carry services only when the number of activated links in the transmit/ receive direction is not smaller than the value of Minimum Number of Active Transmitting Links/ Minimum Number of Active Receiving Links. l The values of Minimum Number of Active Transmitting Links and Minimum Number of Active Receiving Links must be the same because the OptiX RTN 980 supports Symmetrical Mode and Symmetrical Operation only. The parameters Minimum Number of Active Transmitting Links and Minimum
A-418
Issue 03 (2011-04-10)
Parameter Minimum Number of Active Receiving Links
Value Range 1 to 16
Default Value 1
Description Number of Active Receiving Links must assume the same value on the two ends of an IMA link. l The default value is recommended.
IMA Protocol Version
1.0 1.1
1.1
l Specifies the IMA protocol version. l The parameter IMA Protocol Version must assume the same value on the two ends of an IMA link. l The default value is recommended.
Issue 03 (2011-04-10)
A-419
Parameter IMA Transmit Frame Length
Value Range 32 64 128 256
Default Value 128
Description l Specifies the IMA transmit frame length. l Based on the IMA frame format, the receive end rebuilds the ATM cell stream with the cells arriving from diverselydelayed links. Longer IMA frames result in higher transmission efficiency and occupy more resources. Once a member link fails, the impact on the entire IMA group increases as the length of IMA frames increases. l The IMA Transmit Frame Length must assume the same value on the two ends of an IMA link. l The default value is recommended.
A-420
Issue 03 (2011-04-10)
Parameter IMA Symmetry Mode
Value Range Symmetrical Mode and Symmetrical Operation
Default Value Symmetrical Mode and Symmetrical Operation
Description l Specifies the symmetrical mode of the IMA group. l If the symmetrical mode and symmetrical operation is adopted, the bandwidth of the IMA group is always consistent in the transmit direction and in the receive direction, even when some member links fail. In symmetrical mode: Bandwidth of the IMA group = min {bandwidth in the transmit direction, bandwidth in the receive direction} The unidirectional failure of one member link is equivalent to the bidirectional failure of one member link.
Issue 03 (2011-04-10)
A-421
Parameter Maximum Delay Between Links (ms)
Default Value 25
Description l Specifies the maximum differential delay that is allowed between the member links. l If the differential delay between a member link and the other member links exceeds the value, this link will be deactivated and deleted from the IMA group. l If this parameter is set to a value higher than the normal value range, the delay of IMA services will be prolonged and even packet loss will occur; if this parameter is set to a value lower than the normal value range, a working link will be deleted by mistake. l The Maximum Delay Between Links (ms) must assume the same value on the two ends of an IMA link. l The default value is recommended.
Clock Mode
CTC Mode ITC Mode
CTC Mode
l Specifies the clock mode of the IMA group. l Clock Mode is set to the same value for the interconnected ends of IMA links.
A.8.3.2 Parameter Description: ATM IMA Management_Bound Path Configuration

This topic describes the parameters that are related to the bound paths in the ATM TRUNK.
A-422
Issue 03 (2011-04-10)
Navigation Path
1. 2. 3. In the NE Explorer, select the NE from the Object Tree and choose Configuration > Interface Management > ATM IMA Management from the Function Tree. Click the Binding tab. Click Configuration.

Parameter Available Boards Configurable Ports Level Value Range E1 Fractional E1 Default Value E1 Description Selects the available boards. Selects the configurable ATM trunks. Specifies the level of bound paths. l If ATM/IMA services need to be mapped into the ATM TRUNK that binds one or more E1 ports, select E1 in Level. l If ATM/IMA services need to be mapped into the ATM TRUNK that binds one or more serial ports, select Fractional E1 in Level. Direction Displays the direction of bound paths. The fixed value is bidirectional. The OptiX RTN 980 does not support this parameter. Displays the ports that carry the available paths for IMA services.
NOTE For Fractional ATM/IMA services, set Port Mode in PDH Interface to Layer 1 and configure Setting Serial Port Parameters.
Optical Interface Available Resources
Available Timeslots Selected Bound Paths

Issue 03 (2011-04-10)
The OptiX RTN 980 does not support this parameter. Displays the bound paths.
A-423
Parameter VCTRUNK Level Direction
Value Range -
Default Value -
Description Displays the name of the ATM TRUNK. Displays the level of bound paths. Displays the direction of bound paths. The fixed value is bidirectional. Displays the bound paths. Displays the number of bound paths. Specifies whether to display bound paths in combination.
Bound Paths Number of Bound Paths Display in Combination
Selected Not selected
Selected
A.8.3.3 Parameter Description: ATM IMA Management_IMA Group Status

This topic describes the parameters that are related to IMA group status.
Navigation Path
1. 2. In the NE Explorer, select the NE from the Object Tree and choose Configuration > Interface Management > ATM IMA Management from the Function Tree. Click the IMA Group States tab.

Parameter VCTRUNK Near-End Group Status Far-End Group Status Transmit Rate (cell/s) Receive Rate (cell/s) Number of Transmit Links Number of Receive Links
A-424
Value Range -
Default Value -
Description Displays the VCTRUNK. Displays the status of the near-end group. Displays the status of the far-end group. Displays the cell transmission rate. Displays the cell receiving rate. Displays the number of transmit links. Displays the number of receive links.
Issue 03 (2011-04-10)
Parameter Number of Activated Transmit Links Number of Activated Receive Links
Value Range -
Default Value -
Description Displays the number of activated transmit links. Displays the number of activated receive links.
A.8.3.4 Parameter Description: ATM IMA Management_IMA Link Status

This topic describes the parameters that are related to IMA link status.
Navigation Path
1. 2. In the NE Explorer, select the NE from the Object Tree and choose Configuration > Interface Management > ATM IMA Management from the Function Tree. Click the IMA Link States tab.

Parameter VCTRUNK E1 Link Differential Delay Check Status Near-End Receiving Status Near-End Transmitting Status Far-End Receiving Status Far-End Transmitting Status Value Range Default Value Description Displays the VCTRUNK. Displays E1 links. Displays the status of the deferential delay check. Displays the near-end receiving status. Displays the near-end transmitting status. Displays the far-end receiving status. Displays the far-end transmitting status.
A.8.3.5 Parameter Description: ATM IMA Management_ATM Interface Management

This topic describes the parameters that are related to ATM interface management.
Navigation Path
1. In the NE Explorer, select the NE from the Object Tree and choose Configuration > Interface Management > ATM IMA Management from the Function Tree.
Issue 03 (2011-04-10)
2.
Click the ATM Interface Management tab.

Parameter Port Name Port Type Value Range UNI NNI Default Value UNI Description Displays the port. Displays or specifies the name of port. Specifies the type of ATM port. l UNI: the port connecting user-side devices. For example, the UNI port applies to the user-side interface on the common ATM network or to the userside interface of the PE on the PSN network that transmits ATM PWE3 services. l NNI: the port connecting networkside devices. For example, the NNI port applies to the networkside interface on the common ATM network.
A-426
Issue 03 (2011-04-10)
Parameter ATM Cell Payload Scrambling
Description Specifies whether to enable payload scrambling of ATM cells. l The ITU-T G.804 stipulates that the payload (48 bytes) of ATM cells must be scrambled before it is mapped into E1 signals. Therefore, it is recommended that you set ATM Cell Payload Scrambling to Enabled. l ATM Cell Payload Scrambling must assume the same value on the two ends of an ATM link. Otherwise, packet loss will occur.
Min. VPI Max. VPI Min. VCI Max. VCI VCC-Supported VPI Count Loopback
No Loopback Outloop Inloop
No Loopback
The OptiX RTN 980 does not support this parameter. The OptiX RTN 980 does not support this parameter. The OptiX RTN 980 does not support this parameter. The OptiX RTN 980 does not support this parameter. The OptiX RTN 980 does not support this parameter. Specifies the loopback status of the port.
A.8.3.6 Parameter Description: Configuration of ATM Service Class Mapping Table

This topic describes the parameters that are related to configuration of the ATM service class mapping table.
Issue 03 (2011-04-10)
A-427
Navigation Path
In the NE Explorer, select the NE from the Object Tree and choose Configuration > QoS Management > Diffserv domain Management > ATM COS Mapping Configuration from the Function Tree.

Parameter Mapping Relation ID Mapping Relation Name UBR CBR RT-VBR NRT-VBR UBR+ Value Range BE AF11 AF12 AF13 AF21 AF22 AF23 AF31 AF32 AF33 AF41 AF42 AF43 EF CS6 CS7 Default Value UBR: BE CBR: EF RT-VBR: AF31 NRT-VBR: AF21 UBR+: AF11 PORT-TRANS: BE Description Specifies the ID of the mapping table. Specifies the name of the mapping relationship. Displays or specifies the PHB service classes that correspond to different ATM service types. l Eight PHB service classes are available: BE, AF1, AF2, AF3, AF4, EF, CS6, and CS7. The OptiX RTN 980 provides different QoS policies for the queues of different service classes. l CS6 to CS7: highest service classes, mainly applicable to signaling transmission. l EF: fast forwarding, applicable to services of low transmission delays and low packet loss rates. l AF1 to AF4: assured forwarding, applicable to services that require an assured transmission rate rather than delay or jitter limits.
A-428
Issue 03 (2011-04-10)
Parameter PORT-TRANS
Value Range
Default Value
Description
NOTE The AF1 class includes three subclasses: AF11, AF12, and AF13. Only one of these subclasses can take effect for one queue. It is the same case with AF2, AF3, and AF4.
l BE: best effort, applicable to services that do not require special processing.
A.8.3.7 Parameter Description: Configuration of ATM Service Class Mapping Table_Creation

This topic describes the parameters that are related to creation of the ATM service class mapping table.
Navigation Path
1. In the NE Explorer, select the NE from the Object Tree and choose Configuration > QoS Management > Diffserv domain Management > ATM COS Mapping Configuration from the Function Tree. Click New.
2.
Issue 03 (2011-04-10)
A-429

Parameter Mapping Relation ID Mapping Relation Name UBR CBR RT-VBR NRT-VBR UBR+ PORT-TRANS Value Range 2 to 8 BE AF11 AF12 AF13 AF21 AF22 AF23 AF31 AF32 AF33 AF41 AF42 AF43 EF CS6 CS7 Default Value UBR: BE CBR: EF RT-VBR: AF31 NRT-VBR: AF21 UBR+: AF11 PORT-TRANS: BE Description Specifies the ID of the mapping table. Specifies the name of the mapping relationship. Specifies the PHB service classes that correspond to different ATM service types. l Eight PHB service classes are available: BE, AF1, AF2, AF3, AF4, EF, CS6, and CS7. The OptiX RTN 980 provides different QoS policies for the queues of different service classes. l CS6 to CS7: highest service classes, mainly applicable to signaling transmission. l EF: fast forwarding, applicable to services of low transmission delays and low packet loss rates. l AF1 to AF4: assured forwarding, applicable to services that require an assured transmission rate rather than delay or jitter limits.
NOTE The AF1 class includes three subclasses: AF11, AF12, and AF13. Only one of these subclasses can take effect for one queue. It is the same case with AF2, AF3, and AF4.
l BE: best effort, applicable to services that do not require special processing.
A-430
Issue 03 (2011-04-10)
A.8.3.8 Parameter Description: ATM Policy Management

This topic describes the parameters that are related to ATM policy management.
Navigation Path
1. 2. In the NE Explorer, select the NE from the Object Tree and choose Configuration > QoS Management > Policy Management > ATM Policy from the Function Tree. Click the ATM Policy tab.

Parameter Policy ID Policy Name Value Range Default Value 1 Description Displays the policy ID of the ATM service. Displays or specifies the policy name of the ATM service. The maximum length of the value is 64 bytes.
Issue 03 (2011-04-10)
A-431
Parameters for Configuring ATM Traffic

Parameter Service Type Value Range UBR CBR RT-VBR NRT-VBR UBR+ Default Value UBR Description Displays or specifies the type of the ATM service. l The UBR service is characterized by nonreal-time applications and many bursts. The UBR service does not specify traffic-related service guarantees. To be specific, the UBR service only requires that the network side provides the service with the best effort. The network side does not provide any assured QoS for the UBR service. In the case of network congestion, the UBR cells are discarded first. l The CBR service requires tightly constrained delay variation and requires that data be transmitted at a constant rate. In addition, the CBR service requests a static amount of bandwidth and the highest priority. The CBR service is characterized by stable traffic and few bursts. l The rt-VBR service requires tightly constrained delay and delay variation. Compared with the CBR service, the rtVBR service allows sources to transmit data at a rate that varies with time. Equivalently, the sources can be
A-432
Issue 03 (2011-04-10)
Parameter
Value Range
Default Value
Description described as bursty. In addition, the rt-VBR service does not require a static amount of bandwidth. l Compared with the rtVBR service, the nrtVBR service does not require tightly constrained delay or delay variation, and is intended for non-realtime applications. l The UBR+ service is supplementary to the UBR service and is intended for applications that require assured minimum cell rate, which is indicated by the minimum cell rate (MCR) parameter. The other characteristics of the UBR+ service are the same as the corresponding characteristics of the UBR service.
Traffic Type Clp01Pcr(cell/s) Clp01Scr(cell/s) Clp0Pcr(cell/s) Clp0Scr(cell/s) Max. Cell Burst Size (cell) Cell Delay Variation Tolerance (0.1us) Discard Traffic Frame
90 to 74539 90 to 74539 90 to 74539 90 to 74539 2 to 200000 7 to 13300000 Enabled Disabled
Disabled
The Table A-27 lists the ATM service type, traffic type descriptor, and the related traffic parameters. ATM policies are configured based on these mapping relationships.
Displays or specifies the frame discarding mark in ATM policies. This parameter is effective to AAL5 traffic.
Issue 03 (2011-04-10)
A-433
Parameter UPC/NPC
Description Displays or specifies UPC/NPC. l UPC is user-side parameter control and NPC is network-side parameter control. l After UPC/NPC is enabled, the cells with a frame discarding mark will be discarded in network congestion.
Table A-27 Mapping relationship between ATM service types, traffic types, and traffic parameters ATM Service Type UBR ATM Traffic Type Descriptor NoTrafficDescriptor NoClpTaggingNoScr NoClpNoScr NoClpNoScrCdvt CBR ClpTransparentNoScr ClpNoTaggingNoScr ClpTaggingNoScr NoClpNoScr NoClpNoScrCdvt nrtVBR NoClpScr ClpNoTaggingScr ClpTaggingScr rtVBR ClpTransparentScr NoClpScrCdvt ClpNoTaggingScrCdvt ClpTaggingScrCdvt UBR+ atmnotrafficdescriptormcr atmnoclpmcr Traffic Parameter 1 Clp01Pcr Clp01Pcr Clp01Pcr Clp01Pcr Clp01Pcr Clp01Pcr Clp01Pcr Clp01Pcr Clp01Pcr Clp01Pcr Clp01Pcr Clp01Pcr Clp01Pcr Clp01Pcr Clp01Pcr Clp01Mcr Clp01Pcr Traffic Parameter 2 CDVT CDVT CDVT Clp0Pcr Clp0Pcr CDVT Clp01Scr Clp0Scr Clp0Scr Clp01Scr Clp01Scr Clp0Scr Clp0Scr Clp01Mcr Traffic Parameter 3 MBS MBS MBS MBS MBS MBS MBS Traffic Parameter 4 CDVT CDVT CDVT CDVT -
A-434
Issue 03 (2011-04-10)
ATM Service Type
ATM Traffic Type Descriptor atmnoclpmcrcdvt
Traffic Parameter 1 Clp01Pcr
Traffic Parameter 2 Clp01Mcr
Traffic Parameter 3 CDVT
Traffic Parameter 4 -
Parameters for the application object

Parameter Service ID Value Range Default Value Description Displays the ID configured for the ATM service. Displays the name configured for the ATM service. Displays the link ID. Displays the direction of the service.
Service Name
Link ID Direction
A.8.3.9 Parameter Description: ATM Policy Management_Creation

This topic describes the parameters that are related to creation of ATM policies.
Navigation Path
1. 2. In the NE Explorer, select the NE from the Object Tree and choose Configuration > QoS Management > Policy Management > ATM Policy from the Function Tree. Click New.

Parameter Policy ID Value Range Default Value 1 Description Specifies the policy ID of the ATM service. The policy ID can also be automatically allocated.
Issue 03 (2011-04-10)
A-435
Parameter Policy Name
Value Range Synchronous signal Signaling Voice Data Video
Default Value Synchronous signal
Description Specifies the policy name of the ATM service. The maximum length of the value is 64 bytes.
NOTE You can select one of the five ATM service policy names from the drop-down list or enter the policy name.
A-436
Issue 03 (2011-04-10)
Parameter Service Type
Value Range UBR CBR RT-VBR NRT-VBR UBR+
Default Value UBR
Description Specifies the type of the ATM service. l The UBR service is characterized by nonreal-time applications and many bursts. The UBR service does not specify traffic-related service guarantees. To be specific, the UBR service only requires that the network side provides the service with the best effort. The network side does not provide any assured QoS for the UBR service. In the case of network congestion, the UBR cells are discarded first. l The CBR service requires tightly constrained delay variation and requires that data be transmitted at a constant rate. In addition, the CBR service requests a static amount of bandwidth and the highest priority. The CBR service is characterized by stable traffic and few bursts. l The rt-VBR service requires tightly constrained delay and delay variation. Compared with the CBR service, the rtVBR service allows sources to transmit data at a rate that varies with time. Equivalently, the sources can be described as bursty. In
Issue 03 (2011-04-10)
A-437
Parameter
Value Range
Default Value
Description addition, the rt-VBR service does not require a static amount of bandwidth. l Compared with the rtVBR service, the nrtVBR service does not require tightly constrained delay or delay variation, and is intended for non-realtime applications. l The UBR+ service is supplementary to the UBR service and is intended for applications that require assured minimum cell rate, which is indicated by the minimum cell rate (MCR) parameter. The other characteristics of the UBR+ service are the same as the corresponding characteristics of the UBR service.
Traffic Type Clp01Pcr(cell/s) Clp01Scr(cell/s) Clp0Pcr(cell/s) Clp0Scr(cell/s) Max. Cell Burst Size (cell) Cell Delay Variation Tolerance (0.1us) Discard Traffic Frame
90 to 74539 90 to 74539 90 to 74539 90 to 74539 2 to 200000 7 to 13300000 Enabled Disabled
Disabled
For the mapping relationships between ATM service types, ATM traffic type descriptors, and traffic parameters, see Table A-28. ATM policies are configured based on these mapping relationships.
Specifies the frame discarding mark in ATM policies. This parameter is effective to AAL5 traffic.
A-438
Issue 03 (2011-04-10)
Parameter UPC/NPC
Description l UPC is user-side parameter control and NPC is network-side parameter control. l After UPC/NPC is enabled, the cells with a frame discarding mark will be discarded in network congestion.
Table A-28 Mapping relationship between ATM service types, ATM traffic types, and traffic parameters ATM Service Type UBR ATM Traffic Type Descriptor NoTrafficDescriptor NoClpTaggingNoScr NoClpNoScr NoClpNoScrCdvt CBR ClpTransparentNoScr ClpNoTaggingNoScr ClpTaggingNoScr NoClpNoScr NoClpNoScrCdvt nrtVBR NoClpScr ClpNoTaggingScr ClpTaggingScr rtVBR ClpTransparentScr NoClpScrCdvt ClpNoTaggingScrCdvt ClpTaggingScrCdvt UBR+ atmnotrafficdescriptormcr atmnoclpmcr atmnoclpmcrcdvt Traffic Parameter 1 Clp01Pcr Clp01Pcr Clp01Pcr Clp01Pcr Clp01Pcr Clp01Pcr Clp01Pcr Clp01Pcr Clp01Pcr Clp01Pcr Clp01Pcr Clp01Pcr Clp01Pcr Clp01Pcr Clp01Pcr Clp01Mcr Clp01Pcr Clp01Pcr Traffic Parameter 2 CDVT CDVT CDVT Clp0Pcr Clp0Pcr CDVT Clp01Scr Clp0Scr Clp0Scr Clp01Scr Clp01Scr Clp0Scr Clp0Scr Clp01Mcr Clp01Mcr Traffic Parameter 3 MBS MBS MBS MBS MBS MBS MBS CDVT Traffic Parameter 4 CDVT CDVT CDVT CDVT -
Issue 03 (2011-04-10)
A-439
A.8.3.10 Parameter Description: ATM Service Management

This topic describes the parameters that are related to ATM service management.
Navigation Path
In the NE Explorer, select the NE from the Object Tree and choose Configuration > ATM Service Management from the Function Tree.

Parameter Service ID Service Name Service Type Deployment Status Value Range Default Value Description Displays the service ID. Displays or specifies the service name. Displays the ATM service type. Displays the deployment status of the ATM service.
Connection Parameters
Parameter Connection ID Connection Name Value Range Default Value Description Displays the connection ID of the ATM service. Displays or specifies the connection name of the ATM service. Displays the source port of the ATM service. Displays the ID of the PW that carries ATM PWE3 services, if any. Displays the sink board of the ATM service. Displays the VPI of the source port of the ATM service. Displays the VCI of the source port of the ATM service.
Source Port PW ID
Sink Port Source VPI
Source VCI
A-440
Issue 03 (2011-04-10)
Parameter Sink VPI
Value Range -
Default Value -
Description Displays the VPI of the sink port of the ATM service. Displays the VCI of the sink port of the ATM service. Displays the QoS policy of the uplink ATM connection. Displays the QoS policy of the downlink ATM connection.
Sink VCI
Uplink Policy
Down link Policy
Parameters for Port Attributes

Parameter Port Port Type Max. VPI Max. VCI VCC-Supported VPI Count Value Range Default Value Description Displays the port of the ATM IMA service. Displays the port type of the ATM IMA service. Displays the maximum VPI. Displays the maximum VCI. Displays the count of VPIs that are used for VC exchange.
Parameters for Bound Paths

Parameter VCTRUNK Level Direction Value Range Default Value Description Displays the VCTRUNK. Displays the level of bound paths. Displays the direction of bound paths. The fixed value is bidirectional. Displays the bound paths.
A-441
Bound Paths
Issue 03 (2011-04-10)
Parameter Number of Bound Paths IMA Group Status
Value Range -
Default Value -
Description Displays the number of bound paths. Displays the status of the IMA group.
Parameters of PWs
Tab General Attributes Parameter PW ID Work Status Value Range PW Signaling Type Default Value Description Displays the PW ID. Displays the working status of a PW. Displays whether a PW is enabled. Displays the PW signaling type.
NOTE The OptiX RTN 980 uses static PWs only.
PW Type
l Displays the configured PW type. l This parameter corresponds to the connection type. The encapsulation type can be 1:1 or N: 1 if the connection type is PVP or PVC.
Displays the direction of the PW. Displays the encapsulation type of the packets on the PW.
NOTE The OptiX RTN 980 uses MPLS only.
PW Outgoing Label / Sink Port Peer LSR ID -
Displays the configured PW Ingress label. Displays the configured PW Egress label. Displays the LSR ID of the destination.
Issue 03 (2011-04-10)
A-442
Tab
Parameter Tunnel Type Ingress Tunnel No Egress Tunnel No Local Operating Status Remote Operating Status Overall Operating Status
Value Range -
Default Value -
Description Displays the type of the tunnel. Displays the tunnel ID of the ingress tunnel. Displays the tunnel ID of the egress tunnel. Displays the local running status of PW. Displays the remote running status of PW. Displays the comprehensive working status of the PW. Displays the tunnel that is automatically selected. Displays the PW ID. Displays the direction of the PW. Displays or specifies whether the bandwidth limit is enabled. l This function can be used to limit the bandwidth of one or more PWs, or the bandwidth of one or more ATM PWE3 services, in an MPLS tunnel. (One ATM PWE3 service corresponds to one PW.) l An ATM PWE3 service corresponds to a PW. Therefore, this function can also limit the bandwidth of ATM PWE3 services in an MPLS tunnel.
Tunnel for Auto Selection QoS PW ID Direction Bandwidth Limit
Issue 03 (2011-04-10)
A-443
Tab
Parameter CIR (Kbit/s)
Value Range -
Default Value -
Description Displays or specifies the committed information rate. It is recommended that you set this parameter to the same value as PIR.
CBS (kbyte)
Displays or specifies the excess burst size of the PW. Displays or specifies the peak information rate. It is recommended that you set this parameter to the same value as CIR.
PIR (kbit/s)
PBS (kbyte)
Displays or specifies the maximum excess burst size of the PW. The OptiX RTN 980 does not support this parameter. The OptiX RTN 980 does not support this parameter. Displays or specifies whether to use the control word. In the MPLS packet switching network, the control word is used to transmit packet information.
EXP
Policy
Advanced Attributes
Control Word
Must Use No Use
A-444
Issue 03 (2011-04-10)
Tab
Value Range CW None Alert Label
Default Value -
Description l Displays or specifies the mode of PW connectivity check. l The value None indicates that the control word is not supported. That is, the PW connectivity check is not supported. l The value CW indicates that the control word is supported. l The value Alert Label indicates VCCV packets in Alert Label encapsulation mode.
Ping None
l Displays or specifies the VCCV verification mode. The VCCV verification is used for PW connectivity check. l If the VCCV-ping function is required, do not set VCCV Verification Mode of PWs to None.
Issue 03 (2011-04-10)
A-445
Tab
Parameter Max. Concatenated Cell Count
Value Range 1 to 31
Default Value -
Description l Displays or specifies the maximum number of concatenated cells. l If the value 1 is assumed, only one ATM cell is encapsulated in one packet. If the value from 2 to 31 is assumed, a maximum of 2 to 31 ATM cells are encapsulated into one packet.
100 to 50000
l Displays or specifies the packet loading time. Once the packet loading time expires, the packet is sent out even if the concatenated cells are less than the maximum. l If Max. Concatenated Cell Count assumes the value 1, this parameter is ineffective. That is, the packet will be sent out once the cell is loaded.
Parameters for CoS Mapping

Parameter PW ID Value Range Default Value Description Displays the ID of the PW that carries the service.
A-446
Issue 03 (2011-04-10)
Parameter CoS Mapping
Value Range -
Default Value -
Description Specifies the policy for mapping different ATM service levels to CoS priorities. By setting this parameter, different quality measures are provided for different ATM services.

NOTE
Value Range -
Default Value -
Description Displays the ID of the protection group to be created. Displays the ID of the working PW. Displays the ID of the protection PW. Displays the protection mode. l Displays or specifies the enabling status of the PW protection group. l During the creation of a protection group, set Enabling Status to Disabled. After the APS protection group is configured at both ends, set Enabling Status to Enabled.
Working PW ID Protection PW ID Protection Mode Enabling Status
Enabled Disabled
Switchover Mode

Issue 03 (2011-04-10)
A-447
Parameter Restoration Mode
Value Range Non-revertive Revertive
Default Value -
Description l Specifies whether to switch services to the original working PW after the fault is rectified. l The value Revertive indicates that services are switched to the original working PW and the value Nonrevertive indicates that services are not switched to the original working PW. l The value Revertive is recommended.
1 to 12
l Displays or specifies the WTR time of the protection group. l When the preset WTR time expires after the original working PW recovers, services are switched to the original working PW. l This parameter is available only when Restoration Mode is Revertive.
0 to 100
A-448
Issue 03 (2011-04-10)
Parameter Deployment Status
Value Range -
Default Value -
Description Display the deployment status of the protection group. Displays the switchover status of the protection group. Displays the enabling status of the protocol. Displays the status of the current working path. Display the status of the current protection path.
Switchover Status
A.8.3.11 Parameter Description: ATM Service Management_Creation

This topic describes the parameters that are related to creation of ATM services.
Navigation Path
1. 2. In the NE Explorer, select the NE from the Object Tree and choose Configuration > ATM Service Management from the Function Tree. Click New.

Parameter Service ID Service Name Value Range 1 to 4294967295 Default Value Description Specifies the service ID. Specifies the service name.
Issue 03 (2011-04-10)
A-449
Parameter Service Type
Value Range UNIs-NNI UNI-UNI
Default Value UNIs-NNI
Description l Specifies the type of the ATM service. l UNIs-NNI: This value applies to ATM PWE3 services. The attributes in Connection, PW, and CoS Mapping need to be configured. l UNI-UNI: This value applies to common ATM services. Only the attributes in Connection need to be configured.
Connection Type
PVC PVP Transparent
PVC
Specifies the connection type of the ATM service. For common ATM services (UNI-UNI): l PVP: Only the VPIs of the source and sink are exchanged. l PVC: The VPIs and VCIs of the source and sink are exchanged. For ATM PWE3 services (UNIs-NNI): l PVP: This value applies to the N-to-1/1to-1 VPC encapsulation mode. l PVC: This value applies to the N-to-1/1to-1 VCC encapsulation mode. For transparently transmitted ATM services, set Connection Type to Transparent.
A-450
Issue 03 (2011-04-10)
Value Range No Protection PW APS Slave Protection Pair
Default Value No Protection
Description l Specifies the protection mode of the PW. This parameter is available only when Service Type is UNIsNNI. l Set this parameter according to the planning information.
Connection Parameters
Parameter Connection Name Source Board Source Port Source VPI(eg.35,36-39) Value Range UNI: 0 to 255 NNI: 0 to 4095 Source VCI(eg.35,36-39) 32 to 65535 Default Value Description Specifies the name of the ATM connection. Specifies the source board of the ATM service. Specifies the source port of the ATM service. Specifies the VPI of the source port of the ATM service. Specifies the VCI of the source port of the ATM service. Specifies the ID of the PW that carries services. Specifies the sink board of the ATM service. Specifies the sink board of the ATM service.
NOTE This parameter does not need to be set if Service Type is UNIs-NNI. This parameter needs to be set if Service Type is UNI-UNI and the value must be different from that of the source board.
PW ID Sink Board Sink Port
1 to 4294967295 -
Sink VPI(eg.35,36-39)
UNI: 0 to 255 NNI: 0 to 4095
Specifies the VPI of the sink port of the ATM service.

A-451
Issue 03 (2011-04-10)
Parameter Sink VCI(eg.35,36-39)
Default Value -
Description Specifies the VCI of the sink port of the ATM service. Specifies the QoS policy of the uplink ATM connection. Specifies the QoS policy of the downlink ATM connection.
Uplink Policy
Down link Policy
Parameters of PWs
NOTE
If the parameter Protection Type of PWs is set to PW APS, all the parameters of working and protection PWs need to be configured. This section considers the parameters of the working PW as an example.
Parameter PW ID Working Status
Value Range -
Default Value -
Description Specifies the ID of the PW that carries services. Displays the working status of the PW.
NOTE This parameter is available only after the PW parameters are configured.
Enable Status
Displays the enabling status of the PW.

NOTE This parameter is available only after the PW parameters are configured.
PW Signaling Type
Static
Static
Labels for static PWs need to be manually assigned.
A-452
Issue 03 (2011-04-10)
Parameter PW Type
Value Range The ATM connection type is PVC: l ATM n-to-one VCC cell transport l ATM one-to-one VCC Cell Mode The ATM connection type is PVP: l ATM n-to-one VPC cell transport l ATM one-to-one VPC Cell Mode
Default Value The ATM connection type is PVC: ATM n-to-one VCC cell transport The ATM connection type is PVP: ATM n-to-one VPC cell transport
Description l Specifies the type of the PW. l In the case of ATM 1_to_1 encapsulation, one PW carries one VPC or VCC. l In the case of ATM n_to_1 encapsulation, one PW carries one or more VPCs or VCCs.
Bidirectional MPLS
Bidirectional MPLS
Displays the direction of the PW. Displays the encapsulation type of the packets on the PW. Specifies the PW Ingress label. Specifies the PW Egress label. Displays the method to select tunnels. Displays the type of the tunnel that carries the PW. A tunnel needs to be selected. If no tunnel is available, creation of a PW will fail. Specifies the LSR ID of the PW at the remote end. If an existing tunnel is selected, the LSR ID will be automatically assigned.
PW Ingress Label / Source Port PW Egress Label / Sink Port Tunnel Selection Mode Tunnel Type Tunnel
16 to 1048575 16 to 1048575 Manually MPLS -
Manually MPLS -
Peer LSR ID
Issue 03 (2011-04-10)
A-453
QoS Parameters
Table A-29 ATM services Parameter Bandwidth Limit Value Range Default Value Description Specifies whether the bandwidth limit is enabled. l This function can be used to limit the bandwidth of one or more PWs, or the bandwidth of one or more ATM PWE3 services, in an MPLS tunnel. (One ATM PWE3 service corresponds to one PW.) l An ATM PWE3 service corresponds to a PW. Therefore, this function can also limit the bandwidth of ATM PWE3 services in an MPLS tunnel. Policy CIR (Kbit/s) The OptiX RTN 980 does not support this parameter. Specifies the committed information rate (CIR) of the PW. It is recommended that you set this parameter to the same value as PIR. CBS (kbyte) PIR (kbit/s) Specifies the excess burst size of the PW. Specifies the peak information rate (PIR) of the PW. It is recommended that you set this parameter to the same value as CIR. PBS (kbyte) Specifies the maximum excess burst size of the PW.
A-454
Issue 03 (2011-04-10)
Parameter EXP
Value Range -
Default Value -
Description The OptiX RTN 980 does not support this parameter.
Parameters of Advanced Attributes

Parameter Control Word Value Range Must Use No Use Default Value Must Use Description l Specifies whether to use the control word. In the MPLS packet switching network, the control word is used to transmit packet information. l Set Control Word to Must Use if PW Type is ATM 1:1. Control Channel Type CW None Alert Label CW l Specifies the mode of PW connectivity check. l The value None indicates that the control word is not supported. That is, the PW connectivity check is not supported. l The value CW indicates that the control word is supported. l The value Alert Label indicates VCCV packets in Alert Label encapsulation mode. VCCV Verification Mode Ping None Ping l Specifies the VCCV verification mode. The VCCV verification is used for PW connectivity check. l If the VCCV-Ping test is required, do not set this parameter to None.
Issue 03 (2011-04-10)
A-455
Parameter Max. Concatenated Cell Count
Value Range 1 to 31
Default Value 10
Description l Specifies the maximum number of concatenated cells. l If the value 1 is assumed, only one ATM cell is encapsulated in one packet. If the value from 2 to 31 is assumed, a maximum of 2 to 31 ATM cells are encapsulated into one packet.
100 to 50000
1000
l Specifies the packet loading time. Once the packet loading time expires, the packet is sent out even if the concatenated cells are less than the maximum. l If Max. Concatenated Cell Count assumes the value 1, this parameter is ineffective. That is, the packet will be sent out once the cell is loaded.

NOTE
Parameter Protection Type Protection Group ID
Value Range -
Default Value -
Description Specifies the protection type. Specifies the protection group ID.
A-456
Issue 03 (2011-04-10)
Description l Specifies the enabling status of the PW protection group. l During the creation of a protection group, set Enabling Status to Disabled. After the APS protection group is configured at both ends, set Enabling Status to Enabled.
Protection Mode

Revertive Mode
Revertive
Issue 03 (2011-04-10)
A-457
Value Range 1 to 12
Default Value 1
Description l Specifies the WTR time of the protection group. l When the preset WTR time expires after the original working PW recovers, services are switched to the original working PW. l This parameter is available only when Restoration Mode is Revertive. l The default value is recommended.
0 to 100
Detection mode
OAM Parameters
NOTE
A-458
Issue 03 (2011-04-10)
Parameter OAM Status Detection Mode
Description Displays the enabling status of PW OAM. l Specifies the detection mode of OAM packets. l Manual: The connectivity check (CC) packets are sent at the interval specified by the user. l Auto-Sensing: The connectivity check (CC) packets are sent at the interval of receiving PW OAM packets. l If Detection Mode is set to Manual, you need to set the PW OAM detection packets to be received and transmitted. l The value AutoSensing is recommended.
Issue 03 (2011-04-10)
A-459
Value Range CV FFD
Default Value CV
3.3 10 20 50 100 200 500
50
A-460
Issue 03 (2011-04-10)

NOTE
Value Range -
Default Value -
Working PW ID
Protection PW ID
Parameters for CoS Mapping

Parameter PW ID CoS Mapping Value Range Default Value Description Displays the ID of the PW that carries service. Specifies the policy for mapping different ATM service levels to CoS priorities. By setting this parameter, different quality measures are provided for different ATM services.
A.8.3.12 Parameter Description: ATM OAM Management_Segment and End Attributes

This topic describes the parameters that are related to segment end attributes of ATM OAM.
Issue 03 (2011-04-10)
A-461
Navigation Path
1. 2. In the NE Explorer, select the NE from the Object Tree and choose Configuration > ATM OAM Management from the Function Tree. Click the Segment End Attributes tab.

Parameter Source Sink Value Range Default Value Description Displays the source node of the ATM/IMA service. Displays the sink node of the ATM/IMA service.
A-462
Issue 03 (2011-04-10)
Parameter Connection Direction
Value Range Source Sink
Default Value -
Description Displays the direction of the ATM connection. l Source: indicates the forward direction. For common ATM services (UNIUNI), Source indicates the direction from the source end to the sink end of the ATM connection. For ATM PWE3 services (UNINNI), Source indicates the direction from the UNI port side to the MPLS interface side. l Sink: indicates the backward direction. For common ATM services (UNIUNI), Sink indicates the direction from the sink end to the source end of the ATM connection. For ATM PWE3 services (UNINNI), Sink indicates the direction from the MPLS interface side to the UNI port side.
Issue 03 (2011-04-10)
A-463
Parameter Segment and End Attribute
Value Range Non segment and Endpoint Segment point Endpoint Segment and Endpoint
Default Value Non segment and Endpoint
Description Specifies the segment and end attributes of the source and sink of the ATM connection. l Non segment and endpoint: intermediate point, which refers to the OAM node between two segment points or two end points. Therefore, intermediate points can be further classified into intermediate points between segment points, and intermediate points between end points. Upon detecting a fault, an intermediate point reports the corresponding alarms and inserts segment AIS cells and end AIS cells to the downstream. Afterwards, the intermediate point periodically sends these cells. An intermediate point does not catch any AIS/RDI cells. l Segment point: an end point of a segment. One ATM link consists of multiple segments. Upon detecting a fault, a segment point reports the corresponding alarms and inserts end AIS cells to the downstream. Afterwards, the segment point
A-464
Issue 03 (2011-04-10)
Parameter
Value Range
Default Value
Description periodically sends these cells. A segment point catches segment AIS/RDI cells only. l End point: an end point of an ATM link. It is usually an edge point on the ATM network. Upon detecting a fault, an end point reports the corresponding alarms but does not insert any AIS cells. An end point catches end AIS/ RDI cells only. l Segment and endpoint: a segment-end point, or an edge point of a segment and an end. Upon detecting a fault, a segmentend point reports the corresponding alarms but does not insert any AIS cells. A segment-end point catches the AIS/RDI cells of a segment and an end.
A.8.3.13 Parameter Description: ATM OMA Management_CC Activation Status

This topic describes the parameters that are related to the CC activation status of ATM OAM.
Navigation Path
1. 2.
Issue 03 (2011-04-10)
In the NE Explorer, select the NE from the Object Tree and choose Configuration > ATM OAM Management from the Function Tree. Click the CC Activation Status tab.

Parameter Source Sink Connection Direction Value Range Source Sink Default Value Description Displays the source node of the ATM/IMA service. Displays the sink node of the ATM/IMA service. Specifies the connection direction. l Source: indicates the forward direction. For common ATM services (UNIUNI), Source indicates the direction from the source end to the sink end of the ATM connection. For ATM PWE3 services (UNINNI), Source indicates the direction from the UNI port side to the MPLS interface side. l Sink: indicates the backward direction. For common ATM services (UNIUNI), Sink indicates the direction from the sink end to the source end of the ATM connection. For ATM PWE3 services (UNINNI), Sink indicates the direction from the MPLS interface side to the UNI port side.
A-466
Issue 03 (2011-04-10)
Value Range -
Default Value -
Description Specifies the segment and end attributes of nodes. l Segment point: an end point of a segment. One ATM link consists of multiple segments. Segment CC cells are terminated at segment points. l End point: an end point of an ATM link. It is usually an edge point on an ATM network. End-to-end CC cells are terminated at end points.
Issue 03 (2011-04-10)
A-467
Parameter CC Activate Flag
Value Range Deactivate Source activate Sink activate Source + sink activate
Default Value -
Description l Specifies the CC activation flag. l Deactivate: This node does not transmit or receive CC cells. l Source activate: This point transmits but does not receive CC cells. l Sink activate: This point receives but does not transmit CC cells. If this point does not receive any service cells or CC cells within a time interval of 3.5 (0.5) seconds, it will report the LOC alarm and transmit AIS cells in the forward direction. l Source + sink activate: This node transmits and receives CC cells. If this point does not receive any service cells or CC cells within a time interval of 3.5 (0.5) seconds, it will report the LOC alarm and transmit AIS cells in the forward direction. l Once the node receives any CC cells or service cells, the LOC alarm will be cleared.
A.8.3.14 Parameter Description: ATM OAM Management_Remote End Loopback Status

This topic describes the parameters that are related to the remote end loopback status of ATM OAM.
A-468
Issue 03 (2011-04-10)
Navigation Path
1. 2. In the NE Explorer, select the NE from the Object Tree and choose Configuration > ATM OAM Management from the Function Tree. Click the Remote Loopback Test tab.

Parameter Source Sink Value Range Default Value Description Displays the source node of the ATM/IMA service. Displays the sink node of the ATM/IMA service.
Issue 03 (2011-04-10)
A-469
Parameter Connection Direction
Value Range Source Sink
Default Value -
Description Displays the direction of the ATM connection. l Source: indicates the forward direction. For common ATM services (UNIUNI), Source indicates the direction from the source end to the sink end of the ATM connection. For ATM PWE3 services (UNINNI), Source indicates the direction from the UNI port side to the MPLS interface side. l Sink: indicates the backward direction. For common ATM services (UNIUNI), Sink indicates the direction from the sink end to the source end of the ATM connection. For ATM PWE3 services (UNINNI), Sink indicates the direction from the MPLS interface side to the UNI port side.
A-470
Issue 03 (2011-04-10)
Value Range -
Default Value -
Description Specifies the segment and end attribute. l Segment LB cells are looped back only at a Segment point, Segment and Endpoint, or Non segment and Endpoint. l End-to-end LB cells are looped back only at an Endpoint or Segment and Endpoint.
Loopback Point NE
l Specifies the NE where the loopback point is located. l Before an end-to-end LB test, you need to set end points in the test domain. After the test, remove the end points. l Before a segment-tosegment LB test, you need to set segment points in the test domain. After the test, remove the segment points.
Test Result
Displays whether the loopback command is successfully issued.
A.8.3.15 Parameter Description: ATM OAM Management_LLID

This topic describes the parameters that are related to LLID configuration.
Navigation Path
1. 2. In the NE Explorer, select the NE from the Object Tree and choose Configuration > ATM OAM Management from the Function Tree. Click the LLID tab.
Issue 03 (2011-04-10)
A-471

Parameter Country Code (Hexadecimal Code) Value Range Default Value 00 00 Description Displays or specifies the country code of the ATM service. The value is 2 bytes in length. Displays or specifies the network code of the ATM service. The value is 2 bytes in length. l Displays or specifies the NE code of the ATM service. The value is 11 bytes in length. l The default NE code can be used if it is unique on the network. l NE code and NE ID are associated. Therefore, each NE on the network has a unique NE code.
Network Code (Hexadecimal Code)
00 01
NE Code (Hexadecimal Code)
00 30 00 04 00 00 00 00 00 00 00
A.9 Clock Parameters

This topic describes the parameters that are related to clocks. A.9.1 Physical Clock Parameters This topic describes physical clock parameters. A.9.2 CES ACR Clock Parameters This topic describes CES ACR clock parameters. A.9.3 Parameter Description: Auxiliary Ports This topic describes parameters that are used for configuring an external time port as an RS-485 monitoring port.
A.9.1 Physical Clock Parameters

This topic describes physical clock parameters. A.9.1.1 Parameter Description: Clock Source Priority Table This topic describes the parameters that are related to the priority table of a clock source. A.9.1.2 Parameter Description: Priority Table for the PLL Clock Source of the External Clock Port
This topic describes the parameters that are related to the priority table for the phase-locked loop (PLL) clock source of the external clock port. A.9.1.3 Parameter Description: Clock Subnet Setting_Clock Subnet This topic describes the parameters that are related to a clock subnet. A.9.1.4 Parameter Description: Clock Subnet Setting_Clock Quality This topic describes the parameters that are related clock quality. A.9.1.5 Parameter Description: Clock Subset Setting_SSM Output Control This topic describes the parameters that are related to SSM output control. A.9.1.6 Parameter Description: Clock Subset Setting_Clock ID Enabling Status This topic describes the parameters that are used for enabling the clock ID function. A.9.1.7 Parameter Description: Clock Source Switching_Clock Source Restoration Parameters This topic describes the parameters that are related to clock source restoration. A.9.1.8 Parameter Description: Clock Source Switching_Clock Source Switching This topic describes the parameters that are related to the switching status of a clock source. A.9.1.9 Parameter Description: Clock Source Switching_Clock Source Switching Conditions This section describes the parameters that are related to the switching conditions of clock sources. A.9.1.10 Parameter Description: Output Phase-Locked Source of the External Clock Source This topic describes the parameters of the output phase-locked source of the external clock source. A.9.1.11 Parameter Description: Clock Synchronization Status This topic describes the parameters that are related to the clock synchronization status.
A.9.1.1 Parameter Description: Clock Source Priority Table

This topic describes the parameters that are related to the priority table of a clock source.
Navigation Path
1. 2. Select the NE from the Object Tree in the NE Explorer. Choose Configuration > Clock > Physical Clock > Clock Source Priority. Click the System Clock Source Priority List tab.
Issue 03 (2011-04-10)
A-473
Parameters
Parameter Clock Source Value Range Default Value Description l External clock source 1 indicates the external clock source at the CLK/TOD1 port on the CSHN board in physical slot 15. External clock source 2 indicates the external clock source at the CLK/TOD1 port on the CSHN board in physical slot 20. l The internal clock source is always at the lowest priority and indicates that the NE works in the free-run mode. l The clock sources and the corresponding clock source priority levels are determined according to the clock synchronization schemes. External Clock Source Mode 2Mbit/s 2MHz 2Mbit/s l This parameter indicates the type of the external clock source signal. l This parameter is set according to the external clock signal. In normal cases, the external clock signal is a 2 Mbit/s signal.
A-474
Issue 03 (2011-04-10)
Parameter Synchronous Status Byte
Value Range SA4 to SA8
Default Value SA4
Description l This parameter is valid only when External Clock Source Mode is set to 2Mbit/s. l This parameter indicates which bit of the TS0 in odd frames of the external clock signal is used to transmit the SSM. l This parameter needs to be set only when the SSM or extended SSM is enabled. In normal cases, the external clock sources use the SA4 to transmit the SSM.
Clock Source Priority Sequence (Highest:1)
Displays the priority sequence of clock sources. 1 indicates the highest clock source priority.
A.9.1.2 Parameter Description: Priority Table for the PLL Clock Source of the External Clock Port
This topic describes the parameters that are related to the priority table for the phase-locked loop (PLL) clock source of the external clock port.
Navigation Path
1. 2. In the NE Explorer, select the NE from the Object Tree and then choose Configuration > Clock > Physical Clock > Clock Source Priority from the Function Tree. Click the Priority for PLL Clock Sources of 1st External Output tab.
Issue 03 (2011-04-10)
A-475
Parameters for configuring the priority table for the PLL clock source of the external clock port
Parameter Clock Source Value Range Default Value Internal Clock Source Description l When the PLL clock source of the external clock port extracts the system clock (namely, the local clock of the NE), Clock Source takes its default value Internal Clock Source. In this case, no manual configuration is required. l When the PLL clock source of the external clock port needs to extract the clock from an SDH line board, clock from a radio link, clock from a PDH tributary board, or synchronous Ethernet clock, set Clock Source to the corresponding clock source according to the network planning information. Current Status Displays the valid status of clock sources.
A-476
Issue 03 (2011-04-10)
Parameter Lock Status
Value Range -
Default Value -
Description l The PLL clock source of the external clock port extracts only an unlocked clock source. l If a clock source is in locked state, the PLL clock source of the external clock port does not extract the clock source until the clock source is changed from the locked state to the unlocked state. l The internal clock source should not be in locked state.
Clock Source Priority (Highest: 1)
Displays the priority level of a clock source. 1 is the highest priority.
A.9.1.3 Parameter Description: Clock Subnet Setting_Clock Subnet

This topic describes the parameters that are related to a clock subnet.
Navigation Path
1. 2. Select the NE from the Object Tree in the NE Explorer. Choose Configuration > Clock > Physical Clock > Clock Subnet Configuration. Click the Clock Subnet tab.
Parameters for Setting a Clock Subnet

Parameter Affiliated Subnet Value Range Default Value Description The OptiX RTN 980 does not support this parameter.
Issue 03 (2011-04-10)
A-477
Parameter Protection Status
Value Range Start Extended SSM Protocol Start Standard SSM Protocol Stop SSM Protocol
Default Value Stop SSM Protocol
Description l The SSM protocol is a scheme used for synchronous management on an SDH network and indicates that the SSM is passed by the lower four bits of the S1 byte and can be exchanged between the nodes. The SSM protocol ensures that the equipment automatically selects the clock source of the highest quality and highest priority, thus preventing mutual clock tracing. l After the standard SSM protocol is started, the NE first performs the protection switching on the clock source according to the clock quality level information provided by the S1 byte. If the quality level of the clock source is the same, the NE then performs the protection switching according to the clock priority table. That is, the NE selects an unlocked clock source that is of the highest quality and highest priority from all the current available clock sources as the clock source to be synchronized and traced by the local station. l If the SSM protocol is stopped, it indicates
A-478
Issue 03 (2011-04-10)
Parameter
Value Range
Default Value
Description that the S1 byte is not used. The NE selects and switches a clock source only according to the sequence specified in the priority table. The clock source of the highest priority is used as the clock source to be traced. l After the SSM protocol is stopped, each NE performs the protection switching on the clock according to the preset priority table of the clock source only when the clock source of a higher priority is lost.
Clock Source
This parameter indicates the clock source that is configured for an NE. In Clock Source Priority, you can set whether to add or delete a clock source.
Issue 03 (2011-04-10)
A-479
Parameter Clock Source ID
Value Range (None) 1 to 15
Default Value (None)
Description l This parameter is valid only when the extended SSM protocol is started. l Clock source IDs are allocated for the following clock sources only: External clock source Internal clock source of the node that accesses the external clock sources Internal clock source of the joint node of a ring and a chain or the joint node of two rings Line clock source that enters the ring when the intra-ring line clock source is configured at the joint node of a ring and a chain or the joint node of two rings
A.9.1.4 Parameter Description: Clock Subnet Setting_Clock Quality

This topic describes the parameters that are related clock quality.
Navigation Path
1. 2. Select the NE from the Object Tree in the NE Explorer. Choose Configuration > Clock > Physical Clock > Clock Subnet Configuration. Click the Received Quality tab.
A-480
Issue 03 (2011-04-10)
Parameters for Clock Source Quality

Parameter Clock Source Value Range Default Value Description This parameter indicates the name of the configured clock source. In Clock Source Priority, you can set whether to add or delete a clock source. This parameter specifies the quality level that is configured for the clock source. This function is required only in a special scenario or in a test. Generally, this parameter need not be set.
Configured Quality
Unknown Synchronization Quality G.811 Clock Signal G.812 Transit Clock Signal G.812 Local Clock Signal G.813 SDH Equipment Timing Source (SETS) Signal Do Not Use For Synchronization Automatic Extraction
Automatic Extraction
Received Quality
This parameter indicates the clock source quality signal received by the NE. The NE extracts the clock source quality signal from the S1 byte of each clock source.
Parameters for Manual Setting of 0 Quality Level

Parameter NE Name Value Range Default Value Description This parameter indicates the name of the NE.
Issue 03 (2011-04-10)
A-481
Parameter Quality Level 0
Value Range Do Not Use For Synchronization G.811 Reference Clock Between G.811 Reference Clock and G.812 Transit Clock G.812 Transit Clock Between G.812 Transit Clock and G.812 Local Clock G.812 Local Clock Between G.812 Local Clock and synchronous equipment timing source (SETS) SETS Clock Between synchronous equipment timing source (SETS) and quality unavailable
Default Value Do Not Use For Synchronization
Description This parameter specifies the clock quality whose level is manually set to zero. l Do Not Use For Synchronization: the notification information in the reverse direction of the selected synchronization clock source to avoid direct mutual locking of adjacent NEs. l G.811 Reference Clock: the clock signal specified in ITU-T G. 811. l Between G.811 Reference Clock and G.812 Transit Clock: lower than the quality level of the clock signal specified in ITU-T G.811 but higher than the quality level of the transit exchange clock signal specified in ITU-T G. 812. l G.812 Transit Clock: the transit exchange clock signal specified in ITU-T G.812. l Between G.812 Transit Clock and G. 812 Local Clock: lower than the quality level of the transit exchange clock signal specified in ITU-T G. 812 but higher than the quality level of the local exchange clock signal specified in ITU-T G.812. l G.812 Local Clock: the local exchange
A-482
Issue 03 (2011-04-10)
Parameter
Value Range
Default Value
Description clock signal specified in ITU-T G.812. l Between G.812 Local Clock and synchronous equipment timing source (SETS): lower than the quality level of the local exchange clock signal specified in ITU-T G.812 but higher than the quality level of the clock signal of the SETS. l SETS Clock: the clock signal of the SETS. l Between synchronous equipment timing source (SETS) and quality unavailable: lower than the quality level of the clock signal of the SETS but higher than the quality level unavailable in the synchronous timing source.
A.9.1.5 Parameter Description: Clock Subset Setting_SSM Output Control

This topic describes the parameters that are related to SSM output control.
Navigation Path
1. 2. Select the NE from the Object Tree in the NE Explorer. Choose Configuration > Clock > Physical Clock > Clock Subnet Configuration. Click the SSM Output tab.
Issue 03 (2011-04-10)
A-483
Parameters
Parameter Line Port Value Range Default Value Description l This parameter indicates the name of the line clock port. l Line Port: indicates the SSM quality information output port of the current available line clock source and the external clock source. This output port can transmit the quality information of the clock source by outputting the S1 byte to the downstream NE. Output S1 Byte Info Enabled Disabled Enabled l Output S1 Byte Info is valid only when the SSM protocol or the extended SSM protocol is started. l Output S1 Byte Info indicates whether the SSM is output at the line port. l When the line port is connected to an NE in the same clock subnet, set Output S1 Byte Info to Enabled. Otherwise, set this parameter to Disabled.
A.9.1.6 Parameter Description: Clock Subset Setting_Clock ID Enabling Status

This topic describes the parameters that are used for enabling the clock ID function.
Navigation Path
1. 2. Select the NE from the Object Tree in the NE Explorer. Choose Configuration > Clock > Physical Clock > Clock Subnet Configuration. Click the Clock ID Output tab.
A-484
Issue 03 (2011-04-10)
Parameters
Parameter Line Port Value Range Default Value Description l This parameter indicates the name of the line clock port. l Line Port: indicates the SSM quality information output port of the current available line clock source and the external clock source. This output port can transmit the quality information of the clock source by outputting the S1 byte to the downstream NE. Output Clock ID Enabled Disabled Enabled l Output Clock ID is valid only when the extended SSM protocol is started. l Output Clock ID indicates whether the clock source ID is output at the line port. l If the line ports are connected to the NEs in the same clock subnet and if the extended SSM protocol is started on the opposite NE, Output Clock ID is set to Enabled. Otherwise, this parameter is set to Disabled.
A.9.1.7 Parameter Description: Clock Source Switching_Clock Source Restoration Parameters

This topic describes the parameters that are related to clock source restoration.
Issue 03 (2011-04-10)
A-485
Navigation Path
1. 2. Select the NE from the Object Tree in the NE Explorer. Choose Configuration > Clock > Clock Source Switching. Click the Clock Source Reversion tab.
Parameters
Parameter NE Name Higher Priority Clock Source Reversion Value Range Auto-Revertive Non-Revertive Default Value Auto-Revertive Description This parameter indicates the name of the NE. l When the quality of a higher-priority clock source degrades, the NE automatically switches the clock source to a lowerpriority clock source. If this parameter is set to Auto-Revertive, the NE automatically switches the clock source to the higherpriority clock source when this higherpriority clock source restores. If this parameter is set to Non-Revertive, the NE does not automatically switch the clock source to the higher-priority clock source when this higher-priority clock source restores. l Correct setting of Clock Source Switching Condition ensures the reliability of the clock source switching. To improve the clock quality, select AutoRevertive. Otherwise, to prevent jitter of the clock, generally, it is recommended that you set this parameter to Non-Revertive.
A-486
Issue 03 (2011-04-10)
Parameter Clock Source WTR Time(min.)
Value Range 0 to 12
Default Value 5
Description l This parameter specifies the duration from the time when the clock source restoration is detected to the time when the clock source switching is triggered. This parameter is used to avoid frequent switching of the clock source due to instability of the clock source state within a short time. l This parameter is valid only when Higher Priority Clock Source Reversion is set to AutoRevertive.
A.9.1.8 Parameter Description: Clock Source Switching_Clock Source Switching

This topic describes the parameters that are related to the switching status of a clock source.
Navigation Path
1. 2. Select the NE from the Object Tree in the NE Explorer. Choose Configuration > Clock > Physical Clock > Clock Source Switching. Click the Clock Source Switching tab.
Parameters
Parameter Clock Source Value Range Default Value Description This parameter indicates the name of the clock source. This parameter indicates whether the clock source is valid.
Current Status
Valid Invalid
Issue 03 (2011-04-10)
A-487
Parameter Lock Status
Value Range Lock Unlock
Default Value -
Description l This parameter specifies the locking status of the clock source in the priority table. l Lock: A clock source in the priority table is in the locked state. The clock source in the locked state cannot be switched. l Unlock: A clock source in the priority table is in the unlocked state. The clock source in the unlocked state can be switched.
Switching Source
This parameter indicates the clock source to be traced by the NE after the switching. This parameter indicates the switching status of the current clock source.
Switching Status
Normal Manual Switching Forced Switching
A.9.1.9 Parameter Description: Clock Source Switching_Clock Source Switching Conditions

This section describes the parameters that are related to the switching conditions of clock sources.
Navigation Path
1. 2. In the NE Explorer, select the NE from the Object Tree and choose Configuration > Clock > Clock Source Switching from the Function Tree. Click the Clock Source Switching Conditions tab.
Parameters
Parameter NE Name Clock Source Value Range Default Value Description Displays the name of the NE. Displays the clock source.
A-488
Issue 03 (2011-04-10)
Parameter AIS Alarm
Value Range Yes No
Default Value No
Description l The default value is recommended. l When this parameter is set to Yes, it indicates that clock source switching occurs if the clock source reports the AIS alarm. l When this parameter is set to No, it indicates that no clock source switching occurs if the clock source reports the AIS alarm.
B1 BER ThresholdCrossing RLOS,RLOF and OOF/ RLOC Alarms
Yes
Yes
The parameter is invalid. This parameter indicates that clock switching occurs when the clock source reports the RLOS, RLOF, OOF, or LOC alarm. The parameter is invalid. The parameter is invalid. l The default value is recommended. l When this parameter is set to Yes, it indicates that clock source switching occurs if the clock source reports the B2-EXC alarm. l When this parameter is set to No, it indicates that no clock source switching occurs if the clock source reports the B2-EXC alarm.
CV Threshold-Crossing CV Threshold B2-EXC Alarm
Yes No
No
A.9.1.10 Parameter Description: Output Phase-Locked Source of the External Clock Source
This topic describes the parameters of the output phase-locked source of the external clock source.
Navigation Path
Select the NE from the Object Tree in the NE Explorer. Choose Configuration > Clock > Physical Clock > Phase-Locked Source Output by External Clock.
Parameters
Parameter 2M Phase-Locked Source Number Value Range External Clock Source 1 External Clock Source 2 Default Value Description This parameter indicates the number of the external clock source output of the NE. l This parameter specifies the mode of the output clock. l This parameter needs to be set according to the requirements of the interconnected equipment. Generally, the output external clock signal is a 2 Mbit/s signal. External Clock Output Timeslot SA4 to SA8 ALL ALL l This parameter is valid only when External Clock Output Mode is set to 2Mbit/s. l This parameter indicates which bit of the TS0 in odd frames of the output clock signal is used to transmit the SSM. l If this parameter is set to ALL, it indicates that all the bits of the TS0 are used to transmit the SSM. l It is recommended that you use the default value.
External Clock Output Mode
2Mbit/s 2MHz
2Mbit/s
A-490
Issue 03 (2011-04-10)
Parameter External Source Output Threshold
Value Range Threshold Disabled Not Inferior to G.813 SETS Signal Not Inferior to G.812 Local Signal Not Inferior to G.812 Transit Clock Signal Not Inferior to G.811 Clock Signal
Default Value Threshold Disabled
Description l This parameter specifies the lowest quality of the output clock. If the clock quality is lower than the value of this parameter, it indicates that the external clock source does not output any clock signal. l If this parameter is set to Threshold Disabled, it indicates that the external clock source always outputs the clock signal. l It is recommended that you use the default value.
2M Phase-Locked Source Failure Condition
No Failure Condition AIS LOF AIS OR LOF
No Failure Condition
l This parameter specifies the failure condition of the 2 Mbit/s phase-locked clock source. l It is recommended that you use the default value.
2M Phase-Locked Source Failure Action
Shut Down Output 2M Output S1 Byte Unavailable Send AIS
Shut Down Output
l This parameter is valid only when 2M PhaseLocked Source Failure Condition is not set to No Failure Condition. l This parameter specifies the operation of the 2 Mbit/s phaselocked loop (PLL) when the 2 Mbit/s phase-locked clock source meets the failure conditions. l It is recommended that you use the default value.
Issue 03 (2011-04-10)
A-491
A.9.1.11 Parameter Description: Clock Synchronization Status

This topic describes the parameters that are related to the clock synchronization status.
Navigation Path
Select the NE from the Object Tree in the NE Explorer. Choose Configuration > Clock > Physical Clock > Clock Synchronization Status.
Parameters
Parameter NE Name NE Clock Mode Value Range Default Value Description This parameter indicates the name of the NE. This parameter indicates the working mode of the NE clock. This parameter indicates the synchronization quality information of the S1 byte. This parameter indicates the clock synchronization source of the S1 byte. This parameter indicates the synchronization source.
S1 Byte Synchronization Quality Info
S1 Byte Clock Synchronous Source Synchronous Source
A-492
Issue 03 (2011-04-10)
Parameter Data Output Method in Holdover Mode
Value Range Normal Data Output Keep the Latest Data
Default Value Normal Data Output
Description l When all the reference timing signals are lost, the slave clock changes to the holdover mode. At this time, the slave clock works based on the latest frequency information stored before the reference timing signals are lost. Then, the frequency of the oscillator drifts slowly to ensure that the offset between the frequency of the slave clock and the reference frequency is very small. As a result, the impact caused by the drift is limited within the specified requirement. l Normal Data Output: The slave clock works based on the latest frequency information stored before the reference timing signals are lost, and the holdover duration depends on the size of the phase-locked clock register on the equipment. The holdover duration can be up to 24 hours. l Keep the Latest Data: The slave clock works in holdover mode all the time based on the latest frequency information stored before the reference timing signals are lost.
A.9.2 CES ACR Clock Parameters

This topic describes CES ACR clock parameters.
A.9.2.1 Parameter Description: ACR Clock Source This topic describes parameters that are related to the ACR clock source. A.9.2.2 Parameter Description: Clock Domain This topic describes parameters that are related to clock domains. A.9.2.3 Parameter Description: Clock Domain_Creation This topic describes the parameters for creating a clock domain.
A.9.2.1 Parameter Description: ACR Clock Source

This topic describes parameters that are related to the ACR clock source.
Navigation Path
In the NE Explorer, select the required NE from the Object Tree and choose Configuration > Clock > ACR Clock from the Function Tree.

Parameter ACR Clock Source CES Service Value Range Default Value Description Identifies the ACR clock domain. This parameter displays or specifies the CES service that the master ACR clock source uses. This parameter displays the CES service from which the current ACR clock source is obtained.
Current CES Service
A.9.2.2 Parameter Description: Clock Domain

This topic describes parameters that are related to clock domains.
Navigation Path
In the NE Explorer, select the required NE from the Object Tree and choose Configuration > Clock > Clock Domain from the Function Tree.

Parameter Clock Domain Value Range Default Value Description Displays the clock domain.
Issue 03 (2011-04-10)
A-494
Parameter Clock Domain Board
Value Range -
Default Value -
Description Displays the board where the clock domain is located. Displays the Smart E1 ports that are bound to a clock domain.
Clock Port
A.9.2.3 Parameter Description: Clock Domain_Creation

This topic describes the parameters for creating a clock domain.
Navigation Path
1. 2. In the NE Explorer, select the required NE from the Object Tree and choose Configuration > Clock > Clock Domain from the Function Tree. Click New.

Parameter Clock Domain Value Range System Clock Domain CES ACR1 Clock Domain CES ACR2 Clock Domain CES ACR3 Clock Domain CES ACR4 Clock Domain Clock Domain Board Displays the board where the clock domain is located. Specifies the board where the Smart E1 port is located. Displays the Smart E1 ports that are not bound to a clock domain. Displays the Smart E1 ports that are bound to a clock domain. Default Value System Clock Domain Description Specifies the clock domain to be bound.
Board
Available Port
Selected Port
Issue 03 (2011-04-10)
A-495
A.9.3 Parameter Description: Auxiliary Ports

This topic describes parameters that are used for configuring an external time port as an RS-485 monitoring port.
Navigation Path
In the NE Explorer, select the NE from the Object Tree and choose Configuration > Auxiliary Interface from the Function Tree.

Parameter Port Value Range Default Value Description Displays the port that functions as the auxiliary port. Specifies the working mode of the auxiliary port. l If the running status of the outdoor cabinet needs to be monitored, set Interface Mode to MON. l For an external time input/output port, set Interface Mode to 1st external time or 2nd external time.
Interface Mode
1st external clock 2nd external clock 1st external time 2nd external time MON Orderwire S1/F1 Commissioning serial port
1st external clock
A.10 Parameters for the Orderwire and Auxiliary Interfaces

This topic describes the parameters that are related to the orderwire and auxiliary interfaces. A.10.1 Parameter Description: Orderwire_General This topic describes the parameters that are used for general orderwire features. A.10.2 Parameter Description: Orderwire_Advanced This topic describes the parameters that are used for advanced orderwire features. A.10.3 Parameter Description: Orderwire_F1 Data Port This topic describes the parameters that are used for F1 data ports. A.10.4 Parameter Description: Orderwire_Broadcast Data Port This topic describes the parameters that are used for broadcast data ports. A.10.5 Parameter Description: Environment Monitoring Interface This topic describes the parameters that are used for environment monitoring interfaces.
A-496
Issue 03 (2011-04-10)
A.10.1 Parameter Description: Orderwire_General

This topic describes the parameters that are used for general orderwire features.
Navigation Path
1. 2. Select the NE from the Object Tree in the NE Explorer. Choose Configuration > Orderwire from the Function Tree. Click the General tab.
Parameters
Parameter Call Waiting Time (s) Value Range 1 to 9 Default Value 9 Description l This parameter indicates the waiting time after the local station dials the number. If the calling station does not receive the response message from the called station within the call waiting time, it automatically removes the communication connection. l If less than 30 nodes exist in the orderwire subnet, it is recommended that you set this parameter to five seconds. If more than 30 nodes exist in the orderwire subnet, it is recommended that you set this parameter to nine seconds. l The call waiting time should be set to the same for all the NEs. Dialling Mode Pulse Dual-Tone Frequency Dual-Tone Frequency This parameter indicates the dialling mode of the orderwire phone.
Issue 03 (2011-04-10)
A-497
Parameter Conference Call
Value Range -
Default Value 888
Description l This parameter indicates the telephone number of the network-wide orderwire conference call. l When an OptiX RTN 980 dials the telephone number 888, the orderwire phones of all the NEs on the orderwire subnet ring. When an OptiX RTN 980 receives the call, the orderwire phones on the other NEs do not ring. In this case, the orderwire point-to-multipoint group call changes to a point-to-point call between two NEs. l The telephone number of the orderwire conference call should be the same for all the nodes on the same subnet. l The telephone number of the orderwire conference call must have the same length as the telephone number of the orderwire phone (phone 1) at the local site.
Phone 1
100 to 99999999
101
l This parameter specifies the orderwire phone number of the local station. An addressing call refers to a point-to-point call. l The length of the orderwire phone number of each NE should be the same. It is recommended that you set the phone number to a three-digit number. l The orderwire phone number of each NE should be unique. It is recommended that the phone numbers are allocated from 101 for the NEs in a sequential order according to the NE IDs. l The orderwire phone number cannot be set to the group call number 888 and cannot start with 888.
Available Orderwire Port Selected Orderwire Port
This parameter indicates the available port for the orderwire phone. This parameter indicates the selected port for the orderwire phone.
A.10.2 Parameter Description: Orderwire_Advanced

This topic describes the parameters that are used for advanced orderwire features.
A-498
Issue 03 (2011-04-10)
Navigation Path
1. 2. Select the NE from the Object Tree in the NE Explorer. Choose Configuration > Orderwire from the Function Tree. Click the Advanced tab.
Parameters for Bytes Occupied by Orderwire Phones

Parameter Orderwire Occupied Bytes Value Range E1 E2 Default Value E1 Description l This parameter specifies the overhead byte that is used to transmit the orderwire signals. l Regardless the parameter value, the radio link always uses a customized overhead byte to transmit the orderwire signals. Hence, this parameter should be set according to the occupied SDH overhead bytes in the ordinary SDH.
A.10.3 Parameter Description: Orderwire_F1 Data Port

This topic describes the parameters that are used for F1 data ports.
Navigation Path
1. 2. Select the NE from the Object Tree in the NE Explorer. Choose Configuration > Orderwire from the Function Tree. Click the F1 Data Port tab.
Parameters
Parameter Available Data Path Value Range Default Value Description l This parameter indicates the available F1 data channel. l Two data channels should be selected for the configuration. Number Data Channel 1 This parameter indicates the number of the F1 data port. l If an SDH optical or electrical line port is selected, this parameter corresponds to the F1 byte in the SDH frame at the line port. l If an IF port is selected, this parameter corresponds to the customized F1 byte in the microwave frame at the IF port.
A-499
Issue 03 (2011-04-10)
Parameter Data Channel 2
Value Range
Default Value
Description l If F1 is selected, this parameter corresponds to the F1/S1 interface on the AUX board. The F1/S1 interface complies with ITU-T G.703 and operates at the rate of 64 kbit/s.
A.10.4 Parameter Description: Orderwire_Broadcast Data Port

This topic describes the parameters that are used for broadcast data ports.
Navigation Path
1. 2. Select the NE from the Object Tree in the NE Explorer. Choose Configuration > Orderwire from the Function Tree. Click the Broadcast Data Port tab.
Parameters for Broadcast Data Ports

Parameter Overhead Byte Value Range SERIAL1 to SERIAL4 Default Value SERIAL1 Description l In the case of an SDH optical/electrical line, the preset overhead byte is used to transmit the asynchronous data services. l In the case of a radio link, a customized serial overhead byte in the microwave frame is used to transmit the asynchronous data services. Broadcast Data Source No Data l When this parameter is set to the SERIAL1, the F1/S1 interface on the corresponding AUX board is used. l When this parameter is set to the SDH optical/electrical line port, the value of Overhead Byte of this port is used. l When this parameter is set to the IF port, the customized Serial byte in the microwave frame of this port is used. Available Broadcast Data Sink This parameter indicates the available broadcast data sink.
A-500
Issue 03 (2011-04-10)
Parameter Selected Broadcast Data Sink
Value Range -
Default Value -
Description l When this parameter is set to the SERIAL1, the F1/S1 interface on the corresponding AUX board is used. l When this parameter is set to the SDH optical/electrical line port, the value of Overhead Byte of this port is used. l When this parameter is set to the IF port, the customized Serial byte in the microwave frame of this port is used.
A.10.5 Parameter Description: Environment Monitoring Interface

This topic describes the parameters that are used for environment monitoring interfaces.
Navigation Path
Select the AUX board from the Object Tree in the NE Explorer. Choose Configuration > Environment Monitor Configuration > Environment Monitor Interface from the Function Tree.
Parameters for the General Attributes

Parameter Operation Object Relay Control Mode Value Range Auto Control Manual Control Default Value Auto Control Description This parameter indicates the operation object. l Auto Control: If an alarm is reported, the alarming relay is started up automatically. Otherwise, the alarming relay is shut down. l Manual Control: Relay Status in Major Alarm(K0) and Relay Status in Critical Alarm(K1) need to be set. Relay Status in Major Alarm(K0) Disabled Enabled Disabled l This parameter indicates that the status of the relay is set manually for major alarms. l Enable: The relay is set to the "ON" status for major alarms. l Disabled: The relay is set to the "OFF" status for major alarms. l This parameter is valid only when Relay Control Mode is set to Manual Control.
Issue 03 (2011-04-10)
A-501
Parameter Relay Status in Critical Alarm(K1)
Description l This parameter indicates that the status of the relay is set manually for critical alarms. l Enable: The relay is set to the enabled status for critical alarms. l Disabled: The relay is set to the disabled status for critical alarms. l This parameter is valid only when Relay Control Mode is set to Manual Control.
Parameters for the Input Relay

Parameter Operation Object Path Name Using Status Value Range Unused Used Alarm Mode Relay Turns Off/ High Level Relay Turns On/ Low Level Relay Turns Off/ High Level Default Value Unused Description This parameter indicates the operation object. This parameter indicates or specifies the name of the channel. This parameter specifies whether the alarm interface of the input relay is used. l If this parameter is set to Relay Turns Off/High Level, an alarm is generated when the relay is turned off. l If this parameter is set to Relay Turns On/Low Level, an alarm is generated when the relay is turned on. l This parameter is valid only when Using Status is set to Used. Alarm Severity Critical Alarm Major Alarm Minor Alarm Warning Alarm Critical Alarm This parameter specifies the severity of the alarm that is generated at the input relay.
Parameters for the Output Relay

Parameter Operation Object Value Range Default Value Description This parameter indicates the operation object.
A-502
Issue 03 (2011-04-10)
Parameter Path Name Use or Not
Value Range Unused Used
Default Value Unused
Description This parameter indicates or specifies the name of the output channel. This parameter specifies whether the alarm interface of the output relay is used.
Parameters for the Temperature Attributes

Parameter Operation Object Monitor Status Temperature Upper Threshold (DEG.C) Temperature Lower Threshold (DEG.C) Value Range Default Value Description This parameter indicates the operation object. This parameter indicates whether the temperature attribute is monitored. This parameter indicates the upper temperature threshold of the board. When the actual temperature is higher than the preset value, an alarm is generated. This parameter indicates the lower temperature threshold of the board. When the actual temperature is lower than the preset value, an alarm is generated.
Parameters for the Alarm Relay

Parameter Alarm Severity Value Range Critical Alarm Major Alarm Minor Alarm Warning Alarm Alarm Output Channel CSK-1 CSK-2 CSK-3 CSK-4 CSK-1 This parameter specifies the channel of the output alarm relay. Default Value Description This parameter indicates the severity of the alarm.
Issue 03 (2011-04-10)
A-503
B Board Loopback Types
B
Board SL1D/SL4D SP3S/SP3D/ML1/MD1
Board Loopback Types
Different service interface boards support different loopback types. Table B-1 Loopback types that service interface boards support Loopback Type l Inloops at optical ports l Outloops at optical ports l Inloops on VC-4 paths l Outloops on VC-4 paths l Inloops at E1 tributary ports l Outloops at E1 tributary ports EM6T/EM6F EG2D l Inloops at the MAC layer of Ethernet ports l Inloops at the PHY layer of Ethernet ports IF1 l Inloops at IF ports l Outloops at IF ports l Inloops at composite ports l Outloops at composite ports IFU2/IFX2 l Inloops and outloops at IF ports l Inloops and outloops at multiplexing ports l Inloops at the MAC layer of IF_ETH ports The EG2D is the logical Ethernet board to which the physical CSHN board is mapped. Remarks The SL4D board described in this section refers to the logical SL4D board to which the physical CSHN board is mapped.
Issue 03 (2011-04-10)
B-1
B Board Loopback Types
Board ISU2/ISX2
Loopback Type l Inloops and outloops at IF ports l Inloops and outloops at multiplexing ports
Remarks -
B-2
Issue 03 (2011-04-10)
C Indicators of Boards
C
Indicators of Boards
Indicator STAT State On (green) On (red) Off
Indicators of Boards
Table C-1 Status explanation for indicators on the CSHN Meaning The board is working properly. The board hardware is faulty. l The board is not working. l The board is not created. l There is no power supplied to the board. PROG Blinks on (green) and off at 100 ms intervals Blinks on (green) and off at 300 ms intervals On (green) Software is being loaded to the board during the power-on or resetting process of the board. The board software is in BIOS boot state during the power-on or resetting process of the board. l When the board is being powered on or being reset, the upper layer software is being initialized. l When the board is running, the software is running normally. Blinks on (red) and off at 100 ms intervals The BOOTROM self-check fails during the power-on or resetting process of the board.
Issue 03 (2011-04-10)
C-1
Indicator
State On (red)
Meaning The memory self-check fails or loading upper layer software fails during the power-on or resetting process of the board. The logic file or upper layer software is lost during the running process of the board. The pluggable storage card is faulty.
SYNC
On (green) On (red)
The clock is working properly. The clock source is lost or a clock switchover occurs. The system is working properly. A critical or major alarm occurs in the system. A minor or remote alarm occurs in the system. There is no power supplied to the system. In a 1+1 protected system, the board works as the active one. In an unprotected system, the board has been activated.
SRV
ACT
On (green)
Off
In a 1+1 protected system, the board works as the standby one. In an unprotected system, the board is not activated.
LOS1
On (red) Off
The first optical port on the line is reporting the R_LOS alarm. The first optical port on the line is free of R_LOS alarms. The second optical port on the line is reporting the R_LOS alarm. The second optical port on the line is free of R_LOS alarms. The connection at the GE1 port is working properly. The connection at the GE1 port is interrupted. Data is being transmitted or received at the GE1 port.
Issue 03 (2011-04-10)
LOS2
On (red) Off
LINK1
On (green) Off
ACT1
On or blinking (yellow)
C-2
Indicator
State Off
Meaning No data is being transmitted or received at the GE1 port. The connection at the GE2 port is working properly. The connection at the GE2 port is interrupted. Data is being transmitted or received at the GE2 port. No data is being transmitted or received at the GE2 port. A critical alarm occurs on the NE. A major alarm occurs on the NE. A minor alarm occurs on the NE.
LINK2
On (green) Off
ACT2
CRIT MAJ MIN
On (red) On (orange) On (yellow)
Table C-2 Status explanation for indicators on the IF1 Indicator STAT State On (green) On (red) Off Meaning The board is working properly. The board hardware is faulty. l The board is not working. l The board is not created. l There is no power supplied to the board. SRV On (green) On (red) On (yellow) LINK On (green) On (red) ODU On (green) The services are normal. A critical or major alarm occurs in the services. A minor or remote alarm occurs in the services. The radio link is normal. The radio link is faulty. The ODU is working properly.
Issue 03 (2011-04-10)
C-3
Indicator
State On (red)
Meaning l The ODU is reporting critical or major alarms. l There is no power supplied to the ODU.
Off
Table C-3 Status explanation for indicators on the IFU2 Indicator STAT State On (green) On (red) Off Meaning The board is working properly. The board hardware is faulty. l The board is not working. l The board is not created. l There is no power supplied to the board. SRV On (green) On (red) On (yellow) LINK On (green) The services are normal. A critical or major alarm occurs in the services. A minor or remote alarm occurs in the services. The radio link is normal.
C-4
Issue 03 (2011-04-10)
Indicator
State On (red)
Meaning The radio link is faulty. The ODU is working properly. l The ODU is reporting critical or major alarms. l There is no power supplied to the ODU.
ODU
On (green) On (red)
The ODU is reporting minor alarms. The antennas are not aligned.
The remote equipment is reporting defects. The remote equipment is free of defects. l In a 1+1 protected system, the board works as the active one. l In an unprotected system, the board has been activated.
Off
Table C-4 Status explanation for indicators on the ISU2 Indicator STAT State On (green) On (red) Off Meaning The board is working properly. The board hardware is faulty. l The board is not working. l The board is not created. l There is no power supplied to the board. SRV On (green) On (red) On (yellow) LINK On (green) The services are normal. A critical or major alarm occurs in the services. A minor or remote alarm occurs in the services. The radio link is normal.
Issue 03 (2011-04-10)
C-5
Indicator
State On (red)
Meaning The radio link is faulty. The ODU is working properly. l The ODU is reporting critical or major alarms. l There is no power supplied to the ODU.
ODU
On (green) On (red)
Off
Table C-5 Status explanation for indicators on the IFX2 Indicator XPIC State On (green) On (red) Off STAT On (green) On (red) Meaning The XPIC input signal is normal. The XPIC input signal is lost. The XPIC function is disabled. The board is working properly. The board hardware is faulty.
C-6
Issue 03 (2011-04-10)
Indicator
State Off
Meaning l The board is not working. l The board is not created. l There is no power supplied to the board.
SRV
On (green) On (red) On (yellow)
The services are normal. A critical or major alarm occurs in the services. A minor or remote alarm occurs in the services. The radio link is normal. The radio link is faulty. The ODU is working properly. l The ODU is reporting critical or major alarms. l There is no power supplied to the ODU.
LINK
On (green) On (red)
ODU
On (green) On (red)
Off
Issue 03 (2011-04-10)
C-7
Table C-6 Status explanation for indicators on the ISX2 Indicator XPIC State On (green) On (red) Off STAT On (green) On (red) Off Meaning The XPIC input signal is normal. The XPIC input signal is lost. The XPIC function is disabled. The board is working properly. The board hardware is faulty. l The board is not working. l The board is not created. l There is no power supplied to the board. SRV On (green) On (red) On (yellow) LINK On (green) On (red) ODU On (green) On (red) The services are normal. A critical or major alarm occurs in the services. A minor or remote alarm occurs in the services. The radio link is normal. The radio link is faulty. The ODU is working properly. l The ODU is reporting critical or major alarms. l There is no power supplied to the ODU. On (yellow) Blinks on (yellow) and off at 300 ms intervals RMT On (yellow) Off The ODU is reporting minor alarms. The antennas are not aligned. The remote equipment is reporting defects. The remote equipment is free of defects.
C-8
Issue 03 (2011-04-10)
Indicator ACT
State On (green)
Meaning l In a 1+1 protected system, the board works as the active one. l In an unprotected system, the board has been activated.
Off
Table C-7 Status explanation for indicators on the EM6T/EM6F Indicator STAT State On (green) On (red) Off Meaning The board is working properly. The board hardware is faulty. l The board is not working. l The board is not created. l There is no power supplied to the board. SRV On (green) On (red) On (yellow) Off PROG Blinks on (green) and off at 100 ms intervals Blinks on (green) and off at 300 ms intervals On (green) The system is working properly. A critical or major alarm occurs in the system. A minor alarm occurs in the system. There is no power supplied to the system. Software is being loaded to the board during the power-on or resetting process of the board. The board software is in BIOS boot state during the power-on or resetting process of the board. l When the board is being powered on or being reset, the upper layer software is being initialized. l When the board is running, the software is running normally. Blinks on (red) and off at 100 ms intervals The BOOTROM self-check fails during the power-on or resetting process of the board.
Issue 03 (2011-04-10)
C-9
Indicator
State On (red)
Meaning The memory self-check fails or loading upper layer software fails during the poweron or resetting process of the board. The logic file or upper layer software is lost during the running process of the board. The pluggable storage card is faulty.
LINK1a
The GE1 port is connected correctly and is not receiving or transmitting data. The GE1 port is receiving or transmitting data. The GE1 port is not connected or is connected incorrectly. The GE2 port is connected correctly and is not receiving or transmitting data. The GE2 port is receiving or transmitting data. The GE2 port is not connected or is connected incorrectly.
LINK2a
NOTE
a: The LINK1 and LINK2 indicators are available only on the EM6F and indicate the states of the corresponding GE ports.
Table C-8 Status explanation for indicators on the SL1D Indicator STAT State On (green) On (red) Off Meaning The board is working properly. The board hardware is faulty. l The board is not working. l The board is not created. l There is no power supplied to the board. SRV On (green) On (red) On (yellow) The services are normal. A critical or major alarm occurs in the services. A minor or remote alarm occurs in the services.
C-10
Issue 03 (2011-04-10)
Indicator
State Off
Meaning The services are not configured. The first optical port of the SL1D is reporting the R_LOS alarm. The first optical port of the SL1D is free of R_LOS alarms. The second optical port of the SL1D is reporting the R_LOS alarm. The second optical port of the SL1D is free of R_LOS alarms.
LOS1
On (red)
Off
LOS2
On (red)
Off
Table C-9 Status explanation for indicators on the SP3S/SP3D Indicator STAT State On (green) On (red) Off Meaning The board is working properly. The board hardware is faulty. l The board is not working. l The board is not created. l There is no power supplied to the board. SRV On (green) On (red) On (yellow) Off The services are normal. A critical or major alarm occurs in the services. A minor or remote alarm occurs in the services. The services are not configured.
Table C-10 Status explanation for indicators on the ML1/MD1 Indicator STAT State On (green) Meaning The board is working properly.
C-11
Issue 03 (2011-04-10)
Indicator
State On (red) Off
Meaning The board hardware is faulty. l The board is not working. l The board is not created. l There is no power supplied to the board.
SRV
The services are normal. A critical or major alarm occurs in the services. A minor or remote alarm occurs in the services. The services are not configured.
Table C-11 Status explanation for indicators on the AUX Indicator STAT State On (green) On (red) Off Meaning The board is working properly. The board hardware is faulty. l The board is not working. l The board is not created. l There is no power supplied to the board. SRV On (green) On (red) On (yellow) Off The system is working properly. A critical or major alarm occurs in the system. A minor or remote alarm occurs in the system. There is no power supplied to the system.
Table C-12 Status explanation for indicators on the PIU Indicator PWR Status On (green) Off ALM
C-12
Description The power supply is normal. There is no power supply. The board is in the initialization state.
Issue 03 (2011-04-10)
On (orange)
Indicator
Status On (red) Off
Description An alarm is reported on the PIU. No alarm occurs.
Table C-13 Status explanation for indicators on the FAN Indicator FAN State On (green) On (red) Off Meaning The fan is working properly. The fan is faulty. The fan is not powered on or is not installed.
Issue 03 (2011-04-10)
C-13
D Weight and Power Consumption of Each Board
Weight and Power Consumption of Each Board
Weight and Power Consumption of Each Board

Table D-1 Weight and power consumption of each board Board CSHN IF1 IFU2 IFX2 ISU2 ISX2 EM6T EM6F SL1D ML1 MD1 SP3S SP3D AUX PIU FAN 1.60 kg 0.72 kg 0.79 kg 0.80 kg 0.60 kg 0.60 kg 0.37 kg 0.40 kg 0.30 kg 0.45 kg 0.50 kg 0.50 kg 0.64 kg 0.27 kg 1.00 kg 1.70 kg Weight (kg) Power Consumption (W) < 36.6 W < 12.0 W < 23.0 W < 33.0 W < 22.0 W < 23.0 W < 10.4 W < 11.3 W < 3.4 W < 7.0 W < 12.2 W < 5.7 W < 9.6 W < 1.3 W < 25.0 W < 15.9 W (room temperature) < 103.5 W (high temperature)
Issue 03 (2011-04-10) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. D-1
D Weight and Power Consumption of Each Board
Board Empty chassis (with only the backplane) 7.10 kg
Weight (kg) -
Power Consumption (W)
D-2
Issue 03 (2011-04-10)
E Glossary
E
Terms are listed in an alphabetical order. E.1 0-9 This section provides the terms starting with numbers. E.2 A-E This section provides the terms starting with letters A to E. E.3 F-J This section provides the terms starting with letters F to J. E.4 K-O This section provides the terms starting with letters K to O. E.5 P-T This section provides the terms starting with letters P to T. E.6 U-Z This section provides the terms starting with letters U to Z.
Glossary
Issue 03 (2011-04-10)
E-1
E Glossary
E.1 0-9
This section provides the terms starting with numbers. 1U The standard electronics industries association (EIA) rack unit (44 mm/1.75 in.)
E.2 A-E
This section provides the terms starting with letters A to E.
A
ABR ACAP access control list ACL adaptive modulation See available bit rate See adjacent channel alternate polarization A list of entities, together with their access rights, which are authorized to have access to a resource. See access control list A technology that is used to automatically adjust the modulation mode according to the channel quality. When the channel quality is favorable, the equipment adopts a highefficiency modulation mode to improve the transmission efficiency and the spectrum utilization of the system. When the channel quality is degraded, the equipment adopts the low-efficiency modulation mode to improve the anti-interference capability of the link that carries high-priority services. See analog to digital converter Network elements that provide access to all or some subset of the constituent signals contained within an STM-N signal. The constituent signals are added to (inserted), and/ or dropped from (extracted) the STM-N signal as it passed through the ADM. Address Resolution Protocol (ARP) is an Internet Protocol used to map IP addresses to MAC addresses. It allows hosts and routers to determine the link layer addresses through ARP requests and ARP responses. The address resolution is a process in which the host converts the target IP address into a target MAC address before transmitting a frame. The basic function of the ARP is to query the MAC address of the target equipment through its IP address. A channel configuration method, which uses two adjacent channels (a horizontal polarization wave and a vertical polarization wave) to transmit two signals. See add/drop multiplexer The information structure which provides adaptation between the higher order path layer and the multiplex section layer. It consists of an information payload (the higher order VC) and an AU pointer which indicates the offset of the payload frame start relative to the multiplex section frame start. See assured forwarding A collection of objects that makes a whole. An aggregation can be a concrete or conceptual set of whole-part relationships among objects.
ADC add/drop multiplexer
Address Resolution Protocol
adjacent channel alternate polarization ADM administrative unit
AF aggregation
E-2
E Glossary
AIS
See alarm indication signal
alarm automatic report When an alarm is generated on the device side, the alarm is reported to the Network Management System (NMS). Then, an alarm panel prompts and the user can view the details of the alarm. alarm cascading Alarm Filtering The shunt-wound output of the alarm signals of several subracks or cabinets. An NE reports the detected alarm to the element management system (EMS). Based on the filter state of the alarm, the EMS determines whether to display or save the alarm information. If the filter state of an alarm is set to Filter, the alarm is not displayed or stored on the EMS. The alarm, however, is still monitored by the NE.
alarm indication signal A code sent downstream in a digital network as an indication that an upstream failure has been detected and alarmed. It is associated with multiple transport layers. alarm suppression A function used not to monitor alarms for a specific object, which may be the networkwide equipment, a specific NE, a specific board and even a specific function module of a specific board. See adaptive modulation An electronic circuit that converts continuous signals to discrete digital numbers. The reverse operation is performed by a digital-to-analog converter (DAC). See automatic protection switching See Address Resolution Protocol One of the four per-hop behaviors (PHB) defined by the Diff-Serv workgroup of IETF. It is suitable for certain key data services that require assured bandwidth and short delay. For traffic within the bandwidth limit, AF assures quality in forwarding. For traffic that exceeds the bandwidth limit, AF degrades the service class and continues to forward the traffic instead of discarding the packets. A protocol for the transmission of a variety of digital signals using uniform 53 byte cells. A transfer mode in which the information is organized into cells; it is asynchronous in the sense that the recurrence of cells depends on the required or instantaneous bit rate. Statistical and deterministic values may also be used to qualify the transfer mode. See Asynchronous Transfer Mode ATM permanent virtual circuit See automatic transmit power control A device used to increase the attenuation of an Optical Fiber Link. Generally used to ensure that the signal at the receive end is not too strong. See administrative unit Capability of a transmission system to detect a failure on a working facility and to switch to a standby facility to recover the traffic. A method of adjusting the transmit power based on fading of the transmit signal detected at the receiver A kind of service categories defined by the ATM forum. ABR only provides possible forwarding service and applies to the connections that does not require the real-time quality. It does not provide any guarantee in terms of cell loss or delay.
AM analog to digital converter APS ARP assured forwarding
Asynchronous Transfer Mode
ATM ATM PVC ATPC attenuator AU automatic protection switching automatic transmit power control available bit rate
Issue 03 (2011-04-10)
E-3
E Glossary
B
backward defect indication bandwidth When detecting a defect, the sink node of an LSP uses backward defect indication (BDI) to inform the upstream end of the LSP of a downstream defect along the return path. A range of transmission frequencies that a transmission line or channel can carry in a network. In fact, it is the difference between the highest and lowest frequencies the transmission line or channel. The greater the bandwidth, the faster the data transfer rate. A logical entity that connects the BTS with the MSC in a GSM network. It interworks with the BTS through the Abis interface, the MSC through the A interface. It provides the following functions: radio resource management, base station management, power control, handover control, and traffic measurement. One BSC controls and manages one or more BTSs in an actual network.
base station controller
base transceiver station A Base Transceiver Station terminates the radio interface. It allows transmission of traffic and signaling across the air interface. The BTS includes the baseband processing, radio equipment, and the antenna. basic input/output system BDI BE BER best effort A firmware stored in the computer mainboard. It contains basic input/output control programs, power-on self test (POST) programs, bootstraps, and system setting information. The BIOS provides hardware setting and control functions for the computer. See backward defect indication See best effort See bit error rate A traditional IP packet transport service. In this service, the diagrams are forwarded following the sequence of the time they reach. All diagrams share the bandwidth of the network and routers. The amount of resource that a diagram can use depends of the time it reaches. BE service does not ensure any improvement in delay time, jitter, packet loss ratio, and high reliability. The binding strap is 12.7 mm wide, with one hook side (made of transparent polypropylene material) and one mat side (made of black nylon material). See basic input/output system See bit interleaved parity An incompatibility between a bit in a transmitted digital signal and the corresponding bit in the received digital signal. Ratio of received bits that contain errors. BER is an important index used to measure the communications quality of a network. A method of error monitoring. With even parity an X-bit code is generated by the transmitting equipment over a specified portion of the signal in such a manner that the first bit of the code provides even parity over the first bit of all X-bit sequences in the covered portion of the signal, the second bit provides even parity over the second bit of all X-bit sequences within the specified portion, etc. Even parity is generated by setting the BIP-X bits so that there is an even number of 1s in each monitored partition of the signal. A monitored partition comprises all bits which are in the same bit position within the X-bit sequences in the covered portion of the signal. The covered portion includes the BIP-X. See bridge protocol data unit
binding strap BIOS BIP bit error bit error rate bit interleaved parity
BPDU
E-4
Issue 03 (2011-04-10)
E Glossary
bridge protocol data unit
The data messages that are exchanged across the switches within an extended LAN that uses a spanning tree protocol (STP) topology. BPDU packets contain information on ports, addresses, priorities and costs and ensure that the data ends up where it was intended to go. BPDU messages are exchanged across bridges to detect loops in a network topology. The loops are then removed by shutting down selected bridges interfaces and placing redundant switch ports in a backup, or blocked, state. A means of delivering information to all members in a network. The broadcast range is determined by the broadcast address. See base station controller See base transceiver station A storage area used for handling data in transit. Buffers are used in internetworking to compensate for differences in processing speed between network devices. Bursts of data can be stored in buffers until they can be handled by slower processing devices. In a program, buffers are created to hold some amount of data from each of the files that will be read or written. In a streaming media application, the program uses buffers to store an advance supply of audio or video data to compensate for momentary delays.
broadcast BSC BTS buffer
C
cable tie cable tray cable trough CAR CBR CBS CC CCC CCDP CCM CE The tape used to bind the cables. N/A N/A See committed access rate See constant bit rate See committed burst size See connectivity check See circuit cross connect See co-channel dual polarization See continuity check message See customer edge
central processing unit The computational and control unit of a computer. The CPU is the device that interprets and executes instructions. The CPU has the ability to fetch, decode, and execute instructions and to transfer information to and from other resources over the computer's main data-transfer path, the bus. CES CF CGMP channel See circuit emulation service See compact flash See Cisco Group Management Protocol A telecommunication path of a specific capacity and/or at a specific speed between two or more locations in a network. The channel can be established through wire, radio (microwave), fiber or a combination of the three. The amount of information transmitted per second in a channel is the information transmission speed, expressed in bits per second. For example, b/s (100 bit/s), kb/s (103 bit/s), Mb/s (106 bit/s), Gb/s (109 bit/s), and Tb/s (1012 bit/s).
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. E-5
Issue 03 (2011-04-10)
E Glossary
CIR circuit cross connect circuit emulation service
See committed information rate An implementation of MPLS L2VPN through the static configuration of labels. A function with which the E1/T1 data can be transmitted through ATM networks. At the transmission end, the interface module packs timeslot data into ATM cells. These ATM cells are sent to the reception end through the ATM network. At the reception end, the interface module re-assigns the data in these ATM cells to E1/T1 timeslots. The CES technology guarantees that the data in E1/T1 timeslots can be recovered to the original sequence at the reception end. N/A See common and internal spanning tree A switch of the highest priority is elected as the root in an MSTP network. The method to keep the time on each node being synchronized with a clock source in a network. A channel configuration method, which uses a horizontal polarization wave and a vertical polarization wave to transmit two signals. The Co-Channel Dual Polarization is twice the transmission capacity of the single polarization. A signal transmission technology that multiplexes widely-spaced optical channels into the same fiber. CWDM widely spaces wavelengths at a spacing of several nm. CWDM does not support optical amplifiers and is applied in short-distance chain networking. A packet whose priority is determined by defined colors. A traffic control method that uses a set of rate limits to be applied to a router interface. CAR is a configurable method by which incoming and outgoing packets can be classified into QoS (Quality of Service) groups, and by which the input or output transmission rate can be defined. committed burst size. A parameter used to define the capacity of token bucket C, that is, the maximum burst IP packet size when the information is transferred at the committed information rate. This parameter must be larger than 0. It is recommended that this parameter should be not less than the maximum length of the IP packet that might be forwarded.
Cisco Group Management Protocol CIST CIST root clock tracing co-channel dual polarization coarse wavelength division multiplexing colored packet committed access rate
committed burst size
committed information The rate at which a frame relay network agrees to transfer information in normal rate conditions. Namely, it is the rate, measured in bit/s, at which the token is transferred to the leaky bucket. common and internal spanning tree compact flash The single spanning tree calculated by STP and RSTP together with the logical continuation of that connectivity by using MST Bridges and regions, calculated by MSTP to ensure that all LANs in the bridged local area network are simply and fully connected. Compact flash (CF) was originally developed as a type of data storage device used in portable electronic devices. For storage, CompactFlash typically uses flash memory in a standardized enclosure. A process that combines multiple virtual containers. The combined capacities can be used a single capacity. The concatenation also keeps the integrity of bit sequence. Ethernet CFM can detect the connectivity between MEPs. The detection is achieved by each MEP transmitting a Continuity Check Message (CCM) periodically.
concatenation connectivity check
E-6
Issue 03 (2011-04-10)
E Glossary
constant bit rate
A kind of service categories defined by the ATM forum. CBR transfers cells based on the constant bandwidth. It is applicable to service connections that depend on precise clocking to ensure undistorted transmission. CCM is used to detect the link status. Used to protect optical fibers. See central processing unit See cyclic redundancy check A technology used in the case of the Co-Channel Dual Polarization (CCDP) to eliminate the cross-connect interference between two polarization waves in the CCDP. A part of BGP/MPLS IP VPN model. It provides interfaces for direct connection to the Service Provider (SP) network. A CE can be a router, switch, or host. See coarse wavelength division multiplexing A procedure used in checking for errors in data transmission. CRC error checking uses a complex calculation to generate a number based on the data transmitted. The sending device performs the calculation before transmission and includes it in the packet that it sends to the receiving device. The receiving device repeats the same calculation after transmission. If both devices obtain the same result, it is assumed that the transmission was error free. The procedure is known as a redundancy check because each transmission includes not only data but extra (redundant) error-checking values.
continuity check message corrugated pipe CPU CRC cross polarization interference cancellation customer edge CWDM cyclic redundancy check
D
data communication network data communications channel A communication network used in a TMN or between TMNs to support the Data Communication Function (DCF). The data channel that uses the D1-D12 bytes in the overhead of an STM-N signal to transmit information on operation, management, maintenance and provision (OAM&P) between NEs. The DCC channels that are composed of bytes D1-D3 is referred to as the 192 kbit/s DCC-R channel. The other DCC channel that are composed of bytes D4-D12 is referred to as the 576 kbit/s DCC-M channel. A kind of PDU which is used in Connectionless Network Protocol, such as IP datagram, UDP datagram. See direct current See DC-return common (with ground) DC-return common (with ground) See DC-return common (with ground) See DC-return isolate (with ground) A power system, in which the BGND of the DC return conductor is short-circuited with the PGND on the output side of the power supply cabinet and also on the line between the output of the power supply cabinet and the electric equipment. A power system, in which the BGND of the DC return conductor is short-circuited with the PGND on the output side of the power supply cabinet and also on the line between the output of the power supply cabinet and the electric equipment.
Datagram DC DC-C DC-C DC-C DC-I DC-return common (with ground) DC-return common (with ground)
Issue 03 (2011-04-10)
E Glossary
DC-return isolate (with A power system, in which the BGND of the DC return conductor is short-circuited with ground) the PGND on the output side of the power supply cabinet and is isolated from the PGND on the line between the output of the power supply cabinet and the electric equipment. DCC DCN DDF DDN DE differentiated services See data communications channel See data communication network See digital distribution frame See digital data network See discard eligible A service architecture that provides the end-to-end QoS function. It consists of a series of functional units implemented at the network nodes, including a small group of perhop forwarding behaviors, packet classification functions, and traffic conditioning functions such as metering, marking, shaping and policing. A marker in the header of each IP packet that prompts network routers to apply differentiated grades of service to various packet streams. It is specified by the DiffServ policy proposed by the IETF (Internet Engineering Task Force). This allows Internet and other IP-based network service providers to offer different levels of service to customers. See differentiated services A high-quality data transport tunnel that combines the digital channel (such as fiber channel, digital microwave channel, or satellite channel) and the cross multiplex technology. A type of equipment used between the transmission equipment and the exchange with transmission rate of 2 to 155 Mbit/s to provide the functions such as cables connection, cable patching, and test of loops that transmitting digital signals. A digital modulation controls the changes in amplitude, phase, and frequency of the carrier based on the changes in the baseband digital signal. In this manner, the information can be transmitted by the carrier. Electrical current whose direction of flow does not reverse. The current may stop or change amplitude, but it always flows in the same direction. A bit in the frame relay header. It indicates the priority of a packet. If a node supports the FR QoS, the rate of the accessed FR packets is controlled. When the packet traffic exceeds the specified traffic, the DE value of the redundant packets is set to 1. In the case of network congestion, the packets with DE value as 1 are discarded at the node. An Internet gateway protocol mainly based on the RIP. The protocol implements a typical dense mode IP multicast solution. The DVMRP protocol uses IGMP to exchange routing datagrams with its neighbors. A DS node that connects one DS domain to a node either in another DS domain or in a domain that is not DS-capable. In the DifferServ mechanism, the DS domain is a domain consisting of a group of network nodes that share the same service provisioning policy and same PHB. It provides point-to-point QoS guarantees for services transmitted over this domain. A DS node located at the center of a DS domain. It is a non-DS boundary node. A DS-compliant node, which is subdivided into DS boundary node and ID interior node. See differentiated services code point
differentiated services code point
DiffServ digital data network
digital distribution frame digital modulation
direct current discard eligible
Distance Vector Multicast Routing Protocol DS boundary node DS domain
DS interior node DS node DSCP
E-8
Issue 03 (2011-04-10)
E Glossary
dual-polarized antenna An antenna intended to radiate or receive simultaneously two independent radio waves orthogonally polarized. DVMRP See Distance Vector Multicast Routing Protocol
E
E-Aggr E-LAN E-Line E-Tree EBS ECC EF electromagnetic compatibility See Ethernet aggregation See Ethernet LAN See Ethernet line See Ethernet-tree See excess burst size See embedded control channel See expedited forwarding Electromagnetic compatibility is the condition which prevails when telecommunications equipment is performing its individually designed function in a common electromagnetic environment without causing or suffering unacceptable degradation due to unintentional electromagnetic interference to or from other equipment in the same environment. Any electromagnetic disturbance that interrupts, obstructs, or otherwise degrades or limits the effective performance of electronics/electrical equipment. The sudden and momentary electric current that flows between two objects at different electrical potentials caused by direct contact or induced by an electrostatic field. A logical channel that uses a data communications channel (DCC) as its physical layer, to enable transmission of operation, administration, and maintenance (OAM) information between NEs. See electromagnetic compatibility See electromagnetic interference A mark on a cable, a subrack, or a cabinet for identification. See Ethernet private line See Ethernet private LAN service A method of avoiding selective fading of frequencies. Equalization can compensate for the changes of amplitude frequency caused by frequency selective fading. See Ethernet ring protection switching See electrostatic discharge Electrostatic discharge jack. A hole in the cabinet or shelf, which connect the shelf or cabinet to the insertion of ESD wrist strap. A technology complemented in LAN. It adopts Carrier Sense Multiple Access/Collision Detection. The speed of an Ethernet interface can be 10 Mbit/s, 100 Mbit/s, 1000 Mbit/ s or 10000 Mbit/s. The Ethernet network features high reliability and easy maintaining. A technology complemented in LAN. It adopts Carrier Sense Multiple Access/Collision Detection. The speed of an Ethernet interface can be 10 Mbit/s, 100 Mbit/s, 1000 Mbit/ s or 10000 Mbit/s. The Ethernet network features high reliability and easy maintaining..
electromagnetic interference electrostatic discharge embedded control channel EMC EMI Engineering label EPL EPLAN equalization ERPS ESD ESD jack Ethernet
Ethernet
Issue 03 (2011-04-10)
E-9
E Glossary
Ethernet aggregation Ethernet LAN Ethernet line Ethernet private LAN service Ethernet private line Ethernet ring protection switching Ethernet virtual private LAN service Ethernet virtual private line Ethernet-tree ETS ETSI European Telecommunications Standards Institute EVPL EVPLAN excess burst size
A type of Ethernet service that is based on a multipoint-to-point EVC (Ethernet virtual connection). A type of Ethernet service that is based on a multipoint-to-multipoint EVC (Ethernet virtual connection). A type of Ethernet service that is based on a point-to-point EVC (Ethernet virtual connection). An Ethernet service type, which carries Ethernet characteristic information over a dedicated bridge, point-to-multipoint connections, provided by SDH, PDH, ATM, or MPLS server layer networks. A type of Ethernet service that is provided with dedicated bandwidth and point-to-point connections on an SDH, PDH, ATM, or MPLS server layer network. protection switching mechanisms for ETH layer Ethernet ring topologies. An Ethernet service type, which carries Ethernet characteristic information over a shared bridge, point-to-multipoint connections, provided by SDH, PDH, ATM, or MPLS server layer networks. An Ethernet service type, which carries Ethernet characteristic information over shared bandwidth, point-to-point connections, provided by SDH, PDH, ATM, or MPLS server layer networks. An Ethernet service type that is based on a Point-to-multipoint Ethernet Virtual Connection. European Telecommunication Standards See European Telecommunications Standards Institute A standards-setting body in Europe. Also the standards body responsible for GSM.
See Ethernet virtual private line See Ethernet virtual private LAN service A parameter related to traffic. In the single rate three color marker (srTCM) mode, the traffic control is achieved by the token buckets C and E. Excess burst size is a parameter used to define the capacity of token bucket E, that is, the maximum burst IP packet size when the information is transferred at the committed information rate. This parameter must be larger than 0. It is recommended that this parameter should be not less than the maximum length of the IP packet that might be forwarded. An operation to check if the protection switching protocol functions normally. The protection switching is not really performed. Connecting a storage system to more disk enclosures through connection cables, thus expanding the capacity of the storage system. The highest order QoS in the Diff-Serv network. EF PHB is suitable for services that demand low packet loss ratio, short delay, and broad bandwidth. In all the cases, EF traffic can guarantee a transmission rate equal to or faster than the set rate. The DSCP value of EF PHB is "101110".
Exercise Switching expansion expedited forwarding
E-10
Issue 03 (2011-04-10)
E Glossary
E.3 F-J
This section provides the terms starting with letters F to J.
F
failure If the fault persists long enough to consider the ability of an item with a required function to be terminated. The item may be considered as having failed; a fault has now been detected. Any network that supports transmission rate of 100Mbits/s. The Fast Ethernet is 10 times faster than 10BaseT, and inherits frame format, MAC addressing scheme, MTU, and so on. Fast Ethernet is extended from the IEEE802.3 standard, and it uses the following three types of transmission media: 100BASE-T4 (4 pairs of phone twisted-pair cables), 100BASE-TX (2 pairs of data twisted-pair cables), and 100BASE-FX (2-core optical fibers). The link pulse that is used to encode information during automatic negotiation. See frequency diversity See forward defect indication See fast Ethernet See forward error correction fast failure detection A kind of fiber used for connections between the subrack and the ODF, and for connections between subracks or inside a subrack. A type of semi-customized circuit used in the Application Specific Integrated Circuit (ASIC) field. It is developed on the basis of the programmable components, such as the PAL, GAL, and EPLD. It not only remedies the defects of customized circuits, but also overcomes the disadvantage of the original programmable components in terms of the limited number of gate arrays. See First in First out A member of the TCP/IP suite of protocols, used to copy files between two computers on the Internet. Both computers must support their respective FTP roles: one must be an FTP client and the other an FTP server. A stack management mechanism. The first saved data is first read and invoked. For normal traffic signals, switches normal traffic signal to the protection section, unless an equal or higher priority switch command is in effect or SF condition exists on the protection section, by issuing a forced switch request for that traffic signal. Forward defect indication (FDI) is generated and traced forward to the sink node of the LSP by the node that first detects defects. It includes fields to indicate the nature of the defect and its location. Its primary purpose is to suppress alarms being raised at affected higher level client LSPs and (in turn) their client layers. A bit error correction technology that adds the correction information to the payload at the transmit end. Based on the correction information, the bit errors generated during transmission are corrected at the receive end.
fast Ethernet
fast link pulse FD FDI FE FEC FFD fiber patch cord field programmable gate array
FIFO File Transfer Protocol
First in First out Forced switch
forward defect indication
forward error correction
Issue 03 (2011-04-10)
E Glossary
Forwarding plane FPGA fragment Fragmentation frame
Also referred to as the data plane. The forwarding plane is connection-oriented, and can be used in Layer 2 networks such as an ATM network. See field programmable gate array Piece of a larger packet that has been broken down to smaller units. Process of breaking a packet into smaller units when transmitting over a network medium that cannot support the original size of the packet. A frame, starting with a header, is a string of bytes with a specified length. Frame length is represented by the sampling circle or the total number of bytes sampled during a circle. A header comprises one or a number of bytes with pre-specified values. In other words, a header is a code segment that reflects the distribution (diagram) of the elements prespecified by the sending and receiving parties. A diversity scheme that enables two or more microwave frequencies with a certain frequency interval are used to transmit/receive the same signal and selection is then performed between the two signals to ease the impact of fading. See File Transfer Protocol A full-duplex, or sometimes double-duplex system, allows communication in both directions, and, unlike half-duplex, allows this to happen simultaneously. Land-line telephone networks are full-duplex, since they allow both callers to speak and be heard at the same time. A good analogy for a full-duplex system would be a two-lane road with one lane for each direction.
frequency diversity
FTP full-duplex
G
gateway network element GE generic framing procedure A network element that is used for communication between the NE application layer and the NM application layer See gigabit Ethernet A framing and encapsulated method which can be applied to any data type. It has been standardized by ITU-T SG15.
generic traffic shaping A traffic control measure that initiatively adjusts the output speed of the traffic. This is to adapt the traffic to network resources that can be provided by the downstream router to avoid packet discarding and congestion. GFP gigabit Ethernet See generic framing procedure GE adopts the IEEE 802.3z. GE is compatible with 10 Mbit/s and 100 Mbit/s Ethernet. It runs at 1000 Mbit/s. Gigabit Ethernet uses a private medium, and it does not support coaxial cables or other cables. It also supports the channels in the bandwidth mode. If Gigabit Ethernet is, however, deployed to be the private bandwidth system with a bridge (switch) or a router as the center, it gives full play to the performance and the bandwidth. In the network structure, Gigabit Ethernet uses full duplex links that are private, causing the length of the links to be sufficient for backbone applications in a building and campus. A global navigation satellite system. It provides reliable positioning, navigation, and timing services to worldwide users. See gateway network element See Global Positioning System
Global Positioning System GNE GPS
E-12
Issue 03 (2011-04-10)
E Glossary
graphical user interface A visual computer environment that represents programs, files, and options with graphical images, such as icons, menus, and dialog boxes, on the screen. GTS GUI guide rail See generic traffic shaping See graphical user interface Components to guide, position, and support plug-in boards.
H
HA half-duplex See high availability A transmitting mode in which a half-duplex system provides for communication in both directions, but only one direction at a time (not simultaneously). Typically, once a party begins receiving a signal, it must wait for the transmitter to stop transmitting, before replying. See high level data link control A type of QoS that can control the traffic of users, and perform the scheduling according to the priority of user services. HQoS has a perfect traffic statistics function, and the administrator can monitor the usage of bandwidth of each service. Hence, the bandwidth can be allocated reasonably through traffic analysis. Typically, a scheme in which two modules operate in active/standby mode to achieve high availability. When the active module fails, the standby module automatically takes over the system functions of the active module. The HDLC protocol is a general purpose protocol which operates at the data link layer of the OSI reference model. Each piece of data is encapsulated in an HDLC frame by adding a trailer and a header. A modulating-demodulating algorithm put forward in 3GPP R5 to meet the requirement for asymmetric uplink and downlink transmission of data services. It enables the maximum downlink data service rate to reach 14.4 Mbit/s without changing the WCDMA network topology. In an SDH network, the higher order path layers provide a server network from the lower order path layers. The priority of the tunnel with respect to holding resources, ranging from 0 (indicates the highest priority) to 7. It is used to determine whether the resources occupied by the tunnel can be preempted by other tunnels. A network connection between two distant nodes. For Internet operation a hop represents a small step on the route from one main computer to another. A mechanism of ensuring device running security. The environment variables and storage information of each running device are synchronized to the standby device. When the faults occur on the running device, the standby device can take over the services in the faulty device in automatic or manual way to ensure the normal running of the entire system. See higher order path See hierarchical quality of service See hot standby See High Speed Downlink Packet Access
HDLC hierarchical quality of service
high availability
high level data link control High Speed Downlink Packet Access
higher order path Hold priority
hop hot standby
HP HQoS HSB HSDPA

Issue 03 (2011-04-10)
E Glossary
HSM HTB hybrid radio
hitless switch mode high tributary bus The hybrid transmission of Native E1 and Native Ethernet signals. Hybrid radio supports the AM function.
I
ICMP IDU IEC IEEE IETF IF IGMP IGMP snooping See Internet Control Message Protocol See indoor unit See International Electrotechnical Commission See Institute of Electrical and Electronics Engineers See Internet Engineering Task Force See intermediate frequency See Internet Group Management Protocol A multicast constraint mechanism running on a layer 2 device. This protocol manages and controls the multicast group by listening to and analyze the Internet Group Management Protocol (IGMP) packet between hosts and layer 3 devices. In this manner, the spread of the multicast data on layer 2 network can be prevented efficiently. See inverse multiplexing over ATM The indoor unit of the split-structured radio equipment. It implements accessing, multiplexing/demultiplexing, and IF processing for services. A method of looping the signals from the cross-connect unit back to the cross-connect unit. A society of engineering and electronics professionals based in the United States but boasting membership from numerous other countries. The IEEE focuses on electrical, electronics, computer engineering, and science-related matters.
IMA indoor unit Inloop Institute of Electrical and Electronics Engineers
intermediate frequency The transitional frequency between the frequencies of a modulated signal and an RF signal. Intermediate System The basic unit in the IS-IS protocol used to transmit routing information and generate routes.
Intermediate System to A protocol used by network devices (routers) to determine the best way to forward Intermediate System datagrams or packets through a packet-based network, a process called routing. routing protocol internal spanning tree International Electrotechnical Commission International Organization for Standardization A segment of CIST in a certain MST region. An IST is a special MSTI whose ID is 0. The International Electrotechnical Commission (IEC) is an international and nongovernmental standards organization dealing with electrical and electronic standards. An international association that works to establish global standards for communications and information exchange. Primary among its accomplishments is the widely accepted ISO/OSI reference model, which defines standards for the interaction of computers connected by communications networks.
E-14
Issue 03 (2011-04-10)
E Glossary
International Telecommunication UnionTelecommunication Standardization Sector Internet Control Message Protocol
An international body that develops worldwide standards for telecommunications technologies. These standards are grouped together in series which are prefixed with a letter indicating the general subject and a number specifying the particular standard. For example, X.25 comes from the "X" series which deals with data networks and open system communications and number "25" deals with packet switched networks. A network-layer (ISO/OSI level 3) Internet protocol that provides error correction and other information relevant to IP packet processing. For example, it can let the IP software on one machine inform another machine about an unreachable destination. See also communications protocol, IP, ISO/OSI reference model, packet (definition 1). A worldwide organization of individuals interested in networking and the Internet. Managed by the Internet Engineering Steering Group (IESG), the IETF is charged with studying technical problems facing the Internet and proposing solutions to the Internet Architecture Board (IAB). The work of the IETF is carried out by various working groups that concentrate on specific topics, such as routing and security. The IETF is the publisher of the specifications that led to the TCP/IP protocol standard. The protocol for managing the membership of Internet Protocol multicast groups among the TCP/IP protocols. It is used by IP hosts and adjacent multicast routers to establish and maintain multicast group memberships. The TCP/IP standard protocol that defines the IP packet as the unit of information sent across an internet and provides the basis for connectionless, best-effort packet delivery service. IP includes the ICMP control and error message protocol as an integral part. The entire protocol suite is often referred to as TCP/IP because TCP and IP are the two fundamental protocols. IP is standardized in RFC 791. A update version of IPv4. It is also called IP Next Generation (IPng). The specifications and standardizations provided by it are consistent with the Internet Engineering Task Force (IETF). IPv6 is also called. It is a new version of the Internet Protocol, designed as the successor to IPv4. The difference between IPv6 and IPv4 is that an IPv4 address has 32 bits while an IPv6 address has 128 bits. A update version of IPv4. It is also called IP Next Generation (IPng). The specifications and standardizations provided by it are consistent with the Internet Engineering Task Force (IETF). IPv6 is also called. It is a new version of the Internet Protocol, designed as the successor to IPv4. The difference between IPv6 and IPv4 is that an IPv4 address has 32 bits while an IPv6 address has 128 bits. The ATM inverse multiplexing technique involves inverse multiplexing and demultiplexing of ATM cells in a cyclical fashion among links grouped to form a higher bandwidth logical link whose rate is approximately the sum of the link rates. This is referred to as an IMA group. See Internet Protocol See Internet protocol version 6 See Internet protocol version 6 See Intermediate System to Intermediate System routing protocol See International Organization for Standardization See internal spanning tree See International Telecommunication Union-Telecommunication Standardization Sector
Internet Engineering Task Force
Internet Group Management Protocol Internet Protocol
Internet protocol version 6
Internet protocol version 6
inverse multiplexing over ATM
IP IPV6 IPv6 IS-IS ISO IST ITU-T
Issue 03 (2011-04-10)
E-15
E Glossary
J
Jitter Short waveform variations caused by vibration, voltage fluctuations, and control system instability.
E.4 K-O
This section provides the terms starting with letters K to O.
L
L2VPN label switched path See Layer 2 virtual private network A sequence of hops (R0...Rn) in which a packet travels from R0 to Rn through label switching mechanisms. A label-switched path can be chosen dynamically, based on normal routing mechanisms, or through configuration. Basic element of MPLS network. All LSRs support the MPLS protocol. The LSR is composed of two parts: control unit and forwarding unit. The former is responsible for allocating the label, selecting the route, creating the label forwarding table, creating and removing the label switch path; the latter forwards the labels according to groups received in the label forwarding table. See Link Aggregation Control Protocol See link aggregation group See local area network See local area network link access protocol-SDH A component that generates directional optical waves of narrow wavelengths. The laser light has better coherence than ordinary light. The fiber system takes the semi-conductor laser as the light source. A data forwarding method. In LAN, a network bridge or 802.3 Ethernet switch transmits and distributes packet data based on the MAC address. Since the MAC address is the second layer of the OSI model, this data forwarding method is called layer 2 switch.
label switching router
LACP LAG LAN LAN LAPS Laser
layer 2 switch
Layer 2 virtual private A virtual private network achieved by Layer 2 switching technologies in the packet network switched (IP/MPLS) network. LB LCAS LCT line rate line rate forwarding Link Aggregation Control Protocol See loopback See link capacity adjustment scheme local craft terminal The maximum packet forwarding capacity on a cable. The value of line rate equals the maximum transmission rate capable on a given type of media. The line rate equals the maximum transmission rate capable on a given type of media. A method of bundling a group of physical interfaces together as a logical interface to increase bandwidth and reliability. For related protocols and standards, refer to IEEE 802.3ad.
E-16
Issue 03 (2011-04-10)
E Glossary
link aggregation group An aggregation that allows one or more links to be aggregated together to form a link aggregation group so that a MAC client can treat the link aggregation group as if it were a single link. link capacity adjustment scheme LCAS in the virtual concatenation source and sink adaptation functions provides a control mechanism to hitlessly increase or decrease the capacity of a link to meet the bandwidth needs of the application. It also provides a means of removing member links that have experienced failure. The LCAS assumes that in cases of capacity initiation, increases or decreases, the construction or destruction of the end-to-end path is the responsibility of the Network and Element Management Systems. Protection provided by the bypass tunnel for the link on the working tunnel. The link is a downstream link adjacent to the PLR. When the PLR fails to provide node protection, the link protection should be provided. linear multiplex section protection A network formed by the computers and workstations within the coverage of a few square kilometers or within a single building. It features high speed and low error rate. Ethernet, FDDI, and Token Ring are three technologies used to implement a LAN. Current LANs are generally based on switched Ethernet or Wi-Fi technology and running at 1,000 Mbit/ s (that is, 1 Gbit/s). A network formed by the computers and workstations within the coverage of a few square kilometers or within a single building. It features high speed and low error rate. Ethernet, FDDI, and Token Ring are three technologies used to implement a LAN. Current LANs are generally based on switched Ethernet or Wi-Fi technology and running at 1,000 Mbit/ s (that is, 1 Gbit/s). When the switching condition is satisfied, this function disables the service from being switched from the working channel to the protection channel. When the service has been switched, the function enables the service to be restored from the protection channel to the working channel. See Loss Of Frame loss of multiframe A troubleshooting technique that returns a transmitted signal to its source so that the signal or message can be analyzed for errors. See loss of pointer See Loss Of Signal A condition at the receiver or a maintenance signal transmitted in the PHY overhead indicating that the receiving equipment has lost frame delineation. This is used to monitor the performance of the PHY layer. Loss of Pointer: A condition at the receiver or a maintenance signal transmitted in the PHY overhead indicating that the receiving equipment has lost the pointer to the start of cell in the payload. This is used to monitor the performance of the PHY layer. Loss of signal (LOS) indicates that there are no transitions occurring in the received signal. lower order path link-state pass through See label switched path
Link Protection
LMSP local area network
local area network
Locked switching
LOF LOM loopback LOP LOS Loss Of Frame
loss of pointer
Loss Of Signal LP LPT LSP
Issue 03 (2011-04-10)
E-17
E Glossary
LSR
See label switching router
M
MA MAC MAC MADM main topology See maintenance association See media access control See media access control multiple add/drop multiplexer A interface that displays the connection relation of NEs on the NMS (screen display). The default client interface of the NMS, a basic component of the human-machine interactive interface. The topology clearly shows the structure of the network, the alarms of different NEs, subnets in the network, the communication status as well as the basic network operation status. All topology management functions are accessed here. That portion of a Service Instance, preferably all of it or as much as possible, the connectivity of which is maintained by CFM. It is also a full mesh of Maintenance Entities. A MEP is an actively managed CFM Entity, associated with a specific DSAP of a Service Instance, which can generate and receive CFM frames and track any responses. It is an end point of a single Maintenance Association, and terminates a separate Maintenance Entity for each of the other MEPs in the same Maintenance Association. The network or the part of the network for which connectivity is managed by CFM. The devices in an MD are managed by a single ISP. Maintenance Point (MP) is one of either a MEP or a MIP. A type of database used for managing the devices in a communications network. It comprises a collection of objects in a (virtual) database used to manage entities (such as routers and switches) in a network. Switches normal traffic signal to the protection section, unless a failure condition exists on other sections (including the protection section) or an equal or higher priority switch command is in effect, by issuing a manual switch request for that normal traffic signal.
maintenance association maintenance association end point
maintenance domain maintenance point management information base manual switch
maximum transmission The largest packet of data that can be transmitted on a network. MTU size varies, unit depending on the network576 bytes on X.25 networks, for example, 1500 bytes on Ethernet, and 17,914 bytes on 16 Mbps Token Ring. Responsibility for determining the size of the MTU lies with the link layer of the network. When packets are transmitted across networks, the path MTU, or PMTU, represents the smallest packet size (the one that all networks can transmit without breaking up the packet) among the networks involved. MBS MCF MD MDI Mean Time Between Failures Mean Time To Repair maximum burst size See message communication function See maintenance domain See medium dependent interface The average time between consecutive failures of a piece of equipment. It is a measure of the reliability of the system. The average time that a device will take to recover from a failure.
E-18
Issue 03 (2011-04-10)
E Glossary
media access control
A protocol at the media access control sublayer. The protocol is at the lower part of the data link layer in the OSI model and is mainly responsible for controlling and connecting the physical media at the physical layer. When transmitting data, the MAC protocol checks whether to be able to transmit data. If the data can be transmitted, certain control information is added to the data, and then the data and the control information are transmitted in a specified format to the physical layer. When receiving data, the MAC protocol checks whether the information is correct and whether the data is transmitted correctly. If the information is correct and the data is transmitted correctly, the control information is removed from the data and then the data is transmitted to the LLC layer. A protocol at the media access control sublayer. The protocol is at the lower part of the data link layer in the OSI model and is mainly responsible for controlling and connecting the physical media at the physical layer. When transmitting data, the MAC protocol checks whether to be able to transmit data. If the data can be transmitted, certain control information is added to the data, and then the data and the control information are transmitted in a specified format to the physical layer. When receiving data, the MAC protocol checks whether the information is correct and whether the data is transmitted correctly. If the information is correct and the data is transmitted correctly, the control information is removed from the data and then the data is transmitted to the LLC layer. The electrical and mechanical interface between the equipment and the media transmission. See maintenance association end point maintenance end point The MCF is composed of a protocol stack that allows exchange of management information with their prs. See management information base maintenance intermediate point A piece of angle plate with holes in it on a rack. It is used to fix network elements or components. See maintenance point maintenance point identification See Multiprotocol Label Switching The MPLS L2VPN provides the Layer 2 VPN service based on an MPLS network. In this case, on a uniform MPLS network, the carrier is able to provide Layer 2 VPNs of different media types, such as ATM, FR, VLAN, Ethernet, and PPP. The MPLS OAM provides continuity check for a single LSP, and provides a set of fault detection tools and fault correct mechanisms for MPLS networks. The MPLS OAM and relevant protection switching components implement the detection function for the CRLSP forwarding plane, and perform the protection switching in 50 ms after a fault occurs. In this way, the impact of a fault can be lowered to the minimum. See multiprotocol label switching traffic engineering
media access control
medium dependent interface MEP MEP message communication function MIB MIP mounting ear MP MPID MPLS MPLS L2VPN
MPLS OAM
MPLS TE
Issue 03 (2011-04-10)
E-19
E Glossary
MPLS TE tunnel
In the case of reroute deployment, or when traffic needs to be transported through multiple trails, multiple LSP tunnels might be used. In traffic engineering, such a group of LSP tunnels are referred to as TE tunnels. An LSP tunnel of this kind has two identifiers. One is the Tunnel ID carried by the SENDER object, and is used to uniquely define the TE tunnel. The other is the LSP ID carried by the SENDER_TEMPLATE or FILTER_SPEC object. See multiplex section See multiplex section protection See Multiple Spanning Tree Protocol See Mean Time Between Failures See Mean Time To Repair See maximum transmission unit A process of transmitting packets of data from one source to many destinations. The destination address of the multicast packet uses Class D address, that is, the IP address ranges from 224.0.0.0 to 239.255.255.255. Each multicast address represents a multicast group rather than a host. Multiple spanning tree protocol. The MSTP can be used in a loop network. Using an algorithm, the MSTP blocks redundant paths so that the loop network can be trimmed as a tree network. In this case, the proliferation and endless cycling of packets is avoided in the loop network. The protocol that introduces the mapping between VLANs and multiple spanning trees. This solves the problem that data cannot be normally forwarded in a VLAN because in STP/RSTP, only one spanning tree corresponds to all the VLANs. The trail between and including two multiplex section trail termination functions. A function, which is performed to provide capability for switching a signal between and including two multiplex section termination (MST) functions, from a "working" to a "protection" channel. A technology that uses short tags of fixed length to encapsulate packets in different link layers, and provides connection-oriented switching for the network layer on the basis of IP routing and control protocols. It improves the cost performance and expandability of networks, and is beneficial to routing. N/A
MS MSP MSTP MTBF MTTR MTU Multicast
Multiple Spanning Tree Protocol
multiplex section multiplex section protection Multiprotocol Label Switching
multiprotocol label switching traffic engineering
N
N+1 protection NE NE Explorer A radio link protection system composed of N working channels and one protection channel. See network element The main operation interface, of the NMS, which is used to manage the telecommunication equipment. In the NE Explorer, the user can query, manage and maintain the NE, boards, and ports on a per-NE basis.
E-20
Issue 03 (2011-04-10)
E Glossary
network element
A network element (NE) contains both the hardware and the software running on it. One NE is at least equipped with one system control and communication(SCC) board which manages and monitors the entire network element. The NE software runs on the SCC board.
Network Management A system in charge of the operation, administration, and maintenance of a network. System network service access A network address defined by ISO, through which entities on the network layer can point access OSI network services. network to network interface next hop NLP NMS NNI node An internal interface within a network linking two or more elements. The next router to which a packet is sent from any given router as it traverses a network on its journey to its final destination. normal link pulse See Network Management System See network to network interface A node stands for a managed device in the network. For a device with a single frame, one node stands for one device. For a device with multiple frames, one node stands for one frame of the device. Therefore, a node does not always mean a device. A parameter of the FRR protection. It indicates that the bypass tunnel should be able to protect the downstream node that is involved in the working tunnel and adjacent to the PLR. The node cannot be a merge point, and the bypass tunnel should also be able to protect the downstream link that is involved in the working tunnel and adjacent to the PLR. A network element whose communication with the NM application layer must be transferred by the gateway network element application layer. See non-gateway network element See network service access point not stop forwarding
Node Protection
non-gateway network element non-GNE NSAP NSF
O
OAM ODF ODU OM One-to-One Backup See operation, administration and maintenance See optical distribution frame See outdoor unit Operation and maintenance A local repair method in which a backup tunnel is separately created for each protected tunnel at a PLR.
open shortest path first A link-state, hierarchical interior gateway protocol (IGP) for network routing. Dijkstra's algorithm is used to calculate the shortest path tree. It uses cost as its routing metric. A link state database is constructed of the network topology which is identical on all routers in the area.
Issue 03 (2011-04-10)
E-21
E Glossary
Open Systems Interconnection
A framework of ISO standards for communication between different systems made by different vendors, in which the communications process is organized into seven different categories that are placed in a layered sequence based on their relationship to the user. Each layer uses the layer immediately below it and provides a service to the layer above. Layers 7 through 4 deal with end-to-end communication between the message source and destination, and layers 3 through 1 deal with network functions. A group of network support functions that monitor and sustain segment operation, activities that are concerned with, but not limited to, failure detection, notification, location, and repairs that are intended to eliminate faults and keep a segment in an operational state and support activities required to provide the services of a subscriber access network to users/subscribers. A device installed at the end of a fiber, optical source or receive unit. It is used to couple the optical wave to the fiber when connected to another device of the same type. A connector can either connect two fiber ends or connect a fiber end and an optical source (or a detector).+ A frame which is used to transfer and spool fibers. A channel that provides voice communication between operation engineers or maintenance engineers of different stations. See Open Systems Interconnection See open shortest path first The outdoor unit of the split-structured radio equipment. It implements frequency conversion and amplification for RF signals. A method of looping back the input signals received at a port to an output port without changing the structure of the signals. The ranger of optical energy level of output signals.
operation, administration and maintenance
optic fiber connector
optical distribution frame orderwire OSI OSPF outdoor unit Outloop Output optical power
E.5 P-T
This section provides the terms starting with letters P to T.
P
packet switched network Packing case Path A telecommunication network which works in packet switching mode. A case which is used for packing the board or subrack. A performance resource object defined in the network management system. The left end of a path is a device node whose port needs to be specified and the right end of a path is a certain IP address which can be configured by the user. By defining a path in the network management system, a user can test the performance of a network path between a device port and an IP address. The tested performance may be the path delay, packet loss ratio or other aspects. See peak burst size See printed circuit board
PBS PCB
E-22
Issue 03 (2011-04-10)
E Glossary
PCI bus PDH PDU PE peak burst size
PCI (Peripheral Component Interconnect) bus. A high performance bus, 32-bit or 64-bit for interconnecting chips, expansion boards, and processor/memory subsystems. See plesiochronous digital hierarchy See protocol data unit See provider edge A parameter used to define the capacity of token bucket P, that is, the maximum burst IP packet size when the information is transferred at the peak information rate. This parameter must be larger than 0. It is recommended that this parameter should be not less than the maximum length of the IP packet that might be forwarded. A traffic parameter, expressed in bit/s, whose value should be not less than the committed information rate. Penultimate Hop Popping (PHP) is a function performed by certain routers in an MPLS enabled network. It refers to the process whereby the outermost label of an MPLS tagged packet is removed by a Label Switched Router (LSR) before the packet is passed to an adjacent Label Edge Router (LER). IETF Diff-Serv workgroup defines forwarding behaviors of network nodes as per-hop behaviors (PHB), such as, traffic scheduling and policing. A device in the network should select the proper PHB behaviors, based on the value of DSCP. At present, the IETF defines four types of PHB. They are class selector (CS), expedited forwarding (EF), assured forwarding (AF), and best-effort (BE). See per-hop behavior See penultimate hop popping See peak information rate A multiplexing scheme of bit stuffing and byte interleaving. It multiplexes the minimum rate 64 kit/s into the 2 Mbit/s, 34 Mbit/s, 140 Mbit/s, and 565 Mbit/s rates.
peak information rate penultimate hop popping
per-hop behavior
PHB PHP PIR plesiochronous digital hierarchy
Point-to-Point Protocol A protocol on the data link layer, provides point-to-point transmission and encapsulates data packets on the network layer. It is located in layer 2 of the IP protocol stack. polarization A kind of electromagnetic wave, the direction of whose electric field vector is fixed or rotates regularly. Specifically, if the electric field vector of the electromagnetic wave is perpendicular to the plane of horizon, this electromagnetic wave is called vertically polarized wave; if the electric field vector of the electromagnetic wave is parallel to the plane of horizon, this electromagnetic wave is called horizontal polarized wave; if the tip of the electric field vector, at a fixed point in space, describes a circle, this electromagnetic wave is called circularly polarized wave. A direct current power distribution box at the upper part of a cabinet, which supplies power for the subracks in the cabinet. See Point-to-Point Protocol See priority queue See pseudo random binary sequence primary reference clock A board used to mechanically support and electrically connect electronic components using conductive pathways, tracks, or traces, etched from copper sheets laminated onto a non-conductive substrate.
Power box PPP PQ PRBS PRC printed circuit board
Issue 03 (2011-04-10)
E-23
E Glossary
priority queue
An abstract data type in computer programming that supports the following three operations: 1) InsertWithPriority: add an element to the queue with an associated priority 2) GetNext: remove the element from the queue that has the highest priority, and return it (also known as "PopElement(Off)", or "GetMinimum") 3) PeekAtNext (optional): look at the element with highest priority without removing it A cable which connects the equipment and the protection grounding bar. Usually, one half of the cable is yellow; while the other half is green. A specific path that is part of a protection group and is labeled protection. It is a data packet at the network layer of the OSI model. A device that is located in the backbone network of the MPLS VPN structure. A PE is responsible for VPN user management, establishment of LSPs between PEs, and exchange of routing information between sites of the same VPN. During the process, a PE performs the mapping and forwarding of packets between the private network and the public channel. A PE can be a UPE, an SPE, or an NPE.
protection ground cable Protection path protocol data unit provider edge
pseudo random binary A sequence that is random in a sense that the value of an element is independent of the sequence values of any of the other elements, similar to real random sequences. pseudo wire An emulated connection between two PEs for transmitting frames. The PW is established and maintained by PEs through signaling protocols. The status information of a PW is maintained by the two end PEs of a PW.
pseudo wire emulation A type of end-to-end Layer 2 transmitting technology. It emulates the essential attributes edge-to-edge of a telecommunication service such as ATM, FR or Ethernet in a Packet Switched Network (PSN). PWE3 also emulates the essential attributes of low speed Time Division Multiplexed (TDM) circuit and SONET/SDH. The simulation approximates to the real situation. PSN PTN PW PWE3 See packet switched network packet transport network See pseudo wire See pseudo wire emulation edge-to-edge
Q
QinQ A layer 2 tunnel protocol based on IEEE 802.1Q encapsulation. It encapsulates the tag of the user's private virtual local area network (VLAN) into the tag of the public VLAN. The packet carries two layers of tags to travel through the backbone network of the carrier. In this manner, the layer 2 virtual private network (VPN) is provided for the user. See quality of service See quadrature phase shift keying
QoS QPSK
quadrature phase shift A modulation method of data transmission through the conversion or modulation and keying the phase determination of the reference signals (carrier). It is also called the fourth period or 4-phase PSK or 4-PSK. QPSK uses four dots in the star diagram. The four dots are evenly distributed on a circle. On these phases, each QPSK character can perform twobit coding and display the codes in Gray code on graph with the minimum BER.
E-24
Issue 03 (2011-04-10)
E Glossary
quality of service
A commonly-used performance indicator of a telecommunication system or channel. Depending on the specific system and service, it may relate to jitter, delay, packet loss ratio, bit error ratio, and signal-to-noise ratio. It functions to measure the quality of the transmission system and the effectiveness of the services, as well as the capability of a service provider to meet the demands of users.
R
radio frequency A type of electric current in the wireless network using AC antennas to create an electromagnetic field. It is the abbreviation of high-frequency AC electromagnetic wave. The AC with the frequency lower than 1 kHz is called low-frequency current. The AC with frequency higher than 10 kHz is called high-frequency current. RF can be classified into such high-frequency current. A device in the RNS which is in charge of controlling the use and the integrity of the radio resources.
radio network controller
random early detection A packet loss algorithm used in congestion avoidance. It discards the packet according to the specified higher limit and lower limit of a queue so that global TCP synchronization resulted in traditional Tail-Drop can be prevented. Rapid Spanning Tree Protocol RDI received signal level Received Signal Strength Indicator Receiver Sensitivity RED Reed-Solomon-Code An evolution of the Spanning Tree Protocol, providing for faster spanning tree convergence after a topology change. The RSTP protocol is backward compatible with the STP protocol. See remote defect indication The signal level at a receiver input terminal. The received wide band power, including thermal noise and noise generated in the receiver, within the bandwidth defined by the receiver pulse shaping filter, for TDD within a specified timeslot. The reference point for the measurement shall be the antenna Receiver sensitivity is defined as the minimum acceptable value of average received power at point R to achieve a 1 x 10-12 BER (The FEC is open). See random early detection A forward error correction code located before interleaving that enables correction of errors induced by burst noise. Widely used error correction scheme to fight transmission errors at the receiver site. See remote error indication A signal transmitted at the first opportunity in the outgoing direction when a terminal detects specific defects in the incoming signal.
REI remote defect indication
remote error indication A remote error indication (REI) is sent upstream to signal an error condition. There are two types of REI alarms: Remote error indication line (REI-L) is sent to the upstream LTE when errors are detected in the B2 byte. Remote error indication path (REI-P) is sent to the upstream PTE when errors are detected in the B3 byte. Request For Comments A document in which a standard, a protocol, or other information pertaining to the operation of the Internet is published. The RFC is actually issued, under the control of the IAB, after discussion and serves as the standard. RFCs can be obtained from sources such as InterNIC.
Issue 03 (2011-04-10)
E-25
E Glossary
Resource Reservation Protocol
The Resource Reservation Protocol (RSVP) is designed for Integrated Service and is used to reserve resources on every node along a path. RSVP operates on the transport layer; however, RSVP does not transport application data. RSVP is a network control protocol like Internet Control Message Protocol (ICMP). A traffic control method. In telecommunication, when detecting that the transmit end transmits a large volume of traffic, the receive end sends signals to ask the transmit end to slow down the transmission rate. See radio frequency See Request For Comments See Routing Information Protocol remote network monitoring remote network monitoring See radio network controller An alarm directly caused by anomaly events or faults in the network. Some lower-level alarms always accompany a root alarm. A route is the path that network traffic takes from its source to its destination. In a TCP/ IP network, each IP packet is routed independently. Routes can change dynamically. A mapping table that stores the relationship between the original address, destination address, short message (SM) protocol type and account. The SMSC delivers an SM to the designated account according to the information set in the route table. A simple routing protocol that is part of the TCP/IP protocol suite. It determines a route based on the smallest hop count between source and destination. RIP is a distance vector protocol that routinely broadcasts routing information to its neighboring routers and is known to waste bandwidth. A table that stores and updates the locations (addresses) of network devices. Routers regularly share routing table information to be up to date. A router relies on the destination address and on the information in the table that gives the possible routes--in hops or in number of jumps--between itself, intervening routers, and the destination. Routing tables are updated frequently as new information is available. See received signal level See Received Signal Strength Indicator See Rapid Spanning Tree Protocol See Resource Reservation Protocol radio transmission node
reverse pressure
RF RFC RIP RMON RMON RNC Root alarm route route table
Routing Information Protocol
routing table
RSL RSSI RSTP RSVP RTN
S
SD SDH SEMF See space diversity See synchronous digital hierarchy See synchronous equipment management function
E-26
Issue 03 (2011-04-10)
E Glossary
service level agreement A service contract between a customer and a service provider that specifies the forwarding service a customer should receive. A customer may be a user organization (source domain) or another differentiated services domain (upstream domain). A SLA may include traffic conditioning rules which constitute a traffic conditioning agreement as a whole or partially. Service Level Agreement * A management-documented agreement that defines the relationship between service provider and its customer. It also provides specific, quantifiable information about measuring and evaluating the delivery of services. The SLA details the specific operating and support requirements for each service provided. It protects the service provider and customer and allows the service provider to provide evidence that it has achieved the documented target measure. See severely errored second The priority of the tunnel with respect to obtaining resources, ranging from 0 (indicates the highest priority) to 7. It is used to determine whether the tunnel can preempt the resources required by other backup tunnels.
SES Setup Priority
severely errored second A one-second period which has a bit error ratio X 10-3 or at least one defect. Time interval of one second during which a given digital signal is received with an error ratio greater than 1 X 10 -3 (Rec. ITU R F. 592 needs correction). SF SFP side trough signal cable signal fail signal to noise ratio See signal fail See small form-factor pluggable The trough on the side of the cable rack, which is used to place nuts so as to fix the cabinet. Common signal cables cover the E1 cable, network cable, and other non-subscriber signal cable. A signal that indicates the associated data has failed in the sense that a near-end defect condition (non-degrade defect) is active. The ratio of the amplitude of the desired signal to the amplitude of noise signals at a given point in time. SNR is expressed as 10 times the logarithm of the power ratio and is usually expressed in dB (Decibel). A network management protocol of TCP/IP. It enables remote users to view and modify the management information of a network element. This protocol ensures the transmission of management information between any two points. The polling mechanism is adopted to provide basic function sets. According to SNMP, agents, which can be hardware as well as software, can monitor the activities of various devices on the network and report these activities to the network console workstation. Control information about each device is maintained by a management information block. Designating or pertaining to a method of operation in which information can be transmitted in either direction, but not simultaneously, between two points. See service level agreement See Service Level Agreement * To divide data into the information units proper for transmission. A specification for a new generation of optical modular transceivers. See subnetwork connection
Simple Network Management Protocol
simplex SLA SLA* Slicing small form-factor pluggable SNC
Issue 03 (2011-04-10)
E-27
E Glossary
SNCP SNMP SNR space diversity
See subnetwork connection protection See Simple Network Management Protocol See signal to noise ratio A diversity scheme that enables two or more antennas separated by a specific distance to transmit/receive the same signal and selection is then performed between the two signals to ease the impact of fading. Currently, only receive SD is used.
Spanning Tree Protocol STP is a protocol that is used in the LAN to remove the loop. STP applies to the redundant network to block some undesirable redundant paths through certain algorithms and prune a loop network into a loop-free tree network. SSM static virtual circuit See Synchronization Status Message Static virtual circuit. A static implementation of MPLS L2VPN that transfers L2VPN information by manual configuration of VC labels, instead of by a signaling protocol.
Statistical multiplexing A multiplexing technique whereby information from multiple logical channels can be transmitted across a single physical channel. It dynamically allocates bandwidth only to active input channels, to make better use of available bandwidth and allow more devices to be connected than with other multiplexing techniques. Compare with TDM. STM STM-1 STM-N STP sub-network See Synchronous Transport Module See synchronous transport mode-1 See synchronous transport module of order N See Spanning Tree Protocol Sub-network is the logical entity in the transmission network and comprises a group of network management objects. The network that consists of a group of interconnected or correlated NEs, according to different functions. For example, protection subnet, clock subnet and so on. A sub-network can contain NEs and other sub-networks. Generally, a sub-network is used to contain the equipments which are located in adjacent regions and closely related with one another, and it is indicated with a sub-network icon on a topological view. The U2000 supports multilevels of sub-networks. A sub-network planning can better the organization of a network view. On the one hand, the view space can be saved, on the other hand, it helps the network management personnel focus on the equipments under their management. The technique used by the IP protocol to determine which network segment packets are destined for. The subnet mask is a binary pattern that is stored in the client machine, server or router and is matched with the IP address.
subnet mask
subnetwork connection A "transport entity" that transfers information across a subnetwork, it is formed by the association of "ports" on the boundary of the subnetwork. subnetwork connection A function, which allows a working subnetwork connection to be replaced by a protection protection subnetwork connection if the working subnetwork connection fails, or if its performance falls below a required level. SVC switch See static virtual circuit To filter, forward frames based on label or the destination address of each frame. This behavior operates at the data link layer of the OSI model.
E-28
Issue 03 (2011-04-10)
E Glossary
Synchronization Status A message that carries quality levels of timing signals on a synchronous timing link. Message Nodes on an SDH network and a synchronization network acquire upstream clock information through this message. Then the nodes can perform proper operations on their clocks, such as tracing, switching, or converting to holdoff), and forward the synchronization information to downstream nodes. synchronous digital hierarchy A transmission scheme that follows ITU-T G.707, G.708, and G.709. It defines the transmission features of digital signals such as frame structure, multiplexing mode, transmission rate level, and interface code. SDH is an important part of ISDN and BISDN. It interleaves the bytes of low-speed signals to multiplex the signals to high-speed counterparts, and the line coding of scrambling is used only for signals. SDH is suitable for the fiber communication system with high speed and a large capacity since it uses synchronous multiplexing and flexible mapping structure. The SEMF converts performance data and implementation specific hardware alarms into object-oriented messages for transmission over DCCs and/or a Q interface.
synchronous equipment management function
synchronous transport Synchronous Transfer Mode at 155 Mbit/s. mode-1 Synchronous Transport Module An STM is the information structure used to support section layer connections in the SDH. It consists of information payload and Section Overhead (SOH) information fields organized in a block frame structure which repeats every 125. The information is suitably conditioned for serial transmission on the selected media at a rate which is synchronized to the network. A basic STM is defined at 155 520 kbit/s. This is termed STM-1. Higher capacity STMs are formed at rates equivalent to N times this basic rate. STM capacities for N = 4, N = 16 and N = 64 are defined; higher values are under consideration.
synchronous transport A STM-N is the information structure used to support section layer connections in SDH. See ITU-T Recommendation G. 707 for STM modules of order 1, 4, 16 and 64. module of order N
T
tail drop A type of QoS. When a queue within a network router reaches its maximum length, packet drops can occur. When a packet drop occurs, connection-based protocols such as TCP slow down their transmission rates in an attempt to let queued packets be serviced, thereby letting the queue empty. This is also known as tail drop because packets are dropped from the input end (tail) of the queue. A congestion management mechanism, in which packets arrive later are discarded when the queue is full. This policy of discarding packets may result in network-wide synchronization due to the TCP slow startup mechanism. tag control information See Transmission Control Protocol See time division multiplexing See traffic engineering See traffic engineering database
Tail drop
TCI TCP TDM TE TEDB
Telecommunication A protocol model defined by ITU-T for managing open systems in a communications Management Network network. An architecture for management, including planning, provisioning, installation, maintenance, operation and administration of telecommunications equipment, networks and services.
Issue 03 (2011-04-10) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. E-29
E Glossary
TIM time division multiplexing
trace identifier mismatch A multiplexing technology. TDM divides the sampling cycle of a channel into time slots (TSn, n=0, 1, 2, 3), and the sampling value codes of multiple signals engross time slots in a certain order, forming multiple multiplexing digital signals to be transmitted over one channel. A technique used in best-effort delivery systems to prevent packets that loop endlessly. The TTL is set by the sender to the maximum time the packet is allowed to be in the network. Each router in the network decrements the TTL field when the packet arrives, and discards any packet if the TTL counter reaches zero. See Telecommunication Management Network A ToS sub-field (the bits 0 to 2 in the ToS field) in the ToS field of the IP packet header. See tributary protection switch A technology that is used to dynamically monitor the traffic of the network and the load of the network elements, to adjust in real time the parameters such as traffic management parameters, route parameters and resource restriction parameters, and to optimize the utilization of network resources. The purpose is to prevent the congestion caused by unbalanced loads. TEDB is the abbreviation of the traffic engineering database. MPLS TE needs to know the features of the dynamic TE of every links by expanding the current IGP, which uses the link state algorithm, such as OSPF and IS-IS. The expanded OSPF and IS-IS contain some TE features, such as the link bandwidth and color. The maximum reserved bandwidth of the link and the unreserved bandwidth of every link with priority are rather important. Every router collects the information about TE of every links in its area and generates TE DataBase. TEDB is the base of forming the dynamic TE path in the MPLS TE network. It is a way of controlling the network traffic from a computer to optimize or guarantee the performance and minimize the delay. It actively adjusts the output speed of traffic in the scenario that the traffic matches network resources provided by the lower layer devices, avoiding packet loss and congestion. The protocol within TCP/IP that governs the breakup of data messages into packets to be sent via IP (Internet Protocol), and the reassembly and verification of the complete messages from packets received by IP. A connection-oriented, reliable protocol (reliable in the sense of ensuring error-free delivery), TCP corresponds to the transport layer in the ISO/OSI reference model. Tributary protection switching, a function provided by the equipment, is intended to protect N tributary processing boards through a standby tributary processing board. See two rate three color marker See time to live tributary unit A channel on the packet switching network that transmits service traffic between PEs. In VPN, a tunnel is an information transmission channel between two entities. The tunnel ensures secure and transparent transmission of VPN information. In most cases, a tunnel is an MPLS tunnel.
time to live
TMN ToS priority TPS traffic engineering
traffic engineering database
Traffic shaping
Transmission Control Protocol
tributary protection switch trTCM TTL TU Tunnel
E-30
Issue 03 (2011-04-10)
E Glossary
two rate three color marker
The trTCM meters an IP packet stream and marks its packets based on two rates, Peak Information Rate (PIR) and Committed Information Rate (CIR), and their associated burst sizes to be either green, yellow, or red. A packet is marked red if it exceeds the PIR. Otherwise it is marked either yellow or green depending on whether it exceeds or doesn't exceed the CIR.
E.6 U-Z
This section provides the terms starting with letters U to Z.
U
U-VLAN UAS UBR UDP underfloor cabling UNI unicast unspecified bit rate A VLAN attribute indicating that the current VLAN is a user VLAN of an M-VLAN. Multicast services are copied from the M-VLAN to the user VLAN. unavailable second See unspecified bit rate See User Datagram Protocol The cables connected cabinets and other devices are routed underfloor. See user network interface The process of sending data from a source to a single recipient. No commitment to transmission. No feedback to congestion. This type of service is ideal for the transmission of IP datagrams. In case of congestion, UBR cells are discarded, and no feedback or request for slowing down the data rate is delivered to the sender. An operation to report some or all configuration data of an NE to the NMS(Network Management system). The configuration data then covers the configuration data stored at the NMS side. A TCP/IP standard protocol that allows an application program on one device to send a datagram to an application program on another. User Datagram Protocol (UDP) uses IP to deliver datagrams. UDP provides application programs with the unreliable connectionless packet delivery service. Thus, UDP messages can be lost, duplicated, delayed, or delivered out of order. UDP is used to try to transmit the data packet, that is, the destination device does not actively confirm whether the correct data packet is received.
upload
User Datagram Protocol
user network interface The interface between user equipment and private or public network equipment (for example, ATM switches).
V
V-UNI variable bit rate See virtual user-network interface One of the traffic classes used by ATM (Asynchronous Transfer Mode). Unlike a permanent CBR (Constant Bit Rate) channel, a VBR data stream varies in bandwidth and is better suited to non real time transfers than to real-time streams such as voice calls. See variable bit rate See virtual container
VBR VC
Issue 03 (2011-04-10)
E Glossary
VCC VCG VCI VCTRUNK virtual channel connection virtual channel identifier virtual concatenation group virtual container
See virtual channel connection See virtual concatenation group See virtual channel identifier A virtual concatenation group applied in data service mapping, also called the internal port of a data service processing board The VC logical trail that carries data between two end points in an ATM network. A logical grouping of multiple virtual channel connections into one virtual connection. A 16-bit field in the header of an ATM cell. The VCI, together with the VPI, is used to identify the next destination of a cell as it passes through a series of ATM switches on its way to its destination. A group of co-located member trail termination functions that are connected to the same virtual concatenation link The information structure used to support path layer connections in the SDH. It consists of information payload and path Overhead (POH) information fields organized in a block frame structure which repeats every 125 or 500 s. A logical grouping of two or more nodes which are not necessarily on the same physical network segment but which share the same IP network number. This is often associated with switched Ethernet. The field in the Asynchronous Transfer Mode (ATM) cell header that identifies to which virtual path the cell belongs. A type of point-to-multipoint L2VPN service provided over the public network. VPLS enables geographically isolated user sites to communicate with each other through the MAN/WAN as if they are on the same LAN.
virtual local area network virtual path identifier virtual private LAN service
virtual private network A system configuration, where the subscriber is able to build a private network via connections to different network switches that may include private network capabilities. virtual route forward VRF performs the function of establishing multiple virtual routing devices on one actual routing device. That is, the L3 interfaces of the device are distributed to different VRFs, performing the function of establishing multiple virtual route forwarding instances on the device. A virtual user-network interface, works as an action point to perform service classification and traffic control in HQoS. See virtual local area network An IP telephony term for a set of facilities used to manage the delivery of voice information over the Internet. VoIP involves sending voice information in a digital form in discrete packets rather than by using the traditional circuit-committed protocols of the public switched telephone network (PSTN). See voice over IP See virtual path identifier See virtual private LAN service See virtual private network See virtual route forward
virtual user-network interface VLAN voice over IP
VoIP VPI VPLS VPN VRF
E-32
Issue 03 (2011-04-10)
E Glossary
W
wait to restore WAN Web LCT weighted fair queuing The number of minutes to wait before services are switched back to the working line. See wide area network The local maintenance terminal of a transport network, which is located on the NE management layer of the transport network A fair queue scheduling algorithm based on bandwidth allocation weights. This scheduling algorithm allocates the total bandwidth of an interface to queues, according to their weights and schedules the queues cyclically. In this manner, packets of all priority queues can be scheduled.
weighted random early A packet loss algorithm used for congestion avoidance. It can prevent the global TCP detection synchronization caused by traditional tail-drop. WRED is favorable for the high-priority packet when calculating the packet loss ratio. weighted round Robin N/A WFQ wide area network See weighted fair queuing A network composed of computers which are far away from each other which are physically connected through specific protocols. WAN covers a broad area, such as a province, a state or even a country. A tool for fiber routing, which acts as the corrugated pipe. See weighted random early detection See weighted round Robin See wait to restore
winding pipe WRED WRR WTR
X
XPIC See cross polarization interference cancellation
Issue 03 (2011-04-10)
E-33

RTN 980 Hardware Description PDF

Transféré par

Informations du document

Description originale:

Titre original

Copyright

Formats disponibles

Partager ce document

Partager ou intégrer le document

Options de partage

Avez-vous trouvé ce document utile ?

Ce contenu est-il inapproprié ?

Droits d'auteur :

Formats disponibles

RTN 980 Hardware Description PDF

Transféré par

Droits d'auteur :

Formats disponibles

OptiX RTN 980 Radio Transmission System V100R003C00

IDU Hardware Description

HUAWEI TECHNOLOGIES CO., LTD.

Trademarks and Permissions

Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

OptiX RTN 980 Radio Transmission System IDU Hardware Description

About This Document

About This Document

About This Document

OptiX RTN 980 Radio Transmission System IDU Hardware Description

OptiX RTN 980 Radio Transmission System IDU Hardware Description

About This Document

Convention [ x | y | ... ] { x | y | ... }*

Updates in Issue 03 (2011-04-10) Based on Product Version V100R003C00

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

About This Document

OptiX RTN 980 Radio Transmission System IDU Hardware Description

Updates in Issue 02 (2011-01-20) Based on Product Version V100R003C00

Updates in Issue 01 (2010-12-30) Based on Product Version V100R003C00

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

OptiX RTN 980 Radio Transmission System IDU Hardware Description

OptiX RTN 980 Radio Transmission System IDU Hardware Description

OptiX RTN 980 Radio Transmission System IDU Hardware Description

OptiX RTN 980 Radio Transmission System IDU Hardware Description

OptiX RTN 980 Radio Transmission System IDU Hardware Description

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

OptiX RTN 980 Radio Transmission System IDU Hardware Description

OptiX RTN 980 Radio Transmission System IDU Hardware Description

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

OptiX RTN 980 Radio Transmission System IDU Hardware Description

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

OptiX RTN 980 Radio Transmission System IDU Hardware Description

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

OptiX RTN 980 Radio Transmission System IDU Hardware Description

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

OptiX RTN 980 Radio Transmission System IDU Hardware Description

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

OptiX RTN 980 Radio Transmission System IDU Hardware Description

1.1 Network Application

OptiX RTN 900 Product Family

OptiX RTN 980

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

OptiX RTN 980 Radio Transmission System IDU Hardware Description

TDM Network (SDH)

STM-1/4 Packet Network (PTN) FE/GE ATM

Radio link OptiX RTN 980

Cable/fiber OptiX RTN 910/950 RNC BSC

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

OptiX RTN 980 Radio Transmission System IDU Hardware Description

Figure 1-2 Appearance of the IDU 980

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

OptiX RTN 980 Radio Transmission System IDU Hardware Description

Low Capacity for PDH ODU XMC-1 7/8/13/15/18/23 GHz

XMC-2 7/8/13/15/18/23/26/38 GHz

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

OptiX RTN 980 Radio Transmission System IDU Hardware Description

Microwave modulation mode Channel spacing

QPSK/16QAM/32QAM/ 64QAM/128QAM/256QAM 7/14/28/40/56 MHz

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

OptiX RTN 980 Radio Transmission System IDU Hardware Description

Figure 1-4 Separate mounting